REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL PROJECT: IDIQ FOR R&A
"RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION" CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA ISSUE DATE: APRIL 19, 2010 PROPOSAL DUE DATE MAY 11, 2010 AND TIME : 2:00 PM (PDT) SUBMIT TO : GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION LOS ANGELES SERVICE CENTER ATTN: HEATHER CANEY 300 NORTH LOS ANGELES ST., ROOM 4100 LOS ANGELES, CA 90012 TASK ORDER RFP NO.: 9P3PSLC101037
GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION
SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT COPYING, DISSEMINATION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THESE DRAWINGS, PLANS OR SPECIFICATIONS TO UNAUTHORIZED USERS IS PROHIBITED
Do not remove this notice - Properly destroy documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
TASK ORDER REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL TIER 2, ZONE 5 TASK ORDER NO.: 9P3PSLC101037 PROJECT TITLE: “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” LOCATION OF WORK: CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING 24000 AVILA ROAD, LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA 92677 SECURITY/WORK HOURS RESTRICTIONS: SEE VOLUME III ADDITIONAL REFERERENCES/CODES/STANDARDS: SEE VOLUME III
SITE VISIT DATE(S)/INSTRUCTIONS:
04/22/2010, 10 A.M. (PDT) SEE VOLUME II FOR DETAILS
DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF QUESTIONS:
04/27/2010, 2:00 P.M. (PDT)
DEADLINE FOR PROPOSAL SUBMISSION:
05/11/2010, 2:00 P.M. (PDT)
SOURCE SELECTION FACTORS: 1. Price 2. Non-Price Factors. If none checked, selection is by price only. If non-price factors are checked, non-price factors will be considered to be roughly equal in weight to price in evaluating the contractor's proposal. Proposals must contain material described in Volume I pertinent to each checked factor. Past Performance Specialized Experience Quality of Equipment and Materials Systems Schematic and Description. List equipment/systems: _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Other (Specify Non-Price Factor)
PAGE 0 - 1 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
ANTICIPATED WORK START DATE:
TBD
ANTICIPATED REQUIRED COMPLETION TIME:
90 days from NTP
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AMOUNT (PER DAY):
$755.33
RFP VOLUMES AND ATTACHMENTS: RFP VOLUMES VOLUME I: OFFER FORMS VOLUME II: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS VOLUME III : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - WRITTEN SPECS & DRAWINGS STANDARD FORM 24 - BID BOND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS: Installation Plan Commissioning Plan O&M Manuals As-Built Drawings DESCRIPTION/STATEMENT OF WORK/PERFORMANCE STANDARDS (REFERENCE ATTACHMENTS AS APPROPRIATE):
WARNING : DO NOT QUALIFY YOUR PROPOSAL ONE LUMP SUM OFFER IS REQUIRED ON “TASK ORDER OFFER FORM” (VOLUME I). A BID GUARANTEE IS REQUIRED WITH YOUR PROPOSAL. SEE REQUIREMENTS IN VOLUME I AND STANDARD FORM 24. ESTIMATED COST RANGE OF THIS PROJECT IS BETWEEN $500,000 AND $1,000,000.
ORDERING OFFICIAL: HEATHER CANEY, CONTRACTING OFFICER GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION LOS ANGELES SERVICE CENTER, CONSTRUCTION SERVICES BRANCH
PAGE 0 - 2 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
“PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT. Copying, dissemination, or distribution of these drawings, plans, or specifications to unauthorized persons is prohibited.” NOTE: Unauthorized persons are those who do not have a need to know of the contents of the document. Those with a need to know would include contractors, sub-contractors, suppliers, and others that the contractor deems necessary in order to submit and offer or bid, or to complete the work or contract.
NOTICE CONCERNING TASK ORDER REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
ATTENTION OFFEROR:
You are cautioned to carefully read the entire solicitation in order to be fully aware of all requirements, provisions and clauses. Fill-ins should be properly completed and verified. All copies should contain the same information. Verify calculations before signing your offer.
Bid Guarantee/Bid Bond Information on the bid guarantee can be found in Volume I - Offer Forms. Liquidated Damages Information on liquidated damages can be found in Volume II – Supplementary Conditions. Site Visit Information on site visits can be found in Volume II – Supplementary Conditions. Questions
The deadline for submission of questions regarding this solicitation is Tuesday, April 27, 2010, 2:00 PM (PDT). No questions will be accepted or answered after this time. Questions must be in written format and emailed to Heather Caney, Contracting Officer at
[email protected]. Offer Submission The following documents must be submitted with your offer: 1. Task Order Offer Form 2. Standard Form 24 – Bid Bond 3. Specialized Experience/Past Performance Reference Sheets (Minimum of 3 for each) Project References must meet the Similar Work definition stated in Volume I 4. Acknowledgement of Amendment(s), if any NOTE: Electronic Commerce IS a permitted method of submission, modification, revision, and withdrawal of proposals for this solicitation. Electronic submissions must be sent to Heather Caney,
PAGE 0 - 3 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
Contracting Officer, at
[email protected], followed up with submission of the original documents in sealed envelopes and/ or packages to: U.S. General Services Administration Los Angeles Service Center, Construction Services Branch Attn: Heather Caney 300 North Los Angeles St., Suite 4100 Los Angeles, CA 90012 Be sure to reference the RFP Number, Project Title, and Proposal Closing Date on the envelope containing your offer.
PAGE 0 - 4 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
VOLUME I OFFER FORMS
PAGE I - 0 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA 1.
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
FAR 52.228-1 BID GUARANTEE (SEP 1996) (a) Failure to furnish a bid guarantee in the proper form and amount, by the time set for opening of bids, may be cause for rejection of the bid. (b) The bidder shall furnish a bid guarantee in the form of a firm commitment, e.g., bid bond supported by good and sufficient surety or sureties acceptable to the Government, postal money order, certified check, cashier's check, irrevocable letter of credit, or, under Treasury Department regulations, certain bonds or notes of the United States. The Contracting Officer will return bid guarantees, other than bid bonds, (1) to unsuccessful bidders as soon as practicable after the opening of bids, and (2) to the successful bidder upon execution of contractual documents and bonds (including any necessary coinsurance or reinsurance agreements), as required by the bid as accepted. (c) The amount of the bid guarantee shall be twenty percent of the bid price or $3 Million, whichever is less. (d) If the successful bidder, upon acceptance of its bid by the Government within the period specified for acceptance, fails to execute all contractual documents or give a bond(s) within ten days after receipt of the forms by the bidder, the Contracting Officer may terminate the contract for default. (e) In the event the contract is terminated for default, the bidder is liable for any cost of acquiring the work that exceeds the amount of its bid, and the bid guarantee is available to offset the difference.
2.
FAR 52.204-8 ANNUAL REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS (FEB 2009) (a) (1) The North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) code for this acquisition is 236220. (2) The small business size standard is $33.5 million. (3) The small business size standard for a concern which submits an offer in its own name, other than on a construction or service contract, but which proposes to furnish a product which it did not itself manufacture, is 500 employees. (b)(1) If the clause at 52.204-7, Central Contractor Registration, is included in this solicitation, paragraph (d) of this provision applies. (2) If the clause at 52.204-7 is not included in this solicitation, and the offeror is currently registered in CCR, and has completed the ORCA electronically, the offeror may choose to use paragraph (d) of this provision instead of completing the corresponding individual representations and certifications in the solicitation. The offeror shall indicate which option applies by checking one of the following boxes: [ ] (i) Paragraph (d) applies. [ ] (ii) Paragraph (d) does not apply and the offeror has completed the individual representations and certifications in the solicitation. (c) Not used. (d) The offeror has completed the annual representations and certifications electronically via the Online Representations and Certifications Application (ORCA) website at http://orca.bpn.gov. After reviewing the ORCA database information, the offeror verifies by submission of the offer that the representations and certifications currently posted electronically that apply to this solicitation as indicated in paragraph (c) of this provision have been entered or updated within the last 12 months, are current, accurate, complete, and applicable to this solicitation (including the business size standard applicable to the NAICS code referenced for this solicitation), as of the date of this offer and are incorporated in this offer by reference (see FAR 4.1201); except for the changes identified below [offeror to insert changes, identifying change by PAGE I - 1 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
clause number, title, date]. These amended representation(s) and/or certification(s) are also incorporated in this offer and are current, accurate, and complete as of the date of this offer. FAR CLAUSE #
TITLE
DATE
CHANGE
____________
_________
_____
______
____________
_________
_____
______
____________
_________
_____
______
_ _ _ Any changes provided by the offeror are applicable to this solicitation only, and do not result in an update to the representations and certifications posted on ORCA. (End of provision) 3.
METHOD FOR AWARD The Government will make award to the responsive, responsible Offeror that conforms to all the submission requirements and is considered to be most advantageous to the Government, price and other factors considered. For purposes of the evaluation, price is roughly equal in weight and importance to the weight of the technical factor. As technical proposals become more equal in their technical merit, price becomes more important. Technical factors that Offerors will be evaluated on are: 1) Specialized Experience 2) Past Performance. In the case of an Offeror without a record of past performance, or for whom information on past performance is not available, that Offeror will be given neither a favorable nor an unfavorable evaluation regarding past performance.
4.
EVALUATION FACTORS A.
PRICE EVALUATION
(1) Price Evaluation consists of (1) the base bid (consisting of the lump sum bid and any associated unit price bids extended by the applicable number of units shown on the offer form) plus (2) all alternates designated to be evaluated. The evaluation of alternates will not obligate the Government to accept the alternates. (2) An offer may be rejected as nonresponsive if the offer is materially unbalanced as to offer prices. An offer is unbalanced when the offer is based on prices significantly less than cost for some work and significantly overstated for other work.
PAGE I - 2 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA B.
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
TECHNICAL EVALUATION
For purposes of the technical evaluation, the Government will only evaluate projects that meet the Similar Work definition. Similar Work is defined as: a repair & alteration project with a minimum dollar value of $750,000; completed within the last 5 years; and involving new construction, improvements and/or expansion of commercial buildings. (1)
SPECIALIZED EXPERIENCE
This factor considers the extent of the Offeror’s experience within the last 5 years on contracts of Similar Work. Experience will be evaluated by analysis of information provided by the offeror and by interviews with the Offeror's past and/or current customers. The standard is met when Offerors submit a minimum of three contracts for Similar Work, completed within the last 5 years. (2)
PAST PERFORMANCE
This factor considers the Offeror’s past performance, within the last 5 years, in performing contracts for Similar Work. This past performance evaluation may include an evaluation of the Offeror's quality of workmanship, timeliness of delivery, responsiveness of management and cooperation with customer, adherence to contract requirements, and overall quality of Offeror’s performance and customer satisfaction. Evaluation of past performance is a subjective assessment based on consideration of all relevant facts and circumstances. It will not be based on absolute standards of acceptable performance. The standard is met when an Offeror’s references indicate that the Offer’s past performance was good. Additionally, the Contracting Officer may identify and analyze the past performance of the Offeror on any other contract that they currently have or have completed. In the case of an Offeror without a record of past performance, or for whom information on past performance is not available, that Offeror will be given neither a favorable nor an unfavorable evaluation regarding past performance. While Offerors must provide a minimum of 3 references for the past performance evaluations, they may provide more. However, the Government is not required to conduct or complete past performance evaluations on more than 3 contracts, although it may choose to do so. Additionally, if more than 3 references are provided, the Government reserves the right to choose which references to include in its past performance evaluation.
5.
SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS Each Offeror must provide a minimum of three (3) customer references for both technical evaluation factors. It is the Offeror’s responsibility to provide sufficient information regarding their reference projects for the Government to determine if a project meets the Similar Work definition as stated in the Evaluation Factor section above. Offerors are cautioned to verify the accuracy of the contact information for references for the past performance evaluation. If GSA is unable to contact a submitted Past Performance reference, then that Offeror will be given neither a favorable nor unfavorable evaluation for that reference. References shall only pertain to the Offeror entity itself, not prospective subcontractors. In addition to those references provided directly by the Offeror, the Government may identify and analyze such relevant past performance or experience of the Offeror on any other contract that the Offeror currently PAGE I - 3 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
has or had of which the Government has knowledge or obtains knowledge of, including but not limited to projects listed in the Past Performance Retrieval System (PPIRS).
6.
FAR 52.215-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS-COMPETITIVE ACQUISITION (JAN 2004) (a) Definitions. As used in this provision"Discussions" are negotiations that occur after establishment of the competitive range that may, at the Contracting Officer's discretion, result in the offeror being allowed to revise its proposal. "In writing," "writing," or "written" means any worded or numbered expression that can be read, reproduced, and later communicated, and includes electronically transmitted and stored information. "Proposal modification" is a change made to a proposal before the solicitation's closing date and time, or made in response to an amendment, or made to correct a mistake at any time before award. "Proposal revision" is a change to a proposal made after the solicitation closing date, at the request of or as allowed by a Contracting Officer as the result of negotiations. "Time," if stated as a number of days, is calculated using calendar days, unless otherwise specified, and will include Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays. However, if the last day falls on a Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday, then the period shall include the next working day. (b) Amendments to solicitations. If this solicitation is amended, all terms and conditions that are not amended remain unchanged. Offerors shall acknowledge receipt of any amendment to this solicitation by the date and time specified in the amendment(s). (c) Submission, modification, revision, and withdrawal of proposals. (1) Unless other methods (e.g., electronic commerce or facsimile) are permitted in the solicitation, proposals and modifications to proposals shall be submitted in paper media in sealed envelopes or packages (i) addressed to the office specified in the solicitation, and (ii) showing the time and date specified for receipt, the solicitation number, and the name and address of the offeror. Offerors using commercial carriers should ensure that the proposal is marked on the outermost wrapper with the information in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (c)(1)(ii) of this provision. (2) The first page of the proposal must show(i) The solicitation number; (ii) The name, address, and telephone and facsimile numbers of the offeror (and electronic address if available); (iii) A statement specifying the extent of agreement with all terms, conditions, and provisions included in the solicitation and agreement to furnish any or all items upon which prices are offered at the price set opposite each item; (iv) Names, titles, and telephone and facsimile numbers (and electronic addresses if available) of persons authorized to negotiate on the offeror's behalf with the Government in connection with this solicitation; and (v) Name, title, and signature of person authorized to sign the proposal. Proposals signed by an agent shall be accompanied by evidence of that agent's authority, unless that evidence has been previously furnished to the issuing office. (3) Submission, modification, revision, and withdrawal of proposals. (i) Offerors are responsible for submitting proposals, and any modifications or revisions, so as to reach the Government office designated in the solicitation by the time specified in the solicitation. If no time is specified in the solicitation, the time for receipt is 4:30 PAGE I - 4 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
p.m., local time, for the designated Government office on the date that proposal or revision is due. (ii)(A) Any proposal, modification, or revision received at the Government office designated in the solicitation after the exact time specified for receipt of offers is "late" and will not be considered unless it is received before award is made, the Contracting Officer determines that accepting the late offer would not unduly delay the acquisition; and(1) If it was transmitted through an electronic commerce method authorized by the solicitation, it was received at the initial point of entry to the Government infrastructure not later than 5:00 p.m. one working day prior to the date specified for receipt of proposals; or (2) There is acceptable evidence to establish that it was received at the Government installation designated for receipt of offers and was under the Government's control prior to the time set for receipt of offers; or (3) It is the only proposal received. (B) However, a late modification of an otherwise successful proposal that makes its terms more favorable to the Government will be considered at any time it is received and may be accepted. (iii) Acceptable evidence to establish the time of receipt at the Government installation includes the time/date stamp of that installation on the proposal wrapper, other documentary evidence of receipt maintained by the installation, or oral testimony or statements of Government personnel. (iv) If an emergency or unanticipated event interrupts normal Government processes so that proposals cannot be received at the office designated for receipt of proposals by the exact time specified in the solicitation, and urgent Government requirements preclude amendment of the solicitation, the time specified for receipt of proposals will be deemed to be extended to the same time of day specified in the solicitation on the first work day on which normal Government processes resume. (v) Proposals may be withdrawn by written notice received at any time before award. Oral proposals in response to oral solicitations may be withdrawn orally. If the solicitation authorizes facsimile proposals, proposals may be withdrawn via facsimile received at any time before award, subject to the conditions specified in the provision at 52.215-5, Facsimile Proposals. Proposals may be withdrawn in person by an offeror or an authorized representative, if the identity of the person requesting withdrawal is established and the person signs a receipt for the proposal before award. (4) Unless otherwise specified in the solicitation, the offeror may propose to provide any item or combination of items. (5) Offerors shall submit proposals in response to this solicitation in English, unless otherwise permitted by the solicitation, and in U.S. dollars, unless the provision at FAR 52.225-17, Evaluation of Foreign Currency Offers, is included in the solicitation. (6) Offerors may submit modifications to their proposals at any time before the solicitation closing date and time, and may submit modifications in response to an amendment, or to correct a mistake at any time before award. (7) Offerors may submit revised proposals only if requested or allowed by the Contracting Officer. (8) Proposals may be withdrawn at any time before award. Withdrawals are effective upon receipt of notice by the Contracting Officer. (d) Offer expiration date. Proposals in response to this solicitation will be valid for the number of days specified on the solicitation cover sheet (unless a different period is proposed by the offeror). PAGE I - 5 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
(e) Restriction on disclosure and use of data. Offerors that include in their proposals data that they do not want disclosed to the public for any purpose, or used by the Government except for evaluation purposes, shall(1) Mark the title page with the following legend: This proposal includes data that shall not be disclosed outside the Government and shall not be duplicated, used, or disclosed-in whole or in part-for any purpose other than to evaluate this proposal. If, however, a contract is awarded to this offeror as a result of-or in connection with-the submission of this data, the Government shall have the right to duplicate, use, or disclose the data to the extent provided in the resulting contract. This restriction does not limit the Government's right to use information contained in this data if it is obtained from another source without restriction. The data subject to this restriction are contained in sheets [insert numbers or other identification of sheets]; and (2) Mark each sheet of data it wishes to restrict with the following legend: Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this proposal. (f) Contract award. (1) The Government intends to award a contract or contracts resulting from this solicitation to the responsible offeror(s) whose proposal(s) represents the best value after evaluation in accordance with the factors and sub-factors in the solicitation. (2) The Government may reject any or all proposals if such action is in the Government's interest. (3) The Government may waive informalities and minor irregularities in proposals received. (4) The Government intends to evaluate proposals and award a contract without discussions with offerors (except clarifications as described in FAR 15.306(a)). Therefore, the offeror's initial proposal should contain the offeror's best terms from a cost or price and technical standpoint. The Government reserves the right to conduct discussions if the Contracting Officer later determines them to be necessary. If the Contracting Officer determines that the number of proposals that would otherwise be in the competitive range exceeds the number at which an efficient competition can be conducted, the Contracting Officer may limit the number of proposals in the competitive range to the greatest number that will permit an efficient competition among the most highly rated proposals. (5) The Government reserves the right to make an award on any item for a quantity less than the quantity offered, at the unit cost or prices offered, unless the offeror specifies otherwise in the proposal. (6) The Government reserves the right to make multiple awards if, after considering the additional administrative costs, it is in the Government's best interest to do so. (7) Exchanges with offerors after receipt of a proposal do not constitute a rejection or counteroffer by the Government. (8) The Government may determine that a proposal is unacceptable if the prices proposed are materially unbalanced between line items or sub-line items. Unbalanced pricing exists when, despite an acceptable total evaluated price, the price of one or more contract line items is significantly overstated or understated as indicated by the application of cost or price analysis techniques. A proposal may be rejected if the Contracting Officer determines that the lack of balance poses an unacceptable risk to the Government. (9) If a cost realism analysis is performed, cost realism may be considered by the source selection authority in evaluating performance or schedule risk. (10) A written award or acceptance of proposal mailed or otherwise furnished to the successful offeror within the time specified in the proposal shall result in a binding contract without further action by either party. PAGE I - 6 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
(11) If a post-award debriefing is given to requesting offerors, the Government shall disclose the following information, if applicable: (i) The agency's evaluation of the significant weak or deficient factors in the debriefed offeror's offer. (ii) The overall evaluated cost or price and technical rating of the successful and the debriefed offeror and past performance information on the debriefed offeror. (iii) The overall ranking of all offerors, when any ranking was developed by the agency during source selection. (iv) A summary of the rationale for award. (v) For acquisitions of commercial items, the make and model of the item to be delivered by the successful offeror. (vi) Reasonable responses to relevant questions posed by the debriefed offeror as to whether source-selection procedures set forth in the solicitation, applicable regulations, and other applicable authorities were followed by the agency. (End of provision)
PAGE I - 7 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
SPECIALIZED EXPERIENCE / PAST PERFORMANCE REFERENCE Note: The offeror shall complete this form in its entirety and submit as part of their proposal. Make additional copies as necessary and complete one form for each reference. See "Similar Work" Definition on Page I-3. ALL INFORMATION REQUESTED ON THE FORM MUST BE COMPLETED. 1. OFFEROR (COMPANY NAME)
3. PROJECT STATUS AND TYPE
4. PROJECT NAME AND LOCATION (CITY, STATE)
CURRENT
GOVERNMENT
PREVIOUS
NON-GOVERNMENT
REFERENCE TYPE (PAST PERFORMANCE, SPECIALIZED EXPERIENCE, OR BOTH COMBINED) 5A. REFERENCE CONTACT PERSON/PROJECT MANAGER
5B. REFERENCE CONTACT PHONE NUMBER
5C. REFERENCE CONTACT FAX NUMBER
5D. REFERENCE CONTACT E-MAIL ADDRESS
6. CONTRACT NUMBER (IF FEDERAL GOVERNMENT CONTRACT)
7. VALUE OF CONTRACT
$ 8. TYPE OF FACILITY (office, hospital, manufacturing, school, etc.)
10A. IS SERVICE COMPLETE?
YES
10B. START DATE
7B. PERCENTAGE OF WORK PERFORMED BY OFFEROR
9. SIZE OF PROJECT (SQUARE FOOTAGE)
10C. COMPLETION DATE
10D. NUMBER OF DAYS
NO
21 DESCRIPTION OF WORK, PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TAKEN
PAGE I - 8 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
TASK ORDER OFFER FORM TIER 2, ZONE 5
TASK ORDER NO.: 9P3PSLC101037
PROJECT TITLE: “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” 1. ISSUED BY
2. ADDRESS OFFER TO
General Services Administration Los Angeles Service Center, Const. Services Branch 300 N. Los Angeles Street, Suite 4100 Los Angeles, CA 90012
General Services Administration Los Angeles Service Center, Const. Services Branch Attn: Heather Caney 300 N. Los Angeles Street, Suite 4100 Los Angeles, CA 90012
3. OFFEROR (Company Name)
4. OFFEROR PHONE NUMBER
5. OFFEROR FAX NUMBER
6. OFFEROR DUNS NUMBER
7. OFFEROR TAX ID NUMBER
PRICES ARE REQUIRED BELOW FOR ALL ITEMS OF WORK INDICATED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND AMENDMENT(S) (IF APPLICABLE). 0001
LUMP SUM BID
$___________________________
Write in Price for Lump Sum Bid work:
8. The offeror agrees to perform the work required at the prices specified above in strict accordance with the terms of this task order request for proposal, if this offer is accepted by the Government in writing within ________ calendar days after the date offers are due. (Insert any number equal to or greater than the minimum requirement stated below. Failure to insert any number means the offeror accepts the minimum stated below.)
9. A. Sealed offers in original and 1 copies to perform the work required are due at the place specified in Item 2 by 02:00PM local time TUESDAY, MAY 11, 2010. Sealed envelopes containing offers shall be marked to show the offeror’s name and address, the RFP number, and the date and time offers are due. B. An offer guarantee
is,
is not required.
C. All offers are subject to the (1) work requirements, and (2) other provisions and clauses incorporated in the solicitation in full text or by reference.
D. Offers providing less than 60 calendar days for Government acceptance after the date offers are due will not be considered and will be rejected. 10. NAME AND TITLE OF CONTRACTOR OR PERSON AUTHORIZED TO SIGN OFFER (Type or print)
11. SIGNATURE
12. DATE
PAGE I - 9 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
VOLUME II SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PAGE II - 0 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA 1.
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
GENERAL CONDITIONS Whenever the term “General Conditions” is used in the specification, it refers to the original IDIQ contract section entitled “Construction Contract Clauses (Fixed Price).”
2.
FAR 52.211-12 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - CONSTRUCTION (Apr 1984) (a) If the contractor fails to complete the work within the time specified in the contract, or any extension, the Contractor shall pay to the Government as liquidated damages, the sum of $755.33 for each day of delay. (b) If the Government terminates the Contractor's right to proceed, the resulting damage will consist of liquidated damages until such reasonable time as may be required for final completion of the work together with any increased costs occasioned the Government in completing the work. (c) If the Government does not terminate the Contractor's right to proceed, the resulting damage will consist of liquidated damages until the work is completed or accepted.
3.
FAR 52.236-27 SITE VISIT (CONSTRUCTION) (Feb 1995) (a) The clauses at 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions, and 52.236-3, Site Investigations and Conditions Affecting the Work, will be included in any contract awarded as a result of this solicitation. Accordingly, offerors or quoters are urged and expected to inspect the site where the work will be performed. (b) The organized site visit has been scheduled for— Thursday, April 22, 2010 10:00 - 11:30 A.M. This will be the only site visit scheduled for this project. Please make sure a representative from your firm is in attendance if you are interested in submitting a proposal in response to this solicitation. (c) Participants will meet at— Meet Project Manager, Rebecca Martinez, in the lobby area outside of the GSA Laguna Niguel Field Office, Suite 4100, Chet Holifield Federal Building promptly at 10:00 am Chet Holifield Federal Building 24000 Avila Road, Suite 4100 Laguna Niguel, CA 92677 (d) Please contact the Project Manager, Rebecca Martinez if more information is needed regarding the organized site visit. Ms. Martinez can be reached at (213) 894-0315 (office) or (213) 219-0793 (cell). (End of provision)
PAGE II - 1 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA 4.
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
FAR 52.211-13 TIME EXTENSIONS (Apr 1984) Notwithstanding any other provisions of this contract, it is mutually understood that the time extensions for changes in the work will depend upon the extent, if any, by which the changes cause delay in the completion of the various elements of construction. The change order granting the time extension may provide that the contract completion date will be extended only for those specific elements so delayed and that the remaining contract completion dates for all other portions of the work will not be altered and may further provide for an equitable readjustment of liquidated damages under the new completion schedule.
5.
FAR 52.211-10 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION AND COMPLETION OF WORK (APR 1984) The Contractor shall be required to:
6.
(a)
Commence work under this contract as stated in the task/delivery order after the Contractor receives the Notice to Proceed. (The phrases "commence work" may, but need not, involve on-site activity by construction tradesmen. Diligent ordering/delivery of materials and equipment, preparation and submission of documents to the government for approval are also included.)
(b)
Prosecute the work diligently, and
(c)
Complete the entire work ready for use not later than 90 calendar days after receipt of Notice To Proceed. The time stated for completion shall include final cleanup of the premises.
Note: The contractor shall furnish the required performance and payment bonds within 10 calendar days after award. FAR 52.228-15 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS-CONSTRUCTION (NOV 2006) (a) Definitions. As used in this clause— “Original contract price” means the award price of the contract; or, for requirements contracts, the price payable for the estimated total quantity; or, for indefinite-quantity contracts, the price payable for the specified minimum quantity. Original contract price does not include the price of any options, except those options exercised at the time of contract award. (b) Amount of required bonds. Unless the resulting contract price is $100,000 or less, the successful offeror shall furnish performance and payment bonds to the Contracting Officer as follows: (1) Performance bonds (Standard Form 25). The penal amount of performance bonds at the time of contract award shall be 100 percent of the original contract price. (2) Payment Bonds (Standard Form 25A). The penal amount of payment bonds at the time of contract award shall be 100 percent of the original contract price. (3) Additional bond protection. (i) The Government may require additional performance and payment bond protection if the contract price is increased. The increase in protection generally will equal 100 percent of the increase in contract price. (ii) The Government may secure the additional protection by directing the Contractor to increase the penal amount of the existing bond or to obtain an additional bond. PAGE II - 2 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
(c) Furnishing executed bonds. The Contractor shall furnish all executed bonds, including any necessary reinsurance agreements, to the Contracting Officer, within the time period specified in the Bid Guarantee provision of the solicitation, or otherwise specified by the Contracting Officer, but in any event, before starting work. (d) Surety or other security for bonds. The bonds shall be in the form of firm commitment, supported by corporate sureties whose names appear on the list contained in Treasury Department Circular 570, individual sureties, or by other acceptable security such as postal money order, certified check, cashier's check, irrevocable letter of credit, or, in accordance with Treasury Department regulations, certain bonds or notes of the United States. Treasury Circular 570 is published in the Federal Register or may be obtained from the: U.S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service Surety Bond Branch 3700 East West Highway, Room 6F01 Hyattsville, MD 20782. Or via the internet at http://www.fms.treas.gov/c570/. (e) Notice of subcontractor waiver of protection (40 U.S.C. 3133(c)). Any waiver of the right to sue on the payment bond is void unless it is in writing, signed by the person whose right is waived, and executed after such person has first furnished labor or material for use in the performance of the contract. (End of clause) 7.
F AR 52.204-9 PERSONAL IDENTITY VERIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL (Sept 2007) (a) The Contractor shall comply with agency personal identity verification procedures identified in the contract that implement Homeland Security Presidential Directive-12 (HSPD-12), Office of Management and Budget (OMB) guidance M-05-24 and Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPS PUB) Number 201. (b) The Contractor shall insert this clause in all subcontracts when the subcontractor is required to have routine physical access to a Federally-controlled facility and/or routine access to a Federally-controlled information system. (End of clause)
PAGE II - 3 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA 8.
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE The contractor must refer to the clauses FAR 52.228-5 INSURANCE – WORK ON A GOVERNMENT INSTALLATION (Jan 1997) and GSAR 552.228-70 WORKERS COMPENSATION LAWS (Sep 1999), which can be found in the Construction Contract Clauses, located in the Master IDIQ contract. The coverage specified below, pursuant to Subpart 28.307-2 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation, are the minimums required: (1) Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Contractors are required to comply with applicable Federal and State Workers' compensation and occupational disease statutes. If occupational diseases are not compensable under those statutes, they shall be covered under the employer's liability section of the insurance policy, except when contract operations are so commingled with a contractor's commercial operations that it would not be practical to require this coverage. Employer's liability coverage of at least $100,000, shall be required, except in States with exclusive or monopolistic funds that do not permit workers' compensation to be written by private carriers (2) General Liability Bodily injury liability insurance coverage written on the comprehensive form of policy of at least $500,000 per occurrence (3) Property Damage $50,000 per occurrence (4) Automobile Liability The contractor shall provide automobile liability insurance written on the comprehensive form of the policy. The policy shall provide for bodily injury and property damage liability covering the operation of all automobiles used in connection with performing the contract. Policies covering automobiles operated in the United States shall provide coverage of at least $200,000 per person and $500,000 per occurrence for bodily injury and $20,000 per occurrence for property damage. The amount of liability coverage on other policies shall be commensurate with any legal requirements of the locality and sufficient to meet normal and customary claims. NOTE: THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH APPLIES ONLY IF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ARE TO BE REMOVED, TRANSPORTED OR DISPOSED OF
(5) Hazardous Material Liability Any subcontractor (or contractor) performing asbestos work, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) work, or other hazardous materials work, shall provide bodily injury liability insurance policy of at least $1,000,000 per occurrence covering the work to be performed. If an occurrence policy is unavailable, contractor shall provide proof of a current claims made policy also covering this same work, with an extended endorsement period of not less than 10 years. The Government will not indemnify against such risks. Furthermore, the subcontractor (or contractor) will advise GSA in writing where this coverage and any related endorsements can be found in the policy.
PAGE II - 4 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
INSTRUCTIONS FOR SUBMITTING CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE (a) Following award of the contract and as a condition of the issuance of notice to proceed, the contractor must furnish a Certificate of Insurance executed by the insurance provider. The contractor is to convey the enclosed Certificate of Insurance to the insurance provider for execution. A Certificate of Insurance may be submitted in any format provided that the certificate addresses all of the items indicated on the enclosed certificate, subject to the specific insurance requirements stated in the contract documents. (b) The insurance coverage obtained must satisfy the requirements of the contract in terms of: (1) Types of insurance (2) Minimum coverage amounts (3) Any required endorsements (c) Particular requirements include: (1) The policy or policies of insurance must stipulate that the Government is to be notified 30 days prior to any cancellation of the policy or any material change adversely affecting the Government's interest. (See FAR 52.228-5--INSURANCE--WORKS ON A GOVERNMENT INSTALLATION). (2) For contracts involving the abatement of asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's), and/or other hazardous materials, or contracts which are likely to involve the handling of such materials: If the contract insurance requirements stipulate, coverage for liabilities for bodily injury arising out of such work under this contract must be provided with limits no less than those specified for general liability insurance. Coverage for property damage associated with the hazardous materials will be required if it is specified in the contract documents.
PAGE II - 5 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE: PRODUCER: INSURED: IDIQ CONTRACT/ DELIVERY ORDER NUMBER: TYPE OF INSURANCE General Liability
Hazardous Mat. Liab. (if req.-see specs)
Automobile Liability
Excess Liability Workmen’s Comp. & Employer’s Liability
POLICY NO.
POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE
LIABILITY LIMITS (000’s) Each Aggregate Occurrence
POLICY EXPIRATION DATE Bod. Inj. Prop. Dam. BI/PD Comb. Pers. Inj. Bod. Inj. Prop. Dam. Bod. Inj. Bod. Inj. Prop. Dam. BI/PD Comb. BI/PD Comb.
Per Person Per Accident
Statutory Ea. Accident Disease-PL Disease-Ea. Employee
Other Coverage (if required) ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS: Any cancellation or any material change adversely affecting the Government’s interest shall not be effective: (1) For such period as the laws of the State in which this contract is to be performed prescribe, or (2) Until 30 days after the insurer or the Contractor gives written notice to the Contracting Officer, whichever period is longer. CERTIFICATE HOLDER: General Services Administration Los Angeles Service Center, Construction Services Branch 300 North Los Angeles St. Room: 4100 Los Angeles, CA 90012 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE: SIGNATURE: DATE:
PAGE II - 6 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA 9.
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
FAR 52.223-1 BIOBASED PRODUCT CERTIFICATION (DEC 2007) As required by the Farm Security and Rural Investment Act of 2002 and the Energy Policy Act of 2005 (7 U.S.C. 8102(c)(3)), the offeror certifies, by signing this offer, that biobased products (within categories of products listed by the United States Department of Agriculture in 7 CFR part 2902, subpart B) to be used or delivered in the performance of the contract, other than biobased products that are not purchased by the offeror as a direct result of this contract, will comply with the applicable specifications or other contractual requirements. (End of provision)
10.
FAR 52.223-2 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT OF BIOBASED PRODUCTS UNDER SERVICE AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DEC 2007) (a) In the performance of this contract, the contractor shall make maximum use of biobased products that are United States Department of Agriculture (USDA)-designated items unless— (1) The product cannot be acquired— (i) Competitively within a time frame providing for compliance with the contract performance schedule; (ii) Meeting contract performance requirements; or (iii) At a reasonable price. (2) The product is to be used in an application covered by a USDA categorical exemption (see 7 CFR 2902.10 et seq.). For example, some USDA-designated items such as mobile equipment hydraulic fluids, diesel fuel additives, and penetrating lubricants are excluded from the preferred procurement requirement for the application of the USDA-designated item to one or both of the following: (i) Spacecraft system and launch support equipment. (ii) Military equipment, i.e., a product or system designed or procured for combat or combat-related missions. (b) Information about this requirement and these products is available at http://www.usda.gov/biopreferred. (End of clause)
11.
FAR 52.223-4 RECOVERED MATERATIAL CERTIFICATION (MAY 2008) As required by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (42 U.S.C. 6962(c)(3)(A)(i)), the offeror certifies, by signing this offer, that the percentage of recovered materials content for EPAdesignated items to be delivered or used in the performance of the contract will be at least the amount required by the applicable contract specifications or other contractual requirements. (End of Provision)
12.
FAR 52.223-9 ESTIMATE OF PERCENTAGE OF RECOVERED MATERIAL CONTENT FOR EPA-DESIGNATED ITEMS (MAY 2008) (a) Definitions. As used in this clause— “Postconsumer material” means a material or finished product that has served its intended use and has been discarded for disposal or recovery, having completed its life as a consumer item. Postconsumer material is a part of the broader category of “recovered material.” “Recovered material” means waste materials and by-products recovered or diverted from solid waste, but the term does not include those materials and by-products generated from, and commonly reused within, an original manufacturing process. PAGE II - 7 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
(b) The Contractor, on completion of this contract, shall— (1) Estimate the percentage of the total recovered material content for EPA-designated item(s) delivered and/or used in contract performance, including, if applicable, the percentage of postconsumer material content; and (2) Submit this estimate to ___________ [Contracting Officer complete in accordance with agency procedures]. (End of clause) 13.
FAR 52.223-17 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT OF EPA-DESIGNATED ITEMS IN SERVICE AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (MAY 2008) (a) In the performance of this contract, the Contractor shall make maximum use of products containing recovered materials that are EPA-designated items unless the product cannot be acquired— (1) Competitively within a timeframe providing for compliance with the contract performance schedule; (2) Meeting contract performance requirements; or (3) At a reasonable price. (b) Information about this requirement is available at EPA’s Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines web site, http://www.epa.gov/cpg/ . The list of EPA-designate items is available at http://www.epa.gov/cpg/products.htm . (End of clause)
14.
FAR 52.222-54 EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY VERIFICATION (JAN 2009) (a) Definitions. As used in this clause— “Commercially available off-the-shelf (COTS) item”— (1) Means any item of supply that is— (i) A commercial item (as defined in paragraph (1) of the definition at 2.101); (ii) Sold in substantial quantities in the commercial marketplace; and (iii) Offered to the Government, without modification, in the same form in which it is sold in the commercial marketplace; and (2) Does not include bulk cargo, as defined in section 3 of the Shipping Act of 1984 (46 U.S.C. App. 1702), such as agricultural products and petroleum products. Per 46 CFR 525.1(c)(2), “bulk cargo” means cargo that is loaded and carried in bulk onboard ship without mark or count, in a loose unpackaged form, having homogenous characteristics. Bulk cargo loaded into intermodal equipment, except LASH or Seabee barges, is subject to mark and count and, therefore, ceases to be bulk cargo. “Employee assigned to the contract” means an employee who was hired after November 6, 1986, who is directly performing work, in the United States, under a contract that is required to include the clause prescribed at 22.1803. An employee is not considered to be directly performing work under a contract if the employee— (1) Normally performs support work, such as indirect or overhead functions; and (2) Does not perform any substantial duties applicable to the contract. “Subcontract” means any contract, as defined in 2.101, entered into by a subcontractor to furnish supplies or services for performance of a prime contract or a subcontract. It includes but is not limited to purchase orders, and changes and modifications to purchase orders. “Subcontractor” means any supplier, distributor, vendor, or firm that furnishes supplies or services to or for a prime Contractor or another subcontractor.
PAGE II - 8 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
“United States,” as defined in 8 U.S.C. 1101(a)(38), means the 50 States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, Guam, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. (b) Enrollment and verification requirements. (1) If the Contractor is not enrolled as a Federal Contractor in E-Verify at time of contract award, the Contractor shall— (i) Enroll. Enroll as a Federal Contractor in the E-Verify program within 30 calendar days of contract award; (ii) Verify all new employees. Within 90 calendar days of enrollment in the E-Verify program, begin to use E-Verify to initiate verification of employment eligibility of all new hires of the Contractor, who are working in the United States, whether or not assigned to the contract, within 3 business days after the date of hire (but see paragraph (b)(3) of this section); and (iii) Verify employees assigned to the contract. For each employee assigned to the contract, initiate verification within 90 calendar days after date of enrollment or within 30 calendar days of the employee’s assignment to the contract, whichever date is later (but see paragraph (b)(4) of this section). (2) If the Contractor is enrolled as a Federal Contractor in E-Verify at time of contract award, the Contractor shall use E-Verify to initiate verification of employment eligibility of— (i) All new employees. (A) Enrolled 90 calendar days or more. The Contractor shall initiate verification of all new hires of the Contractor, who are working in the United States, whether or not assigned to the contract within 3 business days after the date of hire (but see paragraph (b)(3) of this section); or (B) Enrolled less than 90 calendar days. Within 90 calendar days after enrollment as a Federal Contractor in E-Verify, the Contractor shall initiate verification of all new hires of the Contractor, who are working in the United States, whether or not assigned to the contract, within 3 business days after the date of hire (but see paragraph (b)(3) of this section ); or (ii) Employees assigned to the contract. For each employee assigned to the contract, the Contractor shall initiate verification within 90 calendar days after date of contract award or within 30 days after assignment to the contract, whichever date is later (but see paragraph (b)(4) of this section). (3) If the Contractor is an institution of higher education (as defined at 20 U.S.C. 1001(a)); a State or local government or the government of a Federally recognized Indian tribe; or a surety performing under a takeover agreement entered into with a Federal agency pursuant to a performance bond, the Contractor may choose to verify only employees assigned to the contract, whether existing employees or new hires. The Contractor shall follow the applicable verification requirements at (b)(1) or (b)(2), respectively, except that any requirement for verification of new employees applies only t new employees assigned to the contract. (4) Option to verify employment eligibility of all employees. The Contractor may elect to verify all existing employees hired after November 6, 1986, rather than just those employees assigned to the contract. The Contractor shall initiate verification for each existing employee working in the United States who was hired after November 6, 1986, within 180 calendar days of— (i) Enrollment in the E-Verify program; or (ii) Notification to E-Verify Operations of the Contractor’s decision to exercise this option, using the contact information provided in the E-Verify program Memorandum of Understanding (MOU). (5) The Contractor shall comply, for the period of performance of this contract, with the requirement of the E-Verify program MOU. PAGE II - 9 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
(i) The Department of Homeland Security (DHS) or the Social Security Administration (SSA) may terminate the Contractor’s MOU and deny access to the E-Verify system in accordance with the terms of the MOU. In such case, the Contractor will be referred to a suspension or debarment official. (ii) During the period between termination of the MOU and a decision by the suspension or debarment official whether to suspend or debar, the Contractor is excused from its obligations under paragraph (b) of this clause. If the suspension or debarment official determines not to suspend or debar the Contractor, then the Contractor must reenroll in E-Verify. (c) Web site. Information on registration for and use of the E-Verify program can be obtained via the Internet at the Department of Homeland Security Web site: http://www.dhs.gov/E-Verify . (d) Individuals previously verified. The Contractor is not required by this clause to perform additional employment verification using E-Verify for any employee— (1) Whose employment eligibility was previously verified by the Contractor through the E-Verify program; (2) Who has been granted and holds an active U.S. Government security clearance for access to confidential, secret, or top secret information in accordance with the National Industrial Security Program Operating Manual; or (3) Who has undergone a completed background investigation and been issued credentials pursuant to Homeland Security Presidential Directive (HSPD) -12, Policy for a Common Identification Standard for Federal Employees and Contractors. (e) Subcontracts. The contractor shall include the requirements of this clause, including this paragraph (e) (appropriately modified for identification of the parties), in each subcontract that— (1) Is for— (i) Commercial or noncommercial services (except for commercial services that are part of the purchase of a COTS item (or an item that would be a COTS item, but for minor modifications), performed by the COTS provider, and are normally provided for that COTS item); or (ii) Construction; (2) Has a value of more than $3,000; and (3) Includes work performed in the United States. (End of Clause) 15.
SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED BUILDING INFORMATION (SBU) PBS’s policy on SBU building information (GSA Order No. PBS 3490.1A (dated June 1, 2009)) has two principal objectives to reduce exposure to possible attacks or threats to GSA-controlled space: a. To diminish the potential that sensitive information about a building will be available for use by a person or persons with an interest in causing harm to persons or property. b. To respect GSA’s legitimate business needs to allow access to this information to those authorized recipients who have a need to know such information. Sensitive But Unclassified (SBU) building information is contained in any document with information that is sufficiently sensitive to warrant some level of protection from disclosure but that does not warrant classification. Based on the above, the contractor will take necessary precautions as outlined in the subject order to ensure that SBU documents, including, but not limited to, building designs (floor plans), construction plans and specifications, renovation/alteration plans, equipment plans and locations, building operating plans, information used for building service contracts and/or contract guard services or any other information PAGE II - 10 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
considered a security risk, shall be disseminated ONLY upon a determination that the recipients are authorized to receive said information. Furthermore, at the conclusion of the project, the Project Manager will coordinate with the contractor for the return of copies of building plans/specifications, solicitation documents, and other SBU electronic or hardcopy information, to the Government. A copy of this Order is available from the Contracting Officer upon request. SAFEGUARDING AND DISSEMINATION OF SENSITIVE BUT BUILDING INFORMATION
UNCLASSIFIED (SBU)
This clause applies to all recipients of SBU building information, including offerors, bidders, awardees, contractors, subcontractors, lessors, suppliers, and manufacturers. (a) Marking SBU. Contractor-generated documents that contain building information must be reviewed by GSA to identify any SBU content, before the original or any copies are disseminated to any other parties. If SBU content is identified, the contracting officer may direct the contractor, as specified elsewhere in this contract, to imprint or affix SBU document markings to the original documents and all copies, before any dissemination. (b) Authorized recipients. Building information considered SBU must be protected with access strictly controlled and limited to those individuals having a need to know such information. Those with a need to know may include Federal, State, and local government entities, and nongovernment entities engaged in the conduct of business on behalf of or with GSA. Nongovernment entities may include architects, engineers, consultants, contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, and others submitting an offer or bid to GSA or performing work under a GSA contract or subcontract. Contractors must provide SBU building information when needed for the performance of official Federal, State, and local government functions, such as for code compliance reviews and for the issuance of building permits. Public safety entities such as fire and utility departments may require access to SBU building information on a need to know basis. This clause must not prevent or encumber the dissemination of SBU building information to public safety entities. (c) Dissemination of SBU building information: (1) By electronic transmission. Electronic transmission of SBU information outside of the GSA firewall and network must use session (or alternatively file encryption). Sessions (or files) must be encrypted with an approved NIST algorithm, such as Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) or Triple Data Encryption Standard (3DES), in accordance with Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPS PUB) 140-2, Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules. Encryption tools that meet FIPS 140-2 are referenced on the NIST web page found at the following URL: http://csrc.nist.gov/groups/STM/cmvp/documents/140-1/1401vend.htm . All encryption products used to satisfy the FIPS 140-2 requirement should have a validation certificate that can be verified at the following URL: http://csrc.nist.gov/groups/STM/cmvp/validation.html#02. (Not all vendors of security products that claim conformance with FIPS 140-2 have validation certificates.) Contractors must provide SBU building information only to authorized representatives of State, Federal, and local government entities and firms currently registered as “active” in the Central Contractor Registration (CCR) database at www.ccr.gov that have a need to know such information. If a subcontractor is not registered in the CCR and has a need to possess SBU building information, the subcontractor shall provide to the contractor its DUNS number or its tax ID number and a copy of its business license. (2) By nonelectronic form or on portable electronic data storage devices. Portable electronic data storage devices include but are not limited to CDs, DVDs, and USB drives. Nonelectronic forms of SBU building information include paper documents. PAGE II - 11 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
(i) By mail. Utilize only methods of shipping that provide services for monitoring receipt such as track and confirm, proof of delivery, signature confirmation, or return receipt. (ii) In person. Contractors must provide SBU building information only to authorized representatives of State, Federal, and local government entities and firms currently registered as “active” in the CCR database that have a need to know such information. (3) Record keeping. Contractors must maintain a list of the State, Federal, and local government entities and the firms to which SBU is disseminated under sections (c) (1) and (c) (2) of this clause. This list must include at a minimum (1) the name of the State, Federal, or local government entity or firm to which SBU has been disseminated; (2) the name of the individual at the entity or firm who is responsible for protecting the SBU building information, with access strictly controlled and limited to those individuals having a need to know such information; (3) contact information for the named individual; and (4) a description of the SBU building information provided. Once work is completed, or for leased space with the submission of the “as built” drawings, the contractor must collect all lists maintained in accordance with this clause, including those maintained by any subcontractors and/or suppliers, and submit them to the contracting officer. For federal buildings, final payment may be withheld until the lists are received. (d) Retaining SBU documents. SBU building information (both electronic and paper formats) must be protected, with access strictly controlled and limited to those individuals having a need to know such information. (e) Destroying SBU building information. SBU building information must be destroyed such that the marked information is rendered unreadable and incapable of being restored, or returned to the contracting officer, when no longer needed, in accordance with guidelines provided for media sanitization within Appendix A of NIST Special Publication 800-88, Guidelines for Media Sanitization, available at http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-88/NISTSP800-8_rev1.pdf. If SBU building information is not returned to the contracting officer, examples of acceptable destruction methods for SBU building information are burning or shredding hardcopy; physically destroying portable electronic storage devices such as CDs, DVDs, and USB drives; deleting and removing files from electronic recycling bins; and removing material from computer hard drives using a permanent-erase utility such as bit wiping software or disk crushers. (f) Notice of disposal. The contractor must notify the Contracting Officer that all SBU building information has been destroyed, or returned to the Contracting Officer, by the contractor and its subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with section (e) of this clause, with the exception of the contractor's record copy. This notice must be submitted to the contracting officer at the completion of the contract in order to receive final payment. For leases, this notice must be submitted to the Contracting Officer at the completion of the lease term. (g) Incidents. All improper disclosures of SBU building information must be immediately reported to the contracting officer at: U.S. General Services Administration Los Angeles Service Center Attn: Heather Caney 300 N. Los Angeles St., Suite 4100 Los Angeles, CA 90012 (213) 894-4145 If the contract provides for progress payments, the contracting officer may withhold approval of progress payments until the contractor provides a corrective action plan explaining how the contractor will prevent future improper disclosures of SBU building information. Progress payments may also be withheld for PAGE II - 12 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
failure to comply with any provision in this clause until the contractor provides a corrective action plan explaining how the contractor will rectify any noncompliance and comply with the clause in the future. (h) Subcontracts. The Contractor must insert the substance of this clause in all subcontracts. [End of clause]
PAGE II - 13 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
APPLICABLE MINIMUM HOURLY RATES OF WAGES 1. The attached wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor specifies the minimum hourly rates of wages which shall be paid to laborers and mechanics employed or working directly upon the site of the work. The rates have been determined by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with the provisions of the Davis-Bacon Act, as amended, to be the prevailing rates for the corresponding classes of laborers and mechanics employed on contracts of a similar character in the locality where this work is to be performed. THESE MINIMUM HOURLY RATES OF WAGES SHALL APPLY ONLY IF THE CONTRACT IS IN EXCESS OF $2,000 IN AMOUNT. 2. While the wage rates given in the attached decision are the minimum rates required to be paid during the life of the contract, it is the responsibility of bidders to inform themselves as to local labor conditions such as the prevailing wage rates, the length of the work day and work week, overtime compensation, fringe benefit payments, available labor supply, and prospective changes or adjustments of wage rates. The Contractor shall abide by and conform to all applicable laws, Executive Orders, and rules, regulations and orders of the Secretary of Labor. No increase in the contract price shall be allowed or authorized on account of the payment of wage rates in excess of those listed in the attached decision. 3. The wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor is attached solely for the purpose of setting forth the minimum hourly wage rates required to be paid during the life of the contract and is not to be accepted as a guarantee, warranty or representation as to the wage rates indicated. Under no circumstances shall any mistake in attaching the appropriate wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor and in the wage rates set forth entitle the successful bidder to cancellation of his bid or contract or to an increase in the contract price or other additional payment or recovery.
PAGE II - 14 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
GENERAL DECISION: CA20100035 04/16/2010 CA35 Date: April 16, 2010 General Decision Number: CA20100035 04/16/2010 Superseded General Decision Number: CA20080035 State: California Construction Types: Building, Heavy (Heavy and Dredging) and Highway County: Orange County in California. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS; DREDGING PROJECTS (does not include hopper dredge work); HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include water well drilling); HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS Modification Number 0 1 2 3
Publication Date 03/12/2010 03/26/2010 04/02/2010 04/16/2010
ASBE0005-002 01/01/2010 Rates
Fringes
Asbestos Workers/Insulator (Includes the application of all insulating materials, protective coverings, coatings, and finishes to all types of mechanical systems).....$ 32.93 15.32 Fire Stop Technician (Application of Firestopping Materials for wall openings and penetrations in walls, floors, ceilings and curtain walls)...........................$ 24.21 13.76 ---------------------------------------------------------------ASBE0005-004 01/01/2010 Rates
Fringes
Asbestos Removal worker/hazardous material handler (Includes preparation, wetting, stripping, removal, scrapping, vacuuming, bagging and disposing of all insulation materials from mechanical systems, whether they contain asbestos or not)....$ 18.85
8.03
PAGE II - 15 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
---------------------------------------------------------------BRCA0004-010 05/01/2009 Rates
Fringes
BRICKLAYER; MARBLE SETTER........$ 34.55 11.56 ---------------------------------------------------------------BRCA0018-004 06/01/2008 Rates
Fringes
MARBLE FINISHER..................$ 25.52 9.08 TILE FINISHER....................$ 21.07 7.88 TILE LAYER.......................$ 32.05 11.99 ---------------------------------------------------------------BRCA0018-010 09/01/2009 Rates
Fringes
TERRAZZO FINISHER................$ 26.59 9.62 TERRAZZO WORKER/SETTER...........$ 33.63 10.46 ---------------------------------------------------------------CARP0409-001 07/01/2009
CARPENTER (1) Carpenter, Cabinet Installer, Insulation Installer, Hardwood Floor Worker and acoustical installer...................$ (2) Millwright..............$ (3) Piledriver/Derrick Bargeman, Bridge or Dock Carpenter, Heavy Framer, Rock Bargeman or Scowman, Rockslinger, Shingler (Commercial)................$ (4) Pneumatic Nailer, Power Stapler...............$ (5) Sawfiler...............$ (6) Scaffold Builder.......$ (7) Table Power Saw Operator....................$
Rates
Fringes
37.35 37.85
10.58 10.58
37.48
10.58
37.60 37.44 28.55
10.58 10.58 10.58
37.45
10.58
FOOTNOTE: Work of forming in the construction of open cut sewers or storm drains, on operations in which horizontal lagging is used in conjunction with steel H-Beams driven or placed in pre- drilled holes, for that portion of a lagged trench against which concrete is poured, namely, as a substitute for back forms (which work is performed by piledrivers): $0.13 per hour additional. Certified Welder - $1.00 per hour premium. ---------------------------------------------------------------CARP0409-005 07/01/2009 PAGE II - 16 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
Rates
Fringes
Drywall DRYWALL INSTALLER/LATHER....$ 37.35 10.58 STOCKER/SCRAPPER............$ 10.00 6.67 ---------------------------------------------------------------ELEC0011-002 02/01/2010 COMMUNICATIONS AND SYSTEMS WORK Rates
Fringes
Communications System Installer...................$ 26.99 Technician..................$ 28.79
3%+8.64 3%+8.64
SCOPE OF WORK: Installation, testing, service and maintenance of systems utilizing the transmission and/or transference of voice, sound, vision and digital for commercial, educational, security and entertainment purposes for the following: TV monitoring and surveillance, background-foreground music, intercom and telephone interconnect, inventory control systems, microwave transmission, multi-media, multiplex, nurse call systems, radio page, school intercom and sound, burglar alarms, fire alarm (see last paragraph below) and low voltage master clock systems in commercial buildings. Communication Systems that transmit or receive information and/or control systems that are intrinsic to the above listed systems; inclusion or exclusion of terminations and testings of conductors determined by their function; excluding all other data systems or multiple systems which include control function or power supply; excluding installation of raceway systems, conduit systems, line voltage work, and energy management systems. Does not cover work performed at China Lake Naval Ordnance Test Station. Fire alarm work shall be performed at the current inside wireman total cost package. ---------------------------------------------------------------ELEC0441-001 08/27/2009 Rates
Fringes
CABLE SPLICER....................$ 41.36 3%+11.90 ELECTRICIAN......................$ 39.54 3%+11.90 ---------------------------------------------------------------* ELEC0441-003 11/30/2009 COMMUNICATIONS & SYSTEMS WORK (excludes any work on Intelligent Transportation Systems or CCTV highway systems) Rates
Fringes
Communications System Installer...................$ 27.03
3%+8.60
PAGE II - 17 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
Technician..................$ 28.83
3%+8.60
SCOPE OF WORK The work covered shall include the installation, testing, service and maintenance, of the following systems that utilize the transmission and/or transference of voice, sound, vision and digital for commercial, education, security and entertainment purposes for TV monitoring and surveillance, background foreground music, intercom and telephone interconnect, inventory control systems, microwave transmission, multi-media, multiplex, nurse call system, radio page, school intercom and sound, burglar alarms and low voltage master clock systems. A. Communication systems that transmit or receive information and/or control systems that are intrinsic to the above listed systems SCADA (Supervisory control/data acquisition PCM (Pulse code modulation) Inventory control systems Digital data systems Broadband & baseband and carriers Point of sale systems VSAT data systems Data communication systems RF and remote control systems Fiber optic data systems B. Sound and Voice Transmission/Transference Systems Background-Foreground Music Intercom and Telephone Interconnect Systems Sound and Musical Entertainment Systems Nurse Call Systems Radio Page Systems School Intercom and Sound Systems Burglar Alarm Systems Low-Voltage Master Clock Systems Multi-Media/Multiplex Systems Telephone Systems RF Systems and Antennas and Wave Guide C. *Fire Alarm Systems-installation, wire pulling and testing. D. Television and Video Systems Television Monitoring and Surveillance Systems Video Security Systems Video Entertainment Systems Video Educational Systems CATV and CCTV E. Security Systems, Perimeter Security Systems, Vibration Sensor Systems Sonar/Infrared Monitoring Equipment, Access Control Systems, Card Access Systems *Fire Alarm Systems 1. Fire Alarms-In Raceways: Wire and cable pulling in raceways performed at the current electrician wage rate and fringe benefits. Installation and termination of devices, panels, startup, testing and programmming performed by the Technician. 2. Fire Alarms-Open Wire Systems: installed by the Technician. ---------------------------------------------------------------ELEC0441-004 08/27/2009 Rates
Fringes
PAGE II - 18 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
ELECTRICIAN (TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS, TRAFFIC SIGNALS & STREET LIGHTING) Cable Splicer/Fiber Optic Splicer.....................$ 40.14 Electrician.................$ 39.54 Technician..................$ 29.66
3%+11.90 3%+11.90 3%+11.90
SCOPE OF WORK: Electrical work on public streets, freeways, toll-ways, etc, above or below ground. All work necessary for the installation, renovation, repair or removal of Intelligent Transportation Systems, Video Surveilance Systems (CCTV), Street Lighting and and Traffic Signal work or systems whether underground or on bridges. Includes dusk to dawn lighting installations and ramps for access to or egress from freeways, toll-ways, etc. Intelligent Transportation Systems shall include all systems and components to control, monitor, and communicate with pedestrian or vehicular traffic, included but not limited to: installation, modification, removal of all Fiber optic Video System, Fiber Optic Data Systems, Direct interconnect and Communications Systems, Microwave Data and Video Systems, Infrared and Sonic Detection Systems, Solar Power Systems, Highway Advisory Radio Systems, highway Weight and Motion Systems, etc. Any and all work required to install and maintain any specialized or newly developed systems. All cutting, fitting and bandaging of ducts, raceways, and conduits. The cleaning, rodding and installation of "fish and pull wires". The excavation, setting, leveling and grouting of precast manholes, vaults, and pull boxes including ground rods or grounding systems, rock necessary for leveling and drainagae as well as pouring of a concrete envelope if needed. JOURNEYMAN TRANSPORTATION ELECTRICIAN shall perform all tasks necessary toinstall the complete transportation system. JOURNEYMAN TECHNICIAN duties shall consist of: Distribution of material at job site, manual excavation and backfill, installation of system conduits and raceways for electrical, telephone, cable television and comnmunication systems. Pulling, terminating and splicing of traffic signal and street lighting conductors and electrical systems including interconnect, dector loop, fiber optic cable and video/data. ---------------------------------------------------------------ELEC1245-001 06/01/2009 Rates LINE CONSTRUCTION (1) Lineman; Cable splicer..$ 44.47 (2) Equipment specialist (operates crawler tractors, commercial motor
Fringes 13.11
PAGE II - 19 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
vehicles, backhoes, trenchers, cranes (50 tons and below), overhead & underground distribution line equipment)...........$ 35.52 (3) Groundman...............$ 27.17 (4) Powderman...............$ 39.71
12.07 11.82 12.23
HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day, M.L. King Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day and day after Thanksgiving, Christmas Day ---------------------------------------------------------------ELEV0018-001 01/01/2010 Rates
Fringes
ELEVATOR MECHANIC................$ 45.33
20.035
FOOTNOTE: PAID VACATION: Employer contributes 8% of regular hourly rate as vacation pay credit for employees with more than 5 years of service, and 6% for 6 months to 5 years of service. PAID HOLIDAYS: New Years Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. ---------------------------------------------------------------ENGI0012-003 07/01/2009
OPERATOR: (All Other GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP
Power Equipment Work) 1....................$ 2....................$ 3....................$ 4....................$ 5....................$ 6....................$ 7....................$ 8....................$ 9....................$ 10....................$ 11....................$ 12....................$ 13....................$ 14....................$ 15....................$ 16....................$ 17....................$ 18....................$ 19....................$ 20....................$ 21....................$ 22....................$ 23....................$ 24....................$
Rates
Fringes
36.83 37.61 37.90 39.39 40.49 39.61 40.71 39.72 40.82 39.84 40.94 40.01 40.11 40.14 40.22 40.34 40.51 40.61 40.72 40.84 41.01 41.11 41.22 41.34
17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22
PAGE II - 20 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA GROUP 25....................$ OPERATOR: Power Equipment (Cranes, Piledriving & Hoisting) GROUP 1....................$ GROUP 2....................$ GROUP 3....................$ GROUP 4....................$ GROUP 5....................$ GROUP 6....................$ GROUP 7....................$ GROUP 8....................$ GROUP 9....................$ GROUP 10....................$ GROUP 11....................$ GROUP 12....................$ GROUP 13....................$ OPERATOR: Power Equipment (Tunnel Work) GROUP 1....................$ GROUP 2....................$ GROUP 3....................$ GROUP 4....................$ GROUP 5....................$ GROUP 6....................$ GROUP 7....................$
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037 41.51
17.22
38.18 38.96 39.25 39.39 39.61 39.72 39.84 40.01 40.18 41.18 42.18 43.18 44.18
17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22
38.68 39.46 39.75 39.89 40.11 40.22 40.34
17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22 17.22
PREMIUM PAY: $3.75 per hour shall be paid on all Power Equipment Operator work on the followng Military Bases: China Lake Naval Reserve, Vandenberg AFB, Point Arguello, Seely Naval Base, Fort Irwin, Nebo Annex Marine Base, Marine Corp Logistics Base Yermo, Edwards AFB, 29 Palms Marine Base and Camp Pendleton Workers required to suit up and work in a hazardous material environment: $2.00 per hour additional. Combination mixer and compressor operator on gunite work shall be classified as a concrete mobile mixer operator. SEE ZONE DEFINITIONS AFTER CLASSIFICATIONS POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Bargeman; Brakeman; Compressor operator; Ditch Witch, with seat or similar type equipment; Elevator operator-inside; Engineer Oiler; Forklift operator (includes loed, lull or similar types under 5 tons; Generator operator; Generator, pump or compressor plant operator; Pump operator; Signalman; Switchman GROUP 2: Asphalt-rubber plant operator (nurse tank operator); Concrete mixer operator-skip type; Conveyor operator; Fireman; Forklift operator (includes loed, lull or similar types over 5 tons; Hydrostatic pump operator; oiler crusher (asphalt or concrete plant); Petromat laydown machine; PJU PAGE II - 21 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
side dum jack; Screening and conveyor machine operator (or similar types); Skiploader (wheel type up to 3/4 yd. without attachment); Tar pot fireman; Temporary heating plant operator; Trenching machine oiler GROUP 3: Asphalt-rubber blend operator; Bobcat or similar type (Skid steer); Equipment greaser (rack); Ford Ferguson (with dragtype attachments); Helicopter radioman (ground); Stationary pipe wrapping and cleaning machine operator GROUP 4: Asphalt plant fireman; Backhoe operator (mini-max or similar type); Boring machine operator; Boxman or mixerman (asphalt or concrete); Chip spreading machine operator; Concrete cleaning decontamination machine operator; Concrete Pump Operator (small portable); Drilling machine operator, small auger types (Texoma super economatic or similar types - Hughes 100 or 200 or similar types drilling depth of 30' maximum); Equipment greaser (grease truck); Guard rail post driver operator; Highline cableway signalman; Horizontal Directional Drilling Machine; Hydra-hammer-aero stomper; Micro Tunneling (above ground tunnel); Power concrete curing machine operator; Power concrete saw operator; Power-driven jumbo form setter operator; Power sweeper operator; Rock Wheel Saw/Trencher; Roller operator (compacting); Screed operator (asphalt or concrete); Trenching machine operator (up to 6 ft.); Vacuum or much truck GROUP 5: Equipment Greaser (Grease Truck/Multi Shift). GROUP 6: Articulating material hauler; Asphalt plant engineer; Batch plant operator; Bit sharpener; Concrete joint machine operator (canal and similar type); Concrete planer operator; Dandy digger; Deck engine operator; Derrickman (oilfield type); Drilling machine operator, bucket or auger types (Calweld 100 bucket or similar types - Watson 1000 auger or similar types - Texoma 330, 500 or 600 auger or similar types - drilling depth of 45' maximum); Drilling machine operator; Hydrographic seeder machine operator (straw, pulp or seed), Jackson track maintainer, or similar type; Kalamazoo Switch tamper, or similar type; Machine tool operator; Maginnis internal full slab vibrator, Mechanical berm, curb or gutter(concrete or asphalt); Mechanical finisher operator (concrete, Clary-Johnson-Bidwell or similar); Micro tunnel system (below ground); Pavement breaker operator (truck mounted); Road oil mixing machine operator; Roller operator (asphalt or finish), rubber-tired earth moving equipment (single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck); Self-propelled tar pipelining machine operator; Skiploader operator (crawler and wheel type, over 3/4 yd. and up to and including 1-1/2 yds.); Slip form pump operator (power driven hydraulic lifting device for concrete forms); Tractor operator-bulldozer, tamper-scraper (single engine, up to 100 h.p. flywheel and similar types, up to and including D-5 and similar types); Tugger hoist operator (1 PAGE II - 22 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
drum); Ultra high pressure waterjet cutting tool system operator; Vacuum blasting machine operator GROUP 7: Welder - General GROUP 8: Asphalt or concrete spreading operator (tamping or finishing); Asphalt paving machine operator (Barber Greene or similar type); Asphalt-rubber distribution operator; Backhoe operator (up to and including 3/4 yd.), small ford, Case or similar; Cast-in-place pipe laying machine operator; Combination mixer and compressor operator (gunite work); Compactor operator (self-propelled); Concrete mixer operator (paving); Crushing plant operator; Drill Doctor; Drilling machine operator, Bucket or auger types (Calweld 150 bucket or similar types - Watson 1500, 2000 2500 auger or similar types - Texoma 700, 800 auger or similar types drilling depth of 60' maximum); Elevating grader operator; Grade checker; Gradall operator; Grouting machine operator; Heavy-duty repairman; Heavy equipment robotics operator; Kalamazoo balliste regulator or similar type; Kolman belt loader and similar type; Le Tourneau blob compactor or similar type; Loader operator (Athey, Euclid, Sierra and similar types); Mobark Chipper or similar; Ozzie padder or similar types; P.C. slot saw; Pneumatic concrete placing machine operator (Hackley-Presswell or similar type); Pumpcrete gun operator; Rock Drill or similar types; Rotary drill operator (excluding caisson type); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator (single engine, caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. up to and including 50 cu. yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator (multiple engine up to and including 25 yds. struck); Rubber-tired scraper operator (self-loading paddle wheel type-John Deere, 1040 and similar single unit); Selfpropelled curb and gutter machine operator; Shuttle buggy; Skiploader operator (crawler and wheel type over 1-1/2 yds. up to and including 6-1/2 yds.); Soil remediation plant operator; Surface heaters and planer operator; Tractor compressor drill combination operator; Tractor operator (any type larger than D-5 - 100 flywheel h.p. and over, or similar-bulldozer, tamper, scraper and push tractor single engine); Tractor operator (boom attachments), Traveling pipe wrapping, cleaning and bendng machine operator; Trenching machine operator (over 6 ft. depth capacity, manufacturer's rating); trenching Machine with Road Miner attachment (over 6 ft depth capacity): Ultra high pressure waterjet cutting tool system mechanic; Water pull (compaction) operator GROUP 9: Heavy Duty Repairman GROUP 10: Drilling machine operator, Bucket or auger types (Calweld 200 B bucket or similar types-Watson 3000 or 5000 auger or similar types-Texoma 900 auger or similar types-drilling depth of 105' maximum); Dual drum mixer, dynamic compactor LDC350 (or similar types); Monorail PAGE II - 23 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
locomotive operator (diesel, gas or electric); Motor patrol-blade operator (single engine); Multiple engine tractor operator (Euclid and similar type-except Quad 9 cat.); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator (single engine, over 50 yds. struck); Pneumatic pipe ramming tool and similar types; Prestressed wrapping machine operator; Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator (single engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber tired earth moving equipment operator (multiple engine, Euclid, caterpillar and similar over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. struck), Tower crane repairman; Tractor loader operator (crawler and wheel type over 6-1/2 yds.); Woods mixer operator (and similar Pugmill equipment) GROUP 11: Heavy Duty Repairman - Welder Combination, Welder Certified. GROUP 12: Auto grader operator; Automatic slip form operator; Drilling machine operator, bucket or auger types (Calweld, auger 200 CA or similar types - Watson, auger 6000 or similar types - Hughes Super Duty, auger 200 or similar types - drilling depth of 175' maximum); Hoe ram or similar with compressor; Mass excavator operator less tha 750 cu. yards; Mechanical finishing machine operator; Mobile form traveler operator; Motor patrol operator (multi-engine); Pipe mobile machine operator; Rubber-tired earth- moving equipment operator (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck); Rubber-tired self- loading scraper operator (paddle-wheel-auger type self-loading - two (2) or more units) GROUP 13: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator operating equipment with push-pull system (single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) GROUP 14: Canal liner operator; Canal trimmer operator; Remote- control earth-moving equipment operator (operating a second piece of equipment: $1.00 per hour additional); Wheel excavator operator (over 750 cu. yds.) GROUP 15: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with push-pull system (single engine, Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. and up to and including 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with push-pull system (multiple engine-up to and including 25 yds. struck) GROUP 16: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with push-pull system (single engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with push-pull system (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. struck) GROUP 17: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, PAGE II - 24 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
operating equipment with push-pull system (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 50 cu. yds. struck); Tandem tractor operator (operating crawler type tractors in tandem - Quad 9 and similar type) GROUP 18: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) GROUP 19: Rotex concrete belt operator (or similar types); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - single engine, Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds.and up to and including 50 cu. yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - multiple engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) GROUP 20: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units single engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps, and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. struck) GROUP 21: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck) GROUP 22: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with the tandem push-pull system (single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) GROUP 23: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with the tandem push-pull system (single engine, Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. and up to and including 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating with the tandem push-pull system (multiple engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) GROUP 24: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with the tandem push-pull system (single engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with the tandem push-pull system (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. PAGE II - 25 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
struck) GROUP 25: Concrete pump operator-truck mounted; Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with the tandem push-pull system (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck) CRANES, PILEDRIVING AND HOISTING EQUIPMENT CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Engineer oiler; Fork lift operator (includes loed, lull or similar types) GROUP 2: Truck crane oiler GROUP 3: A-frame or winch truck operator; Ross carrier operator (jobsite) GROUP 4: Bridge-type unloader and turntable operator; Helicopter hoist operator GROUP 5: Hydraulic boom truck; Stinger crane (Austin-Western or similar type); Tugger hoist operator (1 drum) GROUP 6: Bridge crane operator; Cretor crane operator; Hoist operator (Chicago boom and similar type); Lift mobile operator; Lift slab machine operator (Vagtborg and similar types); Material hoist and/or manlift operator; Polar gantry crane operator; Self Climbing scaffold (or similar type); Shovel, backhoe, dragline, clamshell operator (over 3/4 yd. and up to 5 cu. yds. mrc); Tugger hoist operator GROUP 7: Pedestal crane operator; Shovel, backhoe, dragline, clamshell operator (over 5 cu. yds. mrc); Tower crane repair; Tugger hoist operator (3 drum) GROUP 8: Crane operator (up to and including 25 ton capacity); Crawler transporter operator; Derrick barge operator (up to and including 25 ton capacity); Hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (up to and including 25 ton capacity); Shovel, backhoe, dragline, clamshell operator (over 7 cu. yds., M.R.C.) GROUP 9: Crane operator (over 25 tons and up to and including 50 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 25 tons up to and including 50 tons mrc); Highline cableway operator; Hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 25 tons up to and including 50 tons mrc); K-crane operator; Polar crane operator; Self erecting tower crane operator maximum lifting capacity ten tons GROUP 10: Crane operator (over 50 tons and up to and including 100 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 50 tons up to and including 100 tons mrc); Hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 50 tons up to and including 100 tons mrc), Mobile tower crane operator (over 50 tons, up to and including 100 tons M.R.C.); Tower PAGE II - 26 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
crane operator and tower gantry GROUP 11: Crane operator (over 100 tons and up to and including 200 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 100 tons up to and including 200 tons mrc); Hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 100 tons up to and including 200 tons mrc); Mobile tower crane operator (over 100 tons up to and including 200 tons mrc) GROUP 12: Crane operator (over 200 tons up to and including 300 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 200 tons up to and including 300 tons mrc); Hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 200 tons, up to and including 300 tons mrc); Mobile tower crane operator (over 200 tons, up to and including 300 tons mrc) GROUP 13: Crane operator (over 300 tons); Derrick barge operator (over 300 tons); Helicopter pilot; Hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 300 tons); Mobile tower crane operator (over 300 tons) TUNNEL CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Skiploader (wheel type up to 3/4 yd. without attachment) GROUP 2: Power-driven jumbo form setter operator GROUP 3: Dinkey locomotive or motorperson (up to and including 10 tons) GROUP 4: Bit sharpener; Equipment greaser (grease truck); Slip form pump operator (power-driven hydraulic lifting device for concrete forms); Tugger hoist operator (1 drum); Tunnel locomotive operator (over 10 and up to and including 30 tons) GROUP 5: Backhoe operator (up to and including 3/4 yd.); Small Ford, Case or similar; Drill doctor; Grouting machine operator; Heading shield operator; Heavy-duty repairperson; Loader operator (Athey, Euclid, Sierra and similar types); Mucking machine operator (1/4 yd., rubber-tired, rail or track type); Pneumatic concrete placing machine operator (Hackley-Presswell or similar type); Pneumatic heading shield (tunnel); Pumpcrete gun operator; Tractor compressor drill combination operator; Tugger hoist operator (2 drum); Tunnel locomotive operator (over 30 tons) GROUP 6: Heavy Duty Repairman GROUP 7:
Tunnel mole boring machine operator
ENGINEERS ZONES $1.00 additional per hour for all of IMPERIAL County and the portions of KERN, RIVERSIDE & SAN BERNARDINO Counties as PAGE II - 27 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
defined below: That area within the following Boundary: Begin in San Bernardino County, approximately 3 miles NE of the intersection of I-15 and the California State line at that point which is the NW corner of Section 1, T17N,m R14E, San Bernardino Meridian. Continue W in a straight line to that point which is the SW corner of the NW ¼ of Section 6, T27S, R42E, Mt. Diablo Meridian. Continue North to the intersection with the Inyo County Boundary at that point which is the NE corner of the W ½ of the N ¼ of Section 6, T25S, R42E, MDM. Continue W along the Inyo and San Bernardino County boundary until the intersection with Kern County, as that point which is the SE corner of Section 34, T24S, R40E, MDM. Continue W along the Inyo and Kern County boundary until the intersection with Tulare County, at that point which is the SW corner of the SE ¼ of Section 32, T24S, R37E, MDM. Continue W along the Kern and Tulare County boundary, until that point which is the NW corner of T25S, R32E, MDM. Continue S following R32E lines to the NW corner of T31S, R32E, MDM. Continue W to the NW corner of T31S, R31E, MDM. Continue S to the SW corner of T32S, R31E, MDM. Continue W to SW corner of SE ¼ of Section 34, T32S, R30E, MDM. Continue S to SW corner of T11N, R17W, SBM. Continue E along south boundary of T11N, SBM to SW corner of T11N, R7W, SBM. Continue S to SW corner of T9N, R7W, SBM. Continue E along south boundary of T9N, SBM to SW corner of T9N, R1E, SBM. Continue S along west boundary of R1E, SMB to Riverside County line at the SW corner of T1S, R1E, SBM. Continue E along south boundary of T1s, SBM (Riverside County Line) to SW corner of T1S, R10E, SBM. Continue S along west boundary of R10E, SBM to Imperial County line at the SW corner of T8S, R10E, SBM. Continue W along Imperial and Riverside county line to NW corner of T9S, R9E, SBM. Continue S along the boundary between Imperial and San Diego Counties, along the west edge of R9E, SBM to the south boundary of Imperial County/California state line. Follow the California state line west to Arizona state line, then north to Nevada state line, then continuing NW back to start at the point which is the NW corner of Section 1, T17N, R14E, SBM $1.00 additional per hour for portions of SAN LUIS OBISPO, KERN, SANTA BARBARA & VENTURA as defined below: That area within the following Boundary: Begin approximately 5 miles north of the community of Cholame, on the Monterey County and San Luis Obispo County boundary at the NW corner of T25S, R16E, Mt. Diablo Meridian. Continue south along the west side of R16E to the SW corner of T30S, R16E, MDM. Continue E to SW corner of T30S, R17E, MDM. Continue S to SW corner of T31S, R17E, MDM. Continue E to SW corner of T31S, R18E, MDM. Continue S along West side of R18E, MDM as it crosses into San Bernardino Meridian numbering area and becomes R30W. Follow the west side of R30W, SBM to the SW corner of T9N, R30W, SBM. Continue E along the south edge of T9N, SBM to the Santa Barbara County and Ventura County boundary at that point whch is the SW corner of Section 34.T9N, R24W, SBM, continue S along PAGE II - 28 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
the Ventura County line to that point which is the SW corner of the SE ¼ of Section 32, T7N, R24W, SBM. Continue E along the south edge of T7N, SBM to the SE corner to T7N, R21W, SBM. Continue N along East side of R21W, SBM to Ventura County and Kern County boundary at the NE corner of T8N, R21W. Continue W along the Ventura County and Kern County boundary to the SE corner of T9N, R21W. Continue North along the East edge of R21W, SBM to the NE corner of T12N, R21W, SBM. Continue West along the north edge of T12N, SBM to the SE corner of T32S, R21E, MDM. [T12N SBM is a think strip between T11N SBM and T32S MDM]. Continue North along the East side of R21E, MDM to the Kings County and Kern County border at the NE corner of T25S, R21E, MDM, continue West along the Kings County and Kern County Boundary until the intersection of San Luis Obispo County. Continue west along the Kings County and San Luis Obispo County boundary until the intersection with Monterey County. Continue West along the Monterey County and San Luis Obispo County boundary to the beginning point at the NW corner of T25S, R16E, MDM. $2.00 additional per hour for INYO and MONO Counties and the Northern portion of SAN BERNARDINO County as defined below: That area within the following Boundary: Begin at the intersection of the northern boundary of Mono County and the California state line at the point which is the center of Section 17, T10N, R22E, Mt. Diablo Meridian. Continue S then SE along the entire western boundary of Mono County, until it reaches Inyo County at the point which is the NE corner of the W ½ of the NW ¼ of Section 2, T8S, R29E, MDM. Continue SSE along the entire western boundary of Inyo County, until the intersection with Kern County at the point which is the SW corner of the SE ¼ of Section 32, T24S, R37E, MDM. Continue E along the Inyo and Kern County boundary until the intersection with San Bernardino County at that point which is the SE corner of section 34, T24S, R40E, MDM. Continue E along the Inyo and San Bernardino County boundary until the point which is the NE corner of the W ½ of the NW ¼ of Section 6, T25S, R42E, MDM. Continue S to that point which is the SW corner of the NW ¼ of Section 6, T27S, R42E, MDM. Continue E in a straight line to the California and Nevada state border at the point which is the NW corner of Section 1, T17N, R14E, San Bernardino Meridian. Then continue NW along the state line to the starting point, which is the center of Section 18, T10N, R22E, MDM. REMAINING AREA NOT DEFINED ABOVE RECIEVES BASE RATE ---------------------------------------------------------------ENGI0012-004 08/01/2009 Rates OPERATOR: (DREDGING)
Fringes
Power Equipment PAGE II - 29 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
(1) Leverman................$ 44.83 17.22 (2) Dredge dozer............$ 40.36 17.22 (3) Deckmate................$ 40.25 17.22 (4) Winch operator (stern winch on dredge)............$ 39.70 17.22 (5) Fireman-Oiler, Deckhand, Bargeman, Leveehand...................$ 39.16 17.22 (6) Barge Mate..............$ 39.77 17.22 ---------------------------------------------------------------IRON0002-004 07/01/2009 Rates Ironworkers: Fence Erector...............$ 26.58 Ornamental, Reinforcing and Structural..............$ 33.00
Fringes 15.24 23.71
PREMIUM PAY: $6.00 additional per hour at the following locations: China Lake Naval Test Station, Chocolate Mountains Naval Reserve-Niland, Edwards AFB, Fort Irwin Military Station, Fort Irwin Training Center-Goldstone, San Clemente Island, San Nicholas Island, Susanville Federal Prison, 29 Palms - Marine Corps, U.S. Marine Base - Barstow, U.S. Naval Air Facility - Sealey, Vandenberg AFB $4.00 additional per hour at the following locations: Army Defense Language Institute - Monterey, Fallon Air Base, Naval Post Graduate School - Monterey, Yermo Marine Corps Logistics Center $2.00 additional per hour at the following locations: Port Hueneme, Port Mugu, U.S. Coast Guard Station - Two Rock ---------------------------------------------------------------LABO0300-001 07/01/2008 Rates
Fringes
Brick Tender.....................$ 27.17 13.75 ---------------------------------------------------------------LABO0300-003 01/01/2010 Rates
Fringes
LABORER (GUNITE) GROUP 1.....................$ 30.04 GROUP 2.....................$ 29.09 GROUP 3.....................$ 25.55 LABORER (TUNNEL)
17.37 17.37 17.37
PAGE II - 30 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP LABORER GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
1.....................$ 2.....................$ 3.....................$ 4.....................$
31.24 31.56 32.02 32.71
15.04 15.04 15.04 15.04
1.....................$ 2.....................$ 3.....................$ 4.....................$ 5.....................$
26.33 26.88 27.43 28.98 29.33
14.75 14.75 14.75 14.75 14.75
FOOTNOTE: GUNITE PREMIUM PAY: Workers working from a Bosn'n's Chair or suspended from a rope or cable shall receive 40 cents per hour above the foregoing applicable classification rates. Workers doing gunite and/or shotcrete work in a tunnel shall receive 35 cents per hour above the foregoing applicable classification rates, paid on a portal-to-portal basis. Any work performed on, in or above any smoke stack, silo, storage elevator or similar type of structure, when such structure is in excess of 75'-0" above base level and which work must be performed in whole or in part more than 75'-0" above base level, that work performed above the 75'-0" level shall be compensated for at 35 cents per hour above the applicable classification wage rate. LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Cleaning and handling of panel forms; Concrete screeding for rough strike-off; Concrete, water curing; Demolition laborer, the cleaning of brick if performed by a worker performing any other phase of demolition work, and the cleaning of lumber; Fire watcher, limber, brush loader, piler and debris handler; Flag person; Gas, oil and/or water pipeline laborer; Laborer, asphalt-rubber material loader; Laborer, general or construction; Laborer, general clean-up; Laborer, landscaping; Laborer, jetting; Laborer, temporary water and air lines; Material hose operator (walls, slabs, floors and decks); Plugging, filling of shee bolt holes; Dry packing of concrete; Railroad maintenance, repair track person and road beds; Streetcar and railroad construction track laborers; Rigging and signaling; Scaler; Slip form raiser; Tar and mortar; Tool crib or tool house laborer; Traffic control by any method; Window cleaner; Wire mesh pulling - all concrete pouring operations GROUP 2: Asphalt shoveler; Cement dumper (on 1 yd. or larger mixer and handling bulk cement); Cesspool digger and installer; Chucktender; Chute handler, pouring concrete, the handling of the chute from readymix trucks, such as walls, slabs, decks, floors, foundation, footings, curbs, gutters and sidewalks; Concrete curer, impervious membrane and form oiler; Cutting torch operator (demolition); Fine grader, highways and street paving, airport, runways and similar type heavy construction; Gas, oil and/or water pipeline wrapper - pot tender and form person; Guinea PAGE II - 31 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
chaser; Headerboard person - asphalt; Laborer, packing rod steel and pans; Membrane vapor barrier installer; Power broom sweeper (small); Riprap stonepaver, placing stone or wet sacked concrete; Roto scraper and tiller; Sandblaster (pot tender); Septic tank digger and installer(lead); Tank scaler and cleaner; Tree climber, faller, chain saw operator, Pittsburgh chipper and similar type brush shredder; Underground laborer, including caisson bellower GROUP 3: Buggymobile person; Concrete cutting torch; Concrete pile cutter; Driller, jackhammer, 2-1/2 ft. drill steel or longer; Dri-pak-it machine; Gas, oil and/or water pipeline wrapper, 6-in. pipe and over, by any method, inside and out; High scaler (including drilling of same); Hydro seeder and similar type; Impact wrench multi-plate; Kettle person, pot person and workers applying asphalt, lay-kold, creosote, lime caustic and similar type materials ("applying" means applying, dipping, brushing or handling of such materials for pipe wrapping and waterproofing); Operator of pneumatic, gas, electric tools, vibrating machine, pavement breaker, air blasting, come-alongs, and similar mechanical tools not separately classified herein; Pipelayer's backup person, coating, grouting, making of joints, sealing, caulking, diapering and including rubber gasket joints, pointing and any and all other services; Rock slinger; Rotary scarifier or multiple head concrete chipping scarifier; Steel headerboard and guideline setter; Tamper, Barko, Wacker and similar type; Trenching machine, hand-propelled GROUP 4: Asphalt raker, lute person, ironer, asphalt dump person, and asphalt spreader boxes (all types); Concrete core cutter (walls, floors or ceilings), grinder or sander; Concrete saw person, cutting walls or flat work, scoring old or new concrete; Cribber, shorer, lagging, sheeting and trench bracing, hand-guided lagging hammer; Head rock slinger; Laborer, asphalt- rubber distributor boot person; Laser beam in connection with laborers' work; Oversize concrete vibrator operator, 70 lbs. and over; Pipelayer performing all services in the laying and installation of pipe from the point of receiving pipe in the ditch until completion of operation, including any and all forms of tubular material, whether pipe, metallic or non-metallic, conduit and any other stationary type of tubular device used for the conveying of any substance or element, whether water, sewage, solid gas, air, or other product whatsoever and without regard to the nature of material from which the tubular material is fabricated; No-joint pipe and stripping of same; Prefabricated manhole installer; Sandblaster (nozzle person), water blasting, Porta Shot-Blast GROUP 5: Blaster powder, all work of loading holes, placing and blasting of all powder and explosives of whatever type, regardless of method used for such loading and placing; Driller: All power drills, excluding jackhammer, whether core, diamond, wagon, track, multiple unit, and any and all PAGE II - 32 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
other types of mechanical drills without regard to the form of motive power; Toxic waste removal TUNNEL LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Batch plant laborer; Bull Changehouse person; Concrete crew, spreader; Dump person; Dump person (brake person and switch person on materials handling person
gang mucker, track person; including rodder and (outside); Swamper tunnel work); Tunnel
GROUP 2: Chucktender, cabletender; agitator cars; Nipper; Pot tender, materials (for example, but not by shotcrete, etc.); Vibrator person, tools (except driller)
Loading and unloading using mastic or other way of limitation, jack hammer, pneumatic
GROUP 3: Blaster, driller, powder person; Chemical grout jet person; Cherry picker person; Grout gun person; Grout mixer person; Grout pump person; Jackleg miner; Jumbo person; Kemper and other pneumatic concrete placer operator; Miner, tunnel (hand or machine); Nozzle person; Operating of troweling and/or grouting machines; Powder person (primer house); Primer person; Sandblaster; Shotcrete person; Steel form raiser and setter; Timber person, retimber person, wood or steel; Tunnel Concrete finisher GROUP 4: Diamond driller; Sandblaster; Shaft and raise work GUNITE LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Rodmen, Nozzlemen GROUP 2: Gunmen GROUP 3: Reboundmen ---------------------------------------------------------------LABO0300-005 08/05/2009 Rates
Fringes
LABORER PLASTER CLEAN-UP LABORER....$ 26.65 14.70 PLASTER TENDER..............$ 29.20 14.70 ---------------------------------------------------------------LABO0882-002 01/01/2010 Rates
Fringes
Asbestos Removal Laborer.........$ 26.15
14.25
SCOPE OF cleanup, material disposal
WORK: Includes site mobilization, initial site site preparation, removal of asbestos-containing and toxic waste, encapsulation, enclosure and of asbestos- containing materials and toxic waste PAGE II - 33 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
by hand or with equipment or machinery; scaffolding, fabrication of temporary wooden barriers and assembly of decontamination stations. ---------------------------------------------------------------LABO1184-001 07/01/2009
Laborers: (HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING) (1) Drilling Crew Laborer...$ (2) Vehicle Operator/Hauler.$ (3) Horizontal Directional Drill Operator..............$ (4) Electronic Tracking Locator.....................$ Laborers: (STRIPING/SLURRY SEAL) GROUP 1.....................$ GROUP 2.....................$ GROUP 3.....................$ GROUP 4.....................$
Rates
Fringes
27.05 27.22
10.40 10.40
29.07
10.40
31.07
10.40
28.50 29.80 31.81 33.55
13.56 13.56 13.56 13.56
LABORERS - STRIPING CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Protective coating, pavement sealing, including repair and filling of cracks by any method on any surface in parking lots, game courts and playgrounds; carstops; operation of all related machinery and equipment; equipment repair technician GROUP 2: Traffic surface abrasive blaster; pot tender removal of all traffic lines and markings by any method (sandblasting, waterblasting, grinding, etc.) and preparation of surface for coatings. Traffic control person: controlling and directing traffic through both conventional and moving lane closures; operation of all related machinery and equipment GROUP 3: Traffic delineating device applicator: Layout and application of pavement markers, delineating signs, rumble and traffic bars, adhesives, guide markers, other traffic delineating devices including traffic control. This category includes all traffic related surface preparation (sandblasting, waterblasting, grinding) as part of the application process. Traffic protective delineating system installer: removes, relocates, installs, permanently affixed roadside and parking delineation barricades, fencing, cable anchor, guard rail, reference signs, monument markers; operation of all related machinery and equipment; power broom sweeper GROUP 4: Striper: layout and application of traffic stripes and markings; hot thermo plastic; tape traffic stripes and markings, including traffic control; operation of all related machinery and equipment PAGE II - 34 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN0036-001 01/01/2010 Rates
Fringes
Painters: (Including Lead Abatement) (1) Repaint.................$ 26.05 (2) All Other Work..........$ 29.32
9.41 9.41
REPAINT of any previously painted structure. Exceptions: work involving the aerospace industry, breweries, commercial recreational facilities, hotels which operate commercial establishments as part of hotel service, and sports facilities. ---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN0036-008 01/06/2010 Rates
Fringes
DRYWALL FINISHER/TAPER...........$ 33.22 12.19 ---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN0036-015 01/01/2010 Rates
Fringes
GLAZIER..........................$ 36.90
18.71
FOOTNOTE: Additional $1.25 per hour for work in a condor, from the third (3rd) floor and up Additional $1.25 per hour for work on the outside of the building from a swing stage or any suspended contrivance, from the ground up ---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN1247-002 01/01/2010 Rates
Fringes
SOFT FLOOR LAYER.................$ 30.85 10.54 ---------------------------------------------------------------PLAS0200-009 08/05/2009 Rates
Fringes
PLASTERER........................$ 35.41 9.88 ---------------------------------------------------------------PLAS0500-002 07/01/2009 Rates
Fringes
CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 29.50 18.40 ---------------------------------------------------------------PLUM0016-001 07/01/2009 Rates
Fringes
PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER PAGE II - 35 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
(1) Work on strip malls, light commercial, tenant improvement and remodel work........................$ 28.84 14.47 (2) Work on new additions and remodeling of bars, restaurant, stores and commercial buildings not to exceed 5,000 sq. ft. of floor space.................$ 35.97 15.86 (3) All other work..........$ 37.10 16.84 ---------------------------------------------------------------PLUM0250-002 01/02/2006 Rates
Fringes
REFRIGERATION MECHANIC Refrigeration Fitter........$ 33.30 13.95 ---------------------------------------------------------------PLUM0345-001 07/01/2009 Rates
Fringes
PLUMBER Landscape/Irrigation Fitter.$ 26.70 13.84 Sewer & Storm Drain Work....$ 25.18 15.67 ---------------------------------------------------------------ROOF0036-002 08/01/2009 Rates
Fringes
ROOFER...........................$ 33.15
8.47
FOOTNOTE: Pitch premium: Work on which employees are exposed to pitch fumes or required to handle pitch, pitch base or pitch impregnated products, or any material containing coal tar pitch, the entire roofing crew shall receive $1.75 per hour "pitch premium" pay. ---------------------------------------------------------------SFCA0669-008 01/01/2009 DOES NOT INCLUDE SAN CLEMENTE ISLAND, THE CITY OF SANTA ANA, AND THAT PART OF ORANGE COUNTY WITHIN 25 MILES OF THE CITY LIMITS OF LOS ANGELES: Rates
Fringes
SPRINKLER FITTER.................$ 32.85 16.05 ---------------------------------------------------------------SFCA0709-003 01/01/2010 SAN CLEMENTE ISLAND, THE CITY OF SANTA ANA, AND THAT PART OF ORANGE COUNTY WITHIN 25 MILES BEYOND THE CITY LIMITS OF LOS ANGELES: Rates
Fringes
PAGE II - 36 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire)..........$ 39.08 21.95 ---------------------------------------------------------------SHEE0105-003 01/01/2010 LOS ANGELES (South of a straight line drawn between Gorman and Big Pines)and Catalina Island, INYO, KERN (Northeast part, East of Hwy 395), MONO ORANGE, RIVERSIDE, AND SAN BERNARDINO COUNTIES Rates
Fringes
SHEET METAL WORKER (1) Commercial - New Construction and Remodel work........................$ 40.86 17.40 (2) Industrial work including air pollution control systems, noise abatement, hand rails, guard rails, excluding aritechtural sheet metal work, excluding A-C, heating, ventilating systems for human comfort...$ 35.56 22.90 ---------------------------------------------------------------* TEAM0011-002 07/01/2008
TRUCK DRIVER GROUP 1....................$ GROUP 2....................$ GROUP 3....................$ GROUP 4....................$ GROUP 5....................$ GROUP 6....................$ GROUP 7....................$ GROUP 8....................$ GROUP 9....................$ GROUP 10....................$ GROUP 11....................$ GROUP 12....................$
Rates
Fringes
26.44 26.59 26.72 26.91 26.94 26.97 27.22 27.47 27.67 27.97 28.47 28.90
18.24 18.24 18.24 18.24 18.24 18.24 18.24 18.24 18.24 18.24 18.24 18.24
WORK ON ALL MILITARY BASES: PREMIUM PAY: $3.00 per hour additional. [29 palms Marine Base, Camp Roberts, China Lake, Edwards AFB, El Centro Naval Facility, Fort Irwin, Marine Corps Logistics Base at Nebo & Yermo, Mountain Warfare Training Center, Bridgeport, Point Arguello, Point Conception, Vandenberg AFB] TRUCK DRIVERS CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Truck driver GROUP 2: Driver of vehicle or combination of vehicles - 2 PAGE II - 37 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
axles; Traffic control pilot car excluding moving heavy equipment permit load; Truck mounted broom GROUP 3: Driver of vehicle or combination of vehicles - 3 axles; Boot person; Cement mason distribution truck; Fuel truck driver; Water truck - 2 axle; Dump truck, less than 16 yds. water level; Erosion control driver GROUP 4: Driver of transit mix truck, under 3 yds.; Dumpcrete truck, less than 6-1/2 yds. water level GROUP 5: Water truck, 3 or more axles; Truck greaser and tire person ($0.50 additional for tire person); Pipeline and utility working truck driver, including winch truck and plastic fusion, limited to pipeline and utility work; Slurry truck driver GROUP 6: Transit mix truck, 3 yds. or more; Dumpcrete truck, 6-1/2 yds. water level and over; Vehicle or combination of vehicles - 4 or more axles; Oil spreader truck; Dump truck, 16 yds. to 25 yds. water level GROUP 7: A Frame, Swedish crane or similar; Forklift driver; Ross carrier driver GROUP 8: Dump truck, 25 yds. to 49 yds. water level; Truck repair person; Water pull - single engine; Welder GROUP 9: Truck repair person/welder; Low bed driver, 9 axles or over GROUP 10: Dump truck - 50 yds. or more water level; Water pull - single engine with attachment GROUP 11: Water pull - twin engine; Water pull - twin engine with attachments; Winch truck driver - $1.25 additional when operating winch or similar special attachments GROUP 12: Boom Truck 17K and above ---------------------------------------------------------------WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates listed under the identifier do not reflect collectively bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be PAGE II - 38 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
prevailing. ---------------------------------------------------------------WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * * * *
an existing published wage determination a survey underlying a wage determination a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 PAGE II - 39 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION
PAGE II - 40 SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
VOLUME III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS, PAGE III - 0
SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
NOTE: ANY SECTIONS REFERENCED IN THIS TASK ORDER RFP BUT NOT INCLUDED HERE CAN BE FOUND IN THE MASTER IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A.
VOLUME III - WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 01 12 00 01 25 13 01 31 13 01 31 20 01 32 17 01 33 00 01 35 30 01 35 54 01 42 19 01 45 24 01 50 10 01 57 20 01 68 00 01 73 29 01 74 10 01 77 04 01 78 23 01 78 36
SUMMARY OF THE WORK SECURITY PROVISIONS PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PROJECT COORDINATION COORDINATION AND MEETINGS CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - CPM SUBMITTALS SAFETY AND HEALTH GSA SECURITY REGULATIONS REFERENCE STANDARDS QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES TEMPORARY FACILITIES DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT CUTTING AND PATCHING CLEANING PROJECT CLOSEOUT OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA WARRANTIES AND BONDS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 13 02 42 10 02 82 13 02 84 18
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SALVAGEABLE PROPERTY ASBESTOS ABATEMENT HANDLING OF HAZARDOUS LAMPS AND SIMILAR MATERIALS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 53 73
CONCRETE INFILL OF PENETRATIONS
DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 50 00 05 70 08
METAL FABRICATIONS ALUMINUM INSET MOLDINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS, PAGE III - 1
SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
DIVISION 06 - WOODS & PLASTIC 06 05 74 06 06 20 06 40 23
FIRE-RETARDANT PLYWOOD BACK PANELS FINISH CARPENTRY AND TRIM INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 84 00 07 92 10
FIRESTOPPING SEALANTS AND CAULKING
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 10 73 08 14 00 08 71 10
HOLLOW STEEL ACOUSTICAL DOOR FRAMES WOOD DOORS FINISH HARDWARE
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 22 10 09 22 16 09 50 00 09 65 14 09 65 21 09 68 04 09 81 17 09 84 37 09 91 00
GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL FRAMING METAL FRAMING (NON-STRUCTURAL) ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS RUBBER BASE VINYL COMPOSITON TILE FLOORING CARPET TILE SOUND INSULATION ENCAPSULATED CEILING SOUND INSULATION PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 14 10 10 22 15 10 44 12
SIGNAGE SECURITY MESH WITHIN PARTITIONS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND BRACKETS
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 13 13
WET-PIPE SPINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00.10 23 05 16 23 05 29 23 05 53 23 05 93 23 07 00 23 09 00
COMMON WORK REQUIREFMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC HVAC INSULATION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC TABLE OF CONTENTS, PAGE III - 2
SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
23 09 23 23 09 93 23 21 13 23 21 24 23 23 00 23 31 00 23 36 00 23 37 00 23 81 26
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS HYDRONIC PIPING VARIABLE SPEED DRIVERS REFRIGERANT PIPING HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS AIR TERMINAL UNITS AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 26 05 26 26 05 29 26 05 33 26 05 53 26 22 00 26 24 16 26 27 16 26 27 26 26 51 00
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PANELBOARDS ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES WIRING DEVICES INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION 27 20 00 & 27 30 00 DATA COMMUNICATIONS / VOICE COMMUNICATIONS 27 51 16 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 13 00 28 16 00 28 31 00
ACCESS CONTROLS INTRUSION DETECTION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
VOLUME III - APPENDICES Appendix 1 - STRUCTURED CABLE PLANT SCOPE OF WORK Appendix 2 - COMPUTER ROOM LAYOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS, PAGE III - 3
SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
VOLUME III - SPECIFICATION DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS, PAGE III - 4
SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
VOLUME III WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS Replace the current header on all pages of the Written Specifications, "Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD", with the following: IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION” CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
PBS - REG 9
TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
Add the following footer to all pages of the Written Specifications: SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
WRITTEN SPECS, PAGE III - 0
SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU) PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF THE WORK PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT COPYING, DISSEMINATION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THESE DRAWINGS, PLANS, OR SPECIFICATIONS TO UNAUTHORIZED USERS IS PROHIBITED Do not remove this notice Properly destroy documents when no longer needed. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and conditions of the construction contract, including but not limited to General Conditions, and the Special Conditions listed below, apply to work of this section.
BUILDING STANDARDS A.
Suspension System for Acoustical Panel Ceiling: acoustical panel ceiling suspension system. 1.
Heavy-duty system with seismic
B.
Ceiling Tile:
C.
Doors 7’-0” x 3’-0” solid core doors with birch clear finish. 1.
Armstrong - 755B 2x4 Fissured.
Corridors and interior fire rated doors: 1-Hour minimum (Note: Confirm per existing conditions).
D.
Door Frames:
E.
Door Hardware:
F.
Fire Sprinkler Heads: Tyco 155 degree SSP quik response heads with Heiter Industries No. 501 inverted white escutcheon. 1.
1.3
Structural Classification: Restraint.
Provide
Heavy-duty welded hollow metal frame. “Falcon” Locksets, C-key way - 7 pin core.
Renovations within an existing space having standard response heads are an acceptable replacement.
G.
Light Fixtures: Agency Space: 2x4 - 3 lamp fixture, 18 cell parabolic T8 (no reflectors).
H.
Floor tile, paint colors and cove base are agency specific.
PROJECT AND WORK IDENTIFICATION A.
Project Name and Location: RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE, CHEF HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING, 2400 Avila Road, Laguna Niguel, California.
SECTION 01 11 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.4
GOVERNMENT REPRESENTATIVES A.
The work will be under the general direction of a representative of the General Services Administration, Public Buildings Service, Design and Construction Division or another designated representative of the Government, referred to as the "Contracting Officer." 1.
B.
1.5
Where the reference to the "Contracting Officer" is made throughout the technical specification sections it refers to the Contracting Officer or any other authorized representative of Contracting Officer, acting within the limits of their authority as delegated by the Contracting Officer.
The provisions of this paragraph or provisions elsewhere in this contract regarding supervision, approval, or direction by the Contracting Officer or taken pursuant thereto, are not intended to and will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the accomplishment of the work, either as regards sufficiency or the time of performance, except as expressly otherwise provided for in this contract.
GOVERNMENT CODES AND REGULATIONS A.
Work under this Contract is subject to compliance with the following codes and regulations: 1.
International Code Council (ICC), 2006 building, fire, mechanical and plumbing codes.
2.
National Association of Plumbing-Heating-Cooling Contractors (NAPHCC) "National Standard Plumbing Code." 1999 Edition.
3.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Handbook, 1999 edition, including the following: a.
NFPA 70 - National Electric Code, 2009 Edition
b.
NFPA 90A - 2009 Edition
c.
NFPA 101 - 2009 Edition
4.
UFAS - Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, 1987 Edition. Where state and local codes are more stringent, those particular elements shall apply.
5.
ADAAG - ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.
6.
Other governing regulations are indicated in the sections of these specifications that specify the individual elements of the work and in the general conditions.
SECTION 01 11 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
1.6
With respect to seismic safety, the following codes shall govern. 1.
2006 California Building Code (CBC)
2.
2006 California Mechanical Code – PART 4, TITLE 24, CCR.
3.
2006 California Electrical Code – PART 3, TITLE 24, CCR.
4.
2006 California Plumbing Code - Part 5, TITLE 24, CCR.
5.
2006 California Fire Code – PART 9, TITLE 24, CCR.
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A.
General: The Contractor shall limit his use of the premises to the work indicated so as to allow for Government occupancy and use. 1.
2.
Use of the Site: Confine operations to the particular areas of the work involved and permitted under the Contract. Portions of the site beyond the areas involved are not to be disturbed. Conform to site rules and regulations affecting the work while engaged in project construction. The Contractor shall not allow areas outside of the immediate areas to be dirty. They shall be kept clean at all times. a.
Work shall be performed during normal business hours (6:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. Monday through Friday). However, should work become disruptive to the tenants, then work will be shifted to after hours at no additional cost to the Government.
b.
When work is required to be carried on outside of normal business hours (6:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m.) it shall be performed, with the approval of the Contracting Officer, between the hours of 6 pm to 6 am Monday through Friday, or all day Saturday and Sunday and Federal Holidays or as otherwise directed by the Contracting Officer.
Contractor Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a safe and neat condition throughout the construction period. a.
Repair damage caused by construction operations.
b.
Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period.
c.
Contractor shall coordinate with the Contracting Officer regarding the use of existing toilets during the construction period. The Contractor will be required to maintain in clean and sanitary condition
SECTION 01 11 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD any toilet facilities he may be privileged to use. If permission is granted to use existing toilet facilities, the Contractor will be required to repair or replace damaged fixtures, refurbish surfaces and where damage occurred as a result of the Contractors use; and in general restore the facilities to a condition that existed prior to the Contractor’s use; all at no added expense to the Government. 1.7
PARTIAL GOVERNMENT OCCUPANCY A.
The Government will occupy the existing building throughout the entire period of construction.
B.
Cooperate fully with the Government representative during construction operations to arrange for access to Government occupied areas. 1.
1.8
Conduct work in Government occupied areas to minimize conflicts with business operations and to facilitate Government usage.
C.
The Government reserves the right to place and install equipment as necessary in completed areas of the building and to occupy such completed areas prior to substantial completion.
D.
The Government's occupancy will be such that it will not substantially interfere with completion of the work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the work or any part of the work.
INSPECTION BY FIRE REGULATORY AUTHORITIES A.
This project is subject to inspection by the General Services Administration.
B.
Notify Contracting Officer when any inspections take place. The decision as to action to be taken as a result of inspections by GSA's Safety and Environmental Management Branch will be made by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT TO BE SALVAGED A.
Existing materials or equipment to be removed but to remain the property of the Government shall be considered "salvageable."
B.
Remove and handle such material and equipment without damaging it, and deliver same into storage on the site at a temporary storage place designated by the Contracting Officer; or, if such salvageable material or equipment is indicated to be reinstalled,
SECTION 01 11 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD it may be reinstalled directly from its original location without being delivered to a temporary storage place, when practicable. C.
3.2
Comply with requirements of Section 02 40 10 - Salvageable Property.
SUPPLEMENTAL FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS A.
All interior finishes (wall covering, ceiling tile, etc.) shall comply with GSA criteria for flame spread and smoke development ratings and shall meet GSA requirements or the IBC’s Interior Finishes requirements.
B.
All special locking hardware (cipher, key card, etc.) must comply with NFPA 101,7-2.1.6 and be operable with no more than one releasing operation from the direction of egress. Product data and catalog cut sheets of the special locking hardware shall be submitted to GSA’s, Safety and Environmental Management Branch (9PMSF) for review and approval prior to installation.
C.
All equipment and wiring (communication, power, fire alarm, etc.) installed in a plenum shall be listed for installation in such areas.
D.
All flexible air ducts shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, 2-3.2 in construction and installation.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 11 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 12 00 SECURITY PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECURITY CLAUSES A.
The Contractor shall agree to insert terms that conform substantially to the language of this clause, including the following, in all subcontracts. This clause applies to all contract workers, including cleaning service personnel. 1.
The Tenant security approval process is approximately 21 days.
B.
The Owner of the space occupied by the Tenant and members of the property management company who may be responsible for oversight of the maintenance of the space, SHALL NOT be allowed to maintain keys to Tenant space or permitted to have access to Tenant space without the approval of the Tenant, Physical Security Unit.
C.
Upon award of the contract, the Contractor, all subcontractor, key supervisory personnel and/or any other contract individuals designated by the Tenant who require access to any existing or proposed Tenant facility, property or information, must accurately complete the following forms and furnish them to the Tenant at least 45 work days prior to the arrival of contract individual to the site of the work under contract.
D.
Forms for cleaning personnel proposed for the facility shall be submitted sat least 90 days but preferably 180 days prior to the arrival of the contract individual to the site of the work under contract.
E.
1.
SF-86, “Questionnaire for National Security Positions “OR.
2.
SF-85, Questionnaire for Public Trust Positions.
3.
Two copies of form FD-258 (fingerprint card).
All other contract individuals designated by the Tenant who require access to any Tenant facility, property or information, must accurately complete the following forms and furnish them to the Tenant at least 25 work days prior to the arrival of contract individual to the site of the work under contract. 1.
FD-816 (Background Data information Form), two copies of.
2.
FD-258 (fingerprint card), and two copies of FD-484 (Privacy Act)
3.
Forms can be obtained from the local Tenant Ofice.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD F.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure all contractor personnel are in full compliance with applicable Immigration and Naturalization Service. US Department of Justice, Employee Eligibility Verification requirements, such as those set forth in Title 8, U.S. Code, Section 274a.
G.
A background investigation, the scope of which will be at the discretion of the Tenant, will be conducted on these individuals. At the discretion the Tenant contract individuals may also be interviewed by the Tenant (or Tenant contract investigator) regarding foreign travel, associates, residences or other matters of concern to the Tenant in deciding whether to grant access to its facilities, property, or information, and may be requested to undergo a polygraph examination to fully resolve any security concerns. Refusal or failure to accurately complete the forms, to be interviewed, or to undergo a polygraph examination to resolve any questionable matters will be deemed reasonable cause for denial of access to Tenant facilities, property or information Lack of candor may also be a strong factor for denial of access.
H.
Access to Tenant facilities, property or information, will be granted only where such access is clearly consistent with the mission and responsibilities of the Tenant. If, for any reason, a contract individual is denied access to any Tenant facility, property or information, the Tenant will not disclose to the Contractor the reason for denial and will only make such disclosure to the affected Contractor employee pursuant to the provisions of the Freedom of Information or Privacy Acts. The Tenant will not be liable for any expense in the replacement of the individual or any costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of such denial. It is the policy of the Tenant that these individuals already employed by the contracting organization/ individual (i.e., that the individual’s employment not hinge upon an access or security clearance determination by the Tenant) and the Tenant will assume no liability between the contracting organization and its employees as a result of this procedure.
I.
The Tenant reserves the right to revoke any contract individual’s access to its facilities, property or information, where such access is no longer clearly consistent with the Tenant mission and responsibilities, and the Contractor agrees to immediately remove that individual from the work site in such circumstances. In cases of access revocation, the Tenant will inform the individual of the basis for the revocation unless to do so would reveal classified or sensitive information; and, give the individual and opportunity to explain, rebut or refute such basis in writing. Access will remain revoked pending prompt review of any such submission by the individual.
J.
The Tenant reserves the right to reinvestigate contract individuals on a periodic basis (usually every five years) or where facts or information indicate the continued access may no longer be clearly consistent with the Tenant’s mission and responsibilities. The scope of any reinvestigation will be at
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD the sole discretion of the Tenant. Refusal or failure to accurately complete any necessary forms, to be interviewed, or to undergo a polygraph examination to resolve any questionable matters during a reinvestigation will be deemed reasonable cause for revocation of access to Tenant facilities, property or information.
1.2
K.
Appropriate badges may be furnished by the Tenant authorizing escorted or unescorted access to Tenant facilities and property. The badge, if furnished, will be kept at a location to be determined by the Tenant and shall be picked up by the contract individual granted access upon arrival at Tenant premises. It shall be worn at all times on the upper part of the body so as to be clearly visible and will be returned to the Tenant whenever the wearer leaves Tenant premises for any reason or any length of time. The Tenant may require all contract and subcontract individuals to execute a security awareness briefing form, FD835, Security Acknowledge Form.
L.
Upon request, the Contractor shall provide, for approval by the Tenant, written physical security procedures and policies to be followed by contract individuals for access to the project as well security measures taken by the Contractor to prevent unauthorized entry by contract individuals during off-duty hours.
INFORMATIONAL DATA A.
Due to the sensitive occupancy of the building, foreign nationals from dissident political areas may be excluded and denied entry approval. In general, foreign nationals may be used, even those from dissident areas. The Contractor agrees to dismiss from the site, when directed by the Tenant, any individual whose continued employment is deemed to be contrary to the public interest or inconsistent with the best interest of the national security.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing the personnel required, with the necessary skills and qualifications, to perform the work as described. Additionally, the Contractor shall provide an individual on-site, who is authorized to negotiate and financially commit change orders for the Principal.
C.
The Contractor shall store materials only in places where directed by the Tenant. No fire-hazardous materials or flammable liquids shall be stored or otherwise maintained within a building or structure, except as approved, in accordance with the local fire regulations.
D.
The Contractor and employees shall refrain from the use of hallways, corridors, stairways, elevators, grounds, or other facilities which have not been specifically authorized for his use.
E.
Contractor personnel may eat at the public food outlets, or at other open food service facilities on a cash basis at current prices.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD F.
The illegal possession and use of drugs and paraphernalia by the Contractor and contract employees will not be permitted. Implicit with the acceptance of this contract is the Contractor's agreement to comply with Federal statutes, laws, and regulations, including those regulations.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 25 13 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
1.3
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.
DEFINITIONS A.
Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.
B.
Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions: 1.
Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.
2.
Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Government or Architect.
3.
Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents.
4.
The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities.
SUBMITTALS A.
Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 60 days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. 1.
Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and in accordance with procedures required for Change Order proposals.
SECTION 01 25 13
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
3.
Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a.
Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures.
b.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
c.
A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect.
d.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Government and separate Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.
e.
A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.
f.
Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.
g.
Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.
Architect's Action: Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the Architect may request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request. Within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of the additional information or documentation, which ever is later, the Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order.
SECTION 01 25 13
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.4
SUBSTITUTIONS A.
Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1.
Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.
2.
Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents.
3.
The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted.
4.
The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents.
5.
The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.
6.
The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.
7.
A substantial advantage is offered the Government, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Government may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Government may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Government or separate Contractors, and similar considerations.
8.
The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.
9.
The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.
10.
The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty.
SECTION 01 25 13
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 25 13
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1.
Coordinating of construction operations.
2.
Submittals of coordination drawings and staff names.
3.
Work in occupied facilities, including work sequence, noise and vibration control, dust control.
4.
HVAC systems and utilities shutdown.
5.
Damage and restorations.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1.
Division 1 Section “Coordination and Meetings” for progress meetings, coordination meetings, and preinstallation conferences.
2.
Division 1 Section “Construction Schedules - CPM” for preparing and submitting the Contractor’s Construction Schedule.
3.
Division 1 Section “Temporary Facilities” for requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection.
4.
Division 1 Section “ Materials and Equipment” for coordinating general installation.
5.
Division 1 Section “Project Closeout” for coordinating contract closeout.
6.
Section 01 12 00:
Security Provisions.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
SECTION 01 31 13
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
1.
Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after is own installation.
2.
Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3.
Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 1.
C.
1.3
Prepare similar memoranda for the Government and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Preparation of schedules.
2.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
3.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
4.
Progressing meetings.
5.
Project closeout activities.
6.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the Work.
SUBMITTALS A.
Coordination Drawings: prepare coordination drawings where coordination is needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. Prepare coordination drawings where there is limited access due to hard, non-accessible ceiling construction, in order to adjust location of components requiring access to areas above accessible ceilings. 1.
Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
SECTION 01 31 13
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
B.
Staff Names: Within 10 days after issuance of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor’s principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers. Provide their 24-hour emergency access numbers for all key persons.
C.
Work Plan: Submit work plan fully describing:
D.
1.4
Indicate required installation sequences and access requirements.
1.
Means of protection of occupied areas from Work within and adjacent to occupied areas.
2.
Noise Mitigation Plan, as specified in Division One section, “Demolition and Construction Noise and Vibration Control”.
3.
Dust Control Plan, including layout, location, and type of machines, ducting, removal and treatment of windows, power requirements, filters, etc.
4.
Security Plan and Tracking of Construction Traffic: samples of the following: a.
Security Clearances and Badges Tracking Log
b.
Daily Log
c.
Sub-Contractor Daily Activity Report
d.
Weekly Job Inspection Report
e.
List of Required Notifications to GSA
Submit
All submittals required in this Section shall comply with requirements contained in Division One Section “Submittals”.
WORK IN OCCUPIED FACILITIES A.
General Requirements. Sequence work to avoid interference with operation of occupied facilities. Any work, which will cause disruptive or intrusive noise in any occupied area, shall be performed outside normal business hours. All work in occupied areas shall be performed outside the building’s normal business hours. Normal business hours of building are 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM, Monday through Friday. Prior to demolition or construction work, submit for Contracting Officer approval a construction schedule and specific work plan which will permit the existing user to function in the space during construction. Such plan and schedule shall provide for mitigation of all potential interruptions or disruptions, including, but not limited to, noise intrusion, dust, soil, or debris, interruptions of any service or utility, and the
SECTION 01 31 13
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD like. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing a minimum of 1 week in advance of anticipated work, which may, because of noise, disturbances, or other causes, which require advance operational planning. See Section 01 57 20 for list of prohibited operations. 1.
Maintain uninterrupted mechanical, telephone security, data, electrical, fire protection, or other service to portions of the building not included in the work of this Contract. Responsibility will be limited to specific work areas and those utilities leading to and from specific work areas within the limits of this project.
2.
Any work required within occupied areas shall be included and clearly identified in the Progress Schedule specified in Division 1 Section “Schedules and Reports”. Contractor shall Schedule the work and provide protective measures so as to allow user-occupied areas to function without interruption. Notify the Contacting Officer a minimum of 1 week in advance of any work within occupied areas. Obtain Contracting Officer’s approval of complete protective measures prior to commencement of actual work.
B.
Provide noise mitigation measures as specified in Division 1 Section “ Demolition and Construction Noise and Vibration Control”.
C.
Provide dust control mitigation measures as specified herein to prevent dust from migrating to adjacent occupied areas during construction. Negative pressure of approximately 0.05” w.c. shall be maintained between the construction area and adjoining occupied areas. The existing air conditioning system shall not be used for this purpose. Provide temporary ventilation system to create the required negative pressure whenever dust is being created or is present. Comply with the requirements of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), with the requirements of the City of Laguna Nigel Noise Ordinance. The system shall be designed to minimize noise and vibration. Fresh air intake and system exhaust may be taken from exterior window openings, designed to mitigate appearance on exterior of building, and subject to the written approval of the Contracting Officer. Within 10 days of the notice to proceed, Contractor shall submit the design drawings, showing aspects and features of the proposed dust control mitigation system, to the Contracting Officer for review and approval. Allow two weeks for Government approval. Upon completion of installation of dust control system, Contractor shall demonstrate the effectiveness of ventilation system and other dust control measures and obtain approval of the Contracting Officer prior to commencement of demolition work.
D.
Maintain and protect all services to the existing Telecom and electrical rooms. Such protection shall include protection of room and equipment from dust, and services shall include lighting, power, emergency and uninterruptible power, and cooling.
SECTION 01 31 13
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.5
E.
Maintain ingress and egress to and from existing building for purpose of fire and emergency entrance and escape, loading and delivery, and building maintenance. Methods shall be approved by the Contracting Officer.
F.
Protect electrical, water, gas, sewerage, telephone utilities, data lines, and fiber optic cables against interruption, damage, or contamination during construction. Install temporary utilities it necessary to maintain continuous utility service.
G.
Provide temporary walls as indicated on drawings to separate occupied areas from work areas. Seal vertical joints and joints at the floors, walls, and ceilings to create dustproof enclosures with an STC rating of 45. Paint temporary partition on the occupied side in a white color.
H.
Limit equipment and vehicles in ingress and egress and the use of service areas.
EXISTING HVAC SYSTEMS AND UTILITIES SHUT-DOWN AND START UP A.
The existing HVAC, plumbing, electrical, security, data, telephone, and fire protection systems shall remain in operation throughout all occupied portions of the building during the course of construction. System shut down and start up will be permitted only during designated periods. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing of dates, times, and duration of system shut downs a minimum of 1 week in advance of shut down periods. Make connections to existing piping, ductwork, and wiring during shut down periods.
B.
Provide temporary by-pass piping, ductwork and blank-off plates, and wiring as required to keep systems in continuous operation at times other than the shutdown period.
C.
No system shutdown shall be permitted without the written approval from the Contracting Officer. Furnish requests for each shutdown to the Contracting Officer. Indicate systems to be shut down, areas affected, shutdown duration, and contingency plan if the work cannot be completed within the specified time.
D.
Shut down and start up times needs to be coordinated with GSA. The ventilation system for the Tenant is on 24/7. A portable power unit will be required when power interruption is required during construction.
E.
Work to be performed in or around duct shafts including but not limited to cutting shaft walls, cutting and welding steel inside the shafts, and cutting and connecting new ducts to existing duct risers that require stopping the central fans be done in offhours. Work shall be planned and scheduled to be completed within the available time.
F.
When working in or around shafts, protect the shafts with temporary sheet metal floors and ceilings around the work area,
SECTION 01 31 13
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD to prevent debris from falling into or dust migrating into the shafts where metal floor grates occur.
1.6
G.
Construct temporary partitions and plenums of sheet metal panels as specified in Division 23. Partitions and plenums shall be airtight, dust-tight, substantially constructed, and securely bolted to the shaft walls, floors, and overhead structure.
H.
Provide temporary closures for new and existing openings and open-ended ducts through shaft walls until they are connected.
I.
Provide protective measures and temporary facilities as required to prevent construction debris, dust, and fumes from entering duct shafts. If contaminants enter duct shafts, purge the duct shafts until dust and fumes are removed before the start of he next day’s business hours.
J.
Remove debris from duct shafts at the end of each shift and at completion of work. Duct shafts shall be left clean and in an undamaged condition.
DAMAGE AND RESTORATIONS A.
Immediately restore and replace damage to existing and new facilities caused by equipment or other operations as directed by the Contracting Officer.
B.
Restoration shall be equal to the original work, and finishes shall match the appearance of similar existing adjacent work, as approved by the Contracting Officer, at no added expense to the Government.
C.
Remove and replace work not properly restored or not capable of being restored as directed by the Contracting Officer, at no added cost to the Government.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
GENERAL COORDINATION
PROVISIONS
A.
Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
B.
Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
SECTION 01 31 13
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
Maintain uninterrupted mechanical and electrical service to portions of the building not included in the work of this Contract.
D.
Cooperate with Government so that completion of work may proceed in a timely manner. Furnish other contractors, whose work is fitted to this work, detail and erection drawings giving full information regarding the fabrication and assembly of this work. Drawings shall indicate verified field measurements. Cooperate in timing work to join with the work of other contractors or the Government.
E.
Check the drawings of other contracts for interferences with this work and promptly report in writing any such interference to the Contracting Officer. Submit complete information, including drawings, descriptions, sketches, marked prints, as required for the Contracting Officer’s coordination of drawings by others which are a part of this work.
F.
To insure the proper evaluation of subsequent work of this Contract, measure work already in place and report to the Contracting any discrepancy between the executed work and the Contract Documents.
G.
Do cutting and fitting of this work and of other work that may be required to properly fit this work to receive, or be received by, the work of other contractors as indicated or reasonably implied by the contract Documents. Properly finish and complete this work after other contractors have finished. Costs for additional cutting and fitting caused by defective work shall be borne by the party responsible. Do not endanger any work by cutting, fitting, or otherwise, and do not alter the work of any other contractor without the Contracting Officer’s approval.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 31 13
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 31 20 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
This section specifies general administrative procedures and performance requirements.
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS A.
General: Prepare and distribute to each entity performing work at project site, a written memorandum of instructions on required coordination activities, including required notices, reports and attendance at meetings. Prepare similar memorandum for separate contractors where interfacing of work is required.
B.
Coordination of Trades: Coordinate work of different trades so that interference between mechanical, electrical, architectural, and structural work, including existing services, will be avoided and within limits indicated the maximum practical space for operation, repair, removal, and testing of equipment is provided.
C.
Weekly Coordination Meeting: In addition to specific preinstallation meetings and coordination meetings for each major element of work, and regular project meetings for other purposes (as indicated elsewhere in contract documents), hold weekly general project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled times which are convenient for everyone involved.
ADMINISTRATIVE/SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A.
General: In addition to a General Superintendent and other administrative personnel required for performance of the work, provide specific coordinating personnel as specified herein.
B.
Environmental Control Officer: The Contractor shall designate an "Environmental Control Officer" whose duties shall include the responsibility for enforcing the environmental protection provisions of these specifications including safety and health; the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act; and other applicable Federal, state and local standards.
C.
Project Coordinator: Provide a full-time Project Coordinator, who is experienced in administration and supervision of building construction including plumbing, mechanical and electrical work, and who is hereby authorized to act as the general coordinator of interfaces between units of work.
LIMITATIONS FOR USE OF SITE A.
General: In addition to site utilization limitations and requirements shown on drawings, and indicated by other contract
SECTION 01 31 20 - PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD documents, administer allocation of available space equitably among entities needing access and space, so as to produce best overall efficiency in performance of total work of project.
1.5
B.
Partial Occupancy of Premises: The parts of premises will be occupied during phases of the performance of work under the contract. Where the exclusive occupancy of part of the premises is required for the performance of the work, the Government will vacate the areas involved.
C.
Loading Dock Facilities: The loading dock is available on a first come, first serve basis. Morning hours are the busiest with lighter usage during and after lunch. Parking is available after hours and weekends. One week in advance of on site parking need, Contractor shall provide a list of Contractor and subcontractor vehicles (one per Contractor or sub-contractor).
D.
Storage or Sale of Equipment Prohibited: Storage or sale of excess demolished material on the site is not permitted. Remove demolished materials from site.
SPECIAL REPORTS A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, submit special reports to the Contracting Officer within one day of occurrence requiring special report, with copy to others affected by occurrence.
B.
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of unusual and significant nature occurs at site (example: visit by news media), prepare and submit a special report listing chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. 1.
1.6
When such events are known or predictable in advance, advise the Contracting Officer in advance at earliest possible date.
INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND REPORTS A.
General: Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in determination of probable compliances of work with requirements, but do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for those compliances, or for general fulfillment of requirements of contract documents.
B.
Qualification of Testing Agencies: Except as otherwise indicated and except where manufacturer's testing facilities are indicated as acceptable, engage independent testing laboratories specializing in required services and acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 01 31 20 - PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.7
TRADEPERSONS AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS A.
Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that persons performing work at site are skilled and knowledgeable in methods and craftsmanship needed to produce required quality-levels for workmanship in completed work.
B.
Remove and replace work which does not comply with workmanship standards as specified and as recognized in the construction industry for applications indicated. Remove and replace other work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its replacement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A.
Pre-Installation Conferences: Where pre-installation conferences are specified in technical sections, well in advance of installation meet at project site with installers and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators who are involved in or affected by unit of work, and in its coordination or integration with other work which has preceded or will follow. Advise the Contracting Officer of scheduled meeting dates.
B.
Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate to receive work, and conditions under which work will be performed, and to report (in writing to Contractor) unsatisfactory conditions.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to the extent these are more explicit or more stringent than requirements indicated in contract documents.
D.
Coordinate enclosure (closing-in) of work with required inspections and tests, so as to minimize necessity of uncovering work.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
General: During handling and installation of work at project site clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
SECTION 01 31 20 - PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.3
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION A.
Solid, Liquid, and Gaseous Contaminants: Contractor shall be responsible for the proper disposal of all solid, liquid, and gaseous contaminants in accordance with all local codes.
B.
Disposal of Refuse: Remove refuse resulting from construction operations from the site.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 31 20 - PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 32 17 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - CPM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
DESCRIPTION A.
1.2
Prepare and submit construction schedules (CPM) as specified and required for orderly and timely completion of the project.
PROCEDURES A.
Within sixty 60 calendar days after award of contract, but not more than thirty 30 calendar days after notice to proceed, the Contractor shall submit, for review, to the GSA Project Manager, a detailed Construction Schedule setting forth all requirements for complete execution of the work.
B.
The GSA will review and return the Contractor's Construction Schedule, with summary comments, within fourteen 14 calendar days. If revisions are required, the contractor shall resubmit the Construction Schedule within fourteen 14 calendar days.
C.
Changes to Construction Schedule will be mutually agreed upon by the GSA and the Contractor.
D.
Include in the initial schedule a written summary narrative sufficiently comprehensive to explain basis of Contractor's approach to the work.
E.
If a Construction Schedule is considered by the GSA Project manager to be NOT in compliance with any requirement of the Contract, the Contractor will be notified to review and revise the Construction Schedule and bring it into compliance. Failure of the Contractor to submit a Construction Schedule in full compliance with the Contract may result in a delay in the processing progress payments, since Construction Schedule will be used in evaluating progress for payment approval.
F.
Simultaneously with each submittal of Progress Payment Request, Contractor shall deliver to the GSA Project Manager an updated Construction Schedule reflecting work progress as of the end of previous reporting period. Each such Construction Schedule reflecting work progress as of the end of previous reporting period. Each such Construction Schedule shall show actual progress to date in execution of the work, together with a projected schedule for completion of the work. No changes in logic will be permitted unless agreed upon with GSA Project Manager.
G.
All scheduled submittals are subject to review and acceptance by the GSA. The GSA retains the right to withhold progress payments until the Contractor submits a Construction Schedule acceptable to the GSA Project Manager.
SECTION 01 32 17 - PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD H.
1.3
Concurrent with the acceptance of the Contractor's submitted Construction Schedule by GSA Project manager, shall be Contractor's signature of acceptance.
PREPARATION GUIDELINES A.
Construction Schedule shall be prepared using Microsoft Project software and the Critical Path Method (CPM) of scheduling, unless an alternate method is approved in advance by GSA Project Manager.
B.
Construction Schedule shall be computer-based, in a format acceptable to GSA Project manager. The level of detail shown in the schedule shall be equal to, or greater than, that outlined in the Table of Contents of the Contract Technical Specifications, including any addenda.
C.
The durations and events shown on the schedule shall conform to the timeframe set forth in the Contract. The schedule shall indicate all contract "milestone events" and other milestones agreed to y the GSA; no other manually-imposed dates will be accepted unless approved.
D.
Construction Schedule shall represent a practical plan to complete work within the time requirements of the contract.
E.
1.
A schedule extending beyond contract time will not be acceptable.
2.
A schedule showing work completed in less than contract time will be unacceptable. Contractor shall indicate any "float" (plus or minus).
3.
A schedule found unacceptable by the GSA Project Manager shall be revised by Contractor and resubmitted.
Construction schedule shall clearly show sequence of construction activities and specifically indicate: 1.
Start and completion of all items of work, their major components, and interim milestone completion dates as determined by Contractor and the GSA.
2.
Activities for procurement, delivery, installation of equipment, materials and other supplies, including: a.
Time for submittals, resubmittals, and reviews. Include decision dates for selection of finishes.
b.
Time for fabrication and delivery of manufactured products for work.
c.
Interdependence of procurement and construction activities.
SECTION 01 32 17 - PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD d.
F.
1.4
Dates for testing and balancing equipment, and final inspection.
Schedule shall be in sufficient detail to assure adequate planning and execution of work. 1.
Each activity shall range in duration from 1 to 15 work days, with the exception of fabrication and procurement activities, unless directed otherwise by GSA. Activity durations shall be the total of actual days required to perform and complete that activity.
2.
Schedule shall be designed, in the judgement of the GSA Project Manager, to allow monitoring and evaluation of progress in performance of work; it shall be calendar timescaled.
3.
Activities shall include: a.
Description; what is to be accomplished and where.
b.
Workday duration.
c.
Responsibility code; identifying who performs each individual activity.
4.
Network shall show continuous flow from left to right.
5.
Identify days per week and shifts per day worked; also, non-work days and holidays.
6.
Identify activities which constitute controlling operations, i.e., milestones or critical path.
G.
Failure to include any element of work required for performance of this contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing work required to comply with the Contract Documents, notwithstanding acceptance of Construction Schedule.
H.
Submittal of the construction Schedule shall be interpreted as Contractor's confirmation that schedule meets requirements of the Contract Documents, and that the work will be executed in sequence indicated in the schedule.
REVIEWS, UPDATES, AND REVISIONS A.
The GSA Project Manager will review and return the Contractor's Construction Schedule, with summary comments, within fourteen 14 calendar days. 1.
If revisions are required, the Contractor shall resubmit the construction schedule within fourteen 14 calendar days following receipt of the GSA's comments.
SECTION 01 32 17 - PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
After Contractor and the GSA agree to a final schedule, it will become the Project Construction Schedule and considered part of the contract documents.
C.
The Contractor shall submit to the GSA Project Manager a letter confirming the acceptance of the Project Construction Schedule by both the GSA and Contractor.
D.
The Contractor shall analyze and update the Construction Schedule: 1.
E.
Once each month, or as deemed necessary by the GSA, or upon a major change order affecting the work, the Contractor shall participate with the GSA in a schedule review to include: a.
Actual completion dates for work items completed during report period.
b.
Actual commencement dates for work items started during report period.
c.
Estimated remaining duration for work items in progress are always to be less than the original duration, unless modified by change order.
d.
Estimated commencement dates for work items scheduled to start during month following report period.
e.
Changes in duration of work items.
f.
of current and most crucial critical paths to required completion dates.
2.
In the case of a schedule change, Contractor shall include a narrative report with the updated progress analysis, which shall include, but not be limited to, a description of the problem areas, current and anticipated delaying factors, and any proposed revisions for a recovery plan.
3.
All change orders affecting the schedule shall be clearly identified as separate, new activities.
4.
Review of the Construction Schedule shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for accomplishing all work in accordance with the Contract documents.
Updates: The Contractor shall submit to the GSA Project Manager, with each monthly payment application, an up-to-date Construction Schedule to include the following: 1.
Work Item Report: Detailing work items and dependencies as indicated on network diagram, listed in order of ascending work item number.
SECTION 01 32 17 - PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
F.
2.
Separate listing of activities completed during reporting period.
3.
Separate listing of activities which are currently in progress, indicating their remaining duration and percentages completed.
4.
Separate listing of activities which are causing delay in work progress.
5.
All reports shall be arranged based on areas (secure and non-secure).
6.
Narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Construction Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect, including effect of changes on schedules of individual contractors.
If, according to the current updated Construction Schedule, the GSA determines the Contractor is behind the contract completion date or any interim milestone completion dates, taking into account all time extensions to which Contractor is entitled, Contractor shall submit a revised schedule, showing a workable plan and a narrative description to complete the project on time. 1.
G.
The GSA may withhold progress payments until a revised Schedule, acceptable to the GSA, is submitted by Contractor.
Scheduling of change or extra work orders is the responsibility of Contractor. 1.
Contractor shall revise Construction Schedule to incorporate all activities involved in completing change orders, or extra work orders, and submit it to the GSA Project Manager for review.
2.
With concurrence of the GSA Project Manager, change orders or extra work orders of less than $15,000.00, and less than three 3 work days duration, do not need to be scheduled, unless change order affects current critical path or other outside schedules.
H.
If the GSA finds the Contractor is entitled to extension of any completion date under provisions of the Contract, the GSA Project manager's determination of total number of days extension will be based upon current analysis of Construction Schedule and upon data relevant to extension.
I.
Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the GSA Project Manager not more than seven 7 days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise, it shall be deemed finally waived for all purposes. The Contractor shall provide an
SECTION 01 32 17 - PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD estimate of the probable effect of such delay on the progress of the work as part of the claim. 1.5
1.6
1.7
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A.
Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to be an usurpation of Contractor's authority and responsibility to plan and schedule work as the Contractor sees fit, subject to all other requirements of contract documents.
B.
The Contractor shall provide at all times sufficient competent labor, materials, and equipment to properly carry on the work and to insure completion of each part in accordance with the construction Schedule and within the time agreed.
SUSPENSION OF PAYMENTS A.
Initial Submittal: The GSA has the right to withhold progress payments until the Construction Schedule is accepted by the GSA Project Manager.
B.
Monthly Submittals: The GSA has the right to withhold progress payments if Contractor fails to update and submit the Construction Schedule and reports as specified.
RECORD COPY A.
1.8
FORM OF SUBMITTAL A.
1.9
At completion of work items, submit as-built report and timescaled network diagram reflecting project as-built critical paths.
All Construction Schedule submittals shall be transmitted with a Letter of Transmittal and shall include six copies and one reproducible copy.
DETAILED REQUIREMENTS FOR SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A.
Selective demolition shall comply with Section 02 41 13 following:
B.
Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following: 1.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity.
2.
Interruption of utility services.
3.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4.
Use of elevator and stairs.
SECTION 01 32 17 - PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 5.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner’s on-site operations.
6.
Coordination of Owner’s continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner’s partial occupancy of completed Work.
7.
Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 32 17 - PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
The types of submittal requirements specified in this section include shop drawings, product data, samples, certificates of conformance or compliance, certified test or inspection reports, and miscellaneous work-related submittals. Individual submittal requirements are specified in applicable sections for each unit of work.
GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
B.
General: 1.
All submittals shall be made to the Contracting Officer or to an individual designated by the Contracting Officer.
2.
Only the Contracting Officer or an individual designated by him in writing can approve or disapprove submittals. Deviations and variations from the contract requirements contained in the submittal can be approved only by the Contracting Officer or an individual delegated such authority in writing by the Contracting Officer.
3.
Submittals shall be made in the quantity of 7 individual packages, unless a greater quantity is requested.
4.
Failure on the part of the Contractor to indicate approval on submittals prior to submission to Contracting Officer will result in their being returned to the Contractor without being acted upon.
5.
No delays in construction occasioned by the Contractor's failure to submit material for approval in accordance with the approved schedule will be excused.
6.
Issue A Submittal Log indicating, what Submittal are require for entire Project.
7.
Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions".
Scheduling: Develop schedule for submissions requiring approval and include in the network plan required by section "Critical Path Method of Scheduling."
SECTION 01 33 00 PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.3
C.
Coordination and Sequencing: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of the work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and sequence different categories of submittals for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination of the Contracting Officer's review with another.
D.
Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, Contractor, subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other submittals.
E.
Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking and provide space for the Contracting Officer's action marking. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals, which are received from sources other than through Contractor's office, will be returned without action.
F.
No Partial Submittals will be reviewed.
SPECIFIC-CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual work sections, comply with requirements specified herein for each indicated category of submittal. Provide and process intermediate submittals, where required between initial and final, similar to initial submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings: Refer to clause "Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings, and Schedules" of the General Conditions. Provide newly-prepared information, on reproducible sheets, with graphic information at accurate scale (except as otherwise indicated), with name of preparer indicated (firm name). Show dimensions and note which are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in the work shown. Indicate compliance with standards, and special coordination requirements. Do not allow shop drawing copies without stamp indicating approval by the Contracting Officer to be used in connection with the work. 1.
Submittal: Seven prints, plus 3 additional prints where required for maintenance manuals; 4 will be retained and remainder will be returned, one of which is to be marked-up and maintained by Contractor as "Record Document".
2.
Equipment and Systems: Shop drawings for equipment and systems shall show ratings (where applicable), and how components are assembled, function together, and how they will be installed. Shop drawings, product data, certificate of conformance or compliance, certified test or inspection reports, and other submittals for equipment, systems, and their component parts shall be coordinated and submitted as a unit. Multiple or piecemeal submissions are not acceptable except where prior approval is obtained from the Contracting Officer, in which case a list of data to be submitted later shall be included with the first submission.
SECTION 01 33 00 PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.
Coordination Drawings: Prior to installation of sleeves and inserts for equipment, and/or the performance of work in spaces in which two or more trades are involved and in which the probability of interference exists as determined by either the Contractor or the Contracting Officer, submit composite coordination drawings for the work. Show the work of all involved trades in a scale not less than 1/2" (12.7mm) = 1'-0" (304.8mm) larger if required by the Contracting Officer. Any work installed prior to approval of coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk, and subsequent relocations required to avoid interference shall be made at no cost to the Government. a.
C.
Product Data: Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system; and mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to project. Include manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field measurements which have been checked, and special coordination requirements. Maintain one set of product data (for each submittal) at project site, available for reference. 1.
D.
In case interference develops, the Contracting Officer will decide which work shall be relocated, regardless of which was installed first.
Submittals: Contractor shall not submit product data, or allow its use on the project, until he has confirmed compliance with requirements of contract documents. Submittal is for information and record, unless otherwise indicated. Initial submittal is final submittal unless returned by the Contracting Officer, marked with an action which indicates an observed noncompliance. Submit 10 copies, two of which will be returned. GSA may request additional copies when they need them. a.
Provide a preliminary single-copy submittal where required (or desired by Contractor) for selection of options by the Contracting Officer.
b.
Installer's Copy: Do not proceed with installation of materials, products or systems until final copy of applicable product data is in possession of Installer.
Warranties: 1.
Submit written warranties to the Contracting Officer prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Contracting Officer's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 01 33 00 PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Government through the Contracting Officer for approval prior to final execution. a.
3.
E.
Refer to individual Section of Division-2 through -31 for specific content requirements, and requirements for submittal of special warranties.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. a.
Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer.
b.
Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS," the Project title or name, ant the name of the Contractor.
Samples: (Refer to clause "Samples" of General Conditions.) Provide units identical with final condition of proposed materials or products for the work. Include "range" samples (not less than 3 units) where unavoidable variations must be expected, and describe or identify variations between units of each set. Provide full set of optional samples where the Contracting Officer's selection is required. Prepare samples to match the Government-furnished sample where so indicated. Include information with each sample to show generic description, source or product name and manufacturer, limitations, and compliance with standards. 1.
Sizes of Samples: Samples shall be furnished in the sizes that are customary and standard in the particular industry involved, or in the fabricator's typical commercial sample sizes; except, samples shall not be smaller than the sizes indicated below: a.
Sample of Equipment or Device:
b.
Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches: up to 8 1/2 by 11 inches.
c.
Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 1/2 by 11 inches and adequate to indicate color, texture, and materials variations.
SECTION 01 33 00 PAGE 4
full size. Built
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.4
d.
Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 10-inch length or length to be supplied, if less than 10 inches. Examples of linear devices or materials are conduit and handrails.
e.
Sample of Non-Solid Materials: Pint. Examples of non-solid materials are sand and paint.
f.
Color Selection Samples:
g.
Sample Panel:
h.
Sample Installation:
2 inches by 4 inches.
4 feet by 4 feet. 100 square feet.
2.
Submittal: At Contractor's option, provide preliminary submittal of a single set of samples for review and action. Otherwise, initial submittal is final submittal unless returned with action which requires resubmittal. Submit 3 sets of samples in final submittal; one set will be returned.
3.
Quality Control Set: Maintain returned final Contracting Officer approved set of samples at project site, in suitable condition and available for quality control comparisons.
E.
Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Follow same procedure as for product data. Where feasible, and/or where required by other sections of specification indicate compliance with the specified standard by means of a label on the container, or on an inconspicuous place on the product.
F.
Certified Test and Inspection Reports: Process each as either "shop drawing" or "product data", depending upon whether report is uniquely prepared for project or a standard publication of workmanship control testing at point of production; process accordingly.
G.
Warranties (Guarantees): In addition to copies desired for Contractor's use, furnish 4 executed copies, except furnish additional (conformed) copies where required for maintenance manuals.
H.
Record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, spare parts lists and warranties are to be noted as submittals.
ACTION ON SUBMITTALS A.
Contracting Officer's Action: Except when no action is required as in submittal for the record, or information only, the Contracting Officer will take appropriate action. Where action and return is required or requested, the Contracting Officer will review each submittal, mark with Action, and where possible return within 2 weeks of receipt. Where submittal must be held for coordination, Contractor will be so advised.
SECTION 01 33 00 PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
Final Unrestricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with contract documents, when submittal is returned marked "Approved." Any deviation from the Contract shall be specifically identified by the Contractor in writing.
2.
Final-But-Restricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with notations and corrections on submittal and with contract documents, when submittal is returned marked "Approved as Noted."
3.
Returned for Resubmittal: Do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain a different action marking. Do not allow submittals marked "Disapproved, Resubmit" (or unmarked submittals where a marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the work.
4.
Other Action: Where submittal is returned for other reasons, with the Contracting Officer's explanation included, it will be marked "Action Not Required."
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 33 00 PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 35 30 SAFETY AND HEALTH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Safety Meeting: Representatives of the Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer prior to the start of work under this contract for the purpose of reviewing the Contractor's safety and health programs and discussing implementation of all safety and health provisions pertinent to the work to be performed under the contract. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss, in detail, the measures he/she intends to take in order to control any unsafe or unhealthy conditions associated with the work to be performed under the contract. If directed by the Contracting Officer, this meeting may be held in conjunction with other meetings which are scheduled to take place prior to start of work under this contract. The level of detail for the safety meeting is dependent upon the nature of the work and the potential inherent hazards. The Contractor's principal on-site representatives, the general superintendent and his/her safety representatives shall attend this meeting.
B.
Compliance With Regulations: All work, including contact with and handling of hazardous materials, the disturbance or dismantling of structures containing hazardous materials and/or the disposal of hazardous materials shall comply with the applicable requirements of 29 CFR and 40 CFR, latest edition. Work involving the disturbance, dismantling of asbestos or asbestos containing materials; the demolition of structures containing asbestos; and/or the disposal and removal of asbestos, shall also comply with the requirements of 40 CFR latest edition. All work shall comply with applicable state and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between applicable regulations, the most stringent shall apply.
C.
The following CFR apply: 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Health and Environmental Control 29 CFR 1926, Construction Safety 40 CFR 261, Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste 40 CFR 262, Generators of Hazardous Waste 40 CFR 263, Transporters of Hazardous Waste 40 CFR 264, Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities 49 CFR 178, Shipping Container Specification
SECTION 01 35 30
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
1.2
1.3
SUBMITTALS A.
Accident Reporting: A copy of each accident report, which the Contractor or subcontractors submit to their insurance carriers, shall be forwarded to the Contracting Officer as soon as possible, but in no event later than 24 hours after the accident occurred.
B.
Permits: If hazardous materials are disposed of off site, submit copies of permits from applicable, Federal, state, or municipal authorities and necessary certificates that the material has been disposed of as per regulations.
AIR QUALITY A.
1.4
Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable regulations pertaining to the health and safety of personnel during the execution of work, and shall hold the Government harmless for any action on his/her part or that of his/her employees or subcontractors, which results in illness, injury or death.
Comply with Federal, state, and local regulations pertaining to the air pollution, particularly the restrictions of the California Air Resources Board (HARB).
DUST CONTROL A.
Keep dust down at all times, including during nonworking periods. Use vacuuming, wet mopping, wet sweeping, or wet power brooming. Only wet cutting will be permitted for cutting concrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.
2.2
Special facilities, devices, equipment, clothing, and similar items used by the Contractor in the execution of work shall comply with the applicable regulations.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A.
The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Contracting Officer any material suspected of being hazardous which he/she encounters during execution of the work.
B.
A determination will be made by the Contracting Officer as to whether the Contractor shall Perform tests to determine if the material is hazardous. If the Contracting Officer directs the Contractor to perform tests, and/or if the material is found hazardous and additional protective measures are needed, a contract change may be required.
SECTION 01 35 30
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PROTECTION A.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent injury to the public, building occupants, or damage to property of others. For the purposes of this contract, the public or building occupants shall include all persons not employed by the Contractor or a subcontractor working under his/her direction.
B.
Storing, positioning or use of equipment, tools, materials, scraps, and trash in a manner likely to present a hazard to building occupants by its accidental shifting, ignition, or other hazardous.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 35 30
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 35 54 GSA SECURITY REGULATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
GENERAL SECURITY REQUIREMENTS A.
Clearances: Bidders will be required to comply with security regulations imposed by the GSA, including any necessary clearances. 1.
B.
Notification: Notify the Contracting Officer, or his designated representative, not less than 7 calendar days prior to performing work in a security area. Include the following: 1. 2.
1.2
The GSA security approval process is approximately 60 days.
Names: Names of individuals who are to work. Time: The exact time, date, and hours of work.
GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA) SECURITY REGULATIONS A.
All persons employed within the boundaries of the property or restricted-access areas therein, and all persons permitted to enter such property and areas shall comply with the security regulations that have been established for this contract.
B.
The Contractor agrees on behalf of himself and all subcontractors that the following security regulations will be observed by Contractor personnel on the property. The Contractor shall make it a specific provision of his subcontracts that these regulations be accepted.
C.
The Government reserves the right to exclude or remove from the site or building any employee of the Contractor or Subcontractor whom the Government deems incompetent, careless, insubordinate, or otherwise objectionable or whose continued employment on the work is deemed by the Government to be contrary to the public interests. The Government further reserves the right to complete processing of security documentation for Contractor personnel assigned to work within restricted access areas prior to access to such areas by Contractor personnel.
D.
For overtime work the Contractor shall give the Contracting Officer or his designated representative seventy-two (72) hours notice. This notice is required so that security escorts may be provided and is separate and distinct from any notices required for outages. Also notify the Government if personnel will not report to the job site on a particular day so that the security escort would be released for other duties.
E.
Contractor and all subcontractors must submit to the security check and badging requirements. They will be issued temporary badges with their pictures on it. These and/or visitor badges must be worn by personnel on-site at all times. GSA security clearance is currently taking 30-60 days
SECTION 01 35 54
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.3
TENANT SPECIFIC SECURITY REGULATIONS A.
The Owner or Lessor of the space occupied by the Tenant and members of the property management company who may be responsible for oversight of the maintenance of the space, SHALL NOT be allowed to maintain keys to Tenant space or permitted to have access to Tenant space without the approval of the Tenant Physical Security Unit.
B.
Upon award of the contract, the contractor, all subcontractors, key supervisory personnel and/or any other contract individuals designated by the Tenant who require access to any existing or proposed Tenant facility, property or information, must accurately complete the following forms and furnish them to the Tenant at least 45 work days prior to the arrival of contract individual to the site of the work under contract.
C.
Forms for clearing personnel proposed for the facility shall be submitted at least 90 days but preferably 180 days prior to the arrival of the contract individuals to the site of the work under contract.
D.
1.
SF-86, "Questionnaire for National Security Positions" OR
2.
SF-85P, Questionnaire for Public Trust Positions, and
3.
Two copies of form FD-258 (fingerprint card)
All other contract individuals designated by the Tenant who require access to any Tenant facility, property or information must accurately complete the following forms and furnish them to the Tenant at least 25 work days prior to the arrival of contract individual to the site of the work under contract. 1.
FD-816 (Background Data Information Form), two copies of
2.
FD-258 (fingerprint card), and two copies of FD-484 (Privacy Act).
E.
Forms can be obtained from the local Tenant Office, free of charge.
F.
It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure all contractor personnel are in full compliance with applicable Immigration and Naturalization Service, US Department of Justice, Employee Eligibility Verification requirements, such as those set forth in Title 8, U.S. Code, Section 274a.
G.
A background investigation, the scope of which will be at the discretion of the Tenant, will be conducted on these individuals. At the discretion of the Tenant, contract individuals may also be interviewed by the Tenant (or Tenant contract investigators) regarding foreign travel, associates, residences or other matters of concern to the Tenant in deciding whether to grant access to its facilities, property, or information, and may be requested to undergo a polygraph examination to fully resolve any security
SECTION 01 35 54
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD concerns. Refusal or failure to accurately complete the forms, to be interviewed, or to undergo a polygraph examination to resolve any questionable matters will be deemed reasonable cause for denial of access to Tenant facilities, property or information. Lack of candor may also be a strong factor for denial of access. H.
Access to Tenant facilities, property or information, will be granted only where such access is clearly consistent with the mission and responsibilities of the Tenant. If, for any reason, a contract individual is denied access to any Tenant facility, property or information, the Tenant will not disclose to the contractor the reason for denial and will only make such disclosure to the affected contractor employee pursuant to the provisions of the Freedom of Information or Privacy Acts. The Tenant will not be liable for any expense in the replacement of the individual or any costs incurred by the contractor as a result of such denial. It is the policy of the Tenant that these individuals already employed by the contracting organization/ individual (i.e., that the individual’s employment not hinge upon an access or security clearance determination by the Tenant) and the Tenant will assume no liability between the contracting organization and its employees as a result of this procedure.
I.
The Tenant reserves the right to revoke any contract individual's access to its facilities, property or information, where such access is no longer clearly consistent with the Tenant’s mission and responsibilities, and the contractor agrees to immediately remove that individual from the work site in such circumstances. In cases of access revocation, the Tenant will inform the individual of the basis for the revocation unless to do so would reveal classified or sensitive information; and, give the individual an opportunity to explain, rebut or refute such basis in writing. Access will remain revoked pending prompt review of any such submission by the individual.
J.
The Tenant reserves the right to reinvestigate contract individuals on a periodic basis (usually every five years) or where facts or information indicate the continued access may no longer be clearly consistent with the Tenant ‘s mission and responsibilities. The scope of any reinvestigation will be at the sole discretion of the Tenant. Refusal or failure to accurately complete any necessary forms, to be interviewed, or to undergo a polygraph examination to resolve any questionable matters during a reinvestigation will be deemed reasonable cause for revocation of access to Tenant facilities, property or information.
K.
Appropriate badges may be furnished by the Tenant authorizing escorted or unescorted access to Tenant facilities and property. The badge, if furnished, will be kept at a location to be determined by the Tenant and shall be picked up by the contract individual granted access upon arrival at Tenant premises. It shall be worn at all times on the upper part of the body so as to be clearly visible and will be returned to the Tenant whenever the wearer leaves Tenant premises for any reason or any length of time. The Tenant may require all contract and subcontract
SECTION 01 35 54
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD individuals to execute a security awareness briefing form, FD835, Security Acknowledgment Form. L.
Upon request, the contractor shall provide, for approval by the Tenant, written physical security procedures and policies to be followed by contract individuals for access to the project as well as security measures taken by the contractor to prevent unauthorized entry by contract individuals during off-duty hours.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 35 54
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
INDUSTRY STANDARDS A.
Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a referenced standard is not specified, comply with the standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents.
C.
Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer requirements that are different, but apparently equal, and uncertainties to the Contracting Officer for a decision before proceeding. 1.
D.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1.
E.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Contracting Officer for a decision before proceeding.
Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.
Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries.
SECTION 01 42 19
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
AA Aluminum Association 900 19th St., NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20006
(202) 862-5100
AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1518 K St., NW, Suite 503 Washington, DC 20005 (202) 737-0202 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association 2700 River Rd., Suite 118 Des Plaines, IL 60018 (312) 699-7310 AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists P.O. Box 12215 Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 (919) 549-8141 ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Detroit, MI 48219
(313) 532-2600
ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories 1725 K St., NW Washington, DC 20006 (202) 887-5872 ADC Air Diffusion Council 230 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 1200 Chicago, IL 60601 (312) 372-9800 AGA American Gas Association 1515 Wilson Blvd. Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 841-8400 AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers 20 N. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 (312) 984-5800 AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Ave., NW Washington, DC 20006 (202) 626-7300 A.I.A. American Insurance Association 1130 Connecticut Avenue, NW Washington, DC 20036 (202) 828-7100 AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association 475 Wolf Ledges Parkway Akron, OH 44311 (216) 762-7294 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 N. Michigan Ave., 8th Floor Chicago, IL 60611 (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1133 Fifteenth St., NW Washington, DC 20005 (202) 452-7100
SECTION 01 42 19
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD ALI Associated Laboratories 641 S. Vermont St. Palatine, IL 60067 (312) 358-7400 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 W. University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 (312) 394-0150 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 (212) 354-3300 AOAC Association of Official Analytical Chemists 1111 19th Street North, Suite 210 Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 522-3032 APA American Plywood Association P.O. Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411
(206) 565-6600
API American Petroleum Institute 1220 L St., NW Washington, DC 20005
(202) 682-8000
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1501 Wilson Blvd., 6th Floor Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 524-8800 ASA Acoustical Society of America 500 Sunnyside Blvd. Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 349-7800 ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council 1627 K Street, NW., Suite 1000 Washington, DC 20006 (202) 452-1500 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, GA 30329 (404) 636-8400 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th St. New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7722 ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210 Westlake, CA 91362 (805) 495-7120 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering P.O. Box 40362 Bay Village, OH 44140 (216) 835-3040 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race St. Philadelphia, PA 19103 (215) 299-5400 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 46179 Westlake Drive, Potomac Falls, VA 20165, (571) 323-3636
SECTION 01 42 19
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Arlington, VA 22206
(703) 671-9100
AWS American Welding Society P.O. Box 351040 550 LeJeune Road, NW Miami, FL 33135 (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 W. Quincy Ave. Denver, CO 80235 (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor New York, NY 10017 (212) 661-4261 BIFMA Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association 2335 Burton St., SE Grand Rapids, MI 49506 (616) 243-1681 CAUS Color Association of the United States 343 Lexington Ave. New York, NY 10016 (212) 683-9531 CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association 1422 Euclid Ave. Hanna Building, Suite 772 Cleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-0711 CDA Copper Development Association Box 1840, Greenwich Office Park 2 Greenwich, CT 06836 (203) 625-8210 CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association 104 Wilmot Road, Suite 201 Deerfield, IL 60015 (312) 940-8800 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute Box 2048 Dalton, GA 30722
(404) 278-3176
CTI Ceramic Tile Institute of America 700 N. Virgil Ave. Los Angeles, CA 90029 (213) 660-1911 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 7711 Old Springhouse Rd. McLean, VA 22102 (703) 556-3990 DLPA Decorative Laminate Products Association 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400 Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222 EIA Electronic Industries Association 1722 Eye Street, NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20006 (202) 457-4900
SECTION 01 42 19
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 25 N. Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 (914) 332-0040 ETL ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc. P.O. Box 2040 Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711 FCI Fluid Controls Institute P.O. Box 9036 Morristown, NJ 07960
(201) 829-0990
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association White Lakes Professional Bldg. 3310 Harrison Topeka, KS 66611
(913) 266-7013
FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Organization 1151 Boston - Providence Turnpike Norwood, MA 02062 (617) 762-4300 GA Gypsum Association 1603 Orrington Ave. Evanston, IL 60201
(312) 491-1744
HEI Heat Exchange Institute c/o Thomas Associates, Inc. 1230 Keith Building Cleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-7333 H.I. Hydraulic Institute 712 Lakewood Center North 14600 Detroit Avenue Cleveland, OH 44107 (216) 226-7700 HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Association 2831 Airways Blvd., Suite 205, Bldg. B Memphis, TN 38132 (901) 346-2222 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association Inc. P.O. Box 440 South Yarmouth, MA 02664 (617) 394-4424 IEC International Electrotechnical Commission (Available from ANSI) 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 (212) 354-3300 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 345 E. 47th St. New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7900 IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 345 E. 47th St. New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7926 IMSA International Municipal Signal Association P.O. Box 539 1115 N. Main St. Newark, NY 14513 (315) 331-2182 IRI
Industrial Risk Insurers
SECTION 01 42 19
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 85 Woodland St. Hartford, CT 06102
(203) 520-7300
ISA Instrument Society of America 67 Alexander Drive P.O. Box 12277 Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 (919) 549-8411 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association 1230 Keith Building Cleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-7333 MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America 5410 Grosvenor Lane, Suite 120 Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 897-0770 ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (A Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers) 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400 Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222 MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society ofthe Valve and Fittings Industry 127 Park St., NE Vienna, VA 22180 (703) 281-6613 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400 Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222
NBHA National Builders Hardware Association (Now DHI) NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 7315 Wisconsin Ave. Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 657-3110 NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc. 630 Third Ave. New York, NY 10017
(212) 986-1545
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 2101 L St., NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 (202) 457-8400 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park Quincy, MA 02169 (617) 770-3000 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, TN 38184 (901) 377-1818 NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association 1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW Washington, DC 20005 (202) 462-6272 NSF
National Sanitation Foundation
SECTION 01 42 19
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD P.O. Box 1468 3475 Plymouth Rd. Ann Arbor, MI 48106 (313) 769-8010 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Formerly NWMA) 1400 E. Touhy Ave., #G54 Des Plaines, IL 60018 (312) 299-5200 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077 (312) 966-6200 PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute (c/o Saul Baker) 1106 W. 77th St., South Dr. Indianapolis, IN 46260 (317) 251-6970 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute 966 Hungerford Drive, Suite 12-B Rockville, MD 20805 (301) 340-8580 S.D.I. Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Center North 14600 Detroit Ave. Cleveland, OH 44107 (216) 226-7700 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (c/o ETL Testing Laboratories) Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 111 E. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60601 (312) 644-6610 SJI Steel Joist Institute 1205 48th Street North, Suite A Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 (803) 449-0487 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association P.O. Box 70 Merrifield, VA 22116 (703) 790-9890 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Ave. Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TCA Tile Council of America P.O. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08542
(412) 268-3327
(609) 921-7050
TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association 29 Bank Street Stamford, CT 06901 (203) 324-7533 UL Underwriters Laboratories 333 Pfingsten Rd. Northbrook, IL 60062 (312) 272-8800
SECTION 01 42 19
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau P.O. Box 23145 Portland, OR 97223 (503) 639-0651 WCMA Wallcovering Manufacturers Association 355 Lexington Ave. New York, NY 10017 (212) 661-4261 WIC Woodwork Institute of California P.O. Box 11428 Fresno, CA 93773
(209) 233-9035
WLPDIA Western Lath Plaster Drywall Industries Association (Formerly California Lath & Plaster Association) 8635 Navajo Road San Diego, CA 92119 (619) 466-9070 WSC Water Systems Council 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400 Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222 WWPA Western Wood Products Association 522 SW. 5th Avenue, Yeon Building Portland, OR 97204-2122 (503) 224-3930 W.W.P.A. Woven Wire Products Association 2515 N. Nordica Ave. Chicago, IL 60635 (312) 637-1359 F.
Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal government standard- or Specification-producing agencies are often abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in the Contract Documents indicate names of standardor Specification-producing agencies of the federal government. Names and addresses are subject to change; they are believed to be but are not assured to be accurate and up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Corps of Engineers (U.S. Department of the Army) Chief of Engineers - Referral Washington, DC 20314 (202) 272-0660 CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from the Government Printing Office N. Capitol St. between G and H St., NW Washington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238 (Material is usually first published in the Federal Register) CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 5401 Westbard Ave. Bethesda, MD 20816 (800) 638-2772 CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 (202) 377-2000
SECTION 01 42 19
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD DOC Department of Commerce 14th St. and Constitution Ave., NW Washington, DC 20230 (202) 377-2000 DOT Department of Transportation 400 Seventh St., SW Washington, DC 20590 (202) 366-4000 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 M St., SW Washington, DC 20460
(202) 382-2090
FAA Federal Aviation Administration (U.S. Department of Transportation) 800 Independence Ave., SW Washington, DC 20590 (202) 366-4000 FCC Federal Communications Commission 1919 M St., NW Washington, DC 20554
(202) 632-7000
FHA Federal Housing Administration (U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development) Director Manufactured Housing and Construction Standards Division 451 Seventh St., SW, Room 9158 Washington, DC 20201 (202) 755-5210 FS Federal Specification (from GSA) Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D St., SW Washington, DC 20406 (202) 472-2205 or 472-2140 GSA General Services Administration F St. and 18th St., NW Washington, DC 20405 (202) 472-1082 MIL Military Standardization Documents (U.S. Department of Defense) Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Ave. Philadelphia, PA 19120 NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (U.S. Department of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20899 (301) 975-2000 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 (202) 523-6091 PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238 REA
Rural Electrification Administration
SECTION 01 42 19
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD (U.S. Department of Agriculture) 14th St. and Independence Ave., SW Washington, DC 20250 (202) 447-8732 USDA U.S. Department of Agriculture Independence Ave. between 12th and 14th St., SW Washington, DC 20250 (202) 447-8732 USPS U.S. Postal Service 475 L'Enfant Plaza, SW Washington, DC 20260
(202) 268-2000
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 42 19
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 45 24 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SUMMARY A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services.
B.
Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports, performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Contracting Officer.
C.
Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.
D.
Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. 1.
Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures.
2.
Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.
3.
Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Contracting Officer, Government, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
RESPONSIBILITIES A.
Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar quality control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the Government's responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity; these services include those specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor. Costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Sum.
SECTION 01 45 24
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
The Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency, to perform specified quality control services.
2.
The Government will engage and pay for the services of an independent agency to perform inspections and tests specified as the Government's responsibility.
3.
Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's responsibility. a.
1.3
1.4
Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction.
B.
Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Specification Sections shall cooperate with the Contracting Officer and Contractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.
C.
Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate their services and activities to accommodate the phasing of the work. The Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
INSPECTION LOG AND SUBMITTALS A.
Daily as inspections are performed, the Contractor shall record on the "Inspection Log" the date the inspection was made, remarks, and signature of the person responsible for making the inspection. The inspection log shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer on a weekly basis.
B.
The Contractor shall maintain a list of work that was inspected and does not comply with the Contract, identifying what items need to be reworked, the date the item was originally inspected, and the date the item was to be corrected. Attach a copy of the rework items list to the "Inspection Log" of each week. The Contractor shall be responsible for including on this list items needing rework including those identified by the Contracting Officer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with
SECTION 01 45 24
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. B.
Coordinate with the Tenant and as directed by Tenant perform inspection of security related construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
REPAIR A.
General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching."
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 45 24
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 50 10 TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
General: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section, as extensions of provisions in other contract documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as an indication that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of contract documents. Provisions of this section are applicable to, but are not limited to, utility services, construction facilities, security and protection provisions, and support facilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES A.
The types of services required include, but are not limited to, water, electrical power and telephones. When connecting to existing utilities for required services, comply with GSA recommendations as to methods to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference with construction operations.
B.
Water and electric power: Premises are supplied with water and electrical services which may be used in this work, subject to regulations of the GSA. Water and electric power will be available free of charge. However, the Contractor shall provide his own connections, conduits, and other means for receiving the water and electric power. Contractor shall make arrangements for obtaining access to water and electric power through the Contracting Officer. 1.
C.
Ground-Fault Protection: Provide ground-fault circuit interrupter features, 20-amp or less rating.
Temporary Telephone service: The Contractor shall provide telephone service to his field office for the duration of the construction time. Telephone service shall be obtained directly from the serving Telephone Company. The Contractor shall pay all costs for installation and use of telephones. Make arrangements for payment to the Telephone Company.
SECTION 01 50 10
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.2
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES A.
The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but are not limited to, water, enclosure of work, ventilation, electrical power, distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities, and ladders. Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations properly and adequately.
B.
Enclosures: When temporary enclosures are required to ensure adequate workmanship, dust abatement, weather protection and ambient conditions required for the work, provide fire-retardant treated lumber and plywood; provide tarpaulins with UL label and flame spread of 15 or less; provide translucent type (nylon reinforced polyethylene) where daylighting of enclosed space would be beneficial for workmanship, and reduce use of temporary lighting.
C.
Electrical Facilities: Provide all temporary electrical facilities, including lamps, required for the operation of power tools, construction and safety operations. Remove all such equipment when permanent connections have been completed. Where it is determined, during construction, that the temporary facilities, as installed, interfere with Government operations or other construction operations and, when notified by the Contracting Officer, relocate said facilities in an approved manner at no cost to the Government. No wire, bus or electrical equipment which is part of any of the permanent electrical systems may be used for temporary electrical service for construction operations, unless specifically approved by the Contracting Officer. Temporary connections shall be in accordance with NEC and OSHA requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage or injury to equipment, materials, or personnel caused by improperly protected temporary installations. All costs for materials and installation for temporary electrical facilities and energy for their operation shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The hours of operation, level of illumination and coverage for safety of personnel shall meet the minimum requirements of the Contracting Officer.
D.
1.
If welding is required, the Contractor shall coordinate with the GSA Property Management to secure the Fire Alarm protection systems prior to commencement of work.
2.
Obtain welding permit from the Building Manager.
3.
Provide electrical welders used in the erection and fabrication of the building and its equipment with an independent grounding cable connected directly to the structure on which the weld is being made rather than to adjacent conduit or piping.
Access Provisions: Provide ladders and similar temporary access elements as reasonably required to perform the work and facilitate its inspection during installation.
SECTION 01 50 10
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
3.3
SECURITY PROVISIONS A.
3.4
When existing stairs are available for access during construction, cover finished surfaces with sufficient protection to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion.
General: GSA will provide security services and systems such as to achieve 24-hour, 7 days per week protection from theft, vandalism, personal injury and property damage for the building. Contractor shall be responsible for security at the job site upon execution of the Contract. 1.
Permanent Fire Protection: Complete the fire protection system at earliest reasonable date, and make ready for emergency use, and instruct personnel at site on availability and proper use.
2.
Building Security and Lockup: At earliest possible date, secure building against unauthorized entrance at times when personnel are not working. Provide secure temporary enclosures at ground floor and other locations of possible entry, with locked entrances.
3.
A weekly list of the Contractor's personnel authorized to work on the 1st floor shall be submitted to the building management.
TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES A.
General: The types of temporary support facilities required include, but are not limited to, Contractor's field offices, temporary toilet facilities, storage sheds, fabrication sheds, drinking water, first aid facilities, bulletin board, private and public telephones, clocks, thermometer, project identification signs, cleanup facilities, waste disposal service, rodent/pest control and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may be reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation of personnel at the site. Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of permanent work of the project, only when and in manner authorized by the Contracting Officer and, if not otherwise indicated, immediately before time of substantial completion. Locate temporary support facilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities.
B.
After hours staging area locations shall be coordinated with GSA. Material storage space availability will be verified immediately prior to start of construction.
SECTION 01 50 10
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.5
CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE A.
The Contractor shall establish and maintain an office for himself at the site. Contractor shall coordinate with GSA for available space. 1.
The allocation of the specific area or areas to be used for office space will be made by the Contracting Officer, after consultation with the representatives of the Contractor.
B.
Contractor shall provide commercial bottled water in each office.
C.
The office equipment and the furniture shall remain the Contractor's property.
D.
Fire Extinguishers: Provide ABC fire extinguishers, the number, and extinguisher rating and location of which is in accordance with NFPA No. 10. However, the minimum extinguisher rating shall be 2ABC, and in no case shall the area covered per extinguisher be greater than 3000 square feet (278.7 square meter), or travel distance to extinguishers to exceed 50 (15,240mm) feet. See NFPA No. 241. Provide fire extinguisher rated not less than 1OB within 50 feet (15,240mm) of wherever more than 5 gallons (18.93l) of flammable or combustible liquids or 5 pounds (1.87kg) of flammable gas are being used. This requirement does not apply to the integral fuel tanks of motor vehicles. Use fire extinguishers which have been listed or approved by Underwriters Laboratories.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 50 10
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 57 20 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
DESCRIPTION A.
This Section includes requirements for the control of noise and vibration produced by all demolition and construction processes and equipment, including those associated with abatement of hazardous material removal; all such activities are hereinafter referred to as “construction”.
B.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that noise and vibration from construction operations do not at any time:
C.
1.2
1.
Interfere with building occupants during business hours;
2.
Exceed the external noise limits prescribed by the City;
3.
Cause employees to be exposed to excessive and unsafe noise levels.
The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Office within 10 days of notice to proceed a noise and vibration mitigation plan, which details proposals for control of noise and vibration during construction.
NOISE AND VIBRATION WITHIN THE BUILDING A.
The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate potentially disruptive operations so the building occupants can operate at their normal efficiency during the period from 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM, Monday through Friday, hereafter referred to as “normal business hours”. Due to the sensitive nature of the operations and functions in the existing occupied spaces, demolition or construction noise will generally be considered disruptive (and therefore unacceptable) if it can be perceived in any occupied space. The practical difficulties of limiting demolition and construction noise to levels below the threshold of perceptibility must be fully understood by the Contractor. Therefore, all potentially disruptive operations shall be conducted during other than normal business hours, unless measures are taken, with the specific prior approval of the Contracting Officer, to ensure that there will be no interference with or disruption of building occupants and functions. In the event of a complaint about noise from a building occupant, the Contractor shall be required, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, to stop and desist the disruptive work.
B.
Construction noise intrusion to occupied spaces above or below will tend to be structure borne rather than airborne. Vibration of the floor produced by a construction operation (such as floor finish removal, or drilling) or equipment (compressor, negative air machine, waste vacuum system, etc.) or impact (dropped tool
SECTION 01 57 20
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD or material) will be reradiated as noise in the space below. Similarly, the use of impact and/or power tools on the ceiling deck will transmit noise directly to the space above. Construction work which involves vibrating or impacting structural columns will cause structure borne noise transfer to both above and below.
1.3
C.
Acoustical excitation of the building structure will also transmit noise to adjacent occupied spaces on the same floor. Airborne noise transfer to horizontal adjacencies is likely to be less significant, assuming that slab-to-slab constructions exist between the construction area and occupied space.
D.
Excessive airborne noise levels within the construction area will at best disrupt speech communication, and at worst represent a hearing damage risk to the Contractor’s employees. It is Contractor’s responsibility to take all practicable steps to reduce construction noise levels at source and to comply with the requirements of Cal/OSHA General Industry Safety Orders, Title 8, Article 105 “Control of Noise Exposure”.
E.
The Contractor’s noise mitigation plan shall, in addition to covering all construction operations and equipment, including proposals for reducing impact and airborne noise from construction material handling systems, including carts, chutes, hoists, etc. used during business hours.
PROHIBITED OPERATIONS A.
In addition to the noise and vibration control requirements specified in Paragraph 1.2 specific types of construction operations, on floors directly above or adjacent to occupied space, on ceiling slabs directly below adjacent to occupied space, and on structural columns, are “prohibited” during normal business hours, and other operations are considered “marginal” during normal business hours, and not allowed unless specific prior approval to conduct such operations is given by the Contracting Officer. The following Table 1 presents the prohibited and marginal operations: TABLE 1 CONSTRUCTION NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL RESTRICTED CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS IN AREAS ADJACENT TO OCCUPIED SPACE
OPERATION Powder Actuated Fastening Percussive Hammer Drilling Diamond Core Drilling Grinding Cutting/Sawing – Structural Cutting/Sawing Existing Pipes or Ducts Powered Equipment (Paint Sprayers, Negative Air Machines, Waste Vacuum Systems, Compressors, Generators) Bead Blasting (if required to remove floor finish) Hammering
SECTION 01 57 20
PAGE 2
TYPE P P M P P M M P P
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD OPERATION Sheet Rock Hanging Any required core drilling and installation of new plumbing or electrical work that may effect the Tenant’s day to day operation P = Prohibited during normal business hours (6:00 am to 6:00 pm, Monday through Friday) M = Marginal Operation subject to approval of Contracting Officer
1.4
1.5
TYPE P M
B.
Violation of these restrictions or any of the other noise limitations required elsewhere in this Section during business hours shall cause for penalizing the Contractor by requiring that all construction operations be immediately halted and/or conducted outside of business hours. The Contracting Officer will make the final decision regarding the scheduling and interruption of “restricted” noise generating operations adjacent to occupied space.
C.
The Contractor’s representative shall supervise and be responsible for enforcing all provisions of the Specifications concerning construction noise and vibration control.
D.
The use of hammers or other impact tools on floors, structural members, ductwork, plumbing and sprinkler systems, ceiling systems, partitions, etc. is expressly prohibited during daytime hours in construction areas adjacent to occupied space.
E.
On floors over occupied space, no noise or vibration generating work shall be carried out during business hours.
NOISE EMISSIONS TO SURROUNDING EXTERNAL AREAS A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all construction operations and activities, including the movement and loading of trucks around the building, comply with the City Noise Ordinance. The Ordinance requires that the noise sources associated with construction operations and activities do not exceed 55dBA between 8pm and 10pm, and 50dBA between 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. on weekdays, including Saturday, or at any time on Sunday or a federal holiday.
B.
Particular caution shall be exercised on the part of the Contractor to ensure that negative air machines are selected, distributed, and acoustically treated to achieve the fixed equipment noise limits prescribed by the City Noise Ordinance.
NOISE MITIGATION PLAN A.
Before commencing any work, the Contractor shall submit for the review and approval of the Contracting Officer a detailed plan for achieving the noise and vibration requirements specified in this Section. The plan shall outline work programs and methods which demonstrate consistency with the construction noise philosophy for the Project and shall include a schedule of noise/vibration producing equipment items with the Contractor’s
SECTION 01 57 20
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD proposals for noise and vibration control in each case. Contractor’s plan shall coordinate with Contractor’s Construction Schedule, indicating all work sequences to be conducted outside normal business hours, and any work sequences planned to be conducted during business hours. B.
As part of the plan, the Contractor shall present his proposals for “policing” the jobsite to ensure that all employees are abiding by the prescribed work restrictions and noise mitigation practice, including the wearing of hearing protectors. The Contractor shall also initiate a liaison procedure with the building occupants, providing a mechanism for any complaints of noise disturbance to be dealt with promptly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Ladders: Provide ladders and other climbing accessories with padded legs and resilient feet to minimize impact and scraping noise as the ladders are moved around. Resilient foot systems and leg paddings are subject to approval of the Contracting Officer and shall be designed so as not to compromise safety requirements.
B.
Sound Traps: Noise producing air movement equipment, including, but not limited to negative air machines, waste vacuum systems, ventilation fans, etc., shall be fitted with inlet and/or discharge sound traps if needed to meet the interior noise limits specified in this Section as well as those exterior noise limits prescribed by the City Noise Ordinance.
C.
Mufflers: Noise producing mobile or semi-fixed equipment including, but not limited to, generators, compressors, etc. shall be fitted with exhaust mufflers in order to meet the noise limit requirements of this Section and those prescribed by the City Noise Ordinance.
D.
Vibration Isolators: All fixed or semi-fixed mechanical equipment, in particular the negative air machines, which is to operate within the building during daytime hours (6am to 6pm, Monday through Friday) shall be supported on properly selected and installed vibration isolators. Where vibration isolated equipment is to be ducted or piped, duct and pipe connections shall be made via flexible elements to eliminate short circuits.
E.
Acoustical Enclosures: In addition to sound traps or mufflers, acoustical enclosure/screening shall be provided for negative air machines and as required for any other fixed or mobile noise producing equipment in order to comply with the noise control standards referred to in this Section.
F.
Soft Wheeled Carts: Rolling carts used within the building shall be fitted with pneumatic tires to minimize impact and movement noise. No other carts will be allowed.
SECTION 01 57 20
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
COORDINATION A.
3.2
GENERAL RESTRICTIONS A.
3.3
The Contractor shall coordinate the construction program to minimize impact noise produced by construction work conducted over occupied space.
Transportation and handling of construction materials or demolition debris on floors over occupied space shall be restricted to out of daytime hours, unless Contractor uses techniques that do not transmit noise or vibration to the building structure. Such techniques include the use of rolling carts, dollies and moveable scaffolds that are equipped with fully pneumatic tires.
UNNECESSARY NOISE A.
The Contractor shall not permit any construction personnel to generate unnecessary structure borne noise during daytime hours in areas adjacent to occupied space. Unnecessary structure borne noise includes jumping from scaffolds, throwing or dropping tools, equipment or materials.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 57 20
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 68 00 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.3
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project.
Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. 1.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.
2.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses.
3.
Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.
4.
Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5.
Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
6.
Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.
PRODUCT SELECTION A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. 1.
Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect.
SECTION 01 68 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3.
Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.
4.
Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application.
5.
Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified.
6.
Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Contracting Officer's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a.
7.
1.4
Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category, or for noncompliance with specified requirements.
Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Contracting Officer will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected.
INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 68 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A.
Definition: "Cutting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B.
Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and limitations applicable to individual units of work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner that would result in a reduction of load-carrying capacity or of load-deflection ratio. Prior to such work, obtain approval of project's structural engineer.
B.
Safety: Do not cut-and-patch operational safety-related components in a manner resulting in reduction of capacities to perform in manner intended or resulting in decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety.
C.
Before cutting and patching structural elements obtain the Contracting Officer's approval to proceed.
D.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch work exposed on the building's exterior or in its occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Contracting Officer's opinion, result in lessening the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut and patch work. Remove and replace work judged by the Contracting Officer to be cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
SUBMITTALS A.
Procedural Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where prior approval of cutting and patching is required, submit proposed procedures for this work well in advance of the time work will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the submittal: 1.
Samples: Submit examples of materials to be used in cutting and patching. Include samples of textures, colors, and patterns of finishes.
2.
Describe nature of the work and how it is to be performed, indicating why cutting and patching cannot be avoided.
SECTION 01 73 29
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Describe anticipated results of the work in terms of changes to existing work, including structural, operational and visual changes as well as other significant elements. 3.
List utilities that will be disturbed or otherwise be affected by work, including those that will be relocated and those that will be out-of-service temporarily.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, or as directed by the Contracting Officer, use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal-or-better performance characteristics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Temporary Support: To prevent structural failure or collapse, provide temporary support of work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions of that part of the project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations. Take precaution not to cut existing pipe, conduit or duct serving the building but scheduled to be relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
PERFORMANCE A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching work. Except as otherwise indicated or as approved by the Contracting Officer, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete work without delay.
B.
Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with original installer's recommendations.
C.
Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as inconspicuous as practicable. Comply with specified tolerances for the work.
D.
Cleaning: Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where work is performed or used as access to work. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Do not allow debris to accumulate outside of work areas. Clean and mop floors. -- End of Section --
SECTION 01 73 29
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 74 10 CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
DESCRIPTION A.
Maintain premises and public properties free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by operations.
B.
At completion of work, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and vacuum clean all sight-exposed surfaces. Damp mop hard surface flooring. Leave project clean and ready for occupancy.
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A.
B.
Hazards Control: 1.
Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily.
2.
Prevent accumulation of waste and do not create hazardous conditions.
3.
Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substance.
Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws. 1.
Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste material on project site.
2.
Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains.
3.
Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Use only cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
B.
Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
SECTION 01 74 10
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
DURING CONSTRUCTION A.
Execute cleaning to ensure that building, grounds, and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.
B.
Wet down dry materials, debris, and rubbish to allay dust, and prevent blowing dust.
C.
Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and legally dispose of it at public or private dumping areas off the property.
D.
Vacuum clean interior building areas when surfaces are ready to receive finish painting.
E.
Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handling as possible. Do not drop or throw materials from overhead heights.
F.
Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet newly painted surfaces.
G.
Broom clean paved surfaces.
H.
Replace air conditioning filters if HVAC units were operated during construction.
I.
Clean, ducts, blowers and coils, if air conditioning units were operated without filters during construction.
J.
Maintain clean conditions until project is occupied by Owner.
K.
Clean flooring in occupied areas and flooring in elevators.
L.
The entire "path of travel" for construction needs to be kept clean. Heavy equipment should have rubberzied wheels when going over existing flooring.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 74 10
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 77 04 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A.
1.3
Upon receipt of Contractor's request, the Contracting Officer will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial inspection, the Contracting Officer will note substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be performed and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of completed inspection will form initial "punch-list" for final acceptance.
PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE A.
1.4
General: This section includes general requirements near end of Contract Time, in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy and similar actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Division 02 through 31. Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion", and therefore may be a single time period for entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of the work which have been noted as substantially complete at different dates.
Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been completed, including punch-list items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, the Contracting Officer will reinspect the work. Upon completion of reinspection, the Contracting Officer will either prepare certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated.
RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A.
General: As work progresses, prepare and maintain record documents as specified herein. Each record shall be certified by the Contractor. Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fireresistive location accessible to the Contracting Officer for reference during normal working hours. Record documents shall be verified monthly to the Contracting Officer with each monthly payment application.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain a white-print set (blue-line or blackline) of contract drawings (including amendment and change order drawings) and shop drawings in clean, undamaged condition, with
SECTION 01 77 04
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD mark-up of actual installations which vary from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing "field" condition fully and accurately; however, where shop drawings are used for markup, record a cross-reference at corresponding location on working drawings. Mark with red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of work. Mark-up new information which is recognized to be of importance, but was for some reason not shown on either contract drawings or shop drawings. Give particular attention to concealed work, which would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Note related change order numbers where applicable. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print titles, dates and other identification on cover of each set. Maintain record drawings on a monthly basis. Verification will be made in conjunction with payment request. C.
Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of specifications, including amendments, change orders and similar modifications issued in printed form during construction, and mark-up variations in actual work in comparison with text of specifications and modifications as issued. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on work where it is concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and product data, where applicable.
D.
Record Shop Drawing, Product Data, Certifications and Laboratory Test Reports: Maintain one copy of each approved shop drawing and product data submittal, product certification, and laboratory test report and mark-up significant variations in actual work in comparison with submitted information. Include both variations in product as delivered to site, and variations from manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related change orders and markup of record drawings and specifications.
E.
Record Sample Submittal: Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, the Contracting Officer or his designated representative will meet with Contractor at site, and will determine which (if any) of submitted samples maintained by Contractor during progress of the work are to be retained by the Government. Comply with the Contracting Officer's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery.
SECTION 01 77 04
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD F.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other sections of these specifications for requirements of miscellaneous recordkeeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the work. Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Turn over to the Contracting Officer prior to final acceptance.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 77 04
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Submit operating and maintenance manuals as specified.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 1.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
2.
Operating Instructions
3.
Parts List
4.
Posted Instructions
5.
Spare Parts Data
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.
Operations and maintenance manuals shall be consistent with manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures, and safety precautions. The information shall be bound in manual format and grouped by technical sections.
B.
Procedures for preventative maintenance, inspection, adjustment, lubrication and cleaning necessary to minimize corrective maintenance and repair shall be delineated. Load limits, speed of operation, environmental criteria and personnel safety precautions shall be listed.
C.
Repair requirements shall inform operators how to check out, troubleshoot, repair, and replace components of the system. Instructions shall include electrical and mechanical schematics and diagrams and diagnostic techniques necessary for trouble shooting the system.
D.
As-built drawing submittals shall be prepared on translucent, reproducible sheets, not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, nor larger than 30 by 42 inches, except for full size patterns or templates.
SECTION 01 78 23
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.3
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A.
Data shall be updated and resubmitted for final approval not later than 30 days prior to contract completion. Test data shall be legible and of good quality. Light-sensitive reproduction techniques are acceptable provided finished pages are clear, legible, and not subject to fading. Pages for vendor data and manuals shall have 3/8-inch holes and be bound in 3-ring, loose leaf binders. Data shall be organized by separate index and tabbed sheets, in a looseleaf binder. The binder shall lie flat with sheets printed so as to be readily readable. Caution and warning indications shall be clear and well-labeled.
B.
The Contractor shall provide field instructions in operation and maintenance of systems equipment where required by the technical provisions. These services shall be directed by the Contractor, using the manufacturer's factory trained personnel or qualified representatives. The Contracting Officer shall be given 7 days written notice of scheduled instructional services.
SPARE PARTS LIST A.
3.4
The Contractor shall submit a list of parts and components for the system. Listing shall indicate manufacturer's name, part number, nomenclature, and stock level required for maintenance and repair. List those items that may be standard to the normal maintenance of the system.
POSTED INSTRUCTIONS A.
The Contractor shall provide labels, signs, and operating instructions mounted on or near the product for normal, safe operation.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 78 23
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1.
B.
1.2
Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials.
Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A.
Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
B.
Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
C.
Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Government has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
D.
Government's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Government are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, right and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Government can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1.
Rejection of Warranties: The Government reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
SECTION 01 78 36
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD E.
The Government reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 78 36
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 02 41 13 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
This Section includes the following: 1.
Selective demolition and removal of non-structural portions of the existing building as indicated and required to perform the new Work.
2.
Patching and repairs.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1.
Division 01 Section “Summary of Work” for use of the building and phasing requirements.
2.
Division 01 Section “Cutting and Patching” for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations.
3.
Division 01 Section “Schedules and Reports” for selective demolition schedule requirements.
4.
Division 01 Section “Demolition and Construction Noise and Vibration Control.”
5.
Division 01 Section “Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls” for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures for selective demolition operations.
6.
Division 01 Section “Contract Closeout” for record document requirements.
7.
Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for material and construction requirements for temporary enclosures.
8.
Division 23 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
9.
Division 26 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
DEFINITIONS A.
Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner’s property.
SECTION 02 41 13
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.3
B.
Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner’s property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to Owner’s designated storage area.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Contracting Officer, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A.
1.4
Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner’s property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor’s property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor’s option.
SUBMITTALS A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Proposed noise-control measures shall comply with Section 01 57 20.
C.
Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following: 1.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity.
2.
Interruption of utility services.
3.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4.
Use of elevator and stairs.
5.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner’s on-site operations.
6.
Coordination of Owner’s continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner’s partial occupancy of completed Work.
7.
Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
SECTION 02 41 13
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD D.
Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations.
E.
Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 01 Section “Contract Closeout.” 1.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with preinstallation conference requirements of Division 1 Section “Project Meetings.”
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so that Owner’s operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 1 week notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner’s operations.
B.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
SCHEDULING A.
Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner’s on-site operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
REPAIR MATERIALS A.
Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1.
Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2.
Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
SECTION 02 41 13
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.2
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
C.
Inventory and record the conditions of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Contracting Offer.
E.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
UTILITY SERVICES A.
Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the Contracting Officer and to governing authorities. a.
B.
3.3
Provide not less than 1 week notice to Contracting Officer if shutdown of service is required during changeover.
Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving building to be selectively demolished. 1.
The Contracting Officer will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
2.
Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide bypass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective demolition.
3.
Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
PREPARATION A.
Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations.
SECTION 02 41 13
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.
C.
3.4
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from the Contracting Officer and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 1.
Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping remain.
3.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, ad other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed during selective demolition operations.
4.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
D.
Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
E.
The Contractor shall propose a temporary enclosures and dustproof partition plan coordinated with the phasing for GSA approval. 1.
Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4inch (100-mm) studs, 5/8-inch (16-mm) gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch (13-mm) fire retardant plywood on the demolition side.
2.
Insulate partition to provide noise protection to occupied areas.
3.
Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.
4.
Protect air-handling equipment.
5.
Weather strip openings.
POLLUTION CONTROLS A.
Use temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.
SECTION 02 41 13
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.5
B.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
C.
Clean adjacent structures and improvement of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A.
B.
3.6
Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
3.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
5.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
6.
Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
7.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removal items is prohibited.
8.
Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective demolition operations.
Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact tools.
PATCHING AND REPAIRS A.
Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations.
SECTION 02 41 13
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
Patching is specified in Division 1 Section “Cutting and Patching”.
C.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
D.
Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance.
E.
3.7
3.8
1.
Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface.
2.
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
3.
Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat.
4.
Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
5.
Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where feasible.
Patch repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A.
General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
B.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner’s property and legally dispose of them.
C.
Contractor shall coordinate with GSA regarding the availability of dumpsters, staging area for dumpsters and building regulations concerning disposal of demolished materials.
CLEANING A.
Vacuum building areas clean on completion of demolition operation. Clean by whatever means necessary and appropriate which meets manufacturer's recommended cleaning procedures.
B.
Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 02 41 13
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 02 42 10 SALVAGEABLE PROPERTY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SUMMARY A.
The Contractor shall perform salvage of property as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
B.
The Contractor shall coordinate with GSA the identification of all items to be salvaged and procedures for packing, and return to GSA.
C.
Remove salvageable materials carefully to avoid damages. Materials indicated to be retained for reuse on this project and be incorporated into new work shall be located as indicated on the drawings. Except for items indicated to be retained as the Government's property, other removed and salvaged materials not indicated for reuse shall become Contractor's property when approved by the Government and removed from site with further disposition at Contractor's option.
D.
Do not begin salvage of materials and equipment until authorization is received from the Contracting Officer.
SUBMITTALS Submit proposed salvage plans, and removal procedures to the Contracting Officer for approval before work is started. List the materials and equipment to be salvaged. If any unsafe conditions could develop due to the salvage work, notify the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL Protect salvageable property and existing work which is to remain in place, be reused, or remain the property of the Government. Repair items that are to be salvaged and that are damaged during performance of the work to their original condition, or replace items with new articles. Repairs and replacement shall be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
REUSE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.
Demount, remove and remain the property relocated carefully proper sequence, or
store materials and equipment indicated to be of the Government, salvaged, reused or to prevent damage, and reinstall them in the as the work progresses.
B.
All materials handling and transportation equipment, including pallets, for salvaging property shall be provided and paid for by
SECTION 02 42 10
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD the Contractor. Deliver materials or equipment to a storage place on the premises as directed by the Contracting Officer. C.
Retained items that are to remain property of the Government will be identified by the Contracting Officer or noted on drawings, or described in the specifications as items to be salvaged. Items that remain property of the Government shall be removed or dislodged from present locations in such a manner as to prevent damage that would be detrimental to re-installation and reuse. Store such items where directed by the Contracting Officer.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 02 42 10
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 02 82 13 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PART 1 1.1
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Work Included: Contractor shall furnish all labor, services, materials, permits, insurance (specifically covering the handling and transportation of Asbestos Materials) and equipment which is specified, shown or reasonably implied for Asbestos Abatement activities, as specified in the preceeding pages and identified as Scope of Work to these Specifications.
B.
Contractor shall be requested to provide testing if asbestos is suspected during demolition or new construction. There is potential for asbestos in existing telephone closets.
C.
Related Work: 1.
D.
Documents affecting Work of this Section include but are not necessarily limited to Sections in Divisions 0 through 31 of the Project Manual for the facility.
Applicable Publications: The work conducted shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. Applicable guidelines and standards listed in this Scope of Work include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1.
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Publications: 29 CFR 1910.1001..Occupational Exposure to Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite and Actinolite 29 CFR 1910.1101..Asbestos 29 CFR 1910.1200..Hazard Communication 29 CFR 1910.134...Respiratory Protection 29 CFR 1910.145...Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs & Tags 29 CFR 1910.20....Access to Employee Exposure & Medical Records 29 CFR 1926.1101..Asbestos 29 CFR 1926.200...Signs, Signals & Barricades 29 CFR 1926.55....Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts & Mists 40 CFR 61 ........Subpart A - General Provisions ..................Subpart M - National Emission Standards for Asbestos
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 40 CFR 61.152.....Standard for Waste Manufacturing, Demolition, Spraying and Fabricating Operations 40 CFR 241........Guidelines for the Land Disposal of Solid Wastes 40 CFR 257........Criteria for Classification of Solid Waste 40 CFR 261 & 262..Waste Disposal Facilities & Practices 40 CFR 763........AHERA 2.
California Code of Regulations - General Industry Safety Orders (GISO) Title 8 CCR Section 5208
3.
Asbestos Regulations
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications: Z88.2-80 .........Practices for Respiratory Protection Z87.1 ............Eye Protection
1.2
4.
National Institute of Occupational Safety & Health (NIOSH)
5.
RGA Emvironmental Limited Asbestos Survey Report dated October 23, 2009.
6
Other federal, state and local regulations having authority over Asbestos-related activities.
DEFINITIONS General Explanation: A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other contract documents. Certain terms used in the Specifications are defined in this article. A.
Abatement: Procedures to control fiber release from Asbestoscontaining building materials. Includes removal, encapsulation 1 and enclosure.
B.
Action Level: (REPLACED BY “PEL” VIA 29 CFR 1926.1101.)
C.
Air Lock: A system for permitting ingress and egress with minimum air movement between a contaminated area and an uncontaminated area.
D.
Air Monitoring: The process of measuring the fiber content of a specific volume of air in a stated period of time.
E.
Air Sampling Professional: The professional contracted or employed to supervise air monitoring and analysis schemes This individual is also responsible for recognition of technical deficiencies in Worker protection equipment and procedures during both planning and on-site phases of an Abatement Project. Acceptable Air Sampling Professionals include State of California Certified Site Surveillance Technicians and Certified Asbestos Consultants.
F.
Amended Water: Water to which a surfactant has been added.
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD G.
Area Monitoring: Sampling of airborne fiber concentrations within the Asbestos Work Area and outside the Asbestos Work Area which are representative of the airborne concentrations of Asbestos fibers which may reach the breathing zone.
H.
Asbestos: (29 CFR 1926.1101 Definitions) Includes Chrysotile, Amosite, Crocidolite, Tremolite asbestos, and any of these minerals that has been chemically treated and/or altered.
I.
Asbestos: Means fibrous forms including Chrysotile, (fibrous fliebeckite), Amosite (fibrous Tremolite, fibrous Actinolite,
J
Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM) EPA definition: Material composed of asbestos of any type in an amount greater than 1 percent and by weight, either alone or mixed with other fibrous or nonfibrous materials.
K.
Asbestos- Containing Construction Material: Means any manufactured construction material which contains more than 1/10th of 1% asbestos by weight.
L.
Asbestos- Containing Waste Material: Means friable asbestos waste and asbestos waste from control devices (Pollution Control Devices).
M.
Asbestos Fibers: Asbestos fibers having an aspect ratio of at least 3:1 and 5 micrometers in length.
N.
Authorized Visitor: The Government Project Team members 1 the Governments Representative, Consultant and any representative of a regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over the Project.
O.
Clean Room: An uncontaminated area or room which is a part of the Worker Decontamination Enclosure with provisions for storage of Workers' street clothes and protective equipment.
P.
Consultant (Also known as Environmental Consultant, and/or Observation Service): The agent of the Government or the Government's Representative who shall observe the Work, perform tests, verify that abatement methods and procedures specified by the Specifications are being complied with, and reports all observations and test results to the Government or the Government’s Representative.
Q.
Contained Work Area: A Work Area which has been Isolated, Plasticized, and equipped with a Decontamination Enclosure System.
R.
Curtained Doorway: A device to allow ingress or egress from one area to another while permitting minimal air movement between the areas, typically constructed by placing three overlapping sheets of plastic over an existing or temporarily framed doorway, securing each along the top of the doorway. and securing the vertical edge of the outer two sheets along the opposite vertical side of the doorway.
S.
Decontamination Enclosure System: A series of connected rooms.
of various hydrated minerals serpentine) Crocidolite (fibrous Cummintonite-Grunerite), Fibrous and fibrous Anthophyllite.
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD with Air Locks or Curtained Doorways between any two adjacent rooms, for the decontamination of Workers and of materials and equipment. A Decontamination Enclosure System always contains at least one Air Lock to the Work Area. T.
Encapsulant (sealant): A liquid material which can be applied to Asbestos-Containing material and which controls the possible release of Asbestos fibers from the material either by creating a membrane over the surface (bridging encapsulant) or by penetrating into the material and binding its components together (penetrating encapsulant).
U.
Encapsulation: All herein-specified procedures necessary to apply an encapsulant to Asbestos-Containing building materials to control the possible release of Asbestos fibers into the ambient air.
V.
Enclosure: All herein-specified procedures necessary to enclose completely Asbestos-Containing Material behind airtight, impermeable, permanent barriers.
W.
Excursion Limit: An exposure of airborne concentrations of Asbestos fibers of one fiber per cubic centimeter of air (1 f/cc) as averaged over a sampling period of thirty (30) minute period.
X.
Equipment Room: A contaminated area or room which is part of the Worker Decontamination Enclosure with provisions for storage of contaminated clothing and equipment.
Y.
Equipment Decontamination Enclosure: That portion of a Decontamination Enclosure System designed for controlled transfer of materials, waste containers and equipment, typically consisting of a Washroom and a Holding Area.
Z.
Friable Asbestos Material (40 CFR, Subpart M): Material that contains more than one percent (1%) Asbestos by weight and that can be broken 1 crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry.
AA.
Fixed Object: A unit of equipment or furniture or other building component which cannot be detached from the building or can only be detached by destructive methods resulting in irreparable damage to the item.
AB.
Glovebag Method: A method with limited applications for removing small amounts of friable Asbestos-Containing material from HVAC ducts, short piping runs, valves, joints, elbows, and other nonplanar surfaces In an isolated (noncontained) Work Area The glovebag (typically constructed of six [6] mil transparent Regulite plastic) has two inward-projecting longsleeve rubber gloves, one inward-projecting waterwand sleeve, an internal tool pouch, and an attached, labeled receptacle for Asbestos waste. The glovebag is constructed and installed In such a manner that it surrounds the object or area to be decontaminated and contains all Asbestos fibers released during the removal process. All Workers who are permitted to use the Glovebag Method must be highly trained, experienced, and skilled in this method.
AC.
HEPA Filter: A high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD capable of trapping and retaining 99.97 percent of all monodispersed particles (Asbestos fibers) equal to or greater than 0.3 microns in mass median aerodynamic equivalent diameter. AD.
HEPA Vacuum Equipment: Vacuuming equipment with a HEPA filter system.
AE.
Holding Area: A room in the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure located between the Washroom and an uncontaminated area. The Holding Area comprises an Air Look.
AF.
Isolation: The sealing of all openings into a Work Area.
AG.
Isolated (noncontalned) Work Area: A Work Area which is Isolated, but has not been Plasticized and may or may not be equipped with a Decontamination Enclosure System.
AH.
Maximum Acceptable Level: An exposure of airborne concentrations of fibers of 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter of air at any time. This level is a contractual standard for this Project.
AI.
Moveable object: A unit of equipment, furniture or other building component which is detached or can be detached from the building without destructive methods or results.
AJ.
Negative Air Pressure Equipment: A portable local exhaust system equipped with HEPA filtration and capable of maintaining a constant, low velocity air flow into contaminated areas from adjacent uncontaminated areas.
AK.
Nonfriable Asbestos-Containing Material: Material that contains more than one (1) percent Asbestos by weight in which the fibers have been locked in by a bonding agent, coating, binder, or other material so that the Asbestos swell bound and will not release fibers during any appropriate end-use, handling, demolition 1 storage, transportation, processing, or disposal.
AL.
Observation Service (Also known as Consultant and/or Environmental Consultant): The agent of the Government or the Government's Representative who shall observe the Work, perform tests, verify that abatement methods and procedures specified by the Specifications are being complied with, and reports all observations and test results to the Government or the Governments Representative.
AM.
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL): An airborne concentration of asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, Actinolite, or a combination of these minerals in excess of 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter of air as an eight (8) hour time-weighted average (TWA).
AN.
Personal Monitoring: Sampling of Asbestos fiber concentrations within the breathing zone of an Asbestos Worker.
AO.
Plasticize: To cover floors, walls and other structural elements of a Work Area with plastic sheeting as herein specified with all seams securely taped.
AP.
Removal: All herein-specified procedures necessary to remove Asbestos-Containing materials from the designated areas and to
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD dispose of these materials at an acceptable site.
1.3
AQ.
Shower Room: A room between the Clean Room and the Equipment Room in the Worker Decontamination Enclosure with hot and cold or warm running water, and suitably arranged for complete showering during decontamination. The Shower Room includes an Air Lock between contaminated and clean areas.
AR.
Surfactant: A chemical wetting agent added to water to reduce surface tension and improve penetration.
AS.
Washroom: A room between the Work Area and the Holding Area in the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System where equipment and waste containers are decontaminated. The Washroom comprises an Air Lock.
AT.
Wet Cleaning: The process of eliminating Asbestos contamination from building surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops. or other cleaning tools which have been dampened with water, and by afterwards disposing of these cleaning tools as Asbestoscontaminated waste.
AU.
Work Area (Also known as "Regulated Area”): Designated rooms, spaces, or areas of the Project in which Asbestos Abatement actions are to be undertaken or which may become contaminated as a result of such abatement actions. A Contained Work Area is a Work Area which has been Isolated, Plasticized, and equipped with a Decontamination Enclosure System. An Isolated Work Area is a Work Area which is Isolated, but has not been Plasticized and may or may not be equipped with a Decontamination Enclosure System.
AV.
Worker Decontamination Enclosure System: That portion of a Decontamination Enclosure System designed for controlled passage of Workers, and other personnel and Authorized Visitors, typically consIsting of a Clean Room. a Shower Room, and an Equipment Room.
QUALITY CONTROL A.
Safety Compliance: In addition to detailed requirements of this Specification. comply with laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations of federal, state, regional, and local authorities and publications regarding handling, storing, transporting, and disposing of Asbestos Waste materials. Submit matters of Interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting the Work. Where the requirements of this Specification and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirement shall apply. When requirements of reference documents vary, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
B.
Contractor shall have at least one copy each of 29 CFR Part 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards, 29 CFR 1926.1101,40 GFR Part 61, Subparts A & M, and all pertinent state and local regulations at his office and at the job site.
C.
Before the commencement of any work at the site, the Contractor shall post bilingual (as appropriate) EPA and OSHA caution signs In and around the Work Area to comply with EPA and OSHA regulations.
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.4
D.
Area Monitoring shall be performed by the observation Service, which will conduct air sampling of the Abatement Project (1) outside the building, (2) immediately outside the Work Area, (3) In the Work Area. and (4) for Work Area Clearance Testing after decontamination operations.
E.
Personal Monitoring and other monitoring, which are required by law, or considered necessary by the Contractor for Worker protection shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
F.
Job Walk: The Contractor must attend the Job Walk to qualify to bid on any or all portions of this project.
SUBMITTALS AND NOTIFICATIONS (ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE AS SUBMITTAL FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE START OF WORK.) A.
Copies of permits and/or notifications, as required by applicable rules and regulations.
B.
Copies of appropriate AHERA training certificates (current) for each employee from their respective training agency or organization.
C.
Copies of appropriate AHERA training certificates (current) for each employee from their respective training agency or organization.
D.
Copies of registration (current) with the Office of Public School Construction (OPSC) for each employee from their respective training agency or organization.
E.
Submit proof that all persons providing labor and/or professional services who will be entering contaminated areas have had current (less than one year prior to start of the Project) medical examinations in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101. Furnish physician’s interpretation of said examinations including the declaration that the worker can wear a negative pressure respirator while performing their work.
F.
Record of successful fit testing performed by a qualified individual within the previous six months, for each employee to be used on this project with the employee's name and social security number with each record.
G.
Proposed respiratory protection program for employees throughout all phases of the job, including make, model and NIOSH approval number of the respirators to be used.
H.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on potentially hazardous materials to be used on the project.
I.
Proof of Contractor’s License and Asbestos Certification from the Contractors Licensing Board, and proof of registration with the Division of Occupational Safety and Health in accordance with California Labor Code, Section 6501.
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.5
J.
Copy of appropriate General Liability Insurance Certificate naming the Government as well as the designated Environmental Consultant as additionally insured.
K.
List of proposed environmental laboratories to be used by the Contactor, including copies of pertinent licenses, certifications and registrations.
L.
List of proposed subcontractors to be used by the Contractor, if any.
M.
List of proposed waste transporters to be used by the Contractor, including copies of pertinent licenses, certifications and registrations.
N.
List of proposed waste disposal facilities to be used by Contractor, including copies of pertinent licenses, certifications and registrations.
O.
List of product substitutions proposed by Contractor to be considered for approval by the Government and/or designated Environmental Consultant.
P.
Written abatement plan by Contractor, as required by 8CCR, Sec. 5208.
Q.
Detailed specific per day, proposed
R.
Provide manufacturer’s certification that vacuums, differential pressure equipment filters, and other local exhaust ventilation equipment conform to ANSI Z9.2.
work schedule including, but not necessarily limited to, dates of proposed work, number and hours of each shift number of workers/supervisors for each shift, and the completion date.
REIMBURSEMENT OF COSTS OF THE GOVERNMENT AND THE CONSULTANT A.
In The event that reviews and/or Clearance Testing by the Consultant or regulatory agencies shows that the Work Area or any portion of the Work Area is not decontaminated or If the Work is not in conformance with the Specifications, the Government, Consultant and his Consultants will record all time, tests and project related expenses expended to monitor the Work until the work in compliance. All time and expenses recorded by the Government Consultant and his Consultants to monitor the above work, and all time, tests and project related expenses incurred by the Government and Consultant and his Consultants outside the Project Work Days, Work Hours or Contract Time shall, at the discretion of the Government, be paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor, promptly upon receipt of the billing from the Government, or the Consultant shall reimburse the Government at the normal billing rate of the Government or the Consultant and his Consultants, or the Government is authorized to withhold funds from the Contract Sum, for all time spent by the Government, Consultant and his Consultants for reviews, testing and other project related expenses when any of the above conditions occur.
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
Overtime work by the Contractor shall be requested in writing at least 48 hours in advance to allow for scheduling of appropriate Government Personnel and the Consultant. 1.
PART 2 2.1
2.2
In the event the Consultant is required to work overtime, either at the request of or because of the Contractor, the Government has the option of charging the Contractor for the overtime hours worked at the Consultant’s overtime rate.
WORKER PROTECTION
PERSONAL PROTECTION AND HYGIENE A.
All persons working on an Asbestos abatement site shall, when present in the work area, wear disposable clothing with attached foot and head covers and at minimum a half face air purifying respirator equipped with high efficiency particulate air filters.
B.
The Contractor shall ensure that all persons entering the work area without exception: 1.
Change from street clothes to protective clothing at designated areas prior to starting the day's work.
2.
Smoking is prohibited is all times. No eating or drinking is to take place beyond the established critical barrier. Prior to eating or drinking, the workers will be fully decontaminated. Each worker will then dress in clean overalls to eat or drink. These new coveralls can then be worn back into the work area.
C.
The Contractor shall require that each person entering the Work Area shall wear an approved respirator and protective clothing. There shall be no exceptions to this rule.
D.
Protective clothing shall consist of disposable full-body clothing of non-woven material comprised of heat and pressure-bonded polyethylene fibers. Material shall be chemically and biologically inert, low-linting and static free(unless laundered); durable enough to resist abrasion, puncturing and tearing; highly resistant to penetration of air-borne particulate when wet or dry. Suits may be fabricated with integral head and foot covering. Disposable clothing shall be adequately sealed to the footwear to prevent body contamination.
E.
The Contractor shall require a minimum of a half-face negative pressure respirator with high efficiency filters during the removal and clean-up operations. Supply a sufficient quantity of respirator filters so that workers can change filters as needed. Require that respirators be wet-rinsed and filters discarded each time a worker exits the work area. Require that new filters be installed each time a worker re-enters the work area. Store respirators and filters at the job site and protect them totally from exposure to lead dust prior to their use.
F.
Wearing of contact lenses in the contaminated atmosphere shall not be permitted.
RESPIRATORS
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A.
The Contractor shall provide approved respirators to all workers at no charge.
B.
The Contractor shall require that each person entering the work area shall wear an approved respirator. There shall be no exceptions to this rule.
C.
The Contractor shall instruct and train each worker involved in Asbestos abatement or maintenance and repair of Asbestoscontaining materials in proper respiratory use and require that each worker always wear a respirator, properly fitted on the face in the work area from the start of any operation which may cause airborne lead particles until the work area is completely decontaminated.
D.
The Contractor shall ensure that the employees will use respiratory protection that is appropriate for the lead level encountered in the work place or as required for other toxic or oxygen-deficient situations encountered.
E.
Except to the extent that more stringent requirements are written directly into the Specifications, the following regulations and standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of the Specifications by reference) as if copied directly into the Specifications, or as if published copies were bound herewith. Where there is a conflict in requirements set forth in these regulations and standards, meet the more stringent requirement. OSHA - U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Safety and Health Standards 29 CFR 1910, Section 1001 and Section 1910.134. 29 CFR 1926.62. ANSI - American National Standard Practices for Respiratory Protection, ANSI Z88.2. NIOSH - National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health MSHA - Mine Safety and Health Administration
F.
Air Purifying Respirators 1.
Respirator Bodies: Provide half face or full face type respirators. Equip full face respirators with a nose cup or other anti-fogging device.
2.
Filter Cartridges: Provide, at a minimum, HEPA type filters labeled with NIOSH and MSHA Certification for "Radionuclides, Radon Daughters, Dust, Fumes, Mists including Asbestos-Containing Dusts and Mists" and color coded in accordance with ANSI Z88.2. In addition, a chemical cartridge section may be added, if required, for solvents, etc., in use. In this case, provide cartridges that have each section of the combination canister labeled with the appropriate color code and NIOSH/MSHA Certification.
3.
Non-permitted respirators: Do not use single use, disposable or quarter face respirators.
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD G.
Fit Testing: 1.
2. 3.
H.
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL): 1.
I.
Initial Fitting: Provide initial fitting of respiratory protection during a respiratory protection training course. Fit types of respirator to be actually worn by each individual. Allow an individual to use only those respirators for which training and fit testing has been provided. On a Semi-Annual Basis: check the fit of worker's respirator by having irritant smoke blown onto the respirator from a smoke tube. Upon Each Wearing: Require that each time an air-purifying respirator is put on it be checked for fit with a positive and negative pressure fit test in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions or ANSI Z88.2.
8-Hour Time Weighted Average: (TWA) of lead to which any worker may be exposed shall not exceed 0.1 f/cc.
Respiratory Protection Factor: Respirator Type
Protection Factor
Air purifying: Negative pressure respirator High efficiency filter Half facepiece
10
Air purifying: Negative pressure respirator High efficiency filter Full facepiece Powered Air Purifying (PAPR): Positive pressure respirator High efficiency filter Half or Full facepiece
50
50
Type C supplied air: Positive pressure respirator Pressure demand or other positive pressure mode Half facepiece
1,000
Type C supplied air: Positive pressure respirator Pressure demand or other positive pressure mode Full facepiece
2,000
Type C supplied air: Positive pressure respirator Pressure demand or other positive pressure mode Full facepiece Equipped with an auxiliary positive pressure Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA)
10,000
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA): Positive Pressure respirator
10,000
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Pressure demand or other positive pressure mode 2.3
2.4
DRESS AND EQUIPMENT A.
The Contractor shall provide approved protective clothing to all workers, and to all official representatives of the Government, State or other governmental entity, and the Consultant who may inspect the job site.
B.
Protective clothing shall consist of disposable full-body clothing of non- woven material comprised of heat and pressure-bonded polyethylene fibers. material shall be chemically and biologically inert, low-linting and static free(unless laundered); durable enough to resist abrasion, puncturing and tearing; highly resistant to penetration of air-borne particulate when wet or dry. Suits may be fabricated with integral head and foot covering. Disposable clothing shall be adequately sealed to the footwear to prevent body contamination.
C.
Disposable protective clothing shall be disposed of as Asbestos waste every time the wearer exists from the work space/equipment room to the shower room while proceeding to the clean area.
D.
Additional safety equipment: Hard hats shall meet the requirements of ANSI Standard Z89.1; eye protection shall meet the requirements of ANSI Standard Z87.1 and foot protection shall meet the requirements of ANSI Standard Z41.1; disposable PVC gloves as necessary shall be provided to all workers and authorized visitors. Non-skid footwear shall be provided to all abatement workers.
WORKER PROTECTION PROCEDURES - TO BE POSTED IN CLEAN ROOM Bilingual (English and other appropriate language[s] )Worker Protection Procedures must be posted in the Clean Room. If the first language of all Workers is English, the bilingual procedures are excepted. A
Each Worker and Authorized Visitor shall, upon entering the job site: remove street clothes in the Clean Room and put on a respirator and clean protective clothing before entering the Equipment Room or the Work Area.
B.
All Workers shall, each time they leave the Work Area: remove gross-contamination from clothing before leaving the Work Area; proceed to the Equipment Room and remove all clothing except respirators: still wearing the respirator, proceed naked to the showers; clean the outside of the respirator with soap and water while showering; remove the respirator; thoroughly shampoo and wash themselves.
C.
Following showering and drying off, each Worker shall proceed directly to the Clean Room and dress in their personal clothing. Before reentering the Work Area, each Worker and Authorized Visitor shall put on a clean respirator and shall dress in clean protective clothing.
D.
Contaminated protective clothing and work footwear shall be stored in the Equipment Room when not in use in the Work Area. At appropriate times or upon completion of Asbestos Abatement,
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD dispose of protective clothing and footwear as contaminated waste, or launder in accordance with government regulations.
2.5
E.
Workers removing waste containers from the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure shall enter the Holding Area from outside wearing a respirator and dressed in clean disposable coveralls. No Worker shall use this system as a means to leave or enter the Washroom or the Work Area.
F.
The disposable clothing worn outside the Work Area shall be of different color or markings from the disposable clothing worn inside the Work Area.
G.
Workers shall not eat, drink, smoke, or chew gum or tobacco while in the Work Area.
H.
Workers and Authorized Visitors with beards or who are unshaven shall not enter the Work Area.
MEDICAL EXAMINATIONS AND HISTORIES A.
PART 3 3.1
Before exposure to airborne Asbestos, the Contractor will provide each employee providing labor or professional services at the Project site with a current comprehensive medical exam, including a history of respiratory and gastrointestinal diseases, meeting the general definition outlined in 29 CFR 1910.1001, 29 CFR 1910.134, [and] 29 CFR 1926.1101 and California Administrative Code Title 8, CAC Section 5208, page 442.2.1 part (1)]. PRODUCTS
GENERAL A.
3.2
3.3
3.4
Contractor shall furnish, provide and utilize the following products in the Work as specified.
PROTECTIVE COVERING A.
Protective sheeting shall be 4 or 6 mil in thickness and conform to ASTM E154, Kc-156, D-124B, D-2103 and D4379.
B.
Polyethylene sheeting shall be fire resistive.
C.
Polyethylene sheeting shall be opaque in color.
PROTECTIVE PACKAGING A.
Bags utilized for waste shall be a minimum of 6 mil in thickness and properly labeled in accordance with EPA, OSHA, and DOT regulations.
B.
Appropriately labeled, sealable, impermeable drum containers.
TAPE A.
Duct Tape 2” or wider, or equal, and capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of plastic, and for attachment of plastic sheet to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials, and
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including use of amended water. 3.5
CAUTION SIGNS A.
3.6
3.7
3.8
Before removing Asbestos, and at each separate work area, the contractor performing abatement shall display caution signs as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, 29 CFR 1926.1101 and/or other pertinent state and local regulations.
SURFACTANT A.
Surfactant, or wetting agent, for amending water will be 50% polyoxyethylene polyglycol ester and 50% polyoxyethylene ether, or equivalent, at a concentration of one (1) ounce per five (5) gallons of water.
B.
Surfactants containing the ingredient Methylene Chloride are not acceptable.
ENCAPSULATING SEALER A.
Shall be a penetrating or bridging type, pollution-free, nontoxic, with a Class A fire classification as specified herein. Encapsulants with the ingredint Mwthylene Chloride are not acceptable.
B.
Shall be flexible when cured, resistant to weathering, oxidation, aging and abuse.
C.
Approved manufacturer for encapsulation of spray-applied or trowel-applied materials include American Coatings Corporation. Approved manufacturer for all other encapsulation work include American Coatings, HB Fuller Company - Fosters Product Division, or approved equal.
D.
Shall be a water-dispensed coating, insoluble in water when cured.
E.
Shall be used undiluted.
F.
Shall have a written certification from the manufacturer that the encapsulant is compatible with the replacement material and will safely withstand temperatures of all surfaces on which the encapsulation will be applied.
G.
The Government, or the designated Consultant for the proposed project, may at any time take random samples of encapsulant from open containers or spray equipment for testing to insure product quality and compliance with the Specifications.
H.
Encapsulant to be applied to structural members before reapplication of spray-applied or trowel-applied fireproofing must be a component of the fireproofing system when it was tested and rated by the underwriters laboratory (UL), American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM), Factory Mutual (FM) or other building code approved agencies.
LAGGING ADHESIVE
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A. 3.9
GLOVEBAGS A.
3.10
The glovebag (typically constructed of 6 mil transparent regulate plastic) has 2 inward-projecting longsleeve rubber gloves, one inward-projecting waterwand sleeve, an internal tool pouch, and an attached labeled receptacle for Asbestos Waste.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT A.
Provide suitable tools for Asbestos removal and encapsulation..
B.
Negative air pressure equipment: High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filtration systems shall have filtration equipment in compliance with ANSI Z9.2, local exhaust ventilation.
C.
Manometer: read-out.
D.
HEPA Vacuums: ventilation.
PART 4 4.1
Shall meet NFPA 90A Code, such as Arabol, Childers CP52, InsulCoustic 102, or equal.
Shall have a built-in alarm and contineous hard copy Shall comply with ANSI Z9.2, local exhaust
EXECUTION
WORK AREA PREPARATION A.
Contractor must perform All work in accordance with, but not necessarily limited to, 29 CFR 1926.1101 (OSHA regulations), 8CCR 5280 (Cal/OSHA).
B.
Preparation procedures for removal of spray-applied or trowelapplied materials; tank, boiler, breaching, flue, chiller, miscellaneous equipment and pipe insulation; and other friable materials: 1.
Removal of the above or other friable Asbestos-Containing materials, unless specified otherwise, shall be executed in a “Contained” Work Area.
2.
Contractor shall Isolate the Work Area for the duration of the Project, completely sealing all openings including, but not limited to, HVAC ducts, diffusers and grilles, skylights, doorways, and windows, with six (6) mil polyethylene taped securely to a clean surface. Spray adhesive used on finished surfaces should be avoided where possible. Construct barriers that enclose or separate Work Areas with wood or metal framing members and sheathed with plywood.
3.
HVAC systems shall be shut down. Contractor shall design his Work Area preparation and engineering controls as specified and/or as required to prevent damage to and contamination of the affected HVAC system.
4.
Contractor shall remove all Movable Objects from the Work Area that are vulnerable to damage or contamination, or that will impede or prevent the completion of the Work. All Movable Objects removed from the Work Area shall be clean
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD before being moved to the designated storage area. 5.
Clean and cover Fixed and Movable Objects that can remain in the Work Area with six (6) ml polyethylene sheeting taped securely in place. Special precautions shall be taken to protect Fixed Objects vulnerable to damage or contamination.
6.
All Fixed and Movable Objects requiring cleaning shall be washed with amended water or cleaned with a HEPA filtered vacuum.
7.
All objects removed shall be adequately marked and charted on a plan to ensure proper reinstallation upon completion of the decontamination of the Work Area. The objects shall be stored in a location designated by the Government, and in a manner that will prevent contamination or damage to the objects. Damaged and missing objects will be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the Government.
8.
Seal and protect all light fixtures, computer systems communication systems. lighted exit signs and other electrical items, etc, that will remain within the Work Area with 6 mil polyethylene taped securely. The polyethylene cover shall be kept away from heat-generating electrical devices where fire or damage to the device is possible. Light fixtures and all other electrical items shall be thoroughly cleaned before. covering. Make waterproof all electrical conduit connections and other electrical devices that will be exposed to moisture.
9.
After Work Area abatement but prior to clearance testing, the Contractor shall remove heating, ventilation and air conditioning system filters, and pack them in protective six (6) mil polyethylene sheeting for burial in the approved Waste Disposal Facility.
10.
After Work Area abatement but prior to clearance testing the air handling and duct system shall be cleaned. The Contractor shall possess the necessary skills or shall retain the services of a professional company that is experienced in the decontamination of air handling and duct systems.
11.
Clean the proposed Work Areas before plasticizing floors and walls, using HEPA vacuum equipment or wet-cleaning methods as appropriate. Do not use methods that raise dust. such as dry sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped with HEPA filters.
12.
Work Area (Containment): Contractor shall cover entire floor with a minimum of two (2) six (6) mil protective coverings. Cover wall and column surfaces with a minimum of two (2) four (4) ml protective covering. Floor coverings shall extend a minimum of 12' up vertical surfaces and behind wall covers. All seams shall be staggered and securely taped. Each layer shall be independently taped to the wall. a.
Contractor shall cover entire floor with a heavy duty tarpaulin (reinforced polyethylene) followed by three
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD (3) layers of six (6) mil protective coverings and a single ten (10) mil protective floater sheet. Cover walls and columns with three (3) four (4) mil protective covering. Floor coverings shall extend a minimum of 12" up vertical surfaces and behind wall coverings. Alt seams shall be staggered, adhesive sprayed and securely taped. 13.
Install 2' x 2' Plexiglas observation window(s) at strategic location(s) In the "Containment" barrier to allow observation of work from outside the Work Area. Do not Install observation windows at locations accessible to building occupants or the public.
14.
Seal all wall, plumbing, duct and other cavities to prevent Asbestos materials from falling into such cavities during the Work.
15.
The Contractor shall check regularly (at beginning, middle and end of each shift as a minimum) all polyethylene isolation and containment (protective) barriers for punctures, loose seats, contact with heat-generating devices, etc. Problem areas shall be repaired or mended immediately.
16.
Maintain existing emergency exits from the building. Maintain a minimum of two (2) exits from Work Areas where possible. The first exit shall be the Worker Decontamination Enclosure System. The second exit may be the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System or a ripcord type, emergency only exit in the plastic containment at a door, window or other appropriate location. Exits, where possible, shall be on opposite ends of the Work Area. All exits shall be labeled in bright letters or signage. The second exit shall be labeled “Emergency Exit Only". Establish alternative exits satisfactory to fire officials where existing building or Work Area emergency exits am unavoidably blocked by activities of this project.
17.
Provide and maintain appropriate fire extinguisher inside and outside the Work Area. One 30-pound type 'ABC" fire extinguisher is required for each 2,000 sq. ft of floor area.
18.
Install and maintain temporary emergency lighting with battery backup power in all Work Areas. Work Areas with natural lighting, and no night work to be performed, are exempt from this requirement.
19.
Shutdown of electric power during the wet removal or encapsulation phase of the Project is mandatory unless directed otherwise. Provide temporary power and lighting when necessary, and ensure safe installation of temporary power sources and equipment per applicable electrical code requirements including appropriate Ground Fault protection. Temporary light fixtures will be explosion proof. Provide and maintain auxiliary diesel generator equipment where existing facility power is Insufficient. Locate generator or vent generator exhaust in a manner that will prevent carbon
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD monoxide hazards to workers and the public. When power shutdown is required, the Contractor shall check for conditions where shutdown will pose a danger to the building or to the building's components. Contractor shall take all precautions necessary, including inspections and testing, to Insure the safety of his employees and other building occupants from electrical hazards during the course of the Project. Existing fire, smoke detection and other life safety Systems shall be kept in operation at all times, or, the Contractor shall install and maintain a temporary system or alternate acceptable to the Government and fire officials.
C.
20.
The Contractor shall install and maintain Negative Air Pressure Equipment during the abatement and decontamination phases of the Project until the Clearance Test has passed. A sufficient amount of air shall be exhausted by the unit(s) to create a pressure of -0.02 inches of water within the Work Area with respect to the area outside the Work Area. If only one unit is necessary to provide the specified negative air pressure in a Work Area, the Contractor shall have a backup unit in place should the first unit fail, and for filter changes. Install and maintain emergency self-starting diesel generator back-up power for negative pressure equipment in the event of power loss in the facility. Locate generator or vent generator exhaust in a manner that will prevent carbon monoxide hazards to workers and the public. When more than one negative air pressure unit is required, emergency power back-up is required for only 50% of the units.
21.
Install and maintain a manometer from the time abatement begins until the Clearance Test has passed in Work Areas where adjacent areas are occupied by unprotected workers, other building users or the public and when dry removal methods are required to be employed due to restrictive project conditions. Report readings to the Environmental Consultant at the start and end of each work shift.
22.
Notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24) hours in advance of when preparatory steps will be completed. Asbestos Abatement Work shall not commence until: all preparation requirements have been completed: all tools, equipment. and materials are on hand; all required submittals, notices and permits have been approved, and until the Environmental Consultant authorizes in writing that Work may commence.
Preparation Procedures for abatement of limited scope shall be appropriate for the restricted extent of the exposure. Consult the Limited Asbestos Survey by RGA Environmental, dated October 23, 2009, to ascertain the materials involved (gray fireproofing, pipe insulation, and floor tile with black mastic). When approved by the Owner, the “glovebag” method may be used for abatement that is localized and of limited scope, and debris cleanup. 1.
Above removal, repair and debris cleanup activities unless specified otherwise, shall be executed in an “isolated” Work Area.
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 18
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
Contractor shall Isolate the Work Area for the duration Of the Project completely seating all openings, including but not limited to, HVAC ducts, diffusers and grilles, skylights, doorways and windows, with six (6) mil polyethylene sheet plastic securely taped to a clean surface. Spray adhesive applied on finished surfaces should be avoided where possible. As an option to isolating an entire room or area, the Contractor may construct a singlelayer six (6) ml polyethylene Isolation barrier (Mini Containment) around the pipe., equipment or debris being worked on in accordance with procedures specified by 29 CFR 1926.50 for small scale, short duration projects. Work Areas with permeable finishes and/or components will require the covering of such items with one layer of tour (4) ml polyethylene plastic or the Contractor shall use the Mini Containment option.
3.
Curtained Doorway; Contractor shall construct a Curtained Doorway of clear plastic sheeting, using six (6) mil polyethylene plastic, at entrances and exits to the Work Area. If the Mini Containment option is used, move the construction of the Curtained Doorway from the room entrance to the Mini Containment itself.
4.
HVAC systems shall be shut down. If the air handling system cannot be shut down and there is an avenue for asbestos fibers generated during abatement work to enter into the air stream of the HVAC system, construct a single-layer six (6) mil polyethylene plastic barrier (Mini Containment) around the item(s) being abated. In addition contain/secure HVAC System when possible without interfering with service to areas outside the Work Area.
5.
Shutdown of electric power during work unless directed otherwise is mandatory where electrical hazards are possible. Provide temporary power and lighting when necessary, and ensure safe installation of temporary sources and equipment per applicable electrical code requirements, including appropriate Ground Fault protection. Temporary light fixtures must be explosion proof. Provide and maintain auxiliary diesel generator equipment where existing facility power is insufficient. Locate generator or vent generator exhaust in a manner that will prevent carbon monoxide hazards to workers and the public. When power shutdown is required, the Contractor shall check for conditions where shutdown will pose a danger to the building or to the building's contents. Contractor shall take all precautions necessary, including inspections and testing, to insure the safety of his employees and other building occupants from electrical hazards during the course of the Project. Existing fire, smoke detection and other life safety systems shall be kept in operation at all times or, the Contractor shall install and maintain a temporary system or alternative acceptable to the Government and fire officials.
6.
Contractor shall check regularly (at the beginning, middle and end of each shift as a minimum) all polyethylene Isolation barriers for punctures, loose seats, contact with heat-generating devices, etc. Problem areas shall be
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 19
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD repaired or mended immediately.
D.
7.
Contractor shall install and maintain Negative Air Pressure Equipment during the abatement and decontamination phases of the project until the Clearance Test has passed. A sufficient amount of air shall be exhausted by the unit(s) to create a pressure of negative 0.02 inches (-0.02 inches) of water within the Work Area with respect to the area outside the Work Area. if only one unit is necessary to provide the specified negative air pressure in a Work Area, the Contractor shall have a backup unit in place should the first unit fail and for filter changes. When the "Mini Containment" option is utilized the Contractor may substitute a HEPA vacuum to create the specified negative air pressure within the Work Area when standard Negative Air Pressure Equipment volumes are too great.
8.
Maintain existing emergency exits from the building. Maintain a minimum of two (2) exits from the Work Area where possible. The first exit shall be the Worker Decontamination Enclosure system. The second exit, when possible, shall be a second door, window, or other appropriate opening with a rip cord emergency only exit seal Exits, where possible, shall be on opposite ends of the Work Area. All exits shall be labeled in bright letters or signage. The second exit shall be labeled “Emergency Exit Only." Establish alternative exits satisfactory to fire officials when existing building Work Area emergency exits are unavoidably blocked by activities of this project.
9.
Provide and maintain appropriate type of fire extinguishers in the Work Area. The size and number of extinguishers shall be as required by local fire officials, but shall not be less than one (1) fire extinguisher Inside and outside the Work Area.
10.
Provide temporary emergency lighting with battery backup power In all Work Areas where none exists. Work Areas with natural lighting, and no night work to be performed, are exempt from this requirement.
11.
Notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-tour (24) hours in advance of when preparatory steps will be completed. Asbestos Abatement Work shall not commence until: all preparation requirements have been completed; all tools, equipment, and materials are on hand; all required submittals 1 notices and permits have been approved, and until the Environmental Consultant authorizes in writing mat Work Is to commence.
Preparation procedures for ceiling panel removal: 1.
Panel removal activities may be executed in a non-isolated Work Area when the use of a moveable decontamination enclosure unit is employed, otherwise follow preparation procedure specified in Article 4.01.
2.
Government shall remove, where possible, all moveable furniture, cabinets, etc., from underneath the area where
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 20
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD panels are being removed, and adjacent areas to allow access for the moveable decontamination enclosure unit. Contractor shall cover Fixed Objects with three (3) mil polyethylene sheeting. Special precautions shall be taken to protect items vulnerable to moisture or contamination.
E.
3.
Shutdown of electrical power during the work is mandatory in areas where a possible electrical shock poses a hazard unless directed otherwise. Provide temporary power and lighting when necessary and ensure a safe installation of temporary power sources and equipment per applicable electrical code requirements including appropriate Ground Fault protection. Temporary light fixtures shall be explosive proof. Provide and maintain auxiliary diesel generator equipment where existing facility power is insufficient. Locate generator or vent generator exhaust in a manner that will prevent carbon monoxide hazards to workers and the public. When power shutdown is required, the Contractor shall check for conditions where shutdown will pose a danger to the building or to the building's components. Contractor shall take all precautions necessary, Including inspections and testing, to Insure the safety of his employees and other building occupants from electrical hazards during the course of the Project. Existing fire, smoke detection and other life safety Systems shall be kept in operation at all times or, the Contractor shall install and maintain a temporary system or alternative acceptable to the Government and fire officials.
4.
HVAC systems shall be shut down while removal is in progress.
5.
Maintain existing emergency and fire exits from Work Area or establish alternative exits satisfactory to the Government and fire officials.
6.
Provide and maintain appropriate fire extinguishers in the Work Area and adjacent areas. The size and number of extinguishers shall be as required by local fire officials but shall not be less than one (1) per Work Area.
7.
Provide temporary emergency lighting with battery backup power in all Work Areas where no emergency lighting is provided. Work Area with natural lighting and no night work to be performed are exempt from this requirement.
8.
Notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24) hours in advance Of when preparatory steps will be completed. Asbestos Abatement Work shall not commence until: all preparation requirements have been completed; all tools, equipment, and materials are on hand; all required submittals, notices and permits have been approved and until the Environmental Consultant authorizes in writing that the Work may commence.
Preparation Procedures for ceiling debris removal: 1.
F.
Prepare Work Area in accordance with Article 4.01-A.
Preparation procedures for encapsulation of spray-applied or
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 21
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD trowel-applied materials: 1.
Prepare Work Area in accordance with Article 4.01-A. following exceptions shall apply: a.
G.
Wall covering may be reduced to a single layer.
Preparation procedures for removal of nonfriable AsbestosContaining roofing and “Transite” materials (in good condition.) 1.
4.2
The
No Work Area preparation required.
DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS A.
Decontamination Enclosure Systems (Worker and Equipment) general requirements: 1.
B.
Build suitable wood, metal or PVC framing as described herein and as approved by the Environmental Consultant at the shop drawing submittal stage. Portable prefab units, if utilized, must be submitted for review and approval by the Environmental Consultant before start of construction. Submittal shall include, but not be limited to, a floor plan layout complying with the schematic layouts bound herein, showing dimensions, materials. sizes, thickness, plumbing, and electrical outlets, etc.
Decontamination Enclosure System for asbestos abatement work in "Contained" Work Areas: 1.
Construct a Workers' Decontamination Enclosure System contiguous to the Work Area consisting of three totally enclosed chambers to conform with standard drawings bound herein as follows: a.
An Equipment Room with an Air Lock to the Work Area and a Curtained Doorway to the Shower Room.
b.
A Shower Room with two Curtained Doorways, one to the Equipment Room and one to the Clean Room. Plastic on Shower Room and adjoining Equipment and Glean Rooms shall be opaque. The Shower Room shall contain at least one shower with hot and cold or warm water. Careful attention shall be paid to the shower enclosure to ensure against leaking of any kind. Trap shower waste using filters having a maximum pore size of 1.0 micron, and drain into a sanitary sewer. Replace filter when they become clogged. Ensure a supply of soap and disposable towels at all times in the Shower Room.
c.
A Clean Room with one Curtained Doorway into the shower and one entrance or exit to non-contaminated areas of the building. The Clean Room shall have sufficient space for storage of the Workers street clothes, towels, and other non-contaminated items. Joint use of this space for other functions, such as offices, storage of equipment, materials, or tools, shall be prohibited.
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 22
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
C.
2.
b.
A Holding Room with a Curtained Doorway to The Washroom and a doorway to an uncontaminated area.
Construct a Decontamination Enclosure System consisting of two totally enclosed chambers, as follows: a.
An Equipment Room, consisting of a Curtained Doorway to the Isolated Work Area and a Curtained Doorway to the Shower Room.
b.
A Shower Room, consisting of a Curtained Doorway to the Equipment Room and a Curtained Doorway to an uncontaminated area. Plastic on Shower Room and adjoining Equipment and Clean Rooms shall be opaque. The Shower Room shall contain at least one shower with hot and cold or warm water. Careful attention shall be paid to the shower enclosure to ensure against leaking of any kind. Trap shower waste using filters having a maximum pore size of 1.0 micron, and drain into a sanitary sewer. Replace filter when they become clogged. Ensure a supply of soap and disposable towels at all times in the Shower Room.
Construction of an Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System is optional. a.
A Washroom with an Air Lock to a designated staging area of the Work Area and a Curtained Doorway to the Holding Room.
b.
A Holding Room with a Curtained Doorway to the Washroom and a doorway to an uncontaminated area.
Construct a Decontamination Enclosure System - Worker and Equipment in accordance with Article 4.02.
Decontamination Enclosure System for nonfriable AsbestosContaining materials: 1.
F.
A Washroom with an Air Lock to a designated staging area of the Work Area and a Curtained Doorway to the Holding Room.
Decontamination Enclosure System for encapsulation of sprayapplied or trowel-applied materials: 1.
E.
a.
Decontamination Enclosure System for asbestos-abatement work in “Isolated" Work Areas: 1.
D.
Construct an Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System consisting of two totally enclosed chambers as follows:
Construct a Decontamination Enclosure System - Worker and Equipment in accordance with Article 4.02.
Movable Decontamination Enclosure Unit for ceiling panel removal and ceiling debris removal:
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 23
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
A Movable Decontamination Enclosure Unit shall be erected for the ceiling panel removal and ceiling debris removal work. The enclosure shall be of a scaffold frame type on locked casters with six (6) mil polyethylene sheeting at floor and all four sides, one side to serve as a Curtained Doorway with a double-layer polyethylene sheeting. Construction of enclosure to comply with EPA, OSHA and local regulatory requirements. Install and operate negative air equipment connected to or within the unit. Negative pressure within the enclosure shall be sufficient to create a high flow of air into me top of the enclosure. a.
4.3
4.4
Build suitable framing as described herein and as approved by the Environmental Consultant at the shop drawing submittal stage. Portable prefab units, If utilized, must be submitted for review and approved by the Environmental Consultant before start of construction. Submittal shall Include, but not be limited to, a floor plan layout complying with the schematic layouts bound herein, showing dimension, materials, size, thickness, plumbing, and electrical outlets, etc.
DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES A.
The Contractor shall assure that all employees, who work in areas where exposure to Asbestos is expected, decontaminate whenever exiting the work area and at the end of the work shift.
B.
Decontaminating will consist of rinsing the whole body and protective clothing with water from a water sprayer or portable shower located in the two stage decontamination unit and then disposing of the protective clothing.
C.
All shower waste water will be filtered through a final stage 5 micron filter prior to disposal.
D.
Disposable protective clothing shall be disposed of as Asbestos waste every time the wearer exists from the work area.
REMOVAL PROCEDURES A.
Contractor shall utilize the OSHA (CFR 1926.1101), Cal/OSHA (8CCR Sec. 5208) procedures for the removal of Asbestos-containing materials.
B.
Begin work by applying Ammended Water to Asbestos materials. The Asbestos materials shall be sufficiently saturated without causing excessive dripping. Spray materials repeatedly duringthe work process to maintain a wet condition.
C.
Asbestos materials shall be removed in manageable sections by a multi-person team, some of whom are wetting and the remainder removing and cleaning. Any material which falls to the floor shall be wetted and picked up immediately. Material shall not be allowed to dry out. Material drop shall not exceed 15 feet. For heights up to 50 feet, provide inclined chutes or scaffolding to intercept drop. For heights exceeding 50 feet , provide enclosed dust-proof chutes. Before a second area can be started, removed material
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 24
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD shall be packed into approved and labeled packaging while It is still wet. The outside of all containers shall be clean before leaving the Work Area. Move containers to the Washroom (Shower Room when Equipment Decontamination System is not required), wetclean each container thoroughly, and move to Holding Area pending removal to uncontaminated areas. D.
Prevent build up of excess water and debris by regularly using a HEPA vacuumed system to containerize debris and water.
E.
Asbestos material debris, drippings, splatters, and overspray on surfaces within accessible ceiling cavities and other accessible areas shall be removed in the same manner and cleaned to the degree as specified above.
F.
The Work Area shall be kept orderly, clean and clear of work materials, polyethylene sheeting, tape, cleaning material, and clothing. and all other disposable material or items used in the Work Area shall be packed into properly labeled protective packaging and removed from the Work Area.
G.
Protective packages and drums containing Asbestos materials shall be cleaned and stored in the isolated Holding Area until that time when the materials are to be loaded and hauled to the Hazardous Waste Disposal Facility for burial. The packages and drums shall be stored in piles no higher than four (4) feet, and in a manner that will not result in damage to the packages or drums. Transport bags in covered drums or carts from the Holding Area to the transport.
H.
Equipment removal procedures: Clean surfaces of contaminated equipment thoroughly by wet-sponging or wiping before moving such Items into the Washroom (Shower Room when Equipment Decontamination System is not required) for final cleaning and removal to uncontaminated areas. Ensure that personnel do not leave Work Area through the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure.
I.
Do not bag water used during abatement activities. Properly filter and drain water into building sanitary drain unless prohibited by local regulations. Filter shall have a maximum pore size of 1.0 micron.
J.
Nonfriable Materials: 1.
Resilient Floor Tile and Mastic (also applies to Resilient Sheet Flooring) a.
Remove floor tile and mastic with wet methods and in a manner that will not create debris. Mechanical equipment or tools used with water are permissible providing that friable debris will not be generated. Mechanical equipment or tools used without the use of water will be allowed only if they are the dustless type and if the equipment has a self-contained bagging system and HEPA filtration. Package floor tile and mastic in properly labeled double six (6) mil lined containers or bags for proper disposal according to applicable local, state and federal rules & regulations.
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 25
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2
4.5
4.6
Transite Materials: Remove Transite materials with wet methods and in a manner that will not create friable debris. Do not use saws or other such mechanical equipment. Package Transite materials in unlabeled double six (8) ml lined containers or bags, or in accordance with the disposal facilities requirements.
ENCAPSULATION OF ASBESTOS SPRAY-APPLIED OR TROWEL-APPLIED MATERIALS A.
Repair damaged and missing areas of existing spray-applied or trowel-applied materials to obtain a suitable base for sealing and to restore continuity of existing material. Use the specified Asbestos-free replacement material. Prepare surfaces and apply replacement material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Remove damaged, loose, or hanging Asbestos material. Pack in labeled, sealable plastic bags, six (6) mil minimum thickness, and place in labeled containers for transport.
C.
Seal filled containers. Clean external surfaces of containers thoroughly by wet-sponging. Move containers to the Washroom (Shower Room when Equipment Decontamination System is not required). wet-clean each container thoroughly and move to Holding Area pending removal to uncontaminated areas. Ensure that containers are removed from the Holding Area Workers who have entered from uncontaminated areas dressed In dean coveralls. Ensure That Workers do not enter from uncontaminated areas into the Washroom or the Work Area; ensure that contaminated Workers do not exit the Work Area through the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System.
D.
After proper preparation of the material, apply bridging/penetrating type encapsulant to provide complete encapsulation of the material (to substrate, if a penetrating type encapsulant) in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Apply encapsulant using airless spray equipment.
E.
Consult with encapsulant manufacturer prior to proceeding with Work.
F.
Contractor shall be certified by the encapsulant manufacturer as an approved applicator.
DECONTAMINATION OF WORK AREA A.
Decontaminated procedures for Contained Work Areas 1 excluding Asbestos-Containing Material encapsulation work: 1.
Remove all visible accumulations of Asbestos material and debris. Wet-clean all surfaces within the Work Area to remove Asbestos residue.
2.
After cleaning, the Contractor shall perform a complete visual Inspection of the Work Area to ensure that the Work Area is free of any visible debris or residue.
3.
Upon completion of his visual inspection. the Contractor shall notify the Observation Service in advance that the
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 26
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Work Area Is ready for Initial Review. 4.
Upon proper notification, the observation Service will review the Work Area for general conformance with the Specifications. Any nonconformance of the Work shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work Area is in compliance, and at the Contractor's expense.
5.
Upon successful compliance with the Initial Review by the observation Service and after written notification, the Contractor shall encapsulate surfaces where Asbestos materials have been removed. Unless specified otherwise encapsulate those portions of the items where the AsbestosContaining material was missing prior to the start of this Contract. All surfaces within ceiling and other accessible cavities where spray-applied or trowel-applied materials have been removed shall also be encapsulated. Apply encapsulant in sufficient amounts to render the affected surface tacky to the touch. The encapsulant shall be compatible with the existing substrate and replacement materials and shall be rated to safely withstand the temperature of the items to which ft will be applied. Encapsulants to be applied to structural members prior to reapplication of spray-applied or trowel-applied fireproofing must be a component of the fireproofing system when it was tested and rated by the Underwriters Laboratory (UL), American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). Factory Mutual (FM) or other building code approved testing agencies
6.
Upon completion of the Encapsulation Work, me Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant in advance that the encapsulated surfaces are ready for Encapsulation Review.
7.
Upon proper notification, the Environmental Consultant will review the encapsulated surfaces for general conformance with the Specifications. Any nonconformance of the Work shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work is In compliance and at the Contractor's expense.
8.
Upon successful compliance with the Encapsulation Review by the Environmental Consultant and after written notification 1 the Contractor shall remove the outer layer of plastic on the walls, floors, and ceilings (where applicable). The inner plastic layer and isolation barriers on vents, grilles, diffusers, etc., shall remain In place.
9.
Wet-clean the Work Area, wait twenty-four (24) hours to allow for the settlement of dust, and again wet-clean, or clean with HEPA vacuum equipment, all surfaces within the Work Area. After completing of the second cleaning operation the Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the Work Area to ensure that the Work Area Is tree of contamination.
10.
Sealed drums and bags, and all equipment used in the Work Area shall be included in the cleanup and shall be removed from the Work Area via the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System at the appropriate time in the cleaning
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 27
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD sequence. 11.
Upon completion of the second cleaning operation, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant twentyfour (24) hours in advance that the Work Area is ready for Progress Review and Clearance Testing. Refer to appropriate Article on Air Monitoring in this Section for Clearance Testing standards. Contamination found during the Pretesting Review shall be remedied by the Contractor, at his expense, prior to clearance testing.
12.
Upon written notification from the Environmental Consultant that the Work Area has passed the standard for Clearance Testing, the Contractor shall apply, when included in the Contract, the Asbestos-free replacement materials and reestablish objects and systems as specified In these specifications. The inner plastic layer and isolation barriers may be removed by the Contractor at any time after written notification.
13.
Upon completion of the application of replacement materials, or If no replacement materials are required, after the removal of the inner plastic layer, isolation barriers and the re-establishment of objects and systems the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant and/or Government Representative twenty-four (24) hours In advance that the Work Area is ready for Pre-final Review.
14.
Upon notification 1 the observation Service and Government Representative wilt review the Work Area. improper application of replacement materials 1 unapproved damage to the facility or Its contents or improper reestablishment of objects and systems discovered during the Pre-final Review shall be Itemized on a Punch List for correction by The Contractor at his expense. If no deficiencies are discovered me Contractor this portion of the Contract shall be approved In writing by the Observation Service and Government Representative as complete. If deficiencies are noted continue with the subsequent procedures. NOTE: It deficiencies noted do not prevent the Government from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work, the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified in writing by the Environmental Consultant and the Government Representative Substantially Complete.
15.
Upon correction of Punch List deficiencies, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant and Government's Representative in advance that the Work Area is ready for Final Review.
16.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and Government Representative will review the corrected Punch List deficiencies. If the deficiencies have been corrected the Contract. or this portion of the Contract 1 shall be approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant and Government Representative as complete. If deficiencies have not been properly corrected the Contractor shall repeat at his expense procedures 15 and 16 until all deficiencies have been corrected and approved. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 28
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD not prevent the Government from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work. the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified in writing by the Environmental Consultant and the Government Representative Substantially Complete. B.
Decontamination procedures for Isolated" Work Areas: 1.
Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the Work Area to ensure that the Work Area Is free of any contamination.
2.
If any evidence of Asbestos material or debris is encountered, the Contractor shall remove the contaminants and shall wet-clean all surfaces within the Work Area to remove Asbestos residue.
3.
Sealed drums and bags, and all equipment used in the Work Area shall be Included In the cleanup and shall be removed from the Work Area at the appropriate time in the cleaning sequence.
4.
Upon completion of his visual inspection and any necessary cleaning, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant in advance that the Work Area is ready for Initial Review.
5.
Upon proper notification, the Environmental Consultant will review the Work Area for general conformance with the Specifications. Any nonconformance of the Work shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work Area is in compliance, and at the Contractor's expense.
6.
Upon successful compliance with the Initial Review of the Environmental Consultant and after written notification, the Contractor shall encapsulate surfaces where AsbestosContaining Materials were removed. Unless specified otherwise encapsulate those portions of the items where the Asbestos-Containing Material was missing prior to the start of this Contract. Apply encapsulant in sufficient amounts to render the affected surface tacky to the touch. The encapsulant shall be compatible with the existing substrate and replacement materials and shall be rated to safely withstand the temperatures of the surface to which it will be applied. Do not encapsulate substrates from which resilient flooring (tile or sheets), flooring mastic or roofing materials have been removed. Encapsulants to be applied to structural members prior to reapplication of spray-applied or trowel-applied fireproofing must be a component of the fireproofing system when It was tested and rated by the Underwriters Laboratory (UL), American Society for Testing Materials (ASIM), Factory Mutual (FM) or other building code approved testing agencies.
7.
Upon completion of the Encapsulation Work. the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24) hours In advance that the encapsulated surfaces are ready for Encapsulation Review and Clearance Testing.
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 29
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 8.
Upon proper notification, the Environmental Consultant will review the encapsulated surfaces for general conformance with the Specifications. Any nonconformance of the Work shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work is in compliance and at the Contractors expense.
9.
Upon successful compliance with, the Encapsulation Review of the Environmental Consultant, the Work Area is ready for Clearance Testing. Refer to the appropriate Article on Air Monitoring in this Section for Clearance Testing standards.
10.
Upon written notification from the Environmental Consultant that the Work Area has passed the standard for Clearance Testing, the Contractor shall when included in the Contract, apply Asbestos-free replacement materials and reestablish objects and systems as specified in these Specifications. The Isolation barriers may be removed by the Contractor at any time after the written notification.
11.
Upon completion of the application of replacement material, or if no replacement materials are required, after the removal of the isolation barriers and the re-establishment of objects and systems, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant and Government's Representative twenty-four (24) hours in advance that the Work Area is ready for Pre-final Review.
12.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and Government Representative will review the Work Area. Improper application of replacement materials, unapproved damage to the facility or its contents or improper reestablishment of objects and systems discovered during the Pro-final Review shall be itemized on a Punch List for correction by the Contractor at his expense. If no deficiencies are discovered the Contractor this portion of the Contract shall be approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant and Government Representative as complete. If deficiencies are noted continue with the subsequent procedures. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the Government from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work, the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified in writing by the Environmental Consultant and the Government's Representative Substantially Complete.
13.
Upon correction of the Punch Lists deficiencies, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant and Government Representative in advance that Work Area is ready for Final Review.
14.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and the Government Representative will review the corrected Punch List deficiencies. If alt deficiencies have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Environmental Consultant and the Government Representative, the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant and Government Representative as completed. If deficiencies have not been property corrected the Contractor shall repeat at his expense procedures 13 and
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 30
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 14 until all deficiencies have been corrected and approved. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the Government from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work, the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified in writing by the Environmental Consultant and the Government Representative Substantially Complete. C.
Decontamination procedures for encapsulation of spray-applied, trowel-applied or other friable materials in a “Contained" Work Area: 1.
Upon completion of the Encapsulation Work, the Contractor shall notify the Observation Service in advance that the encapsulated surfaces are ready for Encapsulation Review.
2.
Upon proper notification. the Environmental Consultant will review the encapsulated surfaces for general conformance with the Specifications. Any nonconformance of the Work shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work is In compliance, and at the Contractor's expense.
3.
Upon successful compliance with the Encapsulation Review by the Environmental Consultant and after written notification, the Contractor shall remove all visible accumulations of Asbestos material debris, and wet-clean all surfaces within the Work Area to remove any Asbestos residue.
4.
After cleaning, the Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the Work Area to ensure that the Work Area is free of any debris or residue.
5.
Upon completion of his visual inspection, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant in advance that the Work Area is ready for initial Review.
6.
Upon successful compliance with the Environmental Consultant Initial Review and after written notification, the Contractor shall remove the layer of plastic on the walls and floors. The isolation barriers on vents 1 grilles, diffuser, etc., shall remain in place.
7.
After removal of the plastic covering, dean the Work Area, vacuuming with HERA vacuum equipment all surfaces within the Work Area. After the completion of the cleaning operation, the Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the Work Area to ensure that it is free of contamination.
8.
Sealed drums and bags, and all equipment used In the Work Area shall be included in the cleanup, and shall be removed from the Work Area via the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure at the appropriate time In the cleaning sequence.
9.
Upon completion of the cleaning operation. the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24) hours In advance that the Work Area is ready for review and Clearance Testing. Refer to the appropriate Article on Air Monitoring in this Section for Clearance Testing standards.
10.
Upon written notification from the Environmental Consultant
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 31
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD that the Work Area has passed the standard for Clearance Testing, the Contractor shall remove the isolation barriers. proceed with the re-establishment of objects and Systems and when included In the Contract, apply Asbestos-free replacement materials as specified in these Specifications.
D.
11.
Upon completion of the application of replacement materials, or If no replacement materials are required, after the removal of isolation barriers and the re-establishment of objects and systems, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant and Government's Representative twenty-four (24) hours In advance that the Work Area is ready for pre-final Review.
12.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and Government's Representative will review the Work Area. Improper application of replacement materials or improper reestablishment of objects and systems or unapproved damage to the facility or is contents discovered during the Pre-final Review shall be itemized on a Punch List for correction by the Contractor at his expense. If no deficiencies are discovered the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant and Governments representative as complete. If deficiencies are noted continue with the subsequent procedures. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the Government from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work. the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified In writing by the Environmental Consultant and the Government's Representative Substantially Complete.
13.
Upon correction of the Punch Listed deficiencies, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant and the Government's Representative In advance that the Work Area is ready for Final Review.
14.
Upon notification the Environmental Consultant and the Governments Representative will review the corrected Punch List deficiencies. If all deficiencies have been corrected, the Contract or this portion of the Contract. shall be approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant and Governments representative as complete. If deficiencies have not been properly corrected, the Contractor shall repeat, at his expense, procedures 13 and 14 until all deficiencies have been corrected and approved. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the Government from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work, the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified in writing by the Environmental Consultant and the Government's Representative Substantially Complete.
Decontamination procedure for removal of nonfriable materials in non-prepared Work Areas: 1.
The Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the Work Area.
2.
Asbestos debris encountered shall be removed.
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 32
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.
Sealed drums and bags. and all equipment used in the Work Area shall be included In the cleanup, and shall be removed from the Work Area at the appropriate time in the cleaning sequence.
4.
Upon completion of his visual inspection and any necessary cleaning, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant that the Work Area is ready for Initial Review.
5.
Upon proper notification, the Environmental Consultant will review the Work Area for general conformance with the Specifications. Any nonconformance of the Work shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work Area is in compliance, and at the Contractors expense.
6.
Upon successful compliance with the Initial Review, the Environmental Consultant shall conduct Clearance Testing.
7.
Upon written notification from the Government's Representative that the Work Area has passed the standard for Clearance Testing, the Contractor shall apply the asbestos-free replacement materials, when included in the contract, and re-establish objects and Systems as specified in these Specifications.
8.
Upon completion of the application of replacement materials, or if no replacement materials are required, after the reestablishment of objects and systems, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant and the Governments Representative within 24 hours, in advance, that the Work Area is ready for Pre-final Review.
9.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and the Governments Representative will review the Work Area. Improper application of the replacement materials, unapproved damage to the facility or Its contents or Improper reestablishment of objects and systems shall be itemized on a Punch List for correction by the Contractor at his expense. If no deficiencies are discovered the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant as complete. If deficiencies are noted continue with the subsequent procedures. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the Government from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work, the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified in writing by the Environmental Consultant and the Government's Representative Substantially Complete.
10.
Upon correction of Punch List deficiencies the Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant and Governments Representative In advance that the Work Area is ready for Final Review.
11.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and the Governments Representative will review the corrected Punch List deficiencies. If all deficiencies have been corrected. the Contract or this portion of the Contract. shall be approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant as complete. If deficiencies have not been properly corrected,
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 33
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD the Contractor shall repeat, at his expense, procedures 10 and 11 until all deficiencies have been corrected and approved. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the Government from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work, the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified in writing by the Environmental Consultant and the Governments Representative Substantially Complete. 4.7
4.8
4.9
DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE A.
Asbestos waste materials shall be packed into approved labeled protective packaging. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper handling and disposal of the waste at an Governmentapproved facility in accordance with EPA guidelines.
B.
Hazardous Waste Transportation: Contractor shall submit to the Government, for approval, the name, address, telephone number and the EPA I.D. number of the waste transporter to be utilized for this project.
C.
Waste Disposal Facility: Contractor shall submit to the Government, for approval, the name, class, address, telephone number and the EPA I.D. number of the waste disposal facility to be utilized for this project.
D.
Contractor shall notify the Government at least 48 hours in advance of the time when contaminated waste is to be removed from the site.
E.
Contractor shall hold the Government harmless for claims, damages, losses, and expenses against the Government, including attorney’s fees arising from asbestos spills on the site or en route to the disposal site.
BUILDING CONTAMINATION A.
If it is determined by visual identification or air samples that building contamination has occurred as a result of the negligence and/or poor work practices of the Contractor, the Contractor agrees to clean the affected premises at no charge to the Government. The Contractor also agrees to accept all liability for damages claimed or lawsuits brought by person(s) exposed to such contamination.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred by the Government and Consultant should other portions of the building become contaminated with Asbestos as a result of the Contractors poor work practices or other activities.
AIR MONITORING AND TESTING A.
Area Air Monitoring: 1.
Throughout removal.encapsulation.and cleaning operations, Area Air Monitoring shall be conducted by the Consultant to ensure that the Contractor's engineering controls and work practices are minimizing worker and public exposures to airborne asbestos fibers. in accordance with applicable codes, regulations. and ordinances Fiber counting shall be
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 34
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD done by the PCM Method No.7400 established by NIOSH, with the following as minimum samplings recommended by the EPA: 2.
B.
C.
The Consultant shall report the Area Air Monitoring results to the Contractor on the following day If Area Air Monitoring results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall make changes in his engineering controls and work practices to assure compliance with the following standards. Unsatisfactory results are fiber counts within the Work Area in excess of the Maximum Acceptable Level (0.1 fibers/cc) or fiber counts outside the Work Area in excess of the Benchmark
Personal Air Monitoring: 1.
Initial and periodic 8 hour TWA and 30 minute excursion limit air monitoring of Worker exposures to airborne concentrations of Asbestos fibers shall be in accordance with OSHA (CFR 1926.58) requirements.
2.
Once OSHA sampling requirements are satisfied the Contractor shall conduct, as a requirement of this Contract, not less than one (1) personal air sample, twice per calendar week, to determine 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA) exposures and thirty (30) minute Excursion Limit exposures of workers operating in each Work Area. Samples shall be collected within the Workers' breathing zones. Samples shall be taken for each ten (10) workers from the time preparation work is started until the Work Area has passed Clearance Testing. NOTE: Contract required personal sampling is not necessary while the Contractor is conducting OSHA required sampling or when Type C Respirators are in use.
3.
The Contractor shall report Personal Monitoring results to the Observation Service within 48 hours from the end of the work shift. Worker exposures to airborne Asbestos concentrations shall not exceed the Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) of a-hour time-weighted average (TWA} of 0.1 fibers (longer than 5 micrometers) per cubic centimeter of air, or the 1f/cc 30 minute period Excursion Limit.
Clearance Testing: 1.
Contained Work Areas: The Contractor should not be released until final inspection and air testing are performed by the Consultant using AHERA protocol (“Aggressive Sampling").
2.
Isolated and Nonprepared Work Area: The Consultant shall take a minimum of one (1) non-aggressive air sample of 3,000 liters, upon completion of each Work Area. The "Clearance" sample will be analyzed by PCM Method No. 7400 and determined "clean” before removal of isolation material from the Work Area. a.
If the tests show that the Work Area has not been decontaminated, the Contractor shall repeat the cleaning and/or encapsulation application until the Work Area is in compliance. For the purpose of this Project, decontamination for clearance testing by PCM
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 35
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Method No.7400 shall be defined as air samples showing less than 0.01 fibers/cc. If the tests show that the Work Area has not been decontaminated, the Contractor shall repeat the cleaning and/or encapsulation application until the Work Area is in compliance. 3.
Clearance criteria for Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Analysis Method: Less than or equal to 70 structures per square millimeter (mm2).
4.
Clearance criteria for Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) Analysis Method: Less than or equal to 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc).
NOTE:
4.10
STOPPING THE WORK A.
4.11
In The event that Clearance Testing by the Consultant fails to meet the Clearance Criteria set forth in these Specifications (i.e., not pass), the Contractor shall be responsible for all additional time, additional tests and project related expenses incurred by the Government and Consultant.
If, at any time, the Consultant decides that Work Practices are violating pertinent regulations, these Specifications or, in his opinion, endangering Workers or the public, he will immediately notify the Contractor (followed up in writing) that operations shall cease until corrective action is taken. and the Contractor shall take such corrective action before proceeding with the Work. Loss or Damages due to a Stop Work Order shall be borne by the Contractor.
REPAIR AND PAINTING A.
Contractor shall leave all finished surfaces and other items in Work Areas in the condition in which they were prior to the commencement of the Project. Damage to finishes and other items as the result of Work under this Contract shall be repaired or replaced, painted or cleaned to the satisfaction of the Government's Representative. Delays due to repair Work are not cause for extension of the deadline for the completion of the Project. Painting shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth by the Project Manual. Repairs shall be in accordance with standard construction methods for the item(s) in need of repair. Submit for approval all repair materials and methods. All costs for cleaning, painting, and repair as the result of the Contractor's or his Subcontractors' activities shall be borne by the Contractor. -- End of Section --
SECTION 02 82 13
PAGE 36
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 02 84 18 HANDLING OF HAZARDOUS LAMPS AND SIMILAR MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SUMMARY A.
Perform removal and disposal of hazardous lamps, PCB containing lighting ballasts light bulbs, exit signs, and associated mercury-containing lamps. Contractor may encounter leaking PCB ballasts.
B.
Contractor to include in the bid sum all costs associated with the removal and disposal of low radioactive Exit Signs and any non-T-8 ballasts and fluorescent tubes. Bid price shall include preparation of profile, chemist on premises, coordination of paperwork with GSA, all packaging materials as required, packing, loading, transportation, unloading and disposal. Broken fluorescent tubes to be transported and disposed as waste mercury as per CFR 49 regulations.
C.
Coordinate with related work specified in Section 01 31 20 and Section 02 41 13.
REFERENCES A
STATE OF CALIFORNIA CODE OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS (COCAL) COCAL.............(2003) Subchapter 7, Group 16, Control of Hazardous Substances.
B
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 29CFR 1910.1000...Air Contaminants 40 CFR 260........Hazardous Waste Management System:
General
40 CFR 261........Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste 40 CFR 262........Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste 40 CFR 263........Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste 40 CFR 264........Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities 40 CFR 265........Interim Status Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities 40 CFR 268........Land Disposal Restrictions
SECTION 02 84 18
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 40 CFR 270........EPA Administered Permit Programs: Hazardous Waste Permit Program
The
40 CFR 273........Standards For Universal Waste Management 40 CFR 761........Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in Commerce, and Use Prohibitions 49 CFR 178........Specifications for Packagings 1.3
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit a hazardous materials disposal plan.
B.
Closeout: Submit transporter certification of notification to EPA of their PCB waste activities and EPA ID numbers.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A.
Submit a hazardous materials and lamp Disposal Plan with 45 calendar days after award of contract. The PCB and Lamp Disposal Plan shall comply with applicable requirements of COSF, federal, state, and local PCB and Universal waste regulations and address the following issues: 1.
Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated, disposed of, and recycled.
2.
Names and qualifications of each Contractor that will be transporting, storing, treating, and disposing of the wastes. Include the facility location. Furnish two copies of EPA and state PCB and mercury-containing lamp waste permit applications and EPA identification numbers.
3.
Names and qualifications (experience and training) of personnel who will be working on-site with PCB and mercurycontaining lamp wastes.
4.
Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures to be implemented.
5.
Work plan and schedule for PCB and mercury-containing lamp waste removal, containment, storage, transportation, disposal and or recycling. Wastes shall be cleaned up and containerize daily.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
WORK PROCEDURE A.
Furnish labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary for the removal of hazardous materials, PCB containing lighting
SECTION 02 84 18
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD ballasts, associated mercury-containing fluorescent lamps, and high intensity discharge (HID) lamps in accordance with local, state, or federal regulations. Do not expose PCBs to open flames or other high temperature sources since toxic decomposition byproducts may be produced. Do not break mercury containing fluorescent lamps or high intensity discharge lamps. B.
3.2
1.
Obtaining suitable PCB and mercury-containing lamp storage sites.
2.
Notifying the Government prior to commencing the operation.
3.
Reporting leaks and spills to the Government.
4.
Cleaning up spills.
5.
Inspecting PCB and PCB-contaminated items and waste containers for leaks and forwarding copies of inspection reports to the Government.
6.
Maintaining inspection, inventory and spill records.
REMOVAL A.
B.
3.3
Ensure that work operations or processes involving PCB or PCBcontaminated materials are conducted in accordance with 40 CFR 761, 40 CFR 262 40 CFR 263, and the applicable requirements of this section, including but not limited to:
As ballast are removed from the lighting fixture, inspect label on ballast. Ballasts without a "No PCB" label shall be assumed to contain PCBs and containerized and disposed of as required. "No PCB" labeled lighting ballasts shall be dispose of as required by COSF as normal demolition debris. 1.
If the ballasts do not contain Di2-ethylhexylphthalate (DEHP), dispose of them as normal construction debris. If they do contain DEHP, dispose of them as hazardous material in accordance with Federal, State, and COSF regulations.
2.
As a basis of bid assume ballasts with "No PCB" labels do not contain DEHP and may disposed of as normal construction debris. If 1600 or more DEHP ballasts are disposed of in a 24 hour period, notify the National Response Team at 800424-8802.
Remove lighting tubes and lamps from the lighting fixture and carefully place (unbroken) into appropriate containers (original transport boxes or equivalent). In the event of a lighting tube or lamp breaking, sweep and place waste in double plastic taped bags and dispose of as universal waste as specified herein.
STORAGE FOR DISPOSAL A.
Conform to 49 CFR 178. Store PCB in containers approved by DOT for PCB.
SECTION 02 84 18
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.4
3.5
B.
Store mercury containing lamps in appropriate DOT containers. The boxes shall be stored and labeled for transport in accordance with 40 CFR 273.
C.
Label with the following: 1.
Date the item was placed in storage and the name of the cognizant activity/building.
2.
"Caution Contains PCB," conforming to 40 CFR 761, CFR Subpart C. Affix labels to PCB waste containers.
3.
Label mercury-containing lamp waste in accordance with 40 CFR 273. Affix labels to all lighting waste containers.
DISPOSAL A.
Dispose of hazardous substances off Government property in accordance with EPA, DOT, and local regulations at a permitted site.
B.
Federal regulations 40 CFR 761, and 40 CFR 263 require that generators, transporters, commercial storers, and disposers of PCB waste posses U.S. EPA identification numbers. The contractor shall verify that the activity has a U.S. EPA generator identification number for use on the Uniform Hazardous Waste manifest. If not, the contractor shall advise the activity that it must file and obtain an I.D. number with EPA prior to commencement of removal work. For mercury containing lamp removal, Federal regulations 40 CFR 273 require that large quantity handlers of Universal waste (LQHUW) must provide notification of universal waste management to the appropriate EPA Region (or state director in authorized states), obtain an EPA identification number, and retain for three years records of offsite shipments of universal waste. The contractor shall verify that the activity has a U.S. EPA generator identification number for use on the Universal Waste manifest. If not, the contractor shall advise the activity that it must file and obtain an I.D. number with EPA prior to commencement of removal work.
C.
Comply with disposal and transportation requirements outlined in 40 CFR 761 and 40 CFR 263. Before transporting the PCB waste, sign and date the manifest acknowledging acceptance of the PCB waste from the Government. Return a signed copy to the Government before leaving the job site. Ensure that the manifest accompanies the PCB waste at all times. Submit transporter certification of notification to EPA of their PCB waste activities (EPA Form 7710-53).
CERTIFICATE OF DISPOSAL OR RECYCLING A.
Conform to 40 CFR 761. Certificate for the PCBs and PCB items disposed shall include:
SECTION 02 84 18
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
The identity of the disposal and or recycling facility, by name, address, and EPA identification number. a.
Contractor shall coordinate with GSA for EPA number.
2.
The identity of the PCB waste affected by the Certificate of Disposal including reference to the manifest number for the shipment.
3.
A statement certifying the fact of disposal and or recycling of the identified PCB waste, including the date(s) of disposal, and identifying the disposal process used.
4.
A certification as defined in 40 CFR 761.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 02 84 18
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 03 53 73 CONCRETE INFILL OF PENETRATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
1.3
Furnish and install concrete infill of penetrations in existing concrete walls and floors as indicated on the drawings and specified.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Submit descriptive information for each type of product indicated. Include material descriptions, chemical composition, physical properties, test data, and mixing, preparation, and application instructions.
B.
Samples:
C.
Infill Program: Submit descriptions for each phase of the concrete infill process, including protection of surrounding materials and Project site during operations. Describe in detail materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the Work.
Submit cured samples of overlay and patching materials.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer that employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to apply concrete patching and rebuilding materials.
B.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to discuss the concrete infill program.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CONCRETE INFILL OF PENETRATIONS A.
Epoxy-Modified, Cementitious Bonding and Anticorrosion Agent: To ensure positive bonding, provide products that consists of waterinsensitive epoxy adhesive, portland cement, and water-based solution of corrosion-inhibiting chemicals that forms a protective film on steel reinforcement, and manufactured by one of the following (or equal). 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Euclid Chemical Company (The); Corr-Bond. Sika Corporation; Armatec 110 EpoCem. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Sonoprep. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Duralprep A.C.
Job-Mixed Patching Mortar: Provide 1 part portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, II, or III and 2-1/2 parts
SECTION 03 53 73
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD fine aggregate complying with ASTM C 144, except 100 percent passing a No. 16 sieve. C.
Epoxy Joint Filler: Provide 2-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of at least 80 per ASTM D 2240, as follows (or equal): 1.
Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; Groove & Crack Filler No. 250.
2.
ChemCo Systems; CCS Grout, Control Joint or Control Joint - HB.
3.
Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco 700 or 800.
4.
MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Masterfill 300i.
5.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Rezi-Weld Flex.
6.
Sika Corporation; Sikadur 51 NS or Sikadur 51 SL.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Accomplish infill work according to the approved program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for application of products, including surface preparation.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 03 53 73
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
1.3
Furnish and install all shop fabricated metal components, including metal fastenings and support structures.
SUBMITTALS A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Product data for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products.
C.
Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors or bolts specified for installation under other sections.
FABRICATORS QUALIFICATIONS A.
The Fabricators shall be firms experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FERROUS METALS A.
2.2
General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.
TAMPER PROOF FASTENERS A.
Provide tamperproof fasteners in security areas and elsewhere indicated on the drawings, or specified, including the following: 1.
Removable and non-removable tamper-proof metal fasteners.
2.
Thread adhesive.
3.
Tools for installation and removal.
SECTION 05 50 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
Tamper-proof Fasteners: Corrosion resistant, hardened, highstrength, plated or stainless steel metal fasteners of size and type best suited for intended application, having head design requiring special tool of controlled availability for removal. Submit the proposed fastener to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to use.
C.
Non-Removable screws shall be as follows:
D.
2.3
1.
Twist-off head type, dressed smooth.
2.
Allen or similar recessed drive type, drilled to remove drive surfaces, filled with body putty.
Removable screws shall be one of, but not limited to the following products, or equal: 1.
McGard "Intimidator" fasteners including, but not limited, to screws, bolts, and nuts.
2.
Avdel "Avsafe" fasteners.
3.
Pinned "Allen" or "Torx" head socket fasteners.
4.
Spanner head screws are not acceptable for use as removable screws.
E.
Tools: Provide 10 complete sets of manual drive tools required for installation and removal of removable tamper-proof fasteners. Package each set in an individual kit and deliver to Contracting Officer.
F.
Screw-thread Adhesive Sealant:
Loctite No. 271 or equal.
NON-TAMPER PROOF FASTENERS A.
General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners that are suitable for the application involved, and from among the following types, grades, and classes:
B.
Bolts and Nuts:
C.
Lag Bolts:
D.
Machine Screws:
E.
Plain Washers:
F.
Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, nondrilling), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.
Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A.
Square head type, FS FF-B-561. Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
SECTION 05 50 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.4
G.
Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required.
H.
Lock Washers:
SHOP PRIMER A.
2.5
Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
Provide the manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer.
FABRICATION A.
Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.
B.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.
C.
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately.
D.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.
E.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
F.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following:
G.
Remove burrs.
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flathead screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
SECTION 05 50 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.6
H.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide proper support for intended use.
I.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent practicable to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
J.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS A.
Conform to ASTM B209 for sheet plate, ASTM B221 for extrusions and ASTM B26 or ASTM B108 for castings, as applicable.
B.
Provide aluminum extrusions at least 1/8-inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at least 0.050-inch thick.
C.
Provide pre-finished aluminum angles at exposed wood corners. Angles shall be single length pieces, without splices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, machine screws, and other connectors as required.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
C.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
D.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work.
SECTION 05 50 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.2
TOUCH UP PAINTING A.
After installation, touch-up paint field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal. Use the same primer that was used in the shop.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 05 50 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 05 70 08 ALUMINUM INSET MOLDINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
Furnish and install aluminum inset moldings as indicated on the drawings and specified.
SUBMITTALS B.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings. Show details of fabrication and installation. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
C.
Samples:
Submit samples for the exposed finish required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ALUMINUM INSERT MOLDINGS A.
Insert moldings may be the product of a local fabricator that is acceptable to the Contracting Officer; or subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Daniel Industrial Metals, Inc. KDI Paragon, Inc. P & P Artec. Rippel Architectural Metals, Inc.
B.
Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum finisher for finish indicated, and not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper required by ASTM B221.
C.
Fasteners: Same basic metal as fastened metal; concealed, unless otherwise indicated, with Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Finishes shall be anodized (clear or color), baked enamel, or high performance organic finish as selected by the Contracting Officer. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products."
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing to in-place construction. Perform drilling, and fitting required to install insert moldings. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. -- End of Section --
SECTION 05 70 08
Page 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 06 05 74 FIRE-RETARDANT PLYWOOD BACK PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
1.3
Furnish and install fire-retardant plywood back panels as indicated on the drawings and specified.
REFERENCES A.
AWPA C27 - Plywood - Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.
B.
PS 1 - "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood."
C.
PS 20 - 1970 American Softwood Lumber Standard
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation and of fire retardant treated material. Include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with AWPA C27.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A.
Comply with PS 1 "U.S Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood panels.
B.
For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fireretardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, (or better) in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than [15/32][23/32] inch.
C.
Treat plywood with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C27, type A, with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A.
Paint panels on the back side before installation using a good grade house paint. Install panels securely affixed to the structure. Use nails, toggle bolts, drilled-in anchors, or other fastening device that is appropriate for the mounting surface.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 06 05 74
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 06 06 20 FINISH CARPENTRY AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.
1.2
Furnish and install finish carpentry and trim as indicated on the drawings and specified.
SUBMITTALS A.
Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. Submit Samples for Approval with Identification.
B.
Fire-Retardant Marking: Mark each unit of fire-retardant treated lumber and plywood with classification marking of Underwriters Laboratory, Inc., or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Place marking on surfaces, which will not be exposed after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS A.
Softwood Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency. Provide the species and product indicated on the drawings.
B.
Plywood Standard:
C.
Hardwood Lumber Standard: Association (NHLA) rules.
D.
Hardwood Plywood Standard:
E.
Woodworking Standard: Where indicated for a specific product comply with specified provision of the following: 1.
2.2
Comply with PS 1/ANSI A199.I. Comply with National Hardwood Lumber
Comply with PS 51.
Woodwork Institute (WI) "Manual of Millwork." Formerly WICWoodwork Institute of California.
MATERIALS A.
General: Provide the species indicated on the drawings, or when not so indicated, match the existing materials as closely as practicable. Particle board is not acceptable.
SECTION 06 06 20
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.3
1.
Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes as shown, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Moisture Content of Softwood Lumber: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacture until time of installation not greater than values required by the applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated.
3.
Moisture Content of Hardwood Lumber: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacture until time of installation within the ranges required in the referenced woodworking standard.
B.
Wood species and finish shall be as indicated on the drawings and specified. Submit sample for approval.
C.
Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devised of the type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible, and complying with applicable Federal Specifications.
WOOD TREATMENT A.
Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Where wood is indicated on the drawings, provide materials complying with applicable standards for pressure impregnation with fire-retardant chemicals and in compliance with local building code. 1.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials with surface burning characteristics not exceeding those indicated below when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for not less than standard time period (10 minutes). a.
Flame Spread:
b.
Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide one of the following: 1)
"Dricon"; Koppers Company, Inc.
2)
"Flameproof LHC"; Osmose Wood Preserving Co. Inc.
3)
2.
25.
"Protex"; Hoover Universal Wood Preserving Division.
Kiln-dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15% after treatment.
SECTION 06 06 20
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims.
B.
Install carpentry to a tolerance of 1/8" (3.17mm) in 8'-0" (2,438.4mm) for plumb and level countertops; and with 1/16" (1.59mm) maximum offset in flush adjoining 1/8" (3.17mm) maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 06 06 20
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Furnish and install all interior architectural woodwork indicated on the drawings and specified.
SUBMITTALS A.
General:
B.
Product data and samples for each type of product and process specified in this section and sample and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
C.
Fire-retardant treatment data for material impregnated by pressure process to reduce combustibility. Include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Provide fire test response characteristics and ratings information from plastic laminate Manufacturers.
D.
Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1.
E.
F.
1.4
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
Apply Woodwork Institute (WI), formerly WIC - Woodwork Institute of California, Certified Compliance Label to first page of shop drawings.
Samples for verification or selection purposes of the following: 1.
Submit plastic laminate samples for selection.
2.
Submit a quantity of 4 samples for each item.
Product certificates signed by woodwork manufacturer certifying that products comply with specified requirements.
QUALITY STANDARDS A.
Architectural woodwork shall comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program, PREMIUM GRADE.
SECTION 06 40 23
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.5
1.6
B.
Single-Source Manufacturing and Installation Responsibility: When practicable engage a qualified Manufacturer to assume undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this section, including fabrication, finishing, and installation.
C.
Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved scheduled for finish hardware to manufacturer of architectural woodwork; coordinate shop drawings and fabrication with finish hardware requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration.
B.
Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions."
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. 1.
B.
Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction period.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1.
Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with manufacture of woodwork without field measurements.
2.
Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
General: Provide materials that match the existing materials as closely as practicable, and comply with requirements of the WI
SECTION 06 40 23
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD woodworking standard for each type of woodwork and WI quality grade indicated.
2.2
2.4
ANSI/AHA A135.4
2.
High Pressure Laminate:
3.
Medium Density Fiberboard:
4.
Particleboard:
5.
Softwood Plywood:
NEMA LD 3. ANSI A208.2.
ANSI A208.1 PS 1.
a.
Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of each voluntary standard referenced
b.
Medium Density Fiberboard:
c.
Hardwood Plywood:
NPA 9.
HPMA FE.
Manufacturer: Subject to approval by the Contracting Officer, the laminate manufacturer and pattern shall be as specified in the finish schedule of the architectural drawings.
LAMINATE CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK) A.
Quality Standard: Comply with WI Casework, Premium Grade, Frameless Style A, Type I multiple self supporting units rigidly joined together.
B.
WI Door and Drawer Front Style:
C.
Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative laminate shall match the samples selected by the Architect.
Flush overlay.
LAMINATED PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS A.
2.5
Hardboard:
HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS A.
2.3
1.
Comply with WI - "Laminated Plastic Countertops, Splashes and Wall Paneling," Premium Grade, colors and patterns matching the samples approved by the Architect. Edge treatments shall be the same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ADJUSTABLE SHELVING A.
Provide shelving made from one of the following materials, 3/4 inch thick. Do not use particleboard or MDF that contains urea formaldehyde. Plastic laminate shall be as selected by the Architect. 1.
Particleboard with radiused and filled or solid-wood front edge.
SECTION 06 40 23
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.6
2.7
2.
MDF with radiused or solid-wood front edge.
3.
MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge.
B.
Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04102; powder-coat finished steel or brass-finished steel.
C.
Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04112 powder-coat finished steel or brass finished steel.
D.
Standards for Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; powder-coat finished or brass-finished steel.
E.
Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04081 or B04091; powder-coat finished or brass-finished steel.
FABRICATION A.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
B.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1.
Corners of edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch (1.59mm).
2.
Edges of rails and similar members more than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch (3.17mm).
C.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible.
D.
Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
E.
Factory-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant coating.
FINISH HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.
General: Provide finish hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural millwork as indicated on the drawings.
SECTION 06 40 23
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.8
B.
Hardware Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.9 "American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware" for items indicated by reference to BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard.
C.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that matches the existing finishes and complies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.
D.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.9.
FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A.
Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. 1.
2.9
For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer.
B.
Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.
C.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. 1.
Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.
2.
Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
3.
Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage.
FACTORY FINISHING A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, Premium Grade, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
B.
Woodwork shall be factory finished to the maximum practicable extent. However regardless of whether factory applied or applied after installation, the same requirements specified herein apply.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing.
B.
Deliver metal inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built.
SECTION 06 40 23
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
3.2
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
INSTALLATION A.
Quality Standard:
B.
Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
C.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
D.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. 1.
E.
3.3
3.4
Install woodwork to comply with WI Premium Grade.
Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.
Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at corners.
ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
PROTECTION A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 06 40 23
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
1.5
1.7
UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Fireproofing Materials: Designed as a complete system to retard the passage of heat and smoke for intended application.
B.
System: Approved system as prescribed in California State Fire Marshal standard 43-1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.6
Furnish and install firestopping as indicated on the drawings and specified.
REFERENCES A.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.
Applicator:
Company approved by manufacturer.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: and installation instructions.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: specified requirements.
Indicate preparation
Certify that products meet or exceed
JOB CONDITIONS A.
Follow manufacturer's instructions for temperature, ventilation, and other conditions for mixing and installing foam seals.
B.
Follow manufacturer's precautions when using materials considered toxic or otherwise hazardous.
C.
Do Not Install Firestopping Until: 1.
Spray applied fireproofing Work has been completed, including repairs thereof.
SECTION 07 84 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.8
2.
Building is sufficiently enclosed or protected against adverse weather conditions.
3.
Supporting framing and surrounding construction is thoroughly dry.
SEQUENCING A.
Sequence work to permit firestopping materials to be installed after adjacent and surrounding work is complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
B.
2.2
1.
Materials shall be listed in UL Building Materials Directory.
2.
When tested in accordance with ASTM E119 and E84, flamespread and smoke developed ratings shall not exceed 25.
Form materials to remain in place in the completed Work and sealant used for firestopping Work shall be UL listed.
MINERAL-FIBER FIRESTOPPING A.
B.
2.3
Firestopping:
Manufacturer and Type: minimum 4 pcf density.
Semi-rigid mineral-fiber insulation;
1.
U.S. Gypsum "Thermafiber Safing".
2.
Manville "Pyro-Fiber".
3.
Tremco "Cerablanket FS"
Support Clips: Custom design and fabricated from galvanized sheet steel and as recommended by the firestopping manufacturer.
FOAM FIRESTOPPING A.
Manufacturer and Type:
Two-component silicone elastomer.
1.
Chase Technology Corp. "CTC PR-355 Chase-Foam"
2.
Dow Corning Corp. "3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam"
3.
General Electric Co. "Pensil 851 Silicone Foam Penetration Sealant."
4.
Products Research & Chemical Corp., Semco Div. "PR-855 Firestop Sealant."
SECTION 07 84 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
Accessories: 1.
Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard or other type recommended by foam manufacturer.
2.
Primer, Sealant, and Solvent Cleaner: foam manufacturer.
As recommended by
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
INSPECTION A.
Inspect openings and voids to be sealed to determine if conditions are satisfactory for the proper installation of firestopping.
B.
If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence Work until such conditions have been corrected. Beginning application indicates acceptance of conditions.
PREPARATION A.
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, and other matter which may adversely affect products or performance.
B.
Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
C.
Where firestopping is installed at locations which will remain exposed in the completed Work, provide protection as necessary to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces and finishes, and protect firestopping as necessary against damage from other construction activities.
INSTALLATION A.
Prepare and install firestopping in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions applicable to Project conditions.
B.
Mineral Fiber Firestopping: 1.
Provide in units of sufficient thickness to allow compression for a tight friction fit when installed.
2.
Provide in units of width sufficient to fill the depth of the void space using single width pieces only.
3.
Install units with ends tight against terminal end construction, and with intermediate joints well compressed together and tight.
4.
For vertical void spaces, provide support clips near each and of each mineral-fiber unit, spaced at not over 24 inches (609.6mm) on centers.
SECTION 07 84 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
3.4
3.5
Foam Firestopping: 1.
Provide form materials as necessary to retain foam when placed.
2.
Prime contact surfaces when required by foam manufacturer.
3.
Inject foam into void spaces with sufficient care and attention to assure that foam develops full and complete contact with adjoining surfaces, and that space is filled free from air pockets.
4.
Cure foam 24 hours, remove form materials not required to remain, and inspect foam in place.
5.
Provide additional foam or sealant as necessary to fill insufficient depth of foam and remaining voids.
D.
Electrical Cables for Conduits: Firestopping at penetrations of electrical cables of conduits shall also comply with the requirements of NFPA No. 70.
E.
Finish surfaces of firestopping which is to remain exposed in the completed Work to a uniform and level condition.
CLEANING A.
Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestopping without damaging adjacent surfaces.
B.
Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers or damage to adjacent surfaces.
SCHEDULE A.
Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated, and if indicated, whether such material is designated as insulation, safing, or otherwise.
B.
Insulation types specified in other Sections shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping materials specified herein.
C.
Interior Walls and Partitions: 1.
Where a wall or partition is continuous past a structural floor, such as at vertical shafts, and a space would otherwise remain open between the wall face and perimeter edge of the adjoining structural floor, provide firestopping to completely fill such space for the full depth of the structural floor, exclusive of supporting girders or beams.
2.
Provide firestopping whether or not there are clips, angles, plates, or other members bridging or
SECTION 07 84 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD interconnecting the wall and floor systems, and whether or not such items are continuous. 3.
D.
Where the top edge of a fire-rated wall or partition abuts and is at right angles to fluted-type metal decking, and the construction is such that would otherwise leave the flute spaces open, provide firestopping to completely fill such open flute spaces for the full depth or width of the wall or partition.
Penetrations: 1.
Penetrations include conduit, cable, wire, pipe, duct, or other elements which pass through one or both outer surfaces of a floor roof, wall, or partition.
2.
Except for floors on grade, where a penetration occurs through a structural floor or roof and a space would otherwise remain open between the surfaces of the penetration and the edge of the adjoining structural floor or roof, provide firestopping to completely fill such spaces, and for the full depth of the structural floor or roof.
3.
Where penetrations occur at fire-rated walls or partitions of solid-type construction requiring protected openings, provide firestopping to completely fill spaces around the penetration, and for the full depth of the wall or partition.
4.
Where penetrations occur at fire-rated walls or partitions of hollow-type construction requiring protected openings, provide firestopping to completely fill spaces around the penetration, on each side of the wall or partition, and for a depth not less than the thickness of the wall or partition finish materials.
5.
These requirements for penetrations shall apply whether or not sleeves have been provided, and whether or not penetrations are to be equipped with escutcheons or other trim.
E.
Provide firestopping to fill miscellaneous voids and openings in fire-rated construction.
F.
To ensure proper installation, firestopped areas shall not be covered or enclosed until inspection is complete and approval has been received.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 07 84 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 07 92 10 SEALANTS AND CAULKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
B.
1.3
Furnish and apply sealants and caulking as indicated on the drawings and specified.
Reference Standards: 1.
All materials specified herein shall conform to the requirements of the publications hereinafter listed, to the extent that the requirements therein specified are not in conflict with the provisions of this Section.
2.
References to "ANSI" shall mean the American National Standards Institute Publication A116.1-1967 "Two Component Elastomeric Sealing Components for the Building Trade".
Qualifications of Manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
SUBMITTALS A.
Manufacturer's Data: 1.
B.
Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00.
Submit within 45 days after award of Contract: a.
A complete materials list showing all items specified to be furnished and installed under this Section.
b.
Sufficient data to demonstrate that all materials meet or exceed the specified requirements.
c.
Installation instructions and recommendations from manufacturer showing procedures under which it is proposed that materials will be installed.
d.
Upon approval by the Contracting Officer, the proposed installation procedures will become the basis for inspection and acceptance or rejection of actual installation procedures used on the work.
Samples: Submit separate samples for each type of sealant material, together with manufacturer's data, all as necessary to fully demonstrate functional and service ability characteristics that comply with the specified requirements. Obtain approval prior to delivery of materials to the job-site for material
SECTION 07 92 10
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD substitutions. Samples of the sealant in concrete construction expansion joints shall be applied between 1-inch thick concrete blocks to the full size and shape of sealant in the joints indicated. Conform to the provisions of Section 32 in the GENERAL CONDITIONS of these Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SEALANTS A.
Colors for each sealant installation will be selected by the Contracting Officer from standards colors normally available from the manufacturer. Should such standard color not be available from the approved manufacturer except at additional charge, provide all such colors at no additional cost to the Government. In concealed installations and in partially or fully concealed installations, where so approved by the Contracting Officer, use standard gray or black sealant. 1.
Type D Sealant: a.
b.
2.
1)
Adco Seal "No. B-100".
2)
Pecora Corp. "BC-158".
3)
PTI Sealants "No.707".
4)
Tremco "Butyl Sealant".
Butyl rubber based sealant conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 7.5.
Type E Sealant: a.
b. 3.
Manufacturers:
Manufacturers: 1)
Pecora Corp. "AC-20 FTR".
2)
Sonneborn Building Products "Sonolac".
3)
Tremco "Acrylic Latex Caulk".
Latex acrylic based sealant conforming to ASTM C834.
Type H (Acoustical) Sealant: a.
Tape: 1)
Manufacturers: a)
Norton Co. "Norseal V30 Series".
b)
Arlon "Series 6A".
SECTION 07 92 10
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2)
b.
Compound:
c.
Manufacturers:
d.
2.2
2.3
Polyvinylchloride foam tape with pressure sensitive adhesive on one side, 3/4 inch (19.05mm) wide by the thickness required to accommodate unevenness of substrate and completely fill openings between partition framing and building floors and concrete or masonry walls.
1)
Ohio Sealants "Sound Caulk (solvent type)".
2)
Pecora Corp. "AC-20FTR".
3)
Tremco "Acoustical Sealant".
Permanently resilient type manufactured specifically for acoustical applications.
CAULKING MATERIALS A.
Caulking Compound: W.R. Grace & Co. "Hornflex Standard Gun Grade" or "Thiokol" approved polysulfide sealant or equal.
B.
Caulking Stop: Polyurethane for open joints of size 1-1/2 times the joint width opening and depth no more than 3/8 inch (9.5mm) for sealant bite.
C.
Oakum:
Untarred, picked (loose), fine hemp fibers.
BACKUP MATERIALS FOR SEALANTS A.
Primers and Bond Breakers: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer in their published instructions.
B.
Backer Rods and Other Backing Materials: the Sealant manufacturer.
C.
Type as recommended by
1.
Closed-cell resilient urethane or polyvinyl chloride foam;
2.
Closed-cell polyethylene foam;
3.
Closed-cell sponge of vinyl or rubber;
4.
Polychloroprene tubes or beads;
5.
Polyisobuthlene extrusion;
6.
Oil-less dry jute.
Filler for Use with Asphalt Sealant: ASTM D 1715.
SECTION 07 92 10
Asphalt impregnated, as per
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD D.
Filler of Use with Elastomeric Sealer: 1752 Type II or Type III.
E.
Surface Covers:
Plain type as per ASTM D
(Where Simple bond-prevention is necessary).
1.
Polyethylene Tape, pressure-sensitive adhesive, required only to hold tape to the construction material.
2.
Aluminum foil conforming to MIL-SPEC-MIL-A-148E
3.
Heavy wax paper conforming to Fed. Spec. UU-P-270
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Joint Cleaning: Joints, including those around doors and windows, shall be free of foreign materials full depth of joint. Joint surfaces to be clean, dry and free from grease, oil, wax or other foreign matter, which would tend to impair adhesion. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Priming: Joint surfaces to be primed in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL A.
3.3
PRIMING A.
3.4
Use only the backup materials recommended by the Sealant manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer for the particular installation, compressing the backup material 25% to 50% to secure a positive and secure fit.
Use only the primer recommended by the Sealant Manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer for the particular installation. Apply primer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Contracting Officer.
INSTALLATION SEALANTS A.
Equipment: Apply sealants under pressure with hand or power actuated gun or other appropriate means. Guns shall have nozzle of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as designed. 1.
Fill all joints where no backing exists partially with filler material (that is compatible with specified caulking or sealant material). a.
Metal to Metal Joints: inch (6.35mm).
SECTION 07 92 10
Minimum joint width of 1/4-
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
3.5
b.
All Other Joints: Maximum 3/4-inch (19.05mm), unless otherwise detailed.
c.
Minimum joint depth shall be 1/4-inch (6.35mm), for metal joints; 1/2-inch (12.7mm) for concrete, masonry, and plaster work joints.
2.
Finish all exposed joints smooth, flush with surfaces, or recessed as shown.
3.
Provide strippable masking for factory applied sealing materials to prevent dirt contamination until parts are assembled.
Cleaning Up: 1.
Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled.
2.
Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealants as the installation progresses. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
3.
Remove excess caulking and sealants from adjacent surfaces of joints, leaving the work in a neat and clean condition.
SCHEDULE 1.
Type D: Interior wall penetrations for pipe and conduit that will be concealed by escutcheons and other trim and plate, and for lap joints in sheet metal.
2.
Type E: a.
Joints, voids and penetrations not otherwise specified for interior surfaces exposed to view and requiring painting.
b.
Bedding of fixtures, partitions, equipment and accessories fastened to walls and floors, flanges and escutcheons of items penetrating surfaces in kitchen and food serving areas, dining areas, toilet rooms, change rooms, and other areas requiring sanitary conditions.
3.
Type H: Perimeter joints around sound-retardant partitions and electrical boxes and other penetrations in such partitions.
4.
Caulking Joint Compound: Use caulking compound only where permitted by the Contracting Officer in joints where only limited movement is expected. -- End of Section --
SECTION 07 92 10
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 08 10 73 HOLLOW STEEL ACOUSTICAL DOOR FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
1.3
Furnish and install hollow steel acoustical door frames as indicated on the drawings and specified.
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate perimeter seals, door-bottom devices and other hardware items to be assembled in the shop on Fabrication drawings for the frames. Include on Installation drawings a finish hardware schedule for each door and a hollow metal door frame schedule for each door indicating profile, dimensions, hardware reinforcement, and frame anchorage.
B.
Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's catalog data including STC ratings (if any), and UL fire rating, where applicable.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A.
Storage of Frames: Frames shall be stored under cover on 4" wood sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber and promote rusting.
B.
Assembled frames shall be stored in a vertical position, five units maximum in a stack. Provide a 1/4" space between frames to promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
HOLLOW STEEL ACOUSTICAL DOOR FRAMES A.
Subject to compliance with specified requirements, including color selection by the Architect, provide products by one of the following (or equal): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
Amweld Building Products, Inc. Ceco Door Products. Curries Company. Stiles Custom Metal Inc. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. Door Components Inc. Security Door Products Corp.
Hollow frames shall be 16 gage (1.6 mm) commercial quality carbon steel or hot dipped galvannealed steels. 1.
The void space in the hollow part of the frame shall be filled and packed densely with fiberglass batt insulation like that used in sound retardant partition construction.
SECTION 08 10 73
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.2
C.
Provide frames with profiles and dimensions as indicated, with mitered reinforced corners, welded the full depth of frame and trim, with exposed surfaces ground smooth and flush. Close contact edges to hairline joints.
D.
Furnish hardware reinforcement steel, drilled and tapped to template requirements, and welded in place. Weld galvanized dust covers over reinforcements.
E.
Locate frame anchors near the top and bottom of doors and at intermediate points not over 24 inches on center. Provide a minimum of three anchors per jamb.
F.
Provide floor anchor clips at each jamb with 2 inch vertical adjustments on increments not exceeding 1/16 inch.
G.
Weld a temporary angle spreader to the bottom of each jamb and remove at the time of the frame installation.
H.
Clean thoroughly all surfaces of all mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before the application of the shop coat of paint.
I.
For job site finishing, apply one shop coat of rust inhibitive metallic oxide or synthetic resin primer applied to clean, dry, and prepared surfaces by brush, dipping, or other approved method to provide a continuous minimum dft of 0.9 mil (0.0009 inch).
SHOP PRIMING FOR JOB SITE FINISHING A.
All new frames and frame components shall be prepared for job site finishing with the manufacturer’s standard with coat of rust inhibiting prime paint in accordance with the ANSI A250.10 "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames."
B.
Job site finishing shall be in accordance with Section 09 91 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Inspect hollow door frames and obtain approval before commencing work.
B.
Door frames must be plumb and true with not deviation in vertical alignment in 8 feet. accordance with the printed instructions of Fill the space between metal frame and stud with fiberglass insulation.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 10 73
PAGE 2
more than 1/32-inch Anchor to the wall in the manufacturer. partition solidly
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
1.3
Provide wood doors, complete with finish hardware installed, as indicated on the Drawings, and as specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: All solid core doors to be of types sizes and thickness hereafter specified or indicated on the Drawings, conforming to NWWDA Industry Standard ISI-78 for glue block and five ply construction.
B.
Fire rated doors shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing and certification agency in accordance with local building codes acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. The listing doors shall meet or exceed the requirements of UL10C, NFPA 101 AND NFPA 80.
C.
Manufacturer's Identification: All wood doors shall have the door manufacturer's name permanently affixed on the door edge located between the top of the door and the top hinge location.
D.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1.
All products covered under this Section shall be produced by a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified.
2.
Manufacturer shall submit evidence of having not less than 5 years experience of successful production of wood doors.
SUBMITTALS A.
Flitch Samples: Submit samples for door units to receive transparent finish for selection of wood species, grain and color continuity for Contracting Officer's approval. Submit 8 1/2-inch x 11-inch size sample on specified wood veneer. Completed work shall match approved sample.
B.
Product Data: To be submitted within 45 days after the Contractor has received the "Notice to Proceed." 1.
Complete materials list showing all items proposed to be furnished and delivered under this Section.
2.
Sufficient manufacturer's data to demonstrate that all such items meet or exceed specified requirements.
3.
A copy of the guarantee proposed to be furnished.
SECTION 08 14 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 4.
1.4
1.5
Submit WI certified compliance certificate indicating that doors meet requirements of grades specified.
GUARANTEE A.
Upon delivery of the doors of this Section to the job-site, and as a condition of their acceptance, deliver to the Contracting Officer two copies of an agreement written on the door manufacturer's standard form, signed by the door manufacturer and the Contractor agreeing to replace or repair defective doors which have warped (bow, cup, or twist) or which show photographing of construction below in wood veneer faces, as defined in NWMA Standard Door Guarantees, except the NWMA provision for refunding the price received by the door manufacturer for any defective door shall not apply.
B.
The guarantee shall also include refinishing and reinstalling which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. Guarantee shall be in effect for a period of five years following date of acceptance.
PRODUCT HANDLING A.
Protection: Protect the materials and products of this Section during transit, storage and handling to prevent deterioration, damage or soiling.
B.
Packaging: Package doors individually in cardboard prior to shipping, complete with manufacturer's identification, kind of door and location noted on the carton.
C.
Delivery:
D.
1.
Deliver doors to the job-site after plaster and cement are dry, and after the building has reached average prevailing humidity of its locality.
2.
Deliver prefinished doors in manufacturer's original containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, size, thickness, and identifying symbol on the covering.
3.
Seal all four edges of unfinished doors when delivered to the job-site.
Storage: 1.
Stack flat on 2" x 4" lumber, laid 12" from ends and across center.
2.
Under bottom door and over top of stack, provide plywood or corrugated cardboard to protect door surfaces.
3.
Store doors in area where there will be no great variations in heat, dryness, and humidity.
SECTION 08 14 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD E.
1.6
Handling: Do not drag doors across one another; lift doors and carry them into position.
REPLACEMENTS A.
In the event of damage to doors during the handling or installation of doors, immediately make all repairs or replacements necessary to the approval of the Contracting Officer at no added cost to the Government.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS A.
General: Flush wood doors of the types, designs, and thicknesses shown on the Door Schedule on the Contract Drawings, non-labeled or labeled as indicated on the drawings and required, and in solid core.
B.
Manufacturer: Ampco Architectural SLC/SC120, or equal products by Brentwood, Eggers, Mohawk, Western Oregon, or Algoma Hardwoods Inc. door with solid core of particleboard, or structural fiberboard.
C.
Materials: 1.
Face Veneers:
Premium Grade, birch, clear finish.
2.
Edgebanding: Same species compatible with face veneers but in solid stock.
3.
Adhesives for face veneers:
4.
Warp Tolerances shall be in accordance with MWMA I.S.I.
MWMA, Type I.
FABRICATION A.
General Fabrication: 1.
Stiles, Rails and Edge Bands: Hardwood with a density of 27-pounds per cubic foot or greater. Dimensions must comply with dimensions specified with each type of core construction. The following defects are not allowed: Loose knots, open holes, decay pockets, pitch pockets or break pockets per ISI-73, paragraph 4.4.1.3.
2.
Veneering: a.
On each side of solid core to consist of crossbanding and face veneer.
b.
Cross-banding shall be hardwood veneer not less than 1/10th inch thick before sanding, with grain at right
SECTION 08 14 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD angles to grain of core, extending to finish edges of door.
B.
C.
2.3
3.
Face Veneers:
Premium Grade birch.
4.
Combined thickness of cross-banding and face veneers on each side of door to be not less than 1/8 inch before sanding.
5.
All wood to be kiln-dried and properly seasoned.
6.
All parts to be assembled by gluing with waterproof resin glue under pressure.
7.
Belt sand and prepare all doors to receive painter's finish; no work shall show visible defects or mismatched face veneers.
8.
To avoid splintering, ease or slightly round edges and corners of solid core wood doors.
9.
Lock blocks to be minimum 6-inches wide including stiles.
Warp or Twist: 1.
Not to exceed 1/4-inch at time of delivery or during the building guarantee period of one year; as defined by the National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association.
2.
Any door with a warp or twist greater than 1/4-inch not acceptable; to be promptly removed from the job-site by the Contractor and shall be replaced with new door conforming to the specified warp or twist limitations.
Fire Rated Doors: 1.
All fire doors shall meet the requirements of recognized fire door tests and bear certifying labels of an approved independent testing agency.
2.
Door shall be constructed that when installed as an assembly and tested it will pass ASTM E-152 “Fire Test of doors Assemblies,” and can be rated as required.
FACTORY FINISHING OF DOORS A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, Premium Grade, Sheen, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
B.
Doors shall be factory finished to the maximum practicable extent. However regardless of whether factory applied or applied after installation, the same requirements specified herein apply.
SECTION 08 14 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
Preparations for Finishing: Comply with AWI quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of wood doors.
D.
Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, effect, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60 deg gloss meter per ASTM D523. 1.
Grade:
Premium.
2.
AWI Finish System No.2:
3.
Staining:
4.
Effect:
5.
Sheen:
Catalyzed lacquer, VOC compliant.
Match approved sample for color.
Closed grain (filled finish). Medium-gloss rubbed effect 35-45 deg.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
3.2
Examine door frames and verify frames are of the correct type and have been installed for proper hanging of corresponding doors.
INSTALLATION OF DOORS A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install labeled doors in accordance with NFPA-80.
C.
Fitting of Doors in Place: Accurately fit, leaving equal clearances at sides and top and allowing for painter's finish. Maximum clearances to be as follows: 1.
1/16-inch between door and frame top and side edges except as otherwise detailed.
2.
1/2-inch over floor coverings.
3.
3/16-inch over thresholds.
4.
Undercut bottom edge of door 1-inch or as otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.
D.
Hang doors plumb and square so as to operate freely without binding and sticking.
E.
Do not field cut doors down to opening sizes smaller than those for which doors were manufactured. Do not install door in frames set out of plumb.
F.
Machine doors for hardware in accordance with recommendations of the Contracting Officer. Prepare doors at the factory to receive the finish hardware specified in the door hardware schedule.
SECTION 08 14 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3
G.
Receive and retain custody of finish hardware furnished for work of this under Section 08 71 10 of these Specifications and except as otherwise directed by the Contracting Officer, shall install all such finish hardware in strict accordance with the recommendations of the hardware manufacturer.
H.
Adjustments: 1.
Replace or rehang doors that are hinge-bound or do not operate freely.
2.
Remove and replace all damaged doors at no added cost to the Government.
SALVAGE AND REPAIR OF EXISTING WOOD DOORS A.
Contractor shall salvage, repair, and reinstall existing wood doors as indicated on the drawings and specified. Existing doors shall be stripped, refurbished, stained, and finished to match the new wood doors.
B.
All existing doors will remain the property of GSA. Remove doors and temporarily store them in a location on the premises as directed by the Contracting Officer.
C.
Finish hardware shall be adjusted, repaired or serviced as necessary to ensure continued usefulness of the unit. After servicing, clean and polish surfaces to a bright and shiny condition.
D.
Repair and refurbish existing wood veneers to "like new" condition. Replace wood that is broken, cracked, rotted, otherwise defective, or if they are missing. All voids, losses, nicks or dents shall be repaired with an epoxy adhesive. Clean and sandpaper surfaces smooth. Refinish doors to match the new doors that are furnished and installed under these specifications.
E.
Reinstall salvaged and repaired doors, accurately fitted, and properly hung to operate smoothly but not too loosely.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 14 00
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 08 71 10 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.
B.
This Section includes the following, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Related Sections: The following sections are noted as containing requirements that relate to this Section, but may not be limited to this listing. 1. 2.
1.3
Door Hardware, including electric hardware. Wall or floor-mounted electromagnetic hold-open devices. Thresholds, gasketing and weather-stripping. Door silencers or mutes.
REFERENCES
Section 08 11 18 - Steel Doors and Frames. Section 08 14 00 - Wood Doors. (Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date.)
A.
ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ACT) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.
B.
BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.
C.
DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
D.
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. 1. 2. 3.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
E.
CBC
F.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories. 1. 2.
- California Building Code.
UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies UL 305 - Panic Hardware
G.
WHI - Warnock Hersey Incorporated
H.
SDI - Steel Door Institute
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.4
SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS A.
General: Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B.
Submit product data (catalog cuts) including manufacturers' technical product information for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.
C.
Submittal shall include hardware schedule organized vertically into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include following information: 1.
Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item.
2.
Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
3.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4.
Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule.
5.
Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule.
6.
Mounting locations for hardware.
7.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
8.
List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone number.
9.
Keying information.
D.
Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Substitution requests must be made prior to bid date. Include product data and indicate benefit to the project. Furnish samples of any proposed substitution.
E.
Wiring Diagrams: Provide product data and wiring and riser diagrams for all electrical products listed in the Hardware Schedule portion of this section.
F.
Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
G.
Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
H.
Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with close-out documents, including keying schedule, wiring/riser diagrams, manufacturers’ installation, adjustment and maintenance information.
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, exit devices, etc.) from a single manufacturer.
B.
Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door and finish hardware supplier shall be a direct factory contract supplier, with warehousing facilities in the project's vicinity that has a record of successful in-service performance for a period of not less than 5 years. The firm shall have in their employ a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work and for project hardware consultation at no additional cost to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. 1.
The supplier shall be an authorized factory distributor of the keying system specified.
2.
The supplier is required to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.
3.
All devices shall comply with the CCR, Title 24 and the California Building Code, DSA/AC provisions and requirements of Chapters 10 & 11B; NFPA; ADA.
4.
The supplier shall stock parts for products supplied and be capable of repairing and replacing hardware items found defective within warranty periods.
C.
Hardware Installer: Company specializing in the installation of commercial door hardware with five years documented experience.
D.
Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not. 1.
E. 1.6
Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations (shop or field) for installation.
B.
Hardware original packages schedule
C.
Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, etc.
items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers’ containers, complete with proper fasteners. Clearly mark on outside to indicate contents and locations in hardware and in work.
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD D.
1.7
WARRANTY A.
1.8
Provide warranties of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale from day of final acceptance as follows: 1.
Locksets:
Seven (7) years.
2.
Closers: Ten (10) years, except electronic closers shall be two (2) years.
3.
Exit devices:
4.
All other hardware:
Three (3) years. Two (2) years.
MAINTENANCE A.
1.9
Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A.
Convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to beginning work of this section.
B.
Attendance: Architect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security Contractor, Hardware Supplier, Installer, and Project Inspector.
C.
Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation procedures and coordination required with related work. Review Agency and GSA keying standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS Item
Manufacturer
Acceptable Substitutes
A.
Hinges
Ives
Hager, Stanley, McKinney
B.
Locks, Latches
Falcon
None
C.
Exit Devices
Von Duprin
None
D.
Closers
LCN
None
E.
Push, Pulls & Protection Plates
Ives
Trimco, BBW, Quality
F.
Flush Bolts
Ives
Trimco, BBW, Quality
G.
Dust Proof Strikes
Ives
Trimco, BBW, Quality
H.
Coordinators
Ives
Trimco, BBW, Quality
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.2
I.
Stops
Ives
Trimco, BBW, Quality
J.
Thresholds
National Guard
Pemko, Zero
K.
Seals & Bottoms
National Guard
Pemko, Zero
MATERIALS A.
Hinges: Exterior out-swinging door butts shall be non-ferrous material and shall have stainless steel hinge pins. All doors to have non-rising pins. 1.
Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following: a.
Height: 1) 2)
2.
B.
C.
Doors up to 41" wide: 4-1/2" inches. Doors 42" to 48" wide: 5 inches.
b.
Width: Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door swings 180 degrees.
c.
Number of Hinges: Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" in height. Add one for each additional 2 feet in height.
Furnish non-removable pins (NRP) at all exterior out-swing doors and interior key lock doors with reverse bevels.
Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches GSA – Federal Supply Schedule Type 161 which meet Federal Specification FF-H-00106b and FF-H-106C/GEN and are ADA compatible: 1.
Chassis: Cylindrical design, zinc plated and dichromated for rust resistance cold-formed steel.
2.
Lever Trim: Accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage supported, minimum 2” clearance from lever midpoint to door face.
3.
Locks shall be of such construction that when locked, the door may be opened from within by using lever and without the use of a key or special knowledge.
4.
Rosettes: Minimum 3-1/2” diameter for coverage of ANSI/DHI A115.18, 1994 door preparation, through-bolt lugs on both spring cages to fully engage this pattern.
5.
Furnish interchangeable core with 7 pins in keyway as directed.
5.
Springs:
6.
Strikes: 16 gage curved lip stainless steel, bronze or brass with 1” deep dust box (K510-066). Lips shall be of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
Exit devices:
Full compression type.
Von Duprin as scheduled.
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
1.
Provide certificate by independent testing laboratory that device has completed over 1,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 - 1994 standards.
2.
All internal parts shall be of cold-rolled steel with zinc dichromate coating.
3.
Compression spring engineering.
4.
Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions.
5.
All devices shall have quiet return fluid dampeners.
6.
All latchbolts shall be deadlocking with ¾” throw and have a self-lubricating coating to reduce friction and wear.
7.
Device push bar must release when a force of 32 pounds, or less, of pressure is applied when a force of 250 pounds is applied to the door.
8.
Device shall bear UL label for fire and or panic as may be required.
9.
All surface strikes shall be roller type and utilize a plate underneath to prevent movement.
10.
All Exit Devices to be sex-bolted to the doors.
11.
Panic Hardware shall comply with UBC be mounted between 30" and 44" above surface. The unlatching force shall applied in the direction of travel. comply with CBC Section 1003.3.1.9.
Closers: LCN as scheduled. stairs, room, etc.
Standard 10-4 and shall the finished floor not exceed 15 lbs. Panic hardware shall
Place closers inside building,
1.
Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction with double heat treated pinion shaft to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided.
2.
All door closers shall be fully hydraulic and have full rack and pinion action with a shaft diameter of a minimum of 11/16 inch and piston diameter of 1 inch to ensure longevity and durability under all closer applications.
3.
Closers shall be installed to permit doors to swing 180 degrees.
4.
All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 degrees F. to -30 degrees F. without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door.
5.
Drop brackets are required at narrow head rails.
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
E.
F.
6.
Maximum effort to operate doors shall not exceed 5 lbs., such pull or push effort being applied at right angles to hinged doors. Compensating devices or automatic door operators may be utilized to meet the above standards. When fire doors are required, the maximum effort to operate the door may be increased but shall not to exceed 15 lbs. when specifically approved by fire marshal. All closers shall be adjusted to operate with the minimum amount of opening force and still close and latch the door. Door shall take at least 3 seconds to move from an open position of 70 degrees to a point of 3 inches from the latch jamb. Reference CBC Sections 1133B.2.1, 1133B.2.5, 1133B2.5.1 & 1003.3.1.8.
7.
Provide sex-bolted or through bolt mounting for all door closers.
Flush Bolts & Dust Proof Strikes: Automatic Flush Bolts shall be of the low operating force design. Utilize the top bolt only model for interior doors where applicable and as permitted by testing procedures. 1.
Manual flush bolts only permitted on storage or mechanical openings as scheduled.
2.
Provide dust proof strikes at openings using bottom bolts.
Door Stops: 1.
Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor mount type with appropriate fasteners. Where floor mount type cannot be used, provide overhead type.
2.
Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from the face of the wall or partition (Title 24, 1133B.8.6).
3.
Overhead stops, if utilized, shall be made of stainless steel and non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.
G.
Protection Plates: Fabricate either kick, armor, or mop plates with four beveled edges. Provide kick plates 10" high and 2" LDW. Sizes of armor and mop plates shall be listed in the Hardware Schedule. Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless to match other hardware.
H.
Thresholds:
As Scheduled and per details.
1.
Thresholds shall not exceed 1/2" in height, with a beveled surface of 1:2 maximum slope.
2.
Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 “Thermal and Moisture Protection”.
3.
Use 1/4” fasteners, red-head flat-head sleeve anchors (SS/FHSL).
4.
Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 1133B.2.4.1.
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD I.
J.
2.3
2.4
2.5
Seals: 1.
Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C / UBC Standard 7-2 compliant. Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers' requirements.
2.
Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer. Furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with UL10C / UBC Standard 72. Where required, intumescent seals vary in requirement by door type and door manufacture -- careful coordination required.
3.
Smoke & Draft Control Doors, Provide UL10C / UBC Standard 72 compliant for use on “S” labeled Positive Pressure door assemblies.
Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door assemblies.
KEYING A.
Furnish a keying system in the type as directed by the Owner, Owner’s representative or Architect. Provide Falcon T Series 7 pin interchangeable lock cores as specified by the Owner. Coordinate with Owner to determine if construction blanks are required. Furnish permanent keys directly to the Owner.
B.
Supply keys as follows: 1.
Supply 2 cut change keys for each different change key code.
2.
Supply 1 uncut key blank for each change key code.
FINISHES A.
Generally to be satin chrome (626) unless otherwise noted.
B.
Door closers shall be powder-coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.
C.
Aluminum items to be finished satin chrome except thresholds which can be furnished as standard mill finish.
FASTENERS A.
Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, countersunk type, provide machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood.
B.
Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type.
C.
Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray painted to match closer finish.
D.
Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry.
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD E.
All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head.
F.
Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work.
G.
All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of sex bolts or through bolts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
INSPECTION A.
Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.
B.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
INSTALLATION A.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHI.
B.
Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C.
Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute. Operating hardware will to be located between 30" and 44" AFF.
D.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
E.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
F.
Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber sealant.
G.
If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no additional cost.
H.
Hardware Installer shall coordinate with security contractor to route cable to connect electrified locks, panic hardware and fire exit hardware to power transfers or electric hinges at the time these items are installed so as to avoid disassembly and reinstallation of hardware.
I.
Hardware Installer shall also be present with the security contractor when the power is turned on for the testing of the electronic hardware applications. Installer shall make adjustments to solenoids, latches, vertical rods and closers to insure proper and secure operation.
ADJUST AND CLEAN A.
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.4
B.
Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation.
C.
Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
D.
Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.
E.
Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the completion of the project, the Contractor accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper functions of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.
HARDWARE LOCATIONS A.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
3.6
Conform to CCR, Title 24, Part 2, and ADAAG for positioning requirements for the disabled.
Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to inspect installation and certify that hardware and it's installation have been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein.
SCHEDULE A.
The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the requirements of the foregoing specifications.
B.
The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door.
Manufacturers Abbreviations (Mfr.) FAL
=
Falcon
HAR IVE
= =
Harco Ives
KAB LCN NGP
= = =
Kaba Mass LCN National Guard Products
SEN SDC STA
= = =
Sentrol SDC Stanley
SECTION 08 71 10
Locks, Latches, strikes & Cylinders Magnetic contact sensor Hinges, Bolts, Coordinators, Dust Proof Strikes, Kick Plates, Door Stops & Silencers Heavy Duty Security Deadbolts Door Closers Thresholds, Gasketing & Weather-stripping Magnetic Contact Switches Electric strikes Combination Lock
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD VON
3.7
=
Von Duprin
Exit Devices, Electric Strikes & Power Supplies
HARDWARE SETS:
Private Offices - (105A, 105B, 106A, 107A, 111A, 112A) Hardware Set: 1 1 1
Ea. Ea. Ea. Ea.
01
Hinge Entry/ Office Lock Door Stop Coat Hook
5BB1 4.5 x 4.5 NRP T511 F109-1 FS436 572
626 626 626 613
IVE FAL IVE IVE
5BB1 4.5 x 4.5 NRP T301 F76-1 4041 EDA FS436
626 626 626 626
IVE FAL LCN IVE
5BB1 4.5 x 4.5 NRP T561 F84-1 FS436
626 626 626
IVE FAL IVE
5BB1 4.5 x 4.5 NRP OM500 Arrow or Falcon SFIC CB807 FS436 4041 EDA 421 NDKB
652 626 626 626 626 BRZ
IVE OMI FAL IVE LCN NGP
5BB1SH 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 5BB1SH 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 9927EO-F
652 652 626
IVE IVE VON
Conference Room - (108A & 108B) Hardware Set: 1 1 1
Ea. Ea. Ea. Ea.
02
Hinge Privacy Surface Closer Door Stop
File Room - (104A & 104B) Hardware Set: 1 1
Ea. Ea. Ea.
03
Hinge Classroom Lock Door Stop
Data / Utility - (114A) Hardware Set: 1 1 1 1 1
Ea. Ea. Ea. Ea. Ea. Ea.
04
Hinge Combination Lock I.C Core Door Stop Surface Closer Auto Door Bottom
Hallway #113 - (113A) Hardware Set: 1 1
Ea. Ea. Ea.
05
Hinge Elec. Hinge Exit Device
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1 Ea. Exit Device Ea. Rim Cylinder 1 1 Ea. Split Astragal 1 Ea. Closer Mtg. Bracket 2 Ea. Surface Closer 2 Ea. Door Stop 2 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 2 Ea. Door Contact CARD READER, DOOR CONTACTS & WIRING
9927L-F E996L-06 626 VON C953 “7” PIN 626 FAL 9115NA/2 628 NGP MB1/2 626 IVE 4041 EDA 626 LCN FS436 626 IVE 225 S AL NGP FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER
HSDN #110 - (110A) Hardware Set:
06
Ea. Hinge 5BB1 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 Ea. Storeroom Lock T581GD D “7” PIN F86-1 626 FAL 1 Ea Electric Strike 45-4S 630 SDC 1 Ea. Combination Lock CDX-09 5340-01-498-2759 KAB 1 Ea. Surface Closer 4041 626 LCN 1 Ea. Door Stop FS436 626 IVE 1 Set Gasketing 110SA 628 NGP 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 420 NA AL NGP 1 Ea. Door Contact 30000 HAR CARD READER, DOOR CONTACT & WIRING FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER
Exit Corridor Doors - (102A & 109A) 90 min. - Single Leaf Hardware Set:
07
Ea. Hinge 5BB1SH 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 Ea. Elec. Hinge 5BB1SH 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE 1 Ea. Exit Device 9875L-F E996L-06 626 VON 1 Ea. Mortise Cylinder C987 “7” PIN 626 FAL 1 Ea. Door Stop FS436 626 IVE 1 Ea. Surface Closer 4041 EDA 626 LCN 1 Set Gasketing 110SA 628 NPG 1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 420 NDKB BRZ NGP 1 Set Gasketing 450B BRN NGP 1 Ea. Door Contact FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER CARD READER, DOOR CONTACT & WIRING FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER
Exit Corridor Doors - (115A) 90 Min. – Pair of Doors Hardware Set:
08A
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1
Ea Ea Ea Ea Ea Ea Ea. Ea. Ea. Ea Ea Ea Set
Hinge 5BB1HWSH Exit Device Exit Device Electric Strike Mortise Cylinder Rim Cylinder Astragal Coordinator Closer Mtg Brackets Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Stop Gasketing
Hardware Set:
4.5 x 4.5 NRP 9927-EO-F 9927L-F 996L 45-4S 986 951 115 NA COR x FL MB1/2 4041 EDA 8400 10” X 2” LDW FS441 9450B
652 626 626 630 626 626 628 628 BLK 689 630 626 BRN
IVE VON VON SDC FAL FAL NGP IVE IVE LCN IVE IVE NGP
652
IVE
626 626 630 626 626 628 628 BLK 689 630 626 BRN
VON VON SDC FAL FAL NGP IVE IVE LCN IVE IVE NGP
08B
Exit Corridor Doors - (115B) 90 Min. – Pair of Doors 6
Ea
Wide Throw Hinge
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1
Ea Ea Ea Ea Ea Ea. Ea. Ea. Ea Ea Ea Set
Exit Device Exit Device Electric Strike Mortise Cylinder Rim Cylinder Astragal Coordinator Closer Mtg Brackets Surface Closer Kick Plate Floor Stop Gasketing
WT-FBB168 5”-0” x (Verify Width in Field) 9927-EO-F 9927L-F 996L 45-4S 986 951 115 NA COR x FL MB1/2 4041 EDA 8400 10” X 2” LDW FS441 9450B
-- End of Section --
SECTION 08 71 10
PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 09 22 10 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
1.
Taping, spackling and sanding of wallboard surfaces.
2.
Metal framing for gypsum board.
References Standards: 1.
GA216-85 for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
2.
ASTM C-630.
3.
Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies, identical to those indicated by reference to GA File Nos. in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS A.
Conform to conditions of SECTION 01 33 00 of DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B.
Product Data:
C.
1.3
All labor, materials and equipment necessary for gypsum board and framing as indicated on the Contract Drawings and in these Specifications, including:
1.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2.
Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements.
3.
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, when approved by the GSA, will become the basis of accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work.
Shop Drawings: Submit for the erection of metal framing, and furring, of curved ceiling systems. Indicate materials, lineal and radial dimensions, sizes, thicknesses, spacings, and fastening.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Labor: Use adequate number of skilled laborers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and
SECTION 09 22 10
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B.
GA 214 - Gypsum wallboard finish shall conform to requirements of GA 214, and as specified herein. Levels required for the Work are described as follows:
LEVELS OF GYPSUM BOARD FINISH Level 1
Joints Tape set in compound
Interior Angles Tape set in joint compound
Accessories
Fasteners
2
Tape set in joint compound and one separate coat of joint compound
Covered by one separate coat of joint compound
Covered by one separate coat of joint compound
3
After taping, cover with two separate coats of joint compound After taping, cover with 2 separate coats of joint compound After taping, cover with 2 separate coats of joint compound
Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped to leave a thin coat of compound over tape, and one separate coat After taping, cover with one separate coat of joint compound
Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound
Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound
Smooth and free of tool marks and ridges *
After taping, cover with one separate coat of joint compound
Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound
Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound
Smooth and free of tool marks and ridges *
After taping, cover with one separate coat of joint compound
Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound
Covered by 3 separate coats of joint compound
Skim coat of joint compound applied to entire surface. Surface free from tool marks and ridges. *
4
5
Surface Tool marks and ridges acceptable Free from excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges acceptable.
*At completion of specified taping and finishing, install one coat of high solids primer. 1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.5
Environmental Requirements: During work operations of this Section maintain temperatures within the building within the range of 55 to 70 degrees F. Provide adequate ventilation in the work areas to carry off excess moisture.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Product Handling:
SECTION 09 22 10
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
C.
1.
To be arranged for delivery and storage of adequate supplies of gypsum board materials to the job-site to permit uninterrupted progress of the work.
2.
Deliver materials and accessories to the job-site in their original containers or bundles properly identified with manufacturer's name and brand name. Store as directed by the GSA and protect against damage during the extent of the Contract.
3.
Store gypsum board finish materials in flat area, protected from moisture, on flat and solid supports off the floor surface.
Protection: 1.
Adequately protect all existing and/or new work in place against damage.
2.
Keep floor surfaces covered to prevent staining by spackling materials.
Scaffolding: Provide scaffolding in accordance with Federal, State, County, and City Safety Rules and Regulations and OSHA. 1.
Avoid interference with work of other trades.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
Gypsum board and Accessories: Provide ICBO evaluation, or L.A. Research Report number for gypsum board and accessories. 1.
United States Gypsum (USG)
2.
Genstar Gypsum Products
3.
Georgia-Pacific Co.
4.
National Gypsum Co. (Gold Bond)
5.
Celotex Company
GYPSUM WALLBOARD A.
Wallboard: Provide fire-retardant wallboard, type X, 5/8" (15.9mm) thick, or 5/8" (15.9mm) thick water resistant, type X, as indicated on the drawings. All type X wallboard shall bear the UL label for 1-hour fire rating. 1.
Backing Board: For double layered application provide ASTM C442 Type "X," or the same material as specified for wallboard above.
SECTION 09 22 10
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.3
2.4
STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16" (4.8mm) minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of the depth and gage indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B.
Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard zee-shaped furring members with slotted or nonslotted web, fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525, Coating Designation G60; with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45mm) (26 gage), face flange of 1-1/4 inch (31.8mm), wall-attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2mm), and of depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED CEILINGS A.
Suspended ceiling framing system shall support the finished ceiling, light fixtures, air diffusers, and accessories, as required. The suspension system shall provide a maximum deflection of L/240. Carrying channels shall be fabricated from minimum 0.0548 inch thick cold-rolled steel, 1-1/2 inch wide x 7/16 inch deep. Carrying channels for supports under ducts shall be 2 inches in size as specified. Carrying channels shall be fabricated from hot dip galvanized coated sheet. 1.
2.5
Gypsum Wallboard Ceilings: Furring members shall be fabricated from cold-rolled steel, 7/8 inch x 2-9/16 inches. Furring members shall be fabricated from hot-dip galvanized coated sheet.
B.
Framing Accessories: Provide all standard related accessories including clips, web stiffeners, anchors, and similar items, of the same manufacture and as required for a complete installation.
C.
Splay Wires and Compression Struts: Approved manufacturers acceptable to manufacturer of ceiling grids, gages and types as required by building codes for ceiling types and weights specified.
FASTENERS A.
General: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring power members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated.
B.
Screws: Type "W" bugle head gypsum board screws, drill steel conforming to ASTM C664, 1 1/4-inch (31.8mm) long, except where longer length is required by Code.
SECTION 09 22 10
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.6
ACCESSORIES A.
Metal Trim: Form from zinc-coated steel not lighter than 26 gage, conforming to Fed. Spec. QQ-S-775, type I, class "d" or "e".
B.
Casings: Provide casing wherever gypsum board abuts exposed masonry or finished wood, and elsewhere at all free edges of exposed gypsum wallboard. Casing shall be US Gypsum No. 200-4 metal trim, U-shaped.
C.
Corner Reinforcement: "Perf-A-Bead", a metal corner reinforcement of formed galvanized steel with 1-3/16-inch (30.2mm) wide "Perf-A-Tape" wings to receive joint compound, as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum, or equal.
D.
Laminating Adhesive: gypsum boards.
E.
Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Provide adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum boards to security mesh. 1.
F.
2.7
Provide adhesive recommended for laminating
In double layer applications, fasten base layers with screws and face layer with adhesive and supplementary fasteners.
Edge Beads at Perimeter of Ceilings: Angle shapes with wings not less than 3/4" (19.05mm) wide, with concealed wing perforated and exposed wing edge folded flat and factory finished white.
JOINTING SYSTEM A.
Materials: Reinforcing tape and compound, designed to be used together as recommended by the wallboard manufacturer.
B.
Jointing compound may be used for finishing if so recommended by its manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Project Conditions: Examine all parts of the work for any conditions which would affect the soundness or correctness of gypsum board work. 1.
B.
Verify all corrective work to be done before proceeding with gypsum board construction operations.
Cooperation: Required, with all other trades involved in the work of placing of work, building-in, and embedding into gypsum board construction of all fixtures, anchors, backing, sleeves, inserts; providing of openings, chases to the extent necessary for proper and secure installation, attachments, and passing of other work.
SECTION 09 22 10
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING A.
B.
3.3
All piping, conduit, and fixtures to be concealed by wallboard or to penetrate gypsum board finish to be in place, tested, and approved before start of application of wallboard.
Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. 1.
Ceiling Openings: Support members shall be provided as required at ceiling openings for access panels, recessed light fixtures, and air supply or exhaust. Support members shall be not less than 1-1/2 inch main runner channels and vertically installed suspension wires or straps shall be located to provide at least the minimum support specified for furring and wallboard attachment. Intermediate structural members not a part of the structural system, shall be provided for attachment or suspension of support members.
2.
Light fixtures and air diffusers shall be supported directly from suspended ceiling runners. Wires shall be provided at required locations to support the weight of recessed or surface mounted light fixtures and air diffusers.
Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co.
INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A.
B.
General: Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members in accordance with ASTM C 840 or GA 216 and the requirements specified herein. 1.
In accordance with Contract Drawings and with the separate boards in moderate contact but not forced in place.
2.
At internal and external corners, conceal the cut edges by overlapping covered edges of abutting boards.
3.
Stagger the boards so that corners of any four boards will not meet at a common point except in vertical corners.
Cutting: from the finished openings Openings
By scoring and breaking, or by sawing. Do all cutting face side. Sandpaper cut edges for neat jointing in work. Cutouts for pipes, fixtures, or other small to be scored before knocking out or cut out with saw. are not to be punched out.
SECTION 09 22 10
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.4
C.
Ceilings: Secure boards along perimeters of ceilings, around edges of openings to all furring. Place boards with long dimensions perpendicular to supports, screw in place at 12-inches (304.8mm) on center in the field and 8-inches (203.2mm) on center along board edges. Locate screws not less than 1/8-inch (3.18mm) from board edges.
D.
Single layer Application: Place wallboard horizontally or vertically in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the particular situation for minimum taping. Secure wallboard to structural supports with gypsum board screws spaced 12-inches (304.8mm) on center in the field and 8-inches (203.2mm) on center staggered along each board edge. Use screws for fastening single layer of wallboards.
E.
Double-Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base layer and gypsum wallboard for face layer. 1.
On partitions or walls apply base layer and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 10 inches (254mm) with base layer joints.
2.
Fasten base layers with screws and face layer with adhesive and supplementary fasteners.
F.
Fasteners: Firmly fasten boards to supporting framing member with fasteners not cutting surface paper or fracturing the gypsum core. Where a fastener has cut surface paper, provide another fastener approximately 1-1/2-inches (38.1mm) from the defective fastener and remove the defective fastener. Butt join vertical joints of wallboard at supports and stagger on opposite faces of partitions.
G.
Casings or Trim: Provide at all exposed edges or ends of wallboard and where intersecting with other materials. At exterior corners of wallboard joints secure in place specified corner reinforcements ready for taping compound.
H.
Sealants: Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, provide a bead of sealant where trim or casings abut adjacent construction.
JOINT TREATMENT AND FINISHING A.
General: Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840 or GA 214. Provide treatment for water-resistant gypsum board as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. Levels of finish required shall be as follows: 1.
Level 1: Plenum areas above ceilings, insides of shafts, and other concealed areas. Taping to be as required for fire rated assemblies.
SECTION 09 22 10
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
C.
2.
Level 2: Water-resistand wallboard backing for high moisture areas to be covered with a water resistant surface other than tile, vinyl or paint, i.e. stainless steel cladding etc.
3.
Level 3: Backing for vinyl wall covering and adhered acoustic tile. Also, provide where textured finish is indicated.
4.
Level 4: Exposed painted wallboard in classrooms, utility rooms, and similar spaces not requiring Level 5 finish.
5.
Inspect areas to be joint treated, verifying that the gypsum wallboard fits snugly against supporting framework.
6.
In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be performed, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 degrees for 24 hours prior to commencing the treatment, and until joint and finishing compounds have dried.
7.
Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool. Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with additional drying time in poorly ventilated areas.
Embedding compounds: 1.
Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and depressed fastener heads in a thin uniform layer.
2.
Spread the compound not less than 3" (76.2mm) wide at joints, center the reinforcing tape in the joint, and embed the tape in the compound. Then spread a thin layer of compound over the tape.
3.
After this treatment has dried, apply a second coat of embedding compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform coat to not less than 6 (152.4mm) " wide at joints, and feather edged.
4.
Sandpaper between coats as required.
5.
When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points.
Finishing Compounds:
Provide smooth, non-textured finish.
1.
After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and has been completely sanded, apply a coat of finishing compound to joints and depressed fastener heads.
2.
Feather the finishing compound to not less than 12" wide.
SECTION 09 22 10
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.
3.5
3.6
3.7
When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth surface, taking care to not scuff the paper surface of the wallboard.
D.
Fastener Heads: To be depressed slightly and to have at least 3 coats of spackle, each coat applied at same time as the spackling of joint and to be dry before application of succeeding coats.
E.
Where Gypsum Board is to Receive Vinyl Wall Coverings: Leave all surfaces clean and in acceptable condition to receive subsequent finish work of other trades.
CORNER TREATMENT A.
Internal Corners: Treat as specified for joints, except fold the reinforcing tape lengthwise through the middle and fit neatly into the corner.
B.
External Corners: drawings.
Round off corners where indicated on the
1.
Install the specified corner bead, fitting neatly over the corner and securing with the same type fasteners used for installing the wallboard.
2.
Space the fasteners approximately 6" (152.4mm) on centers, and drive through the wallboard into the framing or furring member.
3.
After the corner bead has been secured into position, treat the corner with joint compound and reinforcing tape as specified for joints, feathering the joint compound out from 8" (203.2mm) to 10" (254mm) on each side of the corner.
OTHER METAL TRIM A.
The Drawings do not purport to show all locations and requirements for metal trim.
B.
Carefully study the Drawings and the installation, and provide all metal trim normally recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved for use in this work.
CAULKING A.
Caulk openings around pipes, and other items projecting through gypsum board as specified in Section 07 92 10, "Sealants AND CAULKING". Apply calking material with exposed surface flush with gypsum board.
SECTION 09 22 10
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.8
FIRE-RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES A.
3.9
PATCHING A.
3.10
3.11
Wherever fire-rated gypsum board construction is indicated on the drawings, provide materials and application methods, including types and spacing of fasteners, in accordance with UL FRD.
Patch surface defects in gypsum board to a smooth, uniform appearance, ready to receive finish as specified.
CLEANING UP A.
In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent scattering gypsum wallboard scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto floor surfaces.
B.
At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section.
PROTECTION A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures gypsum board construction being without damage at the time of Completion.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 22 10
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 09 22 16 METAL FRAMING (NON-STRUCTURAL)
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
1.3
Furnish and install non-load bearing metal framing as indicated on the drawings and specified.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Submit a complete list of materials and accessories to be used in the work, including descriptive data to show compliance with this specification.
B.
Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings for:
1.
Show layout, spacing, sizes, thickness, and types of coldformed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining Work.
2.
Special types of suspension systems if required due to mechanical ducts, equipment, etc.; show calculations and sizes of all members.
3.
Head of wall details for fire rated partitions and acoustical partitions. Coordinate fire rated partition system with firestopping.
4.
ICBO reports for the selected metal framing, fasteners, mechanical anchorages and proprietary connections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Codes: Comply with all pertinent requirements of California Title 24, (CBC) including requirements of seismic zone 4, essential facility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METAL FRAMING (NON-STRUCTURAL) A.
Steel Shapes (greater than 0.125 inch thickness):
B.
Metal Studs (Typical Partition Studs): Fabricate from ASTM A 653 steel sheet having a minimum yield strength of 33,000 PSI; rollformed "C" shaped with prepunched webs for installation of
SECTION 09 22 16
PAGE 1
ASTM A 36.
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD mechanical and electrical items. depths as indicated on drawings. 1.
Minimum properties of studs and
Minimum gage: To provide deflection not to exceed L/240 with 5 psf minimum lateral load at partition height required, but not less than: a.
43 mil (18 gauge) at full height partitions, levels 4-7.
b.
16 gauge minimum for full height partitions.
c.
Two 14 gauge minimum, typical, at door jambs.
d.
14 gauge king studs at cross corridor doors and all doors greater than 3’6” wide.
2.
Runners: Match studs; size for friction fit to studs; type recommended by stud manufacturer for support of studs, and for vertical abutment of drywall work at other work. Provide top track with 2 inch long legs when set into relieving channels.
3.
Finish:
4.
Head Tracks for Structure-Height Partitions: deflection compensating head track system.
5.
Do not install shot pins into structural steel members without the prior written approval.
6.
Fire rated partitions: Coordinate head track configuration with firestopping gap seal system specified in 07 84 00.
7.
Acceptable products: a. b. c. d. e.
Minimum G60 galvanize coating. Provide
"SLP-TRK"; Sliptrack System, Inc. "Fire Trak"; Fire Trak Corp. "Verti-clip"; The Steel Network. "The System"; Metal-Lite, Inc., for all partitions. Other CSFM approved systems.
C.
Resilient Channels: 24 to 26 gage galvanized steel, cap-shaped with attachment to primary framing on one leg; flange for attachment of drywall.
D.
Direct Hung Suspension System: Chicago Metallic "640 Furring System", or approved double web suspension system bearing ASTM C 635 Heavy-Duty classification.
E.
Furring Members: ASTM C 645; minimum 25 gage, hat-shaped. Size 1-1/4 inch face width by 7/8 inch depth. Provide channels with manufacturer's standard zinc protective coating, or be rolled formed from galvanized steel.
SECTION 09 22 16
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD F.
Carrying Channels: ASTM C 754; main runner channels, 1-1/2 inches cold rolled, weighing 0.475 pound per foot. Provide channels with manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive prime finish.
G.
Wire: ASTM A 641, carbon steel wire, galvanized, soft annealed, with Class 1 coating; hanger wire for typical suspension system minimum 12 gage; hanger wire for conventional suspension system minimum 8 gage; wire for tying channels minimum 16 and 18 gage as specified.
H.
Clips: Provide manufacturer's standard wire type clips for attaching furring channels to main runners in suspended drywall ceilings.
I.
"Zee" Shaped Furring Channels: Furring channels formed from minimum 20 gage galvanized steel, 1 inch by 2 inches by 1 inch in size, unless otherwise detailed.
J.
Backing Plates (Blocking): 1.
16 gage studs, 4 inches wide unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Proprietary blocking system. a. b. c.
K.
L.
One of the following:
Screws:
Acceptable products include:
"Flush Mount Backing" Metal Lite, Inc. "Notch-Tite Backing" Metal Lite, Inc. “or equal.” Products of, or as recommended by stud manufacturer:
1.
Studs-to-runners: 3/8 inch Type S Pan Head.
2.
Furring channels to studs: 3/8 inch Type S 12 Pan Head.
3.
Furring channels and other metal members to structural studs: 3/8 inch TEK Type screws.
Powder Driven Fasteners: diameter shank:
Low velocity drive pins; minimum 9/64
1.
For attachment to concrete: Length of pin to provide minimum 1-1/8 inch penetration in concrete.
2.
For attachment to steel:
Length of pin minimum 5/8 inch.
M.
Fasteners for Hanger Wires: Type and size as required to meet minimum load requirements specified; all fasteners ICBO approved.
N.
Acceptable manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements: Marino, Dietrich, Gold Bond, and SSMA member manufacturers, as noted in ICBO ES Report ER-4943P.
SECTION 09 22 16
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Erect metal framing systems in accordance with ASTM C 754, pertinent codes and regulations for rated construction and recommendations of the manufacturer; securely anchor all members in position.
B.
Accurately lay out all partitions; coordinate the work of this Section with that of other sections for concealed work.
C.
Independently support partitions, furring and ceiling suspension systems; do not attach ducts, pipes, etc. to supports. Do not support from any electrical, HVAC, plumbing or sprinkler system components. Do not drill or "shoot" into structural members in any manner that would impair its structural integrity.
D.
Install framing members to preclude direct physical contact with conduits, pipe, and ducts; coordinate with installation of sleeves for mechanical penetrations.
E.
Erect framing in true planes to provide solid backing for finish materials; tolerance limitations are specified under the various finishes unless noted herein.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 22 16
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 09 50 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
DESCRIPTION A.
Work Included: This section includes supply and installation of acoustical ceilings as indicated or specified, and as follows: 1. 2.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Armstrong 755B Armstrong 1945
B.
Salvage grid and HVAC register grilles, allowing them to remain in place, and protected from damage or dislocation, and adjust or repair salvaged components to accept new ceiling panels.
C.
Existing ceiling tile shall become the property of the Contractor and disposed of off Government property.
D.
Hard lid (gypsum board) ceilings are specified in Section 09 22 10.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Design of ceiling suspension system, including related components, shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements of Uniform Building Code.
B.
Framing shall comply with ASTM C635 "Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and lay-in Panel Ceilings".
C.
Installation of suspended ceiling system shall be by applicators approved by ceiling manufacturer.
SUBMITTALS A.
All submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B.
Submit manufacturer data and complete materials list.
C.
Submit shop drawings detailing ceiling layout, suspension methods and interface with other ceiling and wall materials.
D.
Samples: Submit one full size tile or acoustical panel of each specified material including 12 inch (304.8mm) long samples of suspension system components.
PRODUCT HANDLING A.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers, with labels intact and store in location safe from damage by construction operations and the elements.
SECTION 09 50 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.
Ceiling Suspension System shall be heavy-duty, consisting of twoway exposed grid steel tee system, with members locked in place to form a rigid grid.
B.
In addition to ceiling loads, the system shall be designed for lighting fixture loads when applicable. Design shall be in accordance with the Uniform Building Code. 1.
2.
Main Runners (Heavy Duty): Armstrong 9/16" Ultima, Chicago Metallic 540 System, USG Donn DX, or National Rolling Mills ML 8000, or equal. a.
Length:
12 feet (3,657.6mm)
b.
Height:
1-1/2 inches (38.1mm)
c.
Allowable load per 4 foot (1,219.2mm) spacing: 16.3 lbs./lin. ft. (24.3kg/m)
d.
Color:
Cross Tees (Heavy Duty): Armstrong, Chicago Metallic 540 System, USG Donn DX, or National Rolling Mills DCML, or equal. a. b. c. d.
3.
Length: 2 ft (609.6mm). and 4 ft (1,219.2mm). Height: 1" (25.4mm) x 1-1/2" (38.1mm) Allowable load per 2 foot spacing: 33.5 lbs./lin. ft. (49.85kg/m) Color: Factory White
Wall Angles and Trim: a. b. c. d. e.
Length: 12 feet (3,657.6mm) Flange: 15/16 inches (23.8mm) Metal: 24 gauge Edges: Hemmed Color: Factory White
4.
Hold-Down Clips: Ceiling manufacturer's standard to fit system furnished.
5.
Hanger Wire:
6.
Edge Moldings: a.
C.
Factory White
No. 12 gauge, galvanized annealed steel.
Metal: Aluminum or steel with baked white enamel finish.
Seismic Compression Posts: Provide seismic compression posts of a telescoping design, manufactured from galvanized steel tubing,
SECTION 09 50 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD incorporating an injection molded plastic bulb clip for gripping the bulb on the 88 main tees. The post shall be fitted with a spring steel clip for clasping the ceiling suspension wires. The compression struts shall be adjustable, tested to withstand 500 (minimum) pounds of compressive load, and shall be Donn Compression Post as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or equal. D.
2.2
Attachment devices: size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM c635, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners - Limitations: fasteners shall be limited as to location, placement, or time of use by the Contracting Officer. Use powder actuated fasteners only where permitted by the Contracting Officer. Use may be limited to time of day outside of regular business hours so as to avoid noise disturbance of building occupants.
2.
The powder fastener system shall be of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attachment of hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190, conducted by a qualified testing laboratory. The installation of powder driven anchors shall be subject to the noise limitations directed by the Contracting Officer.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS A.
Acoustical Material: Tile lay-in panels shall be type IV Mineral Fibre Material, Class A, conforming to ASTM E 1264. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Size: As indicated on the drawings. NRC: 0.70 STC: 25-29 Light reflectance LR-0.89.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Secure hanger wires to structure above as indicated. Provide a support wire at each of the four corners of each light fixture.
B.
Space main runner tees as indicated. Main and cross tees shall be mechanically locked in place to form a rigid grid system, complete with wall angles and accessories. Suspend ceiling straight and level to within 1/8 inch (3.18mm) in 12 feet (3,657.6mm) in all directions. Bottom flange joints shall be tight and flush.
SECTION 09 50 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.2
C.
Neatly cut and fit panels around fixtures, diffusers and abutting construction. Provide wall angles at all vertical surfaces adjoining ceiling unless otherwise indicated. Cope bottoms of exposed tees for flush joints at wall angles.
D.
Provide hold down clips for all lay-in panels except those panels designated as mechanical access panels.
REMODELING - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS A.
Renovations shall be first class in workmanship and render the work as good as new. Clean and adjust acoustical ceilings for proper use and appearance.
B.
Repair and refurbish existing salvaged materials to "like new" condition. Replace existing materials when they are broken, cracked, otherwise defective, or if they are missing. Remove existing materials that are not suitable for re-use.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 50 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 09 65 14 RUBBER BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
1.4
1.5
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.
Furnish and install rubber base as indicated on the drawings and specified.
SUBMITTALS A.
Samples:
Submit samples of base.
B.
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Contracting Officer will become the basis for accepting or rejecting installation procedures used on the Work.
PRODUCT HANDLING A.
Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to the job-site and store in their original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. Store materials at the jobsite, protected from weather, located where temperatures can be maintained at a constant 70 degrees F. as recommended by the manufacturer for storing as directed by the Contracting Officer.
B.
Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section against damage before, during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of other trades.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Environmental Requirements: In areas to receive base maintain temperatures between 50 and 90 degrees F. for not less than 48 hours before and after installation of base.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
BASE MATERIALS A.
General:
Top set type conforming to ASTM F1861, rubber.
1.
1/8-inch thickness and height as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Furnish premolded exterior and interior corner units.
SECTION 09 65 14
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.
2.2
Color shall be as noted on the drawings or as selected by the Government from manufacturer's standard colors.
ADHESIVES A.
Adhesive shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the base materials. Adhesive shall be waterproof and stabilized type. Asphalt emulsions will not be acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION A.
General: Examine the areas and conditions under which base is to be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until detrimental conditions have been corrected.
B.
Surfaces:
C.
General Workmanship: In accordance with best practices of the trade to provide a complete and first class installation.
Shall be smooth, and even.
PREPARATION A.
Contractor responsible for suitability of substrates to receive base materials.
B.
Fill cracks and irregularities with plastic filler as recommended by manufacturers of the base materials.
C.
Start of the installation of base will indicate acceptance of surface conditions.
INSTALLATION A.
Install materials only after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
B.
Bond the top-set base to wall surface with adhesive, use preformed base sections at all internal and external corners. Install running base tightly on top of flooring with top edge exactly even with top edges of premolded corners.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING A.
After completion and prior to inspection, clean and remove excess adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces, using neutral cleaner as recommended by the base manufacturer.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 65 14
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 09 65 21 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.
1.2
Furnish and install vinyl composition tile flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and specified.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit manufacturer's technical data for the vinyl composition tile flooring and accessories to be furnished.
B.
Submit manufacturer's standard color charts of vinyl composition tile flooring, including accessories, showing full range of colors and patterns available.
C.
Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices for the vinyl composition tile flooring required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide products of the manufacturer indicated on the finish schedule on the drawings.
B.
Provide colors and patterns as indicated on the drawings and specified.
C.
Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" (3.18mm) thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected by Contracting Officer from standard colors available; not less than 1" (25.4mm) wide.
D.
Metal Edge Strips: Of width shown and of required thickness to protect exposed edge of vinyl composition tile flooring. Provide units of maximum available length, to minimize number of joints. 1.
Material: Extruded otherwise shown.
2.
Type:
aluminum with mill finish, unless
Butt type metal edge strips for concealed anchorage.
E.
Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions.
F.
Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
SECTION 09 65 21
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD G.
Leveling and Patching Compounds: flooring manufacturer.
Latex type as recommended by
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
3.2
Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows: 1.
Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and depressions in subfloors.
2.
Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including curing compounds incompatible with vinyl composition tile flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes and sealers.
B.
Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor.
C.
Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions.
INSTALLATION A.
Where movable partitions are shown, install vinyl composition tile flooring before partitions are erected.
B.
Install vinyl composition tile flooring using method indicated in compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Extend vinyl composition tile flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings.
C.
Scribe, cut, and fit vinyl composition tile flooring to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, outlets and permanent columns, walls and partitions.
D.
Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non-permanent marking device.
E.
Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 65 21
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 09 68 04 CARPET TILE PART 1 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
Install carpet tile as indicated on the drawings and specified. Carpet tile will be furnished by the Government. However, adhesives, accessories, trim, and other materials that are associated with carpeting must be provided by the Contractor.
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout of carpet seaming and details for binder bars. Include seaming diagrams.
B.
Samples:
C.
D.
1.3
GENERAL
1.
Submit 3 labeled carpet tiles with proper backing, Samples from each dye lot of carpet required for the Work.
2.
Trim and accessories: Submit 12-inch long Samples of each type trim proposed for the Work.
Product Data:
Submit the following:
1.
Carpet manufacturer's published technical data fully describing carpet materials, construction, and recommended installation directions.
2.
Technical data and installation instructions for each adhesive and sealer material.
3.
Carpet manufacturer's published instructions for maintenance, care, cleaning and repair of carpet.
Certificate: Submit a certificate from carpet manufacturer that materials supplied comply with fire hazard resistance standards specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
B.
Comply with the following as a minimum requirements: 1.
All materials shall comply with the recommendations of the ADA Accessibility Guide.
2.
Comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) limitation as to Volatile Organic Compound (VOC).
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Carpeting shall meet requirements of federal, state and local regulatory agencies for flammability, static control, or other properties as specified.
SECTION 09 68 04
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
C.
Carpet Installation: Comply with CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Textile Floor Covering Materials.
D.
Each color of carpet shall be of the same dye lot.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A
Carpet shall be cut, packaged and identified by the factory. Distributor, dealer, or vendor cutting, re-packaging, and relabeling is not permitted.
B.
Store material at least 24 hours at room temperature prior to installation.
C.
Deliver fire-rated materials with testing agency labels and required fire classification numbers attached and legible.
JOB CONDITIONS A.
Ventilation and Temperature: Verify areas to be carpeted are ventilated to remove fumes from installation materials, and areas are within temperature range recommended by the various material manufacturers for Project site installation conditions.
B.
Protection: Prohibit traffic on carpet for at least 12 hours after installation. Cover carpet with heavy non-staining kraft paper in areas where the Work of other trades is to be performed and/or traffic and passage areas. Protect carpet from damage or soiling. Maintain protection in place until Substantial Completion.
WARRANTY A.
Installer shall provide a 2 year labor warranty.
B.
Manufacturer shall provide a 10 year material warranty.
C.
Manufacturer shall provide a 10 year material warranty for colorfastness and texture retention.
EXTRA MATERIALS FOR MAINTENANCE A.
1.8
Deliver extra materials for maintenance to Government. Furnish 2% extra materials matching the products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels.
INSTRUCTION A.
Before Substantial Completion of the Work, provide a 2 hour Owner instruction period for proper maintenance of carpeting.
B.
Instruction shall be provided by technical representative of the carpet manufacturer.
SECTION 09 68 04
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD PART 2 2.1
PRODUCTS
CARPET TILE (GOVERNMENT FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A.
B.
Subject to compliance with specified requirements, carpet tile shall be Applause No. 28515 Fireworks, by C&A Tandus (or equal), and have the following properties: 1.
Carpet tile shall have flame spread rating of not greater than 25 on the Steiner Tunnel Test (ASTM E84) or shall have a critical radiant flux valve of not less than 0.22 watts per square centimeter on the NBS Flooring Radiant Panel Test.
2.
Carpet tile shall have a smoke development rating of not greater than 450 when flaming, using the National Bureau of Standards Smoke Chamber Test, or no greater than 200 when using the Steiner Tunnel Test (ASTM E84).
3.
Carpet tile shall not build up a static level exceeding 3.0 KV when tested by the AATCC Test Method 134.
Carpet tile backing shall be high performance as standard with the carpet manufacturer. Carpet shall have the following physical characteristics: 1.
C.
Approximate weight per square yard: a.
Loop pile construction:
b.
Cut pile construction:
24 – 30 oz. 38 – 40 oz.
2.
Approximate thickness (inches):
3.
Backing Density (approximate):
4.
Compression Set:
5.
Compression Resistance:
0.125 18.0 lbs/cubic foot
10 lbs 7 lbs
Carpet tile shall meet the following minimum standards: 1.
Dye Method:
100 percent Solution Dyed Method
2.
Anti-Microbial Protection:
3.
Moisture impermeable: and moisture.
4.
Calcium Chloride: Carpet shall be able to be installed with 5 lbs. hydrostatic pressure or better (pounds) per 1000 square feet per 24 hours with a written documentation from manufacturer, per CRI-104.
5.
Stain and Soil Protection: stain removal guarantee.
Required both and top bottom.
Carpet shall be unaffected by water
SECTION 09 68 04
BASF Zeftron 2000, 10 year
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 6.
Fluorochemical Treatment: Minimum of 500 parts per million: per CRI-102; after two hot extractions (AATCC171), minimum 400 Parts Per Million per CRI TM-102.
7.
Zippering Warranty: Carpet will not zipper or develop continuous pile yarn runners in the body of the carpet for a minimum of 20 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
8.
Edge Ravel: Carpet will not have continuous pile yarn coming out at seams for a minimum of 20 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
9.
Texture Retention Warranty: The manufacturer warrants that the carpet will substantially maintain its physical surface texture against crushing, matting and walking out for 10 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
10.
Color fastness to light: Carpet will not fade for 10 years due to exposure to sunlight.
11.
Color fastness to atmospheric: Carpet will not fade for 5 years due to atmospheric conditions.
12.
GSA Certification: All carpet shall meet or exceed the General Services Administration requirements.
13.
Run Resistant Strength: Not less than 25 lbs., in accordance with the Loop Pile Run Resistance test (TP 15586), wet or dry for a minimum of 20 years.
14.
Indoor Air Quality: Carpet shall meet or exceed CRI and EPA guidelines (green label certified and labeled).
15.
Recycling Program: Carpet shall be eligible to qualify for a close-loop recycling program (close-loop is a carpet that upon recycling is turned back into carpet and no part of the reclaimed carpet enters a landfill) either through the carpet manufacturer or fiber manufacturer.
D.
Carpet shall be from one dye lot, unless otherwise reviewed by the Architect.
E.
Carpet shall be cut, packaged, and identified by the factory. Distributors, dealers and vendor cutting, re-packaging, and relabeling is not permitted.
F.
Carpet Edge Strips: Provide A-600-SH Silver Clamp Down manufactured by Universal Metals, or equal.
G.
Adhesive: Water-resistant latex-based releasable adhesive recommended by carpet manufacturer for direct glue-down carpet installation. Where primers or sealers are furnished, verify their compatibility with adhesive.
SECTION 09 68 04
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD H.
PART 3 3.1
3.2
Patching Compounds: Cementitious type, Ardex SD-F, Durabond’s Webcrete No. 95, or equal, as recommended by carpet manufacturer. EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, “Carpet Modules,” and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Installation Method: Glue down and install carpet tile as recommended by the product manufacturer, adhering every tile with full-spread, using releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive.
C.
Maintain dye lot integrity.
D.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, openbottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
Do not mix dye lots in same area.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3.
Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with facebeater element.
B.
Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations."
C.
Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. -- End of Section --
SECTION 09 68 04
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 09 81 17 SOUND INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
Encapsulated ceiling sound insulation (hush kits) is specified in Section 09 84 37. When the work of Section 09 81 17 and Section 09 84 37 are inter-related, coordinate the related tasks to ensure the proper completion of all inter-related work.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.
1.3
Furnish and install sound insulation as indicated on the drawings and specified. Provide the sound transmission class (STC) indicated on the drawings.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of insulation required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (or equal): 1.
CertainTeed Corp.
2.
Schuller Corp.
3.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
INSULATING MATERIALS A.
Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Provide insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665 for Type I or II, and as follows: 1.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 450, respectively.
2.
Manufacturers: Provide U.S. Gypsum Co. "thermafiber" sound attenuation blankets, having a 2-1/2 lb/cubic foot density, semi-rigid, paperless, spun mineral fiber blanket.
SECTION 09 81 17 - PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.
2.3
Adhesive: Durabond 200 or 400 adhesive or equal as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A.
Sealant shall be a nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant.
B.
Outlet box pads shall be polybutene-butyl sheets, Lowry's Electrical Box Pads as manufactured by Harry A. Lowry & Associates, (818) 768-4661. Cover electrical boxes with pads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A.
3.2
Require Installer to examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION A.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work.
B.
Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
C.
Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless multiple layers are required to attain the required STC.
D.
Where sound-rated drywall construction work is indicated, seal construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions.
E.
Comply with ASTM C919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound-flanking paths around or through construction including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings.
F.
Stuff loose glass fiber insulation into hollow metal door frames, and miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces that would impair the sound attenuation of the assembly. Compact insulation to produce a solidly filled void.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 81 17 - PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 09 84 37 ENCAPSULATED CEILING SOUND INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
Furnish and install encapsulated ceiling sound insulation as indicated on the drawings.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of insulation and vapor retarder material required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ENCAPSULATED SOUND INSULATION A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Ceiling Hush Kit" by Acoustic Standard Inc. or an "or equal" product of one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
CertainTeed Corp. Knauf Fiber Glass Inc. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
B.
Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C553, Class B-4; with nominal density of 1.5 lbs. per cu. ft. and r-value of 4.13 at 75F (23.9C) and maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for testing and combustion characteristics.
C.
Limp Barrier:
D.
Polyethylene bag shall be 1-mil polyethylene film of natural color.
E.
The hush kit shall be a sandwich-like assembly of the sound insulation, limp barrier, and encapsulating polyethylene bag.
Provide a flexible board insulation 1/2" thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. Coordinate installation with Section 09 81 17. Cut units and fit closely around ceiling hangers and other obstructions.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 84 37
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces, both new and existing. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Contracting Officer will select from standard colors or finishes available.
C.
1.2
1.
Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.
2.
Repaint existing coated surfaces.
Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for each material proposed for use. 1.
B.
1.3
List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
Samples: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
SECTION 09 91 00
PAGE-1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1.
C.
Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1.
1.4
Proprietary names are used primarily to designate colors and are not intended to imply that manufacturer named is required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
B.
1.5
Notify the Contracting Officer of problems anticipated using the materials specified.
Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1.
Product name or title of material.
2.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3.
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5.
Thinning instructions.
6.
Application instructions.
7.
Color name and number.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7.2 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
JOB CONDITIONS A.
Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32.2 deg C).
B.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7.2 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).
SECTION 09 91 00
PAGE-2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (15 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.
1.6
Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods.
REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. A.
COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID) CID A-A-1558..................Paint, Stencil
B.
FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS) FS TT-P-19....................(Rev. D) Paint, Latex (Acrylic Emulsion, Exterior Wood and Masonry) FS TT-P-29....................(Rev. J) (Int Am. 2) Paint, Latex Base, Interior, Flat, White and Tints FS TT-E-509...................(Rev. C) Enamel, Odorless, Alkyd, Interior, Semi-gloss, White and Tints FS TT-P-1511..................(Rev. B) Paint, Latex (Gloss and Semi-gloss, Tints and White) (for Interior Use) FS TT-P-1728..................(Rev. A) (Am. 1) Paint, Latex Base, Interior, Flat, Deep-Tone
C.
MASTER PAINTERS INSTITIUTE MPIR..........................Repainting Manual of the Master Painter Institute
D.
MILITARY SPECIFICATIONS (MIL) DOD-P-15328...................(Rev. D) (Am. 1) Primer (Wash), Pretreatment (Formula No. 117 for Metals) (Metric) MIL-P-24441...................(Rev. A) (Supp. 1) Paint, EpoxyPolyamide
SECTION 09 91 00
PAGE-3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD MIL-P-28577...................(Rev. B) Primer, Water-Borne, Acrylic or Modified Acrylic, for Metal Surfaces MIL-P-28578...................(Rev. B) Paint, Water-Borne, Acrylic or Modified Acrylic, Semigloss, for Metal Surfaces E.
MILITARY STANDARDS (MIL-STD) MIL-STD-101...................(Rev. B) Color Code for Pipelines and for Compressed Gas Cylinders
F.
STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL (SSPC) SSPC PA 1.....................1985 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting
1.7
COLOR SELECTION Colors of finish coats shall be as indicated or specified. Where not indicated or specified, colors shall be selected by the Contracting Officer. Manufacturers' names and color identification are used for the purpose of color identification only. Named products are acceptable for use only if they conform to specified requirements. Products of other manufacturers are acceptable if the colors approximate colors indicated and the product conforms to specified requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS Conform to the specifications and standards referenced in PART 3. For materials specified by reference to a specification which has a Qualified Products List (QPL), the material provided shall have been tested and approved for inclusion in the QPL.
2.1.1 Deep Tone Colors Where deep tone colors are indicated or specified and a latex coating is specified, use FS TT-P-1728, in lieu of FS TT-P-29. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or otherwise protect, hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures, public and private property, and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces contaminated by coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged items.
SECTION 09 91 00
PAGE-4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.2
3.3
SURFACE PREPARATION A.
Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, disintegrated coatings, and other substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate.
B.
Previously painted surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and repaired in preparation for repainting.
APPLICATION
3.3.1 Coating Application A.
Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are applicable to all substrates, except as modified herein. Thoroughly work coating materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces. Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats. Interior areas shall be broom clean and dust free before and during the application of coating material. 1.
Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the coating manufacturer, to permit thorough drying. Provide each coat in specified condition to receive the next coat.
2.
Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or intermediate coats to dry more than 30 days, or longer than recommended by the manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation if primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of subsequent coatings. Each coat shall cover the surface of the preceding coat or surface completely, and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of successive coats.
3.
Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in colors.
4.
Overcoating of previously painted surfaces shall comply with MPIRM.
3.3.2 Equipment Apply coatings with approved brushes, approved rollers, or approved spray equipment, unless specified otherwise. Spray areas made inaccessible to brushing by items such as ducts and other equipment.
SECTION 09 91 00
PAGE-5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.3.3 Thinning of Paints Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when thinning is mandatory for the type of paint being used. Obtain written permission from the Contracting Officer to use thinners. The written permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use. 3.3.4 Coating Systems A.
Systems by Substrates: Apply coatings that conform to the respective specifications listed in the following Tables:
Table I II III
Interior Metal Surfaces Building Systems Surfaces: Interior Interior Masonry and Wallboard Surfaces
B.
Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers, varnishes, enamels, undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mil each coat unless specified otherwise in the Tables. Coating thickness where specified, refers to the minimum dry film thickness.
C.
Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise: Coat surfaces which have not been specified, the same as surfaces having similar conditions of exposure.
D.
Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work, Including New Patches In Existing Surfaces: Coat surfaces with the following:
E.
1.
One coat of primer.
2.
One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat.
3.
One top coat to match adjacent surfaces.
Existing Coated Surfaces To Be Repainted: Apply coatings conforming to the respective specifications listed in the Tables herein, except that pretreatments, sealers and fillers need not be provided on surfaces where existing coatings are soundly adhered and in good condition. Do not omit undercoats or primers.
3.3.5 Repainting of Existing Door Frames: Repaint existing door frames. Depending on the condition of the existing coating, remove dust, grease, foreign matter, and all unsound paint, spot prime, or prime the entire surface. Apply 2 top coats.
SECTION 09 91 00
PAGE-6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.4
COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL A.
B. 3.5
Primer: Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface is cleaned. If flash rusting occurs, re-clean the surface prior to application of primer. 1.
Inaccessible Surfaces: Prior to erection, use two coats of the specified primer on metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection.
2.
Shop-primed Surfaces: Touch up exposed substrates and damaged coatings to protect from rusting prior to applying field primer.
3.
Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane: Apply MIL-P-24441/1, Formula 150, 1.5 mils DFT immediately prior to application of epoxy or urethane coatings.
4.
Pipes and Tubing; The semitransparent film applied to pipes and tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat. Apply specified ferrous metal primer prior to application of subsequent coats.
5.
Factory primed metal doors and frames shall be painted not less than one undercoat and one finish coat.
Apply coatings of Table I.
"DFT" means dry film thickness in mils.
COATING SYSTEMS FOR CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES Apply coatings of Table III.
3.6
ONSITE TOUCH UP OF WOODWORK A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, Premium Grade, Medium Sheen, as approved by the Contraction Officer.
B.
Woodwork shall be factory finished to the maximum practicable extent. However regardless of whether factory applied or applied after installation, the same requirements specified herein apply.
C.
Preparations for Finishing: Comply with AWI quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of woodwork.
D.
Medium Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, effect, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60 deg gloss meter per ASTM D523. 1.
Grade:
Premium.
2.
AWI Finish System #2:
3.
Staining:
Catalyzed lacquer, VOC compliant.
Match approved sample for color.
SECTION 09 91 00
PAGE-7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.7
4.
Effect:
5.
Sheen:
Closed grain (filled finish). Medium-gloss rubbed effect 35-45 deg.
PIPING AND CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION Piping And Conduit Identification, Including Surfaces In Concealed Spaces: Provide in accordance with MIL-STD-101. Place stenciling in clearly visible locations. On piping and conduits not covered by MILSTD-101, stencil approved names or code letters, in letters a minimum of 1/2-inch (12.7mm) high for piping and a minimum of 2-inches (50.8mm) high elsewhere. Stencil arrow-shaped markings on the piping and conduit to indicate the direction of flow. Use black stencil paint, CID A-A-1558.
3.8
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE In addition to meeting the previously specified requirements, demonstrate the mobility of moving components, including but not limited to swinging and sliding doors, cabinets, and windows with operable sash, for inspection by the Contracting Officer. Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing and drying times of the coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing for final payment.
TABLE - I INTERIOR METAL SURFACES SURFACE/ PRIMER DFT INTERMEDIATE DFT TOPCOAT DFT AREA COAT _____________________________________________________________________________ A. New MIL-P-28577 1.5 MIL-P-28578 1.5 MIL-P-28578 1.5 Steel on non-shopprimed surfaces _____________________________________________________________________________ B. Exist- MIL-P-28577 1.5 N.A. MIL-P-28578 1.5 ing Spot Prime Steel _____________________________________________________________________________ C. New nized Surfaces
Pretreat GalvaMIL-P-285771.5
DOD-P-15328 N.A.
MIL-P28578
_____________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09 91 00
PAGE-8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD TABLE - II BUILDING SYSTEMS SURFACES:
INTERIOR
SURFACE/ PRIMER DFT INTERMEDIATE DFT TOPCOAT DFT AREA COAT _____________________________________________________________________________ 1.
Mechanical, Electrical, and Miscellaneous Metal Items, Except Hot Metal Surfaces and New Prefinished Equipment: Prefinishing of new mechanical and electrical equipment is specified in the section covering the particular item. Paint copper pipe exposed in interior spaces.
A. Surfaces Not Adjacent to Painted Surfaces
2 coats of same coating as used for coating metal in same space
MIL-P-28577 1.5 MIL-P-28578 1.5 MIL-P-28578 1.5 _____________________________________________________________________________ B. Surfaces Coating systems as specified. Adjacent Color of topcoat to match adjacent surfaces. to 1.5 mils dry film thickness for each coat. Painted Surfaces _____________________________________________________________________________ C. New Exposed MIL-P-24441/1 3.0 MIL-P-24441/3 3.0 Piping _____________________________________________________________________________ 2.
Insulation and Surfaces of Insulation Coverings:
A. Plastic N.A. FS TT-P-19 1.5 FS TT-P-19 1.5 Foam Insulation _____________________________________________________________________________ B. Cloth and Glue size and N.A. Coating to Paper primer recmatch Covering ommended by adjacent on material surfaces Insulation manufacturer,1 coat each _____________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09 91 00
PAGE-9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD TABLE - III INTERIOR WALLBOARD SURFACES SURFACE/ PRIMER DFT INTERMEDIATE DFT TOPCOAT DFT AREA COAT ____________________________________________________________________________ A. Wallboard Ceiling & Soffits FS TT-P-19 Flat
FS TT-P-19
1.5
1.5
N.A.
N.A.
FS TT-P-29
FS TT-E-509,
1.5
1.5
FS TT-P-19 1.5 N.A. FS TT-P-1511, 1.5 Eggshell ____________________________________________________________________________ B. Wallboard in Toilets
FS TT-P-19
1.5
N.A.
FS TT-P-1511
1.5
Semi Gloss and Other Interior High-Humidity Areas ____________________________________________________________________________
TABLE - IV INTERIOR WOOD DOORS SURFACE/ PRIMER DFT INTERMEDDFT TOPCOAT DFT AREA IATE COAT _____________________________________________________________________________ A. Wood Doors
FS TT-P-001984
1.5
FS TT-P-1511
1.5
FS TT-P-1511
1.5
Semi-Gloss Semi-Gloss Opaque Finish _____________________________________________________________________________
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09 91 00
PAGE-10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 10 14 10 SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY A.
Furnish and install signage as indicated on the drawings and specified.
B.
New signage shall match the existing signage as closely as practicable
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data:
For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors and finishes.
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within a 5-year warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Match the existing materials as closely as practicable.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods that comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
-- END OF SECTION --
SECTION 10 14 10
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 10 22 15 SECURITY MESH WITHIN PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SUMMARY A.
Furnish and install security mesh within partitions as indicated on the drawings and as specified.
B.
Coordinate inspection of installation with Tenant. Tenant’s approval of installation shall be required prior to drywall installation. Comply with Tenant directives regarding installation inspection and performance.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit shop drawings of the security mesh prior to fabrication and delivery to the job-site. Indicate dimensions, materials, finishes and fastening details.
B.
Submit manufacturer's detailed installation instructions and descriptive data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SECURITY MESH WITHIN PARTITIONS A.
Security mesh shall be fabricated of high carbon, hard drawn, alloy steel fabric as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Secure the wire mesh to the framing with vandal resistant fastenings.
C.
Finish: Security mesh shall be supplied with the manufacturer's standard rust inhibiting mill applied finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install the mesh within partitions; screwed with 1” washers to metal framing as indicated on the drawings.
B.
The mesh shall be affixed in a manner that will deter disassembly with common hand tools such as hammers, pliers, or screw drivers. Make the assembly difficult, if not impossible, to penetrate the partition by head butting, kicking or punching. If utilized, all fasteners, screws, and nuts shall be so set that they can be accessed from the room side of the partition.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 10 22 15
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 10 44 12 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND BRACKETS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Provide fire extinguishers, cabinets, and brackets as indicated on the Contract Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for complete and proper installation. Provide surface-mounted units as indicated on the drawings. Note that fire extinguisher cabinets, extinguishers, and brackets will be located in the field where and as directed by the Fire Protection Engineer.
1.2
UL LISTED PRODUCTS A.
1.3
Fire extinguishers shall be UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for rating, and classification of extinguisher.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit the manufacturer's descriptive and technical data for approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A.
Provide products by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., PotterRoemer Inc., Larsen's Manufacturing Co., or equal Design is based on products by one of the above specified manufacturers will also be acceptable.
B.
Provide multi-purpose dry chemical for Class A-B-C fires, 15-lb capacity, UL rating 4A-60BC, red enamel finish. Cabinets shall be 20 gauge steel with door and trim of type 304 stainless steel, No.4 finish surface mounted.
C.
Brackets:
Provide Potter-Roemer No. 3909, equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install units according to the recommendations of the manufacturer, and as directed by the Fire Protection Engineer.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 10 44 12
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Section Includes: 1.
Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
2.
Fire-protection valves.
3.
Fire-department connections.
4.
Sprinklers.
5.
Alarm devices.
6.
Pressure gages.
7.
Other fire sprinkler related appurtenances
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.
Scope: Provide a complete wet-pipe automatic sprinkler system, and associated equipment, ready for operation.
B.
Description of Work: The work includes modifying the layout and installation of an existing wet-pipe automatic sprinkler system to afford complete fire protection throughout.
C.
Compliance: The entire wet-pipe automatic sprinkler system shall be designed in accordance with the specification. Any reference to "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer. All material and equipment used shall be listed or approved by UL, FM or another nationally recognized testing agency approved by the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer, for their intended use and service.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
General: Design automatic sprinkler systems in accordance with all required and advisory provisions of NFPA 13, including all the Annexes, except where modified herein, by hydraulic calculations for light hazard occupancy with uniform water distribution over the design area. Each system shall be designed using the area/density design approach as defined by NFPA 13. The room design method shall not be used. Design and provide each system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ducts and other construction and equipment in
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD accordance with detailed working drawings to be submitted for approval. Design systems for earthquake protection. 1.
2.
General Design Area Sizes and Densities a.
Provide the appropriate sprinkler design density based on the occupancy hazard or commodity classification of the space being protected in accordance with NFPA 13.
b.
The discharge area shall be the hydraulically most demanding 1,500 sq ft except as specifically noted below. There shall be no reduction in area for the use of quick response sprinklers.
Specific Design Area Sizes and Densities a.
Storage Rooms in excess of 1,500 sq. ft. [140 sq. m.] shall be sprinkler protected in accordance to NFPA 13 Ordinary Hazard Group II.
b.
Loading Docks shall be sprinkler protected in accordance to NFPA 13 Ordinary Hazard Group II.
c.
Trash collection rooms shall be sprinkler protected in accordance to NFPA 13 Ordinary Hazard Group II.
d.
Kitchens shall be sprinkler protected in accordance to NFPA 13 Ordinary Hazard Group I.
e.
Archives shall be sprinkler protected at a density of .30 gpm/sq. ft. [12.2 l/sq. m.] over the most hydraulically remote 1,500 sq. ft. [140 sq. m.] with ordinary temperature rated sprinkler protected. Each sprinkler shall cover no more than 100 sq. ft. [9.3 sq. m.]
f.
Chemical Laboratories shall be sprinkler protected at a density of .15 gpm/sq. ft. [6.1 l/sq. m.] over the most hydraulically remote 3,000 sq. ft. [280 sq. m.]
g.
Compact Mobile Shelving, Track file system storage shall be sprinkler protected at a density of .30 gpm/sq. ft. [12.2 l/ sq. m.] over the most hydraulically remote 1,500 sq. ft. [140 sq. m.] Each sprinkler shall cover no more than 100 sq. ft. [9.3 sq. m.]
B.
Total Combined Inside & Outside Hose Allowances: Hydraulic calculations shall include an allowance of 250 gpm for hose streams, added at the point of connection to the water supply.
C.
Water Supply Information not available. Existing water supply data to be determined by contractor if necessary
D.
Sprinkler System Layout: Approved by GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer.
E.
Other Design Criteria:
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
2.
Maximum protection area per sprinkler shall be per NFPA 13 unless noted otherwise.
3.
Velocities in all piping shall not exceed 20 ft/sec (6.1 m/sec).
4.
Interior pipe coatings are specifically prohibited where not listed for fire protection use.
5.
Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement shall be according to NFPA 13.
6.
For SCIF rooms:
7.
8.
a.
Use dielectric fittings to isolate SCIF room sprinkler pipe from rest of sprinkler system.
b.
Isolate hangers from building structure.
For Information Technology Equipment spaces: a.
Provide a separate control valve, waterflow switch and tamper switch.
b.
Use concealed sprinklers.
c.
Provide a separate test connection.
For Detention/Holding Areas: a.
9.
F.
Use metallic link, “institutional” type sprinklers.
For Open office space: a.
10.
10
Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used.
For areas subject to temperatures below 40 degrees F: a.
Provide dry pendent or dry sidewall sprinklers.
b.
Anti-Freeze systems shall not be installed.
c.
Heat Tape systems shall not be installed.
Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13. 1.
Seismic Expansion Joints: Provide flexible piping systems of a length that exceeds the maximum design movement of seismic expansion joints. The use of 90 degree fittings in pipe as shown in NFPA 13 is specifically prohibited.
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.5
SUBMITTALS A.
Submittals to be in accordance with Division 1, Submittal Procedures unless otherwise indicated by this section.
B.
Product Data: Submit six (6) bound sets of submittals to the Project Manager for each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. Before any work is commenced, the submittal must be approved by the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer. Manufacturer's data shall be provided for all products listed in Part 2 of this specification and annotated to show the specific model, type and size of each item:
C.
Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems, submit six (6) set of drawings to the Project Manager that include all information as required by NFPA 13. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized sheets not less than 30 in by 42 in (760 by 1070 mm). Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. Before any work is commenced, the submittal must be approved by the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, isometric diagram of sprinkler system riser piping showing all control valve locations, and attachments to other work.
D.
1.
Layout indicating details, plan view, elevations and sections of the system piping. Indicate the location of sprinklers and piping in relation to the ceiling layout, showing pipe lengths and sizes.
2.
Detailed riser diagram including isometric diagrams showing schematic of systems supply, supply connection, devices, valves, pipe and fittings.
3.
Provide three (3) sets of CAD based electronic shop drawings to the Project Manager; each set shall include DWG and DWF file formats, including all associated externally referenced electronic files (Xref’s). These files shall contain externally referenced files that have been inserted (do not bind the Xref’s). Provide both DWG and DWF file formats on three (3) separate recordable CD-R’s (do not use CD-RW’s or DVD-R/RW’s). In addition, provide in each set a read only PDF copy of each As-Built drawing for archiving purposes. PDF files shall be created using the PDF Creator utility. These three (3) CD-R’s shall be formatted, written to, and the recording session closed in such a manner as to prevent additional electronic file transfers to the recordable CDR’s.
Hydraulic Calculations. Submit name of hydraulic program and comply with the following: 1.
Where a single riser supplies water to more than one floor or level, separate calculations shall be performed for the hydraulically most demanding area of each floor or level served.
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
E.
F.
Minimum operating pressure of any sprinkler shall be according to NFPA 13 and appropriate UL listing or FM approval.
Verification of Qualification. Prior to installation, submit documentation, to the Project Manager, showing that the Contractor has successfully installed automatic fire suppression sprinkler systems of comparable size, type and design as specified herein or that the Contractor has a firm contractual agreement with a Subcontractor having such experience. 1.
The data shall include the names and locations of at least three installations where the Contractor, or Subcontractor, installed such systems.
2.
The Contractor, or Subcontractor, shall certify that each system has performed satisfactorily for a period of not less than one year.
3.
The Contractor of Subcontract shall submit the NICET/PE certification/license number and expiration date.
As Built Drawings: 1.
General: Prepare and submit to the Project Manager six (6) sets of detailed "As-Built Drawings". The drawings shall show the system as installed, including all deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. The drawings shall also include all information as required by NFPA 13. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized sheets not less than 30 in by 42 in (760 by 1070 mm). Submit these drawings within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system.
2.
Provide three (3) sets of CAD based electronic as-built drawings to the Project Manager; each set shall include DWG and DWF file formats, including all associated externally referenced electronic files (Xref’s). These files shall contain externally referenced files that have been inserted (do not bind the Xref’s). Provide both DWG and DWF file formats on three (3) separate recordable CD-R’s (do not use CD-RW’s or DVD-R/RW’s). In addition, provide in each set a read only PDF copy of each As-Built drawing for archiving purposes. PDF files shall be created using the PDF Creator utility. These three (3) CD-R’s shall be formatted, written to, and the recording session closed in such a manner as to prevent additional electronic file transfers to the recordable CD-R’s.
G.
Field Test Reports and Certificates: Submit test certification, to the Project Manager, for all pipe and fittings. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
H.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Not less than [ ] calendar days prior to the final acceptance testing of the entire system, and
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD for use during the instruction period hereinafter specified, provide six (6) bound copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual to the Project Manager. The manual shall include an index, copies of all approved shop drawings and submittal materials (updated to as-built), and a complete parts list of all components. The manual shall also include, for each item, the manufacturer's name, the serial number of the part, an ordering number, if appropriate, and a physical description of the part. The manual shall include all data relative to alarm valves, waterflow switches and tamper switches. 1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Qualifications: 1.
Layout and hydraulic calculation shall be performed by a NICET Level III or IV Technician certified in Automatic Sprinkler Systems Layout or a Registered Fire Protection Engineer.
2.
Installation shall be performed by a licensed sprinkler contractor who is experienced in the layout and installation of automatic sprinkler systems (minimum 3 years) of comparable size and type.
Coordinate with 1.4C
B.
3.
Installer's responsibilities include layout, fabrication, and installation of sprinkler systems. Layout calculations shall be based on the fire pump test data provided.
4.
Drawings shall be sealed by a licensed Professional Fire Protection Engineer or be stamped by a NICET Level III or IV Technician certified in Automatic Sprinkler Systems Layout.
Applicable References: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the latest editions of the following codes and standards: 1.
2.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), including all amendments and annexes a.
NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
b.
NFPA 14, “Standpipe and Hose Systems”
Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) a.
3.
4.
“Fire Protection Equipment Directory"
Factory Mutual Global (FM) a.
Approval Guide
b.
Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 2-2, “Installation Rules For Suppression Mode Automatic Sprinklers”
American Standard for Testing Materials (ASTM)
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
5.
a.
ASTM A53/A53M, “Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless”
b.
ASTM A47/A47M, “Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings”
c.
ASTM A153, “Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware”
d.
ASTM A234/A234M, “Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service”
e.
ASTM A536, “Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings”
f.
ASTM A733, “Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples”
g.
ASTM A795, “Standard Specification for Black and HotDipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use”
h.
ASTM A865, “Standard Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints”
i.
ASTM B75/B75M, “Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube”
j.
ASTM B88, “Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube”
k.
ASTM B584, “Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications”
l.
ASTM B633, “Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel”
m.
ASTM F2014, “Standard Specification for Non-Reinforced Extruded Tee Connections for Piping Applications”
American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C110, “Standard for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water” b.
6.
AWWA C606, “Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints”
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) a.
ASME B1.20.1, “Pipe Threads, General Purpose”
b.
ASME B16.1, “Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250”
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
7.
8.
c.
ASME B16.3, “Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings”
d.
ASME B16.4, “Gray Iron Threaded Fittings”
e.
ASME B16.5, “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24”
f.
ASME B16.9, “Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings”
g.
ASME B16.21, “Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges”
h.
ASME B16.22, “Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings”
i.
ASME B16.24, “Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500”
j.
ASME B18.2.1, “Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series”
American Welding Society (AWS) a.
A5.8, “Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding”
b.
D10.12/D10.12M, “Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe”
Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS) a.
9.
Copper Development Association (CDA) a.
10.
SP-123, “Non-Ferrous Threaded and Solder-Joint Unions for Use With Copper Water Tube”
Copper Tube Handbook
Federal Specifications a.
TT-P-636
b.
California Building Code (CBC)
C.
Guarantee. The Contractor shall guarantee labor, materials, and equipment provided under this contract against defects for a period of one year after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Government. Final Acceptance includes, but is not limited to, the receipt of as-built drawings and operation and maintenance manuals Contractor shall be able to provide qualified personnel to site within a two (2) hour time frame and be available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
D.
Conflicts. The system shall be installed in accordance with the drawings, specifications and referenced publications. Any conflicts between these documents shall be brought to the
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD attention of the the Project Manager, and the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer. 1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.8
Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities without prior approval of the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer and the facility’s Senior Property Manager: 1.
Existing Sprinkler Equipment: Existing sprinkler equipment shall be left in-service as indicated in the contract drawings
2.
When sprinkler interruption is necessary, a written plan for putting the system back into service shall be submitted to the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer and the facility’s Senior Property Manager.
3.
Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the new system by the Government, all existing equipment so indicated shall be removed and all damaged surfaces shall be restored as herein specified.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
B.
Sprinklers shall be located in center of ceiling tile in all acoustical tile drop ceilings.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
All products shall be UL listed or FM approved for Fire Protection Service unless specifically allowed otherwise by this specification.
2.2
PIPING MATERIALS A.
2.3
Materials shall be steel, ductile iron, or copper.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A.
Schedule 40, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A795, in NPS 2 in (DN 50) and smaller. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
B.
Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A795, Schedule 10 in pipe greater than NPS 2 in (DN 50). Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
C.
Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A795, Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded ends.
D.
Steel Couplings:
ASTM A865, threaded.
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.4
E.
Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: pattern.
F.
Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions:
G.
Cast-Iron Flanges:
H.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings:
I.
Steel Welding Fittings:
J.
Malleable Iron Fittings:
K.
Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
UL listed.
ASME 16.1, Class 125. ASME B16.5, Class 150.
ASTM A234/A234M and ASME B16.9. ASMT B16.3, Class 150
1.
Pressure Rating:
175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
2.
Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A47/A47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.
3.
Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated by this specification, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K drawn copper.
B.
Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: fittings.
C.
Bronze Flanges:
D.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
E.
Grooved-Joint, Copper-Tube Appurtenances:
F.
ASME B16.22, pressure
ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
1.
Grooved-End, Copper Fittings: ASTM B75 (ASTM B75M), copper tube or ASTM B584, bronze castings.
2.
Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper-tube dimensions, with design similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket suitable for fire protection service, and bolts and nuts.
Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections: 1.
2.5
ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
Description: F2014.
Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: inch (3.2 mm) thick.
SECTION 21 13 13
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.6
1.
Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.
2.
Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel RaisedFace Flanges: Ring-type gaskets.
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated by this specification.
C.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copperphosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated by this specification.
D.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
VALVES A.
General Requirements: 1.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: psig (1200 kPa).
175
Ball Valves: 1.
Standard:
UL listed, except with ball instead of disc.
2.
Valves NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: threaded ends.
3.
Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 50 and DN 65): Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
4.
Valves NPS 3 (DN 80):
Bronze body with
Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
Bronze Butterfly Valves: 1.
Pressure Rating:
2.
Body Material:
3.
End Connections:
175 psig (1200 kPa).
Bronze. Threaded.
Iron Butterfly Valves: 1.
Pressure Rating:
2.
Body Material:
3.
Style:
4.
End Connections:
175 psig (1200 kPa).
Cast or ductile iron.
Lug or wafer. Grooved.
Check Valves: 1.
Pressure Rating:
250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
F.
G.
H.
2.
Type:
3.
Body Material:
4.
Body Material: 2 inches or less (DN 50): Bronze with screw ends
5.
End Connections:
1.
Pressure Rating:
2.
Body Material:
3.
End Connections:
Flanged or grooved.
175 psig (1200 kPa).
Bronze. Threaded.
Iron OS&Y Gate Valves: 1.
Pressure Rating:
2.
Body Material:
3.
End Connections:
250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
Cast or ductile iron. Flanged or grooved.
Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves: 1.
Pressure Rating:
2.
Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:
4.
175 psig (1200 kPa).minimum.
a.
Valve Type:
Ball or butterfly.
b.
Body Material:
c.
End Connections:
Bronze. Threaded.
Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: a.
Valve Type:
Butterfly.
b.
Body Material:
c.
End Connections:
Cast or ductile iron. Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, two-circuit, supervisory switch visual indicating device.
TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES A.
General Requirements: 1.
B. 2.8
2-1/2 (DN 65) inches or more: Cast iron.
Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:
3.
2.7
Swing check.
Pressure Rating:
175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
Provide Angle Valves, Ball Valves, Globe Valves, Plug Valves
SPECIALTY VALVES
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A.
General Requirements: 1.
B.
2.9
Pressure Rating: a.
Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: (1200 kPa) minimum.
b.
High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: kPa) minimum.
2.
Body Material:
3.
Size:
4.
End Connections:
175 psig
250 psig (1725
Cast or ductile iron.
Same as connected piping. Flanged or grooved.
Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves: 1.
Pressure Rating:
175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
2.
Type:
Automatic draining, ball check.
3.
Size:
NPS ¾ (DN 20). .
4.
End Connections:
Threaded.
SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A.
B.
C.
Branch Outlet Fittings: 1.
Use welded, threaded or grooved outlets only.
2.
Mechanical fastened tees are not permitted.
3.
Where welded outlets are used, cutouts shall be fastened to the pipe from which they are cut.
Flow Detection and Test Assemblies: 1.
Pressure Rating:
175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
2.
Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test valve.
3.
Size:
4.
Inlet and Outlet:
Same as connected piping. Threaded.
Sprinkler Inspector’s Test Fittings: 1.
Pressure Rating:
2.
Body Material: glass.
3.
Size:
175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight
Same as connected piping.
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 4. 2.10
Threaded.
SPRINKLERS A.
B.
C.
D.
General Requirements: 1.
Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: kPa) minimum.
2.
Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
3.
Sprinklers with O-rings are not permitted.
E.
250
1.
Characteristics: Nominal ½-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and 8.0 for “Ordinary” temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated by this specification or required by application.
2.
Provide 1/2 inch NPS thread for K5.6 and 3/4 inch NPS thread for K8.0.
Sprinkler Finishes: 1.
Chrome plated.
2.
Bronze.
3.
Painted.
Special Coatings: Corrosion resistant coating.
Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1.
F.
175 psig (1200
Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1.
Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, two piece, with 1inch (25-mm) vertical adjustment.
Sprinkler Guards: 1.
2.11
Inlet and Outlet:
Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
ALARM DEVICES A.
Water-Flow Indicators: 1.
Water-Flow Detector:
Electrically supervised.
2.
Components: Two double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, complete with factory-set,
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
B.
C.
2.12
2.13
3.
Type:
Paddle operated with screw terminals.
4.
Pressure Rating:
5.
Design Installation:
6.
Time Delay Feature: from 0 to 45 seconds
250 psig (1725 kPa).. Horizontal or vertical.
Valve Supervisory Switches: 1.
Type:
Electrically supervised with screw terminals.
2.
Components: Double-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
3.
Design: Signals that control valve is in other than fully open position.
Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches: 1.
Type:
Electrically supervised with screw terminals.
2.
Components: contacts.
3.
Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.
Double-throw switch with normally closed
PRESSURE GAGES A.
Type:
Liquid filled
B.
Dial Size:
C.
Pressure Gage Range:
D.
Water System Piping Gage: dial face.
4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter. 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum Include “WATER” or “AIR/WATER” label on
PIPE ESCUTCHEONS A.
General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
B.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: [Polished chrome-plated] [or] [rough-brass] finish with set-screws.
C.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: with chrome-plated finish.
Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass
D.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: [set-screw] [or] [spring clips].
Chrome-plated finish with
E.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: [Polished chrome-plated] [or] [rough-brass] finish with concealed hinge and set-screw.
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.14
F.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with [concealed] [exposed-rivet] hinge, [set-screw] [or] [spring clips].
G.
One-Piece Floor Plates: fasteners].
H.
Split-Casting Floor Plates:
Cast brass with concealed hinge.
SLEEVES A.
2.15
Cast-iron flange [with holes for
Steel-Pipe Sleeves: plain ends.
ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, standard weight,
HANGERS A.
Materials available by product type. Provide materials to comply with location and application requirements unless noted otherwise on drawings and schedules. 1.
Pipe rings - Malleable iron, carbon steel.
2.
Clevis - Carbon steel.
3.
Steel pipe clamps - Carbon steel, alloy, stainless steel.
4.
Socket clamps - Carbon steel.
5.
Beam clamps - Malleable/ductile iron, hardened steel, carbon steel, forged steel.
6.
Structural attachments - Carbon steel, malleable iron.
7.
Ceiling plates/ceiling flanges - Plastic, cast iron, malleable iron.
8.
Concrete inserts and attachments – Malleable iron, carbon steel; stainless steel body, fiberglass bars, polypropylene disc (iron cross design).
9.
Rod attachments - Carbon steel, malleable iron, forged steel.
10.
Pipe supports - Carbon steel, cast iron.
11.
Pipe shields and saddles - Carbon steel, alloy steel, stainless steel.
12.
Pipe rolls - Cast iron, carbon steel.
13.
Guides - Carbon steel; slides, carbon steel with PTFE slide plates.
14.
Engineered hangers - Carbon steel, stainless steel, chrome molybdenum steel.
15.
Powder driven studs – Not permitted
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
2.16
1.
Electro-plating galvanizing process per ASTM B633.
2.
Hot Dipped galvanizing process per ASTM A153.
3.
Epoxy paint.
4.
Zinc-rich paint.
5.
Copper
6.
Standard primer shall meet Fed Spec TT-P-636.
SIGNAGE A.
2.17
Finishes: Provide finishes to comply with location and application requirements unless noted otherwise on drawings and schedules.
Provide [plastic], [steel] or [aluminum ]signs for each valve and to identify hydraulic design. Signs shall have white lettering on a red background with holes for easy attachment. Enter pertinent data for each system on the hydraulic placard.
SPRINKLER CABINET A.
Provide metal cabinet(s) as required containing a stock of spare sprinkler heads of all types and ratings installed as well as any special tools required for removal or replacement of the heads. The number of spare sprinklers shall conform to NFPA 13. The cabinet shall be located, in an area where the temperature will not exceed 100 degrees F (38 degrees C), and approved by the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS A.
Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to waterdistribution piping.
B.
Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply.
PIPING INSTALLATION A.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1.
B.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer before deviating from approved working plans.
Where required to be protected against damage from earthquakes, install seismic restraints on piping in accordance with NFPA 13.
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3
C.
Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with tapered fittings, bushings shall not be permitted.
D.
Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. Trapeze type supports shall utilize angle iron. Use of pipe for trapeze supports is prohibited.
E.
Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to temperatures below 40 degrees F. Install pressure gages on both sides of every pressure reducing valve.
F.
Provide a check valve at the connection to the system riser(s) at each floor connection.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated by this specification.
B.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
C.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. of steel pipe.
D.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
E.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
F.
Bevel plain ends
1.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13. 1.
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. not weld to galvanized-steel pipe.
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 18
Do
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
3.4
3.5
Affix cutout disks, which are created by cutting holes in the walls of pipe for flow switches and non-threaded pipe connections to the respective waterflow switch or pipe connection near to the pipe from where they were cut.
G.
Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
H.
Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.
I.
Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
J.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.
VALVE AND ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION A.
Install water flow indicators and valve supervisory devices in accordance with Division 28, GSA Address/Analog Fire Alarm specification.
B.
All valves shall be electronically supervised.
C.
Valves must be accessible from floor level, and shall not be installed above ceilings.
D.
Where valves are installed above 6 ft. (2 m.) install chain drives.
E.
Operation of valve supervisory device shall generate a supervisory signal upon no more than two complete turns of the valve wheel or a closure of 20 percent, whichever is less.
F.
For OS& valves, provide a roll cut “U” groove in the valve stem the same size as the supervisory switch shaft.
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A.
Temperature Rating: Install ordinary temperature sprinklers, unless modified herein the specification. Sprinklers installed in higher ambient temperature areas shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 13. 1.
For sprinklers installed directly underneath skylights, install intermediate temperature sprinklers.
2.
Elevator Machine Rooms: sprinklers.
3.
Emergency Generator Rooms: sprinklers.
SECTION 21 13 13
Install intermediate temperature Install high temperature
PAGE 19
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
C.
D.
E. 3.6
1.
All sprinklers installed below 7 ft. (2.1 m.)
2.
All sprinklers installed in elevator machine rooms.
3.
All sprinklers installed in electrical distribution rooms.
Corrosion Protection: Provide corrosion-resistant sprinklers in locations where chemicals, moisture, or other corrosive vapors sufficient to cause corrosion of such devices exist, and as follows: 1.
Install corrosion-resistant sprinklers in all showers.
2.
Install corrosion-resistant sprinklers in all open parking garages
3.
Install corrosion-resistant sprinklers where exposed to the exterior.
Quick Response Sprinklers: 1.
Install in all areas where listed for use and in accordance with NFPA 13.
2.
Do not install in elevator machine rooms.
Flexible sprinkler fittings shall not be used.
DRAINS A.
3.7
Sprinkler Guards: Provide mechanical guards as required to prevent mechanical damage in accordance with NFPA 13, and as follows:
Pipe drains to discharge at safe points outside of the building or to sight cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily carry the full flow from each drain under maximum pressure. Do not provide a direct drain connection to sewer system or discharge into sinks. Install drips and drains where necessary and required by NFPA 13. 1.
All drain discharge outlets on the outside of the building shall be located no higher than 1 foot (0.3 meters) above grade level.
2.
Drains provided as part of floor control valves shall discharge to an express drain located adjacent to the sprinkler riser. Drains shall be of the combination inspector's test/drain type.
SIGNAGE A.
Securely attach identification signs to control valves, drain valves, and test valves. Locate hydraulic placard information signs at each sectional control valve where there is a zone water flow switch. Where more than one sprinkler zone is provided, signs shall indicate the specific zone served by the valve.
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 20
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.8
3.9
3.10
FIRESTOPPING AND FIREPROOFING A.
Firestop all holes for piping, or other penetrations which pass through floor slabs, fire-rated walls, partitions with fire-rated doors, vertical service shafts, or any fire-rated assemblies in accordance with Division 7, Firestopping. Existing holes through which new piping for this project passes shall be totally firestopped in a manner that restores the fire protection rating of the penetrated wall, floor, ceiling or other structure.
B.
[Where structural fireproofing is disturbed, damaged, or destroyed as a result of the sprinkler system installation, the contractor shall be responsible for restoring the fire proofing to the required fire resistance rating in an approved manner. This restoration shall be done in accordance with the UL listing or FM approval of the fireproofing materials, requirements of the building, fire, and life safety codes in effect for the project, and in accordance with Division 7, Applied Fireproofing.]
SLEEVE INSTALLATION A.
General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in concrete or masonry walls and floors.
B.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated by this specification.
C.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe. In seismic zones, for pipe 2½ inch (65 mm) and smaller install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1 inch (25 mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe, for pipe larger than 2½ (65 mm) inch install sleeves that are large enough to provide 2 inch (50 mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe.
D.
Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: Provide hot-dip galvanized steel, ductile-iron, or cast-iron sleeves. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.
E.
Sleeves in Other Than Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: Provide 26 gauge galvanized sheet steel.
F.
Escutcheon plates shall be installed where exposed piping penetrates through walls, ceilings and floors.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Tests and Inspections: 1.
Hydrostatically test wet-pipe sprinkler system, as required by NFPA 13, in the presence of the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer or their designated representative. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary test. Test waterflow alarms, tamper switches,
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 21
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD and all other devices for smooth and correct operation. Test the waterflow alarms by flowing water through the inspector's test connection. When tests are completed and corrections made, submit signed and dated “Contractor’s Material and Test Certificates” in accordance with NFPA 13, with a request for final inspection and tests.
B.
C
2.
Test and adjust controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13.
4.
Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5.
Coordinate with fire-alarm tests.
6.
Coordinate with fire-pump tests.
7.
Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local firedepartment equipment.
Operate as required. Operate as required.
Final Inspection and Testing: Advise the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer when hydrostatic and alarm tests have been completed and all necessary corrections made, so as to permit final inspection and testing. Submit request for testing at least 15 calendar days prior to test date. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until operation and maintenance manuals have been received by the Contracting Officer or designated representative. 1.
At the final test, a material and test certificate must be provided in accordance with NFPA 13.
2.
Submit up-to-date red-lined shop drawings to the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer or designated representative at the final test. These drawings shall be undamaged sets of prints of the shop drawings, with changes from the original drawings marked in red. Up-to-date drawings shall be maintained on site throughout construction.
3.
The final test shall be witnessed by GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the final test.
4.
Final testing shall include, but is not limited to, full flow testing through both the main drain and the inspector's test connection as well as testing of all waterflow and tamper switches.
5.
Provide all equipment, services and labor to properly perform all required tests. The Regional GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer shall supervise all testing.
Coordination of Installation:
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 22
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.11
1.
The Contractor shall coordinate this sprinkler system work with other trades to avoid conflicts, assure system completion and testing within the project schedule and to assure a quality, workmanlike finished product. In occupied buildings the Contractor shall coordinate all work with the GSA Property Manager to limit the disruptions to government business and activities. This may mean altered scheduling, after hours work, and/or sequencing construction activities to avoid disruptions to occupants of the building.
2.
Disruptions to existing automatic sprinkler systems shall be kept to a minimum or avoided. Sprinkler systems outside of the construction project shall be kept in service at all times in a method approved by the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer.
3.
Delineate phasing of construction to ensure that installations of new systems are expedited, and existing systems are kept in service until the replacement system is operational.
CLEANING AND PAINTING A.
Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B.
Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
C.
Paint sprinkler pipe as required by Division 9, Painting. -- End of Section --
SECTION 21 13 13
PAGE 23
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 23 05 00.01 COMMON WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish materials and perform labor required to execute this work as indicated on the drawings, as specified and as required to complete the work of this section, except as otherwise herein specifically excluded.
B.
General provision:
C.
1.3
Common Work Requirement for Mechanical is specifically applicable to Division 23 Sections.
1.
Comply with all the specification sections of the project.
2.
This Division is an integrated whole comprising interrelated and interdependent Sections and shall be considered in its entirety in determining requirements.
3.
Applies to all Work and requirements of Division 23.
Provide a complete and operable installation, including all labor, supervision, materials, equipment, tools, apparatus, transportation, warehousing, rigging, scaffolding and other equipment and services necessary to accomplish the work in accordance with the intent and meaning of these drawings and specifications.
WORK INCLUDED A.
The complete Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) including but not limited to these major items. 1.
Coordinate work of this Section with related trades.
2.
Verify applicable dimensions at the jobsite.
3.
Air conditioning units.
4.
Split air conditioning systems and related refrigerant piping.
5.
Air filters.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 6.
Duct systems; supply, return and exhaust complete with fire dampers, combination fire-smoke dampers, and manual dampers.
7.
Diffusers, registers, terminal mixing and VAV boxes.
8.
Mechanical equipment bases and roof curbs.
9.
Exhaust, supply and return fans.
10.
Furnishing and installation of miscellaneous hangers, supports, sleeves, inserts, anchors and other auxiliary equipment for systems under this Division.
11.
Duct lining and insulation.
12.
Heating, hot water, condensate drain, refrigeration piping, fittings, valves and specialties, and insulation.
13.
Installation and connection of Owner furnished equipment.
14.
Temperature and Energy Management systems.
15.
Shop drawings.
16.
Equipment identification.
17.
Equipment and systems adjustments and balancing.
18.
Air, water and gas systems testing, adjusting and balancing.
19.
Written operating and maintenance instructions.
20.
Record drawings.
21.
Guarantee
22.
The installation of condensate drain piping as detailed herein including valves, fitting, and piping specialties.
23.
The preparation and submission of complete Written Operating and Maintenance Instructions for all equipment and accessories installed in the scope of this Project for each discipline under Division 23.
24.
The Scope of Work for Division 23 shall be coordinated with the scope of work with all other Divisions included in the Project Contract Documents and Specifications.
25.
All existing conditions and dimensions shall be verified in the field prior to the fabrication and installation of any new work for Division 23.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 26.
Coordinate work of this Section with related trades.
27.
Complete water heating systems, including water heating equipment, circulating pumps, connections.
28.
Temperature and Energy Management systems.
29.
Complete coordination with all other trades related to mechanical systems installation.
30.
Contractor to submit and pay all fees to all regulatory agencies having jurisdiction on this project for all necessary plan check and permit approvals. Contractor to obtain all necessary approvals for plan checking, installation and operating permits from all the regulatory agencies applicable to this project and pay all the fees.
31.
Contractor to obtain all necessary utility companies connections approvals, and pay all utilities connection and extension fees, costs, etc.
B.
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all mechanical Work as specified and indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents. Completely coordinate with Work of all other trades. Although such Work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
C.
Drawings, Use and Interpretation: 1.
Drawings are only diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and equipment, except when specifically dimensioned or detailed. Contractor shall be fully responsible to prepare to the scale final fabrication drawings, shop drawings, conduct all systems fully coordinated and make all mechanical and plumbing system space coordination efforts.
2.
For exact locations of building elements, refer to dimensioned architectural and structural drawings.
3.
Field measurements take precedence over dimensioned drawings.
4.
Piping and ductwork plans are intended to show size, capacity, approximate location, direction and general relationship of one work phase to another, but not the exact detail or arrangement.
5.
Field verify locations and arrangement of all existing systems and equipment.
6.
For any conflict in the Drawings and/or Specifications the more stringent requirements shall apply. Any such conflict
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for resolution prior to construction of such items. D.
Installation of all systems and equipment is subject to clarification as indicated in reviewed Shop Drawings with field coordination. 1.
Generally, layout pipelines requiring gravity drainage first; followed by large pipe mains, ductwork and electrical conduit.
2.
This procedure is intended to promote orderly installation, but not to establish trade precedence.
3.
Dimensions indicated are limiting dimensions.
4.
Do not use equipment exceeding dimensions indicated on detail drawings or arrangements that reduce required clearances or exceed all of the specified maximum dimensions.
5.
Pipe hanger and support installation: 29.
See Section 23 05
E.
Description of systems: Furnish and install all materials resulting, upon completion, in functioning systems in compliance with performance requirements specified, and any modifications resulting from reviewed Shop Drawings with field coordination.
F.
Access: Provide access panels in ceilings, partitions, enclosures, etc. as required to permit proper access to mechanical equipment and devices. Avoid the need for access panels by installing Work in accessible areas when possible. Means to secure such access shall be provided whenever such access is located within a secured area per the security plans.
G.
The Contractor shall prepare color coded multi-disciplinary overlay drawings including mechanical, plumbing, electrical, structural, architectural, security systems, all communication systems, fire suppression systems and all other building systems and coordinate with all trades for complete installation and operation of mechanical and plumbing systems. Contractor to submit fully coordinated overlay drawings to Architect for review and approval, prior to starting of any installation and fabrication. Contractor to provide all necessary labor and material to modify, reroute, relocate, rearrange, and redesign, all necessary MEP and Fire Sprinkler systems and HS components to make it fit and install them in the available attics, shafts, wall, etc. spaces at no additional cost to owner. Contractor to coordinated, relocate and adjust all necessary divisions, inlets and outlets, lighting, sprinklers, lighting access panels, etc. in at the ceiling surfaces to make it fit at no additional cost to the owner.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD H.
This project’s bid documents includes mechanical and plumbing design based on a particular specified equipment vendors, brand and systems as indicated on the drawings and specifications. However, if contractor elects to substitute with alternate vendors equipments and systems other than used as basis of design, then contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for feasibility of substituted equipments related redesign, rechecking and coordination of mechanical systems and complete coordination with all other building systems including architectural, structural, electrical, etc. and shall pay all related redesign cost, impact cost on other trades, additional installation cost, obtain building department approvals, pay inspection fees and shall be fully responsible to pay all other associated cost. Architect will review substituted equipment submittal only one time. If subsequent reviews are requested by the Contractor, they will be reviewed at $150/hour review cost.
I.
All the exposed mechanical systems inside the building and outside the building other than concealed shall be primed and oil-painted. Color and finish as selected by the Architect. For the purpose of this section: “Concealed” means hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shaft, hung ceiling or embedded in construction; “Exposed” means not installed underground or concealed as defined.
J.
The scope of work for Division 23 shall include everything necessary and incidental to completing the Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC), work indicated on the project Contract Documents, including but not limited to the followings: 1.
The installation of Air handling systems with fans, coils, filters, humidifiers, and air terminal controllers.
2.
The installation of all required air filters for all HVAC systems included in the scope of this Project.
3.
The installation of roof mounted, in-line, ceiling and utility set Exhaust Fans for general or special system exhaust requirements.
4.
The installation of HVAC system ceiling Diffusers and Ceiling Registers including volume dampers and mounting frames to match the ceiling types on the Project.
5.
The installation of all supply, return, exhaust and fresh air ductwork for the entire project including manual volume dampers, fire damper, combination fire/smoke dampers, duct hanger and supports, sleeves, inserts and anchors and all other required appurtenances for all new HVAC systems installed of all duct and pipe installation under the scope of work for this Division.
6.
The installation of all duct and pipe insulation including all rigid inserts, weather covers and water sealing.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.4
7.
The installation of condensate drain piping as detailed herein including calves, fitting, and piping specialties.
8.
The preparation and submission of complete Shop Drawings for all equipment and material installed under the scope of work for all disciplines specified under Division 23.
9.
The installation of all Equipment Identification as specified herein.
10.
The complete Air test and Balancing for all HVAC systems installed in the scope of the Project by an Independent Test and Balance Contractor.
11.
The complete air pressure and soap testing of all natural gas piping installed in the scope of this project.
12.
The preparation and submission of complete Written Operating and Maintenance Instruction for all equipment and accessories installed in the scope of this project for each discipline under Division 23.
13.
The preparation and submission of complete Record Drawings for all work installed under Division 23.
14.
The preparation and submission of One (1) Year Written Guarantee in a form as stipulated in General Requirements.
15.
The Scope of Work for Division 23 shall be coordinated with the scope of work with all other divisions included in the Project Contract Documents and Specifications.
16.
Provide all necessary labor and material to provide fully functional Mechanical & Plumbing systems.
DEFINITIONS (AS USED ON DIVISION 23 DRAWINGS AND HEREIN) A.
“Provide” means furnish, install and connect unless otherwise described in specific instances.
B.
“Piping” means pipes, fittings, valves and all like pipe accessories connected thereto.
C.
“Ductwork” means ducts, plenums, compartments, or casings including the building structure, which are used to convey or contain air.
D.
“Extend”, “Submit”, “Repair” and similar words mean that the Contractor (or his designated subcontractor) shall accomplish the action described.
E.
“Products”, “Materials” and “Equipment” are used interchangeably and mean materials, fixtures, equipment, accessories, etc.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.5
F.
“Utility Areas” are defined as mechanical, electrical, janitorial, and similar rooms or spaces which are normally used or occupied only by custodial or maintenance personnel. “Public Areas” are defined as the rooms or spaces which are not included n the utility areas definition.
G.
“Building Boundary” includes concrete walkways immediately adjacent to the building structure.
H.
“Below Grade” means buried in the ground.
I.
“Substantial Mechanical Completion” means all components of all systems are functioning but lacking in final adjustment.
J.
“Pressure Rating Specified” (such as for valves and the like) mean design working pressure for and with references to the fluid which the device will serve.
WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A.
Concrete, Architectural Sheet Metal, Door and Exterior Wall Louvers, Painting and Electrical.
B.
Related work specified elsewhere:
C.
1.
Motor starters and disconnect switches, wiring and conduit, except as otherwise specified: Division 26 Electrical.
2.
Outside air intake, exhaust louvers and screens.
3.
Installation of access doors and plaster frames for registers and grilles.
4.
Temperature control wiring, except as otherwise specified herein: Division 26 Electrical and Sections 23 09 00 and 23 09 23.
5.
Testing, adjusting and balancing of air/water systems, Section 23 05 93.
This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for mechanical installations. 1.
Submittals
2.
Coordination drawings
3.
Record Documents
4.
Maintenance manuals
5.
Rough-ins
6.
Mechanical installations
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 7. 1.6
SITE INSPECTION A.
1.7
Cutting and Patching
Contractor shall familiarize himself with the conditions at the site. No allowance will be made subsequently for any error through negligence in observing the site conditions. Contractor shall observe and make cost allowance for any mechanical and/or electrical items that must be relocated to accommodate the installation or servicing of any item covered under this contract.
ORDINANCES, REGULATIONS AND CODES A.
References to Technical Societies, Trade Organizations, Governmental Agencies is made in Division 23 in accordance with the following abbreviations. AFI - Air Filter Institute AMCA - Air Moving & Conditioning Association ARI - Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials AWSC - American Welding Society Code ANSI - American National Standards Institute CBC - California Building Code CCR - California Code of Regulations CEC - California Electrical Code CFC - California Fire Codes CMC - California Mechanical Code CPC - California Plumbing Code DSA - Division of the State Architect FIA - Factory Insurance Association NAFM - National Association of Fan Manufacturers NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD NFPA - National Fire Protection Association ORS - Office of Regulatory Services OSHPD - Office of Statewide Health, Planning and Development SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association UFC - Uniform Fire Code UL - Underwriter's Laboratories UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code B.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Materials and installation shall comply with applicable local, state, and national codes and ordinances. Rulings and interpretations of the enforcing agencies shall be considered as part of the local codes. No extras will be permitted for furnishing items required by the local codes but not specified or shown on the drawings.
C.
Codes and Standards: 1.
UBC and California Amendments (California Building Code Part 2, Title 24, CCR).
2.
UMC and California Amendments (California Mechanical Code Part 4, Title 24 CCR).
3.
UPC and California Amendments (California Plumbing Code Part 5, Title 24 CCR).
4.
Uniform Fire Code with State Amendments (California Fire Code - Part 9, Title 24 CCR).
5.
National Fire Protection Association's - National Fire Code.
D.
Nothing in these drawings and specifications is to be construed to permit work in violation thereof. Ordinances, regulations and codes are to be construed as minimum requirements.
E.
The responsibility of the Architect to conduct construction reviews of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site.
F.
Ventilating, refrigeration and electrical equipment and appliances are required to be approved by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other nationally recognized testing agency and installed per the testing agency's specifications.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.8
1.9
1.10
PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A.
Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, fees, assessments, complimentary drawings, required by any legally constituted public authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Afford the owner's representative every facility for evaluating the skill and competence of the mechanics and to examine the materials. Concealed work shall be reopened when so directed during the periodic visits.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Verifying Job Conditions: Examine all Drawings and Specifications in a manner to be fully cognizant to all work required under this Division. Adjoining work of other trades shall be examined for interferences and conditions affecting the work of this Division.
B.
Visit site prior to bidding and investigate the existing conditions which affects and will be affected by the work of this Division. Become familiar with the working conditions and take into account any special or unusual features peculiar to these jobs. By the act of submitting the bid, the contractor will be deemed to have complied with the foregoing, to have accepted such conditions, and to have made allowance therefore in preparing his bid.
C.
The location of existing utility lines are shown in accordance with reference data received by the Architect. The points of connection are therefore approximate and the Bidder shall include in his bid adequate funds to cover cost of connection regardless of their exact location.
D.
Exercise extreme caution during trenching operations. Repair the damage caused by such operations to existing utility lines at no cost to the Owner, whether the lines are shown on the drawings or not.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A.
The Architect's decision will be final on interpretation of the Drawings and Specifications.
B.
The Drawings and Specifications are complimentary. Any work called for on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be performed as though fully set forth in both.
C.
Piping, ductwork and other equipment shown as existing has been taken from the Owner's drawings. Contractor shall verify exact location in field before proceeding with the work.
D.
Where codes, standards, drawings or specifications conflict, the most stringent shall prevail, unless prior approval for variance
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD is obtained. Specific details on the drawings shall supercede the specification in the event of a conflict. E.
Alternate support or seismic detail shall have prior approval by the Architect; and the Contractor shall obtain agency approval without any additional cost or time to the contract and without any time penalty on the work schedule.
F.
The Contract Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, ductwork and equipment. 1.
For the purpose of clarity and legibility, drawings are essentially diagrammatic to the extent that many offsets, bends and special fittings and exact locations of items are not specifically dimensioned. Diagrammatic drawings shall be understood as schemes of required systems.
2.
Drawings and specifications are intended to complement each other. Where conflicts exist between the drawings and/or specifications, request clarification.
3.
“The Architect” and/or, “The Engineer” shall interpret the drawings and the specifications, as to the true intent and meaning thereof and the quality, quantity, and sufficiency of the materials and workmanship furnished thereunder.
4.
In case of conflicts not clarified prior to bidding deadline, use the better quality, greater quantity or larger size in preparing bids. After the contract is awarded should the conflict require changes to the scope of work, a credit for the greater quantity will be required.
5.
Certain runs of piping or ductwork may be shown distorted to avoid confusion. However, systems shall be grouped into orderly function and relationship, consistent with code requirements and working space.
6.
Exact routing of systems, locations of fixtures, grilles, thermostats and devices shall be governed by structural conditions and obstructions. Ceiling installed devices shall be located symmetrically with respect to room centerline, lighting fixtures and type of ceiling system. Architectural restraints shall be verified before roughing in.
7.
Building and room dimensions, location of doors, parti¬tions and similar physical features shall be taken from the Architectural Drawings at the approximate location shown on the Mechanical Drawings.
8.
Manufacturers' drawings and instructions shall be followed in all cases and will become the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures utilized in the performance of the work. Where manufacturer's instructions are in conflict with local
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD codes or governing ordinances, the architect shall be notified for determination.
G.
9.
Mechanical drawings are generally diagrammatic, and do not indicate necessary offsets, obstructions, or structural conditions required for coordination with other trades. The contractor shall be responsible for the correct placing of his work and the proper location and connection of his work in relation with work of other trades.
10.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to install the work in such a manner that it will conform to the structure, avoid obstructions, and maintain headroom.
11.
Above items to be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
12.
Manufacturer's drawings and instructions, when not in conflict with governing codes, shall be followed in all cases where the makers of devices and equipment furnish directions or details not shown on the Drawings or described in the Specifications.
13.
Drawings are not intended to be scaled, but shall be followed with sufficient accuracy to coordinate with other work and structural limitations.
14.
Work installed in a manner contrary to that shown on the drawings shall be removed and reinstated when so directed by the Architect. Discrepancies and questionable points shall be immediately reported to the Architect for clarification.
Modification of Contract Drawings: 1.
In the event that substitute materials or equipment will require, for proper installation, changes to the design as indicated on the Contract Drawings, appropriate proposed revision drawings in an approved format shall be submitted for review. Such drawings shall be sufficiently complete for the proper installation of the proposed substitute materials or equipment and for construction by all interested trades of the proposed revisions to the Contract Documents.
2.
The cost of the drawings, cost of drawing checking, and approval by all legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction shall be borne by the Contractor.
H.
All provisions shall be deemed mandatory except as expressly indicated as optional by the work “may” or “option”.
I.
Contractor shall verify, at the site, the location of all existing equipment, ductwork, piping, utilities, panel boards and partitions affecting the installation of new work.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.11
INSTALLATION OF THE WORK A.
Installation of mechanical work shall be coordinated with the Project Construction Schedule. The contractor shall be totally responsible for coordinating the layout of all building elements to avoid conflict of the work of the structural, mechanical, electrical systems, and architectural features of the building. The cost of any extra work of any kind caused by a conflict due to this lack of coordination, shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.
Before proceeding with the work, the Contractor shall examine all Contract Documents, check and verify all dimensions and sizes that may affect the fitting of his materials and equipment to other parts of the equipment, structure and work of other Divisions.
2.
Work installed, which interferes with the work of other trades, shall be removed and reinstalled at the Contrac¬tor's expense when so directed by the Architect.
3.
It shall be understood that no extras to the Contract will be permitted to accomplish the above results.
4.
Notify the Architect of points of conflict between the work and that of other trades so that the conflict may be properly adjusted.
5.
Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components.
6.
Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
7.
Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
8.
Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
9.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
10.
Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
11.
Coordinate connection of mechanical system with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
C.
12.
Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform to approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extend possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.
13.
Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.
14.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.
15.
Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.
16.
Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-ofway priority to systems required to be installed at a specific slope.
Coordinate field details with other trades to avoid construction delays and maintain required clearances. 1.
Equipment bases and supports: Furnish certified details and drawings for approval before fabrication. Furnish all parts necessary for each base, sub base and support.
2.
Pipe sleeves and inserts: Furnish and install all pipe sleeves and pipe support inserts before concrete is poured.
3.
Roof, wall and floor openings: Furnish shop drawings showing exact locations and sizes of openings through roofs, walls and floors.
4.
When changes in size of equipment bases and pads result in additional design and construction costs, such costs shall be borne by Contractor.
5.
Moving of equipment: Investigate each space through which equipment must be moved. Where necessary, equipment shall be shipped from manufacturer in crated sections of size suitable for moving through restricted spaces available.
Prepare and provide coordination drawings in accordance with Division 1 to a scale of ¼” = 1’-0” or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination for the installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the work, including but not necessarily limited to the following:
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
Indicate the proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials. Include the following: a.
Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
b.
Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
c.
Equipment for connections and support details.
d.
Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
e.
Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
f.
Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
2.
Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
3.
Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted items.
4.
No extras will be allowed for changes made necessary by interference with work of other trades. Areas of limited clearance shall be laid out to 1/4” = 1’-0” scale with all ducts, pipes, conduits, beams, etc., shown and shall be signed by the General Contractor’s superintendent on the job.
D.
Examine other Divisions for work related to the work of this Division, especially Division 26 Electrical and 23 09 23 Direct Digital Control for HVAC.
E.
Rough-In
F.
1.
Verify final locations of rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
2.
Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.
Delivery and Storage: 1.
All material shall be delivered to the site with all labels intact and identified to permit check against approved material lists and for shop drawings. Lost or damaged materials and equipment will be replaced by new at no
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD increase in contract cost. Damaged factory applied finishes supplied with final finish under this division shall be refinished as approved by the Architect, employing workmen skilled in the work involved. Finishing materials shall be obtained from the equipment or materials manufacturer. 2.
G.
Protect materials against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage both while storage and during construction.
Substitution of materials and equipment: 1.
Where no specific make of material or equipment is men¬tioned, appropriate products of approved manufacturers may be used, providing they conform to the requirements of the system.
2.
Materials and equipment may be followed by phrases "simi¬lar to", "equal to", "as approved equal". In the cases, if the Contractor desires to use any other brand or manufac¬turer of the same quality, appearance and utility to that specified, the Contractor shall comply with the general conditions Section 01 60 00 requirements and other sections of specifications as applicable.
3.
Complete technical data including drawings, performance specifications, cost data and tests of the article propos¬ed for substitution, including the reason for substitution.
4.
Complete breakdown of costs, indicating the cost differential to the Contract if the proposed substitution is accepted.
5.
Statement by the Contractor that the proposed substitution is in full compliance with the Contract Documents and applicable codes.
6.
List of other trades which may be affected by the substitution.
7.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any effect upon related work of any substitution and shall bear any additional costs generated by any substitutions, including the costs of the Architect/Engineers' additional services thereby made necessary.
8.
Acceptance or no exceptions taken by the engineer on any substitution proposed by the contractor shall not be construed as relieving the contractor from compliance with the project’s specifications and performance requirements nor departure there from. The contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions and for the selection
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD of fabrication processes, techniques and assembly, coordination of his work with that of all other trades and making any needed modifications consequent to the substitution at his own cost and for performing the work in a safe manner. 1.12
OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A.
1.13
Openings have been indicated on the Architectural and Structural Drawings, additional openings or holes required for the Work of this Division and cost of same is an obligation to this Division. 1.
Openings, cutting and patching to be in accordance with that specified under Section 01 73 10.
2.
At a time in advance of the work, verify the openings indicated on Architectural and Structural Drawings. If the work of this Division requires such, furnish new instructions as to requirements for these openings, sub¬ject to approval by the Architect.
B.
Additional cutting and patching and reinforcement of construction of building, required under the work of this Division, subject to approval by the Architect, to be performed under the Division of the Specification covering the particular materials, and the cost of same shall be an obligation to this Division.
C.
Core drilling of floor slabs and concrete walls for passage of pipes, where authorized by the Architect, shall be provided under the work of this Division.
SUBMITTALS A.
Before starting work, the Contractor shall furnish for the approval of the Architect, shop drawings and itemized equipment lists, complete in all details that he proposes to install. All items shall be submitted at the same time. Conform to Division 01.
B.
Submittals must be specific to this project with respect to model number, capacities, performance, etc., generic submittals will not be accepted.
C.
Submittals shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following which are mandatory: 1.
Draw Equipment Layouts to ¼” scale, including equipment, piping accessories, and showing clearances for operating and servicing.
2.
Pumps, pump characteristic curves.
3.
Schedule of pipe, fittings, valves, with manufacturer and catalog number.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 4.
Specialties, valves, gauges and thermometers of all types.
5.
Foundations, supports, hangers, inserts.
6.
Earthquake supports and calculations.
7.
Expansion loops, expansion joints, guides, and anchors.
8.
Insulation.
9.
Ventilation and air conditioning equipment, specialties and the air control systems.
10.
Fans, fan characteristic curves, fan tests.
11.
Dampers, louvers, grilles, registers, diffusers.
12.
Shop fabrication drawings and installation drawings of ductwork and piping layouts. Submit for approval prior to fabrication. Drawings shall indicate dimensions from bottom of piping and ductwork to finish floor level.
13.
Wiring diagrams, control panel board, motor starters and controls for electrically operated equipment furnished by mechanical trades.
14.
Automatic control system diagrams.
15.
Boilers, boiler feed systems, condensate pumps, breeching, and accessories.
16.
Water treatment components and accessories.
17.
Exhaust, supply and return fans.
18.
Access panels.
19.
Hangers, inserts, supports, anchors.
20.
Pipe, fittings and specialties.
21.
Pipe isolators.
22.
Roof flashing.
23.
Expansion joints, guides and anchors.
24.
Shop fabrications drawings and calculations.
25.
Approved seismic drawings and calculations for applicable piping equipment, or as required by ORS/DSA.
26.
Special and miscellaneous products furnished under this section and not listed herein.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 18
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.14
RECORD DRAWINGS AND MANUALS A.
Record Set During the Work: At site, maintain at least one set of Drawings as a Field Record Set. Also maintain at least one copy of all Addenda, Modifications, approved submittals, correspondence, and transmittals at site. Keep Drawings and data in good order and readily available to Architect and Owner.
B.
Changes: Clearly and correctly mark Record Drawings to show changes made during the construction process at the time the changed work is installed. No such changes shall be made in the work unless authorized by the Architect.
C.
Final Record Drawings: Conform to Division 01 requirements.
D.
Preparation of Final Record Drawings: Contractor shall transfer recorded changes in the work indicated on the Field Record Set to the record set. Changes shall be neatly and clearly drawn and noted by skilled draftsmen, and shown technically correct.
E.
Approval: Prior to Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion, submit the Final Record Drawings to the Architect for review, and make such revisions as may be necessary for Final Record Drawings to be a true, complete, and accurate record of the work.
F.
Manuals: Obtain data from the various manufacturers and submit instruction, operation, and maintenance manuals as required and to the extent required under other Sections.
G.
Contents: Each manual shall have an index listing the contents. Information in the manuals shall include not less than: 1.
General introductions and overall equipment description, purpose, functions and simplified theory of operation.
2.
Specifications
3.
Installation instructions, procedures, sequences, and precautions, including tolerances for level, horizontal and vertical alignment.
4.
Grouting requirements.
5.
List showing lubricants for each item of mechanical equipment and recommended lubrication intervals.
6.
Start-up and beginning operation procedures.
7.
Operational procedures.
8.
Shutdown procedures.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 19
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.15
10.
Parts lists
11.
Name, address and telephone number of each manufacturer's local representative.
Manual Submittals: Unless otherwise specified, each submittal shall include two copies of each manual, one of which will be returned to the Contractor, marked to show the required review. When approved, deliver four copies to Architect unless otherwise specified.
I.
“As-Built” drawings of ductwork and piping, including all elbows, transitions, damper and valve locations shall be provided prior to commencement of air and water balance.
STANDARDS Compliance shall be in conformance with the requirements of Section 01330. Submit proof of material and equipment confor¬mance to the requirements of Regulations and Standards. The label or listing of the specified agency will be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor may submit a written certificate from an approved, nationally recognized testing organization, adequately equipped and compe¬tent to perform such services, verifying that the items have been tested and that the work conforms to the Regulations and Standards, including the methods of testing utilized by the testing agency.
QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A.
1.17
Maintenance and calibration procedures
H.
A.
1.16
9.
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials used in the installation shall be new and in perfect condition when installed. Articles provided for the same general purpose or use shall be of the same make. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent mechanics skilled in their trades shall be employed. Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the work, together with all necessary journeymen, helpers and laborers required.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.
Provide products by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of similar items with an acceptable history of successful production and ability to render competent and thorough technical services and spare parts through local organizations. 1.
Provide the names and addresses of the nearest ser¬vice and maintenance organization and spare parts supplier.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 20
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
1.18
Discontinued models will not be accepted by the owner even if that model was specified. The architect must be immediately notified if there is a conflict in this matter.
B.
Materials and equipment shall be guaranteed by the manu¬facturer to equal or exceed specified, submitted and pub¬lished ratings. Equipment specified by manufacturer's number shall include all accessories, controls and devices listed in manufacturers catalog as standard with the equipment.
C.
Provide a complete working installation with all equipment called for in proper operating conditions. Drawings and Specifications do not undertake to list every item or device of equipment to be installed. When an item or device is necessary for the operation of the equipment shown or specified, the items or devices shall be provided with the equipment which will allow the system to function properly.
SEISMIC DESIGN A.
Contractor shall be responsible for anchors and connections of mechanical work to the building structure including calculations for approval by ORS/DSA, as applies, for items or work, where approval by ORS/DSA is deferred or where alternate support or anchorage detail is proposed to prevent damage as a result of an earthquake, including manufactured equipment, the connection and integrity of shop fabricated and field fabricated materials and equipment. The anchorage of all pipes, ducts, conduits, fixtures, equipment, etc. shall withstand the lateral forces and shall accommodate calculated building displacement as required by the California Building Code, and local city/county codes. (Building equipment and connections therefore shall be designed to resist lateral seismic forces equal to 1.0 of equipment weight to working allowable stress. Cantilever posts supporting equipment shall be designed to resist lateral seismic forces equal to 0.5 of equipment weight to allowable working stress. Conform to the following:
1.
In accordance with Title 24, 2007 CBC Section 1632A and Table No. 16A-O, details shall be provided for the seismic anchorage of all mechanical and electrical equipment, anchorage details shall be based upon appropriate design calculations.
2.
For equipment weighing 400 pounds or more anchorage details and appropriate design calculations shall be submitted as part of the mechanical and electrical drawings. “Deferred Approval” items will not be permitted unless specifically approved by the plan check supervisor.
3.
Exception: Attachments of equipment weighting less than 400 pounds and supported directly on the floor or roof structure, furniture, or temporary or movable equipment and equipment weighing less than 20 pounds that is supported by vibration isolation devices suspended from the roof, wall or floor, need
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 21
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD not be detailed on the plans provided the following notes are included on the mechanical and electrical plans. 4.
1.19
The seismic anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment shall conform to C.C.R. Title 24, 1998 CBC Section 1632A and Table 16A-O. Anchorage details for roof/floor-mounted equipment shall be shown on plans.
SHOP DRAWINGS, MATERIAL LISTS AND SUBMITTAL DATA A.
B.
Comply with the requirements: 1.
Material list: 8 copies of a complete list of material and equipment, tabbed and according to main areas of work, shall be submitted to the Architect within 30 days after award of Contract. Submission shall include manufacturers' names, catalog numbers and other data necessary for identification. 5 copies will be returned to the Contractor. If corrections are required, 6 additional copies shall be resubmitted within 15 days. No material or equipment is to be delivered to the job site until material lists have been reviewed by the Architect. Contractor shall note all items that replaced discontinued models or items.
2.
Submittal data: Printed catalog material and brochures covering equipment and material shall be submitted as follows: 8 copies shall be submitted for review; 5 copy shall be returned to the Contractor, who shall review the corrections, if so noted, and resubmit 8 copies for final review. Assemble each brochure with tabbed separators for each Specification Section where products are noted to be submitted, with separate tabs for each product label.
3.
Three copies of final submittal data will be returned to the Contractor. The Contractor may submit additional copies deemed necessary to correlate the work of other trades. a.
Submittal data to include complete brochures containing only items specified, indicating names of manufacturers, catalog figure numbers, technical data and requested information on each item.
b.
Submittal data to be referenced to Section number and paragraph numbers of the Specifications, and to fixture and equipment indicated. Brochure not to contain extraneous material not specified.
Shop Drawings: 1.
Submission of shop drawings shall consist of 6 complete sets, one of blue line prints and the other of sepia transparency, indicating the required technical
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 22
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD information. One complete set of the sepia transparency will be returned to the Contractor. 2.
Shop drawings shall use the same nomenclature indicated on the Drawings and must indicate locations where material or equipment is to be installed.
3.
Shop drawings shall be submitted covering equipment, piping and ductwork in each equipment room.
4.
Shop drawings shall be coordinated with all other trades covered by Contract Drawings before submission to the Architect.
5.
Submit following material with all equipment room shop drawings:
6.
C.
a.
Manufacturer's specifications, including materials, type, performance characteristics and capacity ratings.
b.
Certified dimension drawings, indicating size, component parts and installation details.
c.
Electrical wiring diagram and controls where applicable.
d.
Complete automatic control and wiring diagrams.
e.
Equipment supports.
f.
For items such as valves, hangers and accessories, indicate specific items and where they are to be used.
g.
Supplementary framing including calculations.
Equipment and/or materials installed without the Contractor receiving written approval from the Architect are subject to removal and replacement by the Contractor with approved materials, at no additional cost to the Owner, or delay of job progress.
Submittals: Unless otherwise specified, specific items for which the following requirements apply and for which submittals are required shall be as specified in each section of Division 15. 1.
Manufacturer's Data: Submittals for manufactured items shall comprise manufacturer's descriptive literature, drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and catalog cuts. these shall be identified by manufacturer's name, trade name, model or catalog number, name-plate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, project specification reference, applicable Federal, Military,
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 23
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD industry, and technical society publication references, and any other additional information necessary to establish contract compliance. Photographs of existing installation and similar data submitted in lieu of manufacturer's catalog data are not acceptable and will be returned without approval. 2.
Shop Drawings: Submit required shop drawings in one complete package. Drawings shall be drawn to a minimum scale of 1/4"; shall be a minimum of 30 x 42 in size; and shall include wiring diagrams, plans, elevations, and sections of equipment and control spaces identifying and indicating proposed and existing locations, layouts, and arrangement of items of equipment, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and any other items that must be shown to assure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals, and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Indicate adequate clearances for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment and devices. If any equipment is disapproved, revise drawings to show acceptable equipment resubmitted.
3.
Standard Compliance: Where equipment or materials are specified to conform with requirements of standards of recognized technical or industrial organizations such as Notional Electrical Manufacturers Association, American Society for Mechanical Engineers (ASME), Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), American Gas Association (AGA), or American Refrigeration Institute (ARI), that use a label or published listing as a method of indicating compliance, proof of such conformance shall be submitted and approved. The label or listing of the specified organization will be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization of suitable competence, stating that the item has been tested and found to conform to the specified standard.
4.
Certificates of Conformance of Compliance: Certifications shall be in the original and not pre-printed. The certification shall not contain statements that could be interpreted to imply that the project does not meet all requirements specified, such as "as good as"; "achieve the same end use and results as materials formulated in accordance with the referenced publications"; "equal or exceed the service and performance of the specified material". The certification shall simply state that the product conforms to the requirements specified.
5.
Certified Test Reports: Certified Test Reports are reports of tests conducted on previously manufactured materials or equipment identical to that proposed for use. Before delivery of materials and equipment proposed for use,
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 24
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD results of the tests shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements for laboratory test results of this Contract. 6.
Factory Tests: Factory tests are tests required to be performed on the actual materials or equipment proposed for use. Submit results of the tests in accordance with the requirements for laboratory test results of this Contract.
7.
Permits and Certificates of Inspection: originals.
8.
Testing procedures and test results required in this and other sections.
9.
Other data required by other sections of this Division.
Furnish the
D.
Submit for review only the specific items required in this section or other Sections of Division 23.
E.
Submittal materials will be reviewed for substantial conformity with the intent of the contract plans and specifications only. Such review does not indicate approval of dimensions, quantities, coordination with other trades, or work methods of the contractor, which are indicated thereon.
F.
Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these specifications.
G.
Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract and prior to executing any fabrication or installation, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Mechanical Engineer for review and approval, complete Division 15 Shop Drawings and Submittals for the Project. This shall include HVAC and Plumbing disciplines under the scope of Division 15.
H.
All submittals shall be bound in a neat ring type binder form and shall contain a complete list, in index form for all equipment and materials proposed for use on the Project. All submittals shall be complete as one package and submitted at one time. Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor rejected for re-submittal.
I.
All information contained in the Submittals and Shop Drawings shall be properly identified by reference number to the item number of paragraphs in the Contract Specifications and Drawing Equipment Schedules. Any deviation or substitution shall be clearly identified on the submittal page and noted as such.
J.
All Equipment or materials fabricated or installed prior to obtaining the Mechanical Engineers Shop Drawing and Submittal review and approval are at the Contractors own risk. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall be responsible for correcting and / or removing all work installed or fabricated prior to obtaining Shop Drawing and Submittal approvals.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 25
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD K.
In the event the Contractor obtains the Mechanical Engineers approval for equipment other than that described herein, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make all required changes in the supporting structures, buildings, related trade costs, and piping necessary to accommodate the substituted equipment. Complete Record Drawings shall be furnished to the Mechanical Engineer indicated all details of the installation.
L.
The following list is the minimum Shop Drawing and Submittal package that the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Mechanical Engineer for review and approval. The Project Shop Drawings and Submittals shall be complete in every aspect as described in the paragraphs above. Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor rejected for re-submittal. 1.
The installing Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval the following Shop Drawing and Submittal package as part of the Scope of Work for Division 26, HVAC:
a.
Prepare prior to fabrication and installation, complete field coordinated installation Shop Drawings for each discipline included in Division 15 Scope of Work in this Project.
b.
All Shop Drawings shall be prepared using the manual drafting method or using the latest release of AutoCAD 2000. Contractor submitted hand sketches are not acceptable and will be returned to the installing Contractor rejected.
c.
All Shop Drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be prepared in ¼ -inch. No exceptions.
d.
Submission of shop drawings shall consist of 6 complete sets, one of blue line prints and the others of sepia transparency, indicating the required technical information. One complete set of the sepia transparency will be returned to the contractor.
e.
The Contractors Shop Drawings shall detail all equipment and piping systems including installed dimensions and elevations. All Shop Drawings shall be complete in every respect prior to submittal to the Mechanical Engineer.
f.
The re-use of the Mechanical Engineers construction drawings for the preparation of the installing Contractors Field Shop Drawing Submittal is not acceptable.
g.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to submit copies of the final approved and coordinated Field Shop Drawings to all other trades for coordination with their work so that grouped pipes, ducts, and conduit will not interfere with each other.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 26
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
3.
4.
Submit complete HVAC equipment and accessory submittals for each and every piece of equipment installed on the Project including: a.
Air Conditioning Units – supply fan data, economizer data, dimensioned arrangement drawings, air aide performance data, gas heating performance data, refrigeration system tonnage and performance data, motor horsepower(s), voltage, and factory supplied accessories.
b.
Exhaust Fans Systems – complete manufacturer computer selections, dimensioned arrangement drawings, fan curves and motor horsepower, voltage, and factory supplied accessories.
Submit complete HVAC ductwork and accessory submittals for all systems installed on the Project including: a.
Supply, return, exhaust, and fresh air ductwork including rectangular duct gauges and joint methods, round duct type, duct gauge, and joint methods, duct fittings – rectangular and round, duct joint sealing method, supports and seismic bracing details.
b.
Duct system appurtenances including fire damper assemblies, fire / smoke damper assemblies, manual volume dampers – round and rectangular ducts, flexible ductwork, register boxes, turning vanes, housings and plenums, roof flashing, and duct instrument test ports.
c.
Air distribution products including supply diffusers, return / exhaust registers, mounting frames, and manual dampers.
d.
Duct insulation and duct liner including proposed thickness, R-Value for each type, manufacturer & model and installation methods.
e.
Ductwork vibration isolation including fabric connections at each unit or where passing through building seismic separations where specified herein.
Submit complete HVAC, and accessory submittals for all systems installed on the Project including: a.
Complete piping submittals including piping material – schedule & type and ASTM grade, pipe fittings - type and ASTM grade, joint methods, supports and seismic bracing details.
b.
Piping system appurtenances and accessories including each type of valve(s), – grade, rating, catalog number and manufacturer.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 27
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.20
Piping system expansion loops including joint type – manufacturer, material & duty, pipe guides and anchors – manufacturer & model number, material, duty and expansion calculations.
e.
Piping system flow or temperature measuring taps – quantity and type, coordinated with Division 15975.
f.
Pipe insulation including proposed thickness, R-Value for each type, rigid inserts, manufacturer & model and installation methods.
g.
Piping vibration isolation including flex connections at each unit or where passing through building seismic separations where specified herein.
h.
Piping installation appurtenances including sleeves, fireproofing, caulking, waterproofing, roof flashing and escutcheons.
Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the work to be covered up or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Architect and proper inspector. Should any of his work be covered up or enclosed before such inspection and test, he shall, at his own expense, uncover the work and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, make all repairs with such materials as may be necessary to restore all his work and that of other trades to its original and proper condition.
Furnish and install necessary steel supports and seismic res¬traints for fans, coils, receivers, tanks, piping and other equipment for a complete installation and as approved by the Architect. Supports shall be painted with one coat of rust preventative paint after installation under work of this Division.
BUILDING FOOTING CLEARANCES A.
1.23
d.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.
1.22
Piping system specialties including thermometers with separable wells, pressure gauges, automatic air vents, Pete’s Plugs, circuit balancing valves, strainers, check valves, plug cocks, and butterfly valves.
CLOSING-IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK A.
1.21
c.
Under no circumstances shall pipes, ducts or conduits be run through footings. They shall cross below footings or through sleeves above footings. Those running parallel to footings shall have the minimum clearances from the cone of influence indicated on the Structural Drawings or as required by Code.
DAMAGE BY LEAKS
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 28
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A.
1.24
1.25
SUBSTITUTIONS AND CHANGES A.
The design has been based on data from certain manufacturers, suitable for each application. Recommendations for alternative manufacturers are made for each product, except when "no substitutions permitted" is indicated.
B.
It is the intent of the Owner to have this project constructed with materials, products and system originally designed and specified into the project.
C.
Alternatives that may require the modification, realignment and/or adjustment of other associated components, including impact on other trades, shall be accomplished at no additional cost or time to the contract and shall have the approval of the Architect.
D.
Substitutions shall be submitted addressing all features listed in the specifications. Features that deviate from the plans and specifications shall be clearly identified including justification for deviations. TTG Engineers will review initial submittal on substitutes only. Subsequent submittals made to correct deficiencies in original submittals will be reviewed at Contractor’s expense based on TTG Engineer’s hourly rate for engineering services.
E.
Should the Contractor elect to propose substitutions for the Owner's interest, the substitutions shall be in compliance with Division 01.
F.
Acceptance or no exceptions taken by the engineer on any substitution proposed by the contractor shall not be construed as relieving the contractor from compliance with the project’s specifications and performance requirements nor departure there from. The contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions and for the selection of fabrication processes, techniques and assembly, coordination of his work with that of all other trades and making any needed modifications consequent to the substitution at his own cost and for performing the work in a safe manner.
APPROVALS A.
1.26
Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by rain leaks through or around ducts or pipes, leaks or breaks in piping, equipment or fixtures furnished and/or installed by him for a period of 1 year from the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner.
The Architect will have the right to accept or reject equipment, materials, workmanship, tests and determine when the Contractor has complied with the requirements herein specified.
SELECTION AND ORDERING OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 29
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A.
1.27
1.28
Immediately after award of the Contract and after the approval of submittals by the Architect, the Contractor shall arrange for the purchase and delivery of equipment and materials required, in ample quantities and at the proper time. He shall deliver to the Architect a complete list of equipment and materials ordered, giving descriptions, plate numbers, brochures, name of the wholesalers, date of the orders and approximate delivery dates.
LOCATIONS AND ACCESSIBILITY A.
Drawings show pipe and ductwork diagrammatically. Conform to Drawings as closely as possible in layout work. Vary run of piping, run and shape of ductwork and make offsets during progress of work as required to meet structural and other interferences as approved by Architect. Install piping and ductwork to best suit field conditions after coordinating with other trades. Run exposed piping and ductwork parallel to, or at right angle to, building walls. Keep horizontal lines as close to bottom of structures as possible. Conform to ceiling heights established on Drawings.
B.
Install equipment in such a manner as to be readily accessible for maintenance and repairs. Install piping, ducts and conduit in such a manner as to preserve headroom, avoid obstructions and keep openings and passageways clear.
C.
Installation at valves, thermometers, gauges, cleanouts, dampers, controls, and water specialties, duct access doors or any other indicating equipment or specialties requiring reading, adjustment, inspection, maintenance shall be conveniently and accessibly located with reference to the finished building.
D.
Where wall and ceiling access doors are required but not shown, such doors shall be furnished under other sections and as directed by the Architect. Coordinate this requirement with appropriate trade.
E.
If changes in the indicated locations or arrangements are required, they shall be made without additional charges.
F.
In an existing area, where required, remove, reinstall, reconnect or replace, etc., any existing work to accommodate new work without any additional cost to the Owner. Material shall match existing, unless otherwise specified or approved in writing by the Architect.
G.
Provide sheaves and belts if required, to Test, Adjust and Balance Agency, to allow air moving equipment to meet flow requirements specified at no additional cost to the Owner.
COORDINATION OF TRADES A.
Contractor shall coordinate all trades in the interest of obtaining the most practical overall arrangement of equipment,
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 30
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD piping, conduit, and ducts and to maintain maximum headroom and accessibility.
1.29
B.
No extras will be allowed for changes made necessary by interference between trades.
C.
Submit Composite Drawings in accordance with Special Conditions. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections and details and give complete information particularly as to the kinds and types of materials and equipment, size and location of sleeves, inserts, attachments, chases, openings, conduits, ducts, boxes, lighting, structural interferences. Coordinate these Composite Drawings and field layouts in the field for proper relationship to work of applicable trades based on field conditions. Contractor shall have competent personnel readily available for coordinating, checking, and supervision of field layouts. The procedures for submittals and resubmittals, and final distribution shall be as specified in Division 01. Do not start installation of work involved under Composite Drawings until the Architect reviews applicable submittal. Discrepancies between the Drawings and Composite Drawings shall be specifically noted and identified on the Composite Drawings. Drawings for the various trades involved shall be submitted as required and reviewed prior to preparation of Composite Drawings. 1.
Equipment Foundations and Bases: Furnish certified details and drawings for approval before fabrication. Furnish parts necessary for each foundation sub base and support.
2.
Pipe Sleeves and Inserts: Furnish and install pipe sleeves and pipe support inserts before concrete is poured.
3.
Roof, Wall and Floor Openings: Furnish Shop Drawings showing exact locations and sizes of openings through roofs, walls and floors.
4.
Concrete: Conform to Concrete Section of the Specifications.
GUARANTEES A.
Contractor shall guarantee workmanship, equipment and materials installed under his contract for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion. Should any defects occur during this period, the Contractor shall promptly repair or replace the defective item and any other damage caused to the building free of charge to the Owner, including cost of labor and materials.
B.
Guarantee included in this section to cover:
1.
Faulty or inadequate design of equipment or
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 31
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD material installed.
1.30
Defective workmanship or material.
4.
Incorrect or inadequate operation or other failure.
D.
Furnish the parts and labor to replace any items found to be defective in the refrigeration equipment within the guarantee period.
E.
In addition to other guarantees, furnish free maintenance for the refrigeration equipment, including replacement of refrigerant and oil, for a period of one (1) year. This shall include regular monthly maintenance and "On Call" service if required.
F.
For equipment bearing a manufacturer's warranty in excess of one year, furnish a copy of the warranty to the Owner, who shall be named as beneficiary.
PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS Provide adequate storage facilities for equipment and materials on the site and shall make provisions to protect such materials and equipment from damage.
CLOSING-IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the work, specifically ductwork and piping, to be covered up or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested, and approved by the Architect. Should any of work be covered up or enclosed before such inspection and test, he shall at his own expense, uncover the work and after it has been inspected, tested, and approved, make repairs with such materials as may be necessary to restore work to its original and proper condition.
BUILDING FOOTING CLEARANCES A.
1.33
3.
He shall guarantee the complete and perfect operation of the entire system and that equipment will be supported in such a way as to be free of objectionable vibration and noise.
A.
1.32
Improper assembly or erection.
C.
A.
1.31
2.
Under no circumstances shall pipes, ducts, or conduits penetrate footings. They shall cross below footings or through sleeves above footings. Those running parallel to footings shall have the minimum clearance from the cone of influence indicated on the Drawings or as required by Code.
DAMAGE BY LEAKS A.
Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by rain leaks through or around ducts or pipes,
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 32
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD leaks or breaks in piping, equipment or fixtures furnished or installed by him for a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion. 1.34
EQUIPMENT LABELS A.
1.35
1.36
EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A.
Excavating, trenching and backfilling for utilities within the building area shall be done in conformity with Division 2 Sitework. Piping shall be installed promptly after excavation in order to keep the trenches open as short a time as possible.
B.
Excavating, trenching and backfilling for utilities outside the building area shall be done in conformity with Division 2 - Site work.
C.
Any existing underground piping and conduit that is encountered shall be properly shored and protected from damage. Active piping shall be left intact and undamaged.
PRELIMINARY OPERATION A.
1.37
Equipment provided under this Section shall be provided with the manufacturer's metal identification labels attached to each individual piece of equipment showing complete performance characteristics, size, model and serial number.
Should the Owner request that any portion of the plant, apparatus, or equipment be operated for the Owner's beneficial use prior to the final completion and acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall conform to Beneficial Occupancy Provisions of the General Conditions. Such operation shall be under the supervision and direction of the Contractor. Such preliminary operation shall not be construed as an acceptance of any of the work.
ELECTRICAL WORK A.
Coordinate with Division 26 in making the line and low voltage electrical connections and be responsible for the operation of the equipment furnished under this section.
B.
Voltage for electrical work will be included in Division 26. However, any control wiring which is required that is not shown on the control diagram shall be as described under this Section. In the event that the Contractor chooses to provide equipment that requires extra expense in the power or control wiring, he shall pay additional electrical costs.
C.
Safety switches, starters, circuit breakers, unless provided as a portion of package equipment, and the electrical connections of mechanical equipment to the electrical power service shall be provided under Division 26.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 33
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.38
D.
Interconnecting wiring, safety switches, relays, controllers and motor starters which are integral components of packaged equipment shall be provided as an integral part of that equipment.
E.
All interconnecting power wiring and conduits shall be provided by Division 26.
F.
Control wiring shall be provided by Division 23, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
G.
Conduit for control wiring shall be provided by Division 26.
H.
All motors, power driven equipment and automatic control equipment, except motor starters as hereinafter set forth required and connected with the work of this section of the specifications are to be furnished and installed under Division 26.
I.
All control low (24V) wiring conduits, CAC furnished by Division 26. Line (120V) voltage wiring, conduit and related switches and relays required for the automatic control and/or interlock of motors and equipment including final connection, are to be furnished and installed Division 15. Materials and installation to conform to Class 1 or 2, CCR Title 24, Article E725, and as restricted under the Division 26 Electrical of these specifications.
J.
Power wiring, conduit, outlets, disconnect switches and motorrated contractors, and making of final connections, except as hereinafter specified, are to be furnished and installed under the Division 26 Electrical of the specification.
K.
Identify circuits and equipment as outlined in the Electrical section of these specifications.
L.
Coordinate requirements for underground conduit only between buildings for control interlocks shown on the drawings. This conduit to be furnished and installed under Division 26 of these specifications.
M.
Starters and disconnects will be provided under Division 23.
N.
All line voltage control wiring and conduits shall be provided under Division 26 – Electrical.
SUPPLEMENTARY FRAMING A.
Provide supplementary framing required for attachment of han¬ger, supports and anchors. Fasten supplementary framing to structure in an approved manner. Supplementary framing of structural angle iron, channels and "I" beams properly designed to carry the weight of piping and its contents and to withstand any thrust exerted by the expansion or contraction of the piping.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 34
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.39
B.
Submit details of hangers, anchors, supplementary framing including the proposed method of fastening of supplementary framing to the base building structure and calculations used in determining the proposed fastening method.
C.
Structural work shall conform to applicable building codes.
D.
Paint supplementary framing with one coat of rust preventive paint after installation under work of this Division.
ADDITIONAL BALANCING DEVICES A.
1.40
1.41
Provide any additional apparatus, be required to completely balance systems. Such apparatus, devices in the work at no additional cost
devices or equipment that may all the air and hydronic or equipment shall be included to the Owner.
DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE OF MATERIALS, PROTECTION OF WORK A.
Properly store, adequately protect, and carefully handle equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation as recommended by the manufacturer and as approved by the Architect. Items determined to be damaged or defective shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. Determinations of the Architect shall be final.
B.
Protect materials against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage both while in storage and during construction.
C.
Cover materials in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged, marred or splattered with plaster or paint, and all moving parts will be kept clean and dry.
D.
Replace or refinish any damaged materials including fronts of control panels, ductwork fittings, and shop-fabricated ductwork.
E.
Keep cabinets and other openings closed to prevent entry of foreign matter.
F.
Refer to other sections of this Division for additional requirements.
STANDARD PRODUCTS A.
Materials and equipment shall be essentially the standard catalogued products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials or equipment, and shall be their latest standard designs that comply with the Specification requirements. Materials and equipment shall duplicate items that have been in satisfactory commercial of industrial use at least two years prior to bid opening. Where two units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer. The components thereof, however, are not required to be exclusively of the same manufacturer. Each major component of equipment shall have manufacturer's name, address,
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 35
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD model and serial number on a nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. 1.42
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A.
1.43
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS A.
1.44
Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts located so that any person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded. High temperature equipment and piping so located as to endanger personnel or create a fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of a type specified herein. Provide items such as catwalks, ladders, and guard rails where required for safe operation and maintenance of equipment.
Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material or equipment being installed, furnish printed copies of these recommendations to the Architect prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A.
B.
Furnish an operation and maintenance manual covering the stipulated mechanical systems and equipment as follows. Seven copies of the manual, bound in the hardback binders or an approved equivalent, shall be provided to the Owner and one copy to the Architect. Furnish one complete manual prior to the time that system or equipment tests are performed. Furnish the remaining manuals before the contract is completed. The following identification shall be inscribed on the cover: 1.
Operation and Maintenance Manual
2.
Building Number
3.
Contractor
4.
Contract Number
Provide a table of contents. Insert tab sheets to identify discrete subjects. Instruction sheets shall be legible and easily understood, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manual shall be complete in all respects for all equipment, controls, accessories and appurtenances stipulated. Include as a minimum the following: 1.
System layout showing piping, valves and controls.
2.
Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each component.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 36
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
C.
3.
A control sequence describing start-up, operation and shutdown.
4.
Detailed description of the function of each principal component of the system.
5.
Procedure for starting.
6.
Procedure for operating.
7.
Shutdown instructions.
8.
Installation instructions.
9.
Adjustments, maintenance and overhaul instructions.
10.
Lubrication schedule including type grade, temperature range and frequency.
11.
Safety precautions, diagrams and illustration.
12.
Test procedures.
13.
Performance data.
14.
Parts lists, with manufacturer's names and catalog numbers.
15.
Preventive maintenance schedule.
16.
Service organization with name, address and telephone number.
17.
Valve identification chart and schedule.
18.
ASME certificates.
19.
Air balance report.
20.
Hydronic balance report.
Provide operation and maintenance manuals for all mechanical and electrical equipment. Product video taped instructions during the training period for operating personnel at the time of final inspection using factory startup engineers to show adjusting, calibrating, testing, operating and servicing procedures for all systems. 1.
Furnish four (4) complete sets of video taped cassettes or compact discs (CD) for each system and the equipment requiring the instructions.
2.
Contractor shall use the video taped instructions during the training period for the building operating personnel.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 37
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.45
1.46
POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A.
For each designated system or equipment item, provide instructions for guidance of operating and maintenance personnel. Following approval of content, prepare these instructions in a form and scale that will be readily legible when displayed in appropriate locations, to be designated by the Owner. Meet the following requirements:
B.
For each system, include diagrams of equipment, piping, ductwork, wiring and controls. Define control sequences.
C.
For each equipment item, include starting, adjustment, operation, lubrication, safety precautions and shutdown. Identify procedures to be performed in event of equipment failure. Provide other instructions recommended by the manufacturer.
D.
Make final copies impervious to deterioration from exposure to sunlight. Physically protect such copies by mounting them in glazed frames, by plastic lamination, or by engraving in metal or laminated plastic. For outside locations, protection shall be weatherproof. Attach to structure or equipment as directed.
INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER PERSONNEL A.
When specified in other sections or herein, the Contractor shall furnish, without additional expense to the Owner, the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to the designated personnel in the adjustments, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment or system specified. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation, and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. The number of man-days of instruction are specified, approximately half of the time shall be for classroom instruction. All other time shall be used for instruction with the equipment or system. When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
B.
The following systems and equipment shall be required to be furnished with operating instructions videocassette and number of hours training: 1.
Chilled water system, man-day (16 hours).
2.
Hot water system, man-day (16 hours).
3.
Air conditioning system, man-day (8 hours).
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 38
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.47
1.48
1.49
4.
Miscellaneous exhaust equipment and systems, man-day (3 hours per system).
5.
Direct-Digital Control System per HVAC Section 23 09 23 (minimum 24 hours).
BUILDING OCCUPANCY VENTILATION A.
Prior to move in by the occupants, the building shall have a minimum period of two weeks with their systems running on full exhaust and 100% outside air 24 hours a day to completely off gas the furnishings.
B.
The total ventilation of the buildings shall be scheduled with the Architect.
SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS A.
Contractor shall furnish difficult-to-obtain manufacturer unique spare parts upon contract completion.
B.
Contractor shall furnish any special tools required to service equipment with the equipment. Provide a lockable metal toolbox to secure tools.
WARRANTY A.
In addition to requirements of the Conditions of the Contract, warrant all equipment, ratings, capacities, motor HP, etc., to produce the specified and indicated performance at an elevation of the project site above sea level. 1.
Refer to Division 01 for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements.
2.
Contractor shall guarantee all workmanship, equipment and materials installed under his contract for a period of not less than one year from the date of acceptance of the installation. Should any defects occur during this period, the Contractor shall promptly repair or replace the defective item and any other damage caused to the building free of charge to the Owner, including cost of labor and materials.
3.
Where periods more than one year are specified in the specifications, such longer periods shall govern. However, when any component fails at any time during this period, the warranty period for such component and all other components which are inactive because of said failure shall be suspended. The warranty period for such components shall resume to run for the remaining portion of this warranty period when failed components are completely repaired and in operation; however, in no case shall the resumed portion of the warranty period be less than 3 months in duration.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 39
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B. 1.50
Neither payment for work, nor total or partial occupancy of work by the Owner, within or prior to the warranty period specified, shall be construed as acceptance of faulty work or shall condone any negligence or omission of Contractor in doing the work.
5.
Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 26, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.
6.
Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names and addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
7.
The Contractor shall require that the manufacturer of the chiller shall furnish the parts and the labor to replace any item found to be defective in the refrigeration equipment, within the guarantee period.
8.
In addition to other guarantees, the Contractor shall furnish free maintenance for the refrigeration equipment, including replacement of refrigerant and oil, for a period of one year. This shall include regular monthly maintenance and “On Call” service for a period of one year.
Warranty start on date of acceptance by the Owner.
QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A.
1.51
4.
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials used in the installation shall be new and in perfect condition when installed. Articles provided for the same general purpose or use shall be of the same make. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent mechanics skilled in their trades shall be employed. Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the work, and who will remain on the project through completion together with all necessary journeymen, helpers and laborers required.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Minimum head room for service access aisles shall be 6-feet, 6inches. Keep the following areas clear:
B.
NEC required service areas for electrical equipment,
C.
Tube and coil pull areas for, 1.
Fire damper and smoke damper access.
2.
Accessibility to valves.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 40
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD D.
Provide any code required or service required clearances over equipment.
E.
Particular attention shall be paid to noise and vibration control. The extent of sound and vibration control efforts shall be a function of the sensitivity of spaces adjacent to the equipment rooms, whether above, below, or on the same level. For critical applications, AHUs and return fans shall have a maximum noise control (NC) level specified for both breakout sound level and for sound radiated to the space.
F.
All mechanical equipment needs to be isolated from the structure with Neoprene pads and/or seismic restraint spring isolators. All piping that is served by rotating equipment of any type should be isolated from the building and suspended. The suspension shall be done with spring hangers selected for size and a static deflection of at least 1 inch.
G.
The mechanical contractor is responsible to the general contractor for the shop drawing layout of the following rooms and details. Prior to construction, contractor shall submit shop drawings to CM for review. 1.
Concrete pads and foundations,
2.
Equipment room layouts with actual equipment,
3.
Roof layouts,
4.
Trench locations and sizes,
5.
Dimensioned floor drain locations,
6.
Congested areas above ceilings adjacent to powerhouse or equipment.
H.
The contractor shall maintain record drawings during course of project and give to Engineer for recording on CADD.
I.
Painting is as specified elsewhere.
J.
Structural steel used for supporting equipment in fan plenums or outside shall be galvanized.
K.
The mechanical contractor shall furnish wall and ceiling access panels to the general contractor for installation. Show final locations of panels on as-built drawings.
L.
Concealed main isolation valves on all systems shall be numbered and tagged with drawing reference to identify their locations.
M.
Mechanical piping in mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, and powerhouses shall be entirely painted for color coding. Use PVC wrap-around labels to identify piping. All emergency shutoff
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 41
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD valves shall be identified with a permanent engraved tag hung from valve with 1-inch high lettering.
1.52
N.
Piping shall be stenciled at 25-foot intervals and at least once in each separate space through which the pipe passes.
O.
Provide laminated control drawings hung on a chain, mount on a wall at each control system cabinet showing the functions in that cabinet and how they tie into the system.
SLEEVES A.
1.53
Provide sleeves for piping passing through: 1.
Masonry walls and floors.
2.
Walls containing steam or condensate piping.
B.
Penetration assemblies shall be provided to comply with the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory requirements for through wall penetrations. Designers shall specify penetration methods that meet the fire and temperature rating required by the building code. Fire barrier products shall be specified under Division 7. Penetration details shall be shown on the architectural drawings and shall be coordinated by the engineer. Contractor shall submit details for approval under Division 7.
C.
Floor sleeves in wet areas, including all mechanical equipment rooms, shall extend a minimum of 1-inch above the floor to prevent water entrance to the sleeved hole. Vertical pipe supports must be extended to and be supported by the floor rather than the sleeve.
INSTALLATION A.
Workmanship shall be in the best standard practice of the trade.
B.
Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations unless otherwise noted or specified.
C.
Sequence, coordinate and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1.
Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components.
2.
Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3.
Arrange for chases, slots and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installation.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 42
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
1.54
1.55
4.
Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
5.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
6.
Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
7.
Coordinate connection of mechanical system with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
8.
Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.
9.
Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.
10.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.
11.
Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.
12.
Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-ofway priority to systems required to be installed at a specific slope.
All valves shall be installed to be accessible by maintenance personnel.
ROUGH-IN A.
Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurement sand with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
B.
Refer to equipment specifications in Division 2 through 17 for rough-in requirements.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 43
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A.
Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 01.
B.
In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, the following requirements apply: 1.
C.
1.56
Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching of operations, protect adjacent installations.
Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1.
Remove and replace defective work.
2.
Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the contract documents.
3.
Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
4.
Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
5.
Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore work to provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed work.
D.
Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new work.
E.
Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.
F.
Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
G.
Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced installers. Installer’s qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched. Refer to Division 1, for definition of “Experienced Installer”.
SYSTEM OPERATIONAL TESTS A.
The Contractor shall inform the Owner one week prior to starting this testing in order that the Owner’s Representative may be present.
B.
After balancing and prior to final inspection, the contractor shall operate all systems continuously trouble free and stable for a minimum period of fourteen consecutive days including Saturday and Sunday. Each day shall be a minimum of an 8 hour
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 44
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD day. Should a problem arise, the 14 day period shall be restarted and repeated until successfully operated for a full 14 days. A written report certified by the Owner’s Representative shall indicate the successful completion of a stable and trouble free 14 day period. 1.57
1.58
CLEANING A.
Cleaning shall be done as the work proceeds. Periodically remove waste and debris to keep the site as clean as is practical.
B.
Refer to Division 1 for general requirements for final cleaning.
C.
Leave exposed parts of the mechanical work in a neat, clean and usable condition, with painted surfaces unblemished and plated metal surfaces polished.
D.
Thoroughly clean all materials, equipment and appliances. Clean and prepare all surfaces to be painted. Clean the entire premises of unused materials, debris, spots and marks to the satisfaction of the Architect.
E.
Remove, thoroughly clean and replace all strainers and automatic valves after the system has been put in operation until system is clear of all foreign matter and repeat this operation after 10 days and again after the system has been in operation 30 days. Submit certification that this operation has been completed.
CUTTING AND PATCHING A.
1.59
Locate openings and sleeves to permit neat installation of piping, ductwork and equipment.
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES A.
Install all equipment in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with the equipment’s listing (if applicable).
B.
Access: 1.
Install all equipment and devices to permit easy access for maintenance.
2.
Maintain easy access to all equipment and devices installed as part of Division-15 Work, including but not limited to, filters, motors, drives, valves, dampers, actuators, duct smoke detectors, etc.
3.
Relocate items which interfere with access.
4.
When possible, install Work in accessible locations to avoid the need for access panels.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 45
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 5.
C.
D.
Provide access panels in ceilings, partitions, enclosures, etc. as required in order to achieve easy access to all equipment and devices provided or installed under Division 26 Work. Provide additional access panels as required. a.
For walls, partitions, ceilings, enclosures, etc.: Provide access panels as Work of Division-26. Requirements for access doors/panels are specified in Section 08310, "Access Doors".
b.
For Hard Ceilings: Hard ceiling access doors are to be provided. As part of Division-26 Work, provide complete drawings and tabulation to General Contractor indicating all required locations and sizes of security ceiling access doors for devices and equipment provided or installed under Division-26 Work.
c.
Fire rating shall be maintained as designed.
6.
Coordinate with Architect to achieve acceptable locations of access panels.
7.
Coordinate all access panel locations with other trades and the General Contractor.
8.
Where possible, avoid locating access panels in secure areas.
Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports. 1.
Use structural supports suitable for equipment, or as indicated.
2.
Check loadings and dimensions of equipment with Shop Drawings.
3.
Do not cut or weld to building structural members, unless specifically indicated.
4.
Provide all required equipment supports, including those not detailed on architectural and mechanical Drawings.
5.
Comply with Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
Verify that equipment will fit support layouts indicated. 1. Where substitute equipment is used, revise indicated supports to fit, at no additional cost to the Owner.
E.
Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations, floor penetrations, and wall openings with Work of other Sections.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 46
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.60
1.61
F.
Install rain hoods and metal counter flashings as indicated and as required to make all penetrations of mechanical work through walls and roofs, water and weather-tight. Furnish all clamps, waterproofing material and labor necessary.
G.
Install floor mounted equipment on 6-inch high concrete pad, 6inches larger on each side than base of unit, unless otherwise specified, indicated, or equipment manufacturer's recommendation calls for. Coordinate size and location of equipment pads with Work of other Sections.
H.
In Mechanical Rooms, Mechanical Areas, Fan Rooms, etc., coordinate locations of floor drains, floor sinks, etc. with locations of equipment and housekeeping pads. Locate drains to properly serve equipment and to result in orderly routing of drain piping, while minimizing tripping hazards, etc.
I.
In areas other than mechanical rooms, do not install piping, ductwork, or equipment in exposed manner unless indicated otherwise.
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OWNER OR OTHER DIVISION A.
Provide rough-in and final connections to all equipment requiring mechanical services.
B.
Install all fittings, valves, and other items furnished as integral part of equipment, but shipped loose.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
B.
1.62
Perform indicated tests to demonstrate workmanship, operation, and performance. 1.
Conduct tests in presence of inspectors of agencies having jurisdiction, if required.
2.
Furnish all lubricating materials required for test.
Repair or replace equipment and systems found inoperative or defective and re-test. 1.
If equipment or system fails re-test, replace it with products which conform with Contract Documents.
2.
Continue remedial measures and re-tests until satisfactory results are obtained.
TESTING A.
General: Provide labor and test equipment including test pumps, gages, instruments and other equipment required. Use test quality pressure gages, instruments and other equipment required. Use test quality pressure gages with range of approximately twice
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 47
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD test pressure. Use calibrated gages and instruments. with provisions of Section 15992. B.
Coordinate
Piping: 1.
General: Remove from systems, during testing, equipment which would be damaged by test pressure. Replace removed equipment after testing. Systems may be tested in sections as work progresses; however, any previously tested portion shall become a part of any later test of composite system. Correct leaks by remaking joints with new material; makeshift remedies will not be permitted. Test time accrues only while full test pressure is on system. Test before backfilling, concealing, insulating or making connections to potable water system.
2.
Test Schedule: Test each section of systems at one and one-half (1-1/2) times the maximum working pressure of that section, but at not less than scheduled test pressure. Obtain maximum working pressures from Architect if not indicated on Drawings. Unless indicated otherwise, scheduled tolerance is "no pressure loss", except that due to temperature change, in 24 hour period TEST SCHEDULE
System
Test Medium Test Pressure
Tolerance
Heating Water & Chilled Water Water 150 psig Refrigerant Nitrogen
C.
400 psig
Refrigerant Relief (Low Pressure)
Nitrogen
50 psig
Refrigerant Relief (High Pressure)
Nitrogen
400 psig
Valves: 1.
General Service Valves: Test bonnets for tightness. Test operate from closed-to-open-to-closed position while under test pressure.
2.
Automatic Valves: Test, including solenoid valves, water regulating valves, pressure reducing valves, pressure relief valves, safety valves and temperature and pressure relief valves for proper operation at settings indicated.
3.
Safety Valves: Test relief valves, safety relief valves, safety valves and temperature and pressure relief valves 3 times.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 48
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD D.
Piping Specialties: Test thermometers, pressure gages, flow measuring devices, and water meters for accurate indication; automatic water feeders, air vents, trap primers, vacuum breakers, and other specialties for proper performance.
E.
Hangers and Supports: With systems in normal operation, test hangers, supports and rods to insure they are plumb and supporting proper share of load. Additionally support systems and equipment that sway, crawl, or vibrate.
F.
Ductwork: 1.
Ductwork Design Pressure Classification: Section 15890, “Ductwork”.
2.
SMACNA 4-inch and 3-inch Ducts and Plenums: a.
Capping and testing in sections is permitted.
b.
Perform leak test in accordance with procedures contained in SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Measure total leakage with calibrated orifice plate. 1)
c.
3.
G.
As specified in
Test pressure shall equal duct design pressure of +4-inch or +3-inch as applicable. Total leakage shall not exceed 1% of design airflow capacity in cfm.
Under test pressure, no audible leaks shall be evident.
For ductwork and plenums other than those listed above: a.
Demonstrate leakage amount in air balance report. Compare air flow rate of fan to that of sum of air outlets.
b.
Maximum leakage 1% of system design air flow rate.
Ductwork Specialties: 1.
Verify fire dampers, fire/smoke dampers, and smoke dampers are 100% open, unless damper is indicated to be closed during normal operation.
2.
Test airflow measuring units for accurate indication.
H.
Water Chillers: Test proper operation of control functions including operating thermostats, low-limits, capacity control, and electrical interlock with auxiliary equipment.
I.
Buried Pipe and Equipment Wrapping and Coating: Test surfaces with standard 8,000 to 10,000 volt electrical holiday detector.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 49
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD J.
1.63
Other Materials and Equipment: 1.
Rotation:
Verify.
2.
Motor Amperage: Verify operating motor amperage does not exceed motor nameplate rating.
3.
Pump Shut-Off Discharge Head: Verify actual head corresponds to submittal data.
4.
Test as specified; as recommended by equipment manufacturer; and as otherwise necessary or directed to assure they are complete, operable, and ready for use.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Inspect all equipment and put in good working order.
B.
Clean all exposed and concealed items:
See Section 01740.
1.
Clean air surfaces of all coils, fans (including fan wheels and motors), air handler plenums and air filter frames.
2.
Clean floor drains, cleanouts, and plumbing fixtures.
3.
Clean specialties such as traps and strainers.
C.
Ductwork: Blow-out ducts with fans before connecting terminal units. Clean ducts before installing air outlets.
D.
Equipment and Materials: Remove foreign materials including dirt, grease, splashed paint, and plaster, etc. Restore damaged finishes to original condition.
E.
Piping: Flush clean interior of water piping. Upon completion of flushing, completely drain systems at low points; remove, clean, and replace strainer baskets and refill systems.
F.
Heating Water System: After specified flushing, draining, and refilling, boil out heating water system with one pound of trisodium phosphate for each 60 gallons of water in system. Allow system to reach design temperature and circulate water for 24 hours with all pumps running. Upon completion of boiling out, completely drain system at all low points; remove, clean, replace strainer baskets, refill system, and immediately add chemical treatment.
G.
Chilled Water System: After specified flushing, draining, and refilling, cleanse system with one pound of trisodium phosphate for each 60 gallons of water in system. Circulate water for 24 hours with all pumps running. Upon completion of process, completely drain system at all low points; remove, clean, replace strainer baskets, refill system, and immediately add chemical treatment.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 50
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD H.
1.64
1.65
SPECIAL TOOLS A.
Furnish to Owner not later than when Owner takes possession of equipment.
B.
Definition of Special Tools: Identified in or otherwise implied by, the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals for the furnished equipment, or which are otherwise required for the operation, with the manufacturer's recommended procedures for operation, adjustment and maintenance. Special tools do not include those required for major repairs normally done by factory trained or otherwise specialized service personnel, nor do they include those normally found in the possession of Owner's on site maintenance personnel.
MANUFACTURER'S START-UP ASSISTANCE A.
1.66
Adjusting: Adjust equipment and system components as indicated or as otherwise required to result in intended system operation. Thereafter, as a result of system operation, or as directed, make readjustments as necessary to refine performance and to effect complete system tune-up.
Where the services of a factory authorized service representative are specified for the start-up of certain pieces of equipment, arrange to have the manufacturer of such equipment perform startup and check-out service. Manufacturer shall provide a letter which shall be on the manufacturer's letterhead, shall list the equipment, shall certify that the equipment has been examined, that it has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions, started up, adjusted, and checked out in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and is operating properly. The letter shall be addressed to the Owner and shall be signed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer. Coordinate with provisions of Section 15992.
PUTTING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION - START UP A.
Prior to final acceptance, at time agreed to by Owner and Architect, put all systems into satisfactory operation.
B.
At first heating or cooling season following final acceptance, start up systems not started due to lack of seasonal design load or operation of the central system.
C.
Operate all systems in good working order for period of fourteen (14) working days.
D.
Perform services in accordance with manufacturer's written startup instructions. Test control and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 51
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD E.
1.67
1.68
1.
As a part of the maintenance and operating instructions, review data in operating and maintenance manual, including preventative maintenance schedule and procedures, and procedures for obtaining repair parts and technical assistance. Demonstrate all phases of operation including start-up and shut-down.
2.
Schedule minimum of 40 hours training with Owner, provide at least seven (7)-day notice to Architect/Engineer.
COORDINATION WITH COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES A.
Submit start-up checklist form and procedure for review and approval. Approval shall be given prior to initial equipment start-up.
B.
Upon completion of start-up procedure, submit report including: 1.
Start-up checklist.
2.
List of personnel performing start-up.
3.
Equipment identification.
4.
Date of start-up.
5.
Description of equipment start-up problems or successful operation.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES A.
1.69
Maintenance and Operation Training:
Refer to General and Special Conditions requirements of the manual.
EXISTING EQUIPMENTS A.
Contractor shall be responsible to remove and cart away from the project site all equipments planned to be demolished. Contractor shall give the Owner an amount (US$) equivalent to the market value of the equipments in their current condition. This $ amount shall be specifically indicated on the price rate of the bid documents. END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 05 00.10
PAGE 52
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
1.2
Related Sections: 1.
Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product and installation requirements for piping hangers and supports.
2.
Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product and installation requirements for vibration isolators used in piping systems.
3.
Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping: Product and installation requirements for piping used in hydronic heating and cooling systems.
4.
Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Product and installation requirements for piping used in refrigeration systems.
REFERENCES A.
B.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1.
ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
2.
ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
3.
ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
4.
ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
American Welding Society: 1.
1.3
Flexible pipe connectors.
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.
Provide structural work and equipment required for expansion and contraction of piping. Verify anchors, guides, and expansion joints provide and adequately protect system.
SECTION 23 05 16
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
1.4
1.5
Expansion Compensation Design Criteria: 1.
Installation Temperature: 50 degrees F.
2.
Hot Water Heating System Temperature: 210 degrees F.
3.
Safety Factor: 30 percent.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of piping systems, including flexible connectors, expansion joints, expansion compensators, loops, offsets and swing joints. Include shop drawing information for piping expansion compensation in shop drawings for piping system.
C.
Product Data: 1.
Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot (meter) and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid.
2.
Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maximum expansion compensation.
D.
Design Data: Indicate criteria and show calculations. Submit sizing methods sealed by a registered professional engineer.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G.
Welders’ Certificate: Include welders’ certification of compliance with ASME Section IX, AWS D1.1.
H.
Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Indicate results of inspection by manufacturer’s representative.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchors, and guides.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit adjustment instructions.
SECTION 23 05 16
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
C.
Design expansion compensating system under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of California.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B.
Accept expansion joints on site in factory packing with shipping bars and positioning devices intact. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and packaging in place until installation.
WARRANTY A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for leak free performance of packed expansion joints.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B.
Supply two 12 ounce (340 g) containers of packing lubricant and
SECTION 23 05 16
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
cartridge style grease gun. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A.
B.
C.
2.2
Manufacturers: 1.
Metraflex.
2.
Flexonics.
3.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Steel Piping: 1.
Inner Hose: Stainless Steel.
2.
Exterior Sleeve: Double braided stainless steel.
3.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig WSP and 450 degrees F.
4.
Joint: As specified for pipe joints.
5.
Size: Use pipe-sized units.
6.
Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line.
Copper Piping: 1.
Inner Hose: Bronze.
2.
Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.
3.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa) WSP and 450 degrees F.
4.
Joint: As specified for pipe joints.
5.
Size: Use pipe sized units.
6.
Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line.
EXPANSION JOINTS – BELLOWS TYPE, METAL A.
Pathway Bellows, Inc.
B.
Yuba Industries, Adsco Div.
C.
Flexonics Division, V.O.P.
D.
U.S. Flexible Metallic Tubing Co.
SECTION 23 05 16
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
E. 2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
EXPANSION JOINTS – BELLOWS TYPE, NON-METALLIC A.
Garlock, Inc.
B.
Mason Industries, Inc.
C.
Resist Flex.
GROOVED END EXPANSION JOINTS A.
Gustin-Bacon Division, Aeroquip Corp.
B.
Certain-Teed Products Corp.
C.
Victaulic Company of America.
EXPANSION JOINTS – PACKED TYPE A.
Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
B.
YUBA Industries, Adsco Division.
C.
Yarway Corp.
BALL JOINTS A.
2.7
2.8
Zellea Bros., Inc.
Barco, Aeroquip Corp.
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS A.
Flexonics Division, V.O.P.
B.
U.S. Flexible Metallic Tubing Co.
EXPANSION JOINTS – PACKLESS TYPE A.
Suitable for pressure and service.
B.
Steel piping to 2-1/2 in.:
C.
1.
Stainless steel bellows.
2.
Flanged or union ends.
3.
Internally guided.
4.
Anti-torque device.
5.
Similar to Flexonics Model H Compensator.
Steel piping 3 in. and larger:
SECTION 23 05 16
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
Copper piping up to 3 in.: 1.
2.
3. E.
2.9
a.
Two-ply bronze bellows.
b.
Anti-torque device limit stops.
c.
Internal guides.
d.
Solder joint end.
Suitable for minimum: a.
125 psi WSP and 400 deg. F.
b.
200 psi WOG and 250 deg F.
Similar to Flexonics Model HB Compensator.
Copper or Steel piping:
(2 in. and under)
1.
Low pressure compensators.
2.
Two-ply bronze bellows.
3.
Suitable for minimum:
4. F.
All bronze type with:
a.
50 psi pressure.
b.
250 deg. F.
c.
Maximum ½ in. expansion.
Similar to Flexonics Model L.
Non-Metallic Compensators, 2 in. and over: 1.
Spool type expansion, flexible connector.
2.
With tapped steel flanges, (Teflon) neoprene and nylon) body.
3.
Suitable for minimum 200 psi working pressure and 250 deg F.
4.
Similar to Garlock Garflex Style 8100.
BALL JOINTS A.
Connections: 1.
2 in. and smaller – threaded.
SECTION 23 05 16
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.
2.10
2-1/2 in. and larger – weld end or flanged.
B.
Body:
steel, 250 psi suitable to 525F service temperature.
C.
Capable of 360degree rotation and minimum of 15 degree angular flexing movement.
D.
Joints for normal underground service shall be malleable steel, with chromium plated ball end.
E.
Joints for highly corrosive under ground service shall be malleable steel socket end and stainless steel ball end.
F.
Similar to: 1.
Barco standard series, threaded.
2.
Barco Type N, welded.
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS A.
B.
Construction: 1.
Steel spider fastened to pipe.
2.
Steel sleeve secured to structure.
3.
Factory fabricated assembly.
Select guides and anchors to be capable of serving as seismic braces if required: 1.
See Section 23 05 48: Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
2.
Similar to Flexonics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install Work in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, ASME B31.9.
B.
Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. Refer to Section 23 05 48. Provide line size flexible connectors.
C.
Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise.
D.
Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure. Provide pipe guides to
SECTION 23 05 16
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
direct movement only along axis of pipe. Erect piping so strain and weight is not on cast connections or apparatus.
3.2
E.
Provide support and anchors for controlling expansion and contraction of piping. Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints as indicated on Drawings. Refer to Section 23 05 29 for pipe hanger installation requirements.
F.
Provide grooved piping systems with minimum one joint per inch pipe diameter instead of flexible connector supported by vibration isolation. Grooved piping systems need not be anchored.
G.
Provide expansion loops.
PROVISIONS FOR EXPANSION A.
Install piping to permit free expansion and contraction without damaging piping or construction.
B.
Provide offsets, expansion loops, anchors, guides and supports to permit expansion, within stress limits of ANSI Code for Pressure Piping for temperature ranges specified.
C.
Where pipe loops or changes in direction of piping cannot be employed to absorb expansion and contraction, provide mechanical expansion joints.
D.
Flexible pipe connections and expansion joints suitable to connect the adjoining piping.
E.
Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure.
F.
Provide pipe guides so that movement takes place along axis of pipe only.
G.
Use swing or swivel joints for connections as specified in other Sections for piping.
H.
Branch connections to terminal heat transfer units shall have strain on when cold, off when hot.
I.
Make riser offsets in manner to avoid pocket forming due to expansion.
J.
Loops, bends, offsets: 1.
Provide loops, bends and offsets as indicated on plans.
2.
If additional required, because of job required relocation of piping and equipment, design as follows: a.
Use spring type loop, U-bend, offset U-bend, L-bend, or Z-bend.
SECTION 23 05 16
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.
3.3
3.4
b.
Corner radii five to six times pipe diameters.
c.
Join bends only by welding.
d.
Submit design details for approval before fabrication.
Loops with ball type joints may be used in lieu of rigid elbows. a.
Submit design details for approval.
b.
Base expansion calculations on temperatures listed under performance requirements.
EXPANSION JOINTS A.
Follow manufacturer’s published installation directions.
B.
Provide anchors and alignment guides as indicated and as specified herein.
C.
Align expansion joints carefully with alignment guides and supports. Follow joint manufacturer’s published instructions.
D.
Exercise care in cutting pipe for final connection to expansion joint. Set slip-sleeve in proper position of traverse for cold condition.
E.
Where expansion joints are in concealed locations, provide access doors of size to permit inspection, servicing and replacement, as approved.
ANCHORS AND GUIDES A.
B.
Provide anchors for controlling direction and extent of pipe expansion as required or as shown. 1.
Details of anchor design, manner of fastening to pipe and to building structural members or to independent concrete block are indicated on drawings.
2.
Submit details of anchoring methods differing from those on drawings for approval before installation.
Alignment Guides: 1.
Provide pipe alignment guides to guide expanding pipe to move freely from anchor points to expansion joints, loops or bends.
2.
Locate where indicated on drawings, or elsewhere as required, properly secured to maintain alignment with centerline of pipe and preclude binding of spider in guide
SECTION 23 05 16
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
housing. 3.5
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A.
Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation.
B.
Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement.
C.
Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end.
D.
Factory Assembled Seismic Joints. 1.
E.
3.6
Two flexible metal hoses at right angles to each other: a.
Inner corrugated hose:
stainless steel or bronze.
b.
Outer stainless steel or bronze braid.
c.
Suitable for service temperature and pressure.
d.
End connections to suit piping system.
2.
Movement permitted in three planes.
3.
Minimum movement required.
4.
Similar to Flexonics.
Division 26 responsibilities for Commissioning, including requirements for demonstration and training.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers’ field services.
B.
Furnish inspection services by flexible pipe manufacturer's representative for final installation and certify installation is in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and connectors are performing satisfactorily. -- End of Section --
SECTION 23 05 16
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
Section Includes: 1.
Pipe hangers and supports.
2.
Hanger rods.
3.
Inserts.
4.
Flashing.
5.
Equipment curbs.
6.
Sleeves.
7.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
8.
Formed steel channel.
9.
Firestopping relating to HVAC work.
10.
Firestopping accessories.
Related Sections: 1. Section 03 11 00 - Concrete Forming: Execution requirements for placement of insert sleeves in concrete forms specified by this section. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section. 3. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this section. 4. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Protection: Product requirements for sealant materials for placement by this section. 5. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 6. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product and execution requirements for vibration isolators.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.2
7.
Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section.
8.
Refer to all Structural drawings.
REFERENCES A.
B.
C.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1.
ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
2.
ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
3.
ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
ASTM International: 1.
ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2.
ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
3.
ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.
4.
ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
5.
ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
American Welding Society: 1.
D.
FM Global: 1.
E.
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1.
MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
2.
MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
3.
MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD F.
G.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1.
UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2.
UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3.
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
4.
UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
5.
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263, UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating. 1.
1.5
1.6
WH - Certification Listings.
Ratings may be 3-hours for firestopping in throughpenetrations of 4-hour fire rated assemblies unless otherwise required by applicable codes.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Firestopping: Conform to applicable codes FM, UL, and WH for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
B.
Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes, and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers.
C.
Product Data: 1.
Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
D.
Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.
E.
Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. Submit sizing methods, calculations sealed by a registered professional engineer.
F.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1.
Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.
2.
Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
G.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
H.
Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.
I.
Provide complete Duct Support Submittal including: 1.
Complete rectangular duct construction details including duct gauges, stiffening methods, field joints, all proposed rectangular fittings, seismic restraints, and accessories.
2.
Complete round spiral duct construction details including duct gauges, field joints, all proposed round duct fittings, seismic restraints, and accessories.
3.
Complete rectangular and round duct appurtenances including: a.
Double wall turning vanes.
b.
Manual volume dampers – lined & wrapped ductwork.
c.
Manual volume dampers above non-accessible ceilings.
d.
Housings and plenums Field Fabrication Drawings.
e.
Duct through roof details.
f.
Combination Fire / Smoke damper assemblies.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
4.
J.
1.7
g.
Sheet metal lined register boxes.
h.
Flexible ductwork.
i.
Instrument test ports.
j.
Manufacturer model numbers and technical cut sheet shall be provided for all purchased products for items listed above.
Submit appropriate SMACNA Plate or schedule where duct construction is based on SMACNA Standards.
Provide complete Duct and Pipe Concrete Insert, Sleeves, and Flashing Submittal including: 1.
Concrete insert manufacturer, proposed insert model(s), size, embedment, and installation details.
2.
Duct and pipe sleeve manufacturer, sleeve gauge(s), Fire Resistive UL Listing Number(s), and installation details.
3.
Duct and pipe flashing manufacturer, flashing gauge(s), sealing methods, and installation details.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. 1.
Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.
2.
Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1hour. a.
B.
C.
Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required.
Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion. 1.
Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories.
2.
Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.
Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed.
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
D.
Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly.
E.
Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
F.
Perform Work in accordance with applicable authority AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure.
G.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience approved by manufacturer.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
Section 01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination.
B.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.
C.
Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original packaging.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B.
Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F.
C.
Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD D. 1.12
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.
1.13
Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
WARRANTY A.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports.
B.
Section 01 78 36 - Warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
B.
Manufacturers: 1.
Carpenter & Paterson Inc.
2.
B-Line System Inc.
3.
Flex-Weld, Inc.
4.
Glope Pipe Hanger Products Inc.
5.
Michigan Hanger Co.
6.
Superior Valve Co.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Hydronic Piping: 1.
Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89.
2.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
3.
Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
5.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.
6.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
C.
7.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
8.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks.
9.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
10.
Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.
11.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
12.
Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
13.
Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
14.
Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
15.
Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon steel ring.
Refrigerant Piping: 1.
Conform to ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89.
2.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
3.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
5.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook.
6.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
7.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8.
Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 9. 2.2
Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated carbon-steel ring.
PIPE AND DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
Pipe Support: 1.
All piping shall be supported in such a manner that it is securely attached to the structure of the building.
2.
Attachment shall be capable of supporting the tributary weight of the pipe and contents in any direction.
3.
The maximum support spacing for vertical and horizontal pipes shall be as required by the California Plumbing Code, (UPC) Chapter 3, but not less than that indicated in the table below for horizontal piping. Maximum Spacing for Horizontal Pipes Hanger Rod Size Copper Steel Cast Iron Nat. Gas
Pipe Size 1/2” 3/4” 1” 1-1/4” 1-1/2” 2” 2-1/2” 3” 4” 6” 8” B.
3/8” 3/8” 3/8” 3/8” 3/8” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 5/8” 5/8”
6’ 6’ 6’ 6’ 6’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’
6’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’
8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’
6’ 6’ 6’ 6’ 6’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’
Duct Supports: 1.
All ductwork shall be supported in such a manner that it is securely attached to the structure of the building.
2.
The attachment shall be capable of supporting the tributary weight of the ductwork in any direction.
3.
The maximum support spacing and hanger strap or angle for vertical and horizontal ducts shall be as defined by the California Mechanical Code (CMC) TABLE 6-E – Duct Supports as indicated in the Tables below: TABLE 6-E - DUCT SUPPORTS Part I - VERTICAL DUCTS
MAXIMUM SIDE OF RECTANGULAR DUCT 24”
METAL STRAP OR ANGLE BRACKET
1” x 1/8” (strap)
MAXIMUM DIAMETER OF ROUND DUCTS x 25.4 for mm 1 10”
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 9
STRAPS
0.047”
(No.
18
gage)
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
36”
40”
galvanized steel 2” wide1 0.058” (No. 16 gage) galvanized steel 2” wide1 1/8” steel x 1-1/2” 1
60”
1/8” steel x 2”
Over 60”
3/16” steel x 2”
20”
1” x 1” x 1/8” angle 1
48”
1-1/8” x 1-1/8” x 1/8” angle 1 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 1/8” angle 1 2” x 2” x 1/8” angle
60” Over 60”
1
1
1
PART II - HORIZONTAL DUCTS 18”
1” x 18 gage
2
30”
1” x 18 gage
2
48”
1” x 1/8”
2
20”
60”
1” x 1/8”
2
40”
10”
60” 80
1” x 1/8”
2
Over 60”
Same gage as galvanized steel duct, 1” wide or (No. 18 gage galvanized steel wire) on 10’ center. Same gage as galvanized steel duct, 1” wide or No.8 gage galvanized steel wire) tied to 1” galvanized steel band around duct on 10” centers. Same gage as galvanized steel duct, 1-1/2” wide on 6’ centers. Same gage as galvanized steel duct, 1-1/2” wide on 4” centers.
Part III - HORIZONTAL DUCTS - TRAPEZE TYPE SUPPORTS MAXIMUM DIAMETER OF ROUND DUCT OR SIDE OF RECTANGULAR DUCT 36”
HANGER
HORIZONTAL SUPPORT ANGLE3
1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 1/4” round rod or 1” x 1” x 1/8” angle 1/8” 48” 2” x 2” x 1/8” 1/4” round rod or 1” x 1” x 1/8” angle 60” 2” x 2” x 1/8” 5/16” round rod or 1” x 1” x 1/8” angle 84” 2” x 2” x 1/8” 3/8” round rod or 1” x 1” x 1/8” angle 1 Spaced vertically not more than 6 feet (3658 mm) on centers. 2 Spaced horizontally not more than 8 feet (3048 mm) on centers. 3 Spaced not more than 8 feet (2438 mm) on centers.
C.
Piping Arrangement: 1.
Arrange all hangers and supports to prevent the transmission of vibration from pipe and duct systems to the building structure.
2.
Arrange all hangers and supports to allow for expansion and/or contraction of hangers and supports for all hot
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD utilities.
D.
3.
All hangers and supports shall be sized for applications where insulation occurs to allow for the insulation product installation to carry straight through without interruptions in the insulation system integrity.
4.
All non-insulated copper or brass pipe or tubing shall be isolated from the ferrous hangers or supports with “Lemco – Trisolators” or “Potter Roemer RP Isolators”.
5.
All pipe and duct hangers and supports that are exposed to weather shall be constructed of galvanized steel.
Pipe Hanger Schedule: 1.
All piping systems hangers shall be as specified in the “Pipe Hanger Schedule” below: PIPE HANGER SCHEDULE Pipe Utility Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Pipe Cast Iron Pipe Size Chilled Water ½” thru B-Line Fig. B-Line Fig. NA 8” B3108 B3108 Extended Extended Clevis Hanger Clevis Hanger Heating Hot ½” thru B-Line Fig. B-Line Fig. NA Water 8” B3108 B3108 Adjustable Adjustable Steel Yoke Steel Yoke Pipe Roll Pipe Roll E.
Trapeze Pipe Hanger Support Systems: 1.
2.
Piping shall be installed on trapeze type support systems where pipe runs can be combined. Refer to Drawings for specific trapeze support details including: a.
Maximum Dead Load on the trapeze support.
b.
Maximum trapeze allowable span.
c.
Hanger rod minimum size requirements.
d.
Maximum installed length for hanger rods.
e.
Vertical and diagonal bracing requirements.
f.
Attach bolts and connection details.
All components of the trapeze pipe support system shall be as manufactured by “B-Line Systems, Inc.” utilizing the following Figure numbers: a.
Figure B2417 Strut Mounted Pipe Guide.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
F.
G.
H.
b.
Figure B3147A & B3147B Pipe Anchor.
c.
Figure B32 12 Gauge Double Channels – Welded.
d.
Figure N225 Spring Channel Nuts.
Wall Pipe Hanger Support Systems: 1.
Piping shall be installed on wall type support systems where pipe runs cannot be supported overhead.
2.
All components of the wall pipe support system shall be as manufactured by “B-Line Systems, Inc.” utilizing the following Figure numbers: a.
Figure B3064 Adjustable Stud Bracket.
b.
Figure B3065 Angle Iron Bracket.
c.
Figure B3066 Medium Duty Angle Bracket – for loads up to 1500#.
d.
Figure B3067 Heavy Duty Angle Bracket – for loads up to 3000#.
e.
Figure B3188 Standard U-Bolt.
Floor Pipe Support Systems: 1.
Piping shall be supported on floor pipe supports for all vertical risers in Equipment Rooms.
2.
All components of the floor pipe support system shall be as manufactured by “B-Line Systems, Inc.” utilizing the following Figure numbers: a.
Figure B3088 Base Stand.
b.
Figure B30088T Threaded Base Stand.
c.
Figure B3089 Pipe Support Adjuster.
d.
Figure B3090 Pipe Support with U-Bolt.
e.
Figure B3092 Adjustable Pipe Saddle Support with Yoke.
Vertical Pipe Support or Guide Systems: 1.
Piping installed in shafts or thru floor shall be supported in a manner that is securely attached to the structure of the building.
2.
All pipe riser(s) shall be supported at the base and at the top of the run with pipe supports designed to support one-
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD half of the installed pipe weight including the pipe contents.
2.3
3.
Pipe guides or floor supports shall be installed at each penetration though the building structure.
4.
All components of the vertical pipe support or guide system shall be as manufactured by “B-Line Systems, Inc.” utilizing the following Figure numbers: a.
Figure B3373 Standard Riser Clamp – Steel Pipe.
b.
Figure B3373CTC Riser Clamp – Copper Pipe.
c.
Figure B3373C Riser Clamp – Plastic Coated – Refrigerant Pipe.
d.
Figure B3281 thru B3287 Pipe Alignment Guide.
INSERTS A.
B.
Cast-In-Place Concrete Inserts: 1.
All Cast-In-Place concrete inserts shall be constructed of steel or Malleable Iron.
2.
All Cast-In-Place concrete inserts shall be as manufactured by “B-Line Systems, Inc.” utilizing the following Figure Numbers: a.
Figure BD 40 Pipe Sleeve Fastener.
b.
Figure B2500 Light Duty Spot Insert.
c.
Figure N2500 Steel Nut Insert.
d.
Figure B3014 Malleable Iron Insert.
e.
Figure B3014N Malleable Iron Insert Nut.
f.
Figure B2505 thru B2508 Spot Insert.
Expansion and Drop-In Anchors: 1.
All Expansion and Drop-In concrete inserts shall be constructed of steel and shall carry ICBO approval numbers.
2.
All Expansion and Drop-In concrete inserts shall be as manufactured by “Hilti, Inc.” utilizing the following products: a.
Hilti – HSL Anchor.
b.
Hilti – Kwik Bolt II Anchor.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.4
2.5
2.9
Hilti – HDI-L Anchor.
e.
Hilti – Sleeve Anchor.
Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to pipe or duct system expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
B.
Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
C.
Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
FINISH Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
ACCESSORIES Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded.
INSERTS A.
2.8
d.
A.
A.
2.7
Hilti – HDI Anchor.
FABRICATION
A.
2.6
c.
Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
FLASHING A.
Metal Flashing: 24 gage thick galvanized steel.
B.
Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.
C.
Lead Flashing: 1.
Waterproofing: 5 lb./sq. ft sheet lead.
2.
Soundproofing: 1 lb./sq. ft sheet lead.
D.
Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
E.
Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
EQUIPMENT CURBS A.
Fabrication: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base,
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD mitered 3 inch cant, variable step to match root insulation, 11/2 inch thick insulation, factory installed wood nailer. Fabricate curb as indicated on the drawing. 2.10
2.11
SLEEVES A.
Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
B.
Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
C.
Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
D.
Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.
E.
Sealant: Acrylic; refer to Section 07 92 00.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A.
B.
2.12
1.
Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc.
2.
NMP Corporation.
3.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A.
B.
2.13
Manufacturers:
Manufacturers: 1.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.
2.
B-Line Systems
3.
Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division
4.
Unistrut Corp.
5.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.
FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A.
B.
C. 2.14
Manufacturers: 1.
Dow Corning Corp.
2.
Fire Trak Corp.
3.
Hilti Corp.
4.
International Protective Coating Corp.
5.
3M fire Protection Products
6.
Specified Technology, Inc.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1.
Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single or multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant.
2.
Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single or Multiple component foam compound.
3.
Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers.
4.
Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping.
5.
Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.
6.
Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain.
7.
Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.
Color: Dark gray or Black.
FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A.
Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.
B.
Dam Material: Permanent:
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
Mineral fiberboard.
2.
Mineral fiber matting.
3.
Sheet metal.
4.
Plywood or particle board.
5.
Alumina silicate fire board.
C.
Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.
D.
General:
E.
1.
Furnish UL listed products.
2.
Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.
Non-Rated Surfaces: 1.
Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed.
2.
For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
C.
Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
PREPARATION A.
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.
B.
Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C.
Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3
3.4
D.
Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powderactuated anchors.
E.
Do not drill or cut structural members.
INSTALLATION - INSERTS A.
Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.
B.
Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
C.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger.
D.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
E.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above flush with top of slab.
INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
Install in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, ASME 31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, MSS SP 89.
B.
Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
C.
Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
D.
Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
E.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
F.
Support vertical piping at every floor.
G.
Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers.
H.
Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
I.
Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping.
J.
Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
K.
Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
L.
Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 18
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD equipment for installation of insulation. 3.5
3.6
3.7
INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A.
Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 03 30 00.
B.
Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C.
Construct supports of steel members, formed steel channel, steel pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
D.
Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. Refer to Section 22 05 48.
INSTALLATION - FLASHING A.
Provide flexible flashing and metal Counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B.
Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms for sound control.
C.
Provide curbs for roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flash and counter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach Counterflashing to equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.
D.
Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A.
Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.
B.
Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
C.
Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
D.
Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
E.
Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
F.
Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 19
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.8
INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING A.
Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, and other items, requiring firestopping.
B.
Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
C.
Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating, to uniform density and texture.
D.
Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size.
E.
Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
F.
Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.
G.
Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.
H.
Fire Rated Surface: 1.
2.
I.
Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows: a.
Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element.
b.
Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element.
c.
Pack void with backing material.
d.
Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated.
Where cable tray, bus, cable bus, conduit, wireway, trough, and penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Non-Rated Surfaces: 1.
Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition floor, ceiling, and roof opening as follows: a.
Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element.
b.
Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 20
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD sleeve and building element. c.
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer.
2.
Install escutcheons, floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling.
3.
Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing device to size of piping and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4.
Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at telecommunication rooms and data rooms. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
CLEANING A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B.
Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.
B.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
SCHEDULES A.
Copper and Steel Pipe Hanger Spacing: COPPER STEEL PIPE TUBING PIPE SIZE MAXIMUM MAXIMUM Inches HANGER HANGER SPACING
COPPER TUBING
STEEL PIPE
HANGER ROD
DIAMETER
SPACING
DIAMETER
Feet
Inches
7
3/8
HANGER ROD Inches
Feet 1/2
5
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 21
3/8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
3/4
5
7
3/8
3/8
1
6
7
3/8
3/8
1-1/4
7
7
3/8
3/8
1-1/2
8
9
3/8
3/8
2
8
10
3/8
3/8
2-1/2 (Note 2)
9
11
1/2
1/2
3
10
12
1/2
1/2
4
12
14
1/2
5/8
5
13
16
1/2
5/8
6
14
17
5/8
3/4
8
16
19
3/4
3/4
10
18
22
3/4
7/8
12
19
23
3/4
7/8
14
22
25
7/8
1
16
23
27
7/8
1
18
25
28
1
1
20
27
30
1
1-1/4
24
28
32
1-1/4
1-1/4
Plastic and Ductile Iron Pipe Hanger Spacing: MAXIMUM PIPE MATERIAL
HANGER SPACING
HANGER ROD DIAMETER
Feet
Inches
ABS (All sizes)
4
3/8
FRP (All Sizes)
4
3/8
4
3/8
Ductile Iron (Note 2) PVC (All Sizes) C.
Note 1: Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for grooved end piping systems.
D.
Note 2: 20 feet maximum spacing, minimum of one hanger for each pipe section close to joint behind bell. Provide hanger at each change of direction and each branch connection. For pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller, subjected to loadings other than weight of pipe and contents, limit span to maximum spacing for water service steel pipe.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 22
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A. Section Includes:
B.
1.
Nameplates.
2.
Tags.
3.
Stencils.
4.
Pipe markers.
5.
Ceiling tacks.
6.
Labels.
7. Lockout devices. Related Sections: 1.
1.2
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section.
REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1.
ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Samples: Submit two tags, labels, and pipe markers size used on project. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers.
SECTION 23 05 53
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.7
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish two containers of spray-on adhesive. PRODUCTS
1.10
NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers:
B.
1.11
TAGS A.
1.
Craftmark Identification Systems.
2.
Safety Sign Co.
3.
Seton Identification Products.
4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color.
Plastic Tags: 1.
Manufacturers: a.
Seton.
b.
Brady.
c.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.
B.
Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 11/2 inches diameter or square. Metal Tags:
SECTION 23 05 53
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.
Manufacturers: a.
Seton.
b.
Brady.
c.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2. C.
Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter or square with finished edges. Information Tags: 1.
Manufacturers: a.
Seton.
b.
Brady.
c.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.
D.
1.12
STENCILS A. Manufacturers:
B.
C.
1.13
Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame with clear plastic shield. Install at approved location.
1.
Seton.
2.
Brady.
3. Substitutions: Not permitted. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1.
Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2 inch high letters.
2.
2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-inch high letters.
3.
Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high letters.
4. Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00, semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to ASME A13.1.
PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers:
SECTION 23 05 53
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.
Manufacturers: a.
Seton.
b.
Brady.
c.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.
C.
Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: 1.
Manufacturers: a.
Seton.
b.
Brady.
c.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2. D.
Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: 1.
2.
1.14
Manufacturers: a.
Seton.
b.
Brady.
c.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
CEILING TACKS A. Manufacturers:
B. C.
1.
Seton.
2.
Brady.
3. Substitutions: Not permitted. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head. Color code as follows: 1.
HVAC equipment: Yellow.
2.
Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red.
3.
Plumbing valves: Green.
SECTION 23 05 53
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
4. 1.15
Heating/cooling valves: Blue.
LABELS A. Manufacturers:
B.
1.
Seton.
2.
Brady.
3. Substitutions: Not permitted. Description: Aluminum, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed identification. EXECUTION
1.16
PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.
1.17
INSTALLATION A. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00. B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. G. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags. H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. J. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags. K. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. L. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. M. Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
SECTION 23 05 53
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
N.
Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. -- End of Section --
SECTION 23 05 53
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Testing adjusting, and balancing of air systems.
2.
Testing adjusting, and balancing of hydronic refrigerating systems.
3.
Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
4.
Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.
5.
Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Requirements for coordination between DDC system and testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
2.
Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of operation for HVAC equipment.
3.
Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC.
REFERENCES A.
Associated Air Balance Council: 1.
B.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1.
C.
ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, AirConditioning and Refrigeration Systems.
Natural Environmental Balancing Bureau: 1.
1.3
AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems.
NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.4
A.
Extent of testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) work required by this Section is indicated on Drawings and Schedules, and by requirements of this Section; and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems, hydronic and steam distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus of mechanical work. The Work consists of setting speed and volume (flow) adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending modifications to work as required by Contract Documents. TAB Contractor to be contracted with General Contractor.
B.
Component types of testing, adjusting, and balancing specified in this Section includes the following as applied to mechanical equipment: 1.
Fans and Air Conditioning Units.
2.
Exhaust Fans
3.
Air Distribution Systems.
4.
Hot Water Boilers.
5.
Pumps.
6.
Piping Systems, Heating Water, Domestic Hot Water.
7.
Terminal Units.
8.
Air Conditioning Units, Split Systems and All Other Mechanical and Plumbing Equipments.
C.
Refer to Division-26 Sections for installation and start-up of equipment to be tested, adjusted, and balanced.
D.
Refer to Division-26 Sections for pressure testing of piping and/or ductwork systems; not Work of this Section.
E.
Refer to Division-16 Sections for electrical hook-up and wiring of equipment to be tested, adjusted, and balanced; not Work of this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Tester's qualifications: Member of AABC or NEBB with at least 5-years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to those required for this Project, who is not Installer of system to be tested, and is otherwise independent of the Project.
B.
Codes and Standards: 1.
Standards Compliance:
Comply with latest edition of "AABC
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.
1.5
Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments, and testing, adjusting, and balancing, except as otherwise indicated.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 National Standards for Total System Balance forms.
D.
Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
E.
Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty and Copy of NEBB Certificate of Conformance Certification.
F.
Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.
G.
Furnish reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with table of contents page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
H.
Within 60 calendar days after commencement of Division-26 Work, submit the following for approval: 1.
Name of testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) company.
2.
Certificate of AABC or NEBB membership.
3.
Copy of applicable AABC or NEBB standards.
4.
Proof of satisfactory balancing Work with list of at least three (3) projects of comparable type and size, including following information: a.
Project name and location.
b.
Gross floor area.
c.
Number of terminal units.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
d.
Name of the engineering firm, name of the project engineer and telephone number.
e.
Name of the Owner, name of the chief operating engineer and telephone number.
5.
Sample blank forms to be used for TAB data recording and reports.
6.
List of TAB instruments and data sheets.
7.
Biographical data on engineer who is to directly supervise TAB work of this Project.
I.
Within 30 calendar days after Architect's approval of TAB company, TAB company shall review Contract Documents. Advise Architect if any additional balancing devices (such as dampers, balancing valves, "Pete's Plugs" Etc.) are required by TAB company to properly perform specified and required TAB functions.
J.
At least fifteen days prior to Contractor's request for final inspection, submit three copies of final reports, on applicable reporting forms per specs section 15010, 1.14. 1.
Form of Final Reports: a.
b.
Each individual final reporting form must bear: 1)
Signature of person who recorded data.
2)
Signature of organization.
Format per AABC.
TAB
supervisor
of
reporting
Bound 8-1/2" x 11".
2.
Schedule testing and balancing of parts of systems which is delayed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other conditions beyond control of Contractor, as early as proper conditions will allow, after consultation with the Owner.
3.
Submit reports of delayed testing promptly after execution of those services.
K.
Maintenance data: Include in maintenance manuals, copies of certified test reports, identification of instruments, and data on Engineer; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
L.
Report Content: 1.
Air Balance: a.
Fans: 1)
Number, service, model, and size.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
b.
2)
Delivery in CFM.
3)
Static pressure:
4)
Voltage:
5)
Motor Amperage:
6)
Motor Sheave Diameter:
7)
Fan sheave diameter.
8)
Motor RPM.
9)
Fan RPM.
Suction, discharge, and total.
Rated and actual. Rated and actual. Adjustable or solid.
Fans Graphic Plot: For each fan, on its actual fan curve, plot intersections of following lines: 1)
CFM from traverse (or from stations where installed).
airflow
measuring
2)
Static pressure (or total pressure for fans so rated).
3)
Brake horsepower from amperes.
4)
RPM
5)
Position of fans variable adjustment (Blade pitch, inlet vanes, and related information).
c.
Filter banks, and outside air, return air, and exhaust air CFM's.
d.
Supply, exhaust, and return air outlets; arrange following in columns: 1)
Outlet location by room number or other suitable means.
2)
Include key location.
3)
Supply outlet size.
4)
Supply outlet deflection setting.
5)
Supply outlet design CFM.
6)
Supply outlet actual CFM.
7)
Return or exhaust outlet size.
SECTION 26 05 93
plans
if
PAGE 5
necessary
to
identify
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
e.
f.
g.
h.
8)
Return or exhaust outlet design CFM.
9)
Return or exhaust outlet actual CFM.
10)
Difference CFM's.
between
supply
and
return/exhaust
Airflow Measuring Stations: 1)
CFM
2)
static pressure.
CV and VAV Terminal Units: 1)
Design maximum CFM
2)
Actual maximum CFM.
3)
Design minimum CFM
4)
Actual minimum CFM.
5)
CV and VAV Calculations.
Box
Gain
Factors
Report
and
Duct Air Quantities: Mains, Branches, Outside Air and Exhausts (Maximum and Minimum): 1)
Duct sizes.
2)
Number of pressure readings.
3)
Sum of velocity measurements.
4)
Average velocity.
5)
Duct recorded airflow rate.
6)
Duct design air flow rates.
Building Pressurization Data: 1)
Outside air temperatures and humidities.
2)
Outside wind velocity.
3)
Building systems.
4)
Supply air, return air and exhaust airflow rates for varying damper positions.
5)
Locations of pressure measuring points, inside
pressures
SECTION 26 05 93
plotted
PAGE 6
with
respect
to
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
and outside building. i.
2.
Flow Measuring Station: 1)
Identification/station.
2)
Location.
3)
Size.
4)
Manufacturer.
5)
Model.
6)
Design flow rate.
7)
Design pressure drop.
8)
Actual/final pressure drop.
9)
Actual/final flow rate.
10)
Station calibrated setting.
Water Balance: a.
b.
c.
Each Flow Measuring Device and Balancing Device: 1)
Device type, model and size.
2)
Pressure differential.
3)
GPM.
Each Heat Transfer Device: (Coil, heat exchanger, and associated items): 1)
Number, service, model and size.
2)
GPM.
3)
Entering water temperature.
4)
Leaving water temperature.
5)
Pressures:
Inlet and outlet.
Heating Equipment Design Data: 1)
Heat transfer rate.
2)
Flow rates and pressure drops.
3)
Entering and leaving water temperature.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
d.
e.
f.
3.
Heating Equipment Recorded Data: 1)
Element type and designation).
identification
2)
Entering and leaving temperatures.
3)
Flow rates and pressure drops.
(location
and
Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Design Data: 1)
Heat transfer rate.
2)
Water pressure drop across coil.
3)
Air static pressure drop.
4)
Entering and leaving water temperatures.
5)
Entering and temperatures.
leaving
air
dry
and
wet
bulb
Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Recorded Data: 1)
Element type and identification.
2)
Entering and temperatures.
3)
Entering and leaving water temperatures.
4)
Water pressure drop across coil.
5)
Water pressure drop across bypass valve.
6)
Air static pressure drop.
7)
Air and water flow rates.
8)
Adjusted temperature rise or drop.
leaving
air
dry
and
wet
bulb
Sound Level Data: a.
Diagram or description of relationship of sound source to measuring instrument.
b.
Overall decibels (A) level.
c.
Reading at each octave band frequency from 31.5 hertz to 16 kilohertz.
d.
Noise Criteria (NC) curves plotted and compares to those recommended by ASHRAE or AABC publications.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
e.
4.
1)
Air inlets and outlets.
2)
CV and VAV terminal units.
3)
Boilers.
4)
VFD’s.
5)
Fans.
6)
AC units.
Vibration Test: a.
b.
5.
Sound Level Recorded Data:
Location of Points: 1)
Fan bearing, drive end.
2)
Fan bearing, opposite end.
3)
Motor bearing, center (if applicable).
4)
Motor bearing, drive end.
5)
Motor bearing, opposite end.
6)
Casing (bottom or top).
7)
Casing (side).
Test Readings: 1)
Horizontal, velocity and displacement.
2)
Vertical, velocity and displacement.
3)
Axial, velocity and displacement.
c.
Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration.
d.
Unusual conditions at time of test.
e.
Vibration source (if non-complying).
The TAB contractor shall compare the sum of the CV and VAV box diffuser readings with the flow indicated by the box’s controller prior to calibrating the box’s controller. If the two readings agree within +/- 5%, the factory calibration factors shall not be changed. If the readings are not within +/- 5%, a documented trouble shooting procedure consisting of checking and resolving the
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.6
a.
Box size is per the approved submittal,
b.
Manufacturer’s gain/flow factor has been correctly entered into the controller,
c.
Low pressure duct/connections are tight,
d.
Velocity pressure connections at the box inlet and controller are tight and undamaged,
e.
Static pressure at the box’s inlet exceeds the minimum required, and
f.
Box flow measuring device is undamaged.
6.
This procedure and results for carrying out steps a-f above are to be retained by the Mechanical Contractor for delivery to the owner/design consultant on request.
7.
TAB contractor shall compile an Excel spreadsheet for all terminal boxes, listing each box by its unique identification number, the inlet flow area established by the box manufacturer, the manufacturer’s gain factor for the box, final TAB calibrated gain factor for the box if field calibrated, and the ratio of the calibrated gain factor to the manufacturer’s gain factor.
8.
Require the TAB contractor to measure AHU supply and return flow at the dirty differential pressure drop across the pre-filter and final filter.
9.
TAB shall show in their report all the individual velocity measurements from duct or AHU traverses in grid format.
GENERAL A.
The Test and Balance Agency shall be provided with: 1.
2.
Within 30 days after selection a.
Construction Drawings
b.
Equipment Specifications
c.
Written Contract
d.
Equipment Submittals
As issued or received: a.
Change Orders
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.7
1.9
Equipment Manufacturer's Submittal Data
c.
Mechanical/Air Conditioning Contractor's Shop Drawings
d.
Temperature Control Drawings
e.
Reasonable Time
f.
Completely Operable System
3.
Before testing or balancing is started, the Contractor shall adjust belts and sheaves, align all parts, oil and grease bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, clean exterior surfaces of coil tubes and fins, flush interior of coil tubes until clean and check mixing damper operation to insure free operation and activation by the correct thermostat.
4.
The contractor shall be responsible for certifying in writing that the system, as scheduled for balancing, is operational and complete. Completeness shall include not only the physical installation, but the Contractor's certification that the prime movers, fans, pumps, refrigeration machines, boilers, are installed in good working order, and that full load performance has been preliminarily tested under the certification of the Contractor. Before any testing and balancing is started, a complete report shall be sent to the Test and Balance Agency.
5.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making all modifications to rectify discrepancies reported by the Balancing Agency as indicating non-compliance with the contract documents.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.
1.8
b.
Submit record documents under provisions of Special Conditions section.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.
Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before Beneficial Occupancy of Project.
B.
Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of system with Fire Authority.
C.
This project will be completed in phases. and schedule for work to be performed.
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 11
Provide a phasing plan
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
A. 1.10
A conference 2 weeks prior to commencing work of this Section.
REPORT FORMS A.
Within 60 calendar days after commencement of Division-15 Work, submit the following for approval: 1.
Name of testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) company.
2.
Certificate of AABC or NEBB membership.
3.
Copy of applicable AABC or NEBB standards.
4.
Proof of satisfactory balancing Work with list of at least three (3) projects of comparable type and size, including following information: a.
Project name and location.
b.
Gross floor area.
c.
Number of terminal units.
d.
Name of the engineering firm, name of the project engineer and telephone number.
e.
Name of the Owner, name of the chief operating engineer and telephone number.
5.
Sample blank forms to be used for TAB data recording and reports.
6.
List of TAB instruments and data sheets.
7.
Biographical data on engineer who is to directly supervise TAB work of this Project.
B.
Within 30 calendar days after Architect's approval of TAB company, TAB company shall review Contract Documents. Advise Architect if any additional balancing devices (such as dampers, balancing valves, "Pete's Plugs" Etc.) are required by TAB company to properly perform specified and required TAB functions.
C.
At least fifteen days prior to Contractor's request for final inspection, submit three copies of final reports, on applicable reporting forms. 1.
Form of Final Reports: a.
Each individual final reporting form must bear: 1)
Signature of person who recorded data.
2)
Signature of organization.
SECTION 26 05 93
TAB
supervisor
PAGE 12
of
reporting
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
b.
Format per AABC.
Bound 8-1/2" x 11".
2.
Schedule testing and balancing of parts of systems which is delayed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other conditions beyond control of Contractor, as early as proper conditions will allow, after consultation with the Owner.
3.
Submit reports of delayed testing promptly after execution of those services.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include in maintenance manuals, copies of certified test reports, identification of instruments, and data on Engineer; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
E.
Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.
F.
Forms shall include the following information: 1.
2.
3.
Title Page: a.
Company name
b.
Company address
c.
Company telephone number
d.
Project name
e.
Project location
f.
Project Architect
g.
Project Engineer
h.
Project Contractor
i.
Project altitude
Instrument List: a.
Instrument
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model
d.
Serial number
e.
Range
f.
Calibration date
Air Moving Equipment:
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
4.
5.
a.
Location
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model
d.
Air flow, specified and actual
e.
Return air flow, specified and actual
f.
Outside air flow, specified and actual
g.
Total static pressure and total external, specified and actual
h.
Inlet pressure
i.
Discharge pressure
j.
Fan RPM
Exhaust Fan Data: a.
Location
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model
d.
Air flow, specified and actual
e.
Total static pressure and total external, specified and actual
f.
Inlet pressure
g.
Discharge pressure
h.
Fan RPM
Return Air/Outside Air Data: a.
Identification/location
b.
Design air flow
c.
Actual air flow
d.
Design return air flow
e.
Actual return air flow
f.
Design outside air flow
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
6.
7.
8.
g.
Actual outside air flow
h.
Return air temperature
i.
Outside air temperature
j.
Required mixed air temperature
k.
Actual mixed air temperature
l.
Design outside/return air ratio
m.
Actual outside/return air ratio
Electric Motors: a.
Manufacturer
b.
HP/BHP
c.
Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.
d.
RPM
e.
Service factor
f.
Starter size, rating, heater elements
V-Belt Drive: a.
Identification/location
b.
Required driven RPM
c.
Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d.
Belt, size and quantity
e.
Motor sheave, diameter and RPM
f.
Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
Cooling Coil Data: a.
Identification/number
b.
Location
c.
Service
d.
Manufacturer
e.
Air flow, design and actual
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
9.
10.
f.
Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
g.
Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
h.
Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
i.
Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
j.
Water flow, design and actual
k.
Water pressure drop, design and actual
l.
Entering water temperature, design and actual
m.
Leaving water temperature, design and actual
n.
Air pressure drop, design and actual
Heating Coil Data: a.
Identification/number
b.
Location
c.
Service
d.
Manufacturer
e.
Air flow, design and actual
f.
Water flow, design and actual
g.
Water pressure drop, design and actual
h.
Entering water temperature, design and actual
i.
Leaving water temperature, design and actual
j.
Entering air temperature, design and actual
k.
Leaving air temperature, design and actual
l.
Air pressure drop, design and actual
Flow Measuring Station: a.
Identification/station
b.
Location
c.
Size
d.
Manufacturer
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
11.
12.
e.
Model
f.
Design flow rate
g.
Design pressure drop
h.
Actual/final pressure drop
i.
Actual/final flow rate
j.
Station calibrated setting
Sound Level Report: a.
Location
b.
Octave bands - equipment off
c.
Octave bands - equipment on
Vibration Test: a.
b.
Location of points: 1)
Fan bearing, drive end
2)
Fan bearing, opposite end
3)
Motor bearing, center (if applicable)
4)
Motor bearing, drive end
5)
Motor bearing, opposite end
6)
Casing (bottom or top)
7)
Casing (side)
8)
Duct after flexible connection (discharge)
9)
Duct after flexible connection (suction)
Test readings: 1)
Horizontal, velocity and displacement
2)
Vertical, velocity and displacement
3)
Axial, velocity and displacement
c.
Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration
d.
Unusual conditions at time of test
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
e. 13.
14.
Vibration source (if non-complying)
Duct Leak Test: a.
Description of ductwork under test
b.
Duct design operating pressure
c.
Duct design test static pressure
d.
Duct capacity, air flow
e.
Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
f.
Test apparatus 1)
Blower
2)
Orifice, tube size
3)
Orifice size
4)
Calibrated
g.
Test static pressure
h.
Test orifice differential pressure
i.
Leakage
Fans Graphic Plot: For each fan, on its actual fan curve, plot intersections of following lines: a.
CFM from traverse (or from airflow measuring stations where installed).
b.
Static pressure (or total pressure for fans so rated).
c.
Brake horsepower from amperes.
d.
RPM
e.
Position of fans variable adjustment (Blade pitch, inlet vanes, and related information).
15.
Filter banks, and outside air, return air, and exhaust air CFM's.
16.
Supply, exhaust, and return air outlets; arrange following in columns: a.
Outlet location by room number or other suitable
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 18
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
means.
17.
18.
19.
20.
b.
Include key plans if necessary to identify location.
c.
Supply outlet size.
d.
Supply outlet deflection setting.
e.
Supply outlet design CFM.
f.
Supply outlet actual CFM.
g.
Return or exhaust outlet size.
h.
Return or exhaust outlet design CFM.
i.
Return or exhaust outlet actual CFM.
j.
Difference between supply and return/exhaust CFM's.
Airflow Measuring Stations: a.
CFM
b.
Static pressure.
CAV Terminal Units: a.
Design maximum CFM
b.
Actual maximum CFM.
c.
Design minimum CFM
d.
Actual minimum CFM.
e.
CAV Box Gain Factors Report and Calculations.
Air Handling Equipment Installation Data: a.
Manufacturer, model and size.
b.
Arrangement, discharge and class.
c.
Motor type, horsepower, speed, voltage, phase, cycles and full load amperes.
d.
Location and final identification.
Air Handling Equipment Design Data: a.
Total air flow rate.
b.
Static pressure.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 19
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
21.
22.
23.
24.
c.
Motor horsepower, speed, voltage and amperes.
d.
Fan speed and brake horsepower.
e.
Hydronic coil inlet and outlet, dry bulb temperatures.
f.
Initial filter air pressure drop.
Air Handling Equipment Recorded Data: a.
Total air flow rate.
b.
Static Pressure.
c.
Fan speed and brake horsepower.
d.
Motor operating amperes.
e.
Inlet and outlet, dry bulb temperatures.
f.
Filter air pressure drop.
Duct Air Quantities: Mains, Branches, Outside Air and Exhausts (Maximum and Minimum): a.
Duct sizes.
b.
Number of pressure readings.
c.
Sum of velocity measurements.
d.
Average velocity.
e.
Duct recorded air flow rate.
f.
Duct design air flow rates.
Building Pressurization Data: a.
Outside air temperatures and humidities.
b.
Outside wind velocity.
c.
Building pressures plotted with respect to systems.
d.
Supply air, return air and exhaust air flow rates for varying damper positions.
e.
Locations of pressure measuring points, inside and outside building.
Flow Measuring Station:
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 20
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
a.
Identification/station.
b.
Location.
c.
Size.
d.
Maufacturer.
e.
Model.
f.
Design flow rate.
g.
Design pressure drop.
h.
Actual/final pressure drop.
i.
Actual/final flow rate.
j.
Station calibrated setting.
k.
Water Balance: 1)
2)
3)
Pumps: a)
Number, service, model, and size.
b)
GPM.
c)
Pressures: total.
d)
Voltage:
e)
Amperage:
Suction, discharge, and
Rated and actual. Rated and actual.
Each Flow Measuring Device and Balancing Device: a)
Device type, model and size.
b)
Pressure differential.
c)
GPM.
Each Heat Transfer Device: (Coil, and associated items): a)
Number, service, model and size.
b)
GPM.
c)
Entering water temperature.
d)
Leaving water temperature.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 21
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
e) 4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Pressures:
Inlet and outlet.
Pump Design Data: a)
Flow rate and head pressure.
b)
Pump speed and horsepower.
c)
Pump efficiency.
Pump Recorded Data: a)
Discharge and suction pressures (full flow and no flow).
b)
Operating pressure and total dynamic head.
c)
Operating flow rate (from pump curves if metering not provided or from variable speed
d)
Controller).
e)
Motor operating amperes.
f)
Balancing valve setting (full open, 60 percent open, etc.).
Expansion Tank Installation Data: a)
Manufacturer, size, capacity.
b)
Pressure reducing valve setting.
c)
Pressure relief valve setting.
Heating Equipment Design Data: a)
Heat transfer rate.
b)
Flow rates and pressure drops.
c)
Entering and leaving water temperature.
Heating Equipment Recorded Data: a)
Element type and identification (location and designation).
b)
Entering and leaving temperatures.
c)
Flow rates and pressure drops.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 22
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
9)
Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Design Data:
10)
l.
a)
Heat transfer rate.
b)
Water pressure drop across coil.
c)
Air static pressure drop.
d)
Entering and leaving water temperatures.
e)
Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb temperatures.
Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Recorded Data: a)
Element type and identification.
b)
Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb temperatures.
c)
Entering and leaving water temperatures.
d)
Water pressure drop across coil.
e)
Water pressure drop across bypass valve.
f)
Air static pressure drop.
g)
Air and water flow rates.
h)
Adjusted temperature rise or drop.
Sound Level Data: 1)
Diagram or description of relationship of sound source to measuring instrument.
2)
Overall decibels (A) level.
3)
Reading at each octave band frequency from 31.5 hertz to 16 kilohertz.
4)
Noise Criteria (NC) curves plotted and compares to those recommended by ASHRAE or AABC publications.
5)
Sound Level Recorded Data: a)
Air inlets and outlets.
b)
CAV terminal units.
c)
Air handling units.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 23
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
m.
d)
Boilers.
e)
VFD’s.
f)
Fans.
g)
AC units.
The TAB contractor shall compare the sum of the CAV box diffuser readings with the flow indicated by the box’s controller prior to calibrating the box’s controller. If the two readings agree within +/- 5%, the factory calibration factors shall not be changed. If the readings are not within +/- 5%, a documented trouble shooting procedure consisting of checking and resolving the following shall be conducted prior to calibrating the controller to verify: 1)
Box size is per the approved submittal,
2)
Manufacturer’s gain/flow factor has correctly entered into the controller,
3)
Low pressure duct/connections are tight,
4)
Velocity pressure connections at the box inlet and controller are tight and undamaged,
5)
Static pressure at the box’s inlet exceeds the minimum required, and
6)
Box flow measuring device is undamaged.
been
n.
This procedure and results for carrying out steps a-f above are to be retained by the Mechanical Contractor for delivery to the owner/design consultant on request.
o.
TAB contractor shall compile an Excel spreadsheet for all terminal boxes, listing each box by its unique identification number, the inlet flow area established by the box manufacturer, the manufacturer’s gain factor for the box, final TAB calibrated gain factor for the box if field calibrated, and the ratio of the calibrated gain factor to the manufacturer’s gain factor.
p.
Require the TAB contractor to measure AHU supply and return flow at the dirty differential pressure drop across the pre-filter and final filter.
q.
TAB shall show in their report all the individual velocity measurements from duct or AHU traverses in grid format.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 24
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.11
1.12
1.13
PROCEDURES A.
General: Prior to commencement of balancing, review proposed schedule, methods and instruments to be used in balancing with the Engineer. Include descriptive data, procedure data and sample forms.
B.
Descriptive Data: Review contract documents, shop drawings released for construction, design concepts and general function of each system including associated equipment and operation cycles. Confirm listing of flow and terminal measurements to be performed; selection points for proposed sound measurements.
C.
Procedure Data: Outline procedures for taking test measurements to establish compliance with requirements. Specify type of instruments to be used, method of instrument application (by sketch) and correction factors. Verify access to valves, dampers and equipment for testing and balancing.
D.
Sample Forms: Submit forms showing application of procedures to typical systems. Forms shall be of AABC format.
E.
AABC test sheets required are as follows: 1.
Air Moving Equipment Test Sheet.
2.
Exhaust Fan Test Sheet (Supply, Return, Relief Fans).
3.
Air Inlet and Outlet Test Sheet.
4.
Water Balance Element Test Sheet.
5.
Circulating Water Pump Data Sheet.
6.
Duct Traverse Zone Totals Sheet.
7.
Duct Traverse Readings Sheet.
JOB CONDITIONS A.
Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing Work until Work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual Work still to be completed.
B.
Do not proceed until Work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing are clean and free from debris, dirt, and discarded building materials.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations, balancing valves and rough setting.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 25
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
C.
1.14
1.15
1.16
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform Work in accordance with AABC MN-1 National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C.
Prior to commencing Work, calibrate each instrument to be used. Upon completing Work, recalibrate each instrument to assure reliability.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC or Certified by NEBB.
B.
Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor registered professional engineer experienced in performance of this Work and licensed is in State of California.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.17
1.18
Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
SEQUENCING A.
Section 01 32 00 - Summary: Construction Progress Documentation.
B.
Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion.
SCHEDULING A.
Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of life safety system with Fire Authority.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PATCHING MATERIALS A.
Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 26
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
similar purposes. B.
2.2
At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings.
TEST INSTRUMENTS A.
Utilize test instruments and equipment for TAB work required, of type, precision, and capacity as recommended in AABC standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
3.2
Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the following: 1.
Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition.
2.
Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3.
Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4.
Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.
5.
Duct systems are clean of debris.
6.
Fans are rotating correctly.
7.
Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8.
Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9.
Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10.
Air outlets are installed and connected.
11.
Duct system leakage is minimized.
12.
Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
13.
Pumps are rotating correctly.
14.
Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place or in normal position.
15.
Service and balancing valves are open.
TEST PROCEDURES
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 27
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3
3.4
A.
Examine installed Work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that Work has been completed, cleaned, and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester.
B.
Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable standards of subparagraph "Codes and Standards" above.
C.
Test, adjust and balance system during summer season for air conditioning systems and during winter season for heating systems, including period of operation at outside conditions within 5 degrees F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10 degrees F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. When seasonal operation does not permit complete measurements, then take final readings when seasonal operation does permit.
D.
Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recommended by applicable standards.
E.
Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer.
F.
Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials.
G.
Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results.
H.
Mark all damper and valve balancing device settings. The owner reserves the right to require rebalancing of all balancing devices not marked.
PREPARATION A.
Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.
B.
Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A.
Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 28
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
C.
3.5
3.6
Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
ADJUSTING A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
C.
Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
D.
After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, verify correcting adjustments have been made.
E.
Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance.
F.
Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
G.
At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by Owner.
H.
Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A.
Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude.
B.
Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
C.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts.
E.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume dampers located in ducts.
F.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 29
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
G.
Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
H.
Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
I.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
J.
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.
K.
At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum airflow rate, full cooling, and at minimum airflow rate, full heating.
L.
Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to obtain required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near building entries.
M.
For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to airflow setting indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable-air-volume temperature control.
N.
Execute air systems balancing for each air system in accordance with AABC specifications and as described herein.
O.
Make tests with supply, return and exhaust systems operating and doors, windows, closed or in their normal operating condition.
P.
Test and adjust fan or blower speed to design requirements.
Q.
Test and record motor full load amps. motor manufacturer.
R.
Traverse main supply air ducts, using a pitot tube and manometer. Calibrate the manometer to read two significant figures in velocity pressure ranges. Take a minimum 16 readings per traverse. The intent of this operation is to measure by traverse the total air quantity supplied by the fan and to verify the distribution of air to zones. A main duct is defined as any of the following:
Record each installed
1.
A duct serving 5 or more outlets.
2.
A duct serving 3 or more branch ducts.
3.
A duct serving a hydronic coil.
4.
A duct emanating from a fan discharge or plenum and terminating at one or more outlets.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 30
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
S.
Submit data in support of supply fans deliveries by the following four methods. For return, relief and exhaust fans, methods 1 and 4 are sufficient: 1.
By summation of the air quantity readings at inlets or outlets.
2.
By duct traverses of main supply ducts.
3.
By rotating vane traverse across the filter or coil bank.
4.
By plotting revolutions per minute and static pressure readings on the fan curve. Air density corrections must be indicated.
T.
Test and record required and measured system static pressures; filter differential, coil differential and fan total static pressure.
U.
Test and adjust systems for design recirculated airflow rates.
V.
Test and adjust system for design outside airflow rates.
W.
Test and record entering and leaving air temperatures.
X.
Install one-inch roll media filters upstream of air filters to impose 90 percent of the manufacturers recommended final filter air pressure drop.
Y.
Adjust main supply and return ducts to proper design flow rates.
Z.
Inspect and confirm all fire dampers are open, all smoke dampers and fire/smoke dampers are in their correct position, all duct access doors are closed and fire damper fusible links are accessible.
AA.
Adjust zones to proper design, supply and return flow rates.
BB.
Test and adjust each air inlet and air outlet and transfer duct to within 10 percent of design requirements.
CC.
Identify each air inlet, air outlet, transfer duct and transfer wall opening as to location and area.
DD.
Identify and list size, type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers and testing equipment. Use manufacturer's rating on equipment to make required calculations.
EE.
In readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers, report the required face and neck velocity, test face and neck velocity, and required air pressure drop and flow rate. Test after adjustments.
FF.
Building Management System contractor shall set adjustments of automatically operated inlet vanes, cones, plugs and all dampers
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 31
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
to operate as indicated in cooperation with balancing contractor.
3.7
GG.
Adjust diffusers, grilles and registers to minimize drafts, dumping, and to prevent "short circuiting" between supply and return outlets.
HH.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectional air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. Remove air slots on return air troffers to achieve adequate relief and minimize pressure drop into the ceiling plenum.
II.
Vary total system air flow rates by adjustment of fan speeds or fan volume-varying devices. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
JJ.
Record installed fan drive assemblies; fan sheaves, motor sheaves, belts and motors.
KK.
For fans with two-speed motors, execute the entire Air Systems procedure at both speeds.
LL.
The final balanced condition of each area shall include testing and adjusting of pressure conditions. Test and record building pressurization levels in variable volume systems throughout full range of fan delivery rates, under both heating and cooling conditions. For multi-story buildings, test pressure conditions at ground, intermediate and upper levels. Front doors, stair and vestibule doors, exits and elevator shafts shall be checked for airflow so that leakage does not cause excessive or abnormal pressure conditions. Document abnormal building leakage conditions noted.
MM.
Complete balancing to achieve positive building pressure unless otherwise instructed. A positive pressure relative to outside of 0.05 inch water gauge minimum and 0.10 inch water gauge maximum shall be achieved, measure with negligible, outside wind velocity.
NN.
Provide a complete spreadsheet for all CAV boxes gain factor calculation and analysis.
AIR BALANCING A.
General: 1.
Balance so that outside airflow does not go below minimum value at any time.
2.
Verify proper automatic operation of automatic outside, return, and exhaust air dampers throughout entire range of operation.
3.
Balance with filter pressure drop at midpoint between clean
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 32
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
and dirty filters. Artificially create required pressure drop, if necessary, by blanking off coils.
B.
4.
Balance with doors and windows in their normal, closed position.
5.
Balance air in stairs and stair vestibules to maintain pressure differentials required by code.
6.
Balance main exhaust systems to maintain building indoor pressure at approximately 0.05 inch WC positive relative to outside ambient pressure. This may require different return/exhaust air quantities than scheduled.
Balance air to following tolerances: 1.
Each outlet and each inlet: indicated on Drawings.
Plus 10% to minus 10% of CFM
2.
Each room with multiple supply outlets: CFM indicated on Drawings.
3.
Each Room: As inlet and outlet CFM's are balanced for tolerance 1 above, balance the difference between SCFM and ECFM as follows:
0% to plus 10% of
a.
Equal air balance for a room where SCFM is equal to ECFM: The difference between SCFM and ECFM is to be no more than 5% of SCFM (or ECFM); except for corridors (As listed in Criterion "d").
b.
Positive air balance for a room where SCFM is larger than ECFM: ECFM is to be 80 to 85% of SCFM.
c.
Negative air balance for a room where ECFM is larger than SCFM: ECFM is to be 110 to 115% of SCFM.
d.
Corridor shall be balanced for equal air balance for tolerance "2a" above, adding to SCFM the air coming out of adjacent rooms of positive air balance, and adding to ECFM the air going into adjacent rooms of negative air balance.
e.
NOTE: SCFM = room supply CFM which is the sum of air in CFM supplied to the room as indicated on Drawings.
f.
ECFM = room exhaust CFM which is the sum of air in CFM exhausted and/or returned from the room as indicated on Drawings.
4.
Each Airflow Measuring Station: monitor CFM.
5.
Each Fan:
0% to plus 10% of air
0% to plus 10% of system CFM.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 33
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
C.
3.8
Adjust throw patterns of supply air outlets including slot diffusers and air handling light troffers. 1.
Adjust for draft free room air distribution.
2.
Adjust as indicated. Where not indicated, adjust as directed by Architect. Request such direction prior to balancing.
3.
Unless otherwise indicated or directed, adjust air outlets to distribute air horizontally along ceiling and adjust perimeter slot diffusers to blow away from building perimeter.
D.
System design static pressures are approximations. Make changes in sheaves and belts as required for specified air balance. Final adjustment of sheaves to result in sheave with additional possible adjustment in both directions.
E.
Inspect all rooms for room temperatures, drafts, and noise. adjustments to correct any problems.
F.
Operate each room thermostat to verify correct system response to raising and lowering thermostat set points.
Make
REQUIRED TESTING AND BALANCING SERVICES A.
Chapters referred to below are detailed in the "National Standards Manual of Associated Air Balance Council" fifth edition, 1989 including, but not limited to, those mentioned herein.
B.
Preconstruction Services Include:
C.
1.
Total System Test and Balance Schedule.
2.
Preliminary Plan Review and Report - Chapter 26.
Performance Testing and Balancing of Air Conditioning Systems Includes: 1.
Supply Air Systems - General, Chapter 16.
2.
Low Pressure Air Systems - Chapter 17.
3.
Medium and High Pressure Air Systems - Chapter 18.
4.
Return and Exhaust Air Systems - Chapter 19.
5.
Hydronic Systems - Chapter 21.
6.
Special Systems - where stated in specifications: a.
Sound - Chapter 11.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 34
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.9
3.10
Vibration - Chapter 12.
c.
Duct Leakage - Chapter 23.
7.
Temperature Control System - Chapter 24.
8.
Reports and Report Forms - Chapter 26.
WORK BY MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTOR A.
Preparation: Before any testing or balancing operations are started, the Mechanical Subcontractor shall adjust belts and sheaves, align parts, oil and grease bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, clean exterior surfaces of coil tubes and fins, flush interior of coil tubes until clean, and check mixing damper operation to insure free operation and activation by correct thermostat. Install filters and start up equipment.
B.
Certification: Mechanical Subcontractor shall certify in writing that the system, as scheduled for balancing, is operational and complete. Completeness shall include not only the physical installation, but Mechanical Subcontractor's certification that prime movers, fans, pumps, refrigeration machines, boilers, etc., are installed in good working order, and full load performance has been preliminarily tested under certification of Mechanical Subcontractors. Before any testing and balancing is started a complete report shall be sent to Agency.
ON-GOING INSPECTION A.
3.11
b.
Agency shall visit the job site a minimum of three times during the early stages of fabrication to inspect duct installations, and shall submit a report listing any deficiencies found and making recommendations for Work to be performed or devices to be added to allow for proper balancing.
TOTAL SYSTEM BALANCE A.
Each piece of equipment and the entire HVAC system shall be adjusted to ensure proper function of all controls, proper distribution of air, maintenance of temperatures, elimination of drafts and vibration, and left in first class operating condition.
B.
Air System: System shall be adjusted to obtain the air volumes as indicated, but shall be readjusted if required to obtain design temperature in each room. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall make drive changes, install additional dampers, vanes, grille baffles, etc., as may be required on the job, at no extra cost to Owner.
C.
Noise: Wherever use of multi-louvers (in supply, exhaust, or return air grilles) creates objectionable noise determined by the engineer, 2" thick, 6 pcf density fiberglass board, foiled faced,
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 35
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
shall be installed in grille opening, slotted for the proper air quantity, by Mechanical Subcontractor at no extra cost to the Owner. (Not allowed in sensitive areas). D.
Method: Balance supply and return air systems (with AC units operating) by first arriving at fan total air quantity, reading air velocities at cooling coils at 55 degrees F, return air and outside air openings; and a duct traverse. Fan RPM shall then be adjusted for indicated or specified air quantities allowing for a maximum of 2% for duct leakage. The quantity of air to each outlet shall not be less than that indicated and not in excess of 10% of that amount. If so instructed by the Architect, further balancing of temperatures shall be made and indicated by thermometer or by temperature recorder.
E.
Pilot Tube Traverse: Perform pivot tube traverse of all supply, return, and exhaust systems. Except as otherwise specified herein, pivot tube traverse shall be taken in branch ducts to assure specified flow to all zones. Pivot tubes, associated instruments, traversing and testing techniques shall conform to the ASHRAE "Handbook of Fundamentals." Pivot tube traverse may be omitted: 1.
Where duct serves only a single room or space and the design volume is less than 2000 CFM.
2.
Where the duct design velocity and air quantity may be determined by measurements of terminals served.
F.
Test Holes: The test holes shall be provided in a straight duct as far as possible downstream of elbows, bends, take-offs, and other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of flow measurements.
G.
Wherever the use of multi-louvers (in supply, exhaust, or return air grilles) creates objectionable noise, 2 inches thick, 6 pound fiberglass board shall be installed in the grille opening, slotted for the proper air quantity.
H.
Balance the supply and return air systems (with the chillers operating) by first arriving at the fan total air quantity, reading air velocities at cooling coils at 55 degrees F, return air and outside air openings; and a duct traverse. The fan RPM shall then be adjusted for the specified air quantities allowing for a maximum of 2 percent for duct leakage. The quantity of air to each outlet shall not be less than that shown on the drawings and not in excess of 10 percent of that amount. If so instructed by the Architect, further balancing of temperatures shall be made and indicated by thermometer or by temperature recorder.
I.
Perform Pitot Tube Traverse of all supply, return and exhaust systems. 1.
Except as specifically indicated herein, Pitot tube traverse shall be taken in branch ducts to assure specified
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 36
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
flow to all zones. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traversing, and testing techniques shall conform to the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. 2.
3.
J.
K.
Pitot tube traverse may be omitted: a.
Where the duct serves only a single room or space and its design volume is less than 2000 CFM.
b.
Where duct's design velocity and air quantity may be determined by measurements of terminals served.
Test holes shall be in a straight duct, as far as possible downstream from elbows, bends, take-offs and other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of flow measurements.
Furnished typewritten data for all supply fans tabulating: 1.
Quantity of air in CFM at each air outlet or inlet.
2.
Dry and wet bulb temperatures at each thermostat to the nearest 1/10 of 1 degree.
3.
Outdoor dry and wet bulb temperature, wind direction and velocity, and barometric pressure at the time tests are conducted.
4.
RPM of fan or blower.
5.
RPM of motor.
6.
Ampere input of each motor (one reading on each phase leg).
7.
No lead Amperage and Brake Horsepower calculations on all motors 1/2 horsepower or larger.
8.
Static pressure in inches water gauge at inlet of fan or blower.
9.
Duct Traverse data.
Furnish typewritten data for the Coils tabulating: 1.
Entering and leaving water temperature.
2.
Quantity of air in CFM.
3.
Face velocity in FPM.
4.
Dry and wet bulb air temperature entering and leaving coil.
5.
Capacity of coil in BTUH.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 37
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
6. L.
M.
N.
O.
Quantity of water circulated through coil in GPM.
Furnish typewritten data for the Pumps tabulating: 1.
Quantity of water circulating in GPM.
2.
Suction and discharge pressures in PSIG.
3.
Ampere input of motor (one reading for each phase leg).
4.
At no flow (valved off), measure suction pressure, discharge pressure and motor amps (on each phase leg).
5.
Calculated BHP.
Furnish typewritten data for the Cooling Tower tabulating: 1.
Quantity of water circulated through Tower.
2.
Temperature of entering and leaving water.
3.
Capacity of Tower in BTUH.
Sound Test Procedures: 1.
Sound level measurements shall be taken at times when the building is occupied, or when activity in surrounding areas and background noise levels in areas tested are at a minimum and relatively free from sudden changes in noise levels.
2.
Measurements shall be taken with all equipment secured, except that being tested.
3.
The required sound levels shall be measured at any point within a room not less than 6 feet from any air terminal or room unit, and not closer than 3 feet from any floor, wall, or ceiling surface.
4.
Sound levels shall be measured with a General Radio Model 1982-9720 Sound Analysis System 30-140 dB Octave Band Analyzer. The "A" scale shall be used to measure over-all sound levels. The specified octave band levels shall be determined with the above sound level meter set on "A".
Duct Pressure Testing: 1.
Test apparatus shall be a high pressure portable blower with an orifice flow measuring device. Each orifice assembly is accurately calibrated with its own calibration curve.
2.
Contractor to close off and seal all openings in the duct section to be tested.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 38
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.12
3.
Each section shall be tested at 2" W.G. Total allowable leakage should not exceed 1 percent of the total CFM design for that section being tested.
4.
After all tests are complete, the test information will be presented to the Architect for his approval.
P.
The Contractor shall require tht the Air Balance Agency prepare a complete set of full scale drawings showing actual duct runs and outlet/inlet locations. Drawings shall be keyed to and furnished with the Air Balance Report. The mechanical plans are not acceptable for this purpose.
Q.
Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure.
R.
Check multi-zone units for motorized damper leakage. Adjust air quantities with mixing dampers set first for cooling, then heating, then modulating.
S.
For variable air volume system powered units, set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature control.
T.
On fan powered VAV boxes, adjust air flow switches for proper operation.
U.
Ductwork Tests: All medium pressure ductwork and plenums shall be tested in accordance with AABC National Standards for field measurement and instrumentation volume one No. 81266 Bulletin Section, 21 June 1968. The procedure shall include testing ductwork for 1 minute at 12 inches S.P., then reducing pressure to 7 inches S.P. and surveying all ductwork for audible leaks. After leaks have been sealed, operate ductwork at 7 inches S.P. and re-check in the presence of the Architect. In no case will total air leakage in excess of 4 percent be allowed.
V.
Ductwork and sheet metal fabrication drawings: Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval, 1/2 inch to 1 foot scaled plan drawings of all parts of the building showing all duct systems. Plans shall show all duct details, offset, transitions, after coordination all other sections and existing conditions. Drawings shall also include mechanical rooms with ductwork and plenums complete. PARTIAL OR INCOMPLETE DRAWINGS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE.
SOUND TEST PROCEDURES A.
Test Conditions: Any deem necessary, sound level measurements shall be taken at times when the building is unoccupied, or when activity in surrounding areas and background noise levels in areas tested are at a minimum and are relatively free from sudden changes in noise levels. Measurements shall be taken with all
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 39
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
equipment secured, except that being tested. shall be as directed by the Engineer.
3.13
Test conditions
B.
Measurements: Required sound levels shall be measured at any point within a room not less than 6-feet from an air terminal or room unit and no closer than 3-feet from any floor, wall, or ceiling surface.
C.
Test Instrument: Measure surface levels with General Radio Model 19829720 Sound Analysis System 30-140DB Octave Banck Analyzer; "A" scale shall be used to measure overall sound levels. Specified octave banks levels shall be determined with above sound level meter set on "A."
DUCT PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING A.
General 1.
High, medium, and low pressure ductwork systems tested during construction prior to insulation. Test ducts lengths a maximum of 100 feet at time for risers and 150 feet for horizontal ducts. All ductwork tested and approved prior to installation of insulation.
2.
Riser branches shall be isolated with seals, plugs, or caps. Riser installed in shafts shall be tested in sections to allow erection of shaft wall and duct insulation as approved by Architect.
3.
Tests shall be performed in presence of the Architect who must verify recorded test data for test pressure and air leakage for tested duct length.
4.
Test equipment: Rotary blower, calibrated orifice section, and gauge board.
5.
Pressure test procedure: a.
Check and alert the Mechanical Contractor Division 15 of any required seals of all openings in duct and plenum section to be tested.
b.
Connect the test apparatus to test section using a flexible duct connection or hose.
c.
Close damper on blower suction side, to prevent excessive build-up of pressure.
d.
Start blower and gradually open damper on suction side of blower.
e.
Build-up pressure on test section to required limit.
f.
Determine amount of air leakage by make-up air flow measurements and make repairs as required.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 40
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
6.
B.
C.
g.
Total allowable leakage shall not exceed 1% per minute based upon the total operating CFM of the system being tested. Total leakage is determined by summation of leakage for each section of system tested.
h.
All negative pressure ducts, including return and exhaust system, shall be tested by same procedure as positive pressure supply ducts.
i.
Report final results of duct testing.
All ductwork pressure and leak testing shall also comply with section 15890.
Main Supply Ductwork Systems: Extending from the discharge of supply fans to the inlet of air terminal units. 1.
Test pressures:
5" WG.
2.
The allowable leak measured in CFM varies depending upon the length of duct tested and as follows: a.
Main duct maximum 1/2% of 1% of the designed CFM on the total length and proportioned to the duct being tested.
b.
Branch duct or risers maximum 1/2% of 1% of the designed CFM on the total length and proportioned to the duct being tested.
Branch Ductwork Systems: Extending from the air terminal to diffuser, if required, also return and exhaust air ducts. 1.
Test pressures:
2.
The allowable leak measured in CFM varies depending upon the length of duct tested and as follows:
3.
2" WG.
a.
Main duct maximum 1/2% of the designed CFM on the total length and proportioned to the duct being tested.
b.
Branch duct or risers maximum 1/2% of the designed CFM on the total length and proportioned to the duct being tested.
The allowable leakage shall not exceed 1% per minute based upon the total peak operating CFM of system being tested. Total leakage is determined by summation of leakage for each section of the system tested.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 41
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
E.
3.14
3.16
1.
Main duct.
2.
Branch duct or risers.
3.
Complete system.
Test Failures: Notify General Contractor to repair duct system if test pressure and leakage is not attained. Repairs and sealings to be done with sheet metal and sealant by Mechanical Contractor Division 15.
FINAL DRAWINGS A.
3.15
Leak tests shall be performed and recorded separately for each system for:
The Agency shall prepare a complete set of full scale drawings showing actual duct runs and outlet/inlet locations. Drawings shall be keyed to and submitted with Air Balance Report; the Contract Mechanical Drawings are not acceptable for this purpose.
TOTAL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION A.
Immediately on completion of the system testing and balancing, the Agency shall conduct a 7-day continuous total system performance and capacity test; the Contractor shall supply all energy and consumables and/or materials required for the test.
B.
General: Outdoor DB and WB air temperatures, and actual operating data for this test shall be taken simultaneously and hourly on all energy consuming equipment of cooling and heating plants and on any air and/or water distribution equipment which deviates more than 10% from design specifications.
C.
Date Conversion and Reports: The data collected during this test shall be converted to KWH per ton for cooling equipment and KWH per MBH for the heating equipment and shall cover a minimum of four points on the equipment operating curve. These points shall be at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of full load test. Reports shall be prepared and submitted for all data and conversion.
GENERAL PROCEDURE A.
Adjust air moving systems to 0 to plus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 5 percent for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated as long as pressure relationships are being maintained with adjacent spaces per OSHPD requirements.
B.
Adjust hydronic systems to 0 to 10 percent plus of design conditions indicated.
C.
Permanently mark settings on valves, splitters, dampers and other adjustment devices.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 42
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.17
3.18
3.19
D.
Take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.
E.
At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Engineer.
F.
At the completion of balancing procedures, allow for a minimum of two days for the Engineer to witness test procedures and conduct operational tests.
SITE VISITS A.
A review of the installation shall be made prior to commencing balancing work and any additional dampers or valves required for proper balance shall be reviewed with the Engineer and the Contractor.
B.
The Test and Balance Contractor shall visit the job site a minimum of two times during the ductwork, equipment and piping installations. Site Visit Reports shall be submitted to the Engineer listing any deficiencies found. Identify in the report any additional balancing valves or dampers required.
ACCEPTANCE A.
Mechanical systems shall not be considered ready for final inspection until balancing results acceptable to the Engineer are obtained.
B.
If it is found that the specified airflows cannot be achieved on portions of the system, the actual conditions shall be reported to the Engineer for consideration of corrective action before continuing the balancing procedure.
C.
If measured flow at final inspection shows deviation of +5 percent or more, the report shall be rejected.
D.
If report is rejected, systems shall be rebalanced and a new certified report submitted.
BALANCING REPORT A.
Submit a draft copy of reports prior to final acceptance of project. Provide copies of final report for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
B.
Provide reports in durable soft cover, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with table of contents, indexing tabs and cover identification at front and side.
C.
Include types, serial number and dates of calibration of instruments.
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 43
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
Record test data on a sepia made from the latest available revised set of mechanical shop drawings and submit copies upon completion of the balancing contract.
E.
Install at each piece of mechanical equipment a "Data Register" showing significant operating temperatures, pressures, amperes, voltage, brake horsepower. "Data Register" shall be enclosed in a hard, clear plastic holder securely attached to the equipment or to a wall in the adjacent area.
F.
Submit with report, fan and pump curves with operating conditions plotted. Submit grille and diffuser shop drawings and diffusion factors.
G.
Report shall be indexed as follows: Exhaust Capacities)
Air Water Summary Summary Procedure Procedure Instrumentation Instrumentation Drawings Pump Data Equipment Summary Pump Curves Fan Sheets Flow Stations Fan Curves Coils Fan Profile Data Equipment Data Static Data Air Monitoring Station Data
Element Data Summary and Schematics (per system)
Traverse Data and Schedule
Sound
Terminal Unit Summary
Summary
Outlet Data Summary and Schematics (per system)
Procedure Instrumentation
Building Pressurization Data Drawings Smoke Exhaust Mode Data Profile Stairway and Stair Vestibule Pressurization Data Smoke Control System Testing (Smoke Control Zone Supply, Relief and
SECTION 26 05 93
Scale Readings Vibration
PAGE 44
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
Fire/Smoke Damper Certification Copy of Contractor's Certification
SECTION 26 05 93
PAGE 45
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.20
3.21
WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A.
Adjust water systems, after air balancing, to obtain design quantities.
B.
Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow-metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in system.
C.
Adjust systems to obtain specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing.
D.
Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open or in normal position to heat transfer elements.
E.
Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.
F.
Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, simulate full flow in one part by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
SCHEDULES A.
Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: 1.
Fire Pumps.
2.
Plumbing Pumps.
3.
HVAC Pumps.
4.
Water Tube Boilers.
5.
Packaged Roof Top Cooling Units.
6.
Fan Coil Units.
7.
Fans.
8.
Air Filters.
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 46
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
9.
Air Terminal Units.
10.
Air Inlets and Outlets.
Report Forms 1.
2.
3.
Title Page: a.
Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
b.
Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
c.
Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
d.
Project name
e.
Project location
f.
Project Architect
g.
Project Engineer
h.
Project Contractor
i.
Project altitude
j.
Report date
Summary Comments: a.
Design versus final performance
b.
Notable characteristics of system
c.
Description of systems operation sequence
d.
Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building pressurization
e.
Nomenclature used throughout report
f.
Test conditions
Instrument List: a.
Instrument
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 47
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
4.
5.
6.
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model number
d.
Serial number
e.
Range
f.
Calibration date
Electric Motors: a.
Manufacturer
b.
Model/Frame
c.
HP/BHP and kW
d.
Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
e.
RPM
f.
Service factor
g.
Starter size, rating, heater elements
h.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
V-Belt Drive: a.
Identification/location
b.
Required driven RPM
c.
Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d.
Belt, size and quantity
e.
Motor sheave diameter and RPM
f.
Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
Pump Data: a.
Identification/number
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 48
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
7.
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Size/model
d.
Impeller
e.
Service
f.
Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
g.
Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
h.
Discharge pressure
i.
Suction pressure
j.
Total operating head pressure
k.
Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
l.
Shut off, total head pressure
Combustion Test: a.
Manufacturer
b.
Model number
c.
Serial number
d.
Firing rate
e.
Overfire draft
f.
Gas meter timing dial size
g.
Gas meter time per revolution
h.
Gas pressure at meter outlet
i.
Gas flow rate
j.
Heat input
k.
Burner manifold gas pressure
l.
Percent carbon monoxide (CO)
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 49
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
8.
9.
m.
Percent carbon dioxide (CO2)
n.
Percent oxygen (O2)
o.
Percent excess air
p.
Flue gas temperature at outlet
q.
Ambient temperature
r.
Net stack temperature
s.
Percent stack loss
t.
Percent combustion efficiency
u.
Heat output
Air Cooled Condenser: a.
Identification/number
b.
Location
c.
Manufacturer
d.
Model number
e.
Serial number
f.
Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
g.
Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
h.
Number of compressors
Cooling Coil Data: a.
Identification/number
b.
Location
c.
Service
d.
Manufacturer
e.
Air flow, design and actual
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 50
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
10.
11.
f.
Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
g.
Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
h.
Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
i.
Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
j.
Saturated suction temperature, design and actual
k.
Air pressure drop, design and actual
Heating Coil Data: a.
Identification/number
b.
Location
c.
Service
d.
Manufacturer
e.
Air flow, design and actual
f.
Water flow, design and actual
g.
Water pressure drop, design and actual
h.
Entering water temperature, design and actual
i.
Leaving water temperature, design and actual
j.
Entering air temperature, design and actual
k.
Leaving air temperature, design and actual
l.
Air pressure drop, design and actual
Fan Coil Data: a.
Manufacturer
b.
Identification/number
c.
Location
d.
Model number
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 51
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
12.
e.
Size
f.
Air flow, design and actual
g.
Water flow, design and actual
h.
Water pressure drop, design and actual
i.
Entering water temperature, design and actual
j.
Leaving water temperature, design and actual
k.
Entering air temperature, design and actual
l.
Leaving air temperature, design and actual
Air Moving Equipment: a.
Location
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model number
d.
Serial number
e.
Arrangement/Class/Discharge
f.
Air flow, specified and actual
g.
Return air flow, specified and actual
h.
Outside air flow, specified and actual
i.
Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
j.
Inlet pressure
k.
Discharge pressure
l.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
m.
Number of Belts/Make/Size
n.
Fan RPM
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 52
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
13.
14.
Return Air/Outside Air Data: a.
Identification/location
b.
Design air flow
c.
Actual air flow
d.
Design return air flow
e.
Actual return air flow
f.
Design outside air flow
g.
Actual outside air flow
h.
Return air temperature
i.
Outside air temperature
j.
Required mixed air temperature
k.
Actual mixed air temperature
l.
Design outside/return air ratio
m.
Actual outside/return air ratio
Exhaust Fan Data: a.
Location
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model number
d.
Serial number
e.
Air flow, specified and actual
f.
Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
g.
Inlet pressure
h.
Discharge pressure
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 53
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
15.
16.
i.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
j.
Number of Belts/Make/Size
k.
Fan RPM
Duct Traverse: a.
System zone/branch
b.
Duct size
c.
Area
d.
Design velocity
e.
Design air flow
f.
Test velocity
g.
Test air flow
h.
Duct static pressure
i.
Air temperature
j.
Air correction factor
Duct Leak Test: a.
Description of ductwork under test
b.
Duct design operating pressure
c.
Duct design test static pressure
d.
Duct capacity, air flow
e.
Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
f.
Test apparatus 1)
Blower
2)
Orifice, tube size
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 54
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
17.
18.
3)
Orifice size
4)
Calibrated
g.
Test static pressure
h.
Test orifice differential pressure
i.
Leakage
Air Monitoring Station Data: a.
Identification/location
b.
System
c.
Size
d.
Area
e.
Design velocity
f.
Design air flow
g.
Test velocity
h.
Test air flow
Flow Measuring Station: a.
Identification/number
b.
Location
c.
Size
d.
Manufacturer
e.
Model number
f.
Serial number
g.
Design Flow rate
h.
Design pressure drop
i.
Actual/final pressure drop
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 55
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
19.
20.
j.
Actual/final flow rate
k.
Station calibrated setting
Terminal Unit Data: a.
Manufacturer
b.
Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct
c.
Identification/number
d.
Location
e.
Model number
f.
Size
g.
Minimum static pressure
h.
Minimum design air flow
i.
Maximum design air flow
j.
Maximum actual air flow
k.
Inlet static pressure
Air Distribution Test Sheet: a.
Air terminal number
b.
Room number/location
c.
Terminal type
d.
Terminal size
e.
Area factor
f.
Design velocity
g.
Design air flow
h.
Test (final) velocity
i.
Test (final) air flow
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 56
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
j. 21.
22.
Percent of design air flow
Sound Level Report: a.
Location
b.
Octave bands - equipment off
c.
Octave bands - equipment on
d.
RC level - equipment on
Vibration Test: a.
b.
Location of points: 1)
Fan bearing, drive end
2)
Fan bearing, opposite end
3)
Motor bearing, center (when applicable)
4)
Motor bearing, drive end
5)
Motor bearing, opposite end
6)
Casing (bottom or top)
7)
Casing (side)
8)
Duct after flexible connection (discharge)
9)
Duct after flexible connection (suction)
Test readings: 1)
Horizontal, velocity and displacement
2)
Vertical, velocity and displacement
3)
Axial, velocity and displacement
c.
Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration
d.
Unusual conditions at time of test
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 57
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
e. 3.22
VENTILATION AIRFLOW CONFIRMATION A.
3.23
3.24
Vibration source (when non-complying)
Before an occupancy permit is granted, the Contractor shall document that the ventilation systems perform in accordance with Title 8, Section 5142(b) of the California Safety Code (1987) to provide the ventilation rates specified on the Drawings.
ADJUSTING A.
Recorded data shall represent actually measured or observed condition.
B.
Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory steps.
C.
After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.
D.
Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
E.
At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Architect.
F.
Contractor shall balance, test and re-adjust and calibrate all mechanical and plumbing system to operate at design standards and condition at no additional cost to the owner.
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A.
Adjust distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return and exhaust air quantities.
B.
Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
C.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.
E.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 58
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.
3.25
3.26
F.
Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G.
Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
H.
Contractor shall require to measure air system performance with the pressure drop across filters at the value specified for dirty filters with the use of variable frequency drive.
WATER BALANCING A.
Adjust water quantities to tolerance range of zero to plus 10% of specified flow rates.
B.
Verify proper response of pump VFD’s to differential pressure control signal.
PRE-OCCUPANCY AND POST-OCCUPANCY VENTILATION PERIODS A.
Operate chilled water plant, heating water plant, and fan systems to provide increased outside air ventilation rates to all occupied spaces during the following periods: 1.
For the 30-day period immediately preceding the date of occupancy.
2.
For the 3-month period beginning on the date of occupancy.
B.
Operate all systems continuously on a 24-hour, 7-day basis during the pre-occupancy and post-occupancy periods.
C.
Operate all air handling systems providing ventilation air to occupied spaces at an outside air ventilation rate as high as possible, up to a maximum of 100%. Do not operate at ventilation rates that would exceed the cooling and heating capacities of the central plant equipment and AHU coils. Adjust the ventilation rate percentage on a time-of-day basis if required to achieve the maximum ventilation rate. For systems that are 100% outside air, operate continuously at 100% outside air. Maintain temperatures in the occupied spaces at normal design levels.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 12 00
PAGE 59
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION
GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
HVAC piping insulation, jackets and accessories.
2.
HVAC equipment insulation, jackets and accessories.
3.
HVAC ductwork insulation, jackets, and accessories.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this section.
2.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting insulation jackets and covering specified by this section.
REFERENCES A.
ASTM International: 1.
ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
2.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
3.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric).
4.
ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
5.
ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
6.
ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Prefabrication and Field Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, Vessel Lagging, and Dished Head Segments.
7.
ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
8.
ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
Tubular Form. 9.
ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
10.
ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
11.
ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
12.
ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).
13.
ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation.
14.
ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
15.
ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
16.
ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
17.
ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material).
18.
ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
19.
ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts.
20.
ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
21.
ASTM D4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane.
22.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
23.
ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
24.
ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’: 1.
C.
National Fire Protection Association: 1.
D.
1.3
1.4
1.5
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1.
UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2.
UL 1978 - Standard for Safety for Grease Ducts.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples of representative size illustrating each insulation type.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84, UL 723, and NFPA 255.
B.
Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters.
C.
Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.
D.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
section with minimum three years experience approved by manufacturer. 1.6
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.7
1.8
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.
C.
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original wrapping.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B.
Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.
1.10
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
WARRANTY A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber.
C.
Section 01 78 36 – Warranties. PRODUCTS
1.11
MANUFACTURER A.
Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation Products: 1.
CertainTeed.
2.
Knauf.
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
1.12
3.
Johns Manville.
4.
Owens-Corning.
5.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products: 1.
Aeroflex. Aerocell.
2.
Armacell, LLC. Armaflex.
3.
Nomaco. K-flex.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
PIPE INSULATION A.
B.
C.
D.
TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F.
3.
Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing adhesive joints.
4.
Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
TYPE P-5: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F.
TYPE P-6: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.30 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Maximum Service Temperature: 300 degrees F.
3.
Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 58 to 300 degrees F.
TYPE P-11: ASTM C533; Type I, hydrous calcium silicate pipe insulation, rigid molded white; asbestos free. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.45 at 200 degrees F.
2.
Operating Temperature Range: 140 to 1200 degrees F.
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.13
PIPE INSULATION JACKETS A.
B.
C.
D.
Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1.
ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.
2.
Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm-inches.
PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket: 1.
Product Description: ASTM D1784, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
2.
Thickness: 30 mil.
3.
Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
Aluminum Pipe Jacket: 1.
ASTM B209.
2.
Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet.
3.
Finish: Smooth.
4.
Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
5.
Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
6.
Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
Field Applied Glass Fiber Fabric Jacket System: 1.
Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
2.
Glass Fiber Fabric:
3.
a.
Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
b.
Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.
c.
Weave: 5 x 5.
Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish: a.
Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
b.
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.14
1.15
PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES A.
Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B.
Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C.
Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.
D.
Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: Wood insulation saddle, hard maple. Inserts length: not less than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation.
E.
Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum single piece construction with self-adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation.
F.
Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
G.
Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M.
H.
Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
I.
Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION A.
B.
C.
TYPE E-2: ASTM C612; glass fiber, rigid board, noncombustible with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.023 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F.
3.
Density: 4.2 pound per cubic foot.
4.
Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
TYPE E-7: ASTM C533; Type II, hydrous calcium silicate block insulation, asbestos free. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.45 at 200 degrees F.
2.
Operating Temperature Range: 140 to 1200 degrees F.
TYPE E-8: ASTM C534, Type II, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, sheet. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 220 degrees
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
F. 1.16
EQUIPMENT INSULATION JACKETS A.
B.
PVC Plastic Equipment Jacket: 1.
Product Description: ASTM D1784, sheet material, off-white color.
2.
Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.
3.
Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
4.
Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm-inches.
5.
Thickness: 10 mil.
6.
Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
Aluminum Equipment Jacket: 1.
ASTM B209.
2.
Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet.
3.
Finish: Smooth.
4.
Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
5.
Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
6.
Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
C.
Canvas Equipment Jacket: UL listed, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton fabric with fire retardant lagging adhesive compatible with insulation.
D.
Vapor Retarder Jacket:
E.
1.
ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.
2.
Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm-inches.
Field Applied Glass Fiber Fabric Jacket System: 1.
Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
2.
Glass Fiber Fabric: a.
Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.
1.17
1.18
b.
Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.
c.
Weave: 5 x 5.
Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish: a.
Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
b.
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES A.
Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B.
Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C.
Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
D.
Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M.
E.
Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
DUCTWORK INSULATION A.
B.
C.
D.
TYPE D-1: ASTM C1290, Type III, flexible glass fiber, commercial grade with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket meeting ASTM C1136, Type II. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
3.
Density: 0.75 pound per cubic foot.
TYPE D-2: ASTM C612, Type IA or IB, rigid glass fiber, with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil facing meeting ASTM C1136, Type II. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.22 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot.
TYPE D-3: ASTM C612, Type IA or IB, rigid glass fiber, no facing. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.22 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot.
TYPE D-4: ASTM C1071, Type I, flexible, glass fiber duct liner with coated air side.
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.19
1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Density: 1.5 pound per cubic foot.
3.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
4.
Maximum Air Velocity: 6,000 feet per minute.
TYPE D-5: ASTM C1071, Type II, rigid, glass fiber duct liner with coated air side. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot.
3.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
4.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4,000 feet per minute.
TYPE D-6: ASTM C534, Type II, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, sheet. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Service Temperature Range: Range: Minus 58 to 180 degrees F.
TYPE D-7: ASTM C534, Type II, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, sheet laminated with white thermoplastic rubber membrane. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Service Temperature Range: Range: Minus 58 to 180 degrees F.
TYPE D-8: Inorganic blanket encapsulated with scrim reinforced foil meeting UL 1978. 1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.42 at 500 degrees F.
2.
Weight: 1.4 pound per square foot.
3.
Flame spread rating of 0 and smoke developed rating of 0 in accordance with ASTM E84.
DUCTWORK INSULATION JACKETS A.
Aluminum Duct Jacket: 1.
ASTM B209.
2.
Thickness: 0.020 inch thick sheet.
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
1.20
3.
Finish: Embossed.
4.
Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
5.
Fittings: 0.02 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
6.
Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1.
Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2.
Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm.
3.
Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
C.
Canvas Duct Jacket: UL listed, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton fabric with fire retardant lagging adhesive compatible with insulation.
D.
Outdoor Duct Jacket: Asphalt impregnated and coated sheet, 50 lb/square.
E.
Membrane Duct Jacket: ASTM D4637; Type I, EPDM; non-reinforced, 0.060 inch thick, 48 inch wide roll; white color.
DUCTWORK INSULATION ACCESSORIES A.
Vapor Retarder Tape: 1.
Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
B.
Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
C.
Adhesive: Waterproof, ASTM E162 fire-retardant type.
D.
Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad head.
E.
Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
F.
Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E84, NFPA 255, UL 723.
G.
Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage self-adhesive pad.
H.
Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
I.
Membrane Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
EXECUTION 1.21
1.22
EXAMINATION A.
Verify piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B.
Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS A.
Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
B.
Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour.
C.
Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
D.
E.
1.
Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.
2.
Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
3.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
Glass Fiber Board Insulation: 1.
Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
2.
Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
3.
Cover wire mesh or bands with cement to a thickness to remove surface irregularities.
Extruded Polystyrene Insulation:
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
F.
G.
1.
Wrap elbows and fitting with vapor retarder tape.
2.
Seal butt joints with vapor retarder tape.
Hot Piping Systems greater than 140 degrees F: 1.
Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or both.
2.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
3.
Insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
Inserts and Shields: 1.
Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between pipe hanger and insulation.
2.
Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping and under finish jacket.
3.
H.
I.
a.
Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
b.
Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and service.
Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install galvanized steel shield between roller and inserts.
Insulation Terminating Points: 1.
Coil Branch Piping 1 inch and Smaller: Terminate hot water piping at union upstream of the coil control valve.
2.
Chilled Water Coil Branch Piping: Insulate chilled water piping and associated components up to coil connection.
3.
Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent condensation.
Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: 1.
Push insulation on to piping.
2.
Miter joints at elbows.
3.
Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
adhesive.
J.
K.
1.23
4.
When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered.
5.
Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.
High Temperature Pipe Insulation: 1.
Install in multiple layers to meet thickness scheduled.
2.
Attach each layer with bands. Secure first layer with bands before installing next layer.
3.
Stagger joints between layers.
4.
Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
Piping Exterior to Building: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal piping.
INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT A.
Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
B.
Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C.
Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
D.
Equipment Containing Fluids Below Ambient Temperature: 1.
Insulate entire equipment surfaces.
2.
Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
3.
Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
4.
E.
1.24
Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
Equipment Containing Fluids Over 140 degrees F: 1.
Insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets.
2.
Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied jackets, with or without vapor barrier. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.
3.
Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
F.
Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
G.
Equipment Located Exterior to Building: Install vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal equipment.
H.
Cover glass fiber, cellular glass or hydrous calcium silicate insulation with aluminum jacket.
I.
Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not cover with insulation.
J.
Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy removal and replacement without damage.
K.
Prepare equipment insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK SYSTEMS A.
Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are finished inside dimensions.
B.
Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:
C.
1.
Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets.
2.
Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket.
3.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4.
Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.
Provide with or without standard vapor retarder jacket.
2.
Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
D.
Ductwork Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces below 10 feet above finished floor: Finish with aluminum jacket.
E.
External Glass Fiber Duct Insulation:
F.
G.
1.
Secure insulation with vapor retarder with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor retarder adhesive or tape to match jacket.
2.
Secure insulation without vapor retarder with staples, tape, or wires.
3.
Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
4.
Seal vapor retarder penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor retarder adhesive.
5.
Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.
External Elastomeric Duct Insulation: 1.
Adhere to clean oil-free surfaces with full coverage of adhesive.
2.
Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.
3.
When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered.
4.
Insulate standing metal duct seams with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent duct surface. Apply adhesive at joints with flat duct surfaces.
5.
Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
Duct Liner: 1.
Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.
2.
Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Comply with SMACNA Standards for spacing.
3.
Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
4.
Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
5.
H.
I.
1.25
Cut insulation for tight overlapped corner joints. Support top pieces of liner at edges with side pieces.
Ducts Exterior to Building: 1.
Install insulation according to external duct insulation paragraph above.
2.
Provide external insulation with vapor retarder jacket. Cover with outdoor jacket finished as specified with caulked aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section.
3.
Finish with aluminum duct jacket.
4.
Calk seams at flanges and joints. Located major longitudinal seams on bottom side of horizontal duct sections.
Prepare duct insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
SCHEDULES A.
Cooling Services Piping Insulation Schedule: INSULATION
PIPING SYSTEM
TYPE
INSULATION
PIPE SIZE
THICKNESS inches
Condensate Piping from Cooling Coils
P-5
All sizes
0.5
Refrigerant Suction
P-5
All sizes
0.5
Refrigerant Hot Gas
P-5
All sizes
0.5
B.
Heating Services Piping Insulation Schedule: INSULATION
PIPING SYSTEM
INSULATION
PIPE SIZE
THICKNESS
TYPE Heating Water Supply and Return 141 to 200 degrees F
P-1
inches 3 inches and smaller
1.0
4 inches and larger
1.5
C.
Equipment Insulation Schedule: INSULATION
EQUIPMENT
INSULATION TYPE
inches
Generator Exhaust Piping
E-7
4.0
Generator Exhaust Muffler
E-7
4.0
SECTION 23 07 00
THICKNESS
PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
Ductwork Insulation Schedule:
DUCTWORK SYSTEM
INSULATION
INSULATION
TYPE
THICKNESS inches
Combustion Air
D-2
1.5
Outside Air Intake
D-2
1.5
Equipment Casings
D-2
1.0
Supply Ducts (internally insulated)
D-4, D-5
1.0
Return Ducts (internally insulated)
D-4, D-5
1.0
Supply Ducts (externally insulated)
D-2
1.5
Return Ducts (externally insulated)
D-2
1.5
Duct Coils
D-1
1.0
Supply Air (exterior to building on roof)
D-7
2.0
Return Air (exterior to building on roof)
D-7
2.0
Rectangular Supply Ducts Downstream of Variable Air Volume Boxes (externally insulated)
D-2
1.5
Round Supply Ducts Downstream of Variable Air Volume Boxes (externally insulated)
D-2
1.5
Transfer Air Ducts (internally insulated)
D-5
1.0
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 07 00
PAGE 18
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
Control panel enclosures.
2.
Thermostats.
3.
Alarm system.
4.
Control air dampers.
5.
Electric damper actuators.
6.
Control valves.
7.
Electric valve actuators.
8.
Outside air measuring and modulation device.
9.
Direct digital control system components.
10.
Duct-mounted smoke detector.
B.
Positive displacement meters.
C.
Flow meters.
D.
Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
E.
Thermometers and thermometer wells.
F.
Static pressure and filter gages.
G.
Circuit balancing valves.
H.
Products Furnished but not Installed under this Section: 23 21 16 - Hydronic Piping Specialties; Installation of thermometer wells and pressure gage tappings.
I.
Complete integration with Facilities Control System – 23 09 93.
J.
Related Sections:
Section
1.
Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment: Product requirements for electric motors.
2.
Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Controls: Sequences of operation implemented using products specified in this section.
1.2
3.
Section 23 21 16 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product requirements for thermometer sockets and gage taps for placement by this section. Installation requirements for piping products furnished in this section.
4.
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Product requirements for duct mounted thermometers. Installation requirements for dampers and other duct mounted products furnished in this section.
5.
Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this section.
6.
Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC.
REFERENCES A.
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1.
B.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1.
C.
D.
AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.
ASHRAE 62 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
2.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
ASTM International: 1.
ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
2.
ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
3.
ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
4.
ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
5.
ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric).
6.
ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 7.
E.
American Welding Society: 1.
F.
G.
1.3
1.4
ASTM D2737 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing.
AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1.
NEMA DC 3 - Residential Controls - Electrical Wall Mounted Room Thermostats.
2.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
National Fire Protection Association: 1.
NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
2.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written detailed operational description of sequences. Coordinate submittals with information requested in Section 23 09 93.
C.
Product Data: Submit description and engineering data for each control system component. Include sizing as required.
D.
Samples: Submit two of each type of room thermostat and cover.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation requirements for each control component.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD tolerances. 1.5
1.6
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Provide pneumatic tubing located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5, average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m) when tested in accordance with UL 1820.
B.
Control Air Damper Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
C.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience approved by manufacturer.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B.
Accept controls on site in original factory packaging Inspect for damage.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate installation of control components in piping systems with work of Section 23 21 16.
B.
Coordinate installation of control components in duct systems with work of Section 23 33 00.
WARRANTY A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for each control system component.
C.
Section 01 78 36 – Warranties.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.12
A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.
B.
Furnish service and maintenance of control system for one year from Date of Occupancy.
C.
Furnish complete service of controls systems, including callbacks. Perform minimum of 10 complete normal inspections of approximately 8 hours duration in addition to normal service calls to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls. Submit written report after each inspection.
D.
Furnish four complete inspections per year to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls. Submit written report after each inspection.
E.
Examine unit components semi-monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.
F.
Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of unit, and controls checkout and adjustments. Repair or replace parts in accordance with manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment.
G.
Perform work without removing units from service during building normal occupied hours.
H.
Provide emergency call back service at all hours for this maintenance period.
I.
Maintain an adequate stock of parts, locally, for replacement or emergency purposes. Ensure personnel availability to ensure fulfillment of this maintenance service without unreasonable loss of time.
J.
Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under supervision of manufacturer or original installer.
K.
Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B.
Furnish 2 of each type of thermostat and exposed sensor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONTROL COMPONENT MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Johnson Controls, Inc.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
2.2
2.3
2.
Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
3.
Automated Logic.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
All controls manufacturers shall be BacNet compatible and shall include all adapters as required.
CONTROL PANEL ENCLOSURES A.
Furnish for each system under automatic control with relays and controls mounted in cabinet and temperature indicators, pressure gages, pilot lights, push buttons and switches flush on cabinet panel face.
B.
Construction: NEMA 250, Type 4 steel enclosure.
C.
Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key.
D.
Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
THERMOSTATS A.
B.
C.
Manufacturers: 1.
Johnson Controls.
2.
Siemens Building Technology.
3.
Automatic Logic.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Electric Room Thermostats: 1.
Type: NEMA DC 3, 24 volts, with setback/setup temperature control.
2.
Service: cooling and heating.
3.
Covers: Locking with set point adjustment.
Room Thermostat Accessories: 1.
Thermostat Covers: Brushed aluminum.
2.
Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.
3.
Thermostat Guards: Metal mounted on separate base.
4.
Adjusting Key: Matching device.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
Aspirating Boxes: for thermostats requiring flush installation.
6.
Provide universal clear guard cover similar to Johnson controls.
Outdoor Reset Thermostat: 1.
Remote bulb or bimetal rod and tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable setpoint.
2.
Scale range: -10 to 70 degrees F.
E.
Immersion Thermostat: Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint and adjustable throttling range.
F.
Air-stream Thermostats:
G.
H.
I.
2.4
5.
1.
Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint in middle of range and adjustable throttling range.
2.
Averaging service remote bulb element: 7.5 feet.
3.
Furnish with flange and shield.
Electric Low Limit Duct Thermostat: 1.
Snap acting, single pole, single throw, automatic reset switch tripping when temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below set point.
2.
Bulb length: Minimum 20 feet.
3.
Furnish one thermostat for every 20 sq. ft of coil surface.
Electric High Limit Duct Thermostat: 1.
Snap acting, single pole, single throw, automatic reset switch tripping when temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or above set point.
2.
Bulb length: Minimum 20 feet.
3.
Furnish one thermostat for every 20 sq. ft of coil surface.
Fire Thermostats: 1.
UL labeled, factory set in accordance with NFPA 90A.
2.
Normally closed contacts, manual reset.
ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A.
2.5
Manufacturers: 1.
Johnson Controls.
2.
Siemens Building Controls.
3.
Automated Logic.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Enclosure Construction: NEMA 250, Type 4.
C.
Furnish alarm panel with individual indication, horn, silenced acknowledge switch, and test switch.
D.
At alarm condition indication, light flashes and alarm sounds. Horn stops when acknowledge switch is pushed and system indicates alarm conditions by continuous light until trouble condition has cleared. Alarm sounds again when second alarm occurs before first one has cleared.
E.
Furnish remote panels with duplicate functions of primary panel. Furnish alarm silence/acknowledge switch to acknowledge alarm from each panel.
F.
Furnish dry contacts at main alarm panel for use with remote alarm monitoring system to indicate each alarm condition.
CONTROL AIR DAMPERS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Johnson Controls.
2.
Siemens Building Controls.
3.
Automated Logic.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
C.
Frames: Galvanized steel, welded or riveted with corner reinforcement, minimum 12 gage.
D.
Blades: Galvanized steel, maximum blade size 8 inches wide, 48 inches long, minimum 22 gage, attached to minimum 1/2 inch shafts with set screws.
E.
Blade Seals: Neoprene mechanically attached, field replaceable.
F.
Jamb Seals: Stainless steel spring.
G.
Shaft Bearings: Graphite impregnated nylon sleeve, with thrust washers at bearings.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.6
H.
Linkage Bearings: Graphite impregnated nylon.
I.
Outside Air Damper Leakage: Maximum leakage rate of 3.0 cfm per square foot at 1.0 inches wg pressure differential.
J.
Damper Leakage: Less than 1/2 percent based on approach velocity of 2000 fpm and 4 inches wg.
K.
Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches wg.
L.
Temperature Limits: - 40 to 200 degrees F.
ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Johnson Controls.
2.
Siemens Building Controls.
3.
Automated Logic.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Operation: Reversing type proportional motor.
C.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 250 Type.
D.
Mounting: Direct mount.
E.
Stroke: 90 seconds end to end full stroke, 15 seconds return to normal for spring return.
F.
Protection: Electronic stall protection.
G.
Control Input: 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA DC.
H.
Power: Nominal 24 volt AC.
I.
Torque: Size for minimum 150 percent of required duty.
J.
Duty cycle: rated for 65,000 cycles.
K.
Accessories: 1.
Cover mounted transformer.
2.
Auxiliary potentiometer.
3.
Damper linkage.
4.
Direct drive feedback potentiometer.
5.
Output position feedback.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.7
6.
Field selectable rotational, spring return direction, field adjustable zero and span.
7.
End switch.
CONTROL VALVES A.
B.
C.
Manufacturers: 1.
Johnson Controls.
2.
Siemens Building Controls.
3.
Automated Logic.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Globe Pattern: 1.
2 inches and Smaller: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, screwed ends with back seating capacity packable under pressure.
2.
2-1/2 inches and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc.
3.
Hydronic Systems: a.
Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250 degrees F.
b.
Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel.
c.
Sizing: Size for 3 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
d.
Furnish two-way valves with equal percentage characteristics. Furnish three way valves with linear characteristics. Size two way valve actuators to close valves against pump shut off head.
Ball Valves: 1.
Threaded ends for 2-way valves 3 inches and smaller. Threaded ends for 3-way valves 2 inches and smaller.
2.
Forged brass body, chrome plated brass ball and blowout proof stem and EPDM O-rings with minimum 600 psig rating.
3.
Fluid Temperature Range: minus 20 to 250 degrees F.
4.
Sizing: 3 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
5.
Flow Characteristics: Furnish 2-way valves with equal
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD percentage characteristics. Furnish 3-way valves with equal percentage characteristic through control port and linear characteristic through bypass port. 6.
D.
Size 2-way valve actuators to close valves against pump shut off head.
Butterfly Valves: 1.
Service Pressure Rating: 125 psig at 250 degrees F.
2.
Construction: ASTM A126 cast-iron or ASTM A536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
3.
Body Style: Wafer, or Lug.
4.
Disc: Bronze.
5.
Resilient replaceable seat for service to 250 degrees F. a.
E.
Size for 1 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
Terminal Unit Control Valves: 1.
Brass body, Class 250, nickel plated brass ball, with optimizer insert for modulating applications, blow out resistant stem, threaded ends.
2.
Two or three way as indicated in schedule or on Drawings.
3.
Integral actuator.
4.
Spring return required for unit ventilator heating valves and other terminal equipment with outside air.
5.
Furnish non-spring return valves with manual override capability built into actuator.
6.
Minimum Fluid Temperature: 20 degrees F.
7.
Maximum Operating Conditions: 250 degrees F.
8.
Sizing: 4 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head.
9.
Flow Characteristics: Furnish two-way and three-way valves with equal percentage characteristics.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.8
ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Johnson Controls.
2.
Siemens Building Controls.
3.
Automated Logic.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Fully factory assembled. Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action under every condition.
C.
Motor: Permanent split-capacitor or shaded-pole type. Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Furnish spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
D.
Actuator: Direct-coupled type non-hydraulic designed for minimum 100,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque. Furnish actuator with rating of not less than twice thrust needed for actual operation of valve. 1.
Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
2.
Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
3.
Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Furnish external, manual gear release on non-spring-return actuators.
4.
Furnish spring-return actuators with manual override. Complete manual override to take no more than 10 turns.
5.
Power Requirements: a.
Two-Position Spring Return: 24 volt AC or DC, maximum 10 vA.
b.
Modulating: 24 volt AC, maximum 15 vA.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
E.
2.9
6.
Proportional Signal: 2 to 10 volt dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2 to 10 volt dc position feedback signal.
7.
Temperature Rating: minus 22 to 140 degrees F.
8.
Run Time: 200 seconds open, 40 seconds closed.
Size for torque required for valve close-off at maximum pump differential pressure, regardless of water loop system pressures.
OUTSIDE AIR MEASURING AND MODULATION DEVICE A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Johnson Controls.
2.
Siemens Building Controls.
3.
Automated Logic.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Factory assembled damper, airflow monitor, actuator, and accessories.
C.
Damper and airflow measurement assembly sized to accommodate minimum outside airflow as indicated on the Drawing and maximum 100% outside air flow.
D.
Construction: 1.
Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2.
Blades: a.
b.
Modulating Air Control: 1)
Style: Airfoil-Shaped, Single-Piece.
2)
Action: Parallel.
3)
Orientation: Horizontal.
4)
Material: Heavy Gage 6063-T5 Extruded Aluminum.
5)
Width: Maximum 5 Inches.
Stationary Sensing:
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1)
STYLE: AIRFOIL-SHAPED, SINGLE-PIECE.
2)
ORIENTATION: HORIZONTAL.
3)
MATERIAL: HEAVY GAGE 6063-T5 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM.
4)
WIDTH: MAXIMUM 5-1/4 INCHES.
5)
FINISH: ANODIZED.
3.
Bearings: Self-lubricating molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame.
4.
Seals: a.
Blade: Extruded rubber. Mechanically attached to blade edge.
b.
Jamb: Stainless steel, flexible metal compression type.
c.
Linkage: Concealed in frame.
d.
Axles: Minimum 1/2 inch diameter plated steel, hexshaped, mechanically attached to blade.
e.
Mounting: Vertical.
f.
Electric Actuator: 24 V, 60 Hz, modulating, with position feedback.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
E.
F.
5.
Digital Controller: Application specific controller. Programming logic and calibration in nonvolatile EPROM. Controller uses generic 0 - 10 vdc inputs and outputs for interface to building automation system.
6.
Air Straightener Section: 3 inches deep section contained in 5 inch long sleeve attached to damper-airflow monitor frame.
7.
Finish: Mill aluminum.
Performance Data: 1.
Temperature Rating: Withstand -40 to 140 degrees F.
2.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 5 percent.
3.
Leakage: Maximum of 2.0 cfm per square foot at 1.0 inches wg pressure differential.
4.
Measures from 15 percent to 100 percent of unit nominal air flow.
5.
Adjusts air flow for temperature variations.
6.
Provides 2 to 10 volt DC signal corresponding to actual air flow.
Accessories: 1.
2.10
Actuator Heater: Allow actuator operation in ambient temperatures to -40 degrees F.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A.
Temperature Sensors: 1.
Type: Resistance temperature detector (RTD) or thermistor.
2.
Accuracy: a.
Plus or minus 1 degree F for standard applications. Where high accuracy is required, furnish accuracy of plus or minus 0.2 degrees F.
b.
Sensing Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 degree F.
c.
Display Accuracy and Resolution: Minimum of plus or minus 1 degree F.
3.
Built-in communications port.
4.
Space Sensors: Digital with LCD display, day-night override button, and set point slide adjustment override options. Set point slide adjustment capable of being software
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD limited by automation system to limit amount of room adjustment. 5.
Outside Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, furnish with shield from direct sunlight.
6.
Duct Temperature Sensors:
7.
B.
a.
Rigid or averaging type as indicated in sequence of operations. Averaging sensor minimum length: 5 feet in length.
b.
Duct Cross Sections Greater Than 10 square feet: Furnish serpentine averaging element to sense stratified air temperatures.
Piping Temperature Sensors: Furnish with separable brass well.
Humidity Sensors: 1.
Type: Capacitance or bulk polymer resistance.
2.
Drift: Not to exceed 3 percent of full scale per year.
3.
Room Sensors:
4.
a.
Sensing Range: 0 to 100 percent.
b.
Accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity.
Duct Sensors: a.
Sensing Range: 0 to 100 percent.
b.
Accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity.
c.
Furnish with sampling chamber.
d.
Element guard.
e.
Mounting plate.
5.
Outdoor Air Humidity Sensors: a.
Sensing Range: 20 to 95 percent relative humidity.
b.
Suitable for ambient conditions of minus 40 to 170 degrees F.
c.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent relative humidity at 77 degrees F.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD d.
Element guard.
e.
Mounting plate.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
D.
E.
F.
Differential Pressure Switches: 1.
Furnish as specified in sequences of operation for status purposes in air and water applications.
2.
Fully adjustable differential pressure settings.
3.
UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum).
4.
NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure.
5.
Scale range and differential suitable for intended application.
Static Pressure Sensor: 1.
Non-directional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated.
2.
Accuracy: plus or minus 1 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.
3.
Output: 4 to 20 mA, 0-5 vDC, 0-10 vDC.
4.
Building Static Pressure Range: minus 0.1 to 0.1 inches water column, minus 0.25 to 0.25 inches water column, minus 0.5 to 0.5 inches water column, minus 1.0 to 1.0 inches water column, jumper selectable.
5.
Duct Static Pressure Range: 0 to 1 inches water column, 0 to 2.5 inches water column, 0 to 5 inches water column, 0 to 10 inches water column, jumper adjustable.
Static Pressure Sensors: 1.
Differential pressure type.
2.
Sensor range closely matched to system static pressure, minus 0.5 to 0.5 inches water column, minus 1 to 1 inches water column or 0 to 2.5 inches water column.
3.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 5 percent of sensing range.
Carbon Dioxide Sensors: 1.
Sensors designed for indoor carbon dioxide levels in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62.
2.
4 to 20 ma. linear output over range of 0 to 2000 ppm of carbon dioxide for interface to DDC control system.
3.
For duct mounted sensors furnish airtight enclosure complete with sampling tube.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 18
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD G.
H.
Air Flow Switches: 1.
Paddle or differential pressure type, as indicated in sequences of operation.
2.
UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA minimum).
3.
Appropriate scale range and differential adjustment.
4.
Adjustable sensitivity.
5.
NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure.
Water Flow Switches: 1.
Paddle type with stainless steel or bronze paddle.
2.
UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA minimum).
3.
Appropriate scale range and differential adjustment.
4.
Adjustable sensitivity.
5.
NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure.
6.
Furnish vapor proof type for chilled water applications.
I.
Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multi-channel, dual-level detectors, using solid-state sensors with 3 year minimum life, maximum 15 minute sensor replacement, suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 degrees F, calibrated for 50 and 100 ppm, with maximum 120 second response time to 100 ppm carbon monoxide.
J.
Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-state infrared sensors, suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 degrees F, calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20 mA output, and wall mounted.
K.
Oxygen Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solidstate zircon cell sensing, suitable over temperature range of minus 32 to 1100 degrees F, calibrated for 0 to 5 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20 mA output, wall mounted.
L.
Refrigerant Detectors: Dual-level detectors, using solid-state sensors, with alarm preset for 300 ppm, alarm indicator light, alarm silence light and button, alarm test light and button, and trouble light. Provide auxiliary relay preset for 150 ppm.
M.
Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity control, and 180 degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment, for flush mounting.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 19
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.11
DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR A.
B.
C.
2.12
2.13
Manufacturers: 1.
Johnson Controls.
2.
Siemens Building Controls.
3.
Automated Logic.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Product Description: NFPA 72, photoelectric type with the following features: 1.
Auxiliary SPDT relay contact.
2.
Key-operated normal-reset-test switch.
3.
Duct sampling tubes extending width of duct.
4.
Visual indication of detector actuation.
5.
Duct-mounted housing.
Furnish four-wire detector with separate power supply and signal circuits.
LIQUID FLOW METERS A.
ASME MFC-3M, calibrated venturi orifice plate and flanges with valved taps, chart for conversion of differential pressure readings to flow rate, with pressure gage in case.
B.
Annular element flow stations with meter set. 1.
Measuring Station: Stainless steel nipple section or weld insert type, rated to 275 psig at 400 degrees F, with safety shut-off valves and quick coupling connections, and permanent metal tag indicating design flow rate, reading for design flow rate, metered fluid, line size, station or location number. Accuracy of flow measuring elements shall be plus or minus 0.55 to minus 2.30 percent.
2.
Portable Meter Set: Dry single diaphragm type pressure gage with 6 inch dial pointer, stainless steel wetted metal parts, variable pulsation damper, equalizing valve, two bleed valves, and master chart for direct conversion of meter readings to flow rate, mounted in rust-proof carrying case with two ten foot long rubber test hoses with brass valves or quick connections for measuring stations.
PRESSURE GAGES
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 20
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
A.
ASME B40.1, UL 393, 2 inch diameter drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background, one percent mid-scale accuracy, scale calibrated in psi, manufactured by Trerice or equal.
B.
ASME B40.1, UL 393, 3-1/2 inch diameter cast aluminum case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front recalibration adjustment, black figures on white background, one percent mid-scale accuracy, scale calibrated in psi.
PRESSURE GAGE TAPS A.
Gage Cock:
Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psig.
B.
Needle Valve:
C.
Pulsation Damper: connections.
D.
Syphon:
Brass for maximum 275 psig. Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch
Brass, 1/4 inch angle or straight pattern.
STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS A.
ASTM E1, 7 inch scale, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish and clear glass or polycarbonate window, brass stem, 2 percent of scale accuracy to ASTM E77] scale calibrated in degrees F.
B.
ASTM E1, 7 inch scale, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish and clear glass window, brass stem, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device, 2 percent of scale accuracy to ASTM E77, scale calibrated in degrees F.
DIAL THERMOMETERS A.
ASTM E1, 2-1/2 inch diameter dial in stainless steel case, bimetallic helix actuated with silicone fluid damping, white with black markings and black pointer hermetically sealed glass lens, stainless steel stem, one percent of full scale accuracy, calibrated in degrees F.
B.
ASTM E1, 5 inch diameter dial in stainless steel case, adjustable angle with front recalibration, bimetallic helix actuated with silicone fluid damping, white with black markings and black pointer hermetically sealed glass lens, stainless steel stem, one percent of full scale accuracy, calibrated in degrees F.
THERMOMETER SUPPORTS A.
Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required, and with cap and chain.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 21
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
2.18
2.19
2.20
Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem.
TEST PLUGS A.
Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with [neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F.
B.
Test Kit: Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing two inch diameter pressure gages, two gage adapters with 1/8 inch probes, two 1-1/2 inch dial thermometers.
STATIC PRESSURE GAGES A.
3-1/2 inch diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on white background, front recalibration adjustment with tubing, static pressure tips, manufactured by Dwyer.
B.
Inclined manometer, red liquid on white background with black figures, front recalibration adjustment with tubing, static pressure tips, manufactured by Dwyer.
CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES & FLOW MEASURING METER A.
One-Half to Two Inches (1/2" - 2"): 1.
Furnish and install, as shown on the plans, "Armstrong" CBV I Circuit Balancing Valves with provision for connecting a portable CBM-60 Differential (Ft. of Hd.) Pressure Meter. Each meter connection shall have position shut-off valves.
2.
The "Armstrong" CBV I Circuit Balancing Valves shall be Globe style design and all metal parts of nonferrous, pressure die-cast, nonporous Ametel Copper Alloy. Each valve can be installed in any direction without affecting flow measurement and shall provide four (4) functions:
3.
B.
a.
Precise flow measurement.
b.
Precision flow balancing.
c.
Positive shut-off with no drip seat and teflon disc.
d.
Drain connection with protective cap.
The CBV I Valves shall have four (4) 360 degree adjustment turns of handwheel for maximum vernier-type setting with "Hidden Memory" feature to program the valve with precision Tamper-Proof Balancing Setting.
Two and One-Half to Six Inches (2-1/2" - 6"): 1.
Furnish and install, as shown on the plans, "Armstrong" CBV II Circuit Balancing Valves with provision for connecting a
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 22
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD portable CBM-60 Differential (Ft. of Hd.) Pressure Meter. Each meter connection shall have position shut-off valves. 2.
3.
C.
D.
2.21
The "Armstrong" CBV II Circuit Balancing Valves shall be Globe style design and provide three (3) functions: a.
Precise flow measurement.
b.
Precision flow balancing.
c.
Positive shut-off with no drip seat and teflon disc.
The CBV II Valves shall have eight (8) 360 degree adjustment turns of handwheel for maximum vernier-type setting with "Hidden Memory" feature to program the valve with precision Tamper-Proof Balancing Setting.
Provide an "Armstrong" CompuFlo Meter for use with Armstrong CBV Circuit Balancing Valves. The digital readout computerized meter shall be pre-programmed with CBV valve curves and shall provide five functions: 1.
Direct flow readout.
2.
Proportional balancing.
3.
Computing valve opening (handwheel setting).
4.
Differential pressure measurement.
5.
Temperature measurement.
Each Compuflo Meter shall have automatic calibration and air purging and furnished complete with all hoses, fittings and snapon connections necessary to carry out fast, accurate balancing.
FLOW INDICATORS (CIRCUIT SETTERS) A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Bell & Gossett, Model CB.
B.
Furnish and install circuit setter with meter connections as shown on plans and with manufacturer’s recommendations.
C.
Valves to be designed to allow installing contractor to pre-set balance points for proportional system balance prior to system start-up in accordance with pre-set balance schedule.
D.
All valves ½” to 3” pipe size to be of bronze body/brass ball construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves to have differential pressure read-out ports across valve seat area. Read-out ports to be fitted with internal EPT inserts and check valves. Valve bodies to have ¼” NPT tapped drain/purge port. Valves to have memory stop feature to allow valve to be
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 23
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD closed for service and then reopened to set point without disturbing balance position. All valves to have calibrated nameplates to assure specific valve settings. Valves shall be designed for positive shut-off. E.
1/2”–3” NPT connections 300 psig at 250۫ F. PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 24
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Verify air handling units and ductwork installation is complete and air filters are in place before installing sensors in air streams.
B.
Verify location of thermostats and humidistats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings before installation.
C.
Verify building systems to be controlled are ready to operate.
INSTALLATION A.
Controls contractor shall provide all necessary DDC points, hardware, software, sensor, transformers, low voltage wiring, conduits and all necessary materials for all MEP systems.
B.
The controls shall match the existing campus controls.
C.
Install thermostats, after locations are coordinated with other Work.
D.
Install thermostats, 48 inches above floor. Align with light switches.
E.
Install freeze protection thermostats using flanges and element holders.
F.
Install outdoor reset thermostats and outdoor sensors indoors, with sensing elements outdoors with sun shield.
G.
Provide separable sockets for liquids and flanges for air bulb elements. Refer to Section 23 21 16.
H.
Install thermostats in aspirating boxes in public areas entrances and as indicated on Drawings.
I.
Install guards on thermostats in public areas entrances and as indicated on Drawings.
J.
Install control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or freestanding supports. Use one cabinet for more than one system in same equipment room. Install engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and engraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face. Label with appropriate equipment or system designation.
K.
Install "hand/off/auto" selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in "hand" position.
L.
Install conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 03.
M.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 25
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3
3.4
N.
Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump. Pipe to gage.
O.
Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock to isolate each gage. Provide syphon on gages in steam systems.
P.
Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets.
Q.
Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.
R.
Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls system thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets. Where thermometers are provided on local panels, duct or pipe mounted thermometers are not required.
S.
Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 10 feet downstream of mixing dampers, coils, or other devices causing air turbulence.
T.
Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
U.
Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale.
V.
Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Indicate locations on coordination drawings.
W.
Locate test plugs adjacent to pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment. Submit data showing set points and final adjustments of controls.
C.
Test pneumatic systems to system pressure maximum of 30 psig. Check calibration of instruments. Recalibrate instruments out of calibration. Replace defective instruments.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.
B.
Demonstrate complete operation of systems, including sequence of operation prior to Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner and Construction Manager.
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 26
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD D.
Provide manual to the attendees.
E.
Section 01 82 00 – Demonstration and Training.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 09 00
PAGE 27
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 23 09 23 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Enterprise Energy Management System Requirements 1.
LASC Requirements and Objective a.
2.
VENDOR will create and host a LASC website (www.LASCEnergy.com) for LASC, where individual users, managers, as well as various departments, may login and view their energy consumption, as well as the status of their energy consuming processes, such as HVAC, lighting, etc., against energy saving targets. LASC Engineers will also be able to login to this Enterprise Energy Management System (EEM) website and have full two-way command over a limited and selected number of points in their control systems, which would eliminate the need to travel to a facility or piece of equipment, provided they are included.
Functional Requirements a.
LASC will have the ability to create custom user types (called “roles”) in the EEM platform, with detailed control over access rights, and focused graphing and reporting of relevant data for specific users, similar but not exclusive to the following 3 user types: 1)
BASIC USER, READ-ONLY, DASHBOARD WITH HIGH-LEVEL INFO, INTUITIVE TO USE
2)
MANAGEMENT USER, READ-ONLY, FINANCIALS, TRENDS, TARGETS, TRACKING, ANALYSIS
3)
TECHNICIAN USER, ABILITY TO CONTROL INPUTS AND SYSTEMS, ADJUST SETTINGS.
b.
LASC will have the administrative security settings to create and control each level and user type. The Basic User type is intended for venue managers to monitor venue level performance against reduction targets.
c.
In addition, the EEM will keep a running list of endusers’ total energy and financial savings, achieved through the confirmation of equipment scheduling adjustments.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.
4.
d.
Through the portal, there will be a 3D Geographical Information System (GIS) representation of normalized and forecasted functions; a satellite/map/figure of the red, yellow, green and blue status of major systems or pieces of equipment selected to monitor.
e.
Users will have the option of exporting data by simply clicking hyperlinks labeled “Print”, “Export to Excel” and “Save/Print as PDF” to export data and views from the EEM system. Data will be automatically and properly formatted by the EEM system in a printed friendly format – arranged for an 8.5” x 11” paper in a way that is visually pleasing. The system will not simply unload raw, unformatted data into an Excel spreadsheet in a way that “Comma Separated Value” (CSV) does, or simply print the current webpage to PDF.
Financial Requirements a.
Energy and financial ratios will be developed and displayed within the website’s analysis section revealing hidden proportional relationships between data variables, such as the cost of running equipments under different operating parameters.
b.
The EEM will provide simple and easy to use, realtime and historical analysis of equipment scheduling and efficiency, as well as detailed financial analysis outlining the cost/savings associated with every energy consuming process integrated into the EMS. All financial calculations will be based on LASCS' detailed rate structure with appropriate utilities to provide end-users with the actual cost/savings associated with all energy management decisions. The system will provide a “before” and projected “after” view, contrasting the financial impacts of process control adjustments. Additional information to be tracked and analyzed will include theme park attendance, operational hours and weather trends. When looking up data, LASC will have the ability to customize time periods to their financial calendar.
Environmental Requirements a.
The system will integrate Greenhouse Gas emissions factors for different energy uses, in order to track GHG emissions, and the ability to update those factors as they change from time to time based on LASC tracked variables. This GHG data will allow carbon footprint calculations from the facility level all the way up to the site level, and provide trending over time. The system will also give the ability to manipulate data points across time and apply a factor or series of factors (rate, schedule,
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD weather, GHG ratios) in order to compare different scenarios and outcomes. b.
5.
LASC would like the ability to upload comparison factors for graphing and comparison (attendance, temperature, operating hours, utility rates…or any spreadsheet, time-based parameter). LASC would also like to see if it is possible to feed energy saving savings information directly to their utilities for rebate purposes, and to pull info from utilities for rate schedules, demand response, etc.
Features and Functionality: a.
Multiple data sources networked together through the EEM platform to an enterprise dashboard
b.
Ability to provide feedback to the field via reports
c.
The ability to execute; and then measure and verify effectiveness of energy strategies which reduce energy usage and ultimately save money.
d.
Accomplish the majority of the functional requirements previously outlined above
e.
Built in scheduling logic and control of the HVAC and control systems tied to the LASC scheduling systems; to detect occupancy for the purposes of performing Demand Control Ventilation (DCV) without having to use hardware and discrete CO2 sensors.
f.
Perform Demand Management (Demand Response) by overriding the existing HVAC equipment room temperature set points in order to more efficiently cool and condition the theatres and other venues, from an energy management standpoint. This will be accomplished through the use of occupancy detection to gauge load and/or “pre-cooling” strategies enacted because of weather forecasts.
g.
Integrate occupancy data feeds and “run-time” counters on mechanical equipment in order to coordinate and better perform Statistical Preventative Maintenance (SPM)
h.
Enable anonymous user (guest) login for viewing of canned reports; possibly through links delivered via e-mail, etc.
i.
VENDOR shall use software-based Gateway applications to connect LASCS existing open, proprietary and legacy building control, metering, maintenance and other systems together seamlessly; using a pure, webbased (HTTP, XML, Web Services) architecture. The use of replacement, "shadow" or hardware based field
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD devices or "hardware-based boxes" of any kind will be unacceptable. VENDOR must be able to connect (two-way control) into the majority of LASC systems. 6.
7.
IT / Network / Computer Requirements a.
All data and views will be fully accessible and displayable via standard web pages using LASC corporate standard Microsoft Internet Explorer 6, 7 or 8. No additional web-browser plug-in shall be required of any kind (ActiveX), with the exception of Adobe/Macromedia Flash plug-in, Microsoft Virtual Earth, the Microsoft .NET based ChartFX Charting control, the Crystal Reports viewer and JavaScript. Server-side processing such as PHP or ASP.NET is fine. The EEM portal is built using the .NET framework 2.0.
b.
All energy and financial analysis (reports, graphs, charts, user calculators, etc.) must be 100% accessible online through the EEM web-site. There will be no software, of any kind, required by endusers, with the exception of the components mentioned above, in order to view energy consumption, energy process status, or to view/perform energy and/or financial analysis whatsoever.
c.
VENDOR will use Gateway applications running on a LASC web-application server/network which will capture building control and other data. Equipment interfaces between the third-party equipment and LASC systems are the responsibility of VENDOR. All devices must be approved by LASCS IT, especially as it relates to network security and virus protection and must pass LASCS IT security scan. LASCS IT will provide access outside of their network for VENDOR devices, but it is VENDORS responsibility to retrieve and transmit the data from LASC sites to Vendor’s data repository and central server(s). VENDOR must provide support for their devices every day that LASC is open, and procedures for LASCs personnel to follow in the event of an equipment failure.
d.
Data such as schedules and occupancy will be obtained directly from LASC. LASC would also like to have the EEM connect directly to LASC’s other relevant systems such as CMMS for asset management and facility maintenance. All data obtained through the EEM system shall remain the property of LASC, even after termination of any contract with VENDOR.
Computer Requirements a.
Vendor to include 1 complete set-up with LASC computer requirements (Dell, HP or Compaq brand recommended)
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1)
2)
HARDWARE a)
Dual Core Processor
b)
1.0 GB RAM
c)
Network Connection (100BaseT Ethernet typical)
OPERATING SYSTEM(S) a)
3)
GRAPHICS (OPTIONAL, BUT DESIRABLE) a)
4)
TBD
Network Addressing 1)
STATIC IP ADDRESS ASSIGNMENTS
2)
ALLOW DIRECT IP ADDRESSING BETWEEN VENDOR SERVER AND THE GATEWAY SERVERS IN EACH LASC LOCATION
c.
Network Connectivity- Port 80 (default) access from each Gateway servers. This can be changed to another port if port 80 is already used)
d.
External System Access 1)
REMOTE EEM SERVER AND THE GATEWAY CONFIGURATION AND COMMISSIONING a)
2)
8.
NVIDEA GeForce graphics card
GATEWAY SERVERS a)
b.
Windows™ XP or Vista
SERVERS
Secure Terminal Services/Remote Desktop connection (Port 3389)
REMOTE EEM DIAGNOSTICS
SERVER
SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE
AND
a)
Secure Terminal Services/Remote Desktop Connection (Port 3389)
b)
User Account with Administrator rights on VENDOR Gateway servers
Customized Applications: a.
The Vendor shall integrate all existing infrastructure components into the systems network database, including Electrical, Plumbing, Water, Gas and other utilities, to provide specific customized
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD information to Administration, Maintenance and Operations, IT and Security divisions of the LASC campus. The system shall have spare capacity to add for future components. Training shall be included for each of the divisions in their specific applications. 9.
Energy Savings and Facility Management Benefits: a.
10.
Experienced Vendor: a.
1.2
Energy Management System will provide significant savings beyond the installation of energy saving devices with the integration and optimization of systems operations. Vendor must demonstrate how and where the proposed systems provided measurable energy savings (minimum of 10%) over one year of operation at other facilities. In addition, the systems integrator shall show specific examples of manpower reductions in Facility Operations and Maintenance at other institutions as a direct result of the system operation. The Vendor shall demonstrate payback period for the system based to energy savings and reduced management costs achieved at other institutions.
Services shall be provided by an experienced service provider (Vendor) with a proven track record of minimum five years experience in similar applications. The vendor shall provide at least two references with similar facilities and systems. The Vendor shall guarantee a yearly fee for services to be fixed for five years, renewable on an annual basis. The Vendor shall be Phoenix Energy Technologies or approved equal.
B.
Section includes control equipment and software.
C.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: Control system components.
2.
Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of operation implemented using products specified in this section.
3.
Section 25 50 00 - Integrated Automation Facility Controls: For overall building automation and control systems.
4.
Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this section.
5.
Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC.
REFERENCES
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A.
American National Standards Institute: 1.
1.3
ANSI MC85.1 - Terminology for Automatic Control.
SCOPE OF WORK A.
Special Note: The Direct Digital Control system shall be completed by designed and built by the Contractor. (Refer also to other section of the specifications and contract documents).
B.
Install thermostats, humidistats, other sensors and provide all interlock wiring and wiring from field devices to manufacturer’s control panels, controllers, monitoring panels and other devices for equipment specified elsewhere, and as indicated on the drawings including: 1.
Air handling units.
2.
Exhaust Fans
3.
VFD’s
4.
All Mechanical and Plumbing equipments and systems.
5.
Electrical equipment and system.
6.
All Lighting Controls
C.
Provide shutdown of certain mechanical equipment during loss of normal utility power as described in Division 26 section “Power Monitoring System”.
D.
The system shall function on three levels, a management level, Ethernet network based on TCP/IP protocol that also incorporates BACnet interfacing capabilities, a high performance peer-to-peer building level network and a DDC controller floor level network. Access to any of these levels must be totally transparent to user when accessing data or developing control programs.”
E.
The BMS shall be capable of total integration of the facility infrastructure systems with user access to all system data either locally over a secure Intranet within the building or by remote access by a standard Web Browser over the Internet.
F.
The BMS shall communicate to third party systems such as chillers, boilers, lighting control energy metering systems, fire-life safety systems and other building management related devices with open, interoperable communication capabilities.
G.
All materials and equipment used shall be manufacturer’s latest standard components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed specially for this project.
H.
Provide operational and maintenance manual from the manufacturer.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.4
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and supplementary Conditions and Division-1 specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
Products furnished but not installed under this section: 1.
C.
Coordination with electrical: 1.
1.5
Valves, flow switches, flow sensors, thermo wells, and pressure taps to be installed under Division 23.
Installation of all line voltage power wiring connection to Division 15 equipment by division 16.
D.
Each motor starter provided under Division 16, shall be furnished with individual control power transformer to supply 120-volt control power, control relay, and auxiliary contacts (one N.O. and one N.C.) for use by this section.
E.
Fire Alarm & Lighting control systems shall be furnished with compatible gateways to allow integration to the BMS system. See specifications for scope of work
F.
Wiring of any electrical sub-metering devices furnished by BMS Contractor.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Automatic temperature controls field monitoring and control system using field programmable microprocessor based units with communications to Building Automation and Control System specified in Section 25 50 00.
B.
Base system on distributed system of fully intelligent, standalone controllers, operating in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on token passing network, with central and remote hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.
C.
Provide computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, control units, local area networks (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators.
D.
Provide controls for variable air volume terminals, reheat coils, unit heaters, fan coils, and all mechanical equipment when directly connected to control units. Individual terminal unit control is specified in Section 23 09 00.
E.
Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers and operators, indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories to operate mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified.
F.
Provide installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments,
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD and fine tuning necessary for complete and fully operational system.
1.6
G.
Work of this section includes engineering, furnishing, testing and commissioning a completely operational Building Management System. All items specified in these and related sections, indicated on the drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation shall be provided.
H.
All necessary electrical work, including control wiring, interlock wiring, devices and equipment shall be provided by the BMS contractor. All power wiring required for BMS equipment, including starters, circuit breakers, wiring conduit and fittings shall be provided by the BMS contractor.
I.
Provide integration to the lighting control system with signals to lighting contactors and lighting relays. Provide integration to the Fire Alarm system to allow monitoring of alarm, trouble, and supervisory conditions
J.
Install all sensors, thermostats, interlock wiring and other devices and equipment that may be furnished with equipment specified in other Division 15 sections.
K.
Provide all testing, calibration, programming, debugging and system adjusting as specified. Assist in the startup and commissioning of each system.
L.
Provide training for the owner’s operating personnel as specified.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate the following: 1.
Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control-unit locations and trunk data conductors.
2.
Connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.
3.
System graphics showing monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations. Submit demonstration diskette containing graphics.
4.
System configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections.
5.
Description and sequence of operation for operating, user, and application software.
6.
Use terminology in submittals conforming to ASME MC85.1.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 7.
Coordinate submittals with information requested in Section 23 09 93.
C.
Product Data: Submit data for each system component and software module and operational and maintenance manual from the manufacturer.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instruction for each control system component.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F.
Submit 10 complete sets of documentation in the following phased delivery schedule: 1.
Valve schedule
2.
Equipment data cut sheets
3.
System schematics, including:
4. G.
a.
Sequence of operations
b.
Point names
c.
Point addresses
d.
Point to point wiring
e.
Interface wiring diagrams
f.
Panel layouts
g.
System riser diagrams
AutoCAD compatible as-built drawings
Upon project completion, submit operation and maintenance manuals, consisting of the following: 1.
Index sheet, listing contents in alphabetical order
2.
Manufacturer's equipment parts list of all functional components of the system, disk of system schematics, including wiring diagrams
3.
Description of sequence of operations
4.
As-Built interconnection wiring diagrams
5.
User’s documentation containing product, system architectural and programming information.
6.
Trunk cable schematic showing remote electronic panel
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD locations, and all trunk data 7.
List of connected data points, including panels to which they are connected and input device (valves, relays, sensors, etc.)
8.
Conduit routing diagrams
9.
Copy of the warranty
10.
Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions
11.
Recommended spare parts list
H.
Paragraphs D, E and F are required to be a single submittal. Information shall be submitted in three ring binders, logically divided into sections with a detailed table of contents for each section. All information shall be either letter size or folded tabloid size. If tabloid size floor plans are not legible, include, along with the tabloid sheets, half size floor plans for use in reviewing the plans. System graphics submittal shall be submitted and approved prior to starting graphics installation.
I.
Submit preprinted manufacturer’s descriptions and specification sheets showing compliance with specifications including performance, dimensions, ratings, applicable agency listings and approvals, model numbers, accessories and other data for each type of equipment and device, including:.
J.
1.
Other BMS equipment including DDC controllers, terminal unit controllers, network controllers, file servers. Provide project-specific schedule indicating use of each device.
2.
Sensors, transducers and other field devices. Provide project specific schedule listing each type of sensor and field device, manufacturer and model number, and use .(i.e. Manufacturer Model XXX - air handler static pressure sensor). Cross reference schedule to product data sheets.
3.
Valves, damper and operators: Provide project specific schedule listing each type of valve, damper operator, manufacturer and model number, and use .(i.e. Manufacturer Model XXX - VAV reheat terminal heating valve). Cross reference schedule to product data sheets.
Submit project specific diagrams, charts and schedules including the following. 1.
Control diagrams: diagrams for each piece of equipment such as air handlers or system such as chilled water system. Diagrams shall include schematic representation of the system showing all equipment, controlled or monitored devices. All field devices shall be indicated, including BMS point names, manufacturer and model number of devices. Cross reference each field device and control component
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD with product data submittal required above. Diagrams shall include point- to- point wiring diagrams indicating DDC panel or unitary controller identification and terminations and power connections.
K.
2.
Control panel drawings showing all equipment such as DDC controllers, power supplies, battery backup, additional I/O modules with dimensions panel construction.
3.
Written sequences of operation.
4.
Third party control system interface diagrams. Including point to point wiring diagrams with clear indications of BMS furnished devices and wiring and equipment supplier furnished wiring and devices.
5.
I/O point list with addresses for all devices. For each system or individual piece of equipment show all control or monitoring points, point type (analog in, digital out, etc) field device reference and system point address.
6.
Valve schedules showing each specific control valve and operator, valve identification tag, valve use, valve location, size, flow and pressure drop characteristics, valve and operator part number. Cross reference with control diagrams and product data.
7.
Controller schedule showing each specific DDC controller and unitary controller, manufacturer’s model number, equipment served, controller location, controller power requirement electrical panel used for power source, circuit number and circuit electrical load. Where controllers are required to be housed in control panels, provide diagrams indicating panel dimensions, NEMA ratings, DDC modules, power supplies and other equipment to be mounted in the panels.
Submit project specific floor plans, sections and details showing all BMS equipment locations, device identification and address, coordinated with schedules and diagrams noted above. Drawings shall also indicate BMS network routing and interface points with other systems and trades. Submitted data shall include the following: 1.
Site plans showing the facility fiber optic fiber cable routing. Indicate all splice points, terminations and building entry points and interface devices.
2.
Building floor plans showing all DDC controllers, unitary controllers, network routing.
3.
Electrical power distribution drawings, indicating location of all equipment requiring electrical power, circuiting information, motor sizes, materials used and connections to building electrical panels. Obtain approval of Architect before proceeding with the work. AutoCAD background
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD drawings of this project shall be provided by the Owner.
1.7
1.8
L.
Startup and checkout procedures. Submit detailed procedures to be used for starting the BMS and for checking operability of hardware and software.
M.
During the warranty period the contractor shall guarantee a twohour on-line response, and if required, a four-hour on-site response time to all owner initiated calls involving defects due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.
B.
Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping control devices to unit manufacturer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors.
C.
D. 1.9
1.
Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.
2.
Submit data specified in "Submittals" in final "Record Documents" form.
Operation and Maintenance Data: 1.
Submit interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified and numbered, system components and devices.
2.
Submit keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.
3.
Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances.
Section 01 78 36 - Warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
The BMS shall be furnished and installed by the control systems manufacturer only. The work shall be performed by skilled technicians under the direction of experienced engineers and technicians, all of whom shall be factory trained and certified to be qualified for this work. Contractor shall have a minimum of ten year’s experience in installing BMS of similar scope.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
BMS contractor shall be responsible for the complete design, installation startup and proper operation of the BMS and shall include debugging and proper calibration of each component in the system.
C.
All materials, equipment and software shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and other systems and not custom designed for this project. All systems and components shall be thoroughly tested and proves in actual use for two years.
D.
All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 15, Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference and be so labeled.
E.
BMS shall comply with UL 916 PAZX and 864 UUKL and be so listed at the time of bid.
F.
BMS vendor shall be capable of providing 24- hour per day, 365days peer year same day on- site service for the completed system, with technicians and engineers capable of providing routine service and emergency service on all system components.
G.
The system shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by the manufacturers' local factory branch office. Bids by dealers, wholesalers, distributors shall not be acceptable. The controls contractor shall have factory-trained technicians to provide instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency service within 4 hours on-site upon receipt of request.
H.
At the time of bid, all BMS Application Specific Controllers and Programmable Equipment Controllers shall be listed as follows:
I.
1.
American Society for testing and materials, ASTM
2.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, IEEE
3.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA
4.
Underwriters Laboratory, UL 916 and 864 UDTZ
5.
FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 156
6.
National Fire Protection Association, NFPA
7.
Local building codes
The Manufacturer of the BMS digital controllers shall provide documentation supporting compliance with ISO-9001 (Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing). Product literature provided by the BMS digital controller manufacturer shall contain the ISO-9001 Certification Mark from the applicable registrar.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.10
1.11
1.12
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination.
B.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.
1.13
1.14
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
WARRANTY A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for direct digital controls.
C.
Section 01 78 36 – Warranties.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.
B.
Furnish service and maintenance of control systems for two years from Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Furnish complete service of controls systems, including callbacks. Make minimum of 10 complete normal inspections of approximately 8 hours duration in addition to normal service calls to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls. Submit written report after each inspection.
D.
Furnish four complete inspections per year, one in each season, to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls. Submit written report after each inspection.
E.
Examine unit components semi-monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.
F.
Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of unit, and controls checkout and adjustments. Repair or replace
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD parts in accordance with manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment.
1.15
1.16
G.
Perform work without removing units from service during building normal occupied hours.
H.
Provide emergency call back service during working hours for this maintenance period.
I.
Maintain locally, near Place of the Work, adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes. Have personnel available to ensure fulfillment of this maintenance service, without unreasonable loss of time.
J.
Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under supervision of manufacturer or original installer.
K.
Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B.
Furnish two printer ink cartridges and cartons of printer paper.
CONTROLS REQUIREMENTS AND OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES A.
Do not change (rotate) equipment operation based on run time. Track and display run time, but the lead / lag staging shall be user defined and easily changed.
B.
BMS supplier shall provide method of filtering or dampening high frequency variation in the output signals of fluid float measuring devices.
C.
Provide positive positioning devices (pilot positioners or electronic actuators with internal positive positioning feed back) when more than one device is driven by a common output signal (dampers). These same positioning devices shall be used when driving a single device, control valve etc., other than two position devices (non-modulating devices)
D.
Differential pressure switches, shall be used to prove chiller flow. The switches shall be installed across the evaporator and condenser bundles. The operating differential pressure with the chiller running shall be mid-range of the specified differential pressure switch.
E.
Electric power (120V) to the DDC boxes shall be run to the DDC boxes by the electrical contractor and the boxes served by each breaker shall be identified in the panel directory. Provide min. 12” clearance in front of DDC controller for service.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD F.
DDC boxes that close the damper to automatically calibrate the transducer shall have a method of disabling the automatic feature, manually commanding a calibration, and adjusting the time between automatic re-calibration of the box.
G.
Averaging air temperature sensors shall be used with an accuracy of +/- 0.3 F over their full range. Use serpentine capillary type air sensors with the length of tube to calculated at every 1’ long serpentine tube for every one square feet of duct/coil cross section area. Averaging sensors shall be used for mixed air and preheat air sensors.
H.
Probe type temperature sensors shall be used with an accuracy of +/- 0.3 F over their full range.
I.
Air flow measuring stations shall be furnished and installed by AHU manufacturer. Duct installed humidifiers shall be the straight length of duct required between the humidifier dispersion tube and duct fittings, the controlling limit humidity sensor, any filter located downstream, and the high limit humidistat.
J.
The DDC system shall include a trend viewing utility that shall have access to all data base points. It shall be possible to display trend data in histogram (X-Y plots) format without exporting the data to another application.
K.
The output of the differential pressure transducers used to control the speed of VSFD driven pumps shall be hard wired to the DDC controller driving the pump, rather than the output being passed through the network.
L.
The global combination outdoor temperature/humidity sensor used to supply the DDC input for calculation of enthalpy for control of AHUs designed for economizer operation shall be a “HyCal” model accurate to within 1% from 10 to 80% RH.
M.
Integrator cards shall be provided for all mechanical, electrical, and plumbing equipment by BMS supplier that makes all the MEP equipment parameters available to the BMS system. All MEP equipment parameters shall be mapped into the DDC system.
N.
The AHU outside air cfm shall be a calculated by software point that can be displayed and alarmed.
O.
The BMS graphics shall have a display that lists all AHU discharge air temperatures, their set points, chilled water valve positions, outside air cfm, outside air set point, and the economizer damper positions on a single display. Parameters outside the user specified control tolerance shall change colors and flash.
P.
For the variable speed heating hot water pumps system, use the following control sequence. Start the lead secondary pump when any chiller is required. Modulate to maintain adjustable differential pressure. When VSFD speed is greater than 95%
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD (adj.) for 10 minutes, start the second pump and command both with same required speed. When VFD speed is less than 60% (adj.) for 15 minutes, stop the second pump. Q.
Fire alarm system shutdown of the AHU and fire/smoke dampers operation: 1.
Upon signal from the fire alarm system the supply, the return and all interlocked exhaust fans shall stop. All outside air and relief dampers shall close. Al fire/smoke and smoke dampers shall also close. The chilled water valve shall close the preheat/hot water valve shall remain under control.
2.
Upon smoke detection by an area smoke detector zone, all fire smoke dampers serving from that particular air handling unit system shall shut down, including air handlers, exhaust fans, etc. Closing and opening status of all of the fire smoke dampers shall have indicator light at the Fire alarm control panel in the facility Operator Room in the Basement. Upon clearing of smoke and reset by Fire Alarm system, all the fire/smoke dampers shall be remotely reset through Fire Alarm Control Panel, located in the Facility Operator Room. Only upon positive confirmation of open conditions of all fire-smoke dampers of that particular AH system, AH unit fan shall start. Fire/smoke dampers shall close after 15 seconds time delay from the fan shutdown and shall open 15 seconds prior to fan start. This is to protect ductwork from possible damage if all fire-smoke dampers are not fully open or close. Positive open or close conditions of the fire dampers will confirmed through two end-switches located at each fire-smoke damper.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS A.
B.
2.2
Manufacturers: 1.
Automated Logic.
2.
Johnson Controls.
3.
Siemens.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
All manufacturers shall be Lonworks compatible, provide all adaption as required.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION A.
BMS system shall be a direct digital control (DDC) system with local DDC controllers, unitary controllers, facility network, building networks, central operator’s workstation, portable operator interfaces and other equipment.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 18
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.3
B.
The Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers.
C.
Network Area Controllers (NAC’s) for distributed system applications, databases and networking functions.
D.
Programmable Equipment Controllers (PEC’s) for control of primary mechanical systems and distributed system applications. Controllers shall be fully programmable to create custom control solutions.
E.
Application Specific Controllers (ASC’s) for control of CAV terminal units, fan coil terminal units, Unit Vent terminal units, Heat Pump units and other terminal equipment.
F.
Graphical User Interface (GUI), which includes the hardware and software necessary for a user to interface with the control system and devices.
G.
The physical network shall use polarity insensitive twisted pair wiring and support star, home run, multi-drop, loop, or a mixture of these wiring topologies. The network shall communicate at a minimum 119 Kbps.
H.
All components and controllers supplied under this contract shall be true “peer-to-peer” communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable.
I.
Communication and integration to the chiller control panels and Variable Speed Drives shall be accomplished utilizing standard communication interfaces between the equipment manufacturer and the building management system contractor.
J.
Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 15 seconds for network connected user interfaces. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up connected user interfaces.
NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) A.
The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall provide the interface between the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the NAC. Unit may be a integrated into operator work station or a separate panel. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: 1.
Calendar functions
2.
Scheduling
3.
Trending
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 19
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 4.
Alarm monitoring and routing
5.
Time synchronization
6.
Integration of controller data
7.
Network Management functions for all devices
B.
The NAC shall provide multiple, concurrent user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. A database resident on the NAC shall be an ODBC-compliant database or must provide an ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it.
C.
The NAC shall be capable to support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 2 simultaneous users.
D.
The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.
E.
1.
The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up, telephone connection, or wide-area network.
2.
Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to: a.
To alarm
b.
Return to normal
c.
To fault
3.
Provide for the creation of an unlimited number of alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.
4.
Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
5.
Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control.
Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as user defined: 1.
Screen message text
2.
Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route and email alarms based on:
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 20
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
F.
a.
Day of week
b.
Time of day
c.
Recipient
3.
Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message
4.
Graphic with flashing alarm object(s)
5.
Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer
The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum): 1.
Time and date
2.
Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.)
3.
Equipment (air handler #, access way, etc.)
4.
Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.
5.
Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.
G.
Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or classes of alarms defined by the user.
H.
A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by the user.
I.
Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.
J.
A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and available for review by the user.
K.
An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for review by the user.
L.
Data Collection and Storage 1.
The NAC shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store this data for future use.
2.
The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NAC that shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties:
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 21
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Designating the log as interval or deviation.
b.
For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the sample collection interval.
c.
For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, shall initiate logging of the object.
d.
For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log and to set whether the log shall stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis.
e.
Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a user-defined event or action.
3.
All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAC and the data shall be accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web Browser.
4.
All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using standard SQL statements.
5.
All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats:
6.
M.
a.
a.
HTML
b.
XML
c.
Plain Text
d.
Comma or tab separated values
The NAC shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally (to itself), or remotely to a server or other NAC on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following archiving properties, at a minimum: a.
Archive on time of day
b.
Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the buffer (size)
c.
Archive when buffer has reached it’s user-defined capacity
Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 22
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD the ability to archive the log locally (to the NAC), to another NAC on the network, or to a server. For each log entry, provide the following data:
N.
2.4
a.
Time and date
b.
User ID
c.
Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.
The NAC shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database shall be backed up based on a userdefined time interval. 1.
Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored in the NAC. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the userdefined database save interval.
2.
The NAC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format is supported.
PROGRAMMABLE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS (PEC) A.
Programmable Equipment Controllers (PEC’s) shall be stand-alone, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processors with an embedded network database.
B.
The PEC’s shall communicate on the peer-to-peer building level network. Provide a minimum of 72 MB random access memory in each PEC.
C.
The PEC must communicate peer-to-peer with the all of the network application specific and programmable controllers sharing alarming, trending, scheduling and totalization information.
D.
Programming of the PEC shall be accomplished by using graphical software that incorporates drag and drop capabilities. The PEC software database must be able to execute all of the specified mechanical system controls functions. The programming software shall be able to bundle software logic to simplify control sequencing. All values, which make up the PID output value, shall be readable and modifiable at a workstation or portable service tool. Each input, output, or calculation result shall be capable of being shared/bound with any controller or interface device on the network.
E.
PEC’s shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines. 1.
A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other PEC’s on the
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 23
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.
2.5
Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator I/O devices.
F.
Each PEC shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace hardware. The upgrades can be accomplished remotely over the peer to peer network and/or by visiting each controller.
G.
Each PEC shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, which include communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all components. The PEC shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication.
H.
In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all PEC’s to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. 1.
Upon restoration of normal power, the PEC shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention.
2.
All PEC’s control programming and databases must be stored in Flash memory, therefore eliminating data loss, downtime and re-load time.
I.
Provide a separate PEC for each AHU or other HVAC system. system points shall reside on a single controller.
All
J.
Historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or automatically sample and store system data for selected points. Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point, regardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored. Two methods of collection shall be allowed either by a pre-defined time interval or upon a pre-defined change of value. Sample intervals of l minute to 7 days shall be provided. The PEC shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data. All trend data shall be available for transfer to a Workstation without manual intervention.
APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC) A.
Each Application Specific Controller (ASC) shall operate as a stand-alone compliant controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independent of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a minimum 10-BIT microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-user, real time digital control processor.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 24
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.6
2.7
B.
Network access shall be accomplished at the ASC room sensor or the ASC. System node access shall be available from connecting to the room sensor jack. Systems that do not have a system access jack from the room sensor shall provide a dedicated network jack next to each room sensor.
C.
Controllers shall include all inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences. Analog and digital outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 0-10V and 3point floating control allowing for interface to a variety of industry standard modulating actuators. The ASC inputs and outputs shall consist of industry standards types. Inputs shall be electrically isolated from outputs, communications and power. All inputs shall be provided with an auto-calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors.
D.
All controller sequences and operation shall provide closed loop control of the intended application. Closing control loops over the network is not acceptable.
E.
The ASC must be mounted remotely from the room sensor. ASC’s, that are wall mounted with integral room sensors, are not acceptable.
F.
The control program shall reside in the ASC. The application program configuration information shall be stored in nonvolatile memory with no battery back up.
G.
After a power failure the ASC must run the control application using the current setpoints and configuration.
GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE WORKSTATION HARDWARE (DESKTOP) A.
The desktop computer shall be an Intel Pentium IV based computer (minimum processing speed of 2.5 GHz with 1000 MB RAM and a 250gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a 32X CD-ROM drive, 3.5” floppy drive, a 100 MB Zip drive, 2-parallel ports, 2-asynchronous serial ports and 2-USB ports. A minimum 19”, 28dot pitch SVGA (1024 x 768) color monitor with a minimum 80 Hz refresh rate shall also be included. Locate workstation as shown on plans.
B.
A system printer shall be provided. Printer shall be laser type with a minimum 600 x 600-dpi resolution and rated for 8 PPM print speed minimum.
C.
Provide a separate color printer for printing of dynamic trend graph report, Excel reports, graphics and any other screen displays.
GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE WORKSTATION HARDWARE (LAPTOP COMPUTER) A.
The laptop computer shall consist of an Intel Pentium IV based laptop computer (minimum processing speed of 2.0 GHZ with 1000 MB RAM and a 40 -gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a CD-ROM drive, a 3.5” floppy drive and appropriate connectors and
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 25
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD cables for communication connection to the NAC, system controllers, Ethernet and BACnet network. 2.8
GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE (GUI) A.
Operator workstations must be capable of supporting any compliant product. The operator shall not be able to distinguish the DDC points from different manufacturers when commanding, monitoring points or acknowledging alarms.
B.
The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that allows the user to run several applications simultaneously. The GUI software shall run on a Windows 2000 XP operating system. The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft Word, Excel, and other Windows based software packages, while concurrently annunciating on-line BMS alarms and monitoring information. If the software is unable to display several different types of displays at the same time, the BMS contractor shall provide at least 2 operator workstations at location specified.
C.
Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical features and functions: 1.
Graphic screens package capable format. Use of be acceptable. background, the pictures.
shall be developed using any drawing of generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file proprietary graphic file formats shall not In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic GUI shall support the use of scanned
2.
A gallery of HVAC and automation symbols shall be provided including fans, valves, motors, chillers, AHU systems, standard ductwork diagrams and symbols. The user shall have the ability to add custom symbols to the gallery as required.
3.
Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic screens.
4.
Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for assignment to a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.
5.
Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner. a.
Schedule times shall be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
b.
Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 26
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD operator.
D.
6.
Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by mouse command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.
7.
Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by mouse command using a graphical slider to adjust the value. No entry of text shall be required.
System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the following tasks, with proper password access: 1.
Create, delete or modify control strategies.
2.
Add/delete objects to the system.
3.
Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters.
4.
Enable or disable control strategies.
5.
Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer.
6.
Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state.
7.
Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of values automatically.
E.
On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext. All system documentation and help files shall be in HTML format.
F.
Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operators’ access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.
G.
System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 27
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD H.
The system shall be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This window shall notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm Console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator. 1.
2.9
When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window shall supersede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or closed by the operator. This window shall notify the operator of new alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm notification windows or banners that can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not be acceptable.
WEB BROWSER CLIENTS A.
The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client machine, or manufacture-specific browsers shall not be acceptable.
B.
The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the Web browser. Web page access and control shall be from system Network Area Controllers, not from the Workstation. This prevents the problem of no access to Web pages if the Workstation is turned off.
C.
The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted. The browser shall include background refresh software to all real-time updates without use of a refresh button. No additional software shall be required at the remote Internet location other than a standard web browser.
D.
The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions: 1.
User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented.
2.
Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported by the Web browser interface.
3.
HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web page. HTML editing of the Web
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 28
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format.
2.10
4.
Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network Area Controller (NAC), without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.
5.
Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page.
6.
User’s shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following: a.
Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points in a graphical manner. Schedule times shall be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
b.
Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.
c.
View logs and charts
d.
View and acknowledge alarms
7.
The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.
8.
Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.
NETWORK MANAGEMENT A.
The Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall provide network management of all networks. These networks include BACnet and the management peer-to-peer building and floor levels of network communication.
B.
Network management shall include the following services: device identification, device installation, device configuration, device diagnostics, device maintenance and network variable binding.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 29
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.11
C.
The Network configuration tool shall also provide diagnostics to identify devices on the network, to reset devices, and to view health and status counters within devices.
D.
The network management database shall be resident in the Network Area Controller (NAC), ensuring that anyone with proper authorization has access to the network management database at all times. Systems employing network management databases that are not resident, at all times, and within the control system shall not be accepted.
FIELD DEVICES A.
Provide automatic control valves, automatic control dampers, thermostats, clocks, sensors, controllers, and other components as required for complete installation. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard control system components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Temperature Sensors 1.
General: Provide platinum thermistor type duct, outside air, duct averaging, remote probe, and immersion temperature sensors with sensing elements and signal transmitters. All sensors of a particular category shall be of the same type manufacturer and shall have an interchangeability of +0.1% at the reference temperature. Sensors requiring field calibration are not acceptable. Linearizing, ranging and resistance change versus temperature curve interpretations, where required, shall be made through software. Provide temperature transducers to provide a 4-20 ma linear output corresponding to temperature. Sensor shall be factory-calibrated and provided with zero and span trimmers for output adjustment. Overall system accuracy, including errors associated with the sensor, lead wire and A to D conversion shall be +0.5oF.
2.
Duct Sensors: Provide flanged or threaded probe sensors designed for duct mounting. Sensor shall be encapsulated in a 12” long, probe. Sensors shall include junction box for terminating sensor wiring and lagging protrusion where installed in externally insulated ducts.
3.
Immersion Sensors: Provide Immersion sensors with threaded fitting for direct installation in a thermowell. The probe shall be encapsulated in a stainless steel jacket and shall be installed in a thermowell suitable for installation in a threaded fitting. Sensors shall include a suitable junction box for terminating sensor wiring. Thermowells shall have pressure and temperature ratings suitable for their application. Wells for insulated piping shall have a 2-1/2” lagging protrusion.
4.
Averaging Sensors:
Provide extended flexible probe
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 30
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD averaging sensors for coil discharge temperature applications. Sensor probes shall be a minimum of 16’ long and shall consist of multiple temperature sensors equally spaced along the probe and wired to provide average temperature sensing. Probe casing shall totally encapsulate and waterproof the sensors and shall be nominal 3/8” OD bendable steel. Sensors shall include a suitable junction box for terminating sensor wiring. 5.
Remote Probe Sensors: Provide remote probe sensors with sensing elements encapsulated in a nominal 2” steel sheath suitable for return air or strap-on mounting. Sensors shall include a nominal 3’ lead section and a suitable junction box for terminating sensor wiring.
6.
Outside Air Sensors: Provide shielded, weatherproof outside air sensors with sensing elements encapsulated in a nominal 2” steel sheath suitable for outdoor applications. Sensors shall include a waterproof junction box or conduit body for terminating sensor wiring and a removable sun shield.
7.
Temperature Sensors: Temperature sensors shall be linear precision elements with ranges appropriate for each specific application. All ASC room sensors shall provide for direct connection and access to the ACS network.
8.
Space (room) sensors shall be available with setpoint adjustment and override switch. Space sensor shall have a portable service tool jack to allow communication with the system. Digital room sensors shall have LCD display, day / night override button, and set point slide adjustment override options. The set point slide adjustment shall have software limits by the automation system to limit the amount of temperature setpoint adjustment.
9.
Duct mounted averaging sensors shall utilize a sensing element incorporated in a copper capillary with a minimum length of 20 feet. The sensor shall be installed according to manufacture recommendation and looped and fastened at a minimum of every 36 inches.
10.
Sunshields shall be provided for outside air sensors.
11.
Thermo-wells for all immersion sensors shall be stainless steel or brass as required for the application.
C.
Humidity Sensors: Humidity sensors shall be of the solid-state type using a capacitance-sensing element. The sensor shall vary the output voltage with a change in relative humidity. Room humidity sensors shall have a minimum range of 10% to 90% 5%. Supply air humidity sensors shall have a range of 10% to 90% 5%.
D.
Air Velocity Sensors: The sensor shall use differential pressure to determine airflow rate and have repeatability within 1% of
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 31
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD reading and an accuracy of 5% of range. The velocity range shall be from 0 to 3250 FPM. Brandt Instruments, Inc. model DSK 9000 Series or equal. E.
Pressure Sensors: 1.
General: Provide pressure sensors and transducers for measuring converting air, water and steam differential and static pressures to analog output signals. Sensor / transducer accuracy shall be +1.0% with linearity of +0.1%, repeatability of +0.1% and hysteresis not exceeding +0.1%. Transducers shall be factory-calibrated and shall have zero and span trimmers for field calibration. Transducers shall be provided with steel enclosures for panel mounting or a NEMA 1 enclosure for remote mounting, direct or reverse acting output, as required. Range shall be selected to match the medium being monitored.
2.
Water Pressure Transducers: Transducers shall include an adjustable (0-10 seconds) electronic averaging circuit to provide electronic snubbing of rapidly fluctuating monitored media.
3.
The differential pressure sensor shall be temperature compensated and shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. Sensing range shall be suitable for the application with linearity of 1.5% of full scale and offset of less than 1% of full scale. Sensor shall be capable of withstanding up to 150% of rated pressure without damage.
F.
CO2: The CO2 sensor shall be capable of monitoring CO2. The sensor shall be shall produce a linear 0-10 VDC signal. The CO2 Sensor shall be provided in wall or duct mounted models, as shown on the plans.
G.
Adjustable Current Sensing Relays: 1.
H.
Use adjustable current sensing relays on motors to sense loading and convert that data for status run of the fan, pump, etc.
Switches and Thermostats: 1.
The BMS Contractor shall furnish all electric relays and coordinate with the supplier of magnetic starters for auxiliary contact requirements. All electric control devices shall be of a type to meet current, voltage, and switching requirement of their particular application. Relays shall be provided with 24 VAC coils and contacts shall be rated at 10 amps minimum.
2.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Duct smoke detectors shall be supplied by others.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 32
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
I.
3.
Low Temperature Detection Thermostats: Shall be the manual reset type. The thermostat shall operate in response to the coldest one-foot length of the 20-foot sensing element, regardless of the temperatures at other parts of the element. The element shall be properly supported to cover the entire downstream side of the coil with a minimum of three loops. Separate thermostats shall be provided for each 25 square feet of coil face area or fraction thereof.
4.
Differential Pressure Switches: Pressure differential switches shall have SPDT changeover contact, switching at an adjustable differential pressure setpoint.
5.
Current Sensing Relays: Motor status indications, where shown on the plans, shall be provided via current sensing relays. The switch output contact shall be rated for 30 VDC, .15 amps.
6.
Flow Switches: Motor status indications, where shown on the plans, shall be provided via flow switches. Flow switches shall be of the paddle type equipped with SPDT contacts to establish proof of flow.
Control Valves and Actuators 1.
General: Control Valves up to 4 inches shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi pressure drop. Valves shall be packless, modulating, electrically or magnetically actuated, with a control rangeability of 100 to 1. These valves shall have true linear flow characteristics in relationship to valve opening.
2.
½ inch to 4 inch: Valves shall be equipped with hand wheel, or manual position mounted dial adjacent to valve, to allow manual positioning of valve in absence of control power. (Valves with a rangeability of less than 200 to 1 shall utilize two valves in a 1/3 – 2/3 parallel arrangement in order to achieve control rangeability).
3.
4 inches to 6 inches: Valves shall be modulating electrically actuated, 2-way or 3-way as required, with a rangeability of 50 to 1. Valve body shall be flanged and shall be equipped with a hand wheel, or manual position dial mounted adjacent to the valve, to allow manual positioning of the valve in the absence of control power.
4.
Butterfly Valves: 2-way and 3-way butterfly valves shall be cast iron valve body, with stainless steel stem, and available with disc seal for bubble-tight shut off.
5.
Valve Actuators: Provide two-way and/or three-way valves with electronic actuators of the type, body material, and pressure class required for each application... Valve pressure class and rating shall be selected based on maximum pressure and temperature in the piping system. All valves except those in the chiller / cooling tower and
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 33
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD boiler systems shall be electrically operated. Chiller / cooling tower and boiler valves may be either pneumatic or electric. 6.
7.
Performance: All valves shall conform to the following minimum standards and selection requirements. a.
Maximum pressure drop at design flow shall be 5 psi.
b.
Provide actuators with proper close-off rating for each individual application.
c.
The valve and actuator shall be suitable for throttling control and tight shutoff against pump shutoff head. All valves shall be certified by the Contractor to shutoff bubble tight against full system pump shutoff head.
d.
All valves which operate in sequence with other valves and dampers shall sequence properly without overlap. Provide positive positions, oversized operators, or balanced trim if required for proper sequence control.
e.
Valve schedules submitted for review shall clearly show shift in operator span for all valves operated in sequence and shutoff capability for all valves.
Valve Types: a.
Two-way Valves: Provide straight through union globe valves. Valves ½” to 2” in size shall have bronze, brass, stainless steel or approved corrosion resistant bodies and screwed ends. Valves 2-1/2” and larger shall have high-tensile cast iron or cast steel bodies, bronze stainless steel or approved corrosion resistant seats, and internal trim, removable cage-type trim and flanged ends. All valve stems shall be 316 or 416 stainless steel. Valves shall be designed to provide equal percentage flow characteristics at constant pressures with a rangeability of 30 to 1. Low pressure valves shall be provided with a renewable composition disc compound which shall ensure tight seating.
b.
Three-way Valves: Provide three-way mixing type valves. Valves ½” to 2” in size shall have bronze, brass, stainless steel, or approved corrosion resistant brass bodies and screwed ends. Valves 21/2” and larger shall have high-tensile cast iron or cast steel bodies, bronze stainless steel or approved corrosion resistant seats, and internal trim, removable cage-type trim and flanged ends. All valve stems shall be 316 or 416 stainless steel. Valves shall provide constant system flow rate at all operating conditions.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 34
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
8.
J.
c.
Butterfly Valves: Where indicated on the Drawings or required by the Sequence of Control, utilize full lug butterfly-type control valves rated for the same operating pressure as the piping system in which such valves are installed. Valves shall have equal percentage flow characteristics and bubble-tight shutoff against either side of the valve when the flange is removed from the opposite side.
d.
Small Valves: Small (3/4” and smaller) heating hot water and chilled water valves shall be two-way or three-way or straight-through equal-percentage type with polished stainless steel stems, spring-loaded Teflon or rubber packing, and back-seating feature to allow the valve to be repacked under pressure without shutting off the system.
Electric Actuators: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action. Select operator for full shutoff at maximum pump differential pressure a.
Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
b.
Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than 2-1/2 Inches. Size for running torque of 150 inch-pounds (and breakaway torque of 300 inch-pounds.
c.
Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than 2-1/2 Inches: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 inch-pounds.
9.
Actuators shall be of the push-pull or rotary type of modulating, 3-point floating, or 2-position control as required by the application. The actuator shall use an overload-proof synchronous motor or an electric motor with end switches to de-energize the motor at the end of the stroke limits. Control voltage shall be 24VAC, 0-20VDC, or 4-20ma as required. Actuators shall be available with spring return to the normal position when required. Actuators shall have a position indicator for external indication of damper position. Actuators shall have manual override capability without disconnecting damper linkage.
10.
Electronic activators used for chilled water valves on air handling units and any modulating dampers should be positive positioning with internal feedback.
Automatic Damper Actuators: 1.
Damper Operators; All dampers shall be electrically
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 35
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD operated.
K.
L.
M.
2.
Electronic Actuators: Provide fully proportioning actuators of either the push-pull or rotary type, as required. Actuator motor shall be of the low voltage synchronous type and shall be non-overloading at a continuous stall. Actuators shall be U.L. listed.
3.
Selection: Size electronic actuators to operate their appropriate dampers and valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating or two position action as specified.
4.
CAV Terminal Unit Actuators: Actuators shall be suitable for use with the terminal unit controllers and dampers provided for the project. Coordinate provisions for actuators mounting with the terminal unit manufacturer.
Terminal Unit Controllers: 1.
Terminal Unit controllers shall be stand alone EEPROM based, configured to perform the specified sequences of operation. Controllers shall have integral jacks for connecting the portable operator’s workstation. Terminal unit controllers shall operate on a network with minimum communication rate of 9600 baud. Terminal unit controllers shall operate independently of other controllers on the network.
2.
Each terminal unit (CAV terminal or fan coil unit) shall have a dedicated controller mounted directly on the unit. If higher level controllers are required for terminal unit controllers, they shall be mounted in panel enclosures located in electric closets or mechanical equipment rooms.
Panel Enclosures: 1.
DDC Controllers, network controllers, and similar BMS equipment located in fan rooms, equipment rooms or electrical closets, including all necessary auxiliary modules and power supplies shall be mounted in NEMA 1, 16 gauge welded galvanized steel enclosures with lockable hinged door, tamper switch and internal maintenance light.
2.
Each major control element such as each air handling unit, the chilled water / condenser water system, the heating water system, shall have a dedicated DDC panel enclosure located in it’s mechanical room. Additional points such as exhaust fan start / stop makeup air unit control points, lighting I/O points and similar miscellaneous points may share the DDC controller.
Room Thermostats: 1.
Each Air Handler and CAV unit shall be provided with a room thermostat:
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 36
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.
N.
-
Accuracy:
± 1°F (±0.6°C)
-
Operating Range:
35° to 115°F (2° to 46°)
-
Range:
55° to 95°F (2° to 30°C)
-
Set Point Modes:
Independent Heating, Cooling
-
Night Setback-
Heating, Night Setback-Cooling
Each room temperature sensor shall include a terminal jack integral to the sensor assembly to connect a portable operator's terminal to control and monitor all hardware and software points associated with the controller.
Water Flow Meters: 1.
2.
Turbine Meters. a.
The Sensor shall be accurate to within +1% of actual flow between a flow velocity of one to 30 feet per second. Repeatability and linearity should be +1% of flow. The sensor should send an analog signal to a local meter panel which provides a 4-20 mA output for remote sensing. Flow sensor readings shall be displayed at the local panel in gpm.
b.
Each flow element shall be complete with ¼” SAE flare safety shutoff instrument valves, and a permanent metal tag showing design flow rates, meter readings for design flow rates, metered fluid, line size and tag number, station, or location number.
Insertion Flow Meters:
O.
Flow meter shall consist of a flow sensor installed in a pipe saddle or thread-o-let and an analog flow transmitter to provide an analog signal to the BMS.
P.
Flow sensor shall be of stainless steel and nonmetallic wetted parts and shall be designed for hot tap installation in a 2” NPT pipe saddle or thread-o-let. A six bladed wheel shall provide a flow signal to the flow transmitter. The sensor shall be suitable for pressures to 400 psi and temperatures to 220F. 1.
Venturi Flow Meters:
Q.
Provide one piece brass or cast iron venturi flow meters, screwed for 3/4” through 2”, and weld neck for larger sizes. Meters shall be rated far 300 psi. Unit shall have valve manifold for connection to flow meter and quick disconnect valves for calibration.
R.
Liquid Level Switches:
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 37
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
S.
T.
Pressure Switches: 1.
Differential Pressure Water Flow Switches: Switches shall be double bellows type differential pressure switches with stainless steel bellows directly actuating a snap acting DPDT switch. Switches shall have visible set-point adjustments. Switches exposed to weather shall be weatherproof. Switch ranges and setpoints shall be appropriate to the application.
2.
Pressure Switches: Switches shall be bourdon tube operated with a snap acting switch directly activated by the bourdon tube. Switches shall have repetitive accuracy of +/- 1% of the operating range and shall withstand 150% rated pressure. Switch action shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. Switches shall have snap acting DPDT contacts rated for the application. Switches exposed to the weather shall be weatherproof.
3.
Differential Pressure Air Flow Switches: Diaphragm operated activating a SPDT snap switch. Diaphragm motion shall be retrained by a calibrated spring that can be adjusted to set the required differential set point. Switches shall be rated for pressures up to 50” WC and shall have 16 gauge galvanized steel housing.
4.
Static Pressure High Limit Switches: Switches shall be duct mounted and shall consist of a manual reset pressure sensitive diaphragm operated switch which is adjustable for positive or negative actuation.
5.
Waterflow Switches: Switch shall be snap acting, SPDT contacts packless sealed tube with switch in isolated compartment and paddle convertible to suit pipe diameter. Provide externally adjustable sensitivity to allow adjustment without removing assembly from the pipe.
Current Transformers: 1.
U.
Switches shall consist of a SPDT snap acting switch operated by a sealed float mechanism. Switch body shall be stainless steel float and arm.
Provide current transformers with a 0.5 to 5 amp output and a panel -mounted plug-in current metering relay. Relay shall have adjustable setpoint and be capable of operating either a momentary or latched output with SPDT contacts rated at 10 amps at 25 VAC.
Smoke Detectors: 1.
Smoke Detectors shall be furnished by Division 16 and installed by Division 15.
2.
Fire alarm functions shall be wired by Division 16.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 38
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD V.
2.12
Photoelectric Relays: 1.
Conform to UL 773A.
2.
Type: Solid-state, with SPDT dry contacts rated to operate relay or contactor coils to which connected.
3.
Time delay to prevent false operation.
4.
Outdoor Sealed Units: Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped with sun-glare shield.
5.
Manufacturers: a.
Fisher Pierce.
b.
Intermatic, Inc.
c.
Paragon Electric Co, Inc.
d.
Rhodes:
e.
Tork, Inc.
MH Rhodes, Inc. (Ripley Photocontrols).
OPERATOR WORKSTATION A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Dell Corporation.
2.
Compaq Corporation.
3.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Furnish each operator workstation consisting of the following:
C.
Personal Computer: IBM PC compatible with sufficient memory and hard drive storage to support graphics, reports, and communication requirements. Furnish with the following minimum configuration requirements: 1.
Processor: Pentium 4 with HT Technology, 3.2 GHz.
2.
Hard Drive: 160 Gigabyte.
3.
Memory: 2 Gigabyte DDR SDRAM.
4.
Drive 1: 48x CD-ROM 1.44 Megabyte 3.5 inch (89 mm).
5.
Drive 2: 48x CD-ROM floppy drive.
6.
Modem: Auto-dial telephone, 56,000 baud.
7.
Ports: Required serial, parallel, network communications, USB, and cables for proper system operation.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 39
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.13
8.
Expansion Slots: 1 used for LAN card, 1 available.
9.
LAN Card: EtherNet - RJ45 (100 base-T minimum).
10.
Mouse: two-button optical type wireless.
11.
Keyboard: 104 key.
D.
Monitor: Minimum of 17 inch (432 mm) color, flat panel display.
E.
Operating System: Windows XP.
F.
Printer: Furnish each operator workstation with color ink jet printer and associated cables. Printer capable of minimum of 14 pages per minute (PPM) operation and compatible with standard parallel or USB communications or network capable.
G.
System Support: Minimum ten (10) work stations connected to multi-user, multi-tasking environment with concurrent capability to: 1.
Access DDC network.
2.
Access or control same control unit.
3.
Access or modify same control unit database.
4.
Archive data, alarms, and network actions to hard disk regardless of what application programs are being currently executed.
5.
Develop and edit database.
6.
Implement and tune DDC control.
7.
Develop graphics.
8.
Control facility.
PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL A.
B.
Manufacturers: 1.
Dell Corporation.
2.
Compaq Corporation.
3.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Furnish device capable of accessing system data and capable of being connected to any point on system network or connected directly to any controller for programming, set-up, and troubleshooting. Portable Operators Terminal uses Read (Initiate) and Write (Execute) Services as defined in Clauses 15.5 and 15.8, respectively, of ASHRAE Standard 135, to communicate with BACnet
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 40
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD objects in internetwork. Objects supported include: Analog input, analog output, analog value, binary input, binary output, binary value, device. C.
2.14
Furnish IBM compatible notebook-style PC including software and hardware required with: 1.
Processor: Pentium 4, with HT technology 3.4 GHz.
2.
Hard Drive: 60 Gigabyte.
3.
Memory: 2 Gigabyte DDR SDRAM.
4.
Drive 1: 24x CD Burner, DVD combination.
5.
Wireless Card: internal 2100 (802.11 g).
6.
Ports: Required serial, parallel, network communications, USB, and cables for proper system operation.
7.
LAN Card: EtherNet - RJ45 (100 base-T minimum).
8.
Mouse: two-button optical type wireless.
9.
Keyboard: integral to PC.
10.
Screen: 15 inch UXGA TFT display, color.
11.
Operating System: Windows XP.
12.
Battery: 12 cell lithium ion.
CONTROL UNITS A.
Units: Modular in design and consisting of processor board with programmable RAM memory, local operator access and display panel, and integral interface equipment.
B.
Battery Backup: For minimum of 100 hours for complete system including RAM without interruption, with automatic battery charger.
C.
Control Units Functions: 1.
Monitor or control each input/output point.
2.
Completely independent with hardware clock/calendar and software to maintain control independently.
3.
Acquire, process, and transfer information to operator station or other control units on network.
4.
Accept, process, and execute commands from other control unit's or devices or operator stations.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 41
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
E.
5.
Access both data base and control functions simultaneously.
6.
Record, evaluate, and report changes of state or value occurring among associated points. Continue to perform associated control functions regardless of status of network.
7.
Perform in stand-alone mode: a.
Start/stop.
b.
Duty cycling.
c.
Automatic Temperature Control.
d.
Demand control via a sliding window, predictive algorithm.
e.
Event initiated control.
f.
Calculated point.
g.
Scanning and alarm processing.
h.
Full direct digital control.
i.
Trend logging.
j.
Global communications.
k.
Maintenance scheduling.
Global Communications: 1.
Broadcast point data onto network, making information available to other system controls units.
2.
Transmit input/output points onto network for use by other control units and use data from other control units.
Input/output Capability: 1.
Discrete/digital input (contact status).
2.
Discrete/digital output.
3.
Analog input.
4.
Analog output.
5.
Pulse input (5 pulses/second).
6.
Pulse output (0-655 seconds in duration with 0.01-second resolution).
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 42
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD F.
Monitor, control, or address data points. Include analog inputs, analog outputs, pulse inputs, pulse outputs and discrete inputs/outputs. Furnish control units with minimum 30 percent spare capacity.
G.
Point Scanning: Set scan or execution speed of each point to operator selected time from 1 to 250 seconds.
H.
Upload/Download Capability: Download from or upload to operator station. Upload/Download time for entire control unit database maximum 10 seconds on hard-wired LAN or 60 seconds over voice grade phone lines.
I.
Test Mode Operation: Place input/output points in test mode to allow testing and developing of control algorithms on line without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. In test mode: 1.
Inhibit scanning and calculation of input points. Issue manual control to input points (set analog or digital input point to operator determined test value) from workstation.
2.
Control output points but change only database state or value; leave external field hardware unchanged.
3.
Enable control-actions on output points but change only data base state or value.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 43
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD J.
K. 2.15
2.16
Local display and adjustment panel: Portable or integral to control-unit containing digital display, and numerical keyboard. Display and adjust: 1.
Input/output point information and status.
2.
Controller set points.
3.
Controller tuning constants.
4.
Program execution times.
5.
High and low limit values.
6.
Limit differential.
7.
Set/display date and time.
8.
Control outputs connected to the network.
9.
Automatic control outputs.
10.
Perform control unit diagnostic testing.
Points in "Test" mode.
LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (LAN): A.
Furnish communication between control units over local area network (LAN).
B.
LAN Capacity: Not less than 60 stations or nodes.
C.
Break in Communication Path: Alarm and automatically initiate LAN reconfiguration.
D.
LAN Data Speed: Minimum 19.2 Kb.
E.
Communication Techniques: Allow interface into network by multiple operation stations and by auto-answer/auto-dial modems. Support communication over telephone lines utilizing modems.
F.
Transmission Median: Fiber optic or single pair of solid 24 gauge twisted, shielded copper cable.
G.
Network Support: Time for global point to be received by any station, less than 3 seconds. Furnish automatic reconfiguration when station is added or lost. In event transmission cable is cut, reconfigure two sections with no disruption to system's operation, without operator intervention.
OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE A.
Input/output Capability From Operator Station:
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 44
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
Request display of current values or status in tabular or graphic format.
2.
Command selected equipment to specified state.
3.
Initiate logs and reports.
4.
Change analog limits.
5.
Add, delete, or change points within each control unit or application routine.
6.
Change point input/output descriptors, status, alarm descriptors, and unit descriptors.
7.
Add new control units to system.
8.
Modify and set up maintenance scheduling parameters.
9.
Develop, modify, delete or display full range of color graphic displays.
10.
Automatically archive select data even when running third party software.
11.
Capability to sort and extract data from archived files and to generate custom reports.
12.
Support two printer operations.
13.
Alarm printer: Print alarms, operator acknowledgments, action messages, system alarms, operator sign-on and signoff.
14.
Data printer: Print reports, page prints, and data base prints.
15.
Select daily, weekly or monthly as scheduled frequency to synchronize time and date in digital control units. Accommodate daylight savings time adjustments.
16.
Print selected control unit database.
B.
Operator System Access: Via software password with minimum 30 access levels at work station and minimum 4 access levels at each control unit.
C.
Data Base Creation and Support: Use standard procedures for changes. Control unit automatically checks workstation data base files upon connection and verify data base match. Include the following minimum capabilities: 1.
Add and delete points.
2.
Modify point parameters.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 45
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
E.
3.
Change, add, or delete English language descriptors.
4.
Add, modify, or delete alarm limits.
5.
Add, modify, or delete points in start/stop programs, trend logs, and other items.
6.
Create custom relationship between points.
7.
Create or modify DDC loops and parameters.
8.
Create or modify override parameters.
9.
Add, modify, and delete applications programs.
10.
Add, delete, develop, or modify dynamic color graphic displays.
Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: 1.
Utilizes custom symbols or system supported library of symbols.
2.
Sixteen (16) colors.
3.
Sixty (60) outputs of real-time live dynamic data for each graphic.
4.
Dynamic graphic data.
5.
1,000 separate graphic pages.
6.
Modify graphic screen refresh rate between 1 and 60 seconds.
Operator Station: 1.
Accept data from LAN as needed without scanning entire network for updated point data.
2.
Interrogate LAN for updated point data when requested.
3.
Allow operator command of devices.
4.
Allow operator to place specific control units in or out of service.
5.
Allow parameter editing of control units.
6.
Store duplicate data base for every control unit and allow down loading while system is on line.
7.
Control or modify specific programs.
8.
Develop, store and modify dynamic color graphics.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 46
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 9.
F.
Data archiving of assigned points and support overlay graphing of this data using up to four (4) variables.
Alarm Processing: 1.
Off normal condition: Cause alarm and appropriate message, including time, system, point descriptor, and alarm condition. Select alarm state or value and alarms causing automatic dial-out.
2.
Critical alarm or change-of-state: Display message, stored on disk for review and sort, or print.
3.
Print on line changeable message, up to 60 characters in length, for each alarm point specified.
4.
Display alarm reports on video. Display multiple alarms in order of occurrence.
5.
Define time delay for equipment start-up or shutdown.
6.
Allow unique routing of specific alarms.
7.
Operator specifies when alarm requires acknowledgment.
8.
Continue to indicate unacknowledged alarms after return to normal.
9.
Alarm notification:
10.
Print automatically.
11.
Display indicating alarm condition.
12.
Selectable audible alarm indication.
G.
Event Processing: Automatically initiate commands, user defined messages, take specific control actions or change control strategy and application programs resulting from event condition. Event condition may be value crossing operator defined limit, change of state, specified state, or alarm occurrence or return to normal.
H.
Automatic Restart: Automatically start field equipment on restoration of power. Furnish time delay between individual equipment restart and time of day start/stop.
I.
Messages: 1.
Automatically display or print user-defined message subsequent to occurrence of selected events.
2.
Compose, change, or delete message.
3.
Display or log message at any time.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 47
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 4. J.
Assign any message to event.
Reports: 1.
Manually requested with time and date.
2.
Long term data archiving to hard disk.
3.
Automatic directives to download to transportable media including floppy diskettes for storage.
4.
Data selection methods to include data base search and manipulation.
5.
Data extraction with mathematical manipulation.
6.
Data reports to allow development of XY curve plotting, tabular reports (both statistical and summary), and multipoint timed based plots with not less than four (4) variables displayed.
7.
Generating reports either normally at operator direction, or automatically under workstation direction.
8.
Either manually display or print reports. Automatically print reports on daily, weekly, monthly, yearly or scheduled basis.
9.
Include capability for statistical data manipulation and extraction.
10.
Capability to generate four types of reports: Statistical detail reports, summary reports, trend graphic plots, x-y graphic plots.
K.
Parameter Save/Restore: Store most current operating system, parameter changes, and modifications on disk or diskette.
L.
Data Collection: 1.
Automatically collect and store in disk files.
2.
Daily electrical energy consumption, peak demand, and time of peak demand for up to electrical meters over 2-year period.
3.
Daily consumption for up to 30 meters over a 2 year period.
4.
Daily billable electrical energy consumption and time for up to 1024 zones over a 10 year period.
5.
Archiving of stored data for use with system supplied custom reports.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 48
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD M.
N.
O.
2.17
Graphic Display: Support graphic development on work station with software features: 1.
Page linking.
2.
Generate, store, and retrieve library symbols.
3.
Single or double height characters.
4.
Sixty (60) dynamic points of data for each graphic page.
5.
Pixel level resolution.
6.
Animated graphics for discrete points.
7.
Analog bar graphs.
8.
Display real time value of each input or output line diagram fashion.
Maintenance Management: 1.
Run time monitoring, for each point.
2.
Maintenance scheduling targets with automatic annunciation, scheduling and shutdown.
3.
Equipment safety targets.
4.
Display of maintenance material and estimated labor.
5.
Target point reset, for each point.
Advisories: 1.
Summary containing status of points in locked out condition.
2.
Continuous operational or not operational report of interrogation of system hardware and programmable control units for failure.
3.
Report of power failure detection, time and date.
4.
Report of communication failure with operator device, field interface unit, point and programmable control unit.
LOAD CONTROL PROGRAMS A.
General: Support inch-pounds and S.I. metric units of measurement.
B.
Demand Limiting:
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 49
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
C.
1.
Monitor total power consumption for each power meter and shed associated loads automatically to reduce power consumption to an operator set maximum demand level.
2.
Input: Pulse count from incoming power meter connected to pulse accumulator in control unit.
3.
Forecast demand (kW): Predicted by sliding window method.
4.
Automatically shed loads throughout the demand interval selecting loads with independently adjustable on and off time of between one and 255 minutes.
5.
Demand Target: Minimum of 3 for each demand meter; change targets based upon (1) time, (2) status of pre-selected points, or (3) temperature.
6.
Load: Assign load shed priority, minimum "ON" time and maximum "OFF" time.
7.
Limits: Include control band (upper and lower limits).
8.
Output advisory when loads are not available to satisfy required shed quantity, advise shed requirements and requiring operator acknowledgment.
Duty Cycling: 1.
Periodically stop and start loads, based on space temperature, and according to various On/Off patterns.
2.
Modify off portion of cycle based on operator specified comfort parameters. Maintain total cycle time by increasing on portion of cycle by equal quantity off portion is reduced.
3.
Set and modify following parameters for each individual load.
4.
Minimum and maximum off time.
5.
On/Off time in one-minute increments.
6.
Time period from beginning of interval until cycling of load.
7.
Manually override the DDC program and place a load in an On or Off state.
8.
Cooling Target Temperature and Differential.
9.
Heating Target Temperature and Differential.
10.
Cycle off adjustment.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 50
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD D.
E.
Automatic Time Scheduling: 1.
Self-contained programs for automatic start/stop/scheduling of building loads.
2.
Support up to seven (7) normal day schedules, seven (7) "special day" schedules and two (2) temporary day schedules.
3.
Special day’s schedule supporting up to 30 unique date/duration combinations.
4.
Number of loads assigned to time program; with each load having individual time program.
5.
Each load assigned at least 16 control actions for each day with 1 minute resolution.
6.
Furnish the following time schedule operations: a.
Start.
b.
Optimized Start.
c.
Stop.
d.
Optimized Stop.
e.
Cycle.
f.
Optimized Cycle.
7.
Capable of specifying minimum of 30 holiday periods up to 100 days in length for the year.
8.
Create temporary schedules.
9.
Broadcast temporary "special day" date and duration.
Start/Stop Time Optimization: 1.
Perform optimized start/stop as function of outside conditions, inside conditions, or both.
2.
Adaptive and self-tuning, adjusting to changing conditions unattended.
3.
For each point under control, establish and modify: a.
Occupancy period.
b.
Desired temperature at beginning of occupancy period.
c.
Desired temperature at end of occupancy period.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 51
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD F.
Night Setback/Setup Program: Reduce heating space temperature set point or raise cooling space temperature set-point during unoccupied hours; in conjunction with scheduled start/stop and optimum start/stop programs.
G.
Calculated Points: Define calculations and totals computed from monitored points (analog/digital points), constants, or other calculated points.
H.
I.
1.
Employ arithmetic, algebraic, Boolean, and special function operations.
2.
Treat calculated values like any other analog value; use for any function where a "hard wired point" might be used.
Event Initiated Programming: Any data point capable of initiating event, causing series of controls in a sequence. 1.
Define time interval between each control action between 0 to 3600 seconds.
2.
Output may be analog value.
3.
Provide for "skip" logic.
4.
Verify completion of one action before proceeding to next action. When not verified, program capable of skipping to next action.
Direct Digital Control: Furnish with each control unit Direct Digital Control software so operator is capable of customizing control strategies and sequences of operation by defining appropriate control loop algorithms and choosing optimum loop parameters. 1.
Control loops: Defined using "modules" are analogous to standard control devices.
2.
Output: Paired or individual digital outputs for pulse width modulation, and analog outputs.
3.
Firmware: a.
PID with analog or pulse-width modulation output.
b.
Floating control with pulse-width modulated outputs.
c.
Two-position control.
d.
Primary and secondary reset schedule selector.
e.
Hi/Low signal selector.
f.
Single pole double-throw relay.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 52
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD g.
J.
Single pole double throw time delay relay with delay before break, delay before make and interval time capabilities. 1)
Direct Digital Control Loop: downloaded upon creation or on operator request. On sensor failure, program executes user defined failsafe output.
2)
Display: Value or state of interconnecting ddc modules.
of
lines
Fine Tuning Direct Digital Control PID or floating loops: 1.
Display information: a.
Control loop being tuned.
b.
Input (process) variable.
c.
Output (control) variable.
d.
Set-point of loop.
e.
Proportional band.
f.
Integral (reset) Interval.
g.
Derivative (rate) Interval. 1)
K.
each
Display Format: graphic, with automatic scaling; with input and output variable superimposed on graph of "time" versus "variable".
Trend logging: 1.
Each control unit capable of storing samples of control unit's data points.
2.
Update file continuously at operator assigned intervals.
3.
Automatically initiate upload requests and then stores data on hard disk.
4.
Time synchronize sampling at operator specified times and intervals with sample resolution of one minute.
5.
Co-ordinate sampling with specified on/off point- state.
6.
Display trend samples on workstation in graphic format. Automatically scale trend graph with minimum 60 samples of data in plot of time versus data.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 53
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.18
HVAC CONTROL PROGRAMS A.
B.
General: 1.
Support Inch-pounds and S.I. metric units of measurement.
2.
Identify each HVAC Control system.
Optimal Run Time: 1.
Control start-up and shutdown times of HVAC equipment for both heating and cooling.
2.
Base on occupancy schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal requirements, and interior room mass temperature.
3.
Start-up systems by using outside air temperature, room mass temperatures, and adaptive model prediction for how long building takes to warm up or cool down under different conditions.
4.
Use outside air temperature to determine early shut down with ventilation override.
5.
Analyze multiple building mass sensors to determine seasonal mode and worse case condition for each day.
6.
Operator commands:
7.
a.
Define term schedule.
b.
Add/delete fan status point.
c.
Add/delete outside air temperature point.
d.
Add/delete mass temperature point.
e.
Define heating/cooling parameters.
f.
Define mass sensor heating/cooling parameters.
g.
Lock/unlock program.
h.
Request optimal run-time control summary.
i.
Request optimal run-time mass temperature summary.
j.
Request HVAC point summary.
k.
Request HVAC saving profile summary.
Control Summary: a.
HVAC Control system begin/end status.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 54
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
8.
9.
b.
Optimal run time lock/unlock control status.
c.
Heating/cooling mode status.
d.
Optimal run time schedule.
e.
Start/Stop times.
f.
Selected mass temperature point ID.
g.
Optimal run-time system normal start-times.
h.
Occupancy and vacancy times.
i.
Optimal run time system heating/cooling mode parameters.
Mass temperature summary: a.
Mass temperature point type and ID.
b.
Desired and current mass temperature values.
c.
Calculated warm-up/cool-down time for each mass temperature.
d.
Heating/cooling season limits.
e.
Break point temperature for cooling mode analysis.
HVAC point summary: a.
Control system identifier and status.
b.
Point ID and status.
c.
Outside air temperature point ID and status.
d.
Mass temperature point ID and status.
e.
Calculated optimal start and stop times.
f.
Period start.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 55
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
Supply Air Reset: 1.
Monitor heating and cooling loads in building spaces, terminal reheat systems, both hot deck and cold deck temperatures on dual duct and multizone systems, single zone unit discharge temperatures.
2.
Adjust discharge temperatures to most energy efficient levels satisfying measured load by:
3.
4.
5.
a.
Raising cooling temperatures to highest possible value.
b.
Reducing heating temperatures to lowest possible level.
Operator commands: a.
Add/delete fan status point.
b.
Lock/unlock program.
c.
Request HVAC point summary.
d.
Add/Delete discharge controller point.
e.
Define discharge controller parameters.
f.
Add/delete air flow rate.
g.
Define space load and load parameters.
h.
Request space load summary.
Control summary: a.
HVAC control system status (begin/end).
b.
Supply air reset system status.
c.
Optimal run time system status.
d.
Heating and cooling loop.
e.
High/low limits.
f.
Deadband.
g.
Response timer.
h.
Reset times.
Space load summary: a.
HVAC system status.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 56
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
b.
Optimal run time status.
c.
Heating/cooling loop status.
d.
Space load point ID.
e.
Current space load point value.
f.
Control heat/cool limited.
g.
Gain factor.
h.
Calculated reset values.
i.
Fan status point ID and status.
j.
Control discharge temperature point ID and status.
k.
Space load point ID and status.
l.
Airflow rate point ID and status.
Enthalpy Switchover: 1.
Calculate outside and return air enthalpy using measured temperature and relative humidity; determine energy expended and control outside and return air dampers.
2.
Operator commands: a.
Add/delete fan status point.
b.
Add/delete outside air temperature point.
c.
Add/delete discharge controller point.
d.
Define discharge controller parameters.
e.
Add/delete return air temperature point.
f.
Add/delete outside air dewpoint/humidity point.
g.
Add/delete return air dewpoint/humidity point.
h.
Add/delete damper switch.
i.
Add/delete minimum outside air.
j.
Add/delete atmospheric pressure.
k.
Add/delete heating override switch.
l.
Add/delete evaporative cooling switch.
m.
Add/delete air flow rate.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 57
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.
n.
Define enthalpy deadband.
o.
Lock/unlock program.
p.
Request control summary.
q.
Request HVAC point summary.
Control summary: a.
HVAC control system begin/end status.
b.
Enthalpy switchover optimal system status.
c.
Optimal return time system status.
d.
Current outside air enthalpy.
e.
Calculated mixed air enthalpy.
f.
Calculated cooling cool enthalpy using outside air.
g.
Calculated cooling cool enthalpy using mixed air.
h.
Calculated enthalpy difference.
i.
Enthalpy switchover deadband.
j.
Status of damper mode switch.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 58
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.19
PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FEATURES A.
B.
C.
Trend Point: 1.
Sample up to 60 points, real or computed, with each point capable of collecting 20 samples at intervals specified in minutes, hours, days, or month.
2.
Output trend logs as line-graphs or bar graphs. Output graphic on terminal, with each point for line and bar graphs designated with a unique color, vertical scale either actual values or percent of range, and horizontal scale time base. Print trend logs up to 12 columns of one point/column.
Alarm Messages: 1.
Allow definition of minimum of 10 messages, each having minimum length of 30 characters for each individual message.
2.
Assign alarm messages to system messages including point's alarm condition, point's off-normal condition, totaled point's warning limit, hardware elements advisories.
3.
Output assigned alarm with "message requiring acknowledgment".
4.
Operator commands include define, modify, or delete; output summary listing current alarms and assignments; output summary defining assigned points.
Weekly Scheduling: 1.
Automatically initiate equipment or system commands, based on selected time schedule for points specified.
2.
Program times for each day of week, for each point, with one minute resolution.
3.
Automatically generate alarm output for points not responding to command.
4.
Allow for holidays, minimum of 366 consecutive holidays.
5.
Operator commands: a.
System logs and summaries.
b.
Start of stop point.
c.
Lock or unlock control or alarm input.
d.
Add, delete, or modify analog limits and differentials.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 59
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
6.
D.
2.20
e.
Adjust point operation position.
f.
Change point operational mode.
g.
Open or close point.
h.
Enable/disable, lock/unlock, or execute interlock sequence or computation profile.
i.
Begin or end point totals.
j.
Modify total values and limits.
k.
Access or secure point.
l.
Begin or end HVAC or load control system.
m.
Modify load parameter.
n.
Modify demand limiting and duty cycle targets.
Output summary: Listing of programmed function points, associated program times, and respective day of week programmed points by software groups or time of day.
Interlocking: 1.
Permit events to occur, based on changing condition of one or more associated master points.
2.
Binary contact, high/low limit of analog point or computed point capable of being used as master. Master capable of monitoring or commanding multiple slaves.
3.
Operator commands: a.
Define single master/multiple master interlock process.
b.
Define logic interlock process.
c.
Lock/unlock program.
d.
Enable/disable interlock process.
e.
Execute terminate interlock process.
f.
Request interlock type summary.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A.
Disconnect Switch: Factory-mount on equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 60
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination.
B.
Verify conditioned power supply is available to control units and to operator workstation.
C.
Verify field end devices, wiring, and pneumatic tubing is installed prior to installation proceeding.
INSTALLATION A.
Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent walls where not subject to excessive vibration.
B.
Install software in control units and in operator workstation. Implement features of programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to Section 23 09 93.
C.
Install with 120 volts alternating current, 15 amp dedicated emergency power circuit to each programmable control unit.
D.
Install conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 03.
E.
Install electrical material and installation in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers’ field services.
B.
Start and commission systems. Allow adequate time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation.
C.
Furnish service technician employed by system installer to instruct Owner's representative in operation of systems plant and equipment for 3 day period.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A.
Section 01 82 00 - Demostration and Training
B.
Furnish basic operator training for 4 persons on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution commands and log requests. Include a minimum of 80 hours instructor time. Furnish training on site.
C.
Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner.
D.
Training by Manufacturer’s representative.
E.
Provide manual to attendees.
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 61
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD F.
Provide website to practice training of installed system and contractor shall be available to answer questions for one (1) year.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 09 23 PAGE 62
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section includes sequence of operation for: 1.
Central fan systems.
2.
Exhaust fans.
3.
Emergency generator with automatic dampers.
4.
Excess pressure controls.
5.
Heating Coils.
6.
Heating water zone control.
7.
Refrigeration systems.
8.
Air terminal units.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: For equipment, devices, and system components to implement sequences of operation.
2.
Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: For equipment, devices, system components, and software to implement sequences of operation.
3.
Section 25 50 00 - Integrated Automation Facility Controls: For equipment, devices, system components, and software to implement sequences of operation.
4.
Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate mechanical system controlled and control system components. 1.
Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Submit written description of control sequence.
SECTION 23 09 93
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.3
2.
Submit flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic.
3.
Submit draft copies of graphic displays indicating mechanical system components, control system components, and controlled function status and value.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and set points of controls, including changes to sequences made after submission of shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS A.
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CENTRAL FAN SYSTEMS A.
3.2
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS A.
3.3
Refer to Contract drawings.
Maintain constant supply air duct temperature of 55 degrees F by cycling refrigeration system and signaling step capacity.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 1. Refer to Sequence of Operation on drawings.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 09 93
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
Section Includes: 1.
Heating water piping, above ground.
2.
Equipment drains and over flows.
3.
Unions and flanges.
4.
Pipe hangers and supports.
5.
Valves.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this section.
2.
Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Frames: Product requirements for access doors for placement by this section.
3.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Product requirements Painting for placement by this section.
4.
Section 23 05 16 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping: Product and execution requirements for expansion compensation devices use in heating and cooling piping systems.
5.
Section 23 05 23 - General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping: Product requirements for valves for placement by this section.
6.
Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports, sleeves, and firestopping for placement by this section.
7.
Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for Vibration Isolation for placement by this section.
8.
Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe identification for
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD placement by this section.
1.2
9.
Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for Piping Insulation for placement by this section.
10.
Section 23 21 16 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product and execution requirements for piping specialties used in heating and cooling piping systems.
11.
Section 23 21 23 - Hydronic Pumps: Product and execution requirements for pumps used in heating and cooling piping systems.
12.
Section 23 25 00 - HVAC Water Treatment: Product and execution requirements for cleaning and chemical treatment of heating and cooling piping systems.
REFERENCES A.
B.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1.
ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
2.
ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings.
3.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
4.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
5.
ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
6.
ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
7.
ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
ASTM International: 1.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
2.
ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.
3.
ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
4.
ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
C.
D.
E.
5.
ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
6.
ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
7.
ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric).
8.
ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.
9.
ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications.
American Welding Society: 1.
AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.
2.
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
American Water Works Association: 1.
AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
2.
AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Grey-Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids.
3.
AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
4.
AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1.
MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
2.
MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves.
3.
MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
4.
MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
5.
MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.3
6.
MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
7.
MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
8.
MSS SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded.
9.
MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
10.
MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems.
B.
Provide flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus.
C.
Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.
D.
Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
E.
Use globe ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
F.
Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of hot water pumps.
G.
Use plug valves for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug valves only when shut-off or isolating valves are also provided.
H.
Use butterfly valves in heating water systems interchangeably with gate and globe valves.
I.
Use only butterfly valves in chilled and condenser water systems for throttling and isolation service.
J.
Use lug end butterfly valves to isolate equipment.
K.
Use 3/4 inch gate valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain.
L.
Flexible Connectors: Use at or near pumps where piping
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD configuration does not absorb vibration. 1.4
1.5
1.6
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of heating hot water piping system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes.
C.
Product Data: 1.
Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information.
2.
Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service.
3.
Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity.
D.
Design Data: Indicate pipe size. Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.
E.
Test Reports: Indicate results of heating hot water piping system pressure test.
F.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures and isolation.
G.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
H.
Welders’ Certificate: Include welders’ certification of compliance with ASME Section IX.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, equipment and accessories.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and changing components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures.
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.7
1.8
B.
Perform Work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure.
C.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
B.
Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience approved by manufacturer.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.9
1.10
1.11
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
D.
Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.12
COORDINATION
1.13
WARRANTY A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for valves excluding packing.
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C. 1.14
Section 01 78 36 – Warranties.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B.
Furnish two packing kits for each size and valve type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND A.
B.
C.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, 0.375 inch wall for sizes 12 inch and larger, black. 1.
Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding type.
2.
Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, 0.375 inch wall for sizes 12 inch and larger, black, grooved ends. 1.
Fittings: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, or ASTM A234/A234M carbon steel, grooved ends.
2.
Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings meeting ASTM F1476. a.
Housing Clamps: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, hot dipped galvanized, compatible with steel piping sizes, rigid type.
b.
Gasket: Elastomer composition for operating temperature range from 60 degrees F to 230 degrees F.
c.
Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn. 1.
Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.
2.
Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube.
3.
Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F. Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn, rolled grooved ends.
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
Service
Heating Hot Water and Flue Piping
Drains Overflow s Vents
2.2
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast copper alloy, or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze, or ASTM B584 bronze sand castings, grooved ends.
2.
Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings meeting ASTM F1476. a.
Housing Clamps: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, enamel coated, compatible with copper tubing sizes, to engage and lock designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion.
b.
Gasket: Elastomer composition for operating temperature range from 60 degrees F to 230 degrees F.
c.
Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
Schedule of Pipe Fittings and Materials Pipe Pressure Shut-Off Material Pipe Fitting Rating Weight Joint Material PSI , SWP Copper Soldered Cast Bronze 400 ‘L’ Tube or Wrought 200 Copper Steel 40, Screwed Malleable or 400 Black Flanged Forged 200 Steel 40, Welded Black Copper ‘L’ Tube
Soldered
Steel 40, Galv. Copper L Tube Steel 40, Black
Screwed Solder
Screwed
Cast Bronze or Wrought Copper Steel Galvanized Bronze
400 200
Malleable or Forged
NA
400 400
Valve Type Ball Valve Butterfly Valve Ball Valve Butterfly Valve
Ball Valve Butterfly Valve Ball Valve
NA
ASTM DESIGNATIONS FOR PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS A.
B.
Pipe, as specified in schedule, shall conform to requirements covered by following ASTM Designations: 1.
Steel 40 or 80:
ASTM A53, Grade B.
2.
Copper Tube “K” and “L”:
ASTM B88 Hard Drawn.
Fittings, as specified in schedule for various services, shall conform to requirements covered by the following ASTM Designations: 1.
Malleable Iron:
ASTM B16.23.
2.
Steel Welding Type:
ASTM A234.
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.3
3.
Cast Brass, Solder-Joint:
ASME B16.23.
4.
Wrought Copper, Solder-Joint: ASME B16.29.
PIPE JOINTS A.
Unless otherwise specified, join pipe as follows: 1.
All steel pipe two inches (2”) and smaller shall have screwed joints.
2.
Steel pipe two and one half inches (2½”) and larger shall have welded joints.
3.
All copper pipe shall have soldered joints made with 95-5 tin/antimony solder.
4.
Galvanized Vent Pipe: fittings.
5.
All joints in underground and under-floor distribution piping shall be welded, irregardless of size.
Screwed “Durham” tarred drainage
B.
Welding Exceptions: In locations such as risers in shafts or mains in crowded corridors, where welding may be difficult, permission may be given by Inspector of Record or Mechanical Engineer to use screwed joints up to four inch (4”) in size. Grooved fittings and victaulic fitting shall not be used for any pipe joints.
C.
Welding Process, Procedure: 1.
All welding shall comply with the latest edition of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9, Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators. No exceptions.
2.
All welders shall be qualified and certified according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9. Each welding certification shall bear a date not more than six (6) months prior to the date of starting the work of Division 15.
3.
Prior to any welding being executed, the Contractor shall submit to the Mechanical Engineer evidence of compliance of all welding procedures and each operators qualifications according to ASME procedures and governing Codes. Each welder, along with his individual qualifications, shall be approved by the project Inspector of Record and the Mechanical Engineer.
4.
Use only welding type fittings and welding neck flanges. The following exceptions may be used, only as approved by
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD the Mechanical Engineer:
D.
E.
a.
Join “small” branches into mains with intersection weld, instead of using welding type tee. “Small” shall mean that branch is one size less than half the size of main, which it intersects as: 13” branch into 3” main, 12” into 4”, 2” into 6” or 4” into 10”.
b.
Use only “Weldolet” or “Threadolet” type of welding fittings for intersection welding of branches to mains.
c.
Branches for Intersection Welding: Accurately coped and beveled in shop for field welding; cut openings for these branches in mains to full inside diameter of branches; remove cutting particles and oxides from inside of pipes before welding branches in place.
5.
Do not make direct welded connections to valves, expansion joints, strainers, apparatus, other units, which are intended to be removable.
6.
Brass piping shall have screwed joints, for sizes two inches (2”) and under; flanged two and one half inches (2½”) and over.
Brazing Option: Brazing of threadless brass pipe to bronze fittings with pre-inserted rings, will be acceptable in place of screwed joints. 1.
For brazing joints on threadless brass pipe and copper “B” tube, copper tube Type “K” and “L”, use brazing alloy, 80% copper, 15% silver, 5% phosphorous, which will flow freely at 1300o F; Handy and Harmon “Sil-Fos”, or approved equal; use flux and brazing method recommended by manufacturer of brazing alloy.
2.
Copper tube Type “K” and “L” shall have soldered or sweat joints with solder-joint type or copper fittings. Flared joints with flare type bronze fittings may be used where approved for specific service. Solder shall be 95-5 or equal.
3.
Do not make brazed or soldered connections to valves, expansion joints, strainers, apparatus, other units, which are intended to be removable.
Screwed Joints: 1.
For screwed joints use red or white lead and oil, or approved pipe-joint compound; apply only on male threads.
2.
Brass pipe shall have screwed joints, for sizes two inches (2”) and under; flanged two and one half inches (2½”) and
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD over.
F.
3.
Cut pipe, nipples evenly, cut threads clean, remove burrs, ream ends to full inside bore. Cut brass pipe with hacksaw rather than with pipe cutter.
4.
Do not use Stillson wrench for making brass pipe joints tight; such pipe, bearing wrench marks, will not be acceptable and shall be replaced at Contractor’s own expense.
Refrigeration Pipe Joints: 1.
2.4
Unless otherwise specified, join pipe as follows: a.
Brazing:
“SIL-FOS” or “Easy-Flow.”
b.
Soldering:
95-5 or “Sta-Bright”.
2.
All brazing and soldering shall be in strict accordance with Section 75 of the Refrigeration Service Engineers Society Service Application Manual.
3.
Dry nitrogen shall be circulated through tubes being brazed to eliminate formation of copper oxide. No exceptions.
4.
Refrigeration system connections shall be copper to copper type properly cleaned and brazed. Use flux only where necessary.
G.
Joints of Dissimilar Metals: Provide with “EPCO” dielectric valves isolation couplings of same size as pipe.
H.
Pipe Preparation: 1.
Pipe shall be carefully cleaned before installation. The ends of threaded pipe shall be reamed out full-size with a long taper reamer so as to be partially bell-mounted and perfectly smooth.
2.
All threads on black steel pipe shall be cut with new clean dies, full thickness of the die and so that no more than two (2) threads are left exposed on the pipe when the joint is made up in the fitting or valve.
3.
Copper, brass pipe and chromed, polished or painted connections from fixtures shall show no tool marks. Install with approved wrenches.
4.
Thread lubricant shall be used for all threaded, joint make-up and shall be applied to the make thread only. Lubrication shall include threaded cleanout plugs.
EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A.
B.
C.
2.5
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASME B16.4, cast iron.
2.
Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; flanged for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized, rolled grooved ends. 1.
Fittings: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, or ASTM A234/A234M carbon steel, grooved ends.
2.
Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings meeting ASTM F1476. a.
Housing Clamps: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, hot dipped galvanized, compatible with steel piping sizes, rigid type.
b.
Gasket: Elastomer composition for operating temperature range from 60 degrees F to 230 degrees F.
c.
Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn. 1.
Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.
2.
Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F.
UNIONS AND FLANGES A.
B.
2.6
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized.
Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1.
Ferrous Piping: Class 300, malleable iron, threaded.
2.
Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with brazed joints.
3.
Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1.
Ferrous Piping: Class 250, forged steel, slip-on flanges.
2.
Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges.
3.
PVC Piping: PVC flanges.
GATE VALVES
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A.
2.7
1.
Crane Valve, North America.
2.
Hammond Valve.
3.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
4.
NIBCO, Inc.
5.
Stockham Valves & Fittings.
6.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
GA-1 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body, bronze trim, threaded union bonnet, non-rising stem, lock-shield stem, inside screw with back-seating stem, solid wedge disc, alloy seat rings, solder or threaded ends.
C.
GA-2 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 70, Class 125, cast iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, non-rising stem, hand-wheel, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends. Furnish chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.
GLOBE VALVES A.
2.8
Manufacturers:
Manufacturers: 1.
Crane Valve, North America.
2.
Hammond Valve.
3.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
4.
NIBCO, Inc.
5.
Stockham Valves & Fittings.
6.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
GL-1 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body, bronze trim, threaded union bonnet, hand wheel, Buna-N composition disc, solder or threaded ends.
C.
GL-2 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 85, Class 125, cast iron body, bronze trim, hand wheel, outside screw and yoke, flanged ends. Furnish chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.
BALL VALVES A.
Manufacturers:
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.9
Crane Valve, North America.
2.
Hammond Valve.
3.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
4.
NIBCO, Inc.
5.
Stockham Valves & Fittings.
6.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
BA-1 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, 600 psi WOG, one piece bronze body, chrome plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends with union, level handle locking lever handle extended lever handle oval handle with balancing stops.
C.
BA-2 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, Class 150, bronze, two piece body, type 316 stainless steel ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends with union, lever handle wing or tee handle locking lever handle extended lever handle oval handle] with balancing stops.
PLUG VALVES A.
2.10
1.
Manufacturers: 1.
DeZURIK, Unit of SPX Corp.
2.
Flow Control Equipment, Inc.
3.
Homestead Valve.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
PL-1 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 78, Class 150, semi-steel construction, square port, full pipe area, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends. Furnish one plug valve wrench for every ten plug-valves with minimum of one wrench.
C.
PL-2 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 78, Class 150 semi-steel construction, round square port, full pipe area, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends. Furnish worm gearoperated.
BUTTERFLY VALVES A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Crane Valve, North America.
2.
Hammond Valve.
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.11
3.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
4.
NIBCO, Inc.
5.
Stockham Valves & Fittings.
6.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
CHECK VALVES A.
Horizontal Swing Check Valves: 1.
B.
Manufacturers: a.
Crane Valve, North America.
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
d.
NIBCO, Inc.
e.
Stockham Valves & Fittings.
f.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
2.
CK-1 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body and cap, bronze seat, Buna-N disc, solder or threaded ends.
3.
CK-2 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, cast iron body, bolted cap, bronze or cast iron disc, renewable disc seal and seat, flanged ends.
Spring Loaded Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers:
2.
a.
Crane Valve, North America.
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
d.
NIBCO, Inc.
e.
Stockham Valves & Fittings.
f.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
CK-6 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 250, bronze body, in-line spring lift check, silent closing, Buna-N disc, integral seat, solder or threaded ends.
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.
2.12
CK-7 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, globe style, cast iron body, bronze seat, center guided bronze disc, stainless steel spring and screws, flanged ends.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Unistrut.
2.
B-Line.
3.
Flex-Weld, Inc.
4.
Glope Pipe Hanger Products Inc.
5.
Michigan Hanger Co.
6.
Superior Valve Co.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Conform to ASME B31.1, ASME 31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.
C.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
D.
Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
E.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches : Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
F.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.
G.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
H.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
I.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks.
J.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
K.
Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD L.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
M.
Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
N.
Floor Support for Hot Pipe 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
O.
Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
P.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel rings, adjustable, copper plated.
Q.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
R.
Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not overexcavated.
PREPARATION A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D.
Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.
E.
After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 23 25 00.
INSTALLATION - INSERTS A.
Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.4
3.5
B.
Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
C.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger.
D.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
E.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above, flush with top of slab.
INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
Install in accordance with ASME B31.9 ASTM F708 and MSS SP 89.
B.
Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
C.
Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
D.
Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
E.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
F.
Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
G.
Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe hangers or trapeze hangers.
H.
Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
I.
Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
J.
Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
K.
Install pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29.
INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A.
Install heating water piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 ASME B31.9.
B.
Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 18
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.7
C.
Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.
D.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E.
Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 23 05 29.
F.
Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 23 05 29.
G.
Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 23 05 53.
H.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 23 05 16.
I.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
J.
Slope hydronic piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe aligned.
K.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.
L.
Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
M.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
N.
Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 23 07 00.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Test heating water piping system in accordance with ASME B31.9 ASME B31.1.
SCHEDULES A.
Copper and Steel Pipe Hanger Spacing: PIPE SIZE Inches
COPPER TUBING MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING
STEEL PIPE MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING
COPPER TUBING
STEEL PIPE
HANGER ROD
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
Feet
Feet
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 19
Inches
HANGER ROD Inches
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
1/2
5
7
3/8
3/8
3/4
5
7
3/8
3/8
1
6
7
3/8
3/8
1-1/4
7
7
3/8
3/8
1-1/2
8
9
3/8
3/8
2
8
10
3/8
3/8
2-1/2 (Note 1)
9
11
1/2
1/2
3
10
12
1/2
1/2
4
12
14
1/2
5/8
5
13
16
1/2
5/8
6
14
17
5/8
3/4
8
16
19
3/4
3/4
10
18
22
3/4
7/8
12
19
23
3/4
7/8
14
22
25
7/8
1
16
23
27
7/8
1
18
25
28
1
1
20
27
30
1
1-1/4
24
28
32
1-1/4
1-1/4
Plastic and Ductile Iron Pipe Hanger Spacing: PIPE HANGER SPACING PIPE MATERIAL
MAXIMUM
HANGER ROD
HANGER SPACING
DIAMETER
Feet
Inches
ABS (All sizes)
4
3/8
FRP (All Sizes)
4
3/8
4
3/8
Ductile Iron (Note 2) PVC (All Sizes)
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 20
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
Note 1: Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for grooved end piping systems.
2.
Note 2: 20 feet maximum spacing, minimum of one hanger for each pipe section close to joint behind bell. Provide hanger at each change of direction and each branch connection. For pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller, subjected to loadings other than weight of pipe and contents, limit span to maximum spacing for water service steel pipe.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 21 13 PAGE 21
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 23 21 24 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SCOPE OF WORK A.
This section provides specification requirements for adjustable frequency drives, variable speed drives or herein identified as AC Drives for use with {NEMA B, NEMA D, NEMA A, NEMA E, Wound Rotor, Synchronous} design AC motors.
B.
The AC Drive manufacturer shall furnish, field test, adjust and certify all installed AC Drives for satisfactory operation.
C.
Any exceptions/deviations to this specification shall be indicated in writing and submitted with the quotation.
D.
All VFD’s on this project shall be of the same manufacturer.
REFERENCES A.
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
B.
ANSI C84.1 - Voltages Tolerances for North America
C.
CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91 - Industrial Control Equipment
D.
IEC 68 Part 2-3 - Basic Environmental Testing Procedures Part 2: tests - Test Ca: Damp Heat
E.
IEC 146.1 - Semiconductor Converters-General Requirements and Line Commutated Converters Part 1-1: Specifications of Basic Requirements
F.
IEC 664 - Insulation Coordination for Equipment Within LowVoltage Systems
G.
IEC 447 - Man-Machine Interface Actuating Principles
H.
IEC 439 Part 1 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Assemblies
I.
IEC 947 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Components
J.
IEC 364 - Electrical Installation of Buildings
K.
IEC 204/NFPA 79 - Electrical Equipment of Industrial Machines/Industrial Machinery
L.
IEC 106 - Guide for Specifying Environmental Conditions for Equipment Performance Rating
M.
IEC 529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosure
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.3
N.
IEC 1000 - Electromagnetic Compatibility
O.
IEC 721 - Classification of Environmental Conditions
P.
IEC 255-8 Overload Relays
Q.
IEC 801-2,-3,-4,-5 - Immunity Tests
R.
NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures
S.
NEMA ICS, Part 4 Overload Relays
T.
NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
U.
NEMA ICS 2-321 - Electrical Interlocks
V.
NEMA ICS7 - Industrial Control and Systems Adjustable Speed Drives
W.
NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drives
X.
UL 50 - UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
Y.
UL 845 - UL Standard for Motor Control Center Construction
Z.
UL 507 - UL Standard for Safety Electric Fans
AA.
UL 508 - UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment
BB.
UL 508C - UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment
CC.
UL 991 - UL Standard for Safety Tests for Safety Related Controls employing Solid State Devices
DD.
OSHA 1910.95 - AC Drive Controller Acoustical Noise
EE.
Confirming to National Safe Transmit Association and International Safe Transmit Association Test for Packages Weighing 100 lbs or Over
SUBMITTALS A.
Six copies of approval drawings shall be furnished for Engineer’s approval prior to factory assembly of the AC Drives. These drawings shall consist of elementary power and control wiring diagrams and MCC enclosure outline drawings. The enclosure drawings shall include front and side views of the enclosures with overall dimensions and weights shown, conduit entrance locations and nameplate legends.
B.
Standard catalog sheets showing voltage, horsepower, maximum current ratings and recommended replacement parts with part numbers shall be furnished for each different Horsepower rated AC
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Drive provided. C.
1.4
Shop drawings must show and locate all locations of anchorages. The manufacturer shall be responsible for any additional cost if the delivered unit does not match the shop drawing.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
The manufacturer of the AC Drive shall be a certified ISO 9001 facility.
B.
The AC Drive and all associated optional equipment shall be UL listed according to Motor Control Center UL listing UL 508. A UL label shall be attached inside each enclosure as verification.
C.
The AC Drive shall be designed, constructed and tested in accordance with NEMA, NEC, VDE, IEC standards and CSA certified.
D.
Every Power Converter shall be tested with an actual AC Induction Motor 100% loaded and temperature cycled within an environment chamber between 32o F and 104o F. Documentation shall be furnished to verify successful completion at the request of the engineer.
E.
All Drive door mounted pilot devices shall be tested to verify successful operation. Documentation shall be furnished upon the request of the engineer.
F.
The AC Drive shall be submitted to a Hi-Pot test with all enclosed devices mounted and wired, prior to shipment. PRODUCT
1.5
1.6
MANUFACTURERS A.
ABB, Graham, York/Toshiba, Robicon, MagniTech. Substitutions must be submitted in writing three (3) weeks prior to original bid date with supporting documentation demonstrating that the alternative manufacturer meets all aspects of the specifications herein.
B.
Alternate control techniques other than pulse width modulated (PWM) are not acceptable.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION A.
The AC Drive shall convert the input AC mains power to an adjustable frequency and voltage as defined in the following sections.
B.
The input power section shall utilize a full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers. The diode rectifiers shall convert fixed voltage and frequency, AC line power to fixed DC voltage. This power section shall be insensitive to phase rotation of the AC line.
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.7
C.
The DC bus shall have external connections for standby battery back-up or for linking multiple, AC Drives DC buses for management of regeneration power.
D.
The output power section shall change fixed DC voltage to adjustable frequency AC voltage. This section shall utilize insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) or intelligent power modules (IPMs) as required by the current rating of the motor.
E.
VFD’s motor transfer circuit shall include contacts for by-pass switching from line to VFD and vice versa.
F.
The line circuit breaker shall provide positive disconnect of input power to the air handling unit. The circuit breaker shall be UL listed and shall be equipped with thermal elements for electrical protection and shall conform to National Electrical code (NEC) fusing requirements. The line circuit breaker shall be mounted in the cabinet of the VSD.
G.
The Automatic Bypass Contactor Circuit shall provide both bypass switching circuitry around the VSD and the motor starter contactors. Because the Automatic Bypass Contactor circuit contains motor starter contactors, a separate starter is not needed to operate the motor in the Bypass mode. This shall provide a method of operating the motor at full speed directly from the incoming power source. The bypass contactor circuit shall enable the user to operate the motor without the VSD by reconfiguring the circuitry into a conventional constant speed application, completely independent of the VSD.
H.
When the front-mounted switch is transferred from the VSD to Line, a series of contact closures shall permit the safe circuitry change to bypass operation. After the contacts have been closed, contactors shall energized thus starting the motor.
I.
Motor overload protection shall be provided with manual bypass contactor circuit. It shall be wired so that the motor shall protect in either the VSD operation mode or the bypass mode. The control safety circuit shall tie to the Bypass Circuit to insure that the motor is not operated under alarm conditions (indicated by opening of firestat, etc.).
J.
Thermal Overload Relays: The thermal overload relays shall provide protection of the motor in cases of motor stall. These relays shall be mounted in the cablinet.
CONSTRUCTION A.
The AC Drive shall be mounted in a {Type 1, Type 12} MCC enclosure with an integral disconnect device.
B.
A mechanical interlock shall prevent an operator from opening the AC Drive door when the disconnect is in the on position. Another mechanical interlock shall prevent an operator from placing the disconnect in the on position while the AC Drive door is open. It shall be possible for authorized personnel to defeat these
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD interlocks.
1.8
C.
Provisions shall be provided for locking all disconnects in the off position with up to three padlocks.
D.
Current limiting fuses shall be installed and wired to the AC Drive input.
E.
Provisions shall be made for accepting a padlock to lock the enclosure door
F.
3% line reactors shall be installed on the line side conductor of each phase ahead of the VFD.
MOTOR DATA A.
1.9
1.10
1.11
Refer to the drawings and schedules for motor data.
APPLICATION DATA A.
The AC Drive shall be sized to operate a Variable Torque load.
B.
The speed range shall be from a minimum speed of 0.5 Hertz to a maximum speed of 400 Hertz.
ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS A.
The AC Drive shall be of construction that allows operation in a pollution Degree 3 environment. The AC Drive shall meet IEC 6641 and NEMA ICS 1 Standards. AC Drives that are only rated for Pollution Degree 2 environment shall not be allowed.
B.
The AC Drive shall be designed to operate in an ambient temperature from 0 to + 40 degrees C (+32 to 104 degrees F).
C.
The storage temperature range shall be -25 to + 70 degrees C.
D.
The maximum relative humidity shall be 95% at 40 degrees C, noncondensing.
E.
The AC Drive shall be rated to operate at altitudes less than or equal to 3,300 ft (1000m). For altitudes above 3,300 ft, de-rate the AC Drive by 1.2% for every 300 ft.
F.
The AC Drive shall meet the IEC 68-2 Operational vibration specification.
RATINGS A.
The AC Drive shall be designed to operate from an input voltage of 400 15% Vac and 460 15% Vac.
B.
The AC Drive shall operate from an input voltage frequency range from 47.5 to 63 Hertz.
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.12
C.
The displacement power factor shall not be less than .95 lagging under any speed or load condition.
D.
The efficiency of the AC Drive at 100% speed and load shall not be less than 96%.
E.
The {constant, variable} torque rated AC Drive overcurrent capacity shall be {150%, 110%} for 1 minute.
F.
The output carrier frequency of the AC Drive shall be randomly modulated and selectable at 2, 4, or 10 kHz depending on Drive rating for low noise operation. No AC Drive with an operable carrier frequency above 10 kHz shall be allowed.
G.
The output frequency shall be from .1 to 400 Hertz for Drives up to 75 HP. At horsepower’s above 75 HP, the maximum output frequency will be 200 Hertz.
H.
The AC Drive will be able to develop rated motor torque at .5 Hertz (60 Hz base) in a Sensorless Flux Vector mode using a standard induction motor without an encoder feedback signal.
PROTECTION A.
Upon power-up the AC Drive shall automatically test for valid operation of memory, option module, loss of analog reference input, loss of communication, dynamic brake failure, DC to DC power supply, control power and the pre-charge circuit.
B.
The AC Drive shall be UL 508C listed for use on distribution systems with {5,000A or 10,000A rms, 22,000A rms, 65,000A rms} available fault current. The Power Converter shall meet short circuit withstandability of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes as defined by NEMA ICS 7.1.09 and have the value listed on the AC Drive nameplate.
C.
The Power Converter shall be protected against short circuits, between output phases and ground; and the logic and analog outputs.
D.
The AC drive shall have a minimum AC undervoltage power loss ride-through of 200 msec. The AC Drive shall have the userdefined option of frequency fold-back to allow motor torque production to continue to increase the duration of the power loss ride-through.
E.
The AC drive shall have a selectable ride through function which will allow the logic to maintain control for a minimum of one second without faulting.
F.
For a fault condition other than a ground fault, short circuit or internal fault, an auto restart function will provide up to 5 programmable restart attempts. The programmable time delay before restart attempts will range from 1 second to 600 seconds.
G.
The deceleration mode of the AC drive shall be programmable for
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD normal and fault conditions. The stop modes shall include freewheel stop, fast stop and DC injection braking.
1.13
H.
Upon loss of the analog process follower reference signal, the AC drive shall fault and/or operate at a user defined speed set between software programmed low speed and high speed settings.
I.
The AC drive shall have solid state I2t protection that is UL listed and meets UL 508 C as a Class 10 overload protection and meets IEC 947. The minimum adjustment range shall be from .45 to 1.05 percent of the current output of the AC Drive.
J.
The AC Drive shall have a thermal switch with a user selectable prealarm that will provide a minimum of 60 seconds delay before overtemperature fault.
K.
The AC Drive shall utilize bonded fin heatsink construction for maximum heat transfer.
L.
The AC drive shall have a programmable fold-back function that will anticipate a controller overload condition and fold back the frequency to avoid a fault condition.
M.
The output frequency shall be software enabled to fold back when the motor is overloaded.
N.
There shall be 3 skip frequency ranges that can each be programmed with a selectable bandwidth of 2 or 5 Hz. The skip frequencies shall be programmed independently, back to back or overlapping.
O.
The AC Drive shall include Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs) wired to the incoming AC Mains.
ADJUSTMENTS AND CONFIGURATIONS A.
The AC drive shall self-configure to the main operating supply voltage and frequency. No operator adjustments will be required.
B.
Upon power-up, the AC drive will automatically send a signal to the connected motor and store the resulting resistance data into memory. The inductance data will be measured during no-load operation when operating at a frequency between 20-60 Hz. The AC Drive will automatically optimize the operating characteristics according to the stored data.
C.
The AC drive will be factory pre-set to operate most common applications.
D.
A choice of three types of acceleration and deceleration ramps will be available in the AC Drive software; linear, S curve and U curve.
E.
The acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable from .1 to 999.9 seconds.
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.14
F.
The volts per frequency ratios shall be user selectable to meet variable torque loads, normal and high torque machine applications.
G.
The memory shall retain and record run status and fault type of the past 8 faults.
H.
Slip compensation shall be a software enabled function.
I.
The software shall reduce the voltage loads. A constant acceleration. The to meet the torque
J.
The AC drive shall offer programmable DC injection braking that will brake the AC motor by injecting DC current and creating a stationary magnetic pole in the stator. The level of current will be adjustable between 50-150% of rated current and available from 0.0-30 seconds continuously. For continuous operation after 30 seconds, the current shall be automatically reduced to 50% of the nameplate current of the motor.
K.
Sequencing logic will coordinate the engage and release thresholds and time delays for the sequencing of the AC Drive output, mechanical actuation and DC injection braking in order to accomplish smooth starting and stopping of a mechanical process.
have a NOLD (no load) function that will to the motor when selected for variable torque volts/Hz ratio will be maintained during output voltage will then automatically adjust requirement of the load.
OPERATOR INTERFACE A.
The operator interface terminal will offer the modification of AC drive adjustments via a touch keypad. All electrical values, configuration parameters, I/O assignments, application and activity function access, faults, local control, adjustment storage, self-test and diagnostics will be in plain English. There will be a standard selection of 4 additional languages built-in to the operating software as standard.
B.
The display will be a high resolution, LCD backlighted screen capable of displaying graphics such as bar graphs as well as six lines of twenty-one alphanumeric characters.
C.
The AC drive model number, torque type, software revision number, horsepower, output current, motor frequency and motor voltage shall all be listed on the drive identification display as viewed on the LCD display.
D.
The display shall be configured to display one or two barographs with numeric data that are selectable and scaleable by the operator. A user defined label function shall be available. As a minimum the selectable outputs shall consist of speed reference, output frequency, output current, motor torque, output power, output voltage, line voltage, DC voltage, motor thermal state, drive thermal state, elapsed time, motor speed, machine speed reference and machine speed.
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.15
E.
A single keystroke scrolling function shall allow dynamic switching between display variables.
F.
The terminal keypad will consist of programmable function keys. The functions will allow both operating commands and programming options to be preset by the operator. A hardware selector switch will allow the terminal keypad to be locked out from unauthorized personnel.
G.
The operator terminal will offer a general menu consisting of parameter setting, I/O map, fault history, and drive configuration. A software lock will limit access to the main menu. The main menu will consist of keypad configuration, drive configuration, general configuration, diagnostic mode and drive initialization screens.
H.
There will be arrow keys that will provide the ability to scroll through menus and screens, select or activate functions or increase the value of a selected parameter.
I.
A data entry key will allow the user to confirm a selected menu, numeric value or allow selection between multiple choices.
J.
An escape key will allow a parameter to return the existing value if adjustment is not required and the value is displayed. The escape function will also return to a previous menu display.
K.
A RUN key and a STOP key will command a normal starting and stopping as programmed when the AC drive is in keypad control mode. The STOP key must be active in all control modes.
L.
The AC drive shall have 3 LEDs mounted on the front panel to indicate functional status. A green LED will verify that the AC drive power supply is on. A red LED indicator will indicated an AC drive fault. A yellow LED indicator will designate a pending fault condition.
M.
The status LEDs shall be able to be remotely mounted up to 3 meters from the AC drive.
N.
A user interface shall be available that is a Windows 3.1 based personal computer, serial communication link or detachable operator interface.
O.
The Keypad and all door mounted controls must be {Type 1,Type 12} rated.
CONTROL A.
External pilot devices shall be able to be connected to a terminal strip for starting/stopping the AC Drive, speed control and displaying operating status. All control inputs and outputs will be software assignable.
B.
2-wire or 3-wire control strategy shall be defined within the software. External relays or logic devices will not be allowed.
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
The control power for the digital inputs and outputs shall be 24Vdc.
D.
The internal power supply incorporates an automatic current foldback that protects the internal power supply if incorrectly connected or shorted. The transistor logic outputs will be current limited and not be damaged if shorted or excess current is pulled.
E.
All logic connections shall be furnished on pull apart terminal strips.
F.
There will be 2 software assignable, analog inputs. The analog inputs will be software selectable and consist of the following configurations: 0-20 ma, 4-20 ma, 20-4 ma, x-20 ma (where x is user defined) 0-5 v, 1-5 v or 0-10 v.
G.
There will be 4 software assignable, isolated logic inputs that will be selected and assigned in the software. The selection of assignments shall consist of run/reverse, jog, plus/minus speed (2 inputs required), setpoint memory, preset speeds (up to 2 inputs), auto/manual control, controlled stop, terminal or keypad control, by-pass (2 inputs required), motor switching, and fault reset.
H.
There will be two software assignable analog outputs that can be selected and assigned in the software. The analog output assignments shall be proportional to the following motor characteristics: frequency, current, power torque, voltage and thermal state. The output signal will be selectable from 0-20 ma or 4-20 ma.
I.
Two voltage-free Form C relay output contacts will be provided. One of the contacts will indicate AC drive fault status. The other contact will be user assignable.
J.
There shall be a hardware input/output extension module which also provides interlocking and sequencing capabilities. The module shall be fully isolated and housed in a finger safe enclosure with pull apart terminal strips. The module will add 4 logic inputs, 2 analog inputs, 2 relay outputs and one analog output. All of the I/O will be user assignable in the software as previously defined.
K.
The AC Drive door mounted control island shall include a power ON, Drive RUN, Drive Fault Light and Hand-Off-Auto selector switch with Manual Speed Potentiometer.
L.
The AC Drive control island shall accept {% indicating analog, absolute indicating digital} meters to display {Power, Amperes, Voltage, Hertz}. EXECUTION
1.16
GENERAL
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD A.
On all outdoor applications installing contractor shall mount drive where there is a minimum of 2" clearance between rear surface of VFD and any solid surface which could inhibit flow of air.
B.
On outdoor installations of VFD’s installing contractor shall also provide a sun shield to prevent direct solar radiation from contacting the enclosure. Shield may be constructed of 16 Gage galvanized steel or 24 Gage galvanized steel with welded angle iron reinforcement. Shield shall not be supported from the VFD enclosure.
C.
All control signal conductors shall be a minimum of 18 gage metallic shielded cable. Such conductors shall not be installed in a conduit or raceway with AC power conductors.
D.
A grounding wire shall be sized per NEC and bonded to the VFD enclosure and to the motor being controlled. Metallic conduit will not be deemed acceptable for this grounding requirement.
E.
Motors for pumps shall be located above the jackshaft.
F.
Pump drive package shall be supplied with a sheet metal cabinet enclosing the jackshaft, coupling, sheaves and belts.
G.
Pumps and jackshafts shall be mounted on steel base plate which also supports the motor and drive.
H.
Startup Service:
I.
J.
1.
The supplier shall provide start-up service by a factory trained service technician. The service technician shall verify correct installation, start up the drive, and check for proper operation. A certificate of start-up shall be provided for owner review prior to technician's departure from job site.
2.
WARRANTY: The VFD shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 60 months from date of start-up. The warranty shall include parts, labor, and all expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized service, repair, or replacement. A copy of this extended warranty, with the effective dates left blank, shall be submitted with the submittal data prior to shipping. All dates will be inserted by the University at the time of final acceptance.
Examination: 1.
Verify that conditions allow recommended and code required clearance prior to installation.
2.
Verify mounting surface is suitable for controller installation.”
When initialized, VFDs on cooling tower fans shall have
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD capability to lock out critical cooling tower speeds and prevent the cooling tower fan from operating below its minimum speed. 1.17
1.18
INSPECTION A.
Verify that the location is ready to receive work and the dimensions are as indicated.
B.
Do not install AC Drive until the building environment can be maintained within the service conditions required by the manufacturer.
PROTECTION A.
1.19
1.20
Before and during the installation, the AC Drive equipment shall be protected from site contaminants.
INSTALLATION A.
Installation shall be in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, drawings and recommendations.
B.
The AC Drive manufacturer shall provide a factory certified technical representative to supervise the contractor's installation, testing and start-up of the AC drive(s) furnished under this specification for a maximum total of 2 days. The start-up service shall be quoted as a separate line item.
C.
Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service conditions required by the manufacturer.
D.
Install controller where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and NEMA ICS 3.1.
E.
Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.
F.
Install fuses in fusible switches.
G.
Variable speed drives for all air handling units, provided by air handling unit manufacturer on each air handling unit.
H.
Variable speed drives for pumps and exhaust fans, provided by Mechanical Contractor and installed and wired by Electrical Contractor.
TRAINING A.
An on-site training course of 1 to 2 training days shall be provided by a representative of the AC Drive manufacturer to plant and/or maintenance personnel and quoted as a separate line item. -- End of Section --
SECTION 23 21 24
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
Refrigerant piping.
2.
Unions, flanges, and couplings.
3.
Pipe hangers and supports.
4.
Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators.
5.
Valves.
6.
Refrigerant strainers.
7.
Refrigerant pressure regulators.
8.
Refrigerant pressure relief valves.
9.
Refrigerant filter-driers.
10. Refrigerant solenoid valves. 11. Refrigerant expansion valves. 12. Electronic expansion valves. 13. Refrigerant receivers. B.
Related Sections: 1. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Product requirements for touch-up painting of structural steel. 2. Section 05 12 00 - Steel Joist Framing: Product requirements for touch-up painting of steel joists. 3. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this section. 4. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Frames: Access doors for concealed valves and accessories. 5. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Product requirements for painting for placement by this section.
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 6. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports, sleeves, and firestopping for placement by this section. 7. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for Vibration Isolation for placement by this section. 8. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section. 9. Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for Piping Insulation for placement by this section. 10.
1.2
Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this section.
REFERENCES A.
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers. 2. ARI 710 - Liquid-Line Driers. 3. ARI 730 - Flow-Capacity Rating and Application of Suction-Line Filters and Filter Dryers. 4. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves. 5. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile Refrigerants.
B.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1.
C.
ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 3. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. 4. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.
D.
ASTM International:
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 3. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 4. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric). 5. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 6. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 7. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. E.
American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
F.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
G.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1.
1.3
UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems.
B.
Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves or equipment.
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.4
C.
Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.
D.
Provide receivers on systems 2 tons and larger, sized to accommodate pump down charge.
E.
Provide receivers on systems with piping runs exceeding 100 feet.
F.
Flexible Connectors: Use at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of refrigeration piping system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes.
C.
Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. 3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity. 4. Refrigerant Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information including capacity, component sizes, rough-in requirements, and service sizes for the following: a.
Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators.
b.
Refrigerant strainers.
c.
Refrigerant pressure regulators.
d.
Refrigerant pressure relief valves.
e.
Refrigerant filter-driers.
f.
Refrigerant solenoid valves.
g.
Refrigerant expansion valves.
h.
Electronic expansion valves.
D.
Design Data: Indicate pipe size. Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.
E.
Test Reports: Indicate results of refrigerant leak test piping system pressure test].
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
F.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures and isolation.
G.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
H.
Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, equipment and refrigerant accessories.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and changing components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.5 code for installation of refrigerant piping systems.
B.
Perform Work in accordance with all applicable code AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure.
C.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
B.
Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
C.
Design Refrigerant piping system, hangers and supports under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of California.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination.
B.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.10
B.
Dehydrate and charge refrigeration components including piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment. Maintain seal until connected into system.
C.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
D.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
E.
Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
1.11
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.
1.12
1.14
1.15
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
COORDINATION A.
1.13
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
WARRANTY A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for valves excluding packing.
C.
Section 01 78 36 – Warranties.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B.
Furnish two refrigerant oil test kits each containing everything required for conducting one test.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B.
Furnish two packing kits for each size and valve type.
C.
Furnish two refrigerant filter-dryer cartridges of each type.
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
REFRIGERANT PIPING A.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F (640 to 805 degrees C).
B.
Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88 or ASTM B88M, Type K, annealed. 1.
Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper, compression type.
2. Joints: Flared. 2.2
UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A.
B.
C.
2 inches (50 mm) and Smaller: 1.
Ferrous Piping: 150 psig malleable iron, threaded.
2.
Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.
2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and Larger: 1.
Ferrous Piping: 150 psig (1034 kPa) forged steel, slip-on.
2.
Copper Piping: Bronze.
3.
Gaskets: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick preformed neoprene.
Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: 1. Housing Clamps: Malleable iron galvanized to engage and lock designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion. 2. Sealing Gasket: C-shape elastomer composition for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F. 3. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
D.
2.3
Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Carpenter & Paterson Inc.
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
Creative Systems Inc.
3.
Flex-Weld, Inc.
4.
Glope Pipe Hanger Products Inc.
5.
Michigan Hanger Co.
6.
Superior Valve Co.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Conform to ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.
C.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
D.
Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
E.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
F.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.
G.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
H.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
I.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks.
J.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
K.
Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.
L.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
M.
Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
N.
Floor Support for Hot Pipe 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
O.
Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
2.4
P.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel rings, adjustable, copper plated.
Q.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
R.
Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
S.
Sheet Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 lb/sq ft, 0.039 inch thick.
REFRIGERANT MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS A.
Manufacturers:
B.
1.
Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.
2.
Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div.
3.
Sporlan Valve Co. Model
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Indicators: 1. Port: Single or Double, UL listed. 2. Body: Copper or brass, flared or solder ends. 3. Sight glass: Color-coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap. 4. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig. 5. Maximum working temperature: 200 degrees F.
2.5
VALVES A.
B.
Manufacturers: 1.
Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.
2.
Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div.
3.
Sporlan Valve Co.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Diaphragm Packless Valves:
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet solder or flared ends. 2. Phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and hand wheel. 3. Stainless steel spring, nylon seats, disc with positive back seating. 4. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig. 5. Maximum working temperature: 275 degrees F. C.
Packed Angle Valves: 1. Forged brass or nickel-plated forged steel, solder or flared ends. 2. Forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat with back seating, molded stem packing. 3. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig. 4. Maximum working temperature: 275 degrees F.
D.
Ball Valves: 1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals, soldered or threaded ends. 2. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig 3. Maximum working temperature: 300 degrees F.
E.
Service Valves: 1. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, flared or solder ends. 2. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
F.
Refrigerant Check Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: a.
Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.
b.
Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div.
c.
Sporlan Valve Co.
d.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
3.
2.6
Globe Type: a.
Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc.
b.
Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
c.
Maximum working temperature: 300 degrees F.
Straight Through Type: a.
Spring, neoprene seat.
b.
Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
c.
Maximum working temperature: 250 degrees F.
REFRIGERANT STRAINERS A.
B.
Manufacturers: 1.
Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.
2.
Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div.
3.
Sporlan Valve Co.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Straight Line or Angle Line Type: 1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass. 2. Maximum working pressure: 430 psig.
C.
Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type: 1. Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire screen. 2. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
2.7
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE REGULATORS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.
2.
Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div.
3.
Sporlan Valve Co.
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 4. B.
2.8
Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting or pilot operated with remote pressure pilot, adjustable over 0 to 80 psig range, for maximum working pressure of 450psig.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A.
B.
2.9
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Manufacturers: 1.
Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.
2.
Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div.
3.
Sporlan Valve Co.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB; for standard 450 psig setting; selected to ASHRAE 15.
REFRIGERANT FILTER-DRIERS A.
B.
Manufacturers: 1.
Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.
2.
Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div.
3.
Sporlan Valve Co.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type: 1. Shell: ARI 710, UL listed, brass, removable cap, for maximum working pressure of 500 psig. 2. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless steel support, ARI 730 rating for two tons. 3. Filter/Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid core sieve with activated alumina, ARI 730 rating for two tons. 4. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded bonded core of activated charcoal with integral gaskets, desiccant ARI 710 moisture rating.
C.
Permanent Straight Through Type: 1. ARI 710, UL listed, steel shell with molded desiccant filter core, for maximum working pressure of 500 psig. 2. Rating: ARI 710 flow capacity of two tons or ARI 730 flow
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD capacity of two tons. 2.10
REFRIGERANT SOLENOID VALVES A.
2.11
Manufacturers: 1.
Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.
2.
Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div.
3.
Sporlan Valve Co.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Valve: ARI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass or steel body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly, integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psig. Stem designed to allow manual operation in case of coil failure.
C.
Coil Assembly: UL 429, UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box with pilot light.
REFRIGERANT EXPANSION VALVES A.
Manufacturers: 1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co. 2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. 3. Sporlan Valve Co. 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
2.12
B.
Angle or Straight Through Type: ARI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external equalizer, bleed hole, mechanical pressure limit (maximum operating pressure MOP feature), adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with non-replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulb well.
C.
Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10 degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and oversized at part load.
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
2.
Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div.
3.
Sporlan Valve Co.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Valve: 1. Brass bodies with flared or solder connection, needle valve with floating needle and machined seat, stepper motor drive. 2. Capacity: Nominal two tons. 3. Electrical Characteristics: 12 VA, 12 volts DC.
C.
Evaporation Control System: 1. Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, proportional integral control with adaptive superheat, maximum operating pressure function, pre-selection allowance for electrical defrost and hot gas bypass. 2. Electrical Characteristics: 12 VA, 220/115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.
D.
2.13
Refrigeration System Control: Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, with proportional integral control of valve, on/off thermostat, air temperature alarm (high and low), solenoid valve control, liquid injection adaptive superheat control, maximum operating pressure function, night setback thermostat, timer for defrost control.
REFRIGERANT RECEIVERS A.
Internal Diameter 6 inch (150 mm) and Smaller: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 400 psig maximum pressure rating, with taps for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.
B.
Internal Diameter 6 inch (150 mm) and Larger: ARI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Section VIII; 400 psig with taps for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and magnetic liquid level indicator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination.
B.
Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not overexcavated.
PREPARATION
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3
3.4
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D.
Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.
INSTALLATION - INSERTS A.
Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.
B.
Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
C.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches (100 mm) and larger.
D.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
E.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide plate and nut recessed, grouted and flush with top of slab.
INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
Install hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, and MSS SP 89.
B.
Support horizontal piping hangers as scheduled.
C.
Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
D.
Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
E.
Install hangers to allow 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
F.
Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
G.
Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe hangers or trapeze hangers.
H.
Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping, with sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping.
I.
Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Finish paint exposed steel hangers and supports in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Hangers and supports located
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
3.5
J.
Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
K.
Install pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29.
INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A.
Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.
B.
Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.
C.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
D.
Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 23 05 29.
E.
Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 23 05 53.
F.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
G.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
H.
Arrange refrigerant piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.
I.
Flood refrigerant piping system with nitrogen when brazing.
J.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds. Refer to Section 05 12 00.
K.
Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
L.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
M.
Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 23 07 00.
N.
Provide replaceable cartridge filter-dryers, with isolation valves and bypass with valve.
O.
Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line.
P.
Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator.
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.6
Q.
Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
R.
Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves. Refer to Section 26 05 03.
S.
Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
T.
Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant.
U.
Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME B31.5.
INSTALLATION - REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES A.
Refrigerant Liquid Indicators: 1. Install line size liquid indicators in main liquid line downstream of condenser. 2. When receiver is provided, install line size liquid indicators in liquid line downstream of receiver. 3. Install line size liquid indicators downstream of liquid solenoid valves.
B.
Refrigerant Valves: 1. Install service valves on compressor suction and discharge. 2. Install gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet. 3. Install gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet. 4. Install check valves on compressor discharge. 5. Install check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems. 6. Install refrigerant charging valve in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve.
C.
Strainers: 1. Install line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve. 2. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, install single main liquid-line strainer. 3. On steel piping systems, install strainer in suction line. 4. Install shut-off valves on each side of strainer.
D.
Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers. Install relief
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD valve discharge piping to terminate outdoors. E.
Filter-Dryers: 1. Install permanent filter-dryers in low temperature systems. 2. Install permanent filter-dryer in systems containing hermetic compressors. 3. Install replaceable cartridge filter-dryer vertically in liquid line adjacent to receivers. 4. Install replaceable cartridge filter-dryer upstream of each solenoid valve.
F.
Solenoid Valves: 1. Install in liquid line of systems operating with single pumpout or pump-down compressor control. 2. Install in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems. 3. Install in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when system shuts down.
3.7
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirement: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.
C.
Pressure test refrigeration system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches (92 kPa) vacuum and 200 psig (1470 kPa) using electronic leak detector.
D.
Repair leaks.
E.
Retest until no leaks are detected.
SCHEDULES A.
Pipe Hanger Spacing: COPPER
STEEL
MINIMUM
MINIMUM
PIPE SIZE
TUBING
PIPE
HANGER ROD
HANGER ROD
Inches (mm)
MAXIMUM
MAXIMUM
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
HANGER SPACING
HANGER SPACING
COPPER TUBING
STEEL PIPE
Feet
Feet
Inches
1/2 (12)
5
7
3/8
3/8
3/4 (20)
5
7
3/8
3/8
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 18
Inches
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.9
1 (25)
6
7
3/8
3/8
1-1/4 (32)
7
7
3/8
3/8
1-1/2 (38)
8
9
3/8
3/8
2 (50)
8
10
3/8
3/8
2-1/2 (65)
9
11
1/2
1/2
3 (75)
10
12
1/2
1/2
4 (100)
10
12
1/2
5/8
5 (125)
10
12
1/2
5/8
6 (150)
10
12
5/8
3/4
DEMONSTRATION A.
Section 01 82 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.
B.
Demonstrate operation and maintenance procedures.
C.
Furnish services for manufacturer’s technical representative for one 8 hour day to instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of refrigerant piping. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7 days notice to Construction Manager of training date.
D.
Provide manuals for attendees.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 23 00
PAGE 19
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Duct Materials.
2.
Insulated flexible ducts.
3.
Single wall spiral round ducts.
4.
Single wall spiral flat oval ducts.
5.
Transverse duct connection system.
6.
Casings.
7.
Ductwork fabrication.
8.
Duct cleaning.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Product requirements for concrete for placement by this section.
2.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating specified by this section.
3.
Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for hangers, supports and sleeves for placement by this section.
4.
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Product requirements for duct accessories for placement by this section.
REFERENCES A.
ASTM International: 1.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2.
ASTM A90/A90M - Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
C.
D.
3.
ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
4.
ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and ColdRolled, General Requirements for.
5.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
6.
ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength LowAlloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
7.
ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
8.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
9.
ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe.
10.
ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.
11.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
National Fire Protection Association: 1.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
2.
NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
3.
NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1.
SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
2.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1.
UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
1.4
1.5
Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is not permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit duct fabrication drawings, drawn to scale not smaller than ¼ inch equals 1 foot, on drawing sheets same size as Contract Documents, indicating: 1.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.
2.
Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes in plan view. For exhaust duct systems, indicate classification of materials handled as defined in this section.
3.
Fittings.
4.
Reinforcing details and spacing.
5.
Seam and joint construction details.
6.
Penetrations through fire rated and other walls.
7.
Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
8.
Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, and duct attachment.
C.
Product Data: Submit data for duct materials, duct liner, duct connectors.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of typical shop fabricated duct fittings.
E.
Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and flexible.
B.
Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 96 standards.
C.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience approved by manufacturer.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination.
B.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.
C.
Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.
1.11
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
WARRANTY A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for ducts.
C.
Section 01 78 36 – Warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
DUCT MATERIALS
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.2
A.
Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G90 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90/A90M.
B.
Steel Ducts: ASTM A1008/A1008M, ASTM A1011/A1011M, ASTM A568/A568M.
C.
Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength.
D.
Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type 304.
E.
Concrete Ducts: ASTM C14; hub and spigot concrete sewer pipe with ASTM C443 joints, rubber gaskets.
F.
Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
G.
Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS A.
B.
2.3
Manufacturers: 1.
Clevaflex.
2.
Thermaflex.
3.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Product Description: Two ply vinyl film supported by helical wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. 1.
Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative.
2.
Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3.
Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F.
4.
Thermal Resistance: 4.2 square feet-hour-degree F per BTU.
SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
2.
Semco Incorporated.
3.
Tangent Air Corp.
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Spiral Mfg. Co., Inc.
5.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lockseam duct constructed of galvanized steel.
C.
Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
D.
2.4
4.
Diameter
Gauge
3 inches to 14 inches
26
15 inches to 26 inches
24
28 inches to 36 inches
22
38 inches to 50 inches
20
52 inches to 84 inches
18
Construct fittings with the following minimum gages: Diameter
Gauge
3 inches to 14 inches
24
15 inches to 26 inches
22
28 inches to 36 inches
20
38 inches to 50 inches
20
52 inches to 60 inches
18
62 inches to 84 inches
16
SINGLE WALL SPIRAL FLAT OVAL DUCTS A.
B.
Manufacturers: 1.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
2.
Semco Incorporated.
3.
Tangent Air Corp.
4.
Spiral Mfg. Co., Inc.
5.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements Not Permitted.
Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD constructed of galvanized steel; rated for 10 inches wg pressure. C.
Joints: Either fully welded or bolted flange with gasket material in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
D.
Construct duct with the following minimum gauges:
E.
2.5
Major Axis Dimension
Gauge
7 inches to 24 inches
24
25 inches to 48 inches
22
50 inches to 70 inches
20
72 inches to 82 inches
18
84 inches and larger
16
Construct fittings with the following minimum gauges: Major Axis Fitting Dimension
Gauge
7 inches to 36 inches
20
37 inches to 60 inches
18
62 inches and larger
16
DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL INSULATED ROUND DUCTS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
2.
Semco Incorporated.
3.
Tangent Air Corp.
4.
Spiral Mfg. Co., Inc.
5.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct with light reinforcing corrugations, galvanized steel outer wall, 2 inch thick glass fiber insulation, solid galvanized steel inner wall; fittings manufactured with solid inner wall.
C.
Duct Coating: Polyvinyl chloride plastic, 4 mil thick on both sides. Temperature range: minus 30 degrees F to 200 degrees F.
D.
Construct round duct with the following minimum gages:
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
E.
2.6
Gauge
3 inches to 14 inches
26
15 inches to 26 inches
24
28 inches to 36 inches
22
38 inches to 50 inches
20
52 inches to 84 inches
18
Construct round fittings with the following minimum gages: Diameter
Gauge
3 inches to 14 inches
24
15 inches to 26 inches
22
28 inches to 36 inches
20
38 inches to 50 inches
20
52 inches to 60 inches
18
62 inches to 84 inches
16
TRANSVERSE DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEM A.
B.
2.7
Diameter
Manufacturers: 1.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
2.
Semco Incorporated.
3.
Spiral Mfg. Co., Inc.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Product Description: SMACNA "E" rated, SMACNA "F" rated, or SMACNA "J" rated rigidity class connection, interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips.
CASINGS A.
Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and construct for operating pressures indicated.
B.
Reinforce access door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD and vertical plenum supporting angles. Furnish hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection. Furnish clear wire glass observation ports, minimum 6 x 6 inch size. C.
2.8
Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Furnish 16 gage back facing and 22 gage perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb./cu ft minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage.
DUCTWORK FABRICATION A.
Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and as indicated on Drawings. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
B.
Fabricate and support round ducts with longitudinal seams in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible (Round Duct Construction Standards), and as indicated on Drawings. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
C.
Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
D.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.
E.
Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.
F.
Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.
INSTALLATION
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3
3.4
A.
Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B.
During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
C.
Use crimp joints with or without bead or beaded sleeve couplings for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller.
D.
Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29.
E.
Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
F.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape and draw bands.
G.
Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swing so fan static pressure holds door in closed position.
H.
Casings: Install floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. Refer to Section 03 30 00. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, furnish liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A.
Install openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Install pitot tube openings for testing of systems. Install pitot tube complete with metal can with spring device or screw to prevent air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside metal ring.
B.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.
C.
Connect air outlets and inlets to supply ducts directly or with five foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.
CLEANING A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B.
Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air flow, clean one half of system completely before proceeding to other half. Protect equipment with potential to be harmed by excessive dirt
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. C.
3.5
SCHEDULES A.
B.
3.6
Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment with potential to be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Install access openings into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
Ductwork Material Schedule: AIR SYSTEM
MATERIAL
Supply (Heating Systems)
Steel
Supply (System with Cooling Coils)
Steel
Return and Relief
Steel
General Exhaust
Steel, Aluminum
Outside Air Intake
Steel
Combustion Air
Steel
Intake and Exhaust
Steel
Ductwork Pressure Class Schedule: AIR SYSTEM
PRESSURE CLASS
Constant Volume Supply
2 inch wg regardless of velocity.
Variable Air Volume Supply (downstream of VAV boxes)
2 inch wg regardless of velocity.
Variable Air Volume Supply (upstream of VAV boxes)
4 inch wg
Return and Relief
2 inch wg regardless of velocity.
General Exhaust
2 inch wg regardless of velocity.
Emergency Generation Ventilation
1 inch wg
DUCT TESTING A.
All supply air ductwork and plenums downstream of the supply fans and upstream of the terminal boxes shall be leak tested to shown leaker is less than 1% of the design air flow.
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
All return air ducts and plenum upstream of the return fan shall be leak tested to show leakage is less than 1% of the design air flow.
C.
Provide results to the Construction Manager.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 31 00
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Constant volume terminal units.
2.
Variable volume terminal units.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment: Product requirements for fan powered terminal units for placement by this section.
2.
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: Product requirements for control components to interface with air terminal units.
3.
Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Controls remote from unit.
4.
Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of operation applying to units in this section.
5.
Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electrical connections to air terminal units specified by this section.
REFERENCES A.
B.
American Refrigeration Institute: 1.
ARI 880 - Air Terminals.
2.
ARI 885 -Procedure for Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1.
C.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
National Fire Protection Association: 1.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
SECTION 23 36 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD D.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1.
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication. Include catalog performance ratings indicating airflow, static pressure, heating coil capacity and NC designation. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Include schedules listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each of second through sixth octave bands at inlet static pressures of 1 inch to 4 inches wg.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit support and hanging details, and service clearances required.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of units, controls components.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts lists. Include directions for resetting constant volume regulators.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Test and rate air terminal units performance for air pressure drop, flow performance, and acoustical performance in accordance with ARI 880 and ARI 885. Attach ARI seal to each terminal unit.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
1.7
UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
SECTION 23 36 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.
1.9
COORDINATION A.
1.10
1.11
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
Coordinate Work with 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC.
WARRANTY A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for air terminal units.
C.
Section 01 78 36 – Warranties.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.
B.
Furnish two additional electric motors of each size of fan powered terminal units. PRODUCTS
1.12
SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME AIR TERMINAL UNITS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Anemostat Air Products.
2.
Enviromental Technologies, Inc.
3.
Krueger.
4.
Titus.
5.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Product Description: Variable air volume terminal units for connection to central air systems, with electronic controls, and, hot water heating coils.
C.
Identification: Furnish each air terminal unit with identification label and airflow indicator. Include unit nominal airflow, maximum factory-set airflow and minimum factory-set airflow and coil type.
D.
Basic Assembly: 1.
Casings: Minimum 20 gage galvanized steel.
SECTION 23 36 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
E.
2.
Lining: Minimum 1 inch thick neoprene or vinyl coated glass fiber insulation, 1.5 lb./cu ft density, meeting NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements. Face lining with 2 mil Mylar film.
3.
Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections, S slip and drive connections for duct attachment.
4.
Plenum Air Outlets: S slip-and-drive connections.
Basic Unit: 1.
Configuration: Air volume damper assembly inside unit casing. Locate control components inside protective metal shroud.
2.
Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings; maximum damper leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at 3 inches inlet static pressure.
3.
Mount damper operator to position damper normally open as indicated on Drawings.
F.
Attenuation Section: Line attenuation sections with 2 inch thick insulation.
G.
Round Outlet: Discharge collar matching inlet size.
H.
Hot Water Heating Coil:
I.
1.
Construction: 1/2 inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins, leak tested under water to 200 psig pressure, factory installed.
2.
Capacity: Based on 180 degree F entering water, 140 degree F leaving water and 30 percent total air volume.
Automatic Damper Operator: 1.
Electric Actuator: 24 volt with high limit with remote temperature read and reset capability.
2.
Velocity Reset Controller and Probe: a.
Pneumatic.
b.
Calibration pressure taps for pressure independent control to compensate for varying inlet static pressure.
c.
Minimum and maximum limits set at reset device.
d.
Maintain airflow to within 5 percent of set point
SECTION 23 36 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD with inlet static pressure variations up to 2 inches. e.
Reset span, adjustable 3 to 8 psi remaining constant regardless of minimum or maximum setting. Reset start point adjustable from 3-10 psi.
J.
Sound Ratings: Not to exceed 20 NC at 10 psi static pressure.
K.
Thermostat: Wall-mounted electric. Electronic type with appropriate mounting hardware. Refer to Section 23 09 00, 23 09 23.
L.
Controls: Actuators, space temperature sensors, and wiring shall be furnished. Terminal manufacturer shall accept and factory installed controllers provided by controls subcontractor.
M.
Sequence of Operation: Refer to Section 23 09 93. EXECUTION
1.13
EXAMINATION A.
1.14
Verify ductwork is ready for air terminal installation.
INSTALLATION A.
Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 23 31 00.
B.
Install ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.
C.
Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.
D.
Support air terminal units connected by flexible duct independently of flexible duct.
E.
Install transition piece to match flexible duct size to inlet or outlet of variable air volume terminal.
F.
Install minimum of 5 ft of 1 inch thick lined ductwork downstream of units. Refer to Section 23 31 00.
SECTION 23 36 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.15
1.16
ADJUSTING A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting.
B.
Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modulation from 100 percent of design flow to 30 percent full flow. Set units with heating coils for minimum 50 percent full flow.
DEMONSTRATION A.
Section 01 82 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.
B.
Demonstrate operation and maintenance procedures.
C.
Furnish services for manufacturer’s technical representative for one 8 hour day to instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of air terminal units. Schedule training with Owner and provide at least 7 days notice to Construction Manager of training date.
D.
Provide manuals to all attendees.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 36 00
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Diffusers.
2.
Registers
3.
Grilles.
4.
Door grilles.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: Operators for adjustable louvers.
2.
Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Operators for adjustable louvers.
3.
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Volume dampers for inlets and outlets.
REFERENCES A.
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1.
B.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1.
C.
ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1.
1.3
AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit sizes, finish, and type of mounting. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location,
SECTION 23 37 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD application, and noise level.
1.4
1.5
1.6
C.
Samples: Submit two of each required air outlet and inlet type.
D.
Test Reports: Rating of air outlet and inlet performance.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Test and rate diffuser, register, and grille performance in accordance with ASHRAE 70.
B.
Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
1.7
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.8
1.9
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
WARRANTY A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for air outlets and inlets.
C.
Section 01 78 36 – Warranties.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SECTION 23 37 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.1
PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS A.
2.2
Manufacturers: 1.
Anemostat Air Products.
2.
E. H Price Company.
3.
Krueger.
4.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
5.
Titus.
6.
Tuttle and Bailey.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Type: Square perforated face with adjustable pattern, stamped, multicore diffuser to discharge air in one-way, two-way, threeway, four-way pattern with sector baffles where indicated.
C.
Frame: Surface mount, Snap-in, Inverted T-bar, Spline type. In plaster ceilings, furnish plaster frame and ceiling frame.
D.
Fabrication: Steel with steel or aluminum frame and baked enamel off-white finish.
CEILING SLOT DIFFUSERS (FLOW BAR) A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Anemostat Air Products.
2.
E. H Price Company.
3.
Krueger.
4.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
5.
Titus.
6.
Tuttle and Bailey.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Type: Continuous slot, adjustable for left, right or vertical discharge. For number of slots and width of slot refer to schedule on the drawing.
C.
Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions Steel with factory off-white enamel finish.
D.
Frame: 1 inch margin with countersunk screw support clips for T
SECTION 23 37 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD bar mounting and gasket mitered end border with end cap. E. 2.3
CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A.
2.4
Plenum: Integral, galvanized steel, insulated.
Manufacturers: 1.
Anemostat Air Products.
2.
E. H Price Company.
3.
Krueger.
4.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
5.
Titus.
6.
Tuttle and Bailey.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades set at 45 degrees, vertical or horizontal face as indicated on the drawings.
C.
Frame: 1 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
D.
Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.
E.
Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans.
CEILING LINEAR EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Anemostat Air Products.
2.
E. H Price Company.
3.
Krueger.
4.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
5.
Titus.
6.
Tuttle and Bailey.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
SECTION 23 37 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.5
B.
Type: Streamlined blades with 90 degree two-way deflection, 1/8 x 3/4 inch on 1/4 inch centers as indicated on the drawings.
C.
Frame: 1 inch margin, extra heavy for floor mounting, with countersunk screw mounting.
D.
Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white baked enamel finish.
E.
Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face.
WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A.
2.6
Manufacturers: 1.
Anemostat Air Products.
2.
E. H Price Company.
3.
Krueger.
4.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
5.
Titus.
6.
Tuttle and Bailey.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical or horizontal face, single or double deflection.
C.
Frame: 1 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
D.
Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white baked enamel finish.
E.
Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face.
WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Anemostat Air Products.
2.
E. H Price Company.
3.
Krueger.
SECTION 23 37 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.7
Nailor Industries, Inc.
5.
Titus.
6.
Tuttle and Bailey.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring or other device to set blades, vertical or horizontal face.
C.
Frame: 1 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
D.
Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, with factory off-white enamel finish.
E.
Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed-blade type with removable key operator, operable from face.
LINEAR WALL REGISTERS/GRILLES A.
2.8
4.
Manufacturers: 1.
Anemostat Air Products.
2.
E. H Price Company.
3.
Krueger.
4.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
5.
Titus.
6.
Tuttle and Bailey.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Type: Streamlined blades with 15 degree deflection, 1/8 x 3/4 inch on 1/4 inch centers.
C.
Frame: 1 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
D.
Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel finish.
E.
Damper: Integral gang-operated opposed blade, damper with removable key operator, operable from face.
DOOR GRILLES A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Anemostat Air Products.
SECTION 23 37 00
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
E. H Price Company.
3.
Krueger.
4.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
5.
Titus.
6.
Tuttle and Bailey.
7.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Type: V-shaped louvers of 20 gage thick steel, 1 inch deep on 1/2 inch centers.
C.
Frame: 20 gage steel with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance on both sides of door, with factory prime coat finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify inlet and outlet locations.
C.
Verify ceiling systems are ready for installation.
INSTALLATION A.
Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.
B.
Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, whether or not dampers are furnished as part of diffuser, grille, and register assembly. Refer to Section 23 33 00.
C.
Paint visible portion of ductwork behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 37 00
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 23 81 26 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Air handling unit.
2.
Condensing unit.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for concrete foundations specified by this section.
2.
Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Vibration isolators.
3.
Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Controls remote from unit.
4.
Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of operation applying to units in this section.
5.
Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Execution requirements for connection to refrigerant piping specified by this section.
6.
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Flexible connections.
7.
Section 25 50 00 - Integrated Automation Facility Controls: Control systems remote from unit.
8.
Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Electrical connection to units.
REFERENCES A.
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1.
ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.
2.
ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
3.
ARI 340/360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary AirConditioning and Heat Pump Equipment.
SECTION 23 81 26
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 4.
B.
C.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1.
ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.
2.
ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
ASTM International: 1.
D.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
National Fire Protection Association: 1.
1.3
ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1.
E.
ARI 365 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary AirConditioning Condensing Units.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data indicating:
C.
1.
Cooling and heating capacities.
2.
Dimensions.
3.
Weights.
4.
Rough-in connections and connection requirements.
5.
Duct connections.
6.
Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
7.
Controls.
8.
Accessories.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions.
SECTION 23 81 26
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify to meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.
Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each unit.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Performance Requirements: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when used in combination with compressors and evaporator coils when tested in accordance with ARI 210/240, ARI 340/360.
B.
Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 210/240, ARI 340/360, ARI 365.
C.
Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270.
D.
Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A.
E.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three documented experience approved by manufacturer.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.8
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
SECTION 23 81 26
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.
C.
Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting units.
1.9
Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location.
1.10
COORDINATION
1.11
1.12
1.13
A.
Coordinate installation of condensing units with concrete pad.
B.
Coordinate installation of air handling units with building structure.
WARRANTY A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B.
Furnish five year manufacturer’s warranty for compressors.
C.
Section 01 78 36 – Warranties.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.
B.
Furnish service and maintenance of equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. Include maintenance items as shown in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, including filter replacements, fan belt replacement, and controls checkout and adjustments.
C.
Furnish 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions for this maintenance period. Furnish capability of response time within 8 hours.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance materials. PRODUCTS
1.14
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Carrier Corp.
SECTION 23 81 26
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
1.15
2.
The Trane Company.
3.
York International.
4.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Product Description: Split system consisting of air handling unit and condensing unit including cabinet, evaporator fan, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor, refrigeration circuit, condenser, air filters, controls, air handling unit accessories, condensing unit accessories, and refrigeration specialties.
FAN COIL UNIT A.
Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.
B.
Cabinet: 1.
Panels: Constructed of galvanized steel with baked enamel finish. Access Panels: Located on both sides of unit. Furnish with duct collars on inlets and outlets.
2.
Insulation: Factory applied to each surface to insulate entire cabinet. ½ inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber with edges protected from erosion.
C.
Evaporator Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with adjustable belt drive and high efficiency motor complying with NEMA MG1, Type 1. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection. Furnish oversize motor.
D.
Evaporator Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Factory leak tested under water. Removable, PVC construction, double-sloped drain pan with piping connections on both sides.
E.
Refrigeration System: Single refrigeration circuits controlled by factory installed thermal expansion valve.
F.
Air Filters: 1 inch thick glass fiber disposable media in metal frames. 30 percent efficiency based on ASHRAE 52.1.
G.
Fan Coil Unit Accessories: 1.
Discharge Plenum: with construction and finish matching unit casing. Integral grille of aluminum construction and adjustable louvers.
2.
Return Air Grille: mounted in return air opening of aluminum construction and fixed louvers.
3.
Mounting Subbase with construction and finish matching unit casing.
SECTION 23 81 26
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 4.
1.16
Vibration Isolators: Neoprene-in-shear type and as specified in Section 23 05 48.
CONDENSING UNIT A.
General: Factory assembled and tested air cooled condensing units, consisting of casing, compressors, condensers, coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.
B.
Unit Casings: Exposed casing surfaces constructed of galvanized steel with manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish. Designed for outdoor installation and complete with weather protection for components and controls, and complete with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives.
C.
Compressor: Single refrigeration circuit with rotary or hermetic reciprocating type compressors, resiliently mounted, with positive lubrication, and internal motor overload protection.
D.
Condenser Coil: Constructed of copper tubing mechanically bonded to copper fins, factory leak and pressure tested.
E.
Controls: Furnish operating and safety controls including high and low pressure cutouts. Control transformer. Furnish magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.
F.
Condenser Fans and Drives: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced. Wired to operate with compressor. Permanently lubricated ball bearing type motors with built-in thermal overload protection. Furnish high efficiency fan motors.
G.
Condensing Unit Accessories: Furnish the following accessories: 1.
Controls to provide low ambient cooling to 0 or -20 degrees F.
2.
Time delay relay.
3.
Anti-short cycle timer.
4.
Disconnect switch.
5.
Vibration isolators.
6.
Hot gas bypass kit.
7.
Coil with corrosion resistant coating capable of withstanding salt spray test of 1000 hours in accordance with ASTM B117.
8.
Condenser Coil Guard: Condenser fan openings furnished with PVC coated steel wire safety guards.
SECTION 23 81 26
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 9. H.
I. 1.17
1.18
Suction and discharge pressure gauges.
Refrigeration specialties: Furnish the following: 1.
Charge of compressor oil.
2.
Holding charge of refrigerant.
3.
Replaceable core type filter drier.
4.
Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.
5.
Shut-off valves on suction and liquid piping.
6.
Liquid line solenoid valve.
7.
Charging valve.
8.
Oil level sight glass.
9.
Crankcase heater.
10.
Hot gas muffler.
11.
Pressure relief device.
Refrigerant: Furnish charge of refrigerant 410A.
CONTROLS A.
Thermostat: Remote space thermostat with single stage cooling.
B.
Furnish interface to Building Automation and Control System specified in Section 25 50 00, 23 09 23.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A.
Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted, non-fused type, interlocked with access door, accessible from outside unit, with power lockout capability. EXECUTION
1.19
1.20
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify concrete pad for condensing unit is ready for unit installation.
INSTALLATION - AIR HANDLING UNIT A.
Connect air handling units to supply and return ductwork with
SECTION 23 81 26
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD flexible connections. Refer to Section 23 33 00.
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
B.
Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to condensate drainage system. Refer to Section 23 21 13.
C.
Install components furnished loose for field mounting.
D.
Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 03.
E.
Mount unit on vibration isolation.
INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT A.
Install condensing units on vibration isolators.
B.
Install units on concrete foundations.
C.
Install refrigerant piping from unit to condensing unit. Install refrigerant specialties furnished with unit specified in Section 23 23 00.
D.
Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant.
E.
Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.
F.
Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories.
G.
Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 03.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer’s field services.
B.
Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing and checkout.
CLEANING A.
Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.
B.
Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet.
C.
Install temporary filters during construction period. Replace with permanent filters at Substantial Completion.
DEMONSTRATION A.
Section 01 82 00 - Demonstration and Training.
SECTION 23 81 26
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.25
B.
Demonstrate air handling unit operation and maintenance.
C.
Demonstrate starting, maintenance, and operation of condensing unit including low ambient temperature operation.
D.
Furnish services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 8 hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of units. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7 days notice to Construction Manager of training date.
E.
Provide manual to attendees.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.
B.
Do not operate air handling units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 81 26
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 26 05 01 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SCOPE A.
This section supplements all sections of this Division and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of electrical systems for the Project. The Work required under this Division, is not limited to the Electrical Drawings. Refer to Site, Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical Drawings that may designate Work to be accomplished. The intent of the Specifications is to provide a complete electrical system that includes all documents that are a part of the Contract. 1.
1.2
Work Included: Furnish all labor, material, services and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connections, testing, and adjustment of all circuits and electrical equipment specified herein, or shown or noted on the Drawings, and its delivery to the Owner complete in all respects ready for use.
B.
Contract Drawings: The Contract Drawings are shown in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the Scope of Work indicating the intended general arrangement of equipment, conduit and outlets. Follow the contract drawings in laying out the work and verify spaces for the installation of the materials and equipment based on actual dimensions of equipment furnished. Where conflicts occur, the most stringent application shall apply wherever a question exists as to the exact intended location of outlets or equipment obtain instructions from the Architect before proceeding with the Work.
C.
Equipment or Fixtures: Equipment and fixtures shall be connected to provide circuit continuity in accordance with the Specifications whether or not each piece of conductor, conduit, or protective device is shown between such items of equipment or fixtures, and the point of circuit origin.
D.
Work Installed but Furnished under Other Sections: The Electrical Work includes the installation or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished under other sections. Verify installation details. Foundations for apparatus and equipment will be furnished under other sections unless otherwise noted or detailed.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Guarantee: Furnish a written guarantee for a period of two years from date of substantial completion.
B.
Equipment Safety: All electrical materials and equipment shall be
SECTION 26 05 01
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD new and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories and bear their label, or listed and certified by a nationally recognized testing authority where UL does not have an approval. Custom made equipment must have complete test data submitted by the manufacturer attesting to its safety. C.
Codes and Regulations: 1.
Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under the requirements of these specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of the following: a.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers – IEEE
b.
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association – NEMA
c.
California Fire Code – CFC
d.
California Building Code – CBC
e.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. – UL
f.
National Fire Protection Association – NFPA
g.
American Society for Testing and Materials – ASTM
h.
American National Standards Institute – ANSI
i.
American Standard Association – ASA
j.
California Electrical Code – CEC
k.
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association – IPCEA
l.
California Code of Regulations, Title 24
D.
The term "Code", when used within the specifications, shall refer to the Publications, Standards, ordinances and codes, listed above. In the case where the codes have different levels of requirements the most stringent rules shall apply.
E.
Seismic Design of Electrical Equipment: 1.
All electrical prefabricated equipment is to be designed and constructed in such a manner that all portions, elements, sub-assemblies and/or parts of said equipment and the equipment as a whole, including their attachments, will resist a horizontal load equal to the operating weights of those parts multiplied times the following factors:
2.
Load is to be applied at the center of gravity of the part and to be in any direction horizontally. Design stresses shall be in accordance with the specifications for design of
SECTION 26 05 01
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD the American Institute of Steel Construction. Anchorage, support and/or attachment of said prefabricated equipment to the structure should be in accordance with the details found in the plans and specifications. 3.
F.
It is the entire responsibility of the Contractor to verify the design of equipment so that the strength and anchorage of the internal components of the equipment exceeds the force level used to restrain and anchor the unit itself to the supporting structure.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1.
2.
Codes, Permits and Fees: Where the Contract Documents exceed minimum requirements, the Contract Documents take precedence. Where code conflicts occur, the most stringent shall apply unless variance is approved. Where provisions in the drawings and specifications differ in regard to code application, size, quality, quantity or type of equipment, Contractor shall include in the bid, costs for the most costly provision either denoted in the specifications or on the drawings. This provision shall apply as an amendment to the California Public Contracts Code. a.
Comply with all requirements for permits, licenses, fees and Code. Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the Work shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless otherwise specified.
b.
Comply with the requirements of the applicable utility companies serving the Project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coordination of the Work.
Substitutions: The materials, products, and equipment described in the Contract Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality. Architect may consider requests for substitutions of specified equipment, materials, or products and then only when request are submitted in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents, Division 1, and are received by the Architect a minimum of 21 days prior to the date established for the receipt of the bid. No substitutions will be considered after the date of the receipt of the bid or contract award unless there is cause for a substitution which complies in every respect to the provisions of the Product Requirements and Substitutions, Section 01 60 00. a.
Acceptance or no exceptions taken by the engineer on any substitution proposed by the contractor shall not be construed as relieving the contractor from compliance with the project’s specifications and performance requirements nor departure there from. The contractor remains responsible for details and
SECTION 26 05 01
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD accuracy for confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions and for the selection of fabrication processes, techniques and assembly, coordination of his work with that of all other trades and making any needed modifications consequent to the substitution at his own cost and for performing the work in a safe manner. G.
Record Drawings: Comply with Section 01 78 10. Keep up to date, monthly payments withheld if not updated.
H.
Shop Drawings and Submittals: Submittals on all material prior to installation.
I.
1.
Drawings shall be submitted, as required under Section 01 33 00.
2.
Shop drawings shall be submitted on, but not limited to, the following: a.
Equipment Wiring Connections
b.
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
c.
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
d.
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
e.
Panelboards
f.
Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures
g.
Wiring Devices
h.
Interior Lighting
i.
Fire Detection and Alarm
Cutting and Patching: 1.
Obtain written permission from the Architect before core drilling or cutting any structural members. Exact method and location of conduit penetrations and/or openings in concrete walls, floors, or ceilings shall be as approved by the Architect.
2.
All core drilling, cutting and patching for this work shall be performed under this Section of the specifications. Use craftsmen skilled in their respective sections for cutting, fitting, repairing, patching of plaster and finishing of materials including carpentry work, metal work or concrete work required for this Work. Do not weaken walls, partitions or floor with cutting. Holes required to be cut in floors must be drilled without excessive breaking out around the holes. Patching and/or refinishing shall be
SECTION 26 05 01
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD determined by the Architect.
1.3
3.
Use care in piercing waterproofing. After the part piercing the waterproofing has been set in place, seal openings and make absolutely watertight.
4.
Seal all openings to meet the fire rating of the particular wall floor or ceiling. Conform to Section 07 84 00.
JOB CONDITIONS A.
B.
C.
Existing Conditions: 1.
The contractor shall visit the site and verify existing conditions. Where existing conditions differ from the drawings, adjustment shall be made and allowances included for all necessary equipment to complete all parts of the drawings and specifications.
2.
Electrical circuits affecting work shall be de-energized while working on or near them.
3.
Arrange the work so that electrical power is available to all electrical equipment within existing facility at all times. Schedule all interruptions at the convenience of the Owner, including exact time and duration. Provide temporary power during all periods of interruption, which are deemed excessive by the Owner. Costs of all premium time (overtime) resulting from the scheduled power interruptions and all costs for providing temporary power shall be included in the cost of the Work.
Protection: 1.
Protection of apparatus, materials and equipment. Take such precautions as necessary to properly protect all apparatus, fixtures, appliances, material, equipment and installations from damage of any kind. The Engineer may reject any particular piece or pieces of material, apparatus or equipment scratched, dented or otherwise damaged.
2.
Seal equipment or components exposed to the weather and make watertight and insect proof. Protect equipment outlets and conduit openings with temporary plugs or caps at all times that work is not in progress.
Sequencing and Scheduling: 1.
Work lines and established heights shall be in strict accordance with architectural drawings and specifications insofar as these drawings and specifications extend. Verify all dimensions shown and establish all elevations and detailed dimensions not shown.
2.
Lay out and coordinate all work well enough in advance to
SECTION 26 05 01
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD avoid conflicts or interferences with other work in progress so that in case of interference the electrical layout may be altered to suit the conditions, prior to the installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. Maintain all code-required clearances about electrical equipment. Unless specifically noted otherwise, establish the exact location of electrical equipment based on the actual dimensions of equipment furnished. 1.4
1.5
WORK IN COOPERATION WITH OTHER SECTIONS A.
Examine the drawings and specifications and determine the work to be performed by the electrical, mechanical and other sections. Provide the type and amount of electrical materials and equipment necessary to place this work in proper operation, completely wired, tested and ready for use. This shall include all conduit, wire, motor starters, disconnects, relays, time clocks and other devices for the required operation sequence of all electrical, mechanical and other systems or equipment. Where a conflict occurs on drawings, the most stringent shall apply.
B.
Provide conduit and wire for all controls and other devices, both line and low voltage, described in this or other parts of the contract documents. Install all control housings and back boxes required for installing conduit and wire to the controls.
C.
Install control wiring in separate conduit between each heating, ventilating and air conditioning sensing device and its control panel and/or control motor. Before installing any conduit for heating, ventilating and air conditioning control wiring, verify from the control manufacturer's shop drawings where these separate conduit runs are required.
D.
Plan all work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other sections. Inform all parties concerned of openings required for equipment or conduit required in the building construction for Electrical Work and provide all special frames, sleeves and anchor bolts as required. Coordinate the electrical work with the mechanical installation. Promptly report to the Architect any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of this work which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of other sections. Failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other sections as being fit and proper for the execution of this work.
TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT A.
Upon completion of all Electrical Work, the contractor shall provide all testing as follows: 1.
Operational Test: Test all circuit breakers, receptacles, motors and all other electrical and communication equipment.
SECTION 26 05 01
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Replace all faulty devices and equipment discovered during testing with new devices and equipment at no additional cost, and that part of the system (or devices or equipment) shall then be retested.
1.6
Secondary Grounding Resistance: Perform ground continuity test between main ground system and equipment frame, system neutral and/or derived neutral point.
3.
Ground Fault System Test: Measure system neutral insulation resistances to ensure no shunt ground paths exist.
4.
All test procedure shall be performed by an independent testing firm.
MAINTENANCE, SERVICING AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS, AND WIRING DIAGRAMS A.
1.7
2.
Prior to substantial completion, the contractor shall submit the number of copies per Section 01 78 20 and servicing instructions, as well as an equal number of copies of complete wiring diagrams all neatly bound in hard cover 3-ring binders with table of contents and tabs for the following items or equipment: (See Section 01 78 20 for Operation and Maintenance Data): 1.
Equipment Wiring Connections
2.
Lighting Control Devices
3.
Panelboards
4.
Wiring Devices
5.
Interior Lighting
6.
Fire Detection and Alarm
B.
All wiring diagrams shall specifically cover the installed system indicating zones, wiring, and components added to the system. Typical drawings will not be accepted.
C.
Include Product / calculations data with Maintenance and Operations manuals. Include all testing reports with Maintenance and Operation manuals.
FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A.
After all requirements of the specifications and/or the drawings have been fully completed representatives of the Owner will inspect the Work. The Contractor shall provide competent personnel to demonstrate the operation of any item of system, to the full satisfaction of each representative. The Contractor shall provide 40 hours of minimum scheduled operation and maintenance training for The GSA choice of staff to be trained on each system indicated in 1.6A above. See specific sections for additional training/operation hours required for school personnel.
SECTION 26 05 01
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.8
B.
Provide manuals for attendees.
C.
Final acceptance of the work will be made by the Owner after receipt of approval and recommendation of acceptance from each representative.
D.
The Contractor shall furnish Record Drawings before final payment of retention.
WARRANTIES A.
Guarantee all materials, equipment, apparatus and workmanship to be free of defective material and faulty workmanship for period of two years from date of Substantial Completion, Unless extended guarantee periods are specified in individual sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS A.
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION A.
Meetings
B.
Invite GSA maintenance staff to attend all pre-installation meetings.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 05 01
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Active electrodes.
2.
Wire.
3.
Grounding well components.
4.
Mechanical connectors.
5.
Exothermic connections.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing: Bonding or welding bars when reinforcing steel is used for electrodes.
2.
Section 09 69 00 - Access Flooring: Grounding systems for access flooring.
3.
Section 26 41 00 - Facility Lightning Protection: Grounding of lightning protection system.
4.
Section 33 79 00 - Site Grounding: Site related grounding components for buildings and facilities.
REFERENCES A.
B.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1.
IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
2.
IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.
International Electrical Testing Association: 1.
C.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
National Fire Protection Association: 1.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2.
NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.
SECTION 26 05 26
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
1.4
1.7
1.8
Existing Metal underground water pipe.
2.
Metal building frame.
3.
Concrete-encased electrode.
4.
Plate electrode.
Construct and test grounding systems for access flooring systems on conductive floors accordance with IEEE 1100. Refer to Section 09 69 00.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
1.6
1.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.
1.5
Grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes:
Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms maximum.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
B.
Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142, and UL labeled.
B.
Perform Work in accordance with the State.
C.
Maintain one copy each document on site.
SECTION 26 05 26
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three 3 years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements
B.
Convene minimum one 1week prior to commencing work of this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
B.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.
C.
Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.
D.
Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.
COORDINATION A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements
B.
Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ROD ELECTRODES A.
B.
Manufacturers: 1.
Erico, Inc.
2.
O-Z Gedney Co.
3.
Thomas & Betts, Electrical
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product
Furnish materials in accordance with the State.
SECTION 26 05 26
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
D. 2.2
B.
2.4
2.5
1.
Material: Copper-clad steel.
2.
Diameter: 3/4 inch 19 mm
3.
Length: 10 feet 3.0 m
Connector: U-bolt clamp.
ACTIVE ELECTRODES A.
2.3
Product Description:
Manufacturers: 1. Erico, Inc. 2.
O-Z Gedney Co.
3.
Thomas & Betts, Electrical
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
Furnish materials in accordance with the State.
WIRE A.
Material: Stranded copper.
B.
Foundation Electrodes: 4 AWG.
C.
Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper conductor insulated.
D.
Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor
insulated.
GROUNDING WELL COMPONENTS A.
Well Pipe: 8 inches NPS (DN200) by 24 inches (600 mm) long concretepipe with belled end.
B.
Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover.
MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A.
B.
Manufacturers: 1.
Erico, Inc.
2.
ILSCO Corporation
3.
O-Z Gedney Co.
4.
Thomas & Betts, Electrical
5.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
Furnish materials in accordance with the State.
SECTION 26 05 26
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
2.6
Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation.
EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A.
Furnish materials in accordance with the State’s standards.
B.
Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and making permanent field connections between grounding system components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
PREPARATION A.
3.3
3.4
Remove paint, rust, mill oils, surface contaminants at connection points.
EXISTING WORK A.
Modify existing grounding system to maintain continuity to accommodate renovations.
B.
Extend existing grounding system using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.
INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with IEEE 142.
B.
Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.
C.
Install 4AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing as indicated on Drawings.
D.
Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.
E.
Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and fountain structures.
F.
Install grounding and bonding in patient care areas to meet requirements of NFPA 99.
G.
Equipment Grounding Conductor: Install separate, insulated
SECTION 26 05 26
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
3.5
H.
Connect to site grounding system. Refer to Section 33 79 00.
I.
Bond to lightning protection system. Refer to Section 26 41 00.
J.
Install continuous grounding using underground cold water system and building steel as grounding electrode. Where water piping is not available, install artificial station ground by means of driven rods or buried electrodes.
K.
Permanently ground entire light and power system in accordance with NEC, including service equipment, distribution panels, lighting panelboards, switch and starter enclosures, motor frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment.
L.
Install branch circuits feeding isolated ground receptacles with separate insulated grounding conductor, connected only at isolated ground receptacle, ground terminals, and at ground bus of serving panel.
M.
Accomplish grounding of electrical system by using insulated grounding conductor installed with feeders and branch circuit conductors in conduits. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC. Install from grounding bus of serving panel to ground bus of served panel, grounding screw of receptacles, lighting fixture housing, light switch outlet boxes or metal enclosures of service equipment. Ground conduits by means of grounding bushings on terminations at panelboards with installed number 12 conductor to grounding bus.
N.
Grounding electrical system using continuous metal raceway system enclosing circuit conductors in accordance with NEC.
O.
Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment.
P.
Install Work in accordance with the States standards.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C.
Grounding and Bonding: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
D.
Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
E.
Perform leakage current tests in accordance with NFPA 99.
SECTION 26 05 26
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD F.
Perform continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
G.
When improper grounding is found on receptacles, check receptacles in entire project and correct. Perform retest.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 05 26
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Conduit supports.
2.
Formed steel channel.
3.
Spring steel clips.
4.
Sleeves.
5.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
6.
Firestopping relating to electrical work.
7.
Firestopping accessories.
8.
Equipment bases and supports.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Product requirements for concrete for placement by this section.
2.
Section 27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.
3.
Section 28 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electronic Safety and Security.
REFERENCES A.
B.
ASTM International: 1.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2.
ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
3.
ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of ThroughPenetration Fire Stops.
4.
ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
FM Global:
SECTION 26 05 29
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.
C.
National Fire Protection Association: 1.
D.
E.
1.
UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2.
UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3.
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
4.
UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
5.
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):
1.6
Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
1.5
WH - Certification Listings.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. 1.3
FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.
Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263, UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Firestopping: Conform to applicable code FM, UL, WH for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
B.
Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.
SECTION 26 05 29
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
1.7
Product Data: 1.
Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
2.
Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
D.
Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.
E.
Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of hangers and supports.
F.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1.
Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.
2.
Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
G.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
H.
Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage (24.9 Pa) minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour. 1.
B.
Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.
Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion. 1.
Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories.
2.
Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.
SECTION 26 05 29
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
C.
Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed.
D.
Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage (24.9 Pa) minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly.
E.
Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
F.
Perform Work in accordance with standard.
G.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.
C.
Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B.
Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F (15 degrees C).
SECTION 26 05 29
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CONDUIT SUPPORTS A.
2.2
Manufacturers: 1.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.
2.
Line Systems.
3.
Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division.
4.
Unistrut Corp
5.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads.
C.
Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel.
D.
Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten.
E.
Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits.
F.
Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F (85 degrees C). Self locking.
FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.
2.
B-Line Systems.
3.
Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division.
4.
Unistrut Corp.
5.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel with holes 1 1/2 inches on center.
C.
Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
D.
Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage (2.8 mm) thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) on center.
SECTION 26 05 29
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.3
2.4
SLEEVES A.
Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
B.
Sleeves for conduits Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick galvanized steel.
C.
Sleeves for conduits Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick galvanized steel.
D.
Sleeves for conduits Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
E.
Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A.
2.5
Manufacturers: 1.
Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc.
2.
NMP Corporation.
3.
Substitutions: [Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
C.
Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
FIRESTOPPING A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Dow Corning Corp.
2.
Hilti Corp.
3.
3M fire Protection Products.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
C.
Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1.
Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single
SECTION 26 05 29
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant.
D. 2.6
2.
Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single component foam compound.
3.
Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers.
4.
Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping.
5.
Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.
6.
Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain.
7.
Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.
Color: Dark gray.
FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A.
Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.
B.
Dam Material: Permanent: Mineral fiberboard. Mineral fiber matting. Sheet metal.
C.
Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.
D.
General:
E.
1.
Furnish UL listed products or products tested by independent testing laboratory.
2.
Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.
Non-Rated Surfaces: 1.
Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed.
SECTION 26 05 29
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
C.
Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
PREPARATION A.
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.
B.
Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C.
Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
D.
Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powderactuated anchors.
E.
Do not drill or cut structural members.
F.
Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
Anchors and Fasteners: 1.
Concrete Structural Elements: Provide expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts.
2.
Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring steel clips, steel ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners.
3.
Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
4.
Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners.
5.
Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts.
6.
Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws.
SECTION 26 05 29
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 7. B.
Inserts: 1.
Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.
2.
Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
3.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches (100 mm).
4.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
C.
Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC.
D.
Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
E.
Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.
F.
Supports:
G. 3.4
Wood Elements: Provide wood screws.
1.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts.
2.
Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
3.
In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch (25 mm) off wall.
4.
Support vertical conduit at floor.
Install Work in accordance with standards.
INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING A.
Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.
B.
Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
C.
Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating to uniform density and texture.
D.
Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size.
SECTION 26 05 29
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD E.
Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
F.
Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.
G.
Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured. Dam material to remain.
H.
Fire Rated Surface: 1.
2.
I.
Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows: a.
Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) on both sides of building element.
b.
Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void between sleeve and building element.
c.
Pack void with backing material.
d.
Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated.
Where conduit, penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Non-Rated Surfaces: 1.
Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition floor, and ceiling: a.
Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) on both sides of building element.
b.
Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void between sleeve and building element.
c.
Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer.
2.
Install escutcheons, floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling.
3.
Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at telecommunication rooms, data rooms. Apply sealant to both
SECTION 26 05 29
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit. 3.5
3.6
3.7
INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A.
Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
B.
Construct supports of steel members formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A.
Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links.
B.
Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam.
C.
Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
D.
Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
E.
Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
F.
Install plastic stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
3.8
CLEANING A.
3.9
Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 05 29
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SUMMARY A.
Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
2.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
3.
Section 26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures.
4.
Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.
5.
Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.
6.
Section 27 05 36 - Cable Trays for Communications Systems.
7.
Section 28 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Electronic Safety and Security.
8.
Section 28 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electronic Safety and Security.
REFERENCES A.
B.
American National Standards Institute: 1.
ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
2.
ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
2.
NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
3.
NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
SECTION 26 05 33
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.3
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system.
B.
Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
C.
Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.
1.5
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit for the following:
C.
1.6
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise specified.
1.
Flexible metal conduit.
2.
Raceway fittings.
3.
Conduit bodies.
4.
Surface raceway.
5.
Pull and junction boxes.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: 1.
Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inch.
SECTION 26 05 33
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
1.7
1.8
Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B.
Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
COORDINATION A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 05 03.
C.
Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. PRODUCTS
1.9
METAL CONDUIT A.
1.10
Manufacturers: 1.
Hubbell Wiring Devices.
2.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
3.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Hubbell Wiring Devices.
2.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
3.
The Wiremold Co.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.
C.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
SECTION 26 05 33
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.11
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A.
1.12
1.
Carlon Electrical Products.
2.
Hubbell Wiring Devices.
3.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
C.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A.
1.13
Manufacturers:
Manufacturers: 1.
Hubbell Wiring Devices.
2.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
3.
Walker Systems Inc.
4.
The Wiremold Co.
5.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel [or malleable iron], [compression] [set screw] [indenter] type.
SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Hubbell Wiring Devices.
2.
Walker Systems Inc.
3.
The Wiremold Co.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway.
C.
Size: 4x4 inch.
D.
Finish: Gray enamel.
SECTION 26 05 33
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD E.
1.14
OUTLET BOXES A.
B.
1.15
Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match finish on raceway.
Manufacturers: 1.
Hubbell Wiring Devices.
2.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
3.
Pass and Seymour Products.
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1.
Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required.
2.
Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
C.
Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
D.
Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs.
E.
Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26.
F.
Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Hubbell Wiring Devices.
2.
Thomas & Betts Corp.
3.
Pass and Seymour Products.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
C.
Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 27 16.
D.
Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 1; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1.
Material: Galvanized cast iron.
2.
Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
SECTION 26 05 33
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD EXECUTION 1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.
EXISTING WORK A.
Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and patch surfaces.
B.
Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.
C.
Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.
D.
Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
E.
Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.
F.
Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.
INSTALLATION A.
Install Work in accordance with standards.
B.
Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
C.
Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
D.
Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
E.
Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
INSTALLATION - RACEWAY A.
Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system.
B.
Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring
SECTION 26 05 33
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD installation. C.
Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, layin adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
D.
Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports
E.
Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
F.
Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29.
G.
Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.
H.
Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
I.
Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.
J.
Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
K.
Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
L.
Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
M.
Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.
N.
Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.
O.
Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install [hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate] [factory elbows for] bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size.
P.
Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
Q.
Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.
R.
Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
S.
Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount plumb and level.
SECTION 26 05 33
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. T. 1.20
Close ends and unused openings in wireway.
INSTALLATION - BOXES A.
Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings.
B.
Adjust box location up to 10 feet (3 m) prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.
C.
Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26.
D.
Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
E.
In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
F.
Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
G.
Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches (150 mm) separation. Install with minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in acoustic rated walls horizontally.
H.
Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
I.
Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
J.
Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
K.
Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
L.
Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
M.
Support boxes independently of conduit.
N.
Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
O.
Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
SECTION 26 05 33
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.21
1.22
1.23
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A.
Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 07 84 00.
B.
Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings and reflected ceiling plan.
C.
Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
ADJUSTING A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C.
Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
CLEANING A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B.
Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
C.
Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. -- End of Section --
SECTION 26 05 33
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
1.
Nameplates.
2.
Labels.
3.
Wire markers.
4.
Conduit markers.
5.
Stencils.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section.
2.
Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems.
3.
Section 28 05 53 - Identification for Electronic Safety and Security.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data:
C.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.
2.
Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged
SECTION 26 05 53
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD devices; include tag numbers. 1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Perform Work in accordance with standard.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B.
Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.
C.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.
D.
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B.
Install labels nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer. PRODUCTS
1.8
NAMEPLATES A.
Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
B.
Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting background color.
C.
Letter Size: 1.
1/8 inch (3 mm) high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
SECTION 26 05 53
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.
D. 1.9
1.11
Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch (5 mm) white letters on black background.
WIRE MARKERS A.
Description: Cloth tape, split sleeve or tubing type wire markers.
B.
Legend: 1.
Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number [as indicated on Drawings].
2.
Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams, shop drawings and drawings.
CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS A.
Description: Nameplate fastened with adhesive.
B.
Color:
C.
1.12
Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
LABELS A.
1.10
1/4 inch (6 mm) high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
1.
480 Volt System: Black lettering on white background.
2.
208 Volt System: Black lettering on white background.
Legend: 1.
480 Volt System: 480 VOLTS.
2.
208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS.
LOCKOUT DEVICES A.
Lockout Hasps: 1.
Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches (184 x 75 mm). EXECUTION
1.13
PREPARATION A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
SECTION 26 05 53
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
1.14
Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.
INSTALLATION A.
Install identifying devices after completion of painting.
B.
Nameplate Installation:
C.
D.
1.
Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.
2.
Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.
3.
Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.
4.
Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets or adhesive.
5.
Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations.
6.
Install nameplates for the following: a.
Panelboards.
b.
Transformers.
c.
Disconnects.
Label Installation: 1.
Install label parallel to equipment lines.
2.
Install label for identification of individual control device stations.
3.
Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
Wire Marker Installation: 1.
Install wire marker for each conduit or raceway longer than 6 feet.
2.
Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run.
3.
Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation [as indicated on Drawings].
SECTION 26 05 53
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD E.
F.
Conduit Raceway Marker Installation: 1.
Install conduit raceway marker for each conduit raceway longer than 6 feet (2000 mm).
2.
Conduit Raceway Marker Spacing: 20 feet (6000 mm) on center.
3.
Raceway Painting: Identify conduit using field painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.
b.
Color: 1)
480 VOLT SYSTEM: BLUE.
2)
208 VOLT SYSTEM: YELLOW.
Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.
Underground Warning Tape Installation: 1.
H.
Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet (2000 mm).
Stencil Installation: 1.
G.
a.
Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable.
Install Work in accordance with standards -- End of Section --
SECTION 26 05 53
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SUMMARY A.
Section includes two-winding transformers; shielded transformers; autotransformers; and buck-and-boost transformers.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
2.
Section 26 22 03 - Low-Voltage Transformers For Nonlinear Loads.
REFERENCES A.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1.
NEMA ST 1 - Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose Type).
2.
NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications.
International Electrical Testing Association: 1.
1.3
1.4
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, tap configurations, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load, and sound level.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of transformers.
SECTION 26 22 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS A.
1.6
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years [documented] experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B.
Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C.
Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish. PRODUCTS
1.7
TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Eaton.
2.
General Electric.
3.
Square ‘D’.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Product Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry type transformers, ratings as indicated on Drawings.
C.
Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase.
D.
Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase.
E.
Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows: 1.
15-500 kVA: Class 220 with 115 degrees C rise.
F.
Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point at full load.
G.
Winding Taps: 1.
H.
Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. Maximum sound levels are as follows:
SECTION 26 22 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.8
1.
1-5 kVA: 30 dB.
2.
6-25 kVA: 40 dB.
3.
26-150 kVA: 42 dB.
4.
151-225 kVA: 43 dB.
5.
226-300 kVA: 47 dB.
6.
301-500 kVA: 51 dB.
I.
Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for transformers 300 kVA and larger.
J.
Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible flexible copper grounding strap.
K.
Mounting: 1.
1-15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.
2.
16-75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor or trapeze mounting.
3.
Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor or trapeze mounting.
L.
Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded.
M.
Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1 ventilated. Furnish lifting eyes or brackets.
N.
Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
O.
Nameplate: Include transformer connection data [and overload capacity based on rated allowable temperature rise].
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.
Production test each unit according to NEMA ST20. EXECUTION
1.9
1.10
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify mounting supports are properly sized and located including concealed bracing in walls.
EXISTING WORK
SECTION 26 22 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.11
1.12
1.13
A.
Disconnect and remove abandoned transformers.
B.
Maintain access and adequate ventilation to existing transformers and other installations remaining active and requiring access and ventilation. Modify installation or provide access panel or ventilation grilles.
C.
Clean and repair existing transformers to remain or to be reinstalled.
INSTALLATION A.
Set transformer plumb and level.
B.
Use flexible conduit, in accordance with Section 26 05 33, 2 feet (600 mm) minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
C.
Support transformers in accordance with Section 26 05 29. 1.
Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets furnished by manufacturer.
2.
Mount floor-mounted transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating transformer noise from building structure.
3.
Mount trapeze-mounted transformers as indicated on Drawings.
D.
Provide seismic restraints.
E.
Install grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.2.1.
ADJUSTING A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments -- End of Section --
SECTION 26 22 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SUMMARY A.
Section includes distribution and branch circuit panelboards and electronic grade branch circuit panelboards.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
2.
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
3.
Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.
REFERENCES A.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1.
B.
C.
IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1.
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
2.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
3.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
4.
NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices.
5.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
6.
NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
7.
NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
International Electrical Testing Association: 1.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical
SECTION 26 24 16
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. D.
National Fire Protection Association: 1.
E.
1.3
1.4
1.5
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1.
UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards.
2.
UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
3.
UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
C.
Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
1.6
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance products.
B.
Furnish two of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike to Owner’s current keying system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SECTION 26 24 16
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.1
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A.
2.2
Manufacturers: 1.
Eaton.
2.
GE Electrical.
3.
Siemens.
4.
Square D.
5.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Product Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type pe panelboard.
C.
Panelboard Bus: Copper current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard.
D.
Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as indicated on Drawings.
E.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Furnish circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits.
F.
Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated on Drawings.
G.
Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1, 5 ¾ inches deep, 20 inches wide, cabinet box.
H.
Cabinet Front: Surface hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Eaton.
2.
GE Electrical.
3.
Siemens.
4.
Square D.
5.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
SECTION 26 24 16
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.
C.
Panelboard Bus: Copper current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish insulated ground bus as indicated on Drawings].
D.
For non-linear load applications subject to harmonics furnish 200 percent rated, plated copper, solid neutral.
E.
Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as indicated on Drawings.
F.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
G.
Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
H.
Cabinet Box: 6 inches (153 mm) deep, 20 inches (508 mm) wide.
I.
Cabinet Front: Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXISTING WORK A.
Disconnect abandoned panelboards.
B.
Maintain access to existing panelboard and load centers remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
INSTALLATION A.
Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Install panelboards plumb.
C.
Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
D.
Height: 6 feet (1800 mm) to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet (1800 mm) with bottom no more than 4 inches (100 mm) above floor.
E.
Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
F.
Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to
SECTION 26 24 16
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD balance phase loads.
3.3
3.4
G.
Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
H.
Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch (DN27). Identify each as SPARE.
I.
Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C.
Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.
D.
Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.
E.
Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.
ADJUSTING A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting.
B.
Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 24 16
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 26 27 16 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SUMMARY A.
Section includes hinged cover enclosures, cabinets, terminal blocks, and accessories.
B.
Related Sections:
1.4
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
2.
Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
3.
Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.
4.
Section 28 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Electronic Safety and Security.
REFERENCES A.
1.3
1.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
2.
NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard data for enclosures, cabinets, and terminal blocks.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
SECTION 26 27 16
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.5
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B.
Furnish two of each key. PRODUCTS
1.6
HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A.
1.7
Manufacturers: 1.
Hoffman Electrical Products.
2.
Hubbell Wiring Devices.
3.
Reliance Electric.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 steel enclosure.
C.
Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key.
D.
Furnish interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with white enamel.
E.
Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
CABINETS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Hoffman Electrical Products.
2.
Hubbell Wiring Devices.
3.
Reliance Electric.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable end walls.
C.
Box Size: 24 inches (600 mm) wide x 6 inches (150 mm) deep.
D.
Backboard: Furnish ¾ inch (19 mm) thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte white.
E.
Fronts: Steel, surface type with concealed trim clamps, door with concealed hinge, and flush lock [keyed to match branch circuit panelboard]. Finish with gray baked enamel.
SECTION 26 27 16
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
F.
Knockouts: as required for conduit entry.
G.
Furnish metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages.
H.
Furnish accessory feet for free-standing equipment. EXECUTION
1.8
1.9
1.10
EXISTING WORK A.
Remove abandoned cabinets and enclosures, including abandoned cabinets and enclosures above accessible ceiling finishes. Patch surfaces.
B.
Maintain access to existing cabinets and enclosures and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
C.
Clean and repair existing cabinets and enclosures to remain or to be reinstalled.
INSTALLATION A.
Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
B.
Install cabinet fronts plumb.
CLEANING A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B.
Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials.
C.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
D.
Clean finishes and touch up damage -- End of Section --
SECTION 26 27 16
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles; multioutlet assembly; and device plates and decorative box covers.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.2
REFERENCES A.
1.3
1.4
National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1.
NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
2.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples of each wiring device and wall plate illustrating materials, construction, color, and finish.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
1.5
Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems: Outlet boxes for wiring devices.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years [documented] experience.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B.
Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate. PRODUCTS
1.6
WALL SWITCHES A.
Manufacturers:
SECTION 26 27 26
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
C.
1.7
1.
Arrow Hart Wiring Devices.
2.
Hubbell.
3.
Pass and Seymour.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Single Pole Switch: 1.
Arrow Hart Wiring Devices.
2.
Hubbell.
3.
Leviton.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Three-way Switch: 1.
Arrow Hart Wiring Devices.
2.
Hubbell.
3.
Leviton.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
RECEPTACLES A.
B.
Duplex Convenience Receptacle: 1.
Arrow Hart Wiring Devices.
2.
Hubbell.
3.
Leviton.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
GFCI Receptacle: 1.
Arrow Hart Wiring Devices.
2.
Hubbell.
3.
Leviton.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C.
Product Description: NEMA WD 1, General-duty general use receptacle.
D.
Device Body: Ivory plastic.
SECTION 26 27 26
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.8
E.
Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as indicated on Drawings.
F.
Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.
G.
GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.
WALL PLATES A.
B.
Manufacturers: 1.
Arrow Hart Wiring Devices.
2.
Hubbell.
3.
Pass and Seymour.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Decorative Cover Plate: Ivory plastic. EXECUTION
1.9
1.10
EXAMINATION A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B.
Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
C.
Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates.
D.
Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.
PREPARATION A.
1.11
1.12
Clean debris from outlet boxes.
EXISTING WORK A.
Disconnect and remove abandoned wiring devices.
B.
Modify installation to maintain access to existing wiring devices to remain active.
C.
Clean and repair existing wiring devices to remain or to be reinstalled.
INSTALLATION A.
Install devices plumb and level.
SECTION 26 27 26
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.13
1.14
B.
Install switches with OFF position down.
C.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
D.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to [outlet box with bonding jumper] [and] [branch circuit equipment grounding conductor].
E.
Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
F.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. Install stranded conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. When stranded conductors are used in lieu of solid, use crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under device screws.
G.
Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
H.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33 to obtain mounting heights as specified and as indicated on drawings.
B.
Install wall switch 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor.
C.
Install convenience receptacle 18 inches (450 mm) above finished floor.
D.
Install convenience receptacle 6 inches (150 mm) above back splash of counter.
E.
Coordinate installation of wiring devices with underfloor raceway service fittings provided under Section 26 05 39.
F.
Coordinate installation of wiring devices with floor box service fittings provided under Section 26 05 34.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Inspect each wiring device for defects.
C.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
D.
Verify each receptacle device is energized.
SECTION 26 27 26
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.15
1.16
E.
Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
F.
Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
ADJUSTING A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
CLEANING A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 27 26
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SUMMARY A.
Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
2.
Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
REFERENCES A.
American National Standards Institute: 1.
1.3
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard product of manufacturer.
C.
Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
D.
Samples: Submit two color chips 3 x 3 inch (75 x 75 mm) in size illustrating luminaire finish color where indicated in luminaire schedule.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
1.5
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A.
1.6
ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp BallastLine Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.
SECTION 26 51 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
Furnish two of each plastic lens type.
C.
Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp installed.
D.
Furnish two of each ballast type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES A.
Product Description: Complete interior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as scheduled.
B.
Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A.
B.
2.3
Manufacturers: 1.
Cooper Industries Inc.
2.
General Electric Co.
3.
Philips Electronic North America.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Product Description: [Electronic ballast] [rapid start] [instant start] [less than 10 percent THD] [less than 20 percent THD] [High-power-factor type electromagnetic ballast certified by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. to comply with ANSI C82.1], suitable for lamps specified, with voltage to match luminaire voltage.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
General Electric Co.
2.
Lithonia Lighting.
3.
Philips Electronics.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXISTING WORK A.
3.2
Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires, lamps, and accessories.
INSTALLATION
SECTION 26 51 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3
3.4
3.5
A.
Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
B.
Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot (600 x 1200 mm) size independent of ceiling framing.
C.
Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on Drawings and as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
D.
Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
E.
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
F.
Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.
G.
Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
H.
Install wall-mounted luminaires at height [as indicated on Drawings] [as scheduled].
I.
Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
J.
Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 26 05 33 using flexible conduit as indicated on Drawings.
K.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire.
L.
Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
M.
Ground and bond interior luminaires in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.
ADJUSTING A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Aim and adjust luminaires [as indicated on Drawings].
CLEANING
SECTION 26 51 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.6
A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.
B.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
C.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.
B.
Relamp luminaires having failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 51 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.2
SUBMITTALS A.
Administrative Requirements: Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data:
C.
1.3
1.4
Nameplates. Wire markers. Conduit markers. Stencils. Underground Warning Tape.
1.
Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.
2.
Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.
Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
2.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B.
Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.
C.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.
D.
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original
SECTION 27 05 53
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
wrapping. 1.5
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B.
Install nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
NAMEPLATES A.
Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting background color.
B.
Letter Size:
C. 2.2
1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2.
1/4 inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
Minimum nameplate thickness:
1/8 inch.
WIRE MARKERS A.
2.3
1.
Description:
Split sleeve type wire markers.
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A.
Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B.
Prepare surfaces in stencil painting.
EXISTING WORK
SECTION 27 05 53
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3
A.
Install identification on all equipment.
B.
Replace lost nameplates.
INSTALLATION A.
Install identifying devices after completion of painting.
B.
Nameplate Installation:
C.
1.
Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.
2.
Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
3.
Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
4.
Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive.
5.
Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations.
Underground Warning Tape Installation: 1.
Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches minimum below finished grade or as indicated on drawings, and directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 27 05 53
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 DATA COMMUNICATIONS / VOICE COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
The communications cabling system at RVS/DHS/CIS is based on a flexible design that will allow any communications connector to be used for voice or data. All communications station cable is terminated on RJ45 connectors at the faceplate and RJ45 patch panels in the IDF Closets. The voice riser cable will be extended from 66 blocks in the IDF Room to each IDF with one pair terminated on each port of a voice riser patch panel. This system will support add, moves and changes by simply moving a patch cord.
B.
Principal items of work shall include, but not limited to, Customized Services, including: 1.
Design services, which shall include the network connectivity design. Design will be developed based on the following: a.
2.
3.
Provide rack space to allow a 40% expansion of the number of cable drops provided at time of initial occupancy.
Connectivity design documentation shall include: a.
Drawing of logical network configuration.
b.
A material list specifying quantity and part/specification numbers.
c.
Installation specifications.
d.
Complete set of floor plans indicating entire system.
e.
Cable Management Program, including: 1)
CABLE SCHEDULE
2)
CABLE TEST FORMS
3)
CABLE LABELS
4)
NETWORKING PLANNING CHARTS
5)
DISKETTES CONTAINING DESIGN DATA BASE
Furnishing, installing, connecting and testing networking system including all components, cabinets, terminals,
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD conduit and cabling system in accordance with design services furnished under this Specification.
1.2
1.3
4.
Supervision necessary to provide a complete and operable system.
5.
Design Services shall be in accordance with applicable Electronic Industry Association (EIA) and Telecommunication Industries Association (TIA) Standards.
RELATED SECTIONS A.
Section 26 05 01: Basic Electrical Requirements
B.
Section 26 05 33: Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
C.
Section 26 05 33: Identification for Electrical Systems
D.
Section 26 27 26: Wiring Devices
REGULATORY REFERENCES A.
The cabling system described in this document is derived from the recommendations made in recognized telecommunications industry standards. The following documents are incorporated by reference: 1.
USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard
2.
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 526-14, Optical Power Loss Measurement of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant – OFSTP-14
3.
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements
4.
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components
5.
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.3, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components
6.
ANSI/TIA/EIA– 570-B, Residential Telecommunications Cabling Standard
7.
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 598, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
8.
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606-A, Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Building
9.
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 10.
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard
11.
BICSI-TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International
12.
National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA-70), National Electrical Code (NEC)
13.
NEMA 250
13. 14.
1.4
National Electrical Code (NEC) Articles 770 and 800 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) (IEEE C 2)
B.
If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then, as a general principle, the more stringent requirement shall apply. However, in all cases where there appears to be conflict or a specification is not clear to the contractor, the USCIS Regional Coordinator or USCIS Technical Representative must be contacted for clarification.
C.
The contractor will abide by all applicable federal, state, county and local building and safety regulations.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit in accordance with Section 01300: Submittals.
B.
Furnish catalog cuts, technical data and descriptive literature on components. Data shall be clearly marked and noted to identify specific ranges, model numbers, sizes and other pertinent data.
C.
Shop drawings shall indicate equipment locations, wiring and schematics, details, panel configurations, sizes and a point-topoint wiring diagram of all circuits. Shop drawings shall indicate interfaces to equipment furnished by others, identifying numbers of wires, termination requirements, and other pertinent details. Responsibility for each end of interfaces shall be noted on shop drawings.
D.
Entire system shall be supported by engineering documentation including: 1.
Floor plans indicating all components, conduit run, cable type, cabinet, fill and rough-in requirements.
2.
Riser diagrams indicating all devices, cabinets and the point-to-point connections in a manner following floor plan layout.
3.
Detailed terminal cabinet layout diagrams must be submitted for the terminal cabinet in each building designated cabinet, to include the clear identification of switches,
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD copper and fiber optic patch panels, and cabinet expansion areas. Diagrams must be submitted in AutoCAD .dxf or .dwg format. E.
Each submittal shall be bound and shall contain an index organized vertically by assembly and item number and horizontally by columns. The first assembly shall be the major head end equipment. The leftmost column shall be the item number; next shall be the description, followed by the applicable specification section number, and followed by the specified item, which is followed by the submitted item. The rightmost column shall be for notes, which shall be used to reference the reason for submitting items other than as specified.
F.
Each submittal shall contain product data sheets or catalog cut sheets for each item listed in the Index. These shall be arranged in the same order as the index and if more than one item is shown, the submitted items shall be highlighted or marked with an arrow. The product data shall be sufficiently detailed to allow the Engineer to evaluate the suitability of the product and to allow other trades to provide necessary coordination.
G.
Drawings that are specific to this specification section shall be included in the submittal. “A” size, (8-½”x ll”), and “B” size, (ll”x17”), shall be bound into the manual. Larger drawings shall be folded and inserted into transparent envelopes that are bound into the manual.
H.
Installation drawings which show devices from many specification sections shall be submitted separately. Contractor shall submit eight blue line copies and one reproducible copy of all such installation drawings.
I.
Contractor shall provide six copies of complete submittal package.
J.
Refer to customized services under this Specification for additional requirements.
K.
K.
Operating and Servicing Manuals and Record Drawings:
1.
Deliver required copies of “Operating and Servicing Manual” for each system. Each manual shall be bound in a flexible binder and data shall be typewritten or drafted.
2.
Each manual shall include instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of system and shall include circuit diagrams of systems, a wiring destination schedule for each circuit leaving each rack, a schematic diagram of each component, and replacement parts numbers. Each manual shall also include as-built cable site plot plan indicating all cables both underground and in each building, and as-built coding used on each cable. Building floor plans shall indicate route of all conduit and cable runs.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.5
1.6
3.
Submit a transparency of plot plan and building plans, indicating location of equipment, conduit and cable runs.
4.
Contractor shall maintain one set of plot and building plans labeled “Project Record Drawings” at site. Contractor shall denote all completed wiring runs in red.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Ordinances and Regulations: The work of this Section shall conform to California Code of Regulations, Part 3, and all other applicable codes and standards.
B.
Only a qualified Contractor holding licenses required by legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work shall do work. Contractor shall have completed at least 5 projects of equal scope to systems described herein and shall have been engaged in business of supplying and installing specified type of systems for at least 5 years. Use equipment manufacturer’s certified installers.
C.
If Contractor fails to repair or replace material or work indicated above within 15 days of receiving written notice, the Owner, with its own personnel or by Contract, may proceed with repair or replacement and assess cost against Contractor, if Contractor does not respond accordingly.
D.
Persons skilled in trade represented by work, and in accordance with all applicable building codes shall install system in accordance with best trade practice.
WARRANTY A.
The warranty shall cover the failure of the cable plant system to support current or future applications that are designed for the link/channel specifications of TIA/EIA-568-B.
B.
A minimum fifteen (15) year warranty covering application assurance, product, cable, and labor.
C.
Warranty needs to allow USCIS designated personnel to connect end user equipment without going through a certified contractor.
D.
Warranty needs to allow for new cable plant additions by the same contractor or by another certified contractor of the installed vendor’s equipment.
E.
The warranty needs to be guaranteed by the hardware vendor not the installation contractor.
F.
If a warranty claim is initiated, USCIS reserves the right to authorize certified installation contractors permission to fix the cable plant. In the event that the installation contractor is denied access then the hardware vendor will provide another
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD certified installation contractor for approval. This process will continue until the cable plant issues are resolved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
EQUIPMENT STANDARDS A.
Where applicable all components installed under this Contract shall be listed by UL.
B.
All equipment and components shall be products of a single manufacturer except otherwise approved by the Owner.
EQUIPMENT A.
PATCH PANELS
B.
Patch panels, both fiber and copper are the approved methods of providing connectivity between horizontal cables, Intra and Inter-backbone copper, fiber backbone, and common network service devices, such as switches, PBX, routers, and other electronics. All patch panels are to be of a high-density to maximize rack space.
C.
Patch panel installation must adhere to manufacturer specifications and installed utilizing all wire management hardware, both front and back. Panels shall be installed to best utilize both vertical and horizontal wire managers, and should be separated by horizontal wire managers. There should be a minimum of one horizontal wire manager for each horizontal patch panel unless otherwise specified. Panels must be clearly marked as to the outlet designation. Labels must be of permanent indelible typed materials. 1.
2.
Copper Patch Panels a.
Each panel will be installed to provide the maximum use of rack space. Each panel will be mounted in an equipment rack that shall conform to the EIA-310 mounting-hole spacing standard.
b.
Separate patch panels will segregate “A”, “B”, “C” cables for each IMO jack. The upper patch panels will be used for “A” only; the lower patch panels will be used for “B” only on rack one. In addition, and depending on the number of total cables, “C” cables may also share a single standard 7-foot equipment rack, swing gate or cabinet enclosure.
Fiber Optic Patch Panels a.
Optical fiber cable patch panels for workstation connections (also called fiber cabinets) shall provide SC or MTRJ couplers. Optical fiber cable
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD patch panels for backbone cabling (also called fiber cabinets) shall provide SC or MTRJ couplers. The color scheme and the port numbering scheme on the patch panel shall be consistent in any given installation to reduce confusion and to prevent mistakes in making cross-connections. Fiber patch panels shall be installed in standard increments of six-position, ST, SC or MTRJ loads or interconnect couplers, as required in each wiring closet and MDF. D.
E.
Equipment Racks 1.
Provide (1) standard 7’ x 19” two post rack with 10” vertical (front and rear combo) wire management. The rack shall be CPI #55053-703 or equivalent and for 10” vertical management with hinged covers use CPI #30096-703 or equivalent. The rack shall be.
2.
Shall conform to the ANSI/TIA/EIA standards.
3.
Conform to the standard EIA-310 mounting specification.
4.
Provide pre-tapped 10-32 threading with rack unit markings to indicate position.
5.
Provide a flexible modular concept. • Provide vertical wire management attached to side of rack with a minimum of one pass through to go from front to back or vice versa.
6.
Provide floor mounting hardware.
7.
Match make and model within existing facilities, where possible.
8.
Provide and install one (1) single-sided shelf in the Telecommunication Room equipment rack. (For single-sided shelf use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 40074-700 or equivalent.)
9.
Provide and install two (2) 20amp Power Distribution Units with 6’ in the Data/Utility Room equipment rack. (For PDU unit use Wiremold R5BZ20-15 or equivalent.)
10.
The equipment racks require 2U and 1U horizontal wire management with hinged covers as specified in elevation drawings with quantities. Total quality: 8 (2U) and 2 (1U) (For horizontal management use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 30530-719 and 30529-719 or equivalent.)
Faceplate Configuration 1.
Workstations that are not connected to an optical fiber cable typically utilize a single-gang faceplate that can support up to six connection ports. When data only is
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD installed in the faceplate, a dual, RJ-45 module shall be installed in the top position. If a dual gang faceplate is used, the dual RJ-45 module shall be installed in the top left position. When voice and data are installed in the same faceplate, the dual RJ-45 information outlet shall conform to the configuration as outlined in drawings. Voice shall be installed at the bottom, data at the top positions of all information outlets. Blank inserts shall be installed in all remaining positions. 2.
F.
G.
Workstations that are connected to optical fiber cables shall have a double-gang faceplate and junction box installed that can support up to 12 connection ports.
Ladder rack: 1.
Estimate at 20’ to 18’ ladder cable running shall be installed in RWC Room. Use CPI Universal Cable Runway #10250-718 or equivalent and Radius Bend 10723-718 or equivalent, associated with mounting and installation products.
2.
Provide Ladder Rack within the IDF’s to route cable to or from sleeves, risers, ducts, cable trays to termination fields within equipment racks or mounted on walls. This cable ladder system shall be contained within the confines of the IDF.
3.
IDF cable ladder may be mounted horizontally or vertically over equipment racks. Vertical ladder will be used to support riser cable from floor to ceiling as it passes between floors. The Cable Runway system shall be mounted to walls, the top of equipment rack, or hung with threaded rods for bracing and support. Refer to Local building Codes for additional seismic bracing for code compliance.
4.
In the IDF’s, the ladder rack system shall be bonded to the Telecommunications Ground Bus with 6 AWG stranded green ground wire.
COPPER CABLE INSTALLATION 1.
The contractor shall provide, place, terminate, certify and provide required documentation of all Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cables as specified through work assignments under this SOW.
2.
All cable terminations to be installed by technicians certified by the equipment vendor. (Keystone style modular jacks)
3.
Data and Voice Horizontal Cabling need to be of the appropriate color as specified in USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
4.
a.
All cable, equipment, and materials shall meet applicable ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B, National Electrical Code (NEC) 770, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802 and Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Verification Program standards. All cable equipment and materials must be manufactured by facilities that are International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 9001 registered and certified.
b.
Shall be CAT 6 rating in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2
c.
Four-pair, 100-Ohm, 24 American Wire Gage (AWG).
d.
Will be part of a 15 year minimum warranty on the Structured Cable Plant.
e.
The cable should have contiguous, 2-foot segmentlength markers printed on the cable jacket. The markings must also show the applicable performance CAT 6, as well as the fire rating of the cable being installed.
f.
The finished cable shall be 100% plenum rated in accordance with the requirements of NEC Article 800, UL 444, NFPA 262, (UL 910), and applicable Canadian Standards Association (CSA) standards.
g.
All horizontal cables rated at CAT 6 must have a jacket color of white.
h.
If building is not new then use previously set standard for jacket color.
The contractor shall provide one 10-foot CAT-6 patch cord for each workstation outlet installed. a.
Patch cords should be 8-position 8-conductor manufactured assemblies using stranded cables meeting CAT-6 specifications.
b.
Phone line cords are typically provided with end user station equipment, and are not included in this specification.
c.
For each drop location, all information outlet terminations shall follow the ANSI/TIA/EIA T568B pin assignments.
d.
Workstations to IMO patch cords are to be black in color.
e.
4-pair, UTP standard cable, RJ-45 connectors in both
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD ends. 5.
The contractor is responsible for installing stranded copper patch cables from the patch panel into the electronic hardware in the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) and Remote Wiring Closet (TR). The patch cords should be of varied lengths to maintain a neat and functional finished product. a.
Patch cords should be 8-position 8-conductor manufactured assemblies using stranded cables meeting CAT-6 specifications.
b.
100% of Data “A” ports will be patched.
c.
Provisions should be made to patch approximately 30% of the Data “B” ports. The requirements for Data “B” ports will be determined by the on-site representative.
d.
Cables shall be neatly routed and appropriately fastened with Velcro wherever possible at all racks and patch panels, and shall be dressed in a functional and visually pleasing fashion, observing bend radius requirements at all times.
e.
MDF and TR patch cords need to be of the appropriate color as specified in this document and the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard.
f.
Ty wraps are NOT acceptable for use in any part of the cable plant installation. Velcro shall be utilized. Patch Cable Color Chart Specification Data A Ports Blue Data B Ports Voice A Ports Voice B Ports Servers Fax / Special Use
Red White White Purple Yellow
6.
Separate patch panels will segregate “Data A” and “Data B” cables. The upper patch panels will be used for “Data A”, only; the lower patch panels will be used for “Data B” only. Patch cables shall meet the same specifications as defined in the Copper Cable Specification Section.
7.
Voice and data at each information outlet shall be identically numbered, where practical (e.g. cable IDs for
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD voice and data shall match at each location).
H.
8.
Cable labels shall conform to the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard.
9.
Ensure that proper cable loops are maintained on every drop as stated in the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard
10.
Additional drops may be requested from the date of award, whereas the USCIS will issue a change request or addendum for any changes, additions or modifications in this scope of work.
Copper Cable Specifications 1.
All cable, equipment, and materials shall meet applicable ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A, National Electrical Code (NEC) 770, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802 and Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Verification Program standards.
2.
All cable equipment and materials must be manufactured by facilities that are International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 9001 registered and certified as follows: a.
Data cables will be CAT 6.
b.
Data cable shall be terminated on CAT 6 compliant patch panels.
c.
Voice cables will be CAT 6.
d.
Voice cables shall be terminated on CAT 6 compliant patch panels.
e.
Four-pair, 100-Ohm, 23-24 American Wire Gauge (AWG).
f.
The cable should have contiguous, two-foot segmentlength markers printed on the cable jacket. The markings must also show the applicable performance CAT 6 rating, as well as the fire rating of the cable being installed.
g.
The finished cable shall be 100% plenum rated in accordance with the requirements of NEC Article 800, UL 444, NFPA 262, (UL 910), and applicable CSA standards.
h.
All CAT-6 horizontal cabling must be white in color. (Drop location faceplates shall be white in color or match electrical plate décor.)
i.
All data horizontal cross-connects and main cross-
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD connects are to be stranded CAT 6 and blue (A ports) or red (B ports) in color to denote Data connectivity. (CAT 6 jacks at the drop location will match patch cable designation.)
I.
j.
All “C” horizontal cross-connects (“C”) and main cross-connect patch cables are to be stranded CAT 6 and white in color to denote Voice connectivity. (CAT 6 jacks at the drop location will match patch cable designation.)
k.
If a port on the “C” patch panel is used for data connectivity then use a red patch cable.
l.
All copper intra-closet feeds must be grey in color and terminate on appropriate hardware as deemed by USCIS Technical representative outlined in Attachment B.
DATA FIBER CABLE INSTALLATION 1.
Fiber optic cable shall be used for all backbone links where applicable.
2.
One 12-strand multimode optical fiber cable shall be installed from the MDF to each TR to provide data backbone connectivity.
3.
All ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.1 requirements for fiber cable installation and termination will be observed.
4.
All strands of each fiber cable shall be terminated at each end of the cable.
5.
62.5/125 - µm optical plenum (OFNP) or optical fiber riser (OFNR).
6.
Maximum attenuation: 3.5/1.0 db Km at 850/1300nm.
7.
Minimum bandwidth: 200/500 mHz Km at 58/1300 nm.
8.
The fiber will be terminated in a standard rack-mounted fiber optic distribution box.
9.
All fiber connections in the distribution boxes shall be T568SC.
10.
The contractor is responsible for installing fiber patch cables from the distribution boxes into the electronic hardware in the MDF and each TR.
11.
Fiber patch cords shall be multimode, duplex, 3 meters in length, SC to SC and or SC to LC (Please See USCIS technical representative).
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 12.
Provisions should be made to patch each TR to the MDF. Two fiber patch cables are therefore required for each TR. One to patch the electronic equipment to the fiber distribution box in the TR and one to patch the electronic equipment to the fiber distribution box in the MDF.
13.
Provisions should be made to supply approximately 30% additional fiber patch cords for future requirements and/or maintenance spares.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
J.
2.3
1.
All fiber cable shall be 12-strand multimode 62.5x125 μm optical fiber.
2.
All fiber cable shall be of interlocking armor construction eliminating the need for conduit or plenum rated inner duct.
3.
Fiber cable shall be colored orange to denote multimode fiber.
4.
Plenum rated fiber cable is required by the USCIS for backbone cables routed within buildings.
5.
Outside plant fiber cable shall have a water block construction and meet the requirements for compound flow and water penetration.
K.
Inner Duct: All fiber cable shall be installed in one and onequarter inch (1-1/4") inner diameter high-density polyethylene innerducts with pre-installed one-quarter inch diameter polyester pull ropes. The innerducts are to be orange in color and are to be of corrugated design to be installed in larger conduit. Provide 3 innerduct in all 4" data system conduits, 1 innderduct in all 2" data systems conduits. The innerduct shall conform to shall conform to material standards for fiber-optic innerducts, including Placitc Pipe Institute Standards.
L.
Power strips shall be 10 outlet with surge protection / suppression, rack mountable.
KEYS AND LOCKS A.
2.4
DATA FIBER CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
Contractor shall provide to DHS/ US CIS all keys and locks for all cabinets and equipment for access to service equipment.
COMMUNICATION DISTRIBUTION CABLE TRAY A.
Distribution cable tray shall be installed above the accessible ceiling for the creation of main pathways for the management of high volumes of cable through corridors, and for access and egress.
B.
Construction: Cable tray shall be the wire basket type manufactured of ASTM A510 high strength steel wires or equal,
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
and comply with NEMA VE1 of the proposed IEC 61537 standards. The cable tray shall be UL (Underwriters Laboratory) listed. C.
Dimensions: The cable tray shall be a minimum of 18 in wide, with a depth of 67 in. Narrower cable tray may be used for locations with lower volumes.
D.
Support Requirements; A trapeze-style support shall be used along the span of the cable tray. The trapeze shall be constructed of channel stock (i.e. Unistruct) and 5/8 in. threaded rod. The trapeze support elevation should allow a minimum of 12 in between the top edge of the cable tray and the slab above. Appropriate threaded rod anchors shall be selected and approved by the Project Structural Engineer. Trapeze supports shall be placed a minimum of every 10ft. and at cable tray intersections and terminations. Seismic bracing for the cable tray as required by code, shall be installed along cable tray routes. Coordination of lateral and oblique bracing locations shall be coordinated with the other disciplines whose equipment and systems share the area above the suspended ceiling.
E.
Bonding and Grounding Requirements: The cable tray shall be bonded to the Telecommunications Grounding Bus Bar in the IDF(s) on the same floor. All non-contiguous segments of the Cable tray shall be bonded together using 6AWG stranded copper wire, with crimp-on lugs bolted to each segment of the cable tray to ensure electrical continuity throughout the length of the cable tray system.
F.
Firestopping Requirements: Cable trays that penetrate fire-rated walls shall be equipped with wall penetration sleeves at each location, and have appropriate fire stopping materials installed after the placement of cable has been completed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.
Cabling System shall be installed in accordance with best trade practice by persons skilled in trade represented by the work, and in accordance with local building codes and applicable provisions of the California Electrical Code.
B.
All electrical materials and equipment installed shall be of new manufacture, and approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the UL label.
C.
Location of outlet boxes and equipment on drawings is approximate, unless dimensions are indicated. Drawings shall not be scaled to determine position and routing of raceways, drops and outlet boxes. Location of outlet boxes and equipment shall conform to architectural features of the building and other work already in place, and must be ascertained by Contractor in the field prior to start of work.
D.
The maximum pulling tensions of the specified cables shall not be exceeded and proper radius of all cable bends shall be maintained.
E.
Conduit types shall be limited to rigid metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing and schedule 40 PVC, as permitted under section 26 05 33. Flexible metallic conduit shall not be used.
F.
No section of conduit run shall be longer than 100 feet and contain more than two 90 bends between pull points or pull boxes.
G.
The inside radius of a conduit bend shall be at least 6 times the internal diameter of the conduit. When the conduit size is greater than 2 inches, the inside radius shall be at least 10 times the internal diameter of the conduit. For fiber optic cable, the inside radius of a conduit bend shall be at least 10 times the internal diameter of the conduit.
H.
Conduit shall be sized as per table 4.4-1 of -EIA/TIA-569 standard.
I.
Conduit shall be reamed to eliminate sharp edges and terminated with an insulated bushing.
J.
Pull boxes shall not be used for splicing cable.
K.
A pull box shall be placed in a conduit run where: 1.
The length is over l00 ft.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.
There are more than two 90-degree bends.
3.
If there is a reverse bend in the run.
Boxes shall be placed in a straight section of conduit and not used in lieu of a bend. The corresponding conduit ends should be aligned with each other. Conduit fittings shall not be used in place of pull boxes. L.
Where a pull box is used with raceway(s), the pull box shall: 1.
For straight pull through, have a length of at least 8 times the trade-size diameter of the largest raceway;
2.
For angle and U pulls: a.
Have a distance between each raceway entry inside the box and the opposite wall of the box of at least 6 times the trade-size diameter of the largest raceway, this distance being increased by the sum- of the trade-size diameters of the other raceways on the same wall of the box.
b.
Have a distance between the nearest edges of each raceway entry enclosing the same conductor of at least:
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.2
3.
Six times the trade-size diameter of the raceway
4.
Six times the trade-size diameter of the larger raceway if they are of different sizes.
5.
For a raceway entering the wall of a pull box opposite to a removable cover, have a distance from the wall to the cover of not less than the trade-size diameter of the largest raceway plus 6 times the diameter of the largest conductor.
M.
All conduit shall be clearly labeled at both ends designating the closet by number, which includes the sequential numbering of the conduit originating at that closet. Conduit length shall also be indicated on the label. Pull-boxes shall be labeled on the exposed exterior.
N.
Drawings generally indicate work to be done, but do not indicate all bends, transitions or special fittings required to clear beams, girders or other work already in place. Contractor shall carefully investigate conditions where conduits and raceways are to be installed, and furnish and install required fittings.
O.
Contractor shall return all project record documents (Drawings and Specifications) to the District at completion of the work. Drawings shall be marked by Contractor to indicate all additions, deletions, or changes, including changes to Cable Schedule. It is intended that these marked-up Drawings constitute the “as-built” configuration of the work. Where no changes have occurred, Contractor shall mark such Drawings “No Change”.
TOPOLOGY/CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS A.
Data Network - General 1.
User Stations a.
Ethernet (UTP)
b.
Category 6 to Data Outlets.
c.
All data cabling will be home run to the IDF cabinets, from outlet to Category 6 patch panels.
d.
All Category 6 data cables will be installed in conduit and or cable tray as shown in floor plans.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 18
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.
3.
e.
Patch Panel shall be labeled to designate drop location and count/ follow scheme and sequence as per the outlet scheme
f.
Above mentioned shall be provided by the contractor unless otherwise directed by DHS/ USCIS.
Backbone a.
The twelve-strand multi-mode fiber optic cable will be meet most of the connectivity between communication closets.
b.
All strands will be terminated with SC or MTRU-STYLE connectors in accordance with the ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568B.1specifications.
c.
Copper backbone cabling provides a redundant connectivity option in the event of a catastrophic failure.
d.
Above mentioned shall be provided by the contractor unless otherwise directed by the District
IDF Build-Out a.
Provide one cabinet mountable ten-outlet power strip with surge protection/suppression to be mounted in IDF.
b.
Cabinet mounted Category 6 patch panels, wire management and electronics
c.
Ladder will be used to transition from the conduits entering the IDF room to the IDF cabinets.
d.
Active equipment shall be configured, labeled and installed to support multiple networks and with IP addressing provided by contractor.
e.
Above mentioned shall be provided by the contractor unless otherwise directed by the DHS/USCIS
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 19
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
LABELING AND MARKING A.
Contractor shall complete Cable Location Chart and mount it near distribution panel in each wiring closet.
B.
Contractor shall mark all distribution panels, cables and cover plates with computer-generated labels. Each drop shall be labeled with the same identifier on the receptacle faceplate, inside the junction box, on the cable at the jack, on the cable at the patch panel, on the termination side of the patch panel and on the patch side of the patch panel. Cable markers shall be located within 2” of the end of the cable jacket and shall be directly readable. Panel labels shall be computers generated and printed by a laser jet printer. Use the appropriate label forms for jack plate or insert labels as required.
C.
Labeling and marking shall be done as per latest EIA/TIA standards.
CABLE SYSTEM A.
Contractor shall bond # 6 ground wire to distribution cabinet, and bond cabinet to grounding rods located in nearest signal vault for ground continuity. Continuity shall be checked with an ohmmeter between adjacent components. Contractor shall certify to DHS/USCIS that ohmmeter readings are no greater than one ohm.
B.
Equipment racks/cabinets shall be grounded to building ground.
OUTLETS AND DROPS A.
All individual cable drops shall be terminated on faceplate with data connectors.
B.
All cables from overhead raceways shall be neatly dressed behind distribution panels to provide adequate working space in back of panels.
C.
Contractor shall terminate data pairs of each cable on distribution panels with design specified connectors.
CERTIFICATION, TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION A.
Before the Contract is considered complete, Contractor shall demonstrate performance of system in presence of the Inspector.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 20
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.7
B.
Unshielded twisted pair cables shall be tested for compliance with Category 6 Performance Standards, in accordance with EIA/TIA test procedures.
C.
Fiber optic cables shall meet all EIA/TIA performance standards and shall be tested in accordance with all applicable standards.
D.
The Owner Inspector may order any changes, adjustments, or further tests deemed necessary to assure that systems are complete and operational in accordance with this Specification.
E.
Contractor shall provide all test and reception gear required to prove performance, as outlined, and all costs of test and documentation will be borne by Contractor.
F.
Contractor shall make a final test of all cable runs between wall faceplate and distribution panel (s). All grid and backbones will be tested. Tests shall be made as outlined in industry accepted methods.
G.
All test information shall be recorded on Cable Test Form(s). At completion of project, these forms and any TDR or OTDR printouts will be given to DHS/USCIS.
H.
The network switches shall be installed and tested by factory trained and certified technicians. Fundamental connectivity must be demonstrated by performing and documenting a link integrity test from each Intermediate and Workgroup switch and the Backbone switch. This testing shall consist of a ping test being conducted from a device a random port on each switch in the network. Unsuccessful ping tests must be diagnosed and rectified resulting in a successful ping test. The completion of these tests must be documented and submitted in spreadsheet form identifying the closet and rack location of each switch along with the test results for that switch.
COMPLETION A.
Contractor’s work shall be considered complete after the following have been accomplished: 1.
All system testing has been completed, Contractor certifies that entire system is in working order, and Cable Test Forms have been submitted to DHS/USCIS.
2.
All system labels have been put in place.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 21
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.8
3.
All construction debris and scrap materials have been removed from project site.
4.
All marked up, project record documents have been returned to the Owner.
5.
All unused customer material has been returned to the Owner.
6.
The Owner’s Inspector has inspected and accepted the installation.
SPECIFIC SITE REQUIREMENTS “ATTACHMENT A” A.
The provided Scope of Work includes the installation of Category 6 horizontal cabling as specified in the above standard. The proposal submitted MUST include a cable plant installation and solution to meet the provided requirements. The manufacturer of the conductivity hardware is responsible for the warranty of the complete installation. The proposed cable plant solution must meet the minimum 15-year application assurance warranty to include product, cable, etc. and labor.
B.
Provide a component (material) list of the items included in the submitted proposal. This document will be used when reviewing the proposal to clarify that all of the requested items have been included. Also provided a description of the cable plant solution proposed, channel solution, warranty details meeting the specified criteria and certification from manufacturer of conductivity hardware, which will warranty complete installation.
C.
Provide and install data and voice copper cabling to 70 drops locations. (67 quad & 3 voice only wall phones) * HSDN requirements list separately below in section.
D.
Estimate of 20’ of 18” ladder cable runway shall be installed in RWC / IDF Telecommunication Room. (For ladder cable runway use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. Universal Cable Runway 10250-718 or equiv. and Radius Bend 10723-718 or equiv. with associated mounting and installation products, butt splices, corner and mounting brackets, etc.)
E.
Provide and install one (1) standard 7’ x 19” two post rack with 10” vertical (front & rear combo) wire management in the RWC / Telecommunication Room. (For equipment rack use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 55053-703 or equiv. and for 10” vertical management with hinged covers use CPI 30096-703 or equiv.)
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 22
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
F.
Provide and install one (1) single-sided shelf in the Telecommunication Room equipment rack. (For single-sided shelf use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 40074-700 or equiv.)
G.
The equipment racks require 2U & 1U horizontal wire management with hinged covers as specified in elevation drawings with quantities. Total quantity: 8 (2U) & 2 (1U) (For horizontal management use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 30530-719 & 30529719 or equiv.) * Additional wire management assemblies have been added to the provided total which are not displayed in the below Visio elevation drawings.
H.
The horizontal cabling for the modular furniture assemblies will be routed in a provided power / communication pole or conduit raceway system within a wall or column installed by the electrical contractor. * Please note that sufficient cable length should be installed at these locations to accommodate routing through the modular furniture assemblies for termination. Provide components (loom tubing, spiral wrap, etc.) for the transition from the wall or column into the furniture assemblies.
I.
The installation dates for modular furniture will need to be coordinated with the construction schedule and onsite representative.
J.
All horizontal cabling routed through ceiling space to the designated RWC / Telecommunication Room. Horizontal cabling shall be supported by J-hooks staggered approximately within four feet (4’) on center (max. distance of 5’ spacing). Use Caddy CAT64, 32, 21 and 12 or equiv. for horizontal cabling support. Leave 20% capacity in J-hooks for future growth.
K.
Install triplex data and voice cables within the FDNS space. Terminate the cables on 48 port performance compliant 2U patch panels for “A”, “B” and “C” locations in the Telecommunication Room equipment rack. (Total quantity: 6 – 48 port patch panels)
L.
Install and terminate three (3) Category 6 single voice cables (wall phones) on a 24 port performance compliant 1U patch panel for “W” locations (Wall) in the Telecommunication Room equipment rack. (Total quantity: 1 – 24 port patch panel)
M.
One (1) - 100 pair plenum CAT 3 cable to be installed between RWC / (IDF) Telecommunication Room and the CSC PBX / Voice Closet on the 2nd floor and terminated on a two (2) - 48 port patch panels for voice cross-connect between closets. (center pins 4 & 5 white / blue & blue / white) (Total quantity: 2 – 48 port patch panels & 1 – 110FT)
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 23
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
N.
One (1) - 12-strand armored plenum multimode 62.5x125 μm optical fiber cable to be installed and terminated with SC connectors on SC duplex panels between RWC / Telecommunication Room and the Server / Computer Room on the 2nd floor. Provide one (1) 1U enclosure for fiber optic terminations in the Server / Computer Room and one (1) 1U enclosure in the Telecommunication Room equipment rack. * Please see the on-site contact for the exact locations and preferred routing of fiber optic backbone cabling.
O.
Provide the listed fiber optic jumpers. SC – LC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 3M in length - Quantity: 2; SC – LC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 15M in length - Quantity: 2; SC – SC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 15M in length - Quantity: 2; SC – SC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 3M in length Quantity: 2.
P.
All equipment hardware mounted in racks and cabinet must utilize concealed routing for both vertical and horizontal cable management to provide a clean patching environment. * Please provide manufacture specific patch cables for channel performance with solution installation. Patch cable quantity: 100% - “A” 40 (7’ blue) & 40 (5’ blue), 30% - “B” ports 20 (5’ red), 100% - “C” ports 80 (5’ white) at the equipment rack and 100 (10’ black) for the drop location. Also provided the list of spare patch cables for additional equipment connections: 20 (25’ black)
Q.
Installer contractor is responsible for providing labeled patch cables. This is for identification of patch cables routed in the Telecommunication Room. The number labeling sequence should be consecutive, 0001 – 1000, with duplications for both ends. * Please see the on-site contact regarding labeling and identification which may be different than the listed sequence.
R.
See drawing E701 detail #5 for IDF rack elevation. NOTE: Additional components may be specified in the above details that are not shown in the or layout drawings. The provided elevation layouts for components and the positioning are critical for the deployment of equipment hardware.
S.
Installation contractor is required to sleeve for horizontal cabling for wall penetrations that are not provided by the electrical contractor.
T.
Fire stopping of all horizontal penetrations is required by the installer contractor and must meet specifications, UL ratings and installation requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B, NFPA, ASTM, and NEC, local and state codes.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 24
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
U.
Grounding / bonding of equipment racks, ladder tray, etc. is required to the provided TMGB, TGB, etc. or equivalent by the electrical contractor. Please reference standards and manufacturer requirements for installation.
V.
Identification for the labeling of the telecommunication closets and cable #’s will be clarified prior to installation of cable plant.
W.
Installer contractor is responsible for installing network hardware and PDU units in the equipment racks and routing of patch cables in the vertical and horizontal wire management.)
X.
Network Electronics, UPS and PBX (Phone system) are not included in this S.O.W.
Y.
Utilize Velcro fasteners for cable plant installation. Tie wraps are not acceptable for any application of the installation. Provide two (2) Panduit HLS-75R0 or equivalent - ¾” x 75’ roll of Velcro separately for patch cable installation.)
Z.
Installer contractor is responsible for removing the abandoned cables within the space back to the place of termination (ex. telecom closet). Place blank cover plates on the existing wall outlets which are not utilized. *Please see the on-site contact regarding questions in the identification of these cables.
AA.
IMPORTANT NOTE: The special requirements listed below are for the HSD Network slotted for the FDNS space.
BB.
One (1) - 6-strand armored plenum multimode 62.5x125 μm optical fiber cable to be installed and terminated with SC connectors on a SC duplex panel between FDNS / HSDN Secure Room and the Server / Computer Room on the 2nd floor. Provide one (1) 1U enclosure for fiber optic terminations in the Server / Computer Room and one (1) wall-mount enclosure in the HSDN Secure Room, which will be mounted below ceiling on the back wall. * Please see the on-site contact for the exact locations and preferred routing of fiber optic backbone cabling.
CC.
Install a total of six (6) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color) in the EMT conduit raceway system installed within the wall space of the HDSN secure space. The six (6) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color) will originate from the singlegang, flush mount box and will be routed to three (3) different locations within the Secure Room space. Terminate the six (6) Category 6 modules (gray in color) into the one 6-port flush mount, single-gang plate. These six (6) Category 6 UTP plenum
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 25
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
cables are point to point within the room only and do not utilize patch panels or incorporate the star topology.
3.9
DD.
Install two (2) Category 6 UTP plenum cable (white in color) into the three (3) open wall mount boxes. Terminate a Category 6 module (gray in color) in 2-port flush mount, single-gang covers at the three (3) locations.
EE.
Identify the cables in the wall boxes and label the faceplates with #1 - #6 for identification of the six (6) point to point cables.
FF.
Install a total of two (2) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color) from the HSDN Secure Room space to the Telecommunications Closet. The two (2) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color) will be utilized for the required POTS line for the HSD Network. Leave the cables un-terminated at both ends and label accordingly and to and from point to point locations for identification. These cables will be terminated be the service provider during the circuit installation and extension.
GG.
Provide Category 6 UTP patch cables (gray in color) in 10’ in length. Quantity: 6 (for wall to computer connection)
HH.
Provide Category 6 UTP patch cables (gray in color) in 20’ in length. Quantity: 6 (for HSDN switch connection into cabinet) These patch cables will routed into the cabinet and plugged directly into the network switch providing the HSDN connection to the point to point locations installed.
II.
Provide SC – LC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 3M in length. Quantity: 2
JJ.
Provide SC – SC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 2M in length. Quantity: 2
KK.
Please note that the HSD Network shall be installed separately from standard network drop locations and shall NOT share conduit raceways, etc. A distance of approximately 24” should separate outlets and termination points per security standard requirements.
TECHNICAL DELIVERABLES A.
The contractor shall ensure all documentation meets the requirements, as specified in the ANSIITIAIEIA 606 Standards. Where a conflict may exist between the ANSIITIAIEIA 606 and the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard documentation, the USCIS
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 26
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
Structured Cable Plant Standard documentation shall prevail. Contractor shall provide two hardcopies and softcopies of the following to the USCIS OCIO Regional Coordinator and USCIS Technical Representative:
3.10
B.
Letter of certification from the installing organization.
C.
Letters of certification from each installation technician for the appropriate cabling system being installed.
D.
Completed Contractor Information Form.
E.
Implementation report.
F.
Detailed materials list.
G.
Cable plant test certification letter.
H.
Electronic copper cable test results (soft copy only) in Fluke Networks Linkware format (.f1w). (Full plot data). See USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard for an example.
I.
Electronic Fiber-optic cable test results (soft copy only) in Fluke Networks Linkware format (.flw). (Full plot data). See USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard for an example.
J.
Certification summary reports for both fiber-optic and copper cables in csv format.
K.
Documentation on Structured Cable Warranty pertaining to site and procedures to claim warranty service.
L.
As-built site drawings soft and hard copy. Including a laminated 11 x 17 floor plan with corresponding jack locations in each closet. Hand written documentation not accepted.
PROJECT UPDATES A.
If requested by the USCIS On-Site Representative, the contractor's lead technician will provide a daily verbal briefing. This briefing will include, but is not limited to, work status, milestone status, and any issues.
B.
The contractor will be required to participate in an End of Project Conference Call. The contractor's Project Manager and Lead Technician will participate. The conference call will be scheduled by the Regional Coordinator and will take place approximately two days prior to the contractor leaving the site.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 27
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
The objective of the conference call will be to confirm that all parties agree that the job is complete according to this Statement of Work and the CIS Structured Cabling Standard and to address any issues that were not previously identified. 3.11
SITE CLEANUP A.
3.12
3.13
The contractor is responsible for coordination with the site general contractor or property/facility management contractor for the removal of all debris resulting from the work being performed by the contractor on a daily basis.
LICENSES AND PERMITS A.
The contractor is responsible for acquiring any and all permits as required.
B.
The contractor is responsible for maintaining all required federal and local licenses and privilege permits.
SITE ACCESS A.
The contractor is responsible for coordinating with the USCIS onsite representative or the general contractor for site access privileges and required individual safety training.
PART 4 - WARRANTY
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 28
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
4.1
WARRANTY A.
The warranty shall cover the failure of the cable plant system to support current or future applications that are designed for the link/channel specifications of TIA/EIA568-B.
B.
A minimum fifteen (15) year warranty covering application assurance, product, cable, and labor.
C.
Warranty needs to allow USCIS designated personnel to connect end user equipment without going through a certified contractor.
D.
Warranty needs to allow for new cable plant additions by the same contractor or by another certified contractor of the installed vendor's equipment.
E.
The warranty needs to be guaranteed by the hardware vendor not the installation contractor.
F.
If a warranty claim is initiated, USCIS reserves the right to authorize certified installation contractors permission to fix the cable plant. In the event that the installation contractor is denied access then the hardware vendor will provide another certified installation contractor for approval. This process will continue until the cable plant issues are resolved
-- End of Section --
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
PAGE 29
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 27 51 16 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes amplifier and control equipment, input equipment, and reproducer equipment.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Public address system for voice.
B.
Features: 1.
Interface to telephone system.
2.
One-way paging by zone.
3.
Distribution of background music.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submittal Procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Indicate layout of equipment mounted in racks and cabinets, component interconnecting wiring, and wiring diagrams of field wiring to speakers and remote input devices.
C.
Product Data: Submit catalog data showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements for each component.
D.
Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field testing and inspection.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate activities on site, adverse findings, and recommendations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of speakers, control equipment, and outlets for input/output connectors.
SECTION 26 51 16
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD C.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for adjusting, operating, and extending system, and repair procedures and spare parts documentation.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of project.
B.
Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three 3 years documented experience.
C.
Installer: Authorized installer of specified manufacturer with service facilities within 100 miles of project.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
Administrative Requirements:
Pre-installation meeting.
B.
Convene minimum 1week prior to commencing work of this section.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.
Execution and Closeout Requirements:
Maintenance service.
B.
Furnish service and maintenance of public address equipment for 1 year from Date of Substantial Completion. PRODUCTS
Scope of work to provide new speakers as shown in the plans and connect the new speakers to the existing P.A. system in the building, which will include complete programming for these speakers. 1.8
SPEAKERS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Atlas Sound F027W, or equal.
B.
Product Description: 8 inches loudspeaker, 70,7V/25V transformer and screw type grille.
C.
Power Rating: 5 watts.
D.
Frequency Range: 100 Hz - 10KHz ±.
E.
Sound Pressure Level: 96 dB at 3 feet (0.9 M) with 1 watt input.
F.
Magnet: 5 ounces magnet weight.
G.
Dispersion: 105 degrees, 97db peak.
SECTION 26 51 16
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.9
ENCLOSURE/MOUNTING RING/TILE BRIDGE A.
Manufacturers: 1.
1.10
Atlas Sound 51-8, or equal
B.
Product Description: 12 ¾ inch round, painted steel white finish with uniform perforations.
C.
Speaker Backbox: Insulated with sound-deadening material.
MATCHING TRANSFORMERS A.
Manufacturers: 1.
B.
Atlas sound LT-72, or equal.
Product Description: Matching transformer tapped from 0.25 to 5 watts, with primary/secondary ratio to match amplifier to speaker impedances. EXECUTION
1.11
EXISTING WORK A.
1.12
Extend existing public address and music installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified.
INSTALLATION A.
Mounting Heights: Coordinate locations of outlet boxes specified in as indicated on Drawings on ceiling.
B.
Connect reproducers to amplifier with matching transformers.
C.
Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
SECTION 26 51 16
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Measure and record sound power levels at designated locations.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A.
Quality Requirements:
Manufacturer's field services.
B.
Include services of technician employed by manufacturer to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, system testing, and Owner training.
C.
Verify installation is complete and performs according to specified requirements.
ADJUSTING A.
Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Adjust transformer taps for appropriate sound level.
C.
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A.
Furnish 1 hour of instruction each for 2 persons, to be conducted at project site with manufacturer's representative. -- End of Section --
SECTION 26 51 16
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Application Software
B.
Access Control System
C.
Access Control, Relay Control, and Alarm Monitoring controllers
RELATED SECTIONS A.
Section 26 05 01 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
B.
Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
C.
Section 26 27 16 – Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures
D.
Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
E.
Section 01 35 54 – GSA Security Regulations
REFERENCES A.
1.4
NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
2.
UL294 – Standard for Access Control Systems
3.
NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code
4.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
System shall be UL-Listed.
NEW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
1.6
1.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.
1.5
Materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest issue of all industry standards, publications, or regulations referenced in this section and with the following references as applicable.
Kantech Intelligent System Controller shall be a modular and network capable access control system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer: The security management, access control system shall be from Kantech who specializes in access control systems with a minimum of 10 years experience. Manufacturer shall offer
SECTION 28 13 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD factory training, operator and administrator training for the customer on the software specified. The manufacturer shall sell their products through a network of authorized, trained dealers, installers who may be capable of installing, servicing and supporting Kantech products specified for this project. This shall enable the owner to receive multiple bids from qualified and trained installers on the Kantech Product line. All Installers must meet the requirements as specified below.
1.7
B.
Installer: Must be a “current” (which also extends into the future for at least such time as will cover the project including the guarantee period) and “direct” authorized dealer of Kantech. The contractor must provide a letter of proof of dealership from Kantech. Technicians and/or installers who will work on field from the authorized dealer must show proof of Training on Kantech Operator and Administrator Training. The Installer must also be representative from a company specializing in intrusion detection and access control systems with a minimum of three years experience on systems of similar size and scope.
C.
Insurance Certificates: Provide copy of Card Access/Alarm Contractor's current liability insurance certificate with bid.
D.
Service Capability: Submit with Bid documentation that the Card Access/Alarm Contractor has competent design, installation, service and maintenance personnel and facilities with reasonable stock of service parts within fifty air miles of the job site.
SUBMITTALS A.
Manufacturer’s Data: 1.
2.
B.
Submit three (6) copies of: a.
Product Data Sheets
b.
Installation Instructions
Authorized Dealer Certificate and Certified Training Certificates of installers who will be working on this project.
Shop Drawings 1.
2.
Submit three (6) copies shop drawings, including: a.
Layout of equipment on supplied AutoCad drawings.
b.
Field Controller equipment location wall layouts, including size requirements.
Detailed wiring diagrams of Field Controllers, Door Details, and head-end devices.
SECTION 28 13 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 3.
C.
As-Built Drawings 1.
1.8
1.9
Update Shop Drawings to create final As-Built Drawings. Submit 3 copies and digitally in AutoCad 14 or later format on a CD (3 copies).
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.
Operation Data: Include three (3) copies of the software Administrator and Operator Manuals.
B.
Maintenance Data:
Include maintenance and repair procedures.
PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A.
1.10
Load calculations of all security equipment for proper sizing of electrical provided by the customer and standby emergency generator circuits.
Owner will provide, on-site, a secure, dry, locked storage area for all equipment delivered under this scope of work.
WARRANTY AND SERVICE AGREEMENT A.
All equipment, materials, and labor shall be guaranteed for a period of 24 months from the date of final acceptance by the Owner.
B.
Provide any software maintenance updates or upgrades at no additional cost to the Owner for this period.
C.
Perform two (2) scheduled preventative maintenance site visits per year during the warranty period.
D.
Response Times – Normal business hours shall be 7 AM to 5 PM Monday through Friday. Calls for service before noon shall be responded to on-site before the end of the day. Calls after noon shall be responded to on-site by noon the following business day.
E.
Provide extra costs for time outside of normal business hours if the Owner requires emergency service (during bid).
F.
Submit an all-inclusive Annual Maintenance Agreement cost for years 3 and 4 (during bid).
G.
Submit normal and after hours labor costs and typical costs for equipment for items not covered under the Warranty, like: Acts of God, vandalism, misuse (during bid).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SECTION 28 13 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD Scope of work to provide complete Kantech access control system for 4 doors as shown on plans and connect new access control panel to existing access control network system. 2.1
BASIC CENTRAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A.
B.
Communications Interface to Field Controllers Supported 1.
RS-232
2.
RS-485
3.
TCP/IP
Control Panel Specifications 1.
C.
Distributed Intelligence 1.
D.
2.2
The control panel shall incorporate microprocessor-based, digital technology, using high speed processing for maximum reliability.
The system shall use distributed intelligence architecture, with controllers operating independently of one another.
Stand Alone Operation 1.
All database information required for stand-alone operation shall be stored at the control panel level. All decisionmaking shall be performed at the control panel, eliminating the need for degraded mode operation.
2.
Proprietary software programs and control logic information used to coordinate and drive system hardware shall be stored in Flash Downloadable Read Only Memory.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A.
Host Computer to Controller Communication Protocols 1.
Communications between the computer and the controller shall be accomplished and shall be encrypted using a 64-bit cipher feedback method (Kantech Standards). The encryption shall be full time and not require any programming or key setting to operate.
2.
The system shall utilize RS232 up to 100' for hardwired applications.
3.
The system shall utilize RS485 up to 4000' (4-wire hardwired). Longer distances are allowed with a communications multiplexer / amplifier, if applicable.
SECTION 28 13 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
4.
The system shall utilize TCP/IP for communicating over dedicated or shared Ethernet networks.
5.
All of the communications protocols shall be supported simultaneously on the system.
Host Computer to Controller Communication Transmission Methods/Hardware 1.
C.
a.
Hardwired
b.
Leased line modem
c.
Fiber Optic
d.
Microwave
e.
RF
f.
Ethernet 10/100/1000
g.
Dial-Up modem
Proprietary Network Interface Hardware 1.
D.
Communications between the computer and the controller shall be able to use any or all of the following methods:
The controller shall be interfaced to an industry standard personal computer running proprietary software with the addition of an opto-isolated network communications interface board. The Interface Board will accept RS232, RS485 or TCP/IP communications interface.
Maximum System Wide Capacities 1.
The following shall be the maximum system wide capacities. The actual number shall be dependent upon the mix of controllers that make up the system. a.
Doors: Unlimited
b.
Supervised Alarm Inputs: Unlimited
c.
Control Relays: Unlimited
d.
Controllers: Unlimited
e.
Users: Unlimited
SECTION 28 13 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.3
SYSTEM SOFTWARE (Provided by Contractor)
2.4
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS A.
Controllers 1.
B.
Controller Board 1.
C.
The controller enclosure shall be a key/new/lockable Hoffman Enclosure with wire management utilized metal cabinet designed for surface mounting. It shall have a tampered, removable hinged door with a high security key lock. It shall have conduit knockouts to allow from 1/2" to 2" EMT conduit to be used for wire entry into the cabinet.
Internal Power Supply 1.
E.
The controller board shall be microprocessor based, incorporating Flash ROM (firmware) downloadable from the Host Computer, RAM (User Information, System Setups, Event Transaction Buffer) and a Clock/Calendar. The ROM shall be modularly upgradeable in the field for enhancements to system features. All powered connections to the controller board shall be protected by fuses. Each door connection shall consist of terminals for two readers, one 10 Amp rated Form C dry output relay for lock control, and one input for monitoring a status switch, a request-to-exit device, and a tamper switch. There shall be status indicator lights for active relays, as well as diagnostic indicator lights to aid in system troubleshooting. There shall be dedicated alarm output relay/s for external reporting of the following conditions: Alarm; Duress; Tamper; and Trouble.
Enclosure 1.
D.
The access controller shall be a Kantech KT-200. Each controller shall have the following common features.
The controller shall have an internal power supply that will accept 50 Hz/ 200 - 240 VAC, or 60 Hz/100 - 120 VAC. The primary side of the power supply shall be protected with a fuse. The power supply shall provide 12 VDC power to the controller board, internal battery charger, selected card readers, and reader interface boards.
Standby Battery 1.
The controller shall have an internal standby battery that is capable of running the system during AC power interruptions. It shall be recharged by a charging circuit incorporated into the controller board. It shall (2) GELL type batteries (12V, 7AH)
SECTION 28 13 00
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 2.5
CARD READER/KEYPAD SPECIFICATIONS A.
2.6
2.7
Proximity Card Readers 1.
The controller shall be capable of using proximity readers that output a standard XSF or 26 Bit Wiegand data format. The readers can have a short or long read range and be unidirectional or bi-directional.
2.
The proximity readers shall be IO Prox P325W26.
3.
Provide flush mount single gang box or equal.
DOOR CONTACT A.
All door contacts shall be in ABS plastic enclosure. Hermetically sealed reed switch encapsulated in polyurethane, DPDT switch with 1ft. lead length.
B.
The device shall be a GE 1076D-N, or equal.
CARDS A.
Proximity cards shall be Kantech dual encoded card format (xsf) or match to existing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install wiring for detection and signal circuit conductors in conduit. Use 22 AWG minimum size conductors.
C.
Make conduit and wiring connections to existing door hardware devices as required.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Test in accordance with Kantech Electronics testing procedures.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 28 13 00
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD SECTION 28 16 00 INTRUSION DETECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SUMMARY A.
Section includes intrusion detection devices, alarm control panel, signaling devices, and signal wiring.
B.
Related Sections: Section 08 71 10 – Finish Hardware.
2.
Section 01 35 54 – GSA Security Regulations
REFERENCES A.
1.3
1.
National Fire Protection Association: 1.
NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
2.
NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
3.
Underwriters Laboratories Standard 2050, “Standard for Safety of national Industrial Security Systems”.
4.
Underwriters Laboratories Standard 634, “Standard for Connectors & Switches for use with Burglar-Alarm Systems”.
5.
Executive Order 12829, “National Industry Security Program”.
6.
Executive Order 12958, as amended, “Classified National Security Information”.
7.
6 CFR, Part 7, “Department of Homeland Security, Classified National Security Information”.\
8.
32 CFR, Part 2001/2004, Implementing Directive for EO 12958, as amended.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Intrusion Detection System: Protect building and selected areas from intrusion during SECURE hours.
B.
Alarm Sequence of Operation: 1.
Actuation of intrusion detecting device causes the following operations:
SECTION 28 16 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD a.
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Local alarm signaling devices sound and display with non-coded signal.
C.
Non-coded signal transmits to remote station equipment.
D.
Location of actuated device indicates on control panel.
SUBMITTALS A.
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures:
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring connection.
C.
Product Data: Submit catalog data showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D.
Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field testing and inspection.
E.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate activities on site, adverse findings, and recommendations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Verify project closeout.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of intrusion detection equipment.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s standard operating and maintenance instructions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5, average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m) when tested in accordance with NFPA 262.
B.
Perform Work in accordance with State standard.
C.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of project.
B.
Installer: Certified security system installer with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
SECTION 28 16 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD 1.8
1.9
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.
Project Closeout: Maintenance service.
B.
Furnish service and maintenance of intrusion detection system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.
Project Closeout: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B.
Furnish six keys of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CONTROL PANEL A.
Manufacturers: 1.
Bosch Model D7412GV2-D, or equal.
B.
Product Description: Modular control panel with surface wallmounted enclosure.
C.
Power supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules, relays, and alarm signaling devices. Furnish battery-operated emergency power supply with capacity for operating system in standby mode for 24 hours.
D.
System Supervision: Furnish electrically supervised system, with supervised alarm initiating and alarm signaling circuits. Component or power supply failure places system in alarm mode.
E.
Initiating Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication.
F.
Signal Circuits: Supervised [zone coded] signal module, sufficient for signal devices connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode and does not disable circuit from transmitting alarm.
G.
Remote Station Signal Transmitter: Electrically supervised, capable of transmitting alarm and trouble signals over telephone lines to central station receiver.
H.
Auxiliary Relays: Furnish sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts [for each detection zone] to provide accessory functions specified.
I.
Occupied/Unoccupied Selector: Key pad function.
J.
Zone Bypass Switch: Key pad function.
K.
System Bypass Switch: Key pad function.
SECTION 28 16 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.2
L.
Alarm Reset: Key-accessible reset function resets alarm system out of alarm when alarm initiating circuits have cleared.
M.
Lamp Test: Manual lamp test function causes alarm indication at each zone at control panel.
N.
Entry and Exit Time Delays: Adjustable.
O.
Provide D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher to allow control panel to operate over and supervise two separate phone lines.
ENTRY/EXIT KEYPAD A.
Manufacturers: 1.
2.3
Bosch D1260, White finished, or equal.
MAGNETIC SWITCH A.
Manufacturers: 1.
B.
2.4
Product Description: Brushed anodized silver furnished with 36” stainless steel conduit with cable by Harco. Provide required bracket to magnetic door switch.
MOTION DETECTOR A.
Manufacturers: 1.
B. 2.5
Harco Model Magnasphere HSD. (No substitution.)
Bosch Model DS937, or equal.
Product Description: Infrared type motion detector.
WIRE AND CABLE A.
Manufacturers: 1.
West Penn Wire Model 224, or equal.
B.
Product Description: Power limited cable, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C.
C.
Cable Located Exposed in Plenums: Power limited cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
SECTION 28 16 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD B.
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Verify surfaces to receive detection devices are ready for installation.
INSTALLATION A.
Install 18 AWG minimum size conductors for detection and signal circuit conductors. Install wiring in conduit.
B.
All alarm system installation shall conform to the requirements of MD No. 11046 / Open Area Standard for Collateral Classified Information.
C.
Make conduit and wiring connections to door hardware devices.
D.
Install engraved plastic nameplates per DHS requirements.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Quality Requirements: Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer’s recommendations.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A.
Quality Requirements: Manufacturer’s field services.
B.
Furnish services of technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, system testing, and Owner training.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A.
Furnish 1 hour of instruction each for two persons, to be conducted at project site with manufacturer's representative.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 28 16 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.
Scope: This work includes designing and providing a new, complete, multiplex/addressable fire alarm system as described herein for the new RVS DHS/CIS 1st Floor Expansion-Chet Holifield Federal Building. The system shall include all wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, alarm and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, and all other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. The existing master fire alarm control panel with a UUKL Listed Stair Tower Pressurization Smoke Control System Control Panel is located in the Fire Command Center. New fire alarm terminal cabinets (FATC) and/or new remote fire alarm control panels (FACP) are required at each floor at both riser locations shall be field located and shown on the shop drawings. If the contractor’s proposed system requires additional remote fire alarm control panels, they shall be provided adjacent to the floor FATCs. Where remote fire alarm control panels are provided, control circuits and power supplies for notification appliance circuits may be located in the remote fire alarm control panels.
B.
Extent of the Work: The system shall be installed in accordance with the specifications and referenced publications.
C.
Repair Service/Replacement Parts: Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be furnished under this contract and be available for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Government. On-site service during the guarantee period shall be provided within 24 hours after notification. All repairs shall be completed within 48 hours after notification. Prices for labor and materials shall be maintained at the installation rate plus 10% for a minimum of 3 years.
D.
Related Sections: 1.
Cable
2.
Wire
3.
Raceways
Refer to other Division 26 & 28 sections for:
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 1
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
4. E.
1.2
Connectors
Other Divisions: Refer to the Division 7 section for work related to Firestopping.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: All components of each system shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent production.
B.
Provide design, materials and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to National Fire Protection Association Standard 72, 2007 Edition, except as otherwise or additionally specified herein. The design shall be shown on shop drawings to be submitted to GSA for review and approval prior to the purchase of materials and any installation of the system at the job site.
C.
Approved Equipment: Provide materials, equipment and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as Underwriters' Laboratories or Factory Mutual Laboratories, and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification.
D.
Installer Requirements: Design shall be performed and certified/stamped by a full-time employee of the Installer who shall be either a NICET Level III or IV Fire Alarm Technician or a California Registered Professional Fire Protection Engineer. Fire Alarm Technicians performing the new installation shall be NICET Level II or higher. Installer shall have an office, which has been in existence for at least 3 years, within a 120 kilometer (75 mile) radius of the jobsite. Installation shall be accomplished by an electrical contractor with a minimum of five years experience in the installation of fire alarm systems. The Contracting Officer may reject any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications. The services of a NICET Level II or higher Fire Alarm Technician provided by the control equipment manufacturer or factory authorized distributor shall be provided to supervise installation, adjustments, and conduct all tests of the system.
E.
Service Organization: The contractor shall furnish evidence that the fire alarm equipment supplier has an experienced and effective service organization which carries a stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished. Should the contractor fail to comply with the service requirements of this section, the government will then have the option to make the necessary repairs and back charge the contractor without any loss of warranty or guarantee as provided by the contract documents.
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 2
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
F.
Guarantee: The contractor shall guarantee labor, materials, and equipment provided under this contract against defects for a period of one year after the date of final acceptance of this work by the government and the receipt of as-built drawings and schematics of all equipment.
G.
Applicable Publications: Provide a system conforming to the requirements of the latest edition of the following publications including all amendments to these publications: 1.
2.
3.
4.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a.
E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
b.
E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME): a.
A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (2000 edition)
b.
C62.41 Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage A.C. Power Circuits
International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO). a.
Uniform Building Code (1997 edition)
b.
Uniform Fire Code (2000 edition)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a.
70
National Electric Code (NEC - 2008 edition)
b.
72
National Fire Alarm Code (2007 edition)
c.
101
Life Safety Code (2009 edition)
5.
Testing Services or Laboratories: Construct all fire alarm and fire detection equipment in accordance with the latest edition of the following publications from Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), or Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM):
6.
UL 228 - Door Holding Devices a.
UL 464 - Audible Signal Appliances, Fifth Edition
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 3
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.3
b.
UL 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems, Sixth Edition
c.
UL 1638 - Visual Signaling Appliances Standard
d.
UL 1971 - Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired
e.
UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory
f.
UL Electrical Construction Materials Directory
g.
FM P7825 Approval Guide
DEFINITIONS A.
General: Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings the equipment, devices, and functions shall be defined as follows: 1.
Alarm Signal: A signal which indicates a state of emergency requiring immediate notification of the fire department and of the building occupants. These are signals such as the operation of a manual pull station, the activation of a waterflow switch in a sprinkler system the operation of a heat detector, or the operation of a pressure switch in a fire suppression system caused by the flow of fire extinguishing agent (e.g. kitchen fire extinguishing system, C0 2 , etc.).
2.
Supervisory Signal: A signal which indicates the impairment of a fire protection system which may prevent its normal use. These are signals from switches, such as a tamper switch; a low air pressure switch; the receipt of an alarm signal from a smoke detector that has gone through alarm verification, the receipt of an alarm signal from an elevator smoke detection control panel or a computer room smoke detection panel, the operation of a duct smoke detector, operation of a high air pressure switch; a generator phase reversal switch; a generator power failure switch; a generator running switch; a fire pump phase reversal switch; a fire pump loss of power switch; or a fire pump running switch.
3.
Trouble Signal: A signal which indicates that a fault, such as an open circuit or ground, has occurred in the fire alarm system or in a separate sub-system, whose control panel is monitored by the fire alarm system.
4.
Multiplex System: A system in which multiple signals are transmitted via the same conduction path to a remote fire
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 4
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
alarm control panel and fire alarm control panel, decoded and separated so that each signal will initiate the specified response. 5.
Hard Wired System: A system in which alarm and supervisory initiating devices are directly connected, through individual dedicated conductors, to a central control panel without the use of multiplexing circuits or devices.
6.
Notification Appliance Circuit: A circuit to which notification appliances are connected to visually and audibly indicate an alarm evacuation signal.
7.
Interface Device: An addressable device which interconnects hard wired systems or devices to a multiplex system.
8.
Remote Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP): A control panel, remote from the fire alarm control panel, that receives inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices; may supply power to detection devices and interface devices; may provide transfer of power to the notification appliances; may provide transfer of condition to relays or devices connected to the control panel; and reports to and receives signals from the fire alarm control panel.
9.
Master Fire Alarm Control Panel (MFACP): A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm control panel and to which all fire alarm control panels are interconnected. The panel has central processing, memory, input and output terminals, voice communication system microphones, firefighter’s telephone, video display units (VDUs) and printers.
10.
Class A Wiring: A circuit that is monitored for integrity such that a single break, a single wire-to-wire short, or a single loss of carrier condition will be indicated by a trouble signal on the FACP no matter where the break, short or loss of carrier condition occurs and will allow all functions of the affect circuit to remain operational. In accordance with NFPA 72, this would be Style 6 or 7 wiring for signaling line circuits, and style Z for notification appliance circuits
11.
Class B Wiring: A circuit that is monitored for integrity such that a single break, a single wire-to-wire short, or a single loss of carrier condition will be indicated by a trouble signal on the FACP no matter where the break, short or loss of carrier condition occurs, but which would prohibit devices beyond the fault, short or carrier loss
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 5
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
from remaining operational. In accordance with NFPA 72, this would be Style 4 wiring for signaling line circuits, Style B for initiating device circuits, and Style Y for notification appliance circuits.
1.4
12.
Signaling Line Circuit: A circuit to which any combination of circuit interfaces, control panels, or transmitters are connected and over which multiple system input signals or output signals, or both, are carried.
13.
Tamper Switch: 72.
14.
Initiating Device: A system component that originates transmission of a change of state condition, which initiates an appropriate response via the fire alarm system.
15.
Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet (FATC): A steel cabinet, painted red, with locking, hinge-mounted door in which terminal strips are securely mounted. Minimum size is 200 mm x 200 mm (8 inch x 8 inch).
A valve monitor switch as indicated in NFPA
SYSTEM OPERATION A.
General: System shall be a complete, supervised, non-coded, addressable multiplex fire alarm system conforming to NFPA 72. The system interconnected riser loops, network circuit and audio risers shall have Style 7 supervision, with the return portion of the loop located remote from the supply portion of the loop. The system shall have two Style 4 signaling line circuits (or one style 6) and two Style Y notification appliance circuits for each floor. Any single impairment of the system shall not affect the system on more than one-half of any floor. The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until all initiating device(s) are reset and the fire alarm control panel is manually reset and restored to normal. The system shall provide the following functions and operating features: 1.
The FACP and remote fire alarm control panels shall provide power, annunciation, supervision and control for the system.
2.
Style B initiating device circuits.
3.
Style 4 signaling line signaling line circuit floors, and shall have when serving more than
circuits for each floor. A single shall not serve more than three an isolation module at each floor, one floor.
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 6
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
4.
Style 7 signaling line circuits for the network and audio risers.
5.
Style Y notification appliance circuits.
6.
Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system modules within the control panel.
7.
Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open condition, or ground fault which prevents the required operation of the system. The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules. Provide a non latching trouble alarm silence feature which will silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual indicator. After the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke detector in the process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition.
8.
Provide a notification appliance silencing switch which, when activated, will cause the audible notification appliances to cease operating, but not affect the visible notification appliance or liquid crystal display or the automatic notification of the central station service. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm.
9.
Provide alarm verification capability for smoke detectors.
10.
Provide capability via separate switches in a locked portion of the main FACP to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, air handler shutdown, elevator recall, elevator shunt trip operation, door holder release, and door unlocking (future use) features. Operation of this programmed switch shall indicate this action on the FACP display and printer output.
11.
Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions. Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions.
12.
The system shall be capable of being programmed in the field. All programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
13.
The system shall be capable of operating, supervising,
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 7
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
and/or monitoring both addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory devices. 14.
There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of addressable devices which may be in alarm simultaneously.
15.
Where the fire alarm system is responsible for initiating an action in another emergency control device or system, such as an HVAC system or elevator system, the addressable fire alarm relay shall be within 3 feet of the emergency control device.
16.
An alarm signal (manual pull station, waterflow switch, heat detector, kitchen hood suppression system) shall automatically initiate the following functions: a.
Transmission of an alarm signal to a U.L. listed Central Station.
b.
Visual indication of the device operated on the fire alarm control panel (FACP), and on the graphic annunciator. Indication on the graphic annunciator shall be by floor, and type of device.
c.
Continuous actuation of alarm notification appliances on the floor of fire alarm origin, the floor above the floor of fire alarm origin, and the floor below the floor of fire alarm origin, but not those in elevator cabs or stairwell (floor of alarm programming requirements to be field verified with final determination at system acceptance test).
d.
Visual indication of the device operated on the LCD annunciator in the GSA Field Office, and in the Basement Building Engineer’s Office.
e.
Operate remote common alarm relays (by floor) form C contacts, to be monitored by the Building Automation System.
f.
Recording of the event via the system printer.
g.
Release of power to electric locks on doors which are part of the means of egress (future use).
h.
Operation of a heat detector or a sprinkler waterflow switch in an elevator machinery room shall operate the local shunt trip circuit breaker(s) to shut down power to the elevators in accordance with ANSI A17.1,
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 8
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
in addition to a, b, c, d, e, and f above. i.
17.
18.
Operation of a waterflow switch shall activate the stairwell pressurization system in addition to a, b, c, d, e, f, and g above.
A supervisory signal (smoke detector, duct detector, valve tamper switch, computer room FACP or fire pump operation) shall automatically initiate the following functions: a.
Transmission of a supervisory signal to a U.L. listed Central Station.
b.
Visual indication of the device operated on the fire alarm control panel (FACP), and on the graphic annunciator. Indication on the graphic annunciator shall be by floor, and type of device.
c.
Recording of the event via the system printer.
d.
Visual indication of the device operated on the LCD annunciator in the GSA Field Office, and in the Basement Building Engineer’s Office.
e.
Operate a remote common supervisory relay form C contact to be monitored by the Building Automation System.
f.
Operation of a smoke detector in an elevator lobby, elevator machine room, or other location associated with the automatic recall of elevators, shall recall the elevators and broadcast the recall message in the elevator cars, in addition to a, b, c, and d above.
g.
Operation of an area smoke detector adjacent to a door equipped with an automatic closer or magnetic holder shall release the door in addition to a, b, c, and d above.
h.
Operation of a duct smoke detector shall shut down the appropriate air handlers on the floor of the duct detector in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to a, b, c, and d above.
i.
Operation of an area smoke detector adjacent to a stairwell door shall activate the stairwell pressurization system in addition to a, b, c, and d above.
A trouble condition (loss of power, wiring fault) shall
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 9
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
automatically initiate the following functions:
1.5
Transmission of a trouble signal to a U.L. listed Central Station.
b.
Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP, and on the graphic annunciator. Indication on the graphic annunciator shall be by floor.
c.
Operate a remote common trouble relay form C contact to be monitored by the Building Automation System.
d.
Recording of the event via the system printer.
e.
Visual indication of the device operated on the LCD annunciator in the GSA Field Office, and in the Basement Building Engineer’s Office.
19.
The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device and its indication at the FACP shall be ten seconds.
20.
The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FACP shall not exceed thirty seconds.
21.
Audible and visual alarm notification devices shall be powered from separate circuits.
22.
Audible and visual alarm notification devices shall be separately silenceable.
OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION A.
Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection: For systems having circuits located outdoors, all communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit. All cables and conductors, which serve as communications links, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end that meet the following waveform[s]: 1.
1.6
a.
A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.
SUBMITTALS A.
Division 1: Refer to Section "SUBMITTALS" for basic information relating to submittal requirements. Submit 6 complete sets of submittals. Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 10
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
be returned without review. Before any work is commenced, the submittal must be approved by the GSA Region 9 Safety and Environmental Management Branch Fire Protection Engineer. Manufacturer's data shall be annotated and provided for the following:
B.
1.
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
2.
Storage Batteries
3.
Battery Charger
4.
Cabinet
5.
Addressable Interface Devices
6.
Terminal Cabinets/Assemblies
7.
Addressable Relays
8.
Speaker/Strobe Unit
9.
Fire Alarm Speaker
10.
Visual Alarm Signal Strobe
11.
Smoke Detector
12.
Amplifiers
13.
Tone Generators
14.
Digitized Voice Generators
15.
Remote Fire Alarm Control Panel
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings not smaller than 760 mm (30 inches) by 1070 mm (42 inches). As a minimum, the shop drawing submittal shall include the following: 1.
Provide point-to-point wiring diagrams showing: a.
The terminals used for all field device connections to all panels the system, including all interconnections between the equipment or systems which are supervised or controlled by the system.
b.
All connections from the main FACP to all remote fire alarm control panels or auxiliary power supplies.
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 11
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
c.
All internal panel wiring connections and jumper positions.
d.
All terminal cabinet wiring.
e.
All points of connection for owner furnished equipment, i.e. telephone lines or BAS interface.
2.
Provide a complete description of the system operation, including a sequence of operation matrix.
3.
Provide a complete list of device addresses and corresponding descriptor readouts.
4.
Provide scaled floor plans showing the location of all devices, panels, equipment, power sources, raceways and conductors. Show the strobe candela rating for all visual alarm appliances.
5.
Provide a riser drawing showing all fire alarm panels, terminal cabinets, and interconnection wiring. Show all field devices and circuit layouts for all floors. Indicate the wiring sequence of all devices and their connections to the control equipment.
6.
Provide device mounting details and elevations for all equipment to be installed.
7.
Provide battery calculations for all panels showing both the alarm and supervisory power requirements used to size the batteries. Manufacturer’s data sheets showing amperehour requirements for each system component shall be submitted with the calculations.
8.
Provide circuit load calculations to indicate that there is at least 15% spare capacity for notification appliance circuits, and 15% spare capacity for signaling line and initiating device circuits.
9.
Provide amplifier circuit load calculations to indicate that the amplifiers have sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive all fire alarm speakers at their 1/2 watt tap plus 25% spare capacity.
10.
Provide voltage drop calculations for all strobe notification appliance circuits. Show formula used and individual calculations of types and number of devices on each circuit. Voltage drop shall not exceed ten percent of the nominal circuit calculations, i.e. 2.4 volts.
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 12
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
C.
1.7
1.8
11.
Provide power supply calculations for all external loads powered from this system, including door holders, door closers, damper motors, door strikes, etc.
12.
Provide load information (and calculations, where necessary) for all circuits connected to fire alarm control relay contacts.
13.
Provide load calculations for all new circuits connected to the 120 VAC emergency distribution panel. Voltage drop shall not exceed three percent at the farthest load.
14.
Submit annotated catalog data showing manufacturer's name, model, voltage, and catalog numbers for all fire alarm equipment and installation components, including wire and cable.
15.
Provide a color code schedule for all field wiring circuits.
16.
Provide the stamp, seal or registration number, and signature of designer or engineer meeting the requirements of Part 1.02.D.
The acceptance testing will not be permitted until the shop drawings are approved.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.
General: Provide operation and maintenance manuals not less than thirty days prior to the final acceptance testing of the entire system and after the preliminary testing has been completed. The manuals shall be used during the instruction period hereinafter specified. Provide six bound copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. The manual shall include an index, copies of all approved shop drawings and submittal materials, and a complete parts list of all components. The manual shall also include, for each item, the manufacturer's name, the serial number of the part, an ordering number, if appropriate, and a physical and electrical description of the part. Following the acceptance test, drawings and submittal materials shall be updated as necessary to reflect as-built conditions.
B.
Record Drawing Software Copy: Provide two (2) sets of floppy diskettes or CD-ROM's containing CAD based drawings in both DWG and DXF format of all as-built drawings and schematics.
INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES A.
Instructor:
Include in the project the services of an instructor
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 13
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
who shall have received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection, testing and maintenance of the system provided.
1.9
B.
Qualifications: Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation and shall be NICET Level III or higher. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical operation and maintenance work.
C.
Required Instruction Time: Provide two 4 hour classes of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. After each class, the contractor shall submit the sign in sheet with the date, time and names of all attendees, to the Contracting Officer.
D.
Required Instruction Material: The instructor shall train the Government employees and building maintenance contractor employees, as designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of the fire alarm and fire detection system. Provide specific training in the operation of all panels, the calibration of all detectors, and in the programming of all panel software, databases and other programming functions.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A.
1.10
General: Prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer six sets of detailed "As Built Drawings" on CAD. The drawings shall include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment, both factory and field wired. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of all devices and equipment. The drawings shall show the system as installed, including all deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized sheets not less than 760 mm (30 inches) by 1070 mm (42 inches). These drawings shall be submitted within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system and two weeks prior to the instruction of government employees.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DEVICE LOCATION REQUIREMENTS A.
Fire Alarm Control Panel(s) - FACP 1.
B.
Locate FACP in data/utility room.
Addressable Control Relays 1.
Locate at each HVAC fan controller for shutdown, where
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 14
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
shutdown is required by NFPA 90A and NFPA 92A. C.
Addressable Monitor Modules 1.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Locate 1 at each conventional heat detector on attic.
Notification Appliances - Speakers 1.
Locate throughout the building to provide a minimum sound level of 70 dBA, or 15 dBA above ambient, whichever is higher.
2.
Locate speakers at a maximum coverage of 900 sq. ft. per speaker.
3.
Locate speakers so that all rooms within the building are not more than 1 doorway from a speaker.
Notification Appliances - Strobes 1.
Locate in all public areas of the building, including lobbies, reception areas, and waiting rooms.
2.
Locate in all common areas of the building, including corridors, open office areas, building core spaces and conference rooms.
3.
Locate in all high noise areas (ambient noise level exceeds 90 dBA).
Spot Smoke Detectors 1.
Locate at all main and remote FACP
2.
Locate in the main telephone equipment (PBX) room
3.
Locate throughout the entry lobby space ceilings on the ground floor.
Duct Smoke Detectors 1.
Coordinate duct smoke detector locations with mechanical contractor to ensure there are no non-addressable duct smoke detectors installed on the project. Replace any with addressable duct smoke detectors as required.
2.
Locate per NFPA 90A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 15
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
2.1
2.2
ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULES A.
The addressable interface (AI) monitor device shall provide an addressable input interface to the FACP for monitoring normally-open or normally-closed contact devices such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches, fire pump monitoring, independent smoke detection systems, etc. The initiation device circuits shall be Style B.
B.
The addressable interface (AI) relay device shall provide an addressable relay with one fused form C (SPDT) contact for output control functions.
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A.
B.
Fire Alarm Speakers: 1.
Provide fire alarm speakers conforming to UL 464 having a minimum of three (3) tap settings and separate terminations for each "in" and "out" connection. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/4, 1/2 and 1 watt. Speakers shall utilize the 1/2 watt tap in the system. Speakers shall have an output rating of 84 dBA at 3 000 mm (10 feet) as determined by the reverberant room test; data on peak output as determined in an anechoic chamber is not suitable. All speakers shall be capable of installation on standard 100 mm (4 inch) square electrical boxes. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single wall or ceiling mounted unit.
2.
Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having a minimum thickness of sixteen (16) gauge and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a complete installation. All fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance for each plate. Each plate shall be primed and painted.
3.
Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single unit.
Visual Alarm Signals: 1.
Provide synchronized strobe light visual alarm signals which operate on a supervised twenty-four (24) volt D.C. reverse polarity circuit. The strobe lens shall comply with UL 1971 and conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act. The strobe shall have a xenon flash tube.
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 16
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
C.
2.
The strobe light pattern shall be designed and listed for the specific installation location, either wall mounted or ceiling mounted. Each strobe shall be clearly labeled "FIRE" on a minimum of two sides. The lettering shall be horizontal for ceiling mounted locations and vertical for wall mounted locations.
3.
The strobe flash output shall be a minimum of 15 candela and a maximum of 110 cd, based on UL standard 1971. The installed strobe’s candela rating shall be based upon the actual size of the room or area to be covered, in accordance with NFPA 72.
Connections: 1.
2.3
Provide screw terminals for each notification appliance. Terminals shall be designed to accept the size conductors used in this project without modification.
SMOKE DETECTORS A.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: smoke detectors as follows: 1.
Provide analog photoelectric smoke detectors utilizing the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance with UL 217 and 268. Smoke detectors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm control panel.
2.
Provide self-restoring type detectors which do not require any readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. Detectors shall be UL listed as Smoke-Automatic Fire Detectors.
3.
Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen which prevents the entrance of insects or air born materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber. All components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have no effect on the detector's operation.
4.
Provide twist lock bases for the detectors. The detectors shall maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion mounting base equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field wiring on the fixed terminals.
5.
The detector shall have a visual indicator to show actuation.
SECTION 28 31 00
Provide addressable photoelectric
PAGE 17
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
6.
B.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Duct smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type and be provided in supply ductwork in accordance with NFPA 90A. 1.
2.4
Provide duct smoke detector sampling tubes which are installed across the longitudinal cross section of the duct and protrude out past the end of the duct.
MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (MFACP) A.
2.5
The detector address shall identify the particular unit, its location within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Detectors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.
General: The existing Main Fire Alarm Control Panel is located at basement Fire Control Center.
REMOTE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS (FACP): A.
General: Provide complete remote control panels fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein. All operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the control panels shall be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single panel is required at a location to form a complete control panel, the panel enclosures shall match exactly. Each control panel shall provide power, supervision, control and logic for its portion of the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control panel shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, emergency building power supply. Provide each panel with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation.
B.
Cabinet: Install remote control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of all panels as well as all field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall say Remote Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall not be less than 25 mm (1-inch) high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for all lamps, circuits, meters, fuses and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with backbox, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.
C.
Control Modules: Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the remote control panel. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm or trouble condition. The alarm
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 18
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
signals shall be different from the trouble signal. Connect all circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and relays, if any, on screw terminals in the remote control panel. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10% of nominal voltage. Circuits shall be arranged so that there is 25% spare capacity for any circuit.
2.6
D.
All control functions for the system shall take place at the main Fire Alarm Control Panel.
E.
Non-Interfering: Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device.
F.
Memory: Provide each control panel with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS or EPROMS.
G.
Field Programmability: Provide control panels that are fully field programmable for control, initiating, supervisory and trouble functions of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu driven. All system changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment.
AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS: A.
General: Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitized voice drives and all other hardware necessary for a complete, operational voice/alarm signaling service conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a remote fire alarm control panel, fire alarm terminal cabinet, or in the main fire alarm control panel. The system shall automatically operate and control all building fire alarm speakers, speakers in the stairs and speakers within elevator cabs. Each amplifier panel shall have two channels; one to broadcast a message and the other for paging. Provide one spare amplifier, equal in size to the largest amplifier used, at each amplifier cabinet.
B.
Construction: All amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient up to ten (10) times the highest rated voltage in the system.
C.
Inputs: Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from the tone generator, digitized voice driver and panel mounted
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 19
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
microphone. Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance, balanced line type. Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier.
2.7
D.
Tone Generator: The tone generator shall be of the modular, plugin type with securely attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to identify the specific tone it produces. The tone generator shall produce a slow whoop tone, which shall slowly ascend from low (500 hertz) to high (1200 hertz), and be constantly repeated until interrupted by either the digitized voice message, the microphone input or the alarm silence mode as specified. Each slow whoop cycle shall last approximately four (4) seconds. The tone generator shall be single channel with an automatic backup generator per channel such that failure of the primary tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the functions of the failed panel and also causes transfer of the common trouble relay.
E.
Protection Circuits: Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition which could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier, illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the main fire alarm control panel, appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer and other actions for trouble conditions as specified.
EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY A.
Batteries: Provide sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium batteries as the source for emergency power to the FACP. Batteries shall contain suspended electrolyte. The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power. Batteries shall have lead bolt-on or wing-nut-type terminals. Batteries with fast-tab terminals are unacceptable.
B.
Capacity: Provide the batteries with sufficient capacity to operate all signaling line circuits, initiating device circuits, and notification appliance circuits in normal or supervisory (non-alarm) mode for a period of 24 hours. Following this period of operation on battery power, the batteries shall have sufficient capacity to operate all components of the system in alarm mode for a period of 30 minutes.
C.
Battery Charger: Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 150 percent of the connected system load and
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 20
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
Battery Cabinet: Provide a separate locked cabinet for the main fire alarm control panel batteries. Remote fire alarm cabinets may contain the batteries internal where space permits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
GENERAL A.
Locate all fire alarm system devices as required by par. 1.11 above.
B.
Coordinate all work with other trades to provide a complete and functional system.
C.
Perform all pretesting with interfaces to other trades installed and operational.
ELECTRIC POWER A.
3.3
General: Provide primary power for the new main FACP from an emergency breaker panel in the basement. Power shall be 120 VAC service, transformed through a two-winding, isolation type transformer and rectified to low voltage DC for operation of all circuits and devices. Provide new emergency power risers for powering the remote FACPs and all auxiliary power supply panels. Provide a new NEMA 1 "General Purpose Enclosure" with separate circuit breakers for each floor where power is required. The circuit breakers shall be painted red, marked "FACP", and provide with a lockable handle or cover.
SYSTEM FIELD WIRING A.
Wiring Within Cabinets, Enclosures, Boxes, Junction Boxes and Fittings: Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box, enclosure or cabinet. All conductors which are terminated, spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting or junction box shall be connected to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. Make all connections with approved pressure type terminal blocks, which are securely mounted. The use of wire nuts or similar devices shall be prohibited.
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 21
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
B.
Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinets (FATC): Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser, on each floor at each riser, and where indicated on the drawings. Terminal size shall be appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected. All conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing all conductors, their labels, their circuits and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the terminal cabinet.
C.
Alarm Wiring: All wiring shall be new. T-taps are permitted in Style 4 circuits with interconnections occurring on terminal strips. 1.
Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10% of nominal voltage.
2.
Install all conductors in rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a six foot length shall be permitted in initiating device circuits and notification appliance circuits. Run conduit or tubing concealed unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings.
3.
Signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be solid copper, No. 18 AWG size conductors at a minimum.
4.
Visual alarm signal and audible appliance circuits shall be solid copper No. 12 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Speaker circuits shall be solid copper No. 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum.
5.
Shielded wiring shall be utilized where recommended by the manufacturer. For shielded wiring, the shield shall be grounded at only one point, which shall be in or adjacent to the FACP, and shall be carried through continuously at each termination location, without grounding.
6.
Circuits to fan shutdown systems and door locking systems shall terminate in terminal cabinets within 3 feet of the controllers for those systems. The completion of those circuits from the terminal cabinets to the appropriate system shall be provided under this Division.
7.
Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be No. 12 AWG size THHN solid copper, minimum.
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 22
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
D.
3.4
FIRESTOPPING A.
3.5
Conductor Terminations: No specific color coding is required for any circuit; however, labeling of any circuit at terminal blocks in fire alarm terminal cabinets (FATC), main fire alarm control panel (MFAP), and remote fire alarm control panels (RFAP) shall be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each FATC, MFAP and RFAP shall contain a laminated drawing which indicates each conductor, its label, circuit and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals.
General: Firestop all holes for conduit, piping, or other penetrations which pass through floor slabs, fire-rated walls, partitions with fire-rated doors, vertical service shafts, or any fire-rated assemblies in accordance with Section 07270, Firestopping.
INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING AND INDICATING DEVICES A.
FACP: Locate the new FACP in the Data/Utility Room at first floor. Surface mount the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 1 800 mm (6 feet) above the finished floor or center the cabinet at 1 600 mm (5-1/2 feet), whichever is lower. All conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing all conductors, their labels, their circuits and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FACP.
B.
Notification Appliance Devices: Locate new notification appliance devices as described herein. Mount assemblies on walls 2 000 mm (80 inches) above the finished floor or 150 mm (6 inches) below the ceiling, whichever is lower. Ceiling mounted speaker/strobes candela ratings shall conform to NFPA 72.
C.
Smoke Detector: Locate new detector as described herein on a 100 mm (4 inch) mounting box. Detectors located on the ceiling shall be installed not less than 100 mm (4 inches) from a side wall to the near edge. Those located on the wall shall have the top of the detector at least 100 mm (4 inches) below the ceiling, but not more than 300 mm (12 inches) below the ceiling. In the case of solid joist construction, the detectors shall be mounted on the bottom of the joists. On smooth ceilings, detectors shall be installed not over 9 100 mm (30 feet) apart in any direction. Closer spacing shall be used when recommended by the detector manufacturer or required by NFPA 72. In raised floor spaces, the smoke detectors shall be installed to protect 20 903 100 square mm (225 square feet) per detector. Install smoke detectors no
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 23
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
closer than 1 500 mm (5 feet) from air handling supply outlets. Heat detectors shall be installed in strict accordance with their UL listing. Heat detectors, provided to meet ANSI A17.1 requirements for elevator power disconnect, shall be located within 600mm (24 inches) to each sprinkler head in the elevator machinery room. 3.6
TESTS A.
Megger Tests: After all wiring has been installed, and prior to making any connections to panels or devices, all wiring shall be megger tested for insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts. Conductors with 300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC. Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 500 VDC. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.
B.
Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit shortcircuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.
C.
All Notification Appliance Circuit Preliminary and Final Acceptance Tests shall be performed outside of normal building business hours. The Contracting Officer will advise the Contractor of acceptable testing times.
D.
Preliminary Testing: Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that all devices and circuits are functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of Paragraph 3.07 of this section. After preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state that all panel functions were tested and operated properly. The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments. The Construction Manager must be present at the preliminary test.
E.
Final Acceptance Testing: Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the O&M Manuals are provided to the Contracting Officer and the following are provided at the job site:
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 24
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
1.
Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed
2.
Megger test results
3.
Loop resistance test results
4.
Complete program printout including all input/output addresses
The final tests shall be witnessed by a Fire Protection Engineer from the GSA Region 9 Safety and Environmental Management Branch, the Building Engineer and the GSA Project Manager. At this time, any and all required tests shall be repeated at the discretion of the Government. Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance. 3.7
MINIMUM SYSTEM TESTS A.
General: Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72. The required tests are as follows: 1.
Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with results available at the final system test.
2.
Verify that all fire alarm control panels are in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual.
3.
Test each initiating and indicating device and circuit for proper operation and response at the control panel.
4.
Test the system for all specified functions in accordance with the contract documents and the manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual.
5.
Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified.
6.
Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified.
7.
Visually inspect all wiring.
8.
Test the battery charger and batteries.
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 25
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
3.8
3.9
9.
Verify that all software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FACP. Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer.
10.
Verify that red-line drawings are accurate.
11.
Measure the current in circuits to assure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits.
12.
Measure voltage readings for circuits to assure that voltage drop is not excessive.
13.
Disconnect the verification feature for smoke detectors during tests to minimize the amount of smoke or test gas needed to activate the detector.
14.
Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance on each notification appliance circuit.
SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS A.
Interchangeable Parts: All spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall be delivered to the GSA Building Engineer.
B.
Spare Parts: Provide the following spare parts and accessories: 1.
2 Audio-Visual devices of each type and candela rating installed
2.
1
Smoke detector of each type installed
3.
1
Addressable interface module of each type installed
4.
1
Box of fuses for each fused circuit
C.
Parts List: Furnish a list, in duplicate, of all other parts and accessories which the manufacturer of the system recommends to be stocked for maintenance.
D.
Parts Guarantee: The contractor shall agree to furnish replacement parts at the same price as parts furnished under this contract for a period of 3 years after acceptance of the system, with a maximum inflation rate of 5% yearly not to exceed the parts normal retail price.
KEYS
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 26
Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD
A.
General: Keys and locks for all equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six keys of each type required. All keys shall be CAT 104.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 28 31 00
PAGE 27
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS) Office of the Chief Information Officer
STRUCTURED CABLE PLANT SCOPE OF WORK For The
CSC Laguna Niguel, CA – FDNS 1st Floor IT Service Request Number (ITSR): N/A June 29, 2009
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
2
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
Table of Contents PART 1 – BACKGROUND
3
1.1
3
Background
PART 2 – GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
3
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16
3 3 3 3 4 5 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 8 8
General Requirements Installation Address Period of Performance Regulatory References Copper Cable Installation Copper Cable Specifications Data Fiber Cable Installation Data Fiber Cable Specifications Test and Acceptance Technical Deliverables Contractor Personnel Project Updates Site Cleanup Facility Damage Licenses and Permits Site Access
PART 3 – WARRANTY
8
3.1
8
Warranty
ATTACHMENT A: Specific Site Requirements ATTACHMENT B: Project Summary Page
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
3
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
PART 1 - BACKGROUND 1.1
BACKGROUND The Department of Homeland Security (DHS) U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS) Office of the Chief Information Officer (OCIO) is responsible for management of the structured cable plant for USCIS initiated projects. In addition, OCIO provides Local Area Network (LAN), Wide Area Network (WAN) and cable plant design in accordance with USCIS standards.
PART 2 – GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.1
2.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.
This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to furnishing and installing Telecommunications Cabling.
B.
All cables and related terminations, support and grounding hardware shall be furnished, installed, wired, tested, labeled, and documented by the contractor as detailed in this document and the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard
C.
Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. Installation details, cable routing, if applicable are provided as an attachment to this document.
D.
The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation of this structured cabling system in compliance with the specifications and drawings.
INSTALLATION ADDRESS California Service Center Chet Holifield Federal Building 24000 Avila Road Laguna Niguel, CA 92607
2.3
ESTIMATED PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE The dates given are current at the writing of this SOW. The actual installation dates may deviate from below due to construction schedule changes. The USCIS OCIO Regional Coordinator will report any updates to these dates. 1. The estimated Period of Performance is 06/05/09 – 09/01/09.
2.4
REGULATORY REFERENCES Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
A.
The cabling system described in this document is derived from the recommendations made in recognized telecommunications industry standards. The following documents are incorporated by reference: 1. USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 526-14, Optical Power Loss Measurement of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant – OFSTP-14 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components 5. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.3, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components 6. ANSI/TIA/EIA– 570-B, Residential Telecommunications Cabling Standard 7. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 598, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding 8. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606-A, Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Building 9. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 10. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard 11. BICSI-TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International 12. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA-70), National Electrical Code (NEC) 13. NEMA 250 14. National Electrical Code (NEC) Articles 770 and 800 15. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) (IEEE C 2)
2.5
B.
If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then, as a general principle, the more stringent requirement shall apply. However, in all cases where there appears to be conflict or a specification is not clear to the contractor, the USCIS Regional Coordinator or USCIS Technical Representative must be contacted for clarification.
C.
The contractor will abide by all applicable federal, state, county and local building and safety regulations.
COPPER CABLE INSTALLATION A.
The contractor shall provide, place, terminate, certify and provide required documentation of all Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cables as specified through work assignments under this SOW.
B.
All cable terminations to be installed by technicians certified by the equipment vendor. (Keystone style modular jacks)
C.
Data and Voice Horizontal Cabling need to be of the appropriate color as specified in USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard. The contractor shall provide one 10-foot CAT-6 patch cord for each workstation outlet installed.
D.
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
1. Patch cords should be 8-position 8-conductor manufactured assemblies using stranded cables meeting CAT-6 specifications. 2. Phone line cords are typically provided with end user station equipment, and are not included in this specification. 3. For each drop location, all information outlet terminations shall follow the ANSI/TIA/EIA T568B pin assignments. 4. Workstations to IMO patch cords are to be black in color. E.
The contractor is responsible for installing stranded copper patch cables from the patch panel into the electronic hardware in the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) and Remote Wiring Closet (TR). The patch cords should be of varied lengths to maintain a neat and functional finished product. 1. Patch cords should be 8-position 8-conductor manufactured assemblies using stranded cables meeting CAT-6 specifications. 2. 100% of Data “A” ports will be patched. 3. Provisions should be made to patch approximately 30% of the Data “B” ports. The requirements for Data “B” ports will be determined by the on-site representative. 4. Cables shall be neatly routed and appropriately fastened with Velcro wherever possible at all racks and patch panels, and shall be dressed in a functional and visually pleasing fashion, observing bend radius requirements at all times. 5. MDF and TR patch cords need to be of the appropriate color as specified in this document and the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard. 6. Ty wraps are NOT acceptable for use in any part of the cable plant installation. Velcro shall be utilized.
2.6
F.
Separate patch panels will segregate “Data A” and “Data B” cables. The upper patch panels will be used for “Data A”, only; the lower patch panels will be used for “Data B” only. Patch cables shall meet the same specifications as defined in the Copper Cable Specification Section.
G.
Voice and data at each information outlet shall be identically numbered, where practical (e.g. cable IDs for voice and data shall match at each location).
H.
Cable labels shall conform to the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard.
I.
Ensure that proper cable loops are maintained on every drop as stated in the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard
J.
Additional drops may be requested from the date of award, whereas the USCIS will issue a change request or addendum for any changes, additions or modifications in this scope of work.
COPPER CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
A.
All cable, equipment, and materials shall meet applicable ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A, National Electrical Code (NEC) 770, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802 and Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Verification Program standards.
B.
All cable equipment and materials must be manufactured by facilities that are International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 9001 registered and certified as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8. 9.
10.
11. 12.
2.7
Data cables will be CAT 6. Data cable shall be terminated on CAT 6 compliant patch panels. Voice cables will be CAT 6. Voice cables shall be terminated on CAT 6 compliant patch panels. Four-pair, 100-Ohm, 23-24 American Wire Gauge (AWG). The cable should have contiguous, two-foot segment-length markers printed on the cable jacket. The markings must also show the applicable performance CAT 6 rating, as well as the fire rating of the cable being installed. The finished cable shall be 100% plenum rated in accordance with the requirements of NEC Article 800, UL 444, NFPA 262, (UL 910), and applicable CSA standards. All CAT-6 horizontal cabling must be white in color. (Drop location faceplates shall be white in color or match electrical plate décor.) All data horizontal cross-connects and main cross-connects are to be stranded CAT 6 and blue (A ports) or red (B ports) in color to denote Data connectivity. (CAT 6 jacks at the drop location will match patch cable designation.) All “C” horizontal cross-connects (“C”) and main cross-connect patch cables are to be stranded CAT 6 and white in color to denote Voice connectivity. (CAT 6 jacks at the drop location will match patch cable designation.) If a port on the “C” patch panel is used for data connectivity then use a red patch cable. All copper intra-closet feeds must be grey in color and terminate on appropriate hardware as deemed by USCIS Technical representative outlined in Attachment B.
DATA FIBER CABLE INSTALLATION A.
Fiber optic cable shall be used for all backbone links where applicable.
B.
One 12-strand multimode optical fiber cable shall be installed from the MDF to each TR to provide data backbone connectivity.
C.
All ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.1 requirements for fiber cable installation and termination will be observed.
D.
All strands of each fiber cable shall be terminated at each end of the cable
E.
The fiber will be terminated in a standard rack-mounted fiber optic distribution box.
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
2.8
2.9
F.
All fiber connections in the distribution boxes shall be T568SC.
G.
The contractor is responsible for installing fiber patch cables from the distribution boxes into the electronic hardware in the MDF and each TR.
H.
Fiber patch cords shall be multimode, duplex, 3 meters in length, SC to SC and or SC to LC (Please See USCIS technical representative).
I.
Provisions should be made to patch each TR to the MDF. Two fiber patch cables are therefore required for each TR. One to patch the electronic equipment to the fiber distribution box in the TR and one to patch the electronic equipment to the fiber distribution box in the MDF.
J.
Provisions should be made to supply approximately 30% additional fiber patch cords for future requirements and/or maintenance spares.
DATA FIBER CABLE SPECIFICATIONS A.
All fiber cable shall be 12-strand multimode 62.5x125 μm optical fiber.
B.
All fiber cable shall be of interlocking armor construction eliminating the need for conduit or plenum rated inner duct.
C.
Fiber cable shall be colored orange to denote multimode fiber.
D.
Plenum rated fiber cable is required by the USCIS for backbone cables routed within buildings.
E.
Outside plant fiber cable shall have a water block construction and meet the requirements for compound flow and water penetration.
TEST AND ACCEPTANCE A.
The installation contractor shall complete all testing of the cable plant, under the following criteria: 1. The installation contractor is responsible for providing all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies that are necessary to perform the required testing. (Permanent Link Test Required) 2. All work shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B, NEC 770, and IEEE 802 standard specification quality (as applicable) and will be subject to review and acceptance by the authorized USCIS representatives. 3. Any work that does not meet or exceed these standards will be reported to the contractor who must take immediate action to correct the deficiency at no additional cost to USCIS.
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
2.10
B.
All installed copper cables shall be tested with a Fluke Level III or higher cable tester to certify that the cable conforms to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B requirements.
C.
At the completion of the installation and termination of cable, the contractor will test all cabling as set forth by the applicable standards as specified in this SOW.
D.
Testing shall verify that the final termination of all cabling is operational and meets the operational specifications for each type of wiring as specified in the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standards and this SOW.
E.
The contractor is responsible for replacing any cable that does not pass testing as prescribed by the applicable USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standards and as specified in this SOW.
F.
After the fiber cable has been installed and terminated, the contractor shall test the fiber cable to insure that it will function properly, and that all applicable specifications have been met.
G.
All fiber terminations shall be tested according to the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard.
TECHNICAL DELIVERABLES The contractor shall ensure all documentation meets the requirements, as specified in the ANSI/TIA/EIA 606 Standards. Where a conflict may exist between the ANSI/TIA/EIA 606 and the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard documentation, the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard documentation shall prevail. Contractor shall provide two hardcopies and softcopies of the following to the USCIS OCIO Regional Coordinator and USCIS Technical Representative: 1. Letter of certification from the installing organization. 2. Letters of certification from each installation technician for the appropriate cabling system being installed. 3. Completed Contractor Information Form. 4. Implementation report. 5. Detailed materials list. 6. Cable plant test certification letter. 7. Electronic copper cable test results (soft copy only) in Fluke Networks Linkware format (.flw). (Full plot data). See USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard for an example. 8. Electronic Fiber-optic cable test results (soft copy only) in Fluke Networks Linkware format (.flw). (Full plot data). See USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard for an example. 9. Certification summary reports for both fiber-optic and copper cables in csv format. 10. Documentation on Structured Cable Warranty pertaining to site and procedures to claim warranty service. 11. As-built site drawings soft and hard copy. Including a laminated 11 x 17 floor plan with corresponding jack locations in each closet. Hand written documentation not accepted.
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
2.11
2.12
2.13
CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL A.
The contractor will provide a lead technician to be on site at all times while work is in progress.
B.
For continuity and logistics, the USCIS recommends that the same lead technician oversee this project from inception through completion.
C.
All cable terminations need to be performed by a certified installer for the appropriate cabling system being installed.
D.
The contractor shall be certified by the Structured Cabling Vendor in order that the final installation be certified in accordance with the Vendors warranty requirements.
PROJECT UPDATES A.
If requested by the USCIS On-Site Representative, the contractor’s lead technician will provide a daily verbal briefing. This briefing will include, but is not limited to, work status, milestone status, and any issues.
B.
The contractor will be required to participate in an End of Project Conference Call. The contractor’s Project Manager and Lead Technician will participate. The conference call will be scheduled by the Regional Coordinator and will take place approximately two days prior to the contractor leaving the site. The objective of the conference call will be to confirm that all parties agree that the job is complete according to this Statement of Work and the CIS Structured Cabling Standard and to address any issues that were not previously identified.
SITE CLEANUP The contractor is responsible for coordination with the site general contractor or property/facility management contractor for the removal of all debris resulting from the work being performed by the contractor on a daily basis.
2.14
FACILITY DAMAGE The contractor is responsible for any damage incurred while in the process of performing work including, but not limited to, damaged voice and/or data hardware, damaged ceiling tiles and walls, and scratched furniture. Any damage should be reported immediately to USCIS technical representative.
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
2.15
2.16
LICENSES AND PERMITS A.
The contractor is responsible for acquiring any and all permits as required.
B.
The contractor is responsible for maintaining all required federal and local licenses and privilege permits.
SITE ACCESS The contractor is responsible for coordinating with the USCIS on-site representative or the general contractor for site access privileges and required individual safety training.
PART 3 – WARRANTY 3.1
WARRANTY A.
The warranty shall cover the failure of the cable plant system to support current or future applications that are designed for the link/channel specifications of TIA/EIA568-B.
B.
A minimum fifteen (15) year warranty covering application assurance, product, cable, and labor.
C.
Warranty needs to allow USCIS designated personnel to connect end user equipment without going through a certified contractor.
D.
Warranty needs to allow for new cable plant additions by the same contractor or by another certified contractor of the installed vendor’s equipment.
E.
The warranty needs to be guaranteed by the hardware vendor not the installation contractor.
F.
If a warranty claim is initiated, USCIS reserves the right to authorize certified installation contractors permission to fix the cable plant. In the event that the installation contractor is denied access then the hardware vendor will provide another certified installation contractor for approval. This process will continue until the cable plant issues are resolved.
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
Attachment A Specific Site Requirements 1. The provided Scope of Work includes the installation of Category 6 horizontal cabling as specified in the above standard. The proposal submitted MUST include a cable plant installation and solution to meet the provided requirements. The manufacturer of the conductivity hardware is responsible for the warranty of the complete installation. The proposed cable plant solution must meet the minimum 15-year application assurance warranty to include product, cable, etc. and labor. 2. Provide a component (material) list of the items included in the submitted proposal. This document will be used when reviewing the proposal to clarify that all of the requested items have been included. Also provided a description of the cable plant solution proposed, channel solution, warranty details meeting the specified criteria and certification from manufacturer of conductivity hardware, which will warranty complete installation. 3. Provide and install data and voice copper cabling to 70 drops locations. (67 quad & 3 voice only wall phones) * HSDN requirements list separately below in section. 4. Estimate of 20’ of 18” ladder cable runway shall be installed in RWC / Telecommunication Room. (For ladder cable runway use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. Universal Cable Runway 10250-718 or equiv. and Radius Bend 10723-718 or equiv. with associated mounting and installation products, butt splices, corner and mounting brackets, etc.) 5. Provide and install one (1) standard 7’ x 19” two post rack with 10” vertical (front & rear combo) wire management in the RWC / Telecommunication Room. (For equipment rack use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 55053-703 or equiv. and for 10” vertical management with hinged covers use CPI 30096-703 or equiv.) 6. Provide and install one (1) single-sided shelf in the Telecommunication Room equipment rack. (For single-sided shelf use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 40074-700 or equiv.) 7. Provide and install two (2) 20 amp Power Distribution Units with 6’ in the Training Switch / Rack Room equipment rack. (For PDU unit use Wiremold R5BZ20-15 or equiv.) 8. The equipment racks require 2U & 1U horizontal wire management with hinged covers as specified in elevation drawings with quantities. Total quantity: 8 (2U) & 2 (1U) (For horizontal management use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 30530-719 & 30529-719 or equiv.) * Additional wire management assemblies have been added to the provided total which are not displayed in the below Visio elevation drawings. 9. The horizontal cabling for the modular furniture assemblies will be routed in a provided power / communication pole or conduit raceway system within a wall or column installed by the electrical contractor. * Please note that sufficient cable length should be installed at these locations to accommodate routing through the modular furniture assemblies for termination. Provide components (loom tubing, spiral wrap, etc.) for the transition from the wall or column into the furniture assemblies. 10. The installation dates for modular furniture will need to be coordinated with the construction schedule and onsite representative. 11. All horizontal cabling routed through ceiling space to the designated RWC / Telecommunication Room. Horizontal cabling shall be supported by J-hooks staggered approximately within four feet (4’) on center (max. distance of 5’ spacing). Use Caddy CAT64, 32, 21 and 12 or equiv. for horizontal cabling support. Leave 20% capacity in Jhooks for future growth. 12. Install sixty-seven (67) Category 6 triplex data and voice cables within the FDNS space. Terminate the cables on 48 port performance compliant 2U patch panels for “A”, “B” and “C” locations in the Telecommunication Room equipment rack. (Total quantity: 6 – 48 port patch panels)
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
13. Install and terminate three (3) Category 6 single voice cables (wall phones) on a 24 port performance compliant 1U patch panel for “W” locations (Wall) in the Telecommunication Room equipment rack. (Total quantity: 1 – 24 port patch panel) 14. One (1) - 100 pair plenum CAT 3 cable to be installed between RWC / Telecommunication Room and the CSC PBX / Voice Closet on the 2nd floor and terminated on a two (2) - 48 port patch panels for voice cross-connect between closets. (center pins 4 & 5 - white / blue & blue / white) (Total quantity: 2 – 48 port patch panels & 1 – 110FT) 15. One (1) - 12-strand armored plenum multimode 62.5x125 μm optical fiber cable to be installed and terminated with SC connectors on SC duplex panels between RWC / Telecommunication Room and the Server / Computer Room on the 2nd floor. Provide one (1) 1U enclosure for fiber optic terminations in the Server / Computer Room and one (1) 1U enclosure in the Telecommunication Room equipment rack. * Please see the onsite contact for the exact locations and preferred routing of fiber optic backbone cabling. 16. Provide the listed fiber optic jumpers. SC – LC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 3M in length - Quantity: 2; SC – LC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 15M in length Quantity: 2; SC – SC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 15M in length - Quantity: 2; SC – SC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 3M in length - Quantity: 2. 17. All equipment hardware mounted in racks and cabinet must utilize concealed routing for both vertical and horizontal cable management to provide a clean patching environment. * Please provide manufacture specific patch cables for channel performance with solution installation. Patch cable quantity: 100% - “A” 40 (7’ blue) & 40 (5’ blue), 30% - “B” ports 20 (5’ red), 100% - “C” ports 80 (5’ white) at the equipment rack and 100 (10’ black) for the drop location. Also provided the list of spare patch cables for additional equipment connections: 20 (25’ black) 18. Installer contractor is responsible for providing labeled patch cables. This is for identification of patch cables routed in the Telecommunication Room. The number labeling sequence should be consecutive, 0001 – 1000, with duplications for both ends. * Please see the on-site contact regarding labeling and identification which may be different than the listed sequence. 19. See Attachment C (Visio drawings – separate PDF File) for the closet elevations and layouts for the equipment racks, cabinets, cable runway, patch panel, wire management, quantities, etc. NOTE: Additional components may be specified in the above details that are not shown in the Visio elevation or layout drawings. The provided elevation layouts for components and the positioning are critical for the deployment of equipment hardware. 20. Installation contractor is required to sleeve for horizontal cabling for wall penetrations that are not provided by the electrical contractor. 21. Fire stopping of all horizontal penetrations is required by the installer contractor and must meet specifications, UL ratings and installation requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B, NFPA, ASTM, and NEC, local and state codes. 22. Grounding / bonding of equipment racks, ladder tray, etc. is required to the provided TMGB, TGB, etc. or equivalent by the electrical contractor. Please reference standards and manufacturer requirements for installation. 23. Identification for the labeling of the telecommunication closets and cable #’s will be clarified prior to installation of cable plant. 24. Installer contractor is responsible for installing network hardware and PDU units in the equipment racks and routing of patch cables in the vertical and horizontal wire management.) 25. Network Electronics, UPS and PBX (Phone system) are not included in this S.O.W. 26. Utilize Velcro fasteners for cable plant installation. Tie wraps are not acceptable for any application of the installation. Provide two (2) Panduit HLS-75R0 or equivalent - ¾” x 75’ roll of Velcro separately for patch cable installation.)
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
27. Installer contractor is responsible for removing the abandoned cables within the space back to the place of termination (ex. telecom closet). Place blank cover plates on the existing wall outlets which are not utilized. *Please see the on-site contact regarding questions in the identification of these cables. 28. IMPORTANT NOTE: The special requirements listed below are for the HSD Network slotted for the FDNS space. 29. One (1) - 6-strand armored plenum multimode 62.5x125 μm optical fiber cable to be installed and terminated with SC connectors on a SC duplex panel between FDNS / HSDN Secure Room and the Server / Computer Room on the 2nd floor. Provide one (1) 1U enclosure for fiber optic terminations in the Server / Computer Room and one (1) wallmount enclosure in the HSDN Secure Room, which will be mounted below ceiling on the back wall. * Please see the on-site contact for the exact locations and preferred routing of fiber optic backbone cabling. 30. Install a total of six (6) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color) in the EMT conduit raceway system installed within the wall space of the HDSN secure space. The six (6) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color) will originate from the single-gang, flush mount box and will be routed to three (3) different locations within the Secure Room space. Terminate the six (6) Category 6 modules (gray in color) into the one 6-port flush mount, single-gang plate. These six (6) Category 6 UTP plenum cables are point to point within the room only and do not utilize patch panels or incorporate the star topology. 31. Install two (2) Category 6 UTP plenum cable (white in color) into the three (3) open wall mount boxes. Terminate a Category 6 module (gray in color) in 2-port flush mount, single-gang covers at the three (3) locations. 32. Identify the cables in the wall boxes and label the faceplates with #1 - #6 for identification of the six (6) point to point cables. 33. Install a total of two (2) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color) from the HSDN Secure Room space to the Telecommunications Closet. The two (2) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color) will be utilized for the required POTS line for the HSD Network. Leave the cables un-terminated at both ends and label accordingly and to and from point to point locations for identification. These cables will be terminated be the service provider during the circuit installation and extension. 34. Provide Category 6 UTP patch cables (gray in color) in 10’ in length. Quantity: 6 (for wall to computer connection) 35. Provide Category 6 UTP patch cables (gray in color) in 20’ in length. Quantity: 6 (for HSDN switch connection into cabinet) These patch cables will routed into the cabinet and plugged directly into the network switch providing the HSDN connection to the point to point locations installed. 36. Provide SC – LC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 3M in length. Quantity: 2 37. Provide SC – SC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 2M in length. Quantity: 2 38. Please note that the HSD Network shall be installed separately from standard network drop locations and shall NOT share conduit raceways, etc. A distance of approximately 24” should separate outlets and termination points per security standard requirements.
* The above provides only the necessary fiber optic and copper cabling, patch cables and fiber optic jumpers to support the network connection requirements for the HSD Network deployment. All network equipment, cabinet, router, UPS and PDU units, etc. are items which are not included in this S.O.W. and are provided by others.
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
Attachment B Project Summary Page
Site Specific Information Site name: Chet Holifield Federal Building Address 1: 24000 Avila Road Address 2: 1st Floor
ITSR number: N/A Project name: FDNS Security requirements: Existing Facility Period of performance: 06/05/09 - 09/01/09 Installation Dates: 07/15/09 - 09/01/09
City, State: Lagune Niguel, CA Zip code: 92607
Points Of Contact USCIS OCIO Regional Coordinator USCIS Technical Representative Name: Mile Manning Name: Gary Chambers Voice: 802-872-4625 Voice: 802-872-4160 Cell: 802-839-9218 Cell: 802-399-5011 E-Mail:
[email protected] E-Mail:
[email protected] Cable Installation Requirements Cable type: CAT 6 Data Patch panel: NEW Voice Patch panel: New Patch Panel Estimated cable pull length: T.B.D. Cable tray installed? N/A
Rack: Add New Rack(s) Number of rack(s) needed: 1 Cabinet: N/A Number of cabinet(s) needed: 0 J hooks required? Yes
Drop Specifics Dual Data/Dual Voice: Dual Data/Single Voice: 67 Dual Data/No Voice: 3 (HSDN Build-out only) No Data/Dual Voice: Data (6) HSDN: 1 (HSDN Build-out only)
Quad Data/Dual Voice: Quad Data/No Voice: No Data/Single Voice: Wall Mount Phones: 3 Total Drops: 70
* Please provide a Unit Price Cost for the installation of a triplex drop and single voice wall phone outlet for additional locations for layout design. Unit Price for Additional Triplex Drop = $ Unit Price for Additional Single Voice Drop = $
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
Attachment C
Telecommunication Room Layout
See attached closet layouts and elevations for the above S.O.W. • •
RWC / Telecommunication Room Elevation / 1st Floor RWC / Telecommunication Room Layout / 1st Floor
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
Department of Homeland Security U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
Attachment D
Proposed FDNS Floor Layout
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
C-1
Version B
st
Emergency Shutdown Button with protective cover to prevent accidental hit
W
FRONT 7'-9"
CR
D
L5 20R
3'-1"
4'-3"
L5 20R
3'-3" 10'-3"
8'-0" 18'-3"
0 ft.
1 ft. 2.4 in. 2 ft.
4 ft.
8'-9"
3'-0"
Wall Phone 54" AFF
st Total Drops 67 2D/1V 3 Wall Phones
12 6
8 9
10 11
2 3
RWC 4 5
7 1
Comp Room 152 sqft
45
44
43
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ORTRONICS
42
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
C A T 5
41
ORTRONICS
40
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
C A T 5
39
38
37
36
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ORTRONICS
35
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
C A T 5
34
33
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ORTRONICS
31
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
C A T 5
30
29 Catalyst 3750 SERIES 1
SYST RPS MASTR STAT DUPLX SPEED STACK MODE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
12
11
13
14
16
15
17
1X
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
15X 17X
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
39
42
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
31X 33X
47X
1
3
2
4
28 2X
16X 18X
32X 34X
48X
27
26 Catalyst 3750 SERIES 1
SYST RPS MASTR STAT DUPLX SPEED STACK MODE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
12
11
13
14
16
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
39
42
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
1X
15X 17X
31X 33X
47X
2X
16X 18X
32X 34X
48X
1
3
2
4
25
24
23
22
21
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ORTRONICS
19 25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
C A T 5
18
ORTRONICS
17 25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
C A T 5
16
15
14
13
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
23
24
12
5
6
7
8
9
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
ORTRONICS
11 25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
C A T 5
10
9
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
6
-20R 3 0
0V
4
-20 R 3 0
A
A
L5
3
L5
M
-20 R 3 0
-25 A
A
L5
A
A NE
L5
M
A
-2 A
50V
NEM
-20 R 3 0
0V
NE
-2 A
50V
M
-2 A
- 25 A
L5
0V
-20R 3 0
- 25 A
L5
-20R 3 0
5
5 0V
NE
N EM
NEM
ORTRONICS
7 C A T 5
2 AVR Trim
Smart-UPS
I Test
O n Line
2 2 0 0
Overlo ad
On Batte ry
O
Load AVR Boost
B attery Char ge Repl ace Battery
1 w w w. a p cc. c om
Wall Phone Patch Panel
